Foreword Connection conditions 1 Operator panel front: OP 08T 2 Operator panel front: OP 010 3 Operator panel front: OP 010S 4 Operator panel front: OP 010C 5 Operator panel front: OP 012 6 Operator panel front: OP 012T 7 Operator panel front: TP 012 8 Operator panel front: OP 015 9 Operator panel front: OP 015A 10 Operator panel front: TP 015A 11 Operator panel front: OP 015AT 12 Operator panel front: TP 015AT 13 Operator panel 15" TFT with VLE 14 SINUMERIK 840D/840DE SINUMERIK 840Di/840DiE SINUMERIK 810D/810DE Operator panel 15" TFT without VLE 15 07/2007 Direct control key module 16 PCU 20 17 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components Manual Valid for control 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 PCU 50 18 PCU 50.3 19 PCU 70 20 Videolink (VL) 21 Thin Client Unit (TCU) 22 Handheld Terminal HT 6 23 Handheld Terminal HT 8 24 Mini handheld unit 25 Handheld unit / distributor box 26 Machine control panel: MCP 483C 27 Machine control panel: MCP 483 28 Machine control panel: MCP 310 29 Machine control panel: OP 032S 30 Machine Pushbutton Panel: MPP 483 31 Pushbutton panel: PP 012 32 MPI interface for customer operator panel 33 Electronic handwheels 34 Full CNC keyboard: KB 483C 35 Full CNC keyboard: KB 310C 36 Full CNC keyboard: OP 032S 37 Standard PC keyboard KBPC PX US 38 Standard PC keyboard KBPC CG US 39 Standard PC keyboard KBPC USB US 40 Standard PC keyboard KBPC SC US 41 Keyboard tray 42 Compact FlashCard 43 3.5" Floppy Disk Drive 44 Floppy disk drive 3.5" (USB) 45 Card reader with USB interface 46 Cooling 47 ESD guidelines A List of abbreviations B Appendix C Safety Guidelines This manual contains notices you have to observe in order to ensure your personal safety, as well as to prevent damage to property. The notices referring to your personal safety are highlighted in the manual by a safety alert symbol, notices referring only to property damage have no safety alert symbol. These notices shown below are graded according to the degree of danger. DANGER indicates that death or severe personal injury will result if proper precautions are not taken. WARNING indicates that death or severe personal injury may result if proper precautions are not taken. CAUTION with a safety alert symbol, indicates that minor personal injury can result if proper precautions are not taken. CAUTION without a safety alert symbol, indicates that property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken. NOTICE indicates that an unintended result or situation can occur if the corresponding information is not taken into account. If more than one degree of danger is present, the warning notice representing the highest degree of danger will be used. A notice warning of injury to persons with a safety alert symbol may also include a warning relating to property damage. Qualified Personnel The device/system may only be set up and used in conjunction with this documentation. Commissioning and operation of a device/system may only be performed by qualified personnel. Within the context of the safety notes in this documentation qualified persons are defined as persons who are authorized to commission, ground and label devices, systems and circuits in accordance with established safety practices and standards. Prescribed Usage Note the following: WARNING This device may only be used for the applications described in the catalog or the technical description and only in connection with devices or components from other manufacturers which have been approved or recommended by Siemens. Correct, reliable operation of the product requires proper transport, storage, positioning and assembly as well as careful operation and maintenance. Trademarks All names identified by (R) are registered trademarks of the Siemens AG. The remaining trademarks in this publication may be trademarks whose use by third parties for their own purposes could violate the rights of the owner. Disclaimer of Liability We have reviewed the contents of this publication to ensure consistency with the hardware and software described. Since variance cannot be precluded entirely, we cannot guarantee full consistency. However, the information in this publication is reviewed regularly and any necessary corrections are included in subsequent editions. Siemens AG Automation and Drives Postfach 48 48 90327 NURNBERG GERMANY Ordernumber: 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 08/2007 Copyright (c) Siemens AG 2007. Technical data subject to change Foreword Layout of manual SINUMERIK(R) Documentation The SINUMERIK documentation is organized in three parts: General documentation User documentation Manufacturer/service documentation An overview of publications, which is updated monthly and also provides information about the language versions available, can be found on the Internet at: http://www.siemens.com/motioncontrol Select "Support" "Technical Documentation" "Overview of Publications". The Internet version of DOConCD (DOConWEB) is available under: http://www.automation.siemens.com/doconweb Information on training courses and FAQs (frequently asked questions) can be found on the Internet at: http://www.siemens.com/motioncontrol under menu option "Support". Target group This documentation is intended for: Project engineers, electricians and installers Service and operating personnel Standard version This documentation only describes the functionality of the standard version. Any additions or modifications implemented by the machine manufacturer will be documented by the machine manufacturer. Other functions not described in this documentation may be executable in the control. However, no claim can be made regarding the availability of these functions when the equipment is first supplied or in the event of servicing. For the sake of simplicity, this documentation does not contain all detailed information about all types of the product and cannot cover every conceivable case of installation, operation, or maintenance. Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 7 Foreword Technical Support If you have any technical questions, please contact our hotline: Europe/Africa Asia/Australia America Phone +49 180 5050 222 +86 1064 719 990 +1 423 262 2522 Fax +49 180 5050 223 +86 1064 747 474 +1 423 262 2289 Internet http://www.siemens.com/automation/support-request E-mail adsupport@siemens.com Note Country-specific telephone numbers for technical support are provided at the following Internet address: Enter http://www.siemens.com/automation/service&support Questions about the manual If you have any queries (suggestions, corrections) in relation to this documentation, please send a fax or e-mail to the following address: Fax +49 9131 98 63315 E-mail docu.motioncontrol@siemens.com A fax form is available in the appendix of this document. SINUMERIK Internet address http://www.siemens.com/sinumerik EC declaration of conformity The EC Declaration of Conformity for the EMC Directive can be found/obtained from: on the Internet: http://support.automation.siemens.com under the Product/Order No. 15257461 or at the relevant branch office of the A&D MC division of Siemens AG. 8 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Foreword Notes Danger notices The following notices are intended to ensure both your personal safety and to prevent damage occurring to the products described or any connected devices and machines. WARNING Operating electrical equipment has parts and components that are at hazardous voltage levels. Actions by an unqualified device/system operator or failure to observe the warning notices may result in serious physical injury or material damage. Only suitably qualified personnel, trained in assembling, installing, commissioning or operating the product should work on this device/system. Should it be necessary to test or take measurements on live equipment, then the specifications and procedures defined in Accident Prevention Regulation VBG 4.0 must be adhered to, in particular 8 "Permissible deviations when working on live components". Suitable electric tools should be used. WARNING Repairs to devices that have been supplied by our company must only be carried out by SIEMENS Customer Service or by repair centers authorized by SIEMENS. When replacing parts or components, only use those parts that are included in the spare parts list. Before opening the device, always disconnect the power supply. EMERGENCY STOP devices complying with EN 60204 IEC 204 (VDE 0113) must remain effective in all automation equipment modes. Resetting the EMERGENCY STOP device must not cause an uncontrolled or undefined restart. Additional external measures must be taken, or devices must be created that enforce a safe operational state even when there is a fault (e.g. using independent limit value switches, mechanical locks, etc.) at any location in the automation equipment where faults might cause major material damage or even physical injury, in other words, where faults could be dangerous. CAUTION Connecting cables and signal lines should be installed so that inductive and capacitive interference do not in any way impair the automation functions. Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 9 Foreword General Information Note Denotes an important item of information about the product, handling of the product or a section of the documentation which requires particular attention. Machine manufacturer This pictorial symbol always appears in this document to indicate that the machine manufacturer can affect or modify the function described. Observe the machine manufacturer's specifications. 10 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Table of contents Foreword ................................................................................................................................................... 7 1 2 3 Connection conditions ............................................................................................................................. 29 1.1 1.1.1 1.1.2 1.1.3 1.1.4 1.1.5 1.1.6 1.1.7 1.1.8 Secondary electrical conditions ...................................................................................................29 Prerequisites ................................................................................................................................29 Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC)...........................................................................................30 Power supply................................................................................................................................31 Safe isolation to EN 61800-5-1 ....................................................................................................32 Grounding concept.......................................................................................................................33 RI suppression measures ............................................................................................................35 Pin assignment of the interfaces..................................................................................................36 Handling membrane connectors ..................................................................................................46 1.2 1.2.1 1.2.2 1.2.3 Ambient climatic and mechanical conditions ...............................................................................47 Relevant standards ......................................................................................................................47 Transport and storage conditions ................................................................................................47 Operating conditions ....................................................................................................................49 1.3 MPI/OPI networking rules ............................................................................................................49 Operator panel front: OP 08T .................................................................................................................. 53 2.1 Description ...................................................................................................................................53 2.2 2.2.1 2.2.2 2.2.3 Operator controls and display elements ......................................................................................55 View .............................................................................................................................................55 Keyboard and display ..................................................................................................................56 Screen brightness control ............................................................................................................57 2.3 Interfaces .....................................................................................................................................59 2.4 Installation ....................................................................................................................................60 2.5 Technical data..............................................................................................................................62 2.6 Spare parts...................................................................................................................................63 2.7 2.7.1 2.7.2 Accessories..................................................................................................................................64 Overview ......................................................................................................................................64 Membrane keyboard: Labeling the slide-in labels .......................................................................64 Operator panel front: OP 010................................................................................................................... 69 3.1 Description ...................................................................................................................................69 3.2 3.2.1 3.2.2 3.2.3 Operator controls and indicators..................................................................................................70 View .............................................................................................................................................70 Keyboard and display ..................................................................................................................71 Screen saver ................................................................................................................................72 3.3 Interfaces .....................................................................................................................................73 3.4 3.4.1 Mounting ......................................................................................................................................74 Preparation for mounting .............................................................................................................74 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 11 Table of contents 4 5 6 12 3.4.2 3.4.3 3.4.4 Assembling an OP 010 and a PCU............................................................................................. 76 Mounting on the mounting wall ................................................................................................... 76 Softkey labeling........................................................................................................................... 76 3.5 Technical specifications .............................................................................................................. 77 3.6 3.6.1 3.6.2 Replacement parts ...................................................................................................................... 80 Overview ..................................................................................................................................... 80 Replacement ............................................................................................................................... 81 Operator panel front: OP 010S ................................................................................................................ 85 4.1 Description .................................................................................................................................. 85 4.2 4.2.1 4.2.2 4.2.3 Operator controls and indicators................................................................................................. 86 View............................................................................................................................................. 86 Keyboard and display.................................................................................................................. 87 Screen saver ............................................................................................................................... 87 4.3 Interfaces..................................................................................................................................... 88 4.4 4.4.1 4.4.2 4.4.3 Mounting...................................................................................................................................... 90 Preparation for mounting............................................................................................................. 90 Mounting on the mounting wall ................................................................................................... 91 Assembling an OP 010S and a PCU .......................................................................................... 91 4.5 Technical specifications .............................................................................................................. 94 4.6 4.6.1 4.6.2 Replacement parts ...................................................................................................................... 96 Overview ..................................................................................................................................... 96 Replacement ............................................................................................................................... 97 Operator panel front: OP 010C ................................................................................................................ 99 5.1 Description .................................................................................................................................. 99 5.2 5.2.1 5.2.2 5.2.3 Operator controls and indicators............................................................................................... 100 View........................................................................................................................................... 100 Keyboard and display................................................................................................................ 101 Screen saver ............................................................................................................................. 102 5.3 Interfaces................................................................................................................................... 103 5.4 5.4.1 5.4.2 5.4.3 Mounting.................................................................................................................................... 105 Preparation for mounting........................................................................................................... 105 Assembling an OP 010C and a PCU ........................................................................................ 106 Mounting on the mounting wall ................................................................................................. 106 5.5 Technical specifications ............................................................................................................ 108 5.6 5.6.1 5.6.2 Replacement parts .................................................................................................................... 110 Overview ................................................................................................................................... 110 Replacement ............................................................................................................................. 111 Operator panel front: OP 012................................................................................................................. 113 6.1 Description ................................................................................................................................ 113 6.2 6.2.1 6.2.2 6.2.3 Operator controls and indicators............................................................................................... 114 View........................................................................................................................................... 114 Keyboard and display................................................................................................................ 115 Screen saver ............................................................................................................................. 116 6.3 Interfaces................................................................................................................................... 117 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Table of contents 7 8 9 6.4 6.4.1 6.4.2 6.4.3 6.4.4 Mounting ....................................................................................................................................119 Preparation for mounting ...........................................................................................................110 Assembling an OP 012 and a PCU ...........................................................................................120 Mounting on the mounting wall ..................................................................................................123 Softkey labeling..........................................................................................................................124 6.5 Technical specifications .............................................................................................................125 6.6 6.6.1 6.6.2 Replacement parts.....................................................................................................................127 Overview ....................................................................................................................................127 Replacement ..............................................................................................................................128 Operator panel front: OP 012T .............................................................................................................. 131 7.1 Description .................................................................................................................................131 7.2 7.2.1 7.2.2 7.2.3 Operator controls and indicators................................................................................................133 View ...........................................................................................................................................133 Keyboard and display ................................................................................................................134 Screen saver ..............................................................................................................................135 7.3 Interfaces ...................................................................................................................................136 7.4 7.4.1 7.4.2 7.4.3 Mounting ....................................................................................................................................137 Preparation for mounting ...........................................................................................................137 Mounting on the mounting wall ..................................................................................................138 Direct control key module connection........................................................................................139 7.5 Technical data............................................................................................................................140 7.6 Spare parts.................................................................................................................................141 7.7 Accessories................................................................................................................................142 Operator panel front: TP 012 ................................................................................................................. 143 8.1 Description .................................................................................................................................143 8.2 8.2.1 8.2.2 8.2.3 Operator controls and indicators................................................................................................144 View ...........................................................................................................................................144 Operation ...................................................................................................................................144 Screen saver ..............................................................................................................................145 8.3 Interfaces ...................................................................................................................................146 8.4 8.4.1 8.4.2 8.4.3 8.4.4 Mounting ....................................................................................................................................147 Preparation for mounting ...........................................................................................................147 Assembling the TP 012 and PCU ..............................................................................................148 Mounting on the mounting wall ..................................................................................................148 Calibration of the touch screen ..................................................................................................149 8.5 Technical specifications .............................................................................................................150 8.6 8.6.1 8.6.2 Replacement parts.....................................................................................................................152 Overview ....................................................................................................................................152 replacement ...............................................................................................................................153 Operator panel front: OP 015................................................................................................................. 155 9.1 Description .................................................................................................................................155 9.2 9.2.1 9.2.2 9.2.3 Operator controls and indicators................................................................................................156 View ...........................................................................................................................................156 Keyboard and display ................................................................................................................157 Screen saver ..............................................................................................................................157 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 13 Table of contents 10 11 12 9.3 Interfaces................................................................................................................................... 158 9.4 9.4.1 9.4.2 9.4.3 Mounting.................................................................................................................................... 159 Preparation for mounting........................................................................................................... 159 Assembling an OP 015 and a PCU........................................................................................... 160 Mounting on the mounting wall ................................................................................................. 160 9.5 Technical specifications ............................................................................................................ 162 9.6 9.6.1 9.6.2 Replacement parts .................................................................................................................... 164 Overview ................................................................................................................................... 164 Replacement ............................................................................................................................. 165 Operator panel front: OP 015A .............................................................................................................. 167 10.1 Description ................................................................................................................................ 167 10.2 10.2.1 10.2.2 10.2.3 Operator controls and indicators............................................................................................... 168 View........................................................................................................................................... 168 Keyboard and display................................................................................................................ 169 Screen saver ............................................................................................................................. 170 10.3 Interfaces................................................................................................................................... 171 10.4 10.4.1 10.4.2 10.4.3 10.4.4 Mounting.................................................................................................................................... 172 Preparation for mounting........................................................................................................... 172 Assembling an OP 015A and a PCU ........................................................................................ 173 Mounting on the mounting wall ................................................................................................. 175 Softkey labeling......................................................................................................................... 176 10.5 Technical specifications ............................................................................................................ 177 10.6 10.6.1 10.6.2 Spare parts................................................................................................................................ 179 Overview ................................................................................................................................... 179 Replacement ............................................................................................................................. 180 Operator panel front: TP 015A............................................................................................................... 189 11.1 Description ................................................................................................................................ 190 11.2 11.2.1 11.2.2 11.2.3 11.2.4 Operator controls and indicators............................................................................................... 190 View........................................................................................................................................... 190 Operation................................................................................................................................... 191 Keyboard and display................................................................................................................ 191 Screen saver ............................................................................................................................. 193 11.3 interfaces................................................................................................................................... 194 11.4 11.4.1 11.4.2 11.4.3 11.4.4 11.4.5 Mounting.................................................................................................................................... 196 Preparation for mounting........................................................................................................... 196 Assembling TP 015A and PCU................................................................................................. 197 Mounting on the mounting wall ................................................................................................. 199 Calibration of the touch screen ................................................................................................. 200 Softkey labeling......................................................................................................................... 200 11.5 Technical specifications ............................................................................................................ 201 11.6 11.6.1 11.6.2 Spare parts................................................................................................................................ 203 Overview ................................................................................................................................... 203 Replacement ............................................................................................................................. 204 Operator panel front: OP 015AT ............................................................................................................ 215 12.1 14 Description ................................................................................................................................ 215 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Table of contents 13 14 12.2 12.2.1 12.2.2 12.2.3 Operator controls and display elements ....................................................................................217 View ...........................................................................................................................................217 Keyboard and display ................................................................................................................218 Screen saver ..............................................................................................................................219 12.3 12.3.1 12.3.2 Interfaces ...................................................................................................................................220 Overview ....................................................................................................................................220 Description .................................................................................................................................221 12.4 12.4.1 12.4.2 Assembly....................................................................................................................................223 Mounting ....................................................................................................................................223 Softkey labeling..........................................................................................................................224 12.5 Technical data............................................................................................................................225 12.6 12.6.1 12.6.2 Spare parts.................................................................................................................................226 Overview ....................................................................................................................................226 Replacement ..............................................................................................................................227 Operator panel front: TP 015AT............................................................................................................. 235 13.1 Description .................................................................................................................................235 13.2 13.2.1 13.2.2 13.2.3 13.2.4 Operator controls and display elements ....................................................................................237 View ...........................................................................................................................................237 Operation ...................................................................................................................................238 Keyboard and display ................................................................................................................238 Screen saver ..............................................................................................................................240 13.3 13.3.1 13.3.2 Interfaces ...................................................................................................................................241 Overview ....................................................................................................................................241 Description .................................................................................................................................242 13.4 13.4.1 13.4.2 13.4.3 Assembly....................................................................................................................................244 Mounting ....................................................................................................................................244 Touchscreen calibration.............................................................................................................245 Softkey labeling..........................................................................................................................245 13.5 Technical data............................................................................................................................247 13.6 13.6.1 13.6.2 Spare parts.................................................................................................................................248 Overview ....................................................................................................................................248 Replacement ..............................................................................................................................249 Operator panel 15" TFT with VLE .......................................................................................................... 259 14.1 14.1.1 14.1.2 14.1.3 14.1.4 14.1.4.1 14.1.4.2 14.1.4.3 14.1.4.4 Description .................................................................................................................................259 Validity........................................................................................................................................259 Overview ....................................................................................................................................260 System Features ........................................................................................................................260 Mechanical design .....................................................................................................................262 Operator panel front...................................................................................................................262 Machine control panels ..............................................................................................................264 Videolink transmitter ..................................................................................................................268 Cable..........................................................................................................................................269 14.2 14.2.1 14.2.2 14.2.2.1 14.2.2.2 14.2.2.3 Operator controls and indicators................................................................................................270 View of function blocks ..............................................................................................................270 Description of the function blocks ..............................................................................................271 Operator panel front...................................................................................................................271 Machine control panel for turning and milling ............................................................................272 Videolink transmitter ..................................................................................................................273 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 15 Table of contents 14.2.2.4 Internal operating displays (LEDs)............................................................................................ 274 14.2.3 Screen saver ............................................................................................................................. 275 15 16 14.3 14.3.1 14.3.1.1 14.3.1.2 14.3.1.3 14.3.1.4 14.3.1.5 14.3.2 Interfaces................................................................................................................................... 276 Hardware................................................................................................................................... 276 Overview ................................................................................................................................... 276 Interface assignment for operator panel front ........................................................................... 277 Interface assignment for QWERTY keyboard........................................................................... 280 Interface assignment for MCP .................................................................................................. 182 Interface assignment for videolink transmitter .......................................................................... 284 Software .................................................................................................................................... 288 14.4 14.4.1 14.4.2 14.4.3 Mounting.................................................................................................................................... 290 Operator panel front with videolink receiver.............................................................................. 290 Machine control panel ............................................................................................................... 292 Videolink transmitter.................................................................................................................. 293 14.5 14.5.1 14.5.2 14.5.3 Technical specifications ............................................................................................................ 298 Operator panel front .................................................................................................................. 298 Machine control panel ............................................................................................................... 298 Videolink transmitter.................................................................................................................. 299 14.6 14.6.1 14.6.2 14.6.2.1 14.6.2.2 14.6.2.3 Replacement parts .................................................................................................................... 300 Overview ................................................................................................................................... 300 replacement .............................................................................................................................. 300 Hand wheel ............................................................................................................................... 300 Rotary switch............................................................................................................................. 301 Mouse........................................................................................................................................ 304 Operator panel 15" TFT without VLE ..................................................................................................... 307 15.1 15.1.1 15.1.2 15.1.3 15.1.4 15.1.4.1 15.1.4.2 15.1.4.3 Description ................................................................................................................................ 307 Validity....................................................................................................................................... 307 Overview ................................................................................................................................... 308 System Features ....................................................................................................................... 309 Mechanical design .................................................................................................................... 309 Operator panel front .................................................................................................................. 310 Machine control panels ............................................................................................................. 311 Cable ......................................................................................................................................... 315 15.2 15.2.1 15.2.2 15.2.2.1 15.2.2.2 15.2.3 Operator controls and indicators............................................................................................... 316 View of function blocks.............................................................................................................. 316 Description of the function blocks ............................................................................................. 317 Operator panel front .................................................................................................................. 317 Machine control panel for turning and milling ........................................................................... 317 Screen saver ............................................................................................................................. 318 15.3 15.3.1 15.3.1.1 15.3.1.2 15.3.1.3 15.3.2 Interfaces................................................................................................................................... 319 Hardware................................................................................................................................... 319 Overview ................................................................................................................................... 319 Interface assignment for operator panel front ........................................................................... 319 Interface assignment for MCP .................................................................................................. 320 Software .................................................................................................................................... 322 15.4 Mounting.................................................................................................................................... 323 15.5 15.5.1 15.5.2 Technical specifications ............................................................................................................ 325 Operator panel front .................................................................................................................. 325 Machine control panel ............................................................................................................... 326 15.6 Replacement parts .................................................................................................................... 327 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Table of contents 15.6.1 15.6.2 15.6.2.1 15.6.2.2 15.6.2.3 16 17 18 Overview ....................................................................................................................................327 replacement ...............................................................................................................................327 Hand wheel ................................................................................................................................327 Rotary switch..............................................................................................................................328 Mouse ........................................................................................................................................331 Direct control key module ...................................................................................................................... 333 16.1 Description .................................................................................................................................333 16.2 Operating and display elements ................................................................................................334 16.3 Interfaces ...................................................................................................................................335 16.4 16.4.1 16.4.2 16.4.3 16.4.4 Mounting ....................................................................................................................................337 Overview ....................................................................................................................................337 Combination with OP 012 ..........................................................................................................338 Combination with OP 015A........................................................................................................342 Combination with TP 015A ........................................................................................................345 PCU 20 .................................................................................................................................................. 349 17.1 Description .................................................................................................................................349 17.2 17.2.1 17.2.2 17.2.3 Interfaces ...................................................................................................................................352 Right-hand casing side ..............................................................................................................352 Left-hand casing side.................................................................................................................353 Pin assignment of the interfaces................................................................................................355 17.3 17.3.1 17.3.2 17.3.3 17.3.4 17.3.5 Mounting ....................................................................................................................................356 Preparation for mounting ...........................................................................................................356 Assembly of PCU and operator panel front ...............................................................................356 Notes on installation...................................................................................................................356 Locking the PC card...................................................................................................................357 Strain relief .................................................................................................................................359 17.4 17.4.1 17.4.2 17.4.3 17.4.4 Connectors.................................................................................................................................360 Overview ....................................................................................................................................360 Ground terminal .........................................................................................................................361 I/O devices .................................................................................................................................361 Power Supply .............................................................................................................................361 17.5 Technical specifications .............................................................................................................362 17.6 Accessories................................................................................................................................363 PCU 50 .................................................................................................................................................. 365 18.1 Description .................................................................................................................................365 18.2 18.2.1 18.2.2 18.2.3 18.2.4 Interfaces ...................................................................................................................................368 Right-hand casing side ..............................................................................................................368 Left-hand casing side.................................................................................................................369 Casing rear side .........................................................................................................................370 Pin assignment of the interfaces................................................................................................370 18.3 18.3.1 18.3.2 18.3.3 18.3.4 Mounting ....................................................................................................................................371 Preparation for mounting ...........................................................................................................371 Assembly of PCU and operator panel front ...............................................................................372 Assembling the PCU and videolink transmitter..........................................................................372 Notes on installation...................................................................................................................372 18.4 Connectors.................................................................................................................................374 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 17 Table of contents 19 18 18.4.1 18.4.2 18.4.3 Ground terminal ........................................................................................................................ 374 I/O devices ................................................................................................................................ 374 Power Supply ............................................................................................................................ 375 18.5 18.5.1 18.5.2 18.5.3 18.5.4 18.5.5 Commissioning.......................................................................................................................... 376 Power-up ................................................................................................................................... 376 Changing the............................................................................................................................. 376 Changing the BIOS settings...................................................................................................... 379 Calibration of the touch screen ................................................................................................. 380 Use of PC cards ........................................................................................................................ 382 18.6 Technical specifications ............................................................................................................ 384 18.7 18.7.1 18.7.2 18.7.2.1 18.7.2.2 18.7.2.3 18.7.2.4 Replacement parts .................................................................................................................... 385 Overview ................................................................................................................................... 385 replacement .............................................................................................................................. 385 Hard disk ................................................................................................................................... 385 Power Supply ............................................................................................................................ 387 Device fan ................................................................................................................................. 388 Battery ....................................................................................................................................... 390 18.8 18.8.1 18.8.2 18.8.2.1 18.8.2.2 18.8.2.3 Accessories ............................................................................................................................... 392 Overview ................................................................................................................................... 392 Description of components........................................................................................................ 392 Mounting bracket....................................................................................................................... 392 Memory expansion.................................................................................................................... 393 Expansion boards ..................................................................................................................... 395 PCU 50.3 ............................................................................................................................................... 399 19.1 Description ................................................................................................................................ 399 19.2 Operating and display elements ............................................................................................... 402 19.3 19.3.1 19.3.2 19.3.2.1 19.3.2.2 Interfaces................................................................................................................................... 403 External interfaces .................................................................................................................... 404 Internal interfaces...................................................................................................................... 405 Connector assignment of motherboard..................................................................................... 405 Connector assignment of bus board ......................................................................................... 411 19.4 19.4.1 19.4.2 19.4.3 19.4.4 19.4.5 Mounting.................................................................................................................................... 415 Preparation for mounting........................................................................................................... 415 Assembly of PCU and operator panel front .............................................................................. 419 Notes on installation.................................................................................................................. 420 Mounting the Ethernet tension relief ......................................................................................... 421 Installing the anchor tie ............................................................................................................. 423 19.5 19.5.1 19.5.2 19.5.3 19.5.4 Connectors ................................................................................................................................ 423 Ground terminal ........................................................................................................................ 423 I/O devices ................................................................................................................................ 423 DC power supply (24V) ............................................................................................................. 424 Equipotential ............................................................................................................................. 425 19.6 19.6.1 19.6.2 19.6.3 19.6.4 19.6.5 19.6.5.1 19.6.5.2 Commissioning.......................................................................................................................... 426 Locking / unlocking hard disk.................................................................................................... 426 System start .............................................................................................................................. 427 Switching off / reset................................................................................................................... 427 Calibration of the touch screen ................................................................................................. 428 BIOS.......................................................................................................................................... 430 BIOS powering up ..................................................................................................................... 430 Changing the BIOS settings...................................................................................................... 432 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Table of contents 19.6.5.3 Status display.............................................................................................................................433 20 21 19.7 19.7.1 19.7.2 Technical specifications .............................................................................................................435 PCU 50.3....................................................................................................................................436 DC power supply module of 24 V (integrated)...........................................................................436 19.8 19.8.1 19.8.2 19.8.2.1 19.8.2.2 19.8.2.3 19.8.2.4 19.8.2.5 Replacement parts.....................................................................................................................438 Overview ....................................................................................................................................438 replacement ...............................................................................................................................438 Hard disk drive ...........................................................................................................................438 Power supply..............................................................................................................................439 Power supply module fan...........................................................................................................441 Device fan ..................................................................................................................................442 Battery........................................................................................................................................443 19.9 19.9.1 19.9.2 19.9.2.1 19.9.2.2 19.9.2.3 Accessories................................................................................................................................446 Overview ....................................................................................................................................446 Installing and removing expansion modules..............................................................................447 Memory expansion.....................................................................................................................447 PCI cards ...................................................................................................................................449 CompactFlash card....................................................................................................................452 PCU 70 .................................................................................................................................................. 455 20.1 Description .................................................................................................................................455 20.2 20.2.1 20.2.2 20.2.3 20.2.4 Interfaces ...................................................................................................................................458 Right-hand casing side ..............................................................................................................458 Left-hand casing side.................................................................................................................459 Casing rear side .........................................................................................................................459 Pin assignment of the interfaces................................................................................................459 20.3 Mounting ....................................................................................................................................460 20.4 20.4.1 20.4.2 20.4.3 Connectors.................................................................................................................................461 Ground terminal .........................................................................................................................461 I/O devices .................................................................................................................................461 Power Supply .............................................................................................................................462 20.5 Commissioning...........................................................................................................................463 20.6 Technical specifications .............................................................................................................464 20.7 Replacement parts.....................................................................................................................465 20.8 20.8.1 20.8.2 20.8.2.1 20.8.2.2 20.8.2.3 Accessories................................................................................................................................466 Overview ....................................................................................................................................466 Description of components ........................................................................................................466 External floppy disk drive ...........................................................................................................466 Memory expansion.....................................................................................................................467 Expansion boards ......................................................................................................................467 Videolink (VL) ........................................................................................................................................ 469 21.1 21.1.1 21.1.2 21.1.3 21.1.4 21.1.4.1 21.1.4.2 21.1.4.3 Description .................................................................................................................................469 Validity........................................................................................................................................469 Overview ....................................................................................................................................470 Configurations ............................................................................................................................471 Components...............................................................................................................................474 Overview ....................................................................................................................................474 Videolink receiver.......................................................................................................................475 Videolink transmitter ..................................................................................................................476 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 19 Table of contents 21.1.4.4 Cable ......................................................................................................................................... 477 22 23 20 21.2 21.2.1 21.2.2 21.2.3 Control and monitoring elements .............................................................................................. 479 Videolink transmitter.................................................................................................................. 479 Videolink receiver...................................................................................................................... 480 Operator panel interlock............................................................................................................ 481 21.3 21.3.1 21.3.2 21.3.3 21.3.4 Interfaces................................................................................................................................... 482 Overview ................................................................................................................................... 482 Interface pin assignment for videolink transmitter .................................................................... 483 Interface assignment for videolink receiver............................................................................... 483 Pin assignment of the interfaces............................................................................................... 484 21.4 21.4.1 21.4.1.1 21.4.1.2 21.4.1.3 21.4.2 Mounting.................................................................................................................................... 485 Videolink transmitter to PCU ..................................................................................................... 485 Flat mounting ............................................................................................................................ 485 Upright mounting....................................................................................................................... 490 Central mounting on operator panel front ................................................................................. 492 Videolink receiver on operator panel front ................................................................................ 493 21.5 21.5.1 21.5.2 Connectors ................................................................................................................................ 495 Cable connections..................................................................................................................... 495 Power Supply ............................................................................................................................ 495 21.6 21.6.1 21.6.2 21.6.3 21.6.4 Technical specifications ............................................................................................................ 496 Operator panel front .................................................................................................................. 496 PCU 50 / PCU 70 ...................................................................................................................... 496 Videolink transmitter.................................................................................................................. 496 Videolink receiver...................................................................................................................... 497 Thin Client Unit (TCU) ........................................................................................................................... 499 22.1 22.1.1 22.1.2 Description ................................................................................................................................ 499 Overview ................................................................................................................................... 400 Configurations ........................................................................................................................... 500 22.2 Interfaces................................................................................................................................... 503 22.3 Mounting the TCU on the operator panel front ......................................................................... 505 22.4 Technical data........................................................................................................................... 508 22.5 Accessories ............................................................................................................................... 509 Handheld Terminal HT 6........................................................................................................................ 511 23.1 Description ................................................................................................................................ 511 23.2 23.2.1 23.2.2 Operator controls and indicators............................................................................................... 513 View........................................................................................................................................... 513 Description ................................................................................................................................ 514 23.3 Interfaces................................................................................................................................... 515 23.4 Connectors ................................................................................................................................ 521 23.5 Unplugging/plugging during operation ...................................................................................... 523 23.6 23.6.1 23.6.2 Commissioning.......................................................................................................................... 527 Standard configuration (without MCP) ...................................................................................... 527 Interface signals ........................................................................................................................ 528 23.7 23.7.1 Distributor for handheld unit ...................................................................................................... 531 Overview ................................................................................................................................... 531 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Table of contents 23.7.2 23.7.3 Distributor for 3-core enabling cable (Order No. 6FX2006-1BC01) ..........................................532 Distributor box for 4-core enabling cable (order no. 6FX2006-1BH01).....................................535 23.8 Technical specifications .............................................................................................................539 23.9 23.9.1 23.9.2 23.9.2.1 23.9.2.2 Replacement parts.....................................................................................................................540 Overview ....................................................................................................................................540 replacement ...............................................................................................................................540 Front with keyboard ...................................................................................................................540 Emergency stop button and rotary override switch....................................................................541 23.10 Accessories................................................................................................................................545 23.10.1 Overview ....................................................................................................................................545 23.10.2 Slide-in labels.............................................................................................................................545 23.10.2.1 replacement ...............................................................................................................................545 23.10.2.2 Labeling......................................................................................................................................547 24 25 Handheld Terminal HT 8........................................................................................................................ 549 24.1 Description .................................................................................................................................549 24.2 Unplugging/plugging during operation .......................................................................................551 24.3 Technical specifications .............................................................................................................555 24.4 Spare parts.................................................................................................................................556 24.5 24.5.1 24.5.2 24.5.3 Operator controls and indicators................................................................................................557 View ...........................................................................................................................................557 Description .................................................................................................................................559 Screen brightness control ..........................................................................................................561 24.6 24.6.1 24.6.2 Interfaces ...................................................................................................................................562 Overview ....................................................................................................................................562 Description .................................................................................................................................562 24.7 24.7.1 24.7.2 24.7.3 24.7.4 24.7.5 24.7.5.1 24.7.5.2 24.7.5.3 24.7.5.4 24.7.6 24.7.6.1 24.7.6.2 24.7.6.3 24.7.6.4 Connectors.................................................................................................................................565 Overview ....................................................................................................................................565 MPP 483HTC .............................................................................................................................565 Connecting cable .......................................................................................................................566 Power Supply .............................................................................................................................569 Terminal Box PN ........................................................................................................................570 Features .....................................................................................................................................570 Terminal box Plus PN ................................................................................................................572 Terminal box Basic PN ..............................................................................................................573 Interface assignments................................................................................................................574 Connection module Basic PN ....................................................................................................574 Features .....................................................................................................................................574 Dimension drawing ....................................................................................................................576 Interfaces ...................................................................................................................................577 Installing the dummy plug ..........................................................................................................580 24.8 24.8.1 24.8.2 Accessories................................................................................................................................582 Overview ....................................................................................................................................582 Wall holder .................................................................................................................................582 Mini handheld unit.................................................................................................................................. 585 25.1 Description .................................................................................................................................585 25.2 25.2.1 Operator controls and indicators................................................................................................586 View ...........................................................................................................................................586 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 21 Table of contents 26 27 25.2.2 Description ................................................................................................................................ 587 25.3 Connection ................................................................................................................................ 589 25.4 Configuring ................................................................................................................................ 593 25.5 Technical data........................................................................................................................... 594 25.6 Spare parts................................................................................................................................ 595 25.7 Accessories ............................................................................................................................... 597 Handheld unit / distributor box ............................................................................................................... 559 26.1 Description ................................................................................................................................ 559 26.2 26.2.1 26.2.2 Operator controls and indicators............................................................................................... 600 View........................................................................................................................................... 600 Description ................................................................................................................................ 602 26.3 26.3.1 26.3.2 Connectors ................................................................................................................................ 604 Connecting a device.................................................................................................................. 604 Connecting several devices ...................................................................................................... 605 26.4 Unplugging/plugging during operation ...................................................................................... 606 26.5 26.5.1 26.5.2 26.5.3 Commissioning.......................................................................................................................... 609 Settings in handheld unit........................................................................................................... 609 Configuring ................................................................................................................................ 611 Interface signals ........................................................................................................................ 612 26.6 26.6.1 26.6.2 26.6.3 26.6.4 Distributor box for handheld unit ............................................................................................... 620 Overview ................................................................................................................................... 620 Interfaces................................................................................................................................... 621 Mounting.................................................................................................................................... 624 Connections .............................................................................................................................. 624 26.7 Technical data........................................................................................................................... 626 26.8 Spare parts................................................................................................................................ 627 26.9 Accessories ............................................................................................................................... 628 Machine control panel: MCP 483C ........................................................................................................ 629 27.1 Description ................................................................................................................................ 629 27.2 27.2.1 27.2.2 Operator controls and indicators............................................................................................... 630 Front .......................................................................................................................................... 630 Rear side ................................................................................................................................... 632 27.3 Interfaces................................................................................................................................... 633 27.4 Mounting.................................................................................................................................... 635 27.5 Settings ..................................................................................................................................... 637 27.6 Connectors ................................................................................................................................ 640 27.7 Technical specifications ............................................................................................................ 641 27.8 27.8.1 27.8.2 Replacement parts .................................................................................................................... 642 Overview ................................................................................................................................... 642 replacement .............................................................................................................................. 642 27.9 Accessories ............................................................................................................................... 643 28 Machine control panel: MCP 483 ........................................................................................................... 645 22 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Table of contents 29 30 28.1 Description .................................................................................................................................645 28.2 28.2.1 28.2.2 Operator controls and indicators................................................................................................647 Front...........................................................................................................................................647 Rear side....................................................................................................................................649 28.3 Interfaces ...................................................................................................................................651 28.4 Mounting ....................................................................................................................................655 28.5 Settings via DIP switch S3 .........................................................................................................657 28.6 28.6.1 28.6.2 28.6.3 28.6.4 28.6.5 28.6.6 Connection via PROFIBUS DP..................................................................................................660 Overview ....................................................................................................................................660 Prerequisites ..............................................................................................................................660 Functions of the machine control panel .....................................................................................661 Configuring the DP slave MCP ..................................................................................................663 Linking the DP slave MCP .........................................................................................................667 Input/output image of DP slave MCP.........................................................................................670 28.7 Technical specifications .............................................................................................................673 28.8 28.8.1 28.8.2 Replacement parts.....................................................................................................................674 Overview ....................................................................................................................................674 replacement ...............................................................................................................................675 28.9 28.9.1 28.9.2 Accessories................................................................................................................................676 Overview ....................................................................................................................................676 Membrane keyboard: Labeling the slide-in labels .....................................................................677 Machine control panel: MCP 310........................................................................................................... 683 29.1 Description .................................................................................................................................683 29.2 29.2.1 29.2.2 Operator controls and indicators................................................................................................685 Front side ...................................................................................................................................685 Rear side....................................................................................................................................686 29.3 Interfaces ...................................................................................................................................687 29.4 Mounting ....................................................................................................................................688 29.5 Settings via DIP switch S3 .........................................................................................................690 29.6 29.6.1 29.6.2 29.6.3 29.6.4 29.6.5 29.6.6 Connection via PROFIBUS DP..................................................................................................693 Overview ....................................................................................................................................693 Prerequisites ..............................................................................................................................693 Functions of the machine control panel .....................................................................................694 Configuring the DP slave MCP ..................................................................................................695 Linking the DP slave MCP .........................................................................................................700 Input/output image of DP slave MCP.........................................................................................703 29.7 Technical specifications .............................................................................................................706 29.8 29.8.1 29.8.2 Replacement parts.....................................................................................................................707 Overview ....................................................................................................................................707 replacement ...............................................................................................................................707 29.9 29.9.1 29.9.2 29.9.3 Accessories................................................................................................................................708 Overview ....................................................................................................................................708 Labeling the slide-in labels.........................................................................................................709 Inserting the slide-in label "Part1" ..............................................................................................716 Machine control panel: OP 032S ........................................................................................................... 719 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 23 Table of contents 31 24 30.1 Description ................................................................................................................................ 719 30.2 Operator controls and indicators............................................................................................... 720 30.3 Interfaces................................................................................................................................... 722 30.4 Mounting.................................................................................................................................... 728 30.5 Technical specifications ............................................................................................................ 729 30.6 Accessories ............................................................................................................................... 730 Machine Pushbutton Panel: MPP 483 ................................................................................................... 731 31.1 31.1.1 31.1.2 31.1.3 Description ................................................................................................................................ 731 Overview ................................................................................................................................... 731 System features ........................................................................................................................ 732 Mechanical design .................................................................................................................... 736 31.2 31.2.1 31.2.2 31.2.3 31.2.4 31.2.4.1 31.2.4.2 Operator controls and indicators............................................................................................... 737 Standard versions ..................................................................................................................... 737 Special versions ........................................................................................................................ 744 Examples of assignment of free slots ....................................................................................... 745 Description ................................................................................................................................ 745 Device front ............................................................................................................................... 745 Device rear side ........................................................................................................................ 747 31.3 31.3.1 31.3.2 31.3.2.1 31.3.2.2 31.3.2.3 31.3.2.4 31.3.2.5 31.3.3 31.3.4 Interfaces................................................................................................................................... 749 Overview ................................................................................................................................... 749 Description ................................................................................................................................ 750 Control panel............................................................................................................................. 750 COM board................................................................................................................................ 753 User keys .................................................................................................................................. 757 Handheld unit connection HT 6................................................................................................. 760 Handheld unit connection HT 8................................................................................................. 763 Connection elements for COM board, customer keys and handheld unit connection.............. 766 Input / output images................................................................................................................. 767 31.4 Mounting.................................................................................................................................... 773 31.5 31.5.1 31.5.2 31.5.3 31.5.4 31.5.5 Connectors ................................................................................................................................ 776 MPP 483.................................................................................................................................... 776 COM board................................................................................................................................ 779 Customer keys .......................................................................................................................... 780 Handheld unit connection HT 6................................................................................................. 780 Handheld unit connection HT 8................................................................................................. 784 31.6 Circuits and wiring..................................................................................................................... 786 31.7 Initialization ............................................................................................................................... 791 31.8 31.8.1 31.8.2 31.8.2.1 31.8.2.2 31.8.2.3 Communication ......................................................................................................................... 794 MPI Communication.................................................................................................................. 794 PROFIBUS communication....................................................................................................... 795 Prerequisites ............................................................................................................................. 795 Configuring the DP slave MPP 483 .......................................................................................... 796 PLC user program..................................................................................................................... 799 31.9 31.9.1 31.9.2 Technical specifications ............................................................................................................ 801 MPP 483.................................................................................................................................... 801 Input/output interface of individual wiring.................................................................................. 802 31.10 Spare parts................................................................................................................................ 804 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Table of contents 32 31.11 31.11.1 31.11.2 31.11.3 31.11.4 Accessories................................................................................................................................805 Overview ....................................................................................................................................805 Labeling the slide-in labels.........................................................................................................805 Handwheel connection...............................................................................................................809 Retrofit control elements ............................................................................................................810 31.12 Service information ....................................................................................................................812 Pushbutton panel: PP 012 ..................................................................................................................... 815 32.1 32.1.1 32.1.2 32.1.3 32.1.4 32.2 32.2.2 32.2.3 Description .................................................................................................................................815 Overview ....................................................................................................................................815 Interfaces and monitoring ..........................................................................................................816 Operator panel front interface ....................................................................................................817 Function blocks ..........................................................................................................................818 Operator controls and indicators................................................................................................823 Description .................................................................................................................................824 Labeling......................................................................................................................................825 32.3 32.3.1 32.3.2 32.3.3 32.3.4 Interfaces ...................................................................................................................................827 Overview ....................................................................................................................................827 PP 012 individual wiring.............................................................................................................829 Individual wiring PCB input/output .............................................................................................837 PLC interface .............................................................................................................................841 32.4 Mounting ....................................................................................................................................843 32.5 32.5.1 32.5.2 32.5.2.1 32.5.2.2 32.5.2.3 Connectors.................................................................................................................................844 PP 012 .......................................................................................................................................844 Connection for handheld units ...................................................................................................845 Terminator and jump button S11 ...............................................................................................845 Functional reliability of EMERGENCY STOP and enabling circuits ..........................................845 two-channel enabling function ...................................................................................................846 32.6 Circuits and wiring......................................................................................................................849 32.7 Initialization ................................................................................................................................855 32.8 Communication between SIMATIC S7 and PP 012 ..................................................................859 32.9 PP 012 expansion......................................................................................................................861 32.10 Functions of PCB expansion card 12I/12O................................................................................863 32.10.1 Inputs/Outputs............................................................................................................................863 32.10.2 Button assignment within matrix ................................................................................................864 32.11 Technical specifications .............................................................................................................865 32.11.1 PP 012 .......................................................................................................................................865 32.11.2 Input/output interface of individual wiring...................................................................................866 33 32.12 32.12.1 32.12.2 32.12.3 Configuring.................................................................................................................................870 Delivery variants.........................................................................................................................870 Project-specific components ......................................................................................................871 Rating plates ..............................................................................................................................872 32.13 Service information ....................................................................................................................874 MPI interface for customer operator panel............................................................................................. 877 33.1 Description .................................................................................................................................877 33.2 Interfaces ...................................................................................................................................878 33.3 Mounting ....................................................................................................................................884 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 25 Table of contents 34 35 36 37 38 26 33.4 Settings ..................................................................................................................................... 885 33.5 Technical specifications ............................................................................................................ 887 Electronic handwheels........................................................................................................................... 889 34.1 Description ................................................................................................................................ 889 34.2 Connections .............................................................................................................................. 891 34.3 Technical data........................................................................................................................... 892 34.4 Accessories ............................................................................................................................... 893 34.5 34.5.1 34.5.2 34.5.3 34.5.4 34.5.5 Dimensional drawings ............................................................................................................... 894 Encoder with 120 mm x 120 mm front panel, setting wheel (...-5DB01) .................................. 894 Encoder with front panel, 76.2 mm x 76.2 mm, setting wheel (...-5DC01) ............................... 896 Encoder without front panel, without setting wheel, mounting (...-5DF01) ............................... 898 Encoder with front panel, 76.2 mm x 76.2 mm, setting wheel (...-5DH01) ............................... 900 Encoder without front panel, setting wheel, small (...-5DM00) ................................................. 902 Full CNC keyboard: KB 483C ................................................................................................................ 905 35.1 Description ................................................................................................................................ 905 35.2 Operating and display elements ............................................................................................... 906 35.3 Interfaces................................................................................................................................... 909 35.4 Mounting.................................................................................................................................... 910 35.5 Technical data........................................................................................................................... 912 35.6 Accessories ............................................................................................................................... 913 Full CNC keyboard: KB 310C ................................................................................................................ 915 36.1 Description ................................................................................................................................ 915 36.2 Operating and display elements ............................................................................................... 916 36.3 Interfaces................................................................................................................................... 917 36.4 Mounting.................................................................................................................................... 918 36.5 Technical data........................................................................................................................... 920 36.6 Accessories ............................................................................................................................... 921 Full CNC keyboard: OP 032S ................................................................................................................ 923 37.1 Description ................................................................................................................................ 923 37.2 Operator controls and indicators............................................................................................... 924 37.3 Interfaces................................................................................................................................... 925 37.4 Mounting.................................................................................................................................... 926 37.5 Technical specifications ............................................................................................................ 978 37.6 Accessories ............................................................................................................................... 928 Standard PC keyboard KBPC PX US .................................................................................................... 929 38.1 Description ................................................................................................................................ 929 38.2 Operator controls and indicators............................................................................................... 930 38.3 Technical specifications ............................................................................................................ 931 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Table of contents 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 Standard PC keyboard KBPC CG US.................................................................................................... 933 39.1 Description .................................................................................................................................933 39.2 Operator controls and indicators................................................................................................934 39.3 Technical data............................................................................................................................935 Standard PC keyboard KBPC USB US.................................................................................................. 937 40.1 Description .................................................................................................................................937 40.2 Operating and display elements ................................................................................................938 40.3 Technical data............................................................................................................................939 Standard PC keyboard KBPC SC US .................................................................................................... 941 41.1 Description .................................................................................................................................941 41.2 Technical specifications .............................................................................................................942 Keyboard tray ........................................................................................................................................ 943 42.1 Description .................................................................................................................................943 42.2 Technical data............................................................................................................................944 Compact FlashCard............................................................................................................................... 945 43.1 Description .................................................................................................................................945 43.2 Technical data............................................................................................................................946 3.5" Floppy Disk Drive ........................................................................................................................... 947 44.1 Description .................................................................................................................................947 44.2 Interfaces ...................................................................................................................................949 44.3 Mounting ....................................................................................................................................950 44.4 Technical specifications .............................................................................................................952 Floppy disk drive 3.5" (USB) .................................................................................................................. 953 45.1 Description .................................................................................................................................953 45.2 45.2.1 45.2.2 Interfaces ...................................................................................................................................955 Hardware....................................................................................................................................955 Software .....................................................................................................................................955 45.3 Mounting ....................................................................................................................................956 45.4 45.4.1 45.4.2 45.4.3 Notes about operation................................................................................................................958 Overview ....................................................................................................................................958 Disk drive (6FC5235-0AA05-1AA1) ...........................................................................................958 Disk drive (6FC5235-0AA05-1AA2) ...........................................................................................959 45.5 45.5.1 45.5.2 Technical specifications .............................................................................................................960 Disk drive (6FC5235-0AA05-1AA1) ...........................................................................................960 Disk drive (6FC5235-0AA05-1AA2) ...........................................................................................961 45.6 Replacement parts.....................................................................................................................962 Card reader with USB interface ............................................................................................................. 963 46.1 Description .................................................................................................................................963 46.2 Operator controls and indicators................................................................................................964 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 27 Table of contents 47 46.3 interfaces................................................................................................................................... 966 46.4 Installation ................................................................................................................................. 967 46.5 Memory cards ........................................................................................................................... 968 46.6 Technical data........................................................................................................................... 969 46.7 Accessories ............................................................................................................................... 970 Cooling .................................................................................................................................................. 971 47.1 Methods..................................................................................................................................... 971 47.2 Sample calculation of thermal power loss................................................................................. 973 A ESD guidelines ...................................................................................................................................... 975 B List of abbreviations............................................................................................................................... 977 C Appendix................................................................................................................................................ 981 C.1 Key symbols OP 08T ................................................................................................................ 981 C.2 Feedback on the documentation............................................................................................... 984 C.3 Documentation tree................................................................................................................... 985 Index...................................................................................................................................................... 987 28 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Connection conditions 1.1 Secondary electrical conditions 1.1.1 Prerequisites 1 Compliance with the connection conditions The controller is tested for compliance with the ambient conditions specified below. Trouble-free operation is only ensured if: these ambient conditions are maintained when storing, transporting and operating the equipment. Original components and spare parts are used. This applies in particular to the use of specified cables and plug connectors. the equipment is correctly installed and commissioned. DANGER The equipment may not be commissioned until it has been clearly identified that the machine in which the controller is installed, is in full conformance with the specifications in EC Directive 98/37/EC. Additional Information Literature: /EMC/, EMC Configuration Guideline Assistance and support The connection conditions must be carefully maintained while setting up the complete system. Please contact your local Siemens office or representative for any assistance. Note Please refer to the documentation for the respective operator components for information on deviations to the standard connection conditions. Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 29 Connection conditions 1.1 Secondary electrical conditions 1.1.2 Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) RI suppression Applicable standards: EN 61000-6-3 and -4 Table 1-1 Limit values for radio interference suppression in industrial environments Limit class according to EN 55011 Conducted radio interference A (industry) Interference radiation A (industry) Note The user must consider interference radiation for the whole plant/system. Particular attention should be paid to cabling. Please contact your sales representative for assistance and support. If compliance with limit class B (residential areas) is required, please contact your local Siemens office or sales representative. Interference immunity and low-frequency phenomena Applicable standard: EN 61000-6-2 30 Tested phenomena Applicable standards Static discharge EN 61000-4-2 High-frequency radiation EN 61000-4-3 Noise immunity (burst) EN 61000-4-4 Surge voltages EN 61000-4-5 Cables subject to HF radiation EN 61000-4-6 Magnetic fields with electrical power frequencies EN 61000-4-8 Voltage dips and interruptions EN 61000-4-11 and EN 61000-6-2 Commutation dips EN 60146-1-1 Harmonic currents EN 61000-3-2 Voltage fluctuations and flickers EN 61000-3-3 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Connection conditions 1.1 Secondary electrical conditions 1.1.3 Power supply Requirements of AC power supply The AC power supply is only required for external devices and accessories and is not included in the standard delivery kit. Table 1-2 Requirements of AC power supply Rated voltage acc. to EN 61000-2-4 Frequency Powering up time when switched on AC 230 V 30% 50/60 Hz 10% any Harmonic content According to EN 61000-2-4 10% Transient voltage interruptions Downtime Recovery time Events per hour 3 ms 10 s 10 Requirements of DC power supply DANGER The DC power supply is always referenced to ground and may not be generated by an autotransformer. User interfaces are powered via a DC power supply with protective separation according to EN 61800-5-1. In the case of supply lines > 10 m, protectors must be installed at the device input in order to protect against lightning (surge). The DC power supply must be connected to the ground/shield of the NC for EMC and/or functional reasons. For EMC reasons, this connection should only be made at one point. As a rule, the connection is provided as standard in the S7-300 I/Os. In exceptional circumstances when this is not the case, the ground connection should be made on the grounding rail of the NC cabinet (also refer to /EMC/EMC Installation Guide.) Table 1-3 Requirements of the DC power supply Rated voltage Non-periodic overvoltages Transient voltage interruptions Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 According to EN 61131-2 Voltage range (mean value) Voltage ripple, peak/peak Powering up time when switched on 24 V DC 20.4 V DC to 28.8 V DC 5% (unsmoothed 6-pulse alignment) any Period of overvoltage Recover time Events per hour 35 V 500 ms 50 s 10 Downtime Recovery time Events per hour 3 ms 10 s 10 31 Connection conditions 1.1 Secondary electrical conditions 1.1.4 Safe isolation to EN 61800-5-1 The complete system includes user interfaces (UIs) and interfaces for servicing, startup and maintenance. User interfaces (UIs) UIs are all the interfaces that are freely accessible to the machine operator without the need for tools or aids. These user interfaces are designed with safe isolation to EN 61800-5-1. Interfaces for servicing, startup and maintenance DANGER The interfaces for servicing/installation and start-up/maintenance purposes are provided without protective separation. If necessary, these interfaces can be isolated safely using a supplementary adapter (insulation voltage 230 V AC). Although these adapters are not included in the Siemens scope of delivery, you can buy these parts from your local dealer, who will be happy to advise you. DANGER Safe isolation can only be ensured if the system configuration specified below is strictly adhered to. When mounting additional components (e.g. S7-300 FM, IP) with an end user interface, please make sure that the end user interface has a basic insulation for at least 230 V AC. The following figure shows the potential isolation of the 840D/611D/S7-300 system. SK9$& 03 +RXVLQJVKLHOG 06770&3 3&8 9 0 ++8 +7 'LVWULEXWLRQER[ 'GLJLWDO 0RWRU 6,2V 0 %DVLFLQVXODWLRQ Figure 1-1 32 3HUVRQ 7HUPLQDO EORFN 6DIHVHSDUDWLRQ Safe isolation to EN 61800-5-1 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Connection conditions 1.1 Secondary electrical conditions 1. Floating power supply of the SIMODRIVE electronics unit with 230 V AC basic insulation. 2. Floating transistor triggers for the three-phase rectifier bridge with 230 V AC basic insulation. 3. Floating transistor triggers for each axis of the three-phase inverter bridge with 230 V AC basic insulation. 4. Floating signal connections from the NC to the PCU or HHU with 230 V AC basic insulation. 5. Non-floating signal line between NC and I/O devices. 6. Non-floating end user interface with protective separation for 230 VAC through interfaces 1 to 4 and 7. 7. Protectively separated 5 V DC power supply, fed from a protectively separated 24 V DC supply. 8. 24 V DC power supply unit for external devices and for the machine adaptation control according to applicable standards in the form of a PELV circuit (Protective Extra Low Voltage), provided with protective separation. 9. Floating interfaces to the machine (not accessible to the end user) 10.Floating signal interfaces directly accessible to the end user (e.g., V.24). For these interfaces, you must always make sure that there is either safe isolation with respect to the line supply voltage or that there are two basic insulation levels, for 230 V AC each. 11.5 V DC power supply with basic insulation, fed from a safely-isolated 24 V DC supply. 1.1.5 Grounding concept The grounding concept is described below using a SINUMERIK 840D as an example. The 840D system consists of a number of individual components, each of which must comply with EMC and the appropriate safety standards. The individual system components are: NCU box Machine control panel MCP Keyboard Operator panels (operator panel front + PCU) NCU terminal block Distributor box and handheld unit S7-300 I/O with IM 361 interface module Single I/O module The NCU box is a 50 mm wide cassette that is integrated into the infeed/regenerative feedback (I/RF) unit, FD and MSD. The individual modules are attached to a metal cabinet panel by means of screws. Make sure that near the screws a low-impedance contact of the NCU box with the cabinet wall can be made. Insulating paint must be removed from the connecting point. Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 33 Connection conditions 1.1 Secondary electrical conditions The electronic grounding points of the modules are interconnected via the device and drive bus and at the same time connected to the X131 terminal of the I/RF module. The ground and module ground M should be connected at the power supply terminal of the IM 361. Furthermore, for the single I/O module, "SHIELD" and "M24" must be connected in connector X1. 1&8 2SHUDWRU SDQHOIURQW 3$6/ 3RZHU HOHFWURQLFV *DWLQJ HOHFWURQLFV 3$6/ 0DFKLQH FRQWUROSDQHO 3&8 *URXQG IUDPH 'LVWULEXWRU ER[ 3$6/ 6/LQWKHPRWRUFDEOH 0% 0% 6,2V ()3 7HUPLQDO EORFN * 0 3$6/ 3$ 3$ 3$6/ 0DFKLQHEHG *URXQGLQJEDU *URXQGWHUPLQDO 0%6KLHOGHGVLJQDOFDEOHZLWKUHIHUHQFHJURXQG 00RWRU *7UDQVGXFHU 3$(TXLSRWHQWLDOERQGLQJFRQGXFWRU 63RZHUFRQQHFWRU 6/3URWHFWLYHFRQGXFWRU Figure 1-2 &URVVVHFWLRQVPP 6 6 6 6 6/PLQ 6 6 Grounding concept References: /EMC/EMC Installation Guide 34 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Connection conditions 1.1 Secondary electrical conditions 1.1.6 RI suppression measures In addition to the protective grounding of system components, special precautions must be taken to ensure safe, interference-free operation of the system. These measures include shielded signal cables, special equipotential bonding and grounding conductors. Shielded signal cables To ensure safe, fault-free operation of the system, it is essential to use the cables specified in the individual diagrams. For digital signal transmission, the shield must have a conductive connection at both sides of the housing. Exception: Standard shielded cables grounded on only one side can be used for devices from other manufacturers (printers, programming devices, etc.). These external devices may not be connected to the control during normal operation. However, if the system cannot be operated without them, then the cable shields must be connected at both ends. Furthermore, the external device must be connected to the control via an equipotential bonding cable. Cable definition Definition: Signal cables (example) - Data cables (MPI, sensor cables, etc.) - Binary inputs and outputs - EMERGENCY OFF lines Load cables (example) - Low-voltage supply cables (230 V AC, +24 V DC etc.) - Supply cables to contactors (primary and secondary circuit) References: /EMC/EMC Installation Guide Rules for routing cables In order to achieve the best-possible noise immunity for the complete system (control, power section, machine) the following EMC measures must be observed: Signal cables and load cables must be routed at the greatest possible distance from one another. If necessary, signal and load cables may cross one another (if possible, at an angle of 90), but must never be laid close or parallel to one another. Only cables provided by the NC manufacturer should be used as signal cables from and to the NC or PLC. Signal cables may not be routed close to strong external magnetic fields (e.g. motors and transformers). Pulse-carrying HC/HV cables must always be laid completely separately from all other cables. Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 35 Connection conditions 1.1 Secondary electrical conditions If signal lines cannot be routed a sufficient distance away from other cables, they must be installed in grounded cable ducts (metal). The clearance (interference injection area) between the following lines must be kept to a minimum: - Signal cable and signal cable (twisted) - Signal line and associated equipotential bonding conductor - Equipotential bonding conductor and PE conductor (routed together) Note More information on RI suppression measures and connecting shielded cables can be found in the References: /EMC/EMC Installation Guide 1.1.7 Pin assignment of the interfaces The pins of the component interfaces are generally assigned as specified in the tables below. Any deviations are indicated at the relevant point. Signal type: I Input O Output B Bi-directional (inputs/outputs) V Power supply - Ground (reference potential) or N.C. (not connected) Parallel interface LPT1 Parallel interface on the PCU 50 / 70 for connecting a printer, for example Table 1-4 Assignment of the parallel interface LPT1 Connector Pin 1 36 Name Strobe (CLK) 2-9 Data bits 0, ..., 7 10 ACK (ACKNOWLEDGE) 11 BUSY 12 PE (PAPER END) Type O Remarks Open Collector TTL level I 4.7 k Pull Up 13 SELECT 14 AUTO FEED O Open Collector 15 ERROR I 4.7 k Pull Up 16 INT 17 SELECT IN O Open Collector GND - Ground (reference potential) 18-25 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Connection conditions 1.1 Secondary electrical conditions Serial interface COM1 Serial interface on PCU 20 / 50 / 70 / HT 6 Table 1-5 Assignment of the serial interface COM1 (AG/V.24/modem) Connector Pin Type Remarks - - Shield 2 TxD (D1) O Serial transmitted data 3 RxD (D2) I Serial received data 4 RTS (S2) O Request To Send 5 CTS (M2) 6 DSR (M1) I 7 GND (E2) - Ground (reference potential) 8 DCD (M5) I Receive signal level (carrier) N.C. - Do not use 20 DTR (S1) O Data Terminal Ready 21 N.C. - Do not use 22 RI (M3) | Incoming call N.C. - Do not use 9-19 Name 1 23-25 Clear To Send Data Set Ready Serial interface COM2 Serial interface on PCU 20 / 50 / 70 / HT 6 Table 1-6 Assignment of the serial interface COM2 (V.24/mouse) Connector Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Pin Name Type Remarks 1 DCD (M5) 2 RxD (D2) 3 TxD (D1) 4 DTR (S1) O 5 GND (E2) - Ground (reference potential) 6 DSR (M1) I Data Set Ready 7 RTS (S2) O Request To Send 8 CTS (M2) 9 RI (M3) I I Receive signal level (carrier) Serial received data Serial transmitted data Data Terminal Ready Clear To Send Incoming call 37 Connection conditions 1.1 Secondary electrical conditions PS/2 interfaces Table 1-7 Assignment of the PS/2 interfaces (keyboard/mouse interface) Connector (view of socket) Pin Name Type 1 Keyboard_data 2 Mouse_data 3 GND 4 P5V_fused 5 Keyboard_CLK 6 Mouse_CLK I V B Remarks Keyboard data cable Mouse data cable Ground (reference potential) +5 V (fused) Keyboard clock line Mouse clock line USB-A interface Table 1-8 Assignment of the USB-A interface Connector (view of socket) Pin Name Type 1 USB-P5V_fused 2 USB_D0M V 3 USB_D0P B 4 USB_GND V Remarks +5 V (fused) Data-, USB channel 0 Data+, USB channel 0 Ground (reference potential) MPI/DP interface Table 1-9 Assignment of the MPI/DP interface Connector Pin Name 1,2 N.C. - Do not use 3 LTG_B B Signal line B of MPI module 4 RTS_AS I Control signal for receive data current. Signal 1 active if directly connected interface module is sending. 5 M5EXT VO Return line (GND) of 5 V supply. Current load from a load of 90 mA max. connected between P5EXT and M5EXT. 6 P5EXT VO 5 V supply (current load see M5EXT) 7 N.C. 8 9 Shield 38 Type Remarks - Do not use LTG_A B Signal line A of MPI module RTS_PG O RTS signal of MPI module; signal is "1", when PG is sending - On connector housing Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Connection conditions 1.1 Secondary electrical conditions Ethernet RJ45 interface Table 1-10 Assignment of the Ethernet RJ45 interface Connector /(' /(' Pin Name Type Remarks 1 TxD+ 2 TxD- O Send data 3 RxD+ I Received data 4/5 GND - - (terminated internally with 75 ; not required for data transmission) 6 RD- I Received data 7/8 GND - - (terminated internally with 75 ; not required for data transmission) Shield On connector housing *) green LED (on right) Off: 10 Mbps Lit: 100 Mbit/s *) LED yellow (on left) Lit: Active connection (e.g. to a hub) Flashing: Activity *) if present VGA Port Table 1-11 Assignment of VGA interface Connector Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Pin Name Type Remarks 1 R Red 2 G 3 B Blue 4 N.C. Do not use 5-8 GND O - Green System ground (reference potential) 9 5V VO +5 V (fused) 10 GND VO System ground (reference potential) 11 N.C. - Do not use 12 DDC_DAT B DDC data line 13 EXT_H 14 EXT_V O 15 DDC_CLK B Horizontal synchronization Vertical synchronization DDC clock line 39 Connection conditions 1.1 Secondary electrical conditions DVI-I interface Table 1-12 Connector & & & & & 40 Assignment of DVI-I interface Pin Name Type S GND - Ground - Ground S1 GND C1 R C2 G C3 B C4 HSYNC Remarks Red O Green O Horizontal synchronizing pulse Blue C5 GND - Ground CSA GND - Ground 1 TX2N 2 TX2P O 3 GND - Ground 4 N.C. - Do not use 5 N.C. - Do not use 6 DDC CLK 7 DDC CLK B 8 VSYNC O 9 TX1N 10 TX1P O 11 GND - Ground 12 N.C. - Do not use 13 N.C. - Do not use 14 +5 V VO +5 V 15 GND VO Ground 16 MONDET 17 TX0N 18 19 I TDMS data 2TDMS data 2+ DDC clock DDC data Vertical synchronizing pulse TDMS data 1TDMS data 1+ Hot plug detect TDMS data 0- TXoP O TDMS data 0+ GND - Ground 20 N.C. - Do not use 21 N.C. - Do not use 22 GND - Ground 23 TXCP 24 TXCN O TDMS clock + TDMS clock - Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Connection conditions 1.1 Secondary electrical conditions C-MOS display interface D-STN and TFT displays with 5V CMOS interface and VGA resolution (640 x 480 pixels) can be connected to this interface. Maximum cable length: 50 cm. Table 1-13 Assignment of the display interface (C-MOS) Pin DSTN name DSTN meaning TFT name TFT meaning 1/2 P5V_D-fused + 5 V (fused) Display VCC P5V_D_fused + 5 V (fused) Display VCC 3 GND - GGND - 4 CLK Shift clock CLK Shift clock 5 GND - GND - 6 LP Horiz. Sync Hsync Horiz. 7 FP Vert. Sync Vsync Vert. Sync Signal Red bit 1 8 - - R0 9 - - R1 10 UD6 Upper data bit 6 R2 11 GND - GND 12 UD7 Upper data bit 7 R3 13 UD2 Upper data bit 2 R4 14 UD3 Upper data bit 3 R5 15 GND - GND 16 UD1 Upper data bit 1 G0 17 UD0 Upper data bit 0 G1 18 LD3 Lower data bit 6 G2 19 GND - GND 20 LD2 Lower data bit 2 G3 21 LD1 Lower data bit 1 G4 22 LD0 Lower data bit 0 G5 23 GND - GND 24 UD5 Lower data bit 5 B0 25 UD4 Lower data bit 4 B1 26 LD7 Lower data bit 7 B2 27 GND - GND 28 LD6 Lower data bit 6 B3 29 LD5 Lower data bit 5 B4 30 LD4 Lower data bit 4 B5 Red bit 0 (LSB) Red bit 2 Red bit 3 Signal Red bit 4 Red bit 5 (MSB) Green bit 0 (LSB) Signal Green bit 1 Green bit 2 Green bit 3 Signal Green bit 4 Green bit 5 (MSB) Blue bit 0 (LSB) Signal Blue bit 1 Blue bit 2 Blue bit 3 Signal Blue bit 4 Blue bit 5 (MSB) 31 VCON Contrast voltage - - 32 M (GND) Data enable ENAB Data enable 33 DispOn Display ON DsipOn Display ON 34 Res. Reserved Res. Reserved Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 41 Connection conditions 1.1 Secondary electrical conditions I/O USB interface All signals required for connecting operator panel fronts, with the exception of the display interface, are assigned to this interface. Associated interface cable: K1 Plug-connector type: 2 x 13-pin socket connector Table 1-14 Connector Allocation of the I/O USB interface Pin 1 GND 2 P12C VO Ground +power supply for backlight inverter BL_ON P5V_fused VO +5 V VCC (fused in A&D PC) 5 GND VO Ground P3V3_fused VO N.C. 11 P5V_fused 12 USB_D1M 13 USB_D1P 14 GND 15 LCD_SEL0 16 LCD_SEL1 17 LCD_SEL2 18 LCD_SEL3 O Meaning 4 6 Type 3 710 Name VO B VO Backlight On +3.3 V VCC (fused in A&D PC) Do not use +5 V VCC (fused in A&D PC) USB data- Channel 1 USB data+ Channel 1 Ground 1 Display type select signal I 2 3 4 19 RESET_N 20 reserved - Reserved Reset signal (low active) 21 HD_LED *) O HD LED, anode with 1 k in series on the motherboard 22 DP_LED *) O MPI/DP LED, anode via 1 K in series on the motherboard 23 Ethernet_LED *) O Ethernet LED, anode with 1 k in series on the motherboard 24 TEMP_ERR O LED temperature sensor; anode with 1 k in series on the board 25 RUN_R *) O Watchdog error LED, anode with 1 k in series on the motherboard 26 RUN_G *) O Watchdog OK LED, anode with 1 k in series on the motherboard *) Signal only applies for PCU 50.3, otherwise it is N.C. 42 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Connection conditions 1.1 Secondary electrical conditions LVDS display interface channel 1 Used to connect operator panel fronts with TFT displays with 640 x 480 pixels (VGA), 800 x 600 pixels (SVGA) or 1024 x 768 pixels (XGA). Associated interface cable: K2, max. length: 0.5 m Plug-connector type: 2 x 10-pin socket connector Table 1-15 Allocation of the LVDS display interface Connector Pin Name 1/2 P5V_D_fused 3 4 5/6 RXIN0+ P3V3_D_fuse d I VO Meaning +5V display power supply (fused in A&D PC) LVDS input signal Bit 0 (-) Bit 0 (+) +3.3V display power supply (fused in A&D PC) RXIN1- 8 RXIN1+ I LVDS input signal Bit 1 (-) GND - System ground (reference potential) LVDS input signal Bit 1 (+) 11 RXIN2- 12 RXIN2+ I GND - System ground (reference potential) O LVDS cycle clock signal 13/14 15 RXCLKIN- 16 RXCLKIN+ 17/18 GND 19/20 N.C. Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 VO 7 9/10 RXIN0- Type - Bit 2 (-) Bit 2 (+) (-) (+) System ground (reference potential) Do not use 43 Connection conditions 1.1 Secondary electrical conditions LVDS display interface channel 2 Used for expanding the LVDS display interface channel 1 to control TFT displays with 1280 x 1024 pixels (SXGA). Associated interface cable: K3 Plug-connector type: 2 x 10-pin socket connector Table 1-16 Allocation of the LVDS display interface Connector Pin Name Type 1/2 GND - System ground (reference potential) RXIN10+ I LVDS input signal GND - System ground (reference potential) 3 4 5/6 Bit 0 (-) Bit 0 (+) 7 RXIN1- 8 RXIN1+ I LVDS input signal GND - System ground (reference potential) 9/10 RXIN10- Meaning 11 RXIN2- 12 RXIN2+ I LVDS input signal GND V Ground O LVDS cycle clock signal V Ground 13/14 15 RXCLKIN- 16 RXCLKIN+ 17 18-20 GND P12VF VO Bit 1 (-) Bit 1 (+) Bit 2 (-) Bit 2 (+) (-) (+) +12 V fused Compact Flash interface Table 1-17 Connector 44 Assignment of the Compact Flash interface Pin Name Type Meaning 1 GND VO Ground 2 IDE_D3 3 IDE_D4 4 IDE_D5 5 IDE_D6 6 IDE_D7 7 IDE_XCS0 8 IDE_A10 (GND) 9 XOE / ATA/ XSEL (GND) data bit 3 data bit 4 I/O data bit 5 data bit 6 data bit 7 O chip select 0 VO Address bit 10 to ground O Enables True IDE mode Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Connection conditions 1.1 Secondary electrical conditions Connector Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Pin Name 10 IDE_A9 (GND) 11 IDE_A8 (GND) 12 IDE_A7 (GND) 13 P3V3 14 IDE_A6 (GND) 15 IDE_A5 (GND) 16 IDE_A4 (GND) Type Meaning Address bit 9 to ground VO Address bit 8 to ground VO + 3.3V power Address bit 7 to ground Address bit 6 to ground VO Address bit 5 to ground Address bit 4 to ground 17 IDE_A3 (GND) Address bit 3 to ground 18 IDE_A2 Address bit 2 19 IDE_A1 20 IDE_A0 Address bit 0 21 IDE_D0 data bit 0 22 IDE_D1 23 IDE_D2 24 IDE_XIOCS16 I I/O chip select 16 25 IDE_XCD2 (N.C.) - Do not use 26 IDE_XCD1 I card detect 27 IDE_D11 28 IDE_D12 29 IDE_D13 30 IDE_D14 31 IDE_D15 32 IDE_XCS1 O chip select 1 33 XVS1 (N.C.) - Voltage sense (unassigned) 34 IDE_XIOR 35 IDE_XIOW O 36 DIE_XWE O Write enable 37 IDE_XIRQ I Interrupt request 38 P3V3 VO + 3.3V power 39 XCSEL O Cable select 40 XVS2 (N.C.) - Voltage sense (unassigned) 41 IDE_XRST O reset 42 IDE_XIORDY I I/O ready 43 DMARQ I DMA request 44 XDMACK O DMA acknowledge 45 XDASP (N.C.) - drive active/slave present (unassigned) 46 IDE_XPDIAG I/O 47 IDE_D8 48 IDE_D9 49 IDE_D10 50 GND O I/O Address bit 1 data bit 1 data bit 2 data bit 11 data bit 12 I/O data bit 13 data bit 14 data bit 15 I/O read I/O write Passed diagnostic data bit 8 I/O data bit 9 data bit 10 VO Ground 45 Connection conditions 1.1 Secondary electrical conditions Power supply interface Table 1-18 Assignment of the power supply interface Pin 1 1.1.8 Name Type SHIELD 2 M24 3 P24 Meaning - Shield potential VI 24 V DC potential Ground 24V Handling membrane connectors When replacing parts it can sometimes be necessary to disconnect membrane connectors from the boards and reconnect them again. This should be done as follows: Figure 1-3 (1) Removing (left) and attaching (right) a membrane connector Clamping frame of socket Unplugging the membrane connector 1. Loosen the dark clamping frame of the socket by pushing it up with your fingernails until it engages in its upper, unlocked position (Fig. left). 2. Carefully pull off the membrane connector upward. Plugging in the membrane connector 1. With the clamping frame in the upper position, carefully plug the membrane connector into the socket. 2. Lock it in place by pushing down the clamping frame (Figure right). 46 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Connection conditions 1.2 Ambient climatic and mechanical conditions 1.2 Ambient climatic and mechanical conditions 1.2.1 Relevant standards Test standards Vibratory load: EN 60068-2-6 Shock load: EN 60068-2-27 Climate: EN 60068-2-1/EN 60068-2-2/EN 60068-2-14 EN 60068-2-30/EN 60068-2-31/EN 60068-2-32/ EN 60068-2-33/EN 60068-2-34 Requirements standards Long-term storage: EN 60721-3-1 Transport: EN 60721-3-2 Stationary operation: EN 60721-3-3 Table 1-19 Mechanical ambient conditions Requirement criteria Values Frequency range Vibratory load Constant deflection Acceleration amplitude Acceleration Shock stressing Duration of nominal shock see technical data of the relevant component Number of nominal shocks Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 47 Connection conditions 1.2 Ambient climatic and mechanical conditions 1.2.2 Transport and storage conditions Components in original packaging The following specifications apply to components in transport packaging: Table 1-20 Climatic conditions for storage and transport Temperature range See technical data of the relevant component Annual average 10 ... 75 % Up to 30 days annually 95 % Temperature change Within one hour < 18 K Atmospheric pressure The specified values apply to a transportation altitude of up to 3000 m above sea level 70 to 106 kPa Relative air humidity Shipping backup batteries Backup batteries may only be shipped in the original packaging. No special authorization is required to ship backup batteries. The lithium content is approximately 300 mg. Note: The backup battery is classified as a hazardous substance, Class 9 in accordance with the relevant air-freight transportation regulations. Applicable standards: DIN EN 60086 WARNING Incorrect handling of backup batteries can lead to a risk of ignition, explosion and combustion. Rules for handling backup batteries The following regulations according to DIN EN 60086 must be adhered to: Backup batteries May not be charged may not be heated or thrown into fires may not be pierced or crushed must not be tampered with mechanically or electrically in any way! 48 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Connection conditions 1.2 Ambient climatic and mechanical conditions Rules for handling hard disks The PCU hard disk unit is provided with shock absorbers. However, the following rules must be observed when handling this unit. Hard disk unit should always be transported in its original packaging should not be thrown or dropped should not be dismantled from the mechanical components with which it was supplied should not be handled by its springs 1.2.3 Operating conditions Climatic environmental conditions If the specified values cannot be maintained, a heat exchanger or an air conditioning unit must be provided. Table 1-21 Climatic ambient conditions Temperature range See technical data of the relevant component Permissible change in relative humidity EN 60721-3-3, Class 3K5 Within one minute Condensation, spraying water and icing Not permissible Temperature change Within one hour Max. 10 K Atmospheric pressure When operated at an altitude of 2000 m above sea level. For higher altitudes, the upper limit temperature must be reduced by 3.5 C/500 m 82 kPa to 106 kPa max. 0.1 % Function-impairing gases Degree of severity 3C2 according to EN60721-3-3 Function-impairing dust When working in areas where there is an unacceptably high dust hazard, the control must be operated in a cabinet with a heat exchanger or in a cabinet with a suitable air intake. Maximum permissible dust contents in the air circulating in the cabinet: Proportion in suspension 0.2 mg/m3 Precipitation 1.5 mg/m2/h Note The dust precipitation must be removed at appropriate time intervals. Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 49 Connection conditions 1.3 MPI/OPI networking rules 1.3 MPI/OPI networking rules Use The following devices can be interconnected across the MPI bus: NCU/CCU PCU HT 6 HHU MSTT/MCP The MPI interconnecting cables are available in different lengths. Network installation Please take the following basic rules into account when undertaking network installations: 1. The MPI connection can be routed from one user to the next by plugging the MPI connector of the outgoing cable onto the MPI connector of the incoming cable. 2. The bus line must be terminated at both ends. Activate the terminating resistor in the MPI connector of the first and last node and deactivate the other terminal resistors (see figure below). Note: - Only two inserted terminators are permitted. - For HHU/HT6, bus terminating resistors are fitted permanently in the unit. 3. It is necessary to apply 5 V voltage to at least 1 terminator. For this, the MPI connector with inserted terminating resistor must be connected to a powered device. NOTICE The NC control must be located at the end of the connection. 4. Branch lines (supply cable from bus segment to user) should be as short as possible. Note: - Unused branch lines should be removed. 5. Each MPI node must first be connected and then enabled. When disconnecting an MPI node, first deactivate the connection, then remove the connector. 6. A maximum of two HHU and HT6 components can be connected per bus segment. It is also possible to connect two identical components, provided they have different node addresses. For info on setting the addresses (see also section on the corresponding component): - HHU: Via DIP switch or display (see Section: "Handheld Unit"), - For HT 6 by adapting the address before commissioning (see Section: "Handheld Terminal HT 6"). No bus connections may be made to the distributor boxes of an HHU or HT 6 (see note on point 2.) If necessary, more than one HHU/HT 6 can be connected to a bus segment with an intermediate repeater. 50 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Connection conditions 1.3 MPI/OPI networking rules 7. The following cable lengths for MPI or OPI for standard use without repeater may not be exceeded: MPI (187.5 kbaud): Max. cable length 1000 m in total OPI (1.5 MBaud): Max. cable length 200 m in total 2II 2Q 2 1 2 1 7HUPLQDWLQJUHVLVWRU Figure 1-4 MPI connector References: Catalog IK Pl - industrial communication for automation and drives Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 51 Connection conditions 1.3 MPI/OPI networking rules 52 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Operator panel front: OP 08T 2.1 2 Description The extremely compact SINUMERIK OP 08T operator panel front enables a distributed configuration of the operator panel front and controller. The OP 08T operator panel front has a membrane keyboard with 79 keys (layout similar to SINUMERIK CNC editing keyboard KB 310C) as well as 2x8 horizontal and 2x8 vertical soft keys. The distance to the operator panel fronts is determined by the maximum distance of two network nodes / access points. The operator panel front OP 08T is connected to the PCU / NCU via the Ethernet as thin client in its own subnet (via DHCP server to PCU / NCU). The mixed operation with an operator panel front is possible directly at the PCU. The operator panel front is secured from the rear using special clamps supplied with the panel. Validity The description below applies to the OP 08T operator panel front Order number: 6FC5203-0AF04-1BA0. Features Ethernet 10/100 Mbit/s 2x USB 1.1 for connecting the mouse, keyboard and USB flash drive (1x front / 1x rear) 7.5" TFT flat screen with VGA resolution 640x480 pixels Membrane keyboard with alphabetic, numeric, cursor and control keypad Softkeys / direct keys - 2 x 8 horizontal rows of keys with softkey function - 2x8 vertical rows of keys with softkey and direct control key function *) Shift key for switchover to the second key level (not for switching over the letters, since they are uppercase only) Slight mounting depth Panel cutout (W x H): 285 x 304 mm IP65 protection Attachment: tension jacks at the rear *) Direct control key function in case of SINUMERIK 840D sl /840Di sl Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 53 Operator panel front: OP 08T 2.1 Description The SINUMERIK OP 08T operator panel front can be used for: SINUMERIK 810D/840D - SINUMERIK PCU 50.3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - NCU 7xx - SINUMERIK PCU 50.3 SINUMERIK 840Di sl 54 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Operator panel front: OP 08T 2.2 Operator controls and display elements 2.2 Operator controls and display elements 2.2.1 View Figure 2-1 (1) View of OP 08T operator panel front Etc. key (2) Area switchover (3) Numeric key group (4) Cursor key group (5) Control key group (6) Interface USB 1.1 (7) Alphabetic key group (8) Machine area (9) Recall (10) Softkeys and direct keys (vertical slide-in labels) (11) Softkeys Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 55 Operator panel front: OP 08T 2.2 Operator controls and display elements 2.2.2 Keyboard and display Keyboard Several keys and key pads are installed on the operator panel front: The alphabetic key group contains the letters A - Z and the space character for entering text. The numeric key group contains the digits 0 - 9, the - character and the decimal point for entering numeric characters and operators. The cursor key group is used to navigate on the screen. The control key group includes special functions. The area switchover shows the main menu. The ETC key allows for an expansion of the horizontal softkey bar in the same menu. The softkeys call up functions that are available on screen via a menu bar. The machine area key switches directly into the "Machine" operating area. The recall key jumps back to the superordinate menu. One window is closed. The key symbols used on the operator panel front appear below along with the corresponding function keys on the PC keyboard. Key 56 Function corresponds to PC key function Key Function corresponds to PC key function Esc End F11 Backspace F12 Tab Space (only intended for internal keyboard changeover) Home Ctrl key Page up Alt key Page down Delete Cursor up Insert Cursor left Enter Cursor right F9 Cursor down F10 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Operator panel front: OP 08T 2.2 Operator controls and display elements Key Function corresponds to PC key function 5 (in numeric key group) Key A, ..., Z <Shift> F9 Function corresponds to PC key function <Shift> A, ..., Z <Shift> F10 Display Note Pixel error acc. to DIN EN ISO 13406-2 Class II. 2.2.3 Screen brightness control The screen darkening control of the OP 08T has two functions: Enhancing the life span of the backlight by reducing the brightness Protecting the TFT display against the so-called "burn-in effect", which arises when a picture with a high contrast is displayed on the screen for one hour without any change. The screen brightness control is designed in three stages. Stage 1: The brightness of the backlight is reduced / dimmed. Note Select the shortest possible response time for this stage. Stage 2: The backlight remains dim. A black screen (screen brightness control) is shown on the screen. Note Activate the screen brightness control, in order to protect the TFT display against the so-called "burn-in effect". Stage 3: The backlight is switched off. A black screen (screensaver display) is shown on the screen. Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 57 Operator panel front: OP 08T 2.2 Operator controls and display elements Note Set the response time for this stage in such a way that the backlight remains off for at least 15 minutes. Futher information under: /IM2/: Commissioning HMI Embedded /IM4/: Commissioning HMI Advanced 58 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Operator panel front: OP 08T 2.3 Interfaces 2.3 Front Interfaces USB 1.1 to connect an external keyboard, mouse and USB FlashDrive (see section: "Control and display elements" "View") Note Note that the electromagnetic compatibility of commercially available peripheral devices operated via the USB interface is usually rated for office use only. For industrial use, components with a higher degree of certification are recommended. Rear face Ethernet USB 1.1 Power Supply Figure 2-2 Rear view of OP 08T operator panel front Description I/O Type (1) Strain relief for the connecting cable (2) Ethernet interface X3 A 8-pole RJ45 socket (3) Interface USB 1.1 X20 A USB-A (4) Earthing connection (5) Power supply 24 VDC (6) Cable clamp Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 M5 screw X81 I 3-pin terminal block 59 Operator panel front: OP 08T 2.4 Installation 2.4 Installation The OP 08T operator panel front is fixed in a rectangular section with clamps. For this reason, bore holes or screw holes are not needed. The tightening torque of the clamp set screws must not exceed 0.5 Nm. Table 2-1 Dimensions of the mounting opening OP 08T Width (mm) Height (mm) Depth (mm) 285 304 41 *) *) Plus 10 mm cable connector and ventilation clearance Figure 2-3 60 Panel cutout OP 08T Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Operator panel front: OP 08T 2.4 Installation Dimension drawings Figure 2-4 Dimension drawing OP 08T 5] PPPP ; 0RXQWLQJIUDPH $VSHU',1,62/ 6HDO ;; ; Figure 2-5 Dimensions of OP 08T clamps Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 61 Operator panel front: OP 08T 2.5 Technical data 2.5 Technical data Safety Degree of protection as per EN 60529 Front side IP65 Rear side IP10 Electrical data Power supply 24 VDC Power consumption maximum approx. 15 W Mechanical data Dimensions (mm) Width: 310 Height: 330 Depth: 41 Panel cutout (mm) Width: 285 Height: 304 Depth: 51 *) Weight approx. 2.9 kg (without tension jack) Tightening torques, max. Mechanical ambient conditions (with PCU) Tension jacks: 0.4 - 0.5 Nm Operation Transport (in transport packaging) Vibratory load as per EN 60068-2-6 10 - 58 Hz: 0.075 mm 58 - 200 Hz: 1g 5 - 9 Hz: 6.2 mm 9 - 200 Hz: 2g Shock load as per EN 60068-2-27 Acceleration: 5g shock duration: 30ms, load: 3x either direction (18x) Acceleration: 30g shock duration: 6ms, load: 3x either direction (18x) Climatic ambient conditions Heat dissipation By natural convection Condensation, spraying water and icing Supply air Not permissible Without caustic gases, dusts and oils Operation Climate class Temperature limits Limit values for rel. humidity to DIN IEC 68-2-3, DIN IEC 68-2-30, DIN 68-2-56 Storage/shipping (in transport packaging) 3K5 1K3 / 2K4 0 ... 45 C (at front) 0 ... 55 C (at rear) -20 ... 60 C 5 ... 80% at 25C 5 ... 95% at 25C Temperature change max. 10 K/h. Non-condensing Display Size / resolution 7.5" TFT / 640x480 pixel (VGA) *) due to cable connector and ventilation clearance 62 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Operator panel front: OP 08T 2.6 Spare parts 2.6 Spare parts The following components are available as spare parts for the OP 08T operator panel front: Spare parts Order No.: Remarks Tension jack (for supplementary components with 2.5 mm profile strength, length: 20 mm) 6FC5248-0AF14-0AA0 Set of 9 Sealing caps for USB connection 6FC5248-0AF05-0BA0 Set of 5 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 63 Operator panel front: OP 08T 2.7 Accessories 2.7 Accessories 2.7.1 Overview The following accessories are available for the OP 08T operator panel front: 2.7.2 Component Description Slide-in labels Slide-in labels (3 films DIN A4) Amount Order no.: 1 6FC5248-0AF04-1BA0. Membrane keyboard: Labeling the slide-in labels The OP 08T operator panel front is delivered ex-factory with two vertical slide-in labels (unprinted / background color: grayed-out). Figure 2-6 (1) Part 1 (2) Part 2 Position of the vertical OP 08T slide-in labels Upon request, a spare part packet with three blank films can be ordered, in order to print the slide-in labels with the key symbols (see section: "Spare parts" "Overview"). 64 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Operator panel front: OP 08T 2.7 Accessories Files for printing the blank film Teil 2 M 06/1142 skpeth40000062 23.05.06 CR Teil 1 Teil 2 1. Medium basic 701 HD Teil 1 SINUMERIK Panel Slide-in strips, inscribable (3 membrane sheets A4) for OP08T A5E00801829 6FC5248-0AF04-1BA0 Beschriftungsplan/template: A5E00801907B siehe/as: DOCONCD Figure 2-7 Blank film OP 08T [printing direction (1)] The DOConCD / Catalog NC 61 (CD enclosed) contains two files for printing the blank films: Template_OP08T_13.doc Symbols_OP08T_13.doc The file "Template_OP08T_13.doc" is a template for the exact positioning of the symbols on the printable film. Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 65 Operator panel front: OP 08T 2.7 Accessories Figure 2-8 (1) Template_OP08T_13.doc (blank template for film) Cutting edges The file "Symbols_OP08T_13.doc" contains a broad range of key symbols. An overview of these is given in the appendix. Preparing slide-in labels Inserting symbols 1. Open the files "Template_OP08T_13.doc" and "Symbols_OP08T_13.doc" in MS Word. 2. Select a key symbol from the file "Symbols_OP08T_13.doc" by left-clicking. 3. Copy the desired symbol to the clipboard via "Edit" "Copy" or "Ctrl + C" 4. Return to the template file "Template_OP08T_13.doc" 5. Position the cursor before the insertion point in the desired table cell (in Fig.: "Template_OP08T_13.doc the insertion point is displayed by "+"). 6. Insert the key symbol via "Edit" "Paste" or "Ctrl + V". 7. Repeat steps two to six until you have inserted all the key symbols. 66 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Operator panel front: OP 08T 2.7 Accessories Inserting characters/text 1. Open the "Template_OP08T_13.doc" files in the MS Word text processing program. 2. Set the "Arial" font to format characters. (This font is comparable to the "Univers S57" font, used by Siemens for the key labeling.) 3. Position the cursor in the desired table cell and enter characters/text. Printing the slide-in labels 1. Place the blank film in the printing direction in the slot of your laser printer (see Fig.: "Blankfolie OP 08T"). 2. Select "film" as the printable medium if your printer allows this setting. 3. Start the printing process using MS Word. Note For labeling the labeling strips, HP Color Laser Jet film C2936A is used. Make a test print on paper before you print on the film. Allow the film to cool after printing so that the ink can dry. 4. Cut the slide-in labels out of the film along the edges (see Fig.: "Template_OP08T_13.doc"). 5. Round off the corners of the labeling strips approx. 3 mm to facilitate insertion. Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 67 Operator panel front: OP 08T 2.7 Accessories Dimension drawings )LOP ',1$ 3DUW 3DUW 3DUW 3DUW &HQWHURIWKHNH\ 5 Figure 2-9 Dimensions for vertical slide-in labels Creating your own symbols Drawing in a vector program (e.g. Designer, Freehand, CorelDraw): - Draw a 13 x 13 mm square, fill with the color white and give it an invisible border line. - Place the symbol in the center of this square. - Group the square and symbol together and add this group in the MS Word document Template_OP08T_13.doc. Drawing in an image editing program (e.g. Photoshop, Picture Publisher, Paint) - Draw a square 13x13 mm (37x37 pixel), filled with the color white. - Draw the symbol in the center of this square. - Copy the symbol and the square together and add the group in the MS Word document Template_OP08T_13.doc. 68 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Operator panel front: OP 010 3.1 3 Description The SINUMERIK OP 010 operator panel front has a 10.4" TFT color display with a resolution of 640 x 480 pixels (VGA) and features a 62-key membrane keypad (with 8 + 4 horizontal softkeys and 8 vertical softkeys) that has been optimized for programming parts programs. Securing is done from the rear using special clamps that are included in the delivery kit. Validity The description below applies to the OP 010 operator panel front (order number 6FC 5203-0AF00-0AA1) Features 19" mounting format, 7 HU (height units) Panel cutout (W x H): 450 x 290 mm Slight mounting depth 10.4" flat screen (color) with VGA resolution 640 x 480 pixels using TFT technology Membrane keyboard with alphabetic, numeric, cursor, control and hotkey key groups Softkeys: 8 + 4 horizontal and 8 vertical softkeys Shift key for switchover to the second key level (not for switching over the letters, since they are uppercase only) Status LEDs for power supply and overtemperature Front USB interface IP65 degree of protection Attachment: tension jacks at the rear Can be combined with PCU, TCU, or Videolink receiver Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 69 Operator panel front: OP 010 3.2 Operator controls and indicators 3.2 Operator controls and indicators 3.2.1 View (5) (5) Figure 3-1 70 View of OP 010 operator panel front (1) Status LED: POWER (2) Status LED: TEMP (illuminated LEDs indicate increased wear) (3) Alpha key group (4) Numerical key group (5) Softkeys (6) Control key group (7) Hotkey group (8) Cursor key group (9) Front USB interface (10) Area switchover (11) etc. key (12) Machine area (13) Recall Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Operator panel front: OP 010 3.2 Operator controls and indicators 3.2.2 Keyboard and display Keyboard Several keys and key pads are arranged on the OP 010 operator panel front: The alphabetic key group contains the letters A, ..., Z on two levels, arranged in accordance with programming requirements for entering text. The numeric key group contains the digits 0 ... 9, the -, /,=, + characters and the decimal point for entering numerical characters and operators. The control key group includes special functions. The hotkey group is used for the direct selection of operating areas. The cursor key group is used to navigate on the screen. The area switchover shows the main menu. The etc. key allows for an extension of the horizontal softkey bar in the same menu. The softkeys call up functions which are available on screen via a menu bar. The machine area key shifts directly into the "Machine" operating area. The recall key jumps back to the superordinate menu. One window is closed. The key symbols used on the operator panel front appear below along with the corresponding function keys on the PC keyboard. Key Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Function corresponds to PC key function Key Function corresponds to PC key function Esc End F11 Backspace F12 Tab Space (only intended for internal keyboard changeover) Home Ctrl key Page up Alt key Page down Delete Cursor up Insert Cursor left Enter Cursor right F9 71 Operator panel front: OP 010 3.2 Operator controls and indicators Key Function corresponds to PC key function Key Cursor down 5 (in numeric key group) <Shift> F9 Function corresponds to PC key function F10 A, ..., Z <Shift> A, ..., Z <Shift> F10 Display Note Pixel error acc. to DIN EN ISO 13406-2 Class II. 3.2.3 Screen saver If a screen with high contrast is displayed unchanged for longer than 1 hour, the screensaver must be activated (screen switched dark) to protect the TFT display from "burn-in" of the last displayed screen. For more information see: /BEM/: HMI Embedded Operator's Guide /IAM/: IM2 Installation and Start-up HMI Embedded; IM4 Installation and Start-up HMI Advanced CAUTION You may do irreversible damage to your TFT display if the screen saver is not activated. 72 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Operator panel front: OP 010 3.3 Interfaces 3.3 Interfaces This operator panel front has the following interfaces: Front side USB 1.1 to connect an external keyboard or mouse (see Fig: "Front view of operator panel front" in section: "Control and display elements" --> "View") Note Note that the electromagnetic compatibility of commercially available peripheral devices operated via the USB port is usually rated for office use only. For industrial use, components with a higher degree of certification are recommended. Rear side Two ribbon cables for connecting the PCU (see figure below): - I/O USB cable K1 (ribbon cable): All signals that are used for the display interface and the connection of operator panel fronts (e.g. supply voltages) - Display cable K2 Direct control key interface X11 (under cover plate) Interface X12 - reserved (under cover plate) Figure 3-2 Connections on rear side of housing: Connections to PCU (1) I/O USB cable K1 (2) PCU main board (3) Cable clamp for connecting up direct key module (4) Keyboard controller (5) Direct control key interface X11 (6) Interface X12 (reserved) (7) Connection X14 for backlight (8) Connection X1 for I/O USB cable K1 (9) Display cable K2 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 73 Operator panel front: OP 010 3.3 Interfaces Pin assignment More details in Chapter: "Connection Conditions", section: "Secondary electrical conditions". 74 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Operator panel front: OP 010 3.4 Mounting 3.4 Mounting 3.4.1 Preparation for mounting Table 3-1 Dimensions of the mounting hole (see diagram below) Used PCU type Width (mm) Height (mm) Depth + clearance (mm) measured from the mounting wall surface PCU 20 76 + 10 450 PCU 50 290 108.2 + 10 PCU 70 149.2 + 10 Thanks to the tension jacks on the OP 010, drill-holes or screw holes are not needed. This retaining method also affords a degree of protection IP65 (but only in conjunction with a circumferential seal and when the protective USB cap is fitted). 7HQVLRQMDFNV 6HWVFUHZV PLQWRPD[ 'LPHQVLRQVIRUWHQVLRQMDFNSUHVVXUHSRLQWV Figure 3-3 0RXQWLQJSDQHO 6HDOLQJDUHD Dimension sheet for installing the OP 010 operator panel front Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 75 Operator panel front: OP 010 3.4 Mounting 3.4.2 Assembling an OP 010 and a PCU When combining an OP 010 and PCU and/or video link receiver, it is advisable to assemble them prior to installing them in the assembly panel. Procedure To do this, proceed as described in section: "OP 012", section: "Assembling the OP 012 and PCU". Then undo the shipping lock for the hard-drive, otherwise the system will not boot. 3.4.3 Mounting on the mounting wall The clearance at the rear of the PCU must be at least 10 mm to ensure sufficient ventilation (see Figure: "Attaching the PCU to the OP 012 operator panel front", section "OP 012," section: "Assembling the OP 012 and PCU"). For more detailed information, please refer to the relevant PCU sections and section: "Heat dissipation". NOTICE Permitted mounting position: deviating by up to 5 from the vertical. This value can be further restricted by attached components (PCU, video link receiver, ...). Procedure 1. Insert the assembled components (operator panel front and PCU) from the front into the panel cutout (see Figure:. "Dimension sheet for installing the operator panel front", section: "Preparation for mounting"). 2. Secure the operator panel front in the panel cutout from the rear using the tension jacks by tightening the setscrews (torque 0.4 - 0.5 Nm). 3.4.4 Softkey labeling User-specific functions can be assigned to the horizontal and vertical softkey bars. Printed labeling strips can be used to label the softkeys. Blank labels are already installed on delivery. To make the labels, DIN-A4 film is available (Order No., see Section: "Spare parts"). 76 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Operator panel front: OP 010 3.4 Mounting Note Use the "Arial" font to format text. This font is comparable to the "Univers S57" font, used by Siemens for the key labeling. Proceed as follows 1. Letter the mat side of the film using a laser printer. 2. Cut the printed labels along the preprinted lines. 3. Remove the PCU retaining screws and swing out the PCU away from the operator panel front. 4. Insert the strips into the slots provided on the rear side of the operator front panel. 5. Swing the PCU back to the operator panel and secure by tightening the screws. If the operator panel front and PCU are dismantled, omit steps 3 and 5. Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 77 Operator panel front: OP 010 3.5 Technical specifications 3.5 Technical specifications Security Safety class III; PELV acc. to EN 50178 Degree of protection per EN 60529 Front side IP65 Rear side IP 00 Approvals CE / cULus Electrical specifications Power supply (via I/O USB cable and display cable) Display Backlight inverter Voltage Current (typ./max. mA; approx.) 5 V +/- 5% 280 / 380 Logic / USB (with / without load) Power consumption 12 V +/- 10% 750 / 1000 Typical, approx. 10 W 5.2 V +/- 2% 350 / 1000 Maximum approx. 16 W Mechanical data Dimensions Width: 483 mm Height: 310 mm Depth: 30 mm Mounting depth: 20 mm incl. PCU 20: 76 mm *) incl. PCU 50: 108.2 mm *) incl. PCU 70: 149.2 mm *) Weight Approx. 5 kg Tightening torques, max. Tension jack screws: 0.5 Nm Mechanical ambient conditions (with PCU) M3 screws: 0.8 Nm M4 screws: 1.8 Nm Operation Transport (in transport packaging) Vibratory load 10 -58 Hz: 0.075 mm 58 - 200 Hz: 9.8 m/s2 3M4 per EN 60721-3-3 5 -9 Hz: 3.5 mm 9 - 200 Hz: 9.8 m/s2 2M2 per EN 60721-3-2 Shock stressing 50 m/s2, 30 ms, 18 shocks 3M2 per EN 60721-3-3 300 m/s2, 6 ms, 18 shocks 2M2 to EN 60721-3-2 Climatic ambient conditions Cooling By natural convection Condensation, spraying water and icing Supply air Applicable standards Climate class Temperature limits Temperature change Limits for relative humidity Permissible change in the relative air humidity 78 Not permitted Without caustic gases, dusts and oils Operation Storage/shipping (in transport packaging) EN 60721-3-3 EN 60721-3-1 / -3-2 3K5 1K3 / 2K4 0 ... 45 C (at front) 0 ... 55 C (at rear) -20 ... 60C Max. 10 K/h Max. 18 K/h 5 ... 80% at 25C (+77F) 5 ... 95% at 25C max. 0.1% /min Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Operator panel front: OP 010 3.5 Technical specifications Display Size / resolution 10.4" / 640 x 480 pixels MTBF backlight typ. 50 000 h at 25 C (dependent on the temperature) *) Plus 10 mm clearance Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 79 Operator panel front: OP 010 3.6 Replacement parts 3.6 Replacement parts 3.6.1 Overview The following diagram shows the OP 010 operator panel front dismantled into its individual parts. The components provided with an order number are available as individual spare parts. Figure 3-4 Individual parts for the OP 010 operator panel front (1) LCD unit (2) Backlight with backlight inverter (3) Display support (4) Keyboard controller (5) Cap for the USB port 6FC5248-0AF05-0AA0 (6) Operator panel front without LCD unit 6FC5248-0AF00-0AA0 Tension jacks 6FC5248-0AF06-0AA0 Set of 6 DIN A4 film 6FC5248-0AF07-0AA0 for slide-in labels for softkey labeling*) Spare parts Order number Remarks Set of 10 Set of 3 *) The dimensions for production of film slide-in labels for softkey labeling can be seen in the following diagram. 80 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Operator panel front: OP 010 3.6 Replacement parts 6OLGHLQODEHOV 3DUW 3.6.2 3DUW &HQWHURIWKHNH\ Figure 3-5 5 3DUW 3DUW 3DUW 3DUW Dimensions for DIN A4 film Replacement CAUTION Parts must only be replaced by trained personnel (danger of damage to sensitive components due to static electricity)! USB cap / tension jack The replacement of the USB sealing cap and tension jacks will not be described since it is simple and self-explanatory. Film labels The procedure for replacement is as described in section: "OP 012", section: "Softkey labels." Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 81 Operator panel front: OP 010 3.6 Replacement parts Operator panel front When replacing the operator panel front, the previous LCD unit and keyboard controller can be used again. They are therefore disassembled and re-assembled after the appropriate component has been replaced. Note We recommend that the keypad controller be re-used so that the control parameters that have been programmed-in are not lost. Procedure :LGWK WRS &RYHUSODWHIRU &RQQHFWLRQV .H\ERDUGFRQWUROOHU &DEOH FODPS 'LVSOD\ FDEOH. ,286% FDEOH. 0RXQWLQJVORWVIRU3&8OXJV 6OLWIRUVRIWNH\ODEHOLQJVWULSV Figure 3-6 +HLJKW 'LVSOD\ VXSSRUWSODWH &DEOHVKRZQIROGHGWRJHWKHU &DVLQJVFUHZV OP 010 rear side 1. Put the OP 010 face down on a flat, soft surface and loosen the 12 casing screws (see figure above). 2. Remove the softkey labeling strips and the cover plate. 3. Remove the following connectors from the keyboard controller (see following Fig.): Backlight (socket X14) and I/O USB cable K1. 4. Lift off the display support with the display. In addition to the keyboard controller, the rear sides of the mouse and USB interface become visible. 5. After bending back the two lugs, withdraw the USB interface. 82 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Operator panel front: OP 010 3.6 Replacement parts 6. Disconnect the three membrane connectors of the operator panel front keyboard from sockets X7, X8 and X10 (see note below for procedure). 7. Remove the retaining screws from the keyboard controller. 8. Lift USB interface and keyboard controller off the front plate. The interconnections may remain plugged. 9. Install the components into the new operator front panel in reverse order (procedure: see Note). Note Descriptions of how to disconnect and connect the membrane connector can be found in section: "Connection Conditions," section: "Handling membrane connectors." When tightening the screws, observe the torques (refer to the Section: "Technical data"). Figure 3-7 (1) Changing the operator panel front USB port (2) Connection X1 for I/O USB cable K1 (3) Direct control key connection X11 (4) Membrane connector for connecting the keyboard of the operator panel front (5) Keyboard controller (6) Connection X12 (reserved) (7) Connection X14 for backlight (8) Connection X4 for mouse Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 83 Operator panel front: OP 010 3.6 Replacement parts 84 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Operator panel front: OP 010S 4.1 4 Description The slim SINUMERIK OP 010S operator panel front and 10.4" TFT color display with a resolution of 640 x 480 pixels (VGA) features 8 +4 hard horizontal softkeys and 8 vertical softkeys as mechanical keys. You can use the OP 032S or KB 310C full CNC keyboard for entering data. Securing is done from the rear using special clamps that are included in the delivery kit. Validity The description below applies to the OP 010S operator panel front (order number 6FC5203-0AF04-0AA0) Features The operator panel front OP 010S (successor to OP 032S) described in the following is characterized by: Mounting dimensions 310 x 330 mm Panel cutout (W x H): 285 x 304 mm Slight mounting depth 10.4" TFT flat screen (color) with VGA resolution 640 x 480 pixels Mechanical keys: - 8 horizontal softkeys - 8 vertical softkeys - Four control keys Status LEDs for power supply and overtemperature Front USB interface Degree of protection: IP54 Attachment: tension jacks at the rear Can be combined with the PCU, TCU or Videolink receiver and full CNC keyboard KB 310C or OP 032S Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 85 Operator panel front: OP 010S 4.2 Operator controls and indicators 4.2 Operator controls and indicators 4.2.1 View Figure 4-1 86 View of OP 010S operator panel front (1) Status LED: POWER (2) Status LED: TEMP (illuminated LEDs indicate increased wear.) (3) Softkeys (4) Etc. key (5) Area switchover (6) Softkeys (7) Front USB interface (8) Machine area (9) Recall Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Operator panel front: OP 010S 4.2 Operator controls and indicators 4.2.2 Keyboard and display Keyboard Several keys are arranged on the operator panel front: The eight vertical and horizontal softkeys call up functions that are available on screen via a menu bar. The etc. key allows for an expansion of the horizontal softkey bar in the same menu. The area switchover shows the main menu. The machine area key switches directly into the "Machine" operating area. The recall key jumps back to the superordinate menu. One window is closed. The key symbols used on the operator panel front appear below along with the corresponding function keys on the PC keyboard. Key Function corresponds to PC key function Key Function corresponds to PC key function <Shift> F9 F9 <Shift> F10 F10 Display Note Pixel error acc. to DIN EN ISO 13406-2 Class II. 4.2.3 Screen saver If a screen with high contrast is displayed unchanged for longer than 1 hour, the screensaver must be activated (screen switched dark) to protect the TFT display from "burn-in" of the last displayed screen. For more information see: /BEM/: HMI Embedded Operator's Guide /IAM/: IM2 Installation and Start-up HMI Embedded; IM4 Installation and Start-up HMI Advanced CAUTION You may do irreversible damage to your TFT display if the screen saver is not activated. Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 87 Operator panel front: OP 010S 4.3 Interfaces 4.3 Interfaces This operator panel front has the following interfaces: Front side USB 1.1 to connect an external keyboard or mouse (see Fig: "Front view of operator panel front" in section: "Control and display elements" --> "View") Note Note that the electromagnetic compatibility of commercially available peripheral devices operated via the USB port is usually rated for office use only. For industrial use, components with a higher degree of certification are recommended. Rear side Two ribbon cables for connecting the PCU (see figure below): - I/O-USB cable K1 (ribbon cable): All signals that are used for the display interface and the connection of operator panel fronts (e.g. supply voltages) - Display cable K2 Figure 4-2 88 Connections on rear side of housing Connections to the PCU (1) Display cable K2 (2) Back of operator panel (3) I/O USB cable K1 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Operator panel front: OP 010S 4.3 Interfaces Pin assignment More details in section: "Connection Conditions," section: "Secondary electrical conditions." Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 89 Operator panel front: OP 010S 4.4 Mounting 4.4 Mounting 4.4.1 Preparation for mounting Table 4-1 Dimensions of the mounting hole (see diagram below) Used PCU type Width (mm) Height (mm) Depth + clearance (mm) measured from the mounting wall surface PCU 20 PCU 50 91 + 10 285 304 123.2 + 10 PCU 70 164.2 + 10 Thanks to the tension jacks on the OP 010S, drill-holes or screw holes are not needed. This retaining method also affords a degree of protection IP65 (but only in conjunction with a circumferential seal and when the protective USB cap is fitted). ,QWKHVHDOLQJDUHD PLQPD[ 5] 7HQVLRQMDFNVZLWKVHWVFUHZV 6HDODUHD Figure 4-3 90 3UHVVXUHSRLQWV IRUWHQVLRQMDFNV Dimension sheet for installing the OP 010S operator panel front Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Operator panel front: OP 010S 4.4 Mounting 4.4.2 Mounting on the mounting wall When you are using a combination of OP 010S and PCU, it is advisable to install the OP 010S in the assembly panel first and then mount the PCU on the OP 010S. Procedure 1. Insert the OP 010S in the panel cutout from the front. 2. Use 6 tension jacks to secure it in the panel cutout from the rear (see figure: "Dimension sheet for installing the OP 010S operator panel front," section: "Preparation for mounting"). 3. Tighten the setscrews (tightening torque 0.4 - 0.5 Nm). 4.4.3 Assembling an OP 010S and a PCU Note The PCU must correspond to the PCU 50 500 MHz (see Section: "PCU 50", section: "View"), i.e. any existing mounting brackets must be removed. WRS &RYHUSODWHIRU FRQQHFWLRQV NH\ERDUGFRQWUROOHU &DVLQJ FRYHUSODWH ,286% FDEOH. 'LVSOD\ FDEOH. &DVLQJVFUHZV0 &DVLQJVFUHZV0IRU3&8PRXQWLQJ RQWKHVLGH Figure 4-4 Rear side of operator panel front with arrangement of interfaces and mounting screws Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 91 Operator panel front: OP 010S 4.4 Mounting Procedure 1. Position the PCU almost at right-angles to the OP (see figure in section: "Interfaces"). 2. Insert cable connectors K1 and K2 of the OP into the corresponding counterpieces behind the opening in the PCU casing. Ensure that the connectors snap in and that the locks are closed. 3. Fold the PCU onto the OP. 4. Using the four M3 and four M4 screws supplied, attach the PCU to the side of the OP (tightening torques: M3 - 0.8 Nm; M4 - 1.8 Nm). The clearance at the rear of the PCU must be at least 10 mm to ensure sufficient ventilation (see following Figure). For more detailed information, please refer to the relevant PCU sections and section: "Heat dissipation." 92 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 'LPHQVLRQVLQPP Figure 4-5 3&8 236 $GGLWLRQDOFOHDUDQFHIRU FRQQHFWLQJFDEOH IRU'L &OHDUDQFHIRUFDEOHVDQGYHQWLODWLRQ 3&8 236 Operator panel front: OP 010S 4.4 Mounting Mounting the PCU 50 to the OP 010S operator panel front with clearances NOTICE Permitted mounting position: deviating by up to 5 from the vertical. This value can be further restricted by insalled components (PCU, video link receiver, ...). Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 93 Operator panel front: OP 010S 4.5 Technical specifications 4.5 Technical specifications Safety Safety class III; PELV acc. to EN 50178 Degree of protection per EN 60529 Front panel IP54 Rear side IP 00 Approvals CE / cULus Electrical data (without PCU) Power supply (via I/O USB cable and display cable) Display Backlight inverter Logic / USB (with / without load) Voltage 5 V +/- 5% 12 V +/- 10% 5.2 V +/- 2% Current (typ. / max. mA; approx.) 420 / 600 900 / 1050 350 / 1000 Power consumption Typical, approx. 10 W Maximum approx. 16 W Mechanical data Dimensions Mounting depth: 35 mm incl. PCU 20: 91 mm *) incl. PCU 50: 123.2 mm *) incl. PCU 70: 164.2 mm *) Width: 310 mm Height: 330 mm Depth: 45 mm Weight Tightening torques, max. Approx. 5.5 kg Tension jack screws: 0.5 Nm Mechanical ambient conditions (with PCU) Vibratory load Shock stressing M3 screws: 0.8 Nm Operation M4 screws: 1.8 Nm Transport (in transport packaging) 10 -58 Hz: 0.075 mm 5 -9 Hz: 3.5 mm 58 -200 Hz: 9.8 m/s2 9 -200 Hz: 9.8 m/s2 3M4 according to EN 60721-3-3 2M2 according to EN 60721-3-2 50 m/s2, 300 m/s2, 6ms 30ms, 18 shocks 18 shocks 3M2 according to EN 60721-3-3 2M2 according to EN 60721-3-2 Climatic ambient conditions Cooling By natural convection Condensation, spraying water and icing Supply air Not permitted Without caustic gases, dusts and oils Operation Storage/transport (in transport packaging) Applicable standards Climate class Temperature limits EN 60721-3-3 EN 60721-3-1 / -3-2 3K5 1K3 / 2K4 0 ... 45 C (at front) -20 ... 60C 0 ... 55 C (at rear) Temperature change Limits for relative humidity Permissible change in the relative air humidity 94 Max. 10 K/h 5 ... 80% at 25C Max. 18 K/h 5 ... 95% at 25C max. 0.1% in 1 min Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Operator panel front: OP 010S 4.5 Technical specifications Display Size / resolution 10.4 " TFT / 640 x 480 pixels MTBF backlight typ. 50 000 h at 25 C (dependent on the temperature) *) Plus 10 mm clearance Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 95 Operator panel front: OP 010S 4.6 Replacement parts 4.6 Replacement parts 4.6.1 Overview The diagram shows the OP 010S operator panel front dismantled into its individual parts. The components provided with an order number are available as individual spare parts. Figure 4-6 Individual parts for the OP 010S operator panel front Spare parts (1) Operator panel front Remarks 6FC5203-0AF04-0AA0 Without LCD unit, without USB port, without keyboard controller (2) Backlight with backlight inverter (3) Display holder with keyboard controller (rear side) (4) LCD unit (5) Cap for the USB port 6FC5248-0AF05-0AA0 Set of 10 Tension jacks 6FC5248-0AF06-0AA0 Set of 6 Spare parts 96 Order number Order number Remarks Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Operator panel front: OP 010S 4.6 Replacement parts 4.6.2 Replacement CAUTION Parts must only be replaced by trained personnel (danger of damage to sensitive components due to static electricity)! USB cap / tension jack The replacement of the USB sealing cap and tension jacks will not be described since it is simple and self-explanatory. Operator panel front When changing the front plate, the existing USB interface and the display holder with display, backlight inverter and keyboard controller can be reused. Procedure Figure 4-7 Keyboard controller (1) Membrane line from the operator panel front keyboard (2) Membrane line from the operator panel front keyboard (3) Connection X12 (reserved) (4) Connection X14 for display and backlight (5) Connection X4 (reserved) (6) USB membrane line (7) Direct control key interface X11 (8) I/O USB cable K1 (9) Display cable K2 Connections for the operator panel front keyboard (10) Connection for keyboard X8 of the operator panel front (11) Connection for keyboard X10 of the operator panel front (12) Connection for keyboard X7 of the operator panel front Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 97 Operator panel front: OP 010S 4.6 Replacement parts 1. Put the OP 010S and the replacement front plate face down on a flat, soft surface. 2. Loosen the casing screws (see Figure: "Rear side of operator panel front" in section: "Mounting") and remove the casing cover plate. The display holder with the keyboard controller (see Fig. above) will be visible underneath and, in a cutout of the mounting plate, the rear side of the USB interface (see Fig. below). 3. Disconnect the membrane connectors of the operator panel front keyboard from sockets X7, X8 and X10 (see note for procedure). 4. Disconnect the membrane connection of the USB connection cable (see Fig. below) (procedure: see Note below). 5. Remove the screws of the display support and lift it off. 6. Pull the USB interface off its seat and insert it into the replacement front plate. 7. Place the display support on the replacement front plate. 8. Re-assemble the operator panel front in reverse order (procedure: see Note). Note Descriptions of how to disconnect and connect the membrane connector can be found in chapter: "Connection Conditions", section: "Handling membrane connectors". When tightening the screws, observe the torques (refer to the Section: "Technical data"). Figure 4-8 (1) 98 USB interface viewed from the operator panel rear side USB membrane line (see Fig.: "Keyboard controller") (2) USB port (3) Display support Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Operator panel front: OP 010C 5.1 5 Description The SINUMERIK OP 010C operator panel front and 10.4" TFT color display with a resolution of 640 x 480 pixels (VGA) features a 65-key mechanical keypad with 8 + 4 horizontal softkeys and 8 vertical softkeys. The 6 hotkeys are designed with replaceable key covers for machine-specific adaptation. The key covers can be freely inscribed using laser. The operator panel front is secured from the rear using special clamps supplied with the panel. Validity The description below applies to the OP 010C operator panel front (order number 6FC5203-0AF01-0AA0) Features 19" mounting format, 7 HU (height units) Panel cutout (W x H): 450 x 290 mm Slight mounting depth 10.4" TFT flat screen (color) with VGA resolution 640 x 480 pixels Mechanical short-stroke keys with alphabetic, numeric, cursor, control and hotkey key group Softkeys: - 1 horizontal row of 8 keys with softkey functions - 1 vertical row of 8 keys with softkey functions Shift key for switchover to the second key level (not for switching over the letters, since they are uppercase only) Status LEDs for power supply and overtemperature Front USB interface Degree of protection IP 54 Attachment: tension jacks at the rear Can be combined with PCU, TCU, or Videolink receiver Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 99 Operator panel front: OP 010C 5.2 Operator controls and indicators 5.2 Operator controls and indicators 5.2.1 View Figure 5-1 100 View of operator panel front OP 010C (1) Status LED: POWER (2) Status LED: TEMP (illuminated LEDs indicate increased wear) (3) Softkeys (4) Alphabetic key group (5) Numeric key group (6) Cursor key group (7) Control key group (8) Front USB interface (9) Hotkey group (10) Area switchover (11) Etc. key (12) Softkeys (13) Machine area (14) Recall Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Operator panel front: OP 010C 5.2 Operator controls and indicators 5.2.2 Keyboard and display Keyboard Several keys and key pads are installed on the OP 010C operator panel front: The alphabetic key group contains the letters A - Z and the space character for entering text. The numeric key group contains the digits 0 - 9, the - character, and the decimal point for entering numerical characters and operators. The cursor key group is used to navigate on the screen. The control key group includes special functions. The hotkey group is used for the direct selection of operating areas. The area switchover shows the main menu. The etc. key allows for an expansion of the horizontal softkey bar in the same menu. The softkeys call up functions that are available on screen via a menu bar. The machine area key switches directly into the "Machine" operating area. The recall key jumps back to the superordinate menu. One window is closed. The key symbols used on the operator panel front appear below along with the corresponding function keys on the PC keyboard. Key Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Function corresponds to PC key function Key Function corresponds to PC key function Esc End F11 Backspace F12 Tab Space (only intended for internal keyboard changeover) Home Ctrl key Page up Alt key Page down Delete Cursor up Insert Cursor left Enter Cursor right F9 101 Operator panel front: OP 010C 5.2 Operator controls and indicators Key Function corresponds to PC key function Key Cursor down 5 (in numeric key group) <Shift> F9 Function corresponds to PC key function F10 A, ..., Z <Shift> A, ..., Z <Shift> F10 Display Note Pixel error acc. to DIN EN ISO 13406-2 Class II. 5.2.3 Screen saver If a screen with high contrast is displayed unchanged for longer than 1 hour, the screensaver must be activated (screen switched dark) to protect the TFT display from "burn-in" of the last displayed screen. For more information see: /BEM/: HMI Embedded Operator's Guide /IAM/: IM2 Installation and Start-up HMI Embedded; IM4 Installation and Start-up HMI Advanced CAUTION You may do irreversible damage to your TFT display if the screen saver is not activated. 102 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Operator panel front: OP 010C 5.3 Interfaces 5.3 Interfaces This operator panel front has the following interfaces: Front side USB 1.1 to connect an external keyboard or mouse (see Fig: "Front view of operator panel front" in section: "Control and display elements" --> "View") Note Note that the electromagnetic compatibility of commercially available peripheral devices operated via the USB port is usually rated for office use only. For industrial use, components with a higher degree of certification are recommended. Rear side Two ribbon cables for connecting the PCU (see figure below): - I/O USB cable K1 (ribbon cable): All signals that are used for the display interface and the connection of operator panel fronts (e.g. supply voltages) - Display cable K2 Direct control key interface X11 (under cover plate) Interface X12 - reserved (under cover plate) Figure 5-2 Connections on rear side of housing: Connections to PCU (1) I/O USB cable K1 (2) PCU main board (3) Cable clamp for connecting up direct key module (4) Keyboard controller (5) Direct control key interface X11 (6) Interface X12 (reserved) (7) Connection X14 for backlight (8) Connection X1 for I/O USB cable K1 (9) Display cable K2 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 103 Operator panel front: OP 010C 5.3 Interfaces Pin assignment More details in Chapter: "Connection Conditions", section: "Secondary electrical conditions". 104 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Operator panel front: OP 010C 5.4 Mounting 5.4 Mounting 5.4.1 Preparation for mounting Table 5-1 Dimensions of the mounting hole (see diagram below) Used PCU type Width (mm) Height (mm) Depth + clearance (mm) measured from the mounting wall surface PCU 20 76 + 10 450 PCU 50 290 108.2 + 10 PCU 70 149.2 + 10 Thanks to the tension jacks on the OP 010C, drill-holes or screw holes are not needed. 7HQVLRQMDFNV 6HWVFUHZV )URQWVLGH 5 PLQWRPD[ 'LPHQVLRQVIRUWHQVLRQMDFNSUHVVXUHSRLQWV 0RXQWLQJSDQHO Figure 5-3 6HDOLQJDUHD IURQW Dimension sheet for installing the OP 010C operator panel front Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 105 Operator panel front: OP 010C 5.4 Mounting 5.4.2 Assembling an OP 010C and a PCU When combining an OP 010C and PCU, it is advisable to assemble them prior to installing them in the assembly panel. :LGWK WRS +HLJKW 'LVSOD\ VXSSRUWSODWH &RYHUSODWHIRU &RQQHFWLRQV .H\ERDUGFRQWUROOHU 'LVSOD\ FDEOH. ,286% FDEOH. 0RXQWLQJVORWVIRU3&8OXJV &DEOHVKRZQIROGHGWRJHWKHU Figure 5-4 &DVLQJVFUHZV Rear side of operator panel front with position of interfaces and mounting slots Procedure To do this, proceed as described in the section: "OP 012", section: "Assembling the OP 012 and PCU." 5.4.3 Mounting on the mounting wall The clearance at the rear of the PCU must be at least 10 mm to ensure sufficient ventilation (see Figure: "Attaching the PCU to the OP 012 operator panel front", section "OP 012," section: "Assembling the OP 012 and PCU"). For more detailed information, please refer to the relevant PCU sections and section: "Heat dissipation". NOTICE Permitted mounting position: deviating by up to 5 from the vertical. This value can be further restricted by attached components (PCU, video link receiver, ...). 106 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Operator panel front: OP 010C 5.4 Mounting Procedure 1. Insert the assembled components (operator panel front and PCU) from the front into the panel cutout (see Figure:. "Dimension sheet for installing the operator panel front," section: "Preparation for mounting"). 2. Secure the operator panel front in the panel cutout from the rear using the tension jacks by tightening the setscrews (torque 0.4 - 0.5 Nm). Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 107 Operator panel front: OP 010C 5.5 Technical specifications 5.5 Technical specifications Security Safety class III; PELV acc. to EN 50178 Degree of protection per EN 60529 Front panel IP54 Rear side IP 00 Approvals CE / cULus Electrical specifications Power supply (via I/O USB cable and display cable) Display Backlight inverter Voltage Current (typ./max. mA; approx.) 5 V +/- 5% 280 / 380 Logic / USB (with / without load) Power consumption 12 V +/- 10% 750 / 1000 Typical, approx. 10 W 5.2 V +/- 2% 350 / 1000 Maximum approx. 16 W Mechanical data Dimensions Width: 483 mm Height: 310 mm Depth: 30 mm Mounting depth: 20 mm incl. PCU 20: 76 mm *) incl. PCU 50: 108.2 mm *) incl. PCU 70: 149.2 mm *) Weight Approx. 5 kg Tightening torques, max. Tension jack screws: 0.5 Nm Mechanical ambient conditions (with PCU) M3 screws: 0.8 Nm M4 screws: 1.8 Nm Operation Transport (in transport packaging) Vibratory load 10 -58 Hz: 0.075 mm 58 - 200 Hz: 9.8 m/s2 3M4 per EN 60721-3-3 5 -9 Hz: 3.5 mm 9 - 200 Hz: 9.8 m/s2 2M2 per EN 60721-3-2 Shock stressing 50 m/s2, 30 ms, 18 shocks 3M2 per EN 60721-3-3 300 m/s2, 6 ms, 18 shocks 2M2 to EN 60721-3-2 Climatic ambient conditions Cooling By natural convection Condensation, spraying water and icing Supply air Applicable standards Climate class Temperature limits Temperature change Limits for relative humidity Permissible change in the relative air humidity 108 Not permitted Without caustic gases, dusts and oils Operation Storage/shipping (in transport packaging) EN 60721-3-3 EN 60721-3-1 / -3-2 3K5 1K3 / 2K4 0 ... 45 C (at front) 0 ... 55 C (at rear) -25 ... 55 C Max. 10 K/h Max. 18 K/h 5 ... 80% at 25C 5 ... 95% at 25C max. 1% /min Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Operator panel front: OP 010C 5.5 Technical specifications Display Size / resolution 10.4 " TFT / 640 x 480 pixels MTBF backlight typ. 50 000 h at 25 C (dependent on the temperature) *) Plus 10 mm clearance Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 109 Operator panel front: OP 010C 5.6 Replacement parts 5.6 Replacement parts 5.6.1 Overview The diagram shows the OP 010C front plate as an individual part. The components available as spare parts are combined in one overview Figure 5-5 Front plate of OP 010C Spare parts (1) 110 Order number Remarks Cap for the USB port 6FC5248-0AF05-0AA0 Set of 10 Key cover (for labeling) 6FC5248-0AF12-0AA0 Set with 90 ergo-gray items 20 red items 20 yellow items 20 green items 20 medium gray items Tension jacks 6FC5248-0AF06-0AA0 Set of 6 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Operator panel front: OP 010C 5.6 Replacement parts 5.6.2 Replacement Key covers The key covers of the vertical softkeys (short stroke keys) of the SINUMERIK 840D/810D ManualTurn product can be replaced. They are included in the delivery kit. Procedure 1. Lever the key cover of the short stroke key up and off. 2. Press the new key cover onto the frame of the short stroke key. Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 111 Operator panel front: OP 010C 5.6 Replacement parts 112 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Operator panel front: OP 012 6.1 6 Description The SINUMERIK OP 012 operator panel front and 12.1" TFT color display with a resolution of 800 x 600 pixels (SVGA) features a 59-key membrane keypad as well as 2 x (8 + 2) horizontal and 2 x 8 vertical softkeys. The 2 x 8 vertical softkeys can be used as direct keys. The optional SINUMERIK direct key module provides an additional connection of the 2 x 8 vertical softkeys as direct keys to the PROFIBUS DP, if no pushbutton panel or machine control panel with connection of the direct keys is available. Securing is done from the rear using special clamps that are included in the delivery kit. Validity The description below applies to the OP 012 operator panel front (order number 6FC5203-0AF02-0AA1) Features 19" mounting format, 7 HU (height units) Panel cutout (W x H): 450 x 290 mm Slight mounting depth 12.1" TFT flat screen (color) with SVGA resolution 800 x 600 pixels Membrane keyboard with alphabetic, numeric, cursor, and control keypad Soft keys/direct keys: - 2 x 8 horizontal rows of keys with softkey function - 2 x 8 vertical rows of keys with softkey and direct control key functions - Direct control keys via direct control key module (optional), PP031 MC or directly connectable to the I/Os Shift key for switchover to the second key level (not for switching over the letters, since they are uppercase only) Integrated mouse Status LEDs for power supply and overtemperature Front USB interface IP65 degree of protection Attachment: tension jacks at the rear Can be combined with PCU, TCU, or Videolink receiver Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 113 Operator panel front: OP 012 6.2 Operator controls and indicators 6.2 Operator controls and indicators 6.2.1 View Figure 6-1 114 Front view of operator panel front OP 012 (1) Status LED: POWER (2) Status LED: TEMP (illuminated LEDs indicate increased wear) (3) Alphabetic key group (4) Numeric key group (5) Softkeys and direct keys (6) Cursor key group (7) Control key group (8) Front USB interface (9) Mouse (10) Area switchover (11) Etc. key (12) Softkeys (13) Machine area (14) Recall Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Operator panel front: OP 012 6.2 Operator controls and indicators 6.2.2 Keyboard and display Keyboard Several keys and key pads are installed on the operator panel front: The alphabetic key group contains the letters A - Z and the space character for entering text. The numeric key group contains the digits 0 - 9, the - character and the decimal point for entering numeric characters and operators. The cursor key group is used to navigate on the screen. The control key group includes special functions. The mouse comprises the actuation field (corresponds to the function of a tracker ball) and two mouse keys for navigation. The area switchover shows the main menu. The etc. key allows for an expansion of the horizontal softkey bar in the same menu. The softkeys call up functions that are available on screen via a menu bar. The machine area key switches directly into the "Machine" operating area. The recall key jumps back to the superordinate menu. One window is closed. The key symbols used on the operator panel front appear below along with the corresponding function keys on the PC keyboard. Key Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Function corresponds to PC key function Key Function corresponds to PC key function Esc End F11 Backspace F12 Tab Space (only intended for internal keyboard changeover) Home Ctrl key Page up Alt key Page down Delete Cursor up Insert Cursor left Enter Cursor right F9 115 Operator panel front: OP 012 6.2 Operator controls and indicators Key Function corresponds to PC key function Key Cursor down 5 (in numeric key group) <Shift> F9 Function corresponds to PC key function F10 A, ..., Z <Shift> A, ..., Z <Shift> F10 Display Note Pixel error acc. to DIN EN ISO 13406-2 Class II. 6.2.3 Screen saver If a screen with high contrast is displayed unchanged for longer than 1 hour, the screensaver must be activated (screen switched dark) to protect the TFT display from "burn-in" of the last displayed screen. For more information see: /BEM/: HMI Embedded Operator's Guide /IAM/: IM2 Installation and Start-up HMI Embedded; IM4 Installation and Start-up HMI Advanced CAUTION You may do irreversible damage to your TFT display if the screen saver is not activated. 116 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Operator panel front: OP 012 6.3 Interfaces 6.3 Interfaces The operator panel front has the following interfaces: Front side USB 1.1 to connect an external keyboard or mouse (see Fig: "View of operator panel front" in section: "Control and display elements" --> "View") Note Note that the electromagnetic compatibility of commercially available peripheral devices operated via the USB port is usually rated for office use only. For industrial use, components with a higher degree of certification are recommended. Rear side Two ribbon cables for connecting the PCU (see figure below): - I/O USB cable K1 (ribbon cable): All signals that are used for the display interface and the connection of operator panel fronts (e.g. supply voltages) - Display cable K2 Direct control interface X11 (under cover plate); signals from the 16 "vertical softkey" direct control keys Interface X12 - reserved (under cover plate) Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 117 Operator panel front: OP 012 6.3 Interfaces Figure 6-2 Connections on rear side of housing Connections to the PCU (1) I/O USB cable K1 (2) PCU main board (3) Cable clamp for connecting the direct key module (4) Keyboard controller (5) Direct control key interface X11 (6) Interface X12 (reserved) (7) Connection X14 for backlight (8) Connection X1 for I/O USB cable K1 (9) Display cable K2 Pin assignment and assignment of keys More details in section: "Direct control key module." 118 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Operator panel front: OP 012 6.4 Mounting 6.4 Mounting 6.4.1 Preparation for mounting Table 6-1 Dimensions of the mounting hole (see diagram below) Used PCU type Width (mm) Height (mm) Depth + clearance (mm) measured from the mounting wall surface PCU 20 76 + 10 450 PCU 50 290 108.2 + 10 PCU 70 149.2 + 10 Thanks to the tension jacks on the OP 012, drill-holes or screw holes are not needed. This retaining method also affords a degree of protection IP65 (but only in conjunction with a circumferential seal and when the protective USB cap is fitted). 7HQVLRQMDFNV 6HWVFUHZV PLQWRPD[ 'LPHQVLRQVIRUWHQVLRQMDFNSUHVVXUHSRLQWV Figure 6-3 0RXQWLQJSDQHO 6HDOLQJDUHD Dimension sheet for installing the OP 012 operator panel front Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 119 Operator panel front: OP 012 6.4 Mounting 6.4.2 Assembling an OP 012 and a PCU For a combination involving an OP 012 and PCU or Videolink receiver and possibly a direct control key module (see section: "Direct control key module") it is advisable to assemble the units in an assembly panel prior to installation. Prerequisite The PCU must now be bolted to the mounting brackets prior to assembly (if this has not already been done) (see section: "PCU 50", section: "Mounting") :LGWK WRS &RYHUSODWHIRU &RQQHFWLRQV .H\ERDUGFRQWUROOHU &DEOH FODPS 'LVSOD\ FDEOH. ,286% FDEOH. 0RXQWLQJVORWVIRU3&8OXJV 6OLWIRUVRIWNH\ODEHOLQJVWULSV Figure 6-4 +HLJKW 'LVSOD\ VXSSRUWSODWH &DEOHVKRZQIROGHGWRJHWKHU &DVLQJVFUHZV Rear side of OP 012 Procedure 1. Place the OP 012 face down on a flat, soft (to avoid scratches) surface. - Installation of direct control key module (see Chapter: "Direct control key module"). - To install or replace the softkey labeling strips (see Section: "Softkey labels"). 2. Remove the interface cover of the PCU (only PCU 50.3) 3. Place the PCU with the lugs of the bolted-on mounting brackets into the mounting slots on the OP 012 as shown by the white arrows in diagram (A). To make it easier to insert the lugs, it can be helpful to reduce the 90 angle between the PCU and OP 012 by tilting the PCU downward as shown by the black arrow in the picture. 120 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Operator panel front: OP 012 6.4 Mounting 4. Insert the cable connectors K1 and K2 of the OP 012 into the plug connectors behind the opening in the PCU casing (see gray arrows in diagram (A)]. Make sure that the connectors lock in audibly and that the locks [see arrows in Fig: (B)] are closed. 5. Swivel the PCU into its limit position [see Fig.: (C)] and secure it with knurled screws, tightening torque of 1.8 Nm [see Fig.: (D)]. (A) Assembling PCU and OP 012 3&8 23 (1) I/O / USB cable K1 (2) Display cable K2 (B) Correct connection of IO/USB and display cables to the PCU 3&8 (1) I/O / USB cable K1 (2) Display cable K2 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 121 Operator panel front: OP 012 6.4 Mounting (C) Attaching the PCU to the OP 012 operator panel front (viewed from above) 0RXQWLQJEUDFNHW 23 122 R 3&8LQHQGSRVLWLRQ 3&8WLOWHGE\ 5HTXLUHGFOHDUDQFH IRUFRROLQJ 0RXQWLQJEUDFNHW 0RXQWLQJOXJV ZLWKZLWKRXW KLQJHGFDWFKHV 'LPHQVLRQVLQPP Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Operator panel front: OP 012 6.4 Mounting (D) OP 012 and PCU after assembly 3&8 23 (1) 6.4.3 Knurled screw Mounting on the mounting wall The clearance at the rear of the PCU must be at least 10 mm to ensure sufficient ventilation (see Figure: "Attaching the PCU to the OP 012 operator panel front", section "OP 012," section: "Assembling the OP 012 and PCU"). For more detailed information, please refer to the relevant PCU sections and section: "Heat dissipation". NOTICE Permitted mounting position: deviating by up to 5 from the vertical. This value can be further restricted by attached components (PCU, video link receiver, ...). Procedure 1. Insert the assembled components (operator panel front and PCU) from the front into the panel cutout (see Figure:. "Dimension sheet for installing the operator panel front," section: "Preparation for mounting"). 2. Secure the operator panel front in the panel cutout from the rear using the tension jacks by tightening the setscrews (torque 0.4 - 0.5 Nm). Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 123 Operator panel front: OP 012 6.4 Mounting 6.4.4 Softkey labeling User-specific functions can be assigned to the horizontal and vertical softkey bars. Printed labeling strips can be used to label the softkeys. Blank labels are already installed on delivery. To make the labels, DIN-A4 film is available (Order No., see Section: "Spare parts"). Note Use the "Arial" font to format text. This font is comparable to the "Univers S57" font, used by Siemens for the key labeling. Proceed as follows 1. Letter the mat side of the film using a laser printer. 2. Cut the printed labels along the preprinted lines. 3. Remove the PCU retaining screws and swing out the PCU away from the operator panel front. 4. Insert the strips into the slots provided on the rear side of the operator front panel. 5. Swing the PCU back to the operator panel and secure by tightening the screws. If the operator panel front and PCU are dismantled, omit steps 3 and 5. 124 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Operator panel front: OP 012 6.5 Technical specifications 6.5 Technical specifications Safety Safety class III; PELV acc. to EN 50178 Degree of protection per EN 60529 Front side IP65 Rear side IP 00 Approvals CE / cULus Electrical specifications Power supply (via I/O USB cable and display cable) Display Backlight inverter Voltage Current (typ./max. mA; approx.) 5 V +/- 5% 280 / 380 Logic / USB (with / without load) Power consumption 12 V +/- 10% 750 / 1000 Typical, approx. 16 W 5.2 V +/- 2% 350 / 1200 Maximum approx. 24 W Mechanical data Dimensions Width: 483 mm Height: 310 mm Depth: 30 mm Mounting depth: 20 mm incl. PCU 20: 76 mm *) incl. PCU 50: 108.2 mm *) incl. PCU 70: 149.2 mm *) Weight Approx. 5 kg Tightening torques, max. Tension jack screws: 0.5 Nm Mechanical ambient conditions (with PCU) M3 screws: 0.8 Nm M4 screws: 1.8 Nm Operation Transport (in transport packaging) Vibratory load 10 -58 Hz: 0.075 mm 58 - 200 Hz: 9.8 m/s2 3M4 per EN 60721-3-3 5 -9 Hz: 3.5 mm 9 - 200 Hz: 9.8 m/s2 2M2 per EN 60721-3-2 Shock stressing 50 m/s2, 30 ms, 18 shocks 3M2 per EN 60721-3-3 300 m/s2, 6 ms, 18 shocks 2M2 to EN 60721-3-2 Climatic ambient conditions Cooling By natural convection Condensation, spraying water and icing Supply air Applicable standards Climate class Temperature limits Temperature change Limits for relative humidity Permissible change in the relative air humidity Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Not permitted Without caustic gases, dusts and oils Operation Storage/shipping (in transport packaging) EN 60721-3-3 EN 60721-3-1 / -3-2 3K5 1K3 / 2K4 0 ... 45 C (at front) 0 ... 55 C (at rear) -20 ... 60C Max. 10 K/h Max. 18 K/h 5 ... 80% at 25C 5 ... 95% at 25C max. 1% /min 125 Operator panel front: OP 012 6.5 Technical specifications Display Size / resolution 12.1 " TFT / 800 x 600 pixels MTBF backlight typ. 50 000 h at 25 C (dependent on the temperature) *) Plus 10 mm clearance 126 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Operator panel front: OP 012 6.6 Replacement parts 6.6 Replacement parts 6.6.1 Overview The diagram shows the OP 012 operator panel front dismantled into its individual parts. The components provided with an order number are available as individual spare parts. Figure 6-5 (1) Individual parts for the OP 012 operator panel front Backlight with backlight inverter Spare parts Order number Remarks (2) Direct control key module (3) Display support (4) LCD unit (5) Keyboard controller (6) Cap for the USB port 6FC5248-0AF05-0AA0 (7) USB mouse 6FC5247-0AF01-0AA0 (8) Operator panel front 6FC5248-0AF02-0AA0 Without LCD unit, without mouse, without keyboard controller, without direct control key module Slide-in labels *) (DIN A4 films) 6FC5248-0AF08-0AA0 Set of 3 Tension jacks 6FC5248-0AF06-0AA0 Set of 6 Spare parts 6FC5247-0AF11-0AA0 Order number Remarks Set of 10 *) The dimensions for production of film slide-in labels for softkey labeling can be seen in the following diagram. Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 127 Operator panel front: OP 012 6.6 Replacement parts 3DUW 5 3DUW 3DUW 6OLGHLQODEHOV 3DUW &HQWHURIWKHNH\ Figure 6-6 Dimensions for DIN A4 film 6.6.2 Replacement CAUTION Parts must only be replaced by trained personnel (danger of damage to sensitive components due to static electricity)! USB cap / tension jack The replacement of the USB sealing cap and tension jacks will not be described since it is simple and self-explanatory. Film labels The procedure for replacement is described in Section: "Softkey labels". 128 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Operator panel front: OP 012 6.6 Replacement parts Operator panel front/mouse When replacing the operator panel front, the previous mouse, LCD unit and keyboard controller can be used again. They are therefore disassembled and re-assembled after the appropriate component has been replaced. This description is therefore valid for both the operator panel front and the mouse. Note We recommend that the keypad controller is re-used so that the control parameters that have been programmed-in are not lost. Procedure 1. Put the OP 012 face down on a flat, soft surface and loosen the 12 casing screws (see figure:. "OP 012 rear side," section: "Assembling an OP 012 and PCU"). 2. Remove the softkey labeling strips and the cover plate. 3. Remove connector X14 for the backlight and the IO-USB cable K1 from the keyboard controller (see following Fig.). 4. Lift off the display support and the display. In addition to the keyboard controller, the rear sides of the mouse and USB interface become visible. 5. After bending back the two lugs, withdraw the USB interface. 6. Disconnect the three membrane connectors of the operator panel front keyboard from sockets X7, X8 and X10 (Procedure: see Note). 7. Remove the fastening screws from the mouse and keyboard controller. 8. Lift USB interface, mouse and keyboard controller off the front plate. The interconnections may remain plugged. 9. Install the components into the new operator front panel in reverse order (procedure: see Note). Note Descriptions of how to disconnect and connect the membrane connector can be found in section: "Connection Conditions", section: "Handling membrane connectors." When tightening the screws, observe the torques (refer to the Section: "Technical data"). Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 129 Operator panel front: OP 012 6.6 Replacement parts Figure 6-7 (1) 130 Replacement of operator panel front OP 012 Mouse (2) USB port (3) Keyboard controller (4) Connection X1 for IO-USB cable K1 (5) Direct control key connection X11 (6) Membrane connector for connecting the keyboard of the operator panel front (7) Connection X12 (reserved) (8) Connection X14 for backlight (9) Connection X4 for mouse Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Operator panel front: OP 012T 7.1 7 Description The SINUMERIK OP 012T operator panel front for decentralized configuration enables physical separation from the SINUMERIK PCU. The PCU can be mounted in a control cabinet. With the SINUMERIK OP 012T operator panel front, up to four distributed operator panel fronts can be connected to a PCU. The distance between PCU and operator panel fronts is determined by the maximum distance of two access points (100 m). Signal transmission between operator panel front and PCU via Industrial Ethernet Mixed operation with one operator panel front directly at the PCU is possible. Operation has the same authorization rights as operation on an operator panel front connected directly to the PCU. The screen on the passive operator panel is blacked out. The SINUMERIK OP 012 operator panel front has a 12.1" TFT color display (with a resolution of 800 x 600 pixels [SVGA]) and a 65-key membrane keypad as well as 2 x (8 + 2) horizontal and 2 x 8 vertical softkeys. The 2 x 8 vertical softkeys can be used as direct control keys via the PROFIBUS DP. The OP 012T is connected to the PCU via Ethernet as a Thin Client in its own subnet (via DHCP server to PCU) (see manual: "Operator Components", Edition 04.04, Section: "Distributed configuration with TCU"). Securing is done from the rear using special clamps that are included in the delivery kit. Validity The description below applies to the OP 012T operator panel front (order number: 6FC5203-0AF06-1AA0) Prerequisite PCU 50 or PCU 70, 1.2 GHz with Windows XP PCU base software for WinXP 7.4 PCU base software for Thin Client Features Dimensions (W x H x D): 365 mm x 440 mm x 60 mm (mounting depth incl. cable connectors: 81 mm) Panel cutout (W x H): 327 mm x 402 mm 12.1" TFT flat screen (color) with SVGA resolution 800 x 600 pixels Membrane keyboard with alphabetic, numeric, cursor, and control keypad Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 131 Operator panel front: OP 012T 7.1 Description Softkeys / direct keys - 2 x (8+2) horizontal softkeys - 2 x 8 vertical softkeys / direct control keys - The 2 x 8 softkeys can be used as direct control keys via the PROFIBUS DP Shift key for switchover to the second key level (not for switching over the letters, since they are uppercase only) Status LEDs for power supply and overtemperature IP65 degree of protection Attachment: tension jacks at the rear 132 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Operator panel front: OP 012T 7.2 Operator controls and indicators 7.2 Operator controls and indicators 7.2.1 View Figure 7-1 View of operator panel front OP 012T (1) Status LED: POWER (2) Status LED: TEMP (illuminated LEDs indicate increased wear) (3) Etc. key (4) Area switchover (5) Numeric key group (6) Cursor key group (7) Control key group (8) Alphabetic key group (9) Machine area (10) Recall (11) Softkeys and direct keys (12) Softkeys Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 133 Operator panel front: OP 012T 7.2 Operator controls and indicators 7.2.2 Keyboard and display Keyboard Several keys and key pads are installed on the operator panel front: The alphabetic key group contains the letters A - Z and the space character for entering text. The numeric key group contains the digits 0 - 9, the - character and the decimal point for entering numeric characters and operators. The cursor key group is used to navigate on the screen. The control key group includes special functions. The mouse comprises the actuation field (corresponds to the function of a tracker ball) and two mouse keys for navigation. The area switchover shows the main menu. The etc. key allows for an expansion of the horizontal softkey bar in the same menu. The softkeys call up functions that are available on screen via a menu bar. The machine area key switches directly into the "Machine" operating area. The recall key jumps back to the superordinate menu. One window is closed. The key symbols used on the operator panel front appear below along with the corresponding function keys on the PC keyboard. Key 134 Function corresponds to PC key function Key Function corresponds to PC key function Esc End F11 Backspace F12 Tab Space (only intended for internal keyboard changeover) Home Ctrl key Page up Alt key Page down Delete Cursor up Insert Cursor left Enter Cursor right F9 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Operator panel front: OP 012T 7.2 Operator controls and indicators Key Function corresponds to PC key function Key Cursor down 5 (in numeric key group) <Shift> F9 Function corresponds to PC key function F10 A, ..., Z <Shift> A, ..., Z <Shift> F10 Display Note Pixel error acc. to DIN EN ISO 13406-2 Class II. 7.2.3 Screen saver If a screen with high contrast is displayed unchanged for longer than 1 hour, the screensaver must be activated (screen switched dark) to protect the TFT display from "burn-in" of the last displayed screen. For more information see: /BEM/: HMI Embedded Operator's Guide /IAM/: IM2 Installation and Start-up HMI Embedded; IM4 Installation and Start-up HMI Advanced CAUTION You may do irreversible damage to your TFT display if the screen saver is not activated. Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 135 Operator panel front: OP 012T 7.3 Interfaces 7.3 Interfaces The OP 012T operator panel front provides the following interfaces: 24V 0V PE Figure 7-2 View of TCU with interfaces Function Des. Input / output Type (1) USB port 2) X203 / X204 O 2x USB-A (2) Direct control key interface 4) X11 O 20-pin plug connector (3) Power supply DC 24 V X206 E 3-pin terminal block (4) CompactFlash interface X201 I/O 50-pin base (5) Ethernet port 2) X202 O 8-pin RJ45 socket 1) not 3) 1) enabled 2) for pin assignment, see section: "Connection Conditions", section: "Secondary electrical conditions" 3) for pin assignment, see Figure 4) under the cover plate of the keyboard controller, for pin assignment, see section: "Direct control key module", section: "Interfaces". 136 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Operator panel front: OP 012T 7.4 Mounting 7.4 Mounting 7.4.1 Preparation for mounting Table 7-1 Dimensions of the mounting hole (see diagram) Width (mm) Height (mm) Depth (mm) 327 402 60 118 (with direct control key module) Thanks to the tension jacks on the OP 012T, drill-holes or screw holes are not needed. This retaining method also affords a degree of protection IP65 (but only in conjunction with a circumferential seal). 'LPHQVLRQVLQPP 7HQVLRQMDFNV 7KUHDGHG VFUHZV ([WHUQDOFRQWRXURIRSHUDWRUIURQW ([WHUQDOFRQWRXURIJDVNHW PLQWRPD[ 0RXQWLQJSDQHO ([WHUQDOFRQWRXURIJDVNHW ([WHUQDOFRQWRXURIRSHUDWRUIURQW 6HDOLQJDUHD Figure 7-3 'LPHQVLRQVIRUWHQVLRQMDFNSUHVVXUHSRLQWV Dimension sheet for installing the OP 012T operator panel front Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 137 Operator panel front: OP 012T 7.4 Mounting 7.4.2 Mounting on the mounting wall The clearance at the rear must be at least 10 mm to ensure sufficient ventilation. Procedure 1. Insert the OP 012T (with direct control key module if required) in the panel cutout from the front. 2. Fix the operator panel front in the panel cutout from the rear using the six tension jacks by tightening the setscrews (torque 0.4 - 0.5 Nm). Dimensional drawings of OP 012T without and with direct control key module 'LPHQVLRQVLQPP Figure 7-4 138 Dimensional drawing of OP 012T without direct control key module Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Operator panel front: OP 012T 7.4 Mounting 'LUHFWFRQWURONH\VXEPRGXOH 'LPHQVLRQVLQPP Figure 7-5 Dimensional drawing of OP 012T with direct control key module already installed 7.4.3 Direct control key module connection Install the direct control key module as described in section: "Direct control key module". Connect it as shown in the diagram. Figure 7-6 Routing of connecting cable for the direct control key module Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 139 Operator panel front: OP 012T 7.5 Technical data 7.5 Technical data Safety Degree of protection to EN 60529 Front side IP65 Rear side IP 00 Electrical data Supply voltage 24 V DC (via TCU) Power consumption Maximum approx. 36 W Mechanical data Dimensions (mm) Width: 365 Height: 440 Depth: 60 Panel cutout (mm) Width: 327 Height: 402 Depth: 81 *) Weight Approx. 5.9 kg (without direct control key module and without tension jacks) Tightening torques, max. Tension jacks: 0.5 Nm Mechanical ambient conditions (with PCU) Operation Transport (in transport packaging) Vibration stressing 10 - 58 Hz: 0.075 mm 58 - 200 Hz: 9.8 m/s2 3M4 per EN 60721-3-3 5 - 9 Hz: 3.5 mm 9 - 200 Hz: 9.8 m/s2 2M2 per EN 60721-3-2 Shock stressing 50 m/s2, 30 ms, 18 shocks 3M2 per EN 60721-3-3 300 m/s2, 6 ms, 18 shocks 2M2 to EN 60721-3-2 Climatic environmental conditions Cooling By natural convection Condensation, spraying water and icing Air inlet Climate class Temperature limits Limit values for rel. humidity to DIN IEC 68-2-3, DIN IEC 68-2-30, DIN 68-2-56 Not permitted Without caustic gases, dusts and oils Operation Storage/shipping (in transport packaging) 3K5 1K3 / 2K4 0 ... 45 C (at front) 0 ... 55 C (at rear) -20 ... 60C 5 ... 80% at 25 C 5 ... 95% at 25 C Temperature change max. 10 K/h. Non-condensing Display Size / resolution 12.1 " TFT / 800 x 600 pixels (SVGA) *) due to cable connector and ventilation clearance 140 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Operator panel front: OP 012T 7.6 Spare parts 7.6 Spare parts The following components are available as spare parts for the OP 012T operator panel: Spare parts Tension jacks Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Order number 6FC5248-0AF14-0AA0 Remarks Set of 9 141 Operator panel front: OP 012T 7.7 Accessories 7.7 Accessories The following components are available as accessories for the OP 012T operator panel: Component Ethernet cable Ethernet switch 142 Order number Remarks 6VX1840-2AH10 Standard cable for universal use 6VX1840-3AH10 Trailing cable 6GK1102-6AA0 ELS TP 40 for linear network structures 6GK1102-7AA0 ELS TP 80 for star-shaped network structures Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Operator panel front: TP 012 8.1 8 Description Validity The description below applies to the TP 012 operator panel front (order number 6FC5203-0AF07-0AA0) Features Installation format 400 x 310mm, 7 HU (height units) Panel cutout (W x H): 368 x 290 mm Mounting depth in conjunction with PCU 50: 125 mm + 10 mm clearance, measured from surface of mounting panel Color display (Touch Screen) incl. Backlighting in 12.1"-TFT technology with a resolution of 800 x 600 pixels Status LEDs for power supply and overtemperature Front USB interface IP65 degree of protection Attachment: tension jacks at the rear Can be combined with the components PCU 50/70 under Windows XP - centralized (as described in this Section) - distributed (see Section: "Distributed Configuration") Note The Touch Panel TP 012 can be used in conjunction with customer-specific HMI software. Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 143 Operator panel front: TP 012 8.2 Operator controls and indicators 8.2 Operator controls and indicators 8.2.1 View Figure 8-1 144 Front view of the operator panel TP 012 (1) Status LED: POWER (2) Status LED: TEMP (illuminated LEDs indicate increased wear.) (3) Front USB interface for connecting an external keyboard or mouse Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Operator panel front: TP 012 8.2 Operator controls and indicators 8.2.2 Operation The panel is operated by touching the application-specific functions shown on the touch-sensitive display, e.g. by touching a displayed button. CAUTION Do not touch the display with pointed or hard objects. This may considerably reduce its service life. 8.2.3 Screen saver If a screen with high contrast is displayed unchanged for longer than 1 hour, the screensaver must be activated (screen switched dark) to protect the TFT display from "burn-in" of the last displayed screen. For more information see: /BEM/: HMI Embedded Operator's Guide /IAM/: IM2 Installation and Start-up HMI Embedded; IM4 Installation and Start-up HMI Advanced CAUTION You may do irreversible damage to your TFT display if the screen saver is not activated. Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 145 Operator panel front: TP 012 8.3 Interfaces 8.3 Interfaces This operator panel front has the following interfaces: Front side USB 1.1 to connect an external keyboard or mouse (see Fig: "Front view of operator panel front" in section: "Control and display elements" --> "View") Note Note that the electromagnetic compatibility of commercially available peripheral devices operated via the USB port is usually rated for office use only. For industrial use, components with a higher degree of certification are recommended. Rear side Two ribbon cables for connecting the PCU (see figure below): - I/O-USB cable K1 (ribbon cable): All signals that are used for the display interface and the connection of operator panel fronts (e.g. supply voltages) - Display cable K2 Figure 8-2 Connections on rear side of housing Connections to the PCU (1) Display cable K2 (2) Back of operator panel (3) I/O USB cable K1 Pin assignment More details in section: "Connection Conditions," section: "Secondary electrical conditions." 146 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Operator panel front: TP 012 8.4 Mounting 8.4 Mounting 8.4.1 Preparation for mounting Table 8-1 Dimensions of the mounting hole (see diagram below) Used PCU type Width (mm) Height (mm) 368 290 PCU 50 PCU 70 Depth + clearance (mm) measured from the mounting wall surface 124.2 + 10 165.2 + 10 Thanks to the tension jacks on the TP 012, drill holes or screw holes are not needed. This retaining method also affords a degree of protection IP65 (but only in conjunction with a circumferential seal and when the protective USB cap is fitted). PPWRPP 6HDODUHD 6 / 3UHVVXUHSRLQWV IRUWHQVLRQMDFNV 6 6 / / 6 6 $ $ 'LPHQVLRQVLQPP Figure 8-3 5] / 7HQVLRQMDFNVZLWKVHWVFUHZV 6 $ $ ,QWKHVHDOLQJDUHD Dimension sheet for installing the TP 012 operator panel front Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 147 Operator panel front: TP 012 8.4 Mounting 8.4.2 Assembling the TP 012 and PCU With a centralized configuration, the operator panel front (TP 012) and the processing unit (PCU) are connected to each other using the piggyback method. It is advisable to connect the units in an assembly panel prior to installation. :LGWK WRS 7HVWODEHO +HLJKW 0RXQWLQJVORWV IRU3&8WDEV &DVLQJVFUHZV 'LVSOD\ FDEOH. 7\SHSODWH ,286% FDEOH. Figure 8-4 TP 012 rear side Procedure To do this, proceed as described in section: "OP 012," section: "Assembling OP 012 and PCU 50". 8.4.3 Mounting on the mounting wall The clearance at the rear of the PCU must be at least 10 mm to ensure sufficient ventilation (see following Figure). For more details, see Section: "PCU 50" and in Section: "Heat dissipation." NOTICE Permitted mounting position: deviating by up to 5 from the vertical. This value can be further restricted by insalled components (PCU, video link receiver, ...). 148 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Operator panel front: TP 012 8.4 Mounting Procedure 1. Insert the assembled components (operator panel front and PCU) from the front into the panel cutout (see Figure:. "Dimension sheet for installing the operator panel front", section: "Preparation for mounting"). 2. Secure the operator panel front in the panel cutout from the rear using the tension jacks by tightening the setscrews (torque 0.4 - 0.5 Nm). 0RXQWLQJEUDFNHW 5HTXLUHGFOHDUDQFH IRUYHQWLODWLRQ 3&8URWDWHGR /XJV 3&8LQHQGSRVLWLRQ 8.4.4 73 Figure 8-5 0RXQWLQJEUDFNHW ERWWRP0RXQWLQJEUDFNHWZLWKKLQJHGFDWFKHV Mounting the PCU 50 to the TP 012 operator panel front (as seen from above) Calibration of the touch screen Whenever a new operator panel front is connected, a screen calibration must be performed. Procedure For a description of calibration, refer to Chapter: "PCU 50", section: "Calibration of the Touch Screen". Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 149 Operator panel front: TP 012 8.5 Technical specifications 8.5 Technical specifications Security Safety class III; PELV acc. to EN 50178 Degree of protection per EN 60529 Front side IP65 Rear side IP 00 Approvals CE / cULus Electrical specifications Power supply (via I/O USB cable and display cable) Display Backlight inverter Voltage Current (typ./max. mA; approx.) 5 V +/- 5% 280 / 380 Logic / USB (with / without load) Power consumption 12 V +/- 10% 750 / 1000 Typical, approx. 15 W 5.2 V +/- 2% 350 / 1000 Maximum approx. 20 W Mechanical data Dimensions Width: 400 mm Height: 310 mm Depth: 51 mm Mounting depth: 26 mm incl. PCU 50: 124.2 mm *) incl. PCU 70: 165.2 mm *) Weight Approx. 5.5 kg Tightening torques, max. Tension jack screws: 0.5 Nm Mechanical ambient conditions (with PCU) M3 screws: 0.8 Nm M4 screws: 1.8 Nm Operation Transport Vibratory load 10 -58 Hz: 0.075 mm 58 - 200 Hz: 9.8 m/s2 3M4 per EN 60721-3-3 5 -9 Hz: 3.5 mm 9 - 200 Hz: 9.8 m/s2 2M2 per EN 60721-3-2 Shock stressing 50 m/s2, 30 ms, 18 shocks 3M2 per EN 60721-3-3 300 m/s2, 6 ms, 18 shocks 2M2 to EN 60721-3-2 (in transport packaging) Climatic ambient conditions Cooling By natural convection Condensation, spraying water and icing Supply air Applicable standards Climate class Temperature limits Temperature change Limits for relative humidity Permissible change in the relative air humidity 150 Not permitted Without caustic gases, dusts and oils Operation Storage/shipping (in transport packaging) EN 60721-3-3 EN 60721-3-1 / -3-2 3K5 1K3 / 2K4 0 ... 45 C (at front) 0 ... 55 C (at rear) -20 ... 60C Max. 10 K/h Max. 18 K/h 5 ... 80% 5 ... 95% max. 1% /min Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Operator panel front: TP 012 8.5 Technical specifications Display Size / resolution 12.1 " TFT / 800 x 600 pixels MTBF backlight typ. 50 000 h at 25 C (dependent on the temperature) *) Plus 10 mm clearance Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 151 Operator panel front: TP 012 8.6 Replacement parts 8.6 Replacement parts 8.6.1 Overview The figure shows the Touch Panel TP 012 broken down into its individual parts. The components provided with an order number are available as individual spare parts. Figure 8-6 Individual components of the TP 012 Touch Panel (1) Touch Screen (2) Display (3) Casing (4) Keyboard controller (5) Backlight inverter for backlight (6) Display support Spare parts (7) (8) 152 Order No.: Note Operator panel front with Touch Screen 6FC5248-0AF16-0AA0 without LCD unit Cap for the USB port 6FC5248-0AF05-0AA0 Set of 10 Tension jacks 6FC5248-0AF06-0AA0 Set of 6 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Operator panel front: TP 012 8.6 Replacement parts Note A sealing cap for the USB connection is installed at the factory. 8.6.2 Replacement CAUTION Parts must only be replaced by trained personnel (danger of damage to sensitive components due to static electricity)! USB cap / tension jack The replacement of the USB sealing cap and tension jacks will not be described since it is simple and self-explanatory. Operator panel front When the operator panel front is replaced, the display, keyboard controller, touch controller, and USB port can continue to be used. They are therefore disassembled and re-assembled after the front panel has been replaced. Note We recommend that the keypad controller be re-used so that the control parameters that have been programmed-in are not lost. Procedure 1. Put the TP 012 with the front side up on a flat, soft surface and loosen the 12 casing screws (see figure: "TP 012 rear side", section: "Assembling a TP 012 and PCU"). 2. Unplug the following connectors (see Fig. below): - from the keypad controller: Backlighting (base X14), IO USB cable K1, membrane connector (see note below) - the plug connection from the touch controller to the Touch Screen 3. Remove the screws from the display holder. 4. Lift off the display support with the display. 5. After bending back the two lugs, withdraw the USB interface 6. Install the components into the new operator panel front in reverse order. Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 153 Operator panel front: TP 012 8.6 Replacement parts Note Descriptions of how to disconnect and connect the membrane connector can be found in section: "Connection Conditions", section: "Handling membrane connectors". When tightening the screws, observe the torques (refer to the Section: "Technical specifications"). Figure 8-7 154 Replacing the TP012 operator panel front (1) USB module (2) Touch controller (3) Socket X14 backlighting (4) Display support (5) I/O USB cable K1 (6) Membrane connector (7) Keyboard controller Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Operator panel front: OP 015 9.1 9 Description The SINUMERIK OP 015 operator panel front and 15" TFT color display with a resolution of 1024 x 768 pixels (XGA) features 8 +4 horizontal and 8 vertical membrane softkeys. The KB 483C full CNC keyboard can be used as an input keyboard. Securing is done from the rear using special clamps that are included in the delivery kit. Validity The description below applies to the OP 015 operator panel front (order number 6FC5203-0AF03-0AA0) Features 19" mounting format, 7 HU (height units) Panel cutout (W x H): 450 x 290 mm Slight mounting depth 15" TFT flat screen (color) with resolution 1024 x 768 pixels Membrane keyboard: - 8 + 4 horizontal softkeys - 8 vertical softkeys Status LEDs for power supply and overtemperature Front USB interface Degree of protection: IP 65 Attachment: tension jacks at the rear Can be combined with PCU, TCU, or Videolink receiver Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 155 Operator panel front: OP 015 9.2 Operator controls and indicators 9.2 Operator controls and indicators 9.2.1 View Figure 9-1 156 View of operator panel front OP 015 (1) Status LED: POWER (2) Status LED: TEMP (illuminated LEDs indicate increased wear) (3) Softkeys (4) Area switchover (5) Etc. key (6) Softkeys (7) Recall (8) Machine area (9) Front USB interface Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Operator panel front: OP 015 9.2 Operator controls and indicators 9.2.2 Keyboard and display Keyboard Several keys are arranged on the operator panel front: The eight vertical and horizontal softkeys call up functions that are available on screen via a menu bar. The etc. key allows for an expansion of the horizontal softkey bar in the same menu. The area switchover shows the main menu. The machine area key switches directly into the "Machine" operating area. The recall key jumps back to the superordinate menu. One window is closed. The key symbols used on the operator panel front appear below along with the corresponding function keys on the PC keyboard. Key Function corresponds to PC key function Key Function corresponds to PC key function <Shift> F9 F9 <Shift> F10 F10 Display Note Pixel error acc. to DIN EN ISO 13406-2 Class II. 9.2.3 Screen saver If a screen with high contrast is displayed unchanged for longer than 1 hour, the screensaver must be activated (screen switched dark) to protect the TFT display from "burn-in" of the last displayed screen. For more information see: /BEM/: HMI Embedded Operator's Guide /IAM/: IM2 Installation and Start-up HMI Embedded; IM4 Installation and Start-up HMI Advanced CAUTION You may do irreversible damage to your TFT display if the screen saver is not activated. Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 157 Operator panel front: OP 015 9.3 Interfaces 9.3 Interfaces This operator panel front has the following interfaces: Front side USB 1.1 to connect an external keyboard or mouse (see Fig: "Front view of operator panel front" in section: "Control and display elements" --> "View") Note Note that the electromagnetic compatibility of commercially available peripheral devices operated via the USB port is usually rated for office use only. For industrial use, components with a higher degree of certification are recommended. Rear side Two ribbon cables for connecting the PCU (see figure below): - I/O-USB cable K1 (ribbon cable): All signals that are used for the display interface and the connection of operator panel fronts (e.g. supply voltages) - Display cable K2 Figure 9-2 Connections on rear side of housing Connections to the PCU (1) Display cable K2 (2) Back of operator panel (3) I/O USB cable K1 Pin assignment More details in section: "Connection Conditions," section: "Secondary electrical conditions." 158 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Operator panel front: OP 015 9.4 Mounting 9.4 Mounting 9.4.1 Preparation for mounting Table 9-1 Dimensions of the mounting hole (see diagram below) Used PCU type Width (mm) Height (mm) Depth + clearance (mm) PCU 20 PCU 50 98 + 10 450 290 130.2 + 10 PCU 70 171.2 + 10 Thanks to the tension jacks on the OP 015, drill-holes or screw holes are not needed. This retaining method also affords a degree of protection IP65 (but only in conjunction with a circumferential seal and when the protective USB cap is fitted). PLQPD[ 6HDODUHD / s s / s s 3UHVVXUHSRLQWV IRUWHQVLRQMDFNV / / / $ $ Figure 9-3 5] / 7HQVLRQMDFNVZLWKVHWVFUHZV / s $ s s $ s ,QWKHVHDOLQJDUHD Dimension sheet for installing the OP 015 operator panel front Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 159 Operator panel front: OP 015 9.4 Mounting 9.4.2 Assembling an OP 015 and a PCU When combining an OP 015 and PCU, it is advisable to assemble them prior to installation in an assembly panel. WRS &DVLQJ FRYHUSODWH &RYHUSODWHIRU &RQQHFWLRQV .H\ERDUGFRQWUROOHU 'LVSOD\ FDEOH. ,286% FDEOH. 0RXQWLQJVORWVIRU3&8OXJV &DVLQJVFUHZV0 &DVLQJVFUHZV0 Figure 9-4 Rear side of operator panel front with position of interfaces and mounting slots Procedure To do this, proceed as described in section: "OP 012," section: "Assembling OP 012 and PCU." 9.4.3 Mounting on the mounting wall The clearance at the rear of the PCU must be at least 10 mm to ensure sufficient ventilation (see following Figure). For more detailed information, please refer to the relevant PCU sections and section: "Heat dissipation." NOTICE Permitted mounting position: deviating by up to 5 from the vertical. This value can be further restricted by installed components (PCU, video link receiver, ...). 160 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Operator panel front: OP 015 9.4 Mounting Procedure 1. Insert the assembled components (operator panel front and PCU) from the front into the panel cutout (see Figure:. "Dimension sheet for installing the operator panel front", section: "Preparation for mounting"). + s s % s 2. Secure the operator panel front in the panel cutout from the rear using the six tension jacks by tightening the setscrews (torque 0.4 - 0.5 Nm). . 3&8LQHQGSRVLWLRQ 7 s s 7 R $GGLWLRQDOFOHDUDQFHIRUFRQQHFWLRQFDEOHV IRU'LRQO\ 3&8WLOWHGRII &OHDUDQFHIRUFDEOHVDQGYHQWLODWLRQ s / s $ s 2 2SHUDWRUSDQHOIURQW / + 7 7 $ % 2 . $OOGLPHQVLRQVZLWKRXWWKHVFUHZVSURWUXGLQJ Figure 9-5 Attaching the PCU to the OP015 operator panel front Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 161 Operator panel front: OP 015 9.5 Technical specifications 9.5 Technical specifications Safety Safety class III; PELV acc. to EN 50178 Degree of protection per EN 60529 Front side IP65 Rear side IP 00 Approvals CE / cULus Electrical specifications Power supply (via I/O USB cable and display cable) Display Backlight inverter Voltage Current (typ./max. mA; approx.) 5 V +/- 5% 420 / 600 Logic / USB (with / without load) Power consumption 12 V +/- 10% 900 / 1050 Typical, approx. 15 W 5.2 V +/- 2% 350 / 1000 Maximum approx. 24 W Mechanical data Dimensions Width: 483 mm Height: 310 mm Depth: 52 mm Mounting depth: 42 mm incl. PCU 20: 98 mm *) incl. PCU 50: 130.2 mm *) incl. PCU 70: 171.2 mm *) Weight Approx. 7 kg Tightening torques, max. Tension jack screws: 0.5 Nm Mechanical ambient conditions (with PCU) M3 screws: 0.8 Nm M4 screws: 1.8 Nm Operation Transport (in transport packaging) Vibratory load 10 -58 Hz: 0.075 mm 58 - 200 Hz: 9.8 m/s2 3M4 per EN 60721-3-3 5 -9 Hz: 3.5 mm 9 - 200 Hz: 9.8 m/s2 2M2 per EN 60721-3-2 Shock stressing 50 m/s2, 30 ms, 18 shocks 3M2 per EN 60721-3-3 300 m/s2, 6 ms, 18 shocks 2M2 to EN 60721-3-2 Climatic ambient conditions Cooling By natural convection Condensation, spraying water and icing Supply air Applicable standards Climate class Temperature limits Temperature change Limits for relative humidity Permissible change in the relative air humidity 162 Not permitted Without caustic gases, dusts and oils Operation Storage/shipping (in transport packaging) EN 60721-3-3 EN 60721-3-1 / -3-2 3K5 1K3 / 2K4 0 ... 45 C (at front) 0 ... 55 C (at rear) -20 ... 60C Max. 10 K/h Max. 18 K/h 5 ... 80% at 25C 5 ... 95% at 25C max. 0.1% /min Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Operator panel front: OP 015 9.5 Technical specifications Display Size / resolution 15 " TFT / 1024 x 768 pixels MTBF backlight typ. 40,000 h at 25 C (dependent on the temperature) *) Plus 10 mm clearance Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 163 Operator panel front: OP 015 9.6 Replacement parts 9.6 Replacement parts 9.6.1 Overview The diagram shows the OP 015 operator panel front dismantled into its individual parts. The components provided with an order number are available as individual spare parts. Figure 9-6 Individual parts for the OP 015 operator panel front Spare parts Operator panel front (2) Backlight with backlight inverter (3) Display support with keyboard controller (rear side) (4) LCD unit Spare parts (5) 164 Order number (1) 6FC5248-0AF03-0AA0 Remarks Without LCD unit, USB port and keyboard controller Order number Remarks Cap for the USB port 6FC5248-0AF05-0AA0 Set of 10 Tension jacks 6FC5248-0AF05-0AA0 Set of 6 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Operator panel front: OP 015 9.6 Replacement parts 9.6.2 Replacement CAUTION Parts must only be replaced by trained personnel (danger of damage to sensitive components due to static electricity)! USB cap / tension jack The replacement of the USB sealing cap and tension jacks will not be described since it is simple and self-explanatory. Operator panel front When changing the operator panel front, the existing USB interface and the display support (with display, backlight inverter and keyboard controller) can be reused. They are therefore disassembled and re-assembled after the appropriate component has been replaced. Note We recommend that the keypad controller is re-used so that the control parameters that have been programmed-in are not lost. Procedure Figure 9-7 Keyboard controller (1) I/O USB cable K1 (2) Connection X11 (reserved) (3) Membrane lines from the operator panel front keyboard Connections for the operator panel front keyboard (4) X7 (5) X8 (6) X10 (7) Connection X12 (reserved) (8) Display cable K2 (9) USB membrane line (10) Connection X14 for display and backlight (11) Connection X4 (reserved) Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 165 Operator panel front: OP 015 9.6 Replacement parts 1. Put the OP 015 and the replacement operator panel front face down on a flat, soft surface. 2. Loosen the casing screws (see Figure: "Rear side of operator panel front with position of interfaces and mounting slots", section: "Assembling OP 015 and PCU 50") and remove the casing cover plate. The display support with the keyboard controller (Fig. above) will be visible underneath and, in a cutout of the mounting plate, the rear side of the USB interface (Fig. below). 3. Disconnect the membrane connectors of the operator panel front keyboard from sockets X7, X8 and X10 (see note below for procedure). 4. Disconnect the membrane connection of the USB connection cable (Fig. below; see note below for procedure). 5. Remove the screws of the display support and lift it off. 6. Pull the USB interface off its seat and insert it into the replacement operator panel front. 7. Place the display support on the replacement operator panel front. 8. Assemble the operator panel front in reverse order. Note Descriptions of how to disconnect and connect the membrane connector can be found in section: "Connection Conditions," section: "Handling membrane connectors." When tightening the screws, observe the torques (refer to the Section: "Technical data"). Figure 9-8 166 USB interface viewed from the operator panel rear side (1) Display support (2) USB membrane line (see Fig above) (3) USB port (4) Fastening screw M4 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Operator panel front: OP 015A 10.1 10 Description The SINUMERIK OP 015A operator panel front and 15" TFT color display with a resolution of 1024 x 768 pixels (XGA) features a 62-key membrane keyboard with 2 x (8 + 2) horizontal and 2 x 8 vertical softkeys and an integral mouse. The 2 x 8 vertical softkeys can be used as direct keys. The operator panel front is secured from the rear using special clamps supplied with the panel. Validity The description below applies to the OP 015A operator panel front (order number 6FC5203-0AF05-0AB0) Features 19" mounting format, 8 HU (height units) Panel cutout (W x H): 450 x 335 mm Slight mounting depth 15" TFT flat screen (color) with resolution 1024 x 768 pixels Membrane keyboard with alphabetic, numeric, cursor, and control keypad Soft keys/direct keys: - 2 x (8 + 2) horizontal rows of keys with softkey function - 2 x 8 vertical rows of keys with softkey and direct control key functions - Direct control keys via direct control key module (optional), PP031 MC or directly connectable to the I/Os Shift key for switchover to the second key level (not for switching over the letters, since they are uppercase only) Integrated mouse Status LEDs for power supply and overtemperature USB front interface (USB 1.1) Degree of protection IP65 (front side) Attachment: tension jacks at the rear Can be combined with PCU, TCU, or Videolink receiver Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 167 Operator panel front: OP 015A 10.2 Operator controls and indicators 10.2 Operator controls and indicators 10.2.1 View Figure 10-1 168 Front view of the OP 015A operator panel front (1) Status LED: POWER (2) Status LED: TEMP (illuminated LEDs indicate increased wear) (3) Softkeys and direct keys (4) Alphabetic key group (5) Numeric key group (6) Cursor key group (7) Control key group (8) Mouse (9) Etc. key (10) Area switchover (11) Softkeys (12) Machine area (13) Recall (14) Front USB interface Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Operator panel front: OP 015A 10.2 Operator controls and indicators 10.2.2 Keyboard and display Keyboard Several keys and key pads are installed on the operator panel front: The alphabetic key group contains the letters A - Z and the space character for entering text. The numeric key group contains the digits 0 - 9, the "-", "+", "=" characters, the slash "/", and the decimal point for entering numeric characters and operators. The cursor key group is used to navigate on the screen. The control key group includes special functions. The mouse comprises the actuation field (corresponds to the function of a tracker ball) and two mouse keys for navigation. The area switchover shows the area menu. The etc. key allows for an expansion of the horizontal softkey bar in the same menu. The softkeys call up functions that are available on screen via a menu bar. The machine area key switches directly into the "Machine" operating area. The recall key jumps back to the superordinate menu. One window is closed. The key symbols used on the operator panel front appear below along with the corresponding function keys on the PC keyboard. Key Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Function corresponds to PC key function Key Function corresponds to PC key function Esc End F11 Backspace F12 Tab Space (only intended for internal keyboard changeover) Home Ctrl key Page up Alt key Page down Delete Cursor up Insert Cursor left Enter Cursor right F9 169 Operator panel front: OP 015A 10.2 Operator controls and indicators Key Function corresponds to PC key function Key Cursor down 5 (in numeric key group) <Shift> F9 Function corresponds to PC key function F10 A, ..., Z <Shift> A, ..., Z <Shift> F10 You will find information about softkeys in \BAD\ Operator's Guide HMI Advanced \BEM\ Operator's Guide HMI Embedded Display Note Pixel error acc. to DIN EN ISO 13406-2 Class II. 10.2.3 Screen saver If a screen with high contrast is displayed unchanged for longer than 1 hour, the screensaver must be activated (screen switched dark) to protect the TFT display from "burn-in" of the last displayed screen. For more information see: /BEM/: HMI Embedded Operator's Guide /IAM/: IM2 Installation and Start-up HMI Embedded; IM4 Installation and Start-up HMI Advanced CAUTION You may do irreversible damage to your TFT display if the screen saver is not activated. 170 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Operator panel front: OP 015A 10.3 Interfaces 10.3 Interfaces The OP 015 operator panel front has the following interfaces: Front USB 1.1 to connect an external keyboard or mouse (see figure in section: "Control and display elements" --> "View") Note Note that the electromagnetic compatibility of commercially available peripheral devices operated via the USB port is usually rated for office use only. For industrial use, components with a higher degree of certification are recommended. Rear side Two cables for connecting the PCU (see figure below): - I/O USB cable K1 (ribbon cable): All signals that are used for the display interface and the connection of operator panel fronts (e.g. supply voltages) - Display cable K2 Under the cover interface cover: Direct control key interface X11: Signals from the 16 "vertical softkey" direct control keys Interface X12 (reserved) Figure 10-2 OP015A - Connections on rear side of housing: Connections to the PCU (1) Direct control key interface X11 (2) Interface X12 (reserved) (3) Interface cover (4) Display cable K2 (5) I/O USB cable K1 Pin assignment and assignment of keys Information on this can be found in chapter: "Direct control key module". Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 171 Operator panel front: OP 015A 10.4 Mounting 10.4 Mounting 10.4.1 Preparation for mounting Table 10-1 Dimensions of the mounting hole (see figure) Used PCU type PCU 50 PCU 70 Width (mm) Height (mm) 450 335 Depth + clearance (mm) measured from the mounting wall surface 127 + 10 167 + 10 Thanks to the tension jacks on the OP 015A, drill-holes or screw holes are not needed. This retaining method also affords a degree of protection IP65 (but only in conjunction with a circumferential seal and when the protective USB cap is fitted). PLQPD[ 6HDO DUHD 5] 7HQVLRQMDFNVZLWKVHWVFUHZV 3UHVVXUHSRLQWVIRU WHQVLRQMDFNV 0RXQWLQJZDOO LQVHDODUHD Figure 10-3 172 Dimension sheet for installing the OP 015A operator panel front Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Operator panel front: OP 015A 10.4 Mounting 10.4.2 Assembling an OP 015A and a PCU Figure 10-4 OP 015A rear side (1) Casing screws (1x concealed under cable K1) (2) Mounting slots for PCU lugs (3) Slit for inserting softkey labeling strips (4) Display cable (K2) (5) I/O / USB cable (K1) (6) Cover plate for keyboard controller connections (7) Retaining screw for the cover plate If you want to combine the OP 015A with a PCU and possibly a direct control key module (see section: 'Direct control key module"), assemble the components before installing them on the mounting wall. Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 173 Operator panel front: OP 015A 10.4 Mounting Procedure 1. Place the front end of the OP 015A on a soft, horizontal support (4) to avoid damaging the surface of the operator panel front. 2. Remove the interface cover (2) of the PCU. 3. Position the PCU so that the mounting lugs (3) engage with the OP 015A. (1) PCU (2) Interface cover of the PCU (cover plate removed) (3) Mounting lugs (4) Mounting support 4. Connect the cable connectors K1 and K2 to the interfaces of the PCU. 5. Make sure that you hear the connectors lock in and that the locks are closed (see marked rings) (1) I/O USB cable K1 (2) Display cable K2 6. Swing the PCU in the direction of the OP 015A, making sure that the cables are folded correctly. 174 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Operator panel front: OP 015A 10.4 Mounting 10.4.3 7. Secure the PCU with two knurled-head screws (1) at each end of the two mounting angles (torque: 1.8 Nm). To tighten the screws, use a torque screwdriver (e. g. FACOM A.302A, tightening torque, max.: 1.8 Nm). Mounting on the mounting wall The clearance at the rear of the PCU must be at least 10 mm to ensure sufficient ventilation. For more detailed information, please refer to the relevant PCU sections and section: "Heat dissipation." NOTICE Permitted mounting position: deviating by up to 5 from the vertical. This value can be further restricted by insalled components (PCU, video link receiver, ...). 1. Insert the assembled components (operator panel front and PCU) from the front into the panel cutout (see figure:. "Dimension sheet for installing the operator panel front", section: "Preparation for mounting"). 2. Secure the operator panel front in the panel cutout from the rear using the twelve tension jacks by tightening the setscrews (torque 0.5 Nm). 0RXQWLQJEUDFNHW /XJV 3&8VZLYHOHGE\r Procedure 3&8LQHQGSRVLWLRQ 0RXQWLQJEUDFNHW 23$ 73$ ERWWRP0RXQWLQJEUDFNHWZLWKKLQJHGFDWFKHV Figure 10-5 Attaching the PCU to the OP 015A operator panel front (viewed from above) Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 175 Operator panel front: OP 015A 10.4 Mounting 10.4.4 Softkey labeling User-specific functions can be assigned to the two vertical softkey bars. Printed labeling strips can be used to label the softkeys. Blank labels are already factory-installed. DIN A4 films are available for preparing the vertical strips. You will find the order number in section: "Spare parts" "Overview". Note Use the "Arial" font to format text. This font is comparable to the "Univers S57" font, used by Siemens for the key labeling. Proceed as follows 1. Label the mat side of the film with a laser printer or another printer that allows "Film" to be set as a printable medium. 2. Cut the printed labels along the preprinted lines. 3. Insert the labeling strips into the slits provided from the rear of the operator panel front (refer to figure: "OP 015A Housing open" in section: "Spare parts" "Replacement". Note In order to facilitate insertion of the "Part1" strip when the PCU is mounted, it is recommended that you - unscrew the 4 retaining screws of the PCU and - swing the PCU up. Once you have inserted the strip, swing the PCU back to the operator panel and secure by tightening the screws. 176 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Operator panel front: OP 015A 10.5 Technical specifications 10.5 Technical specifications Safety Safety class III; PELV acc. to EN 50178 Degree of protection per EN 60529 Front: IP 65 Rear side: IP00 Approvals CE / cULus Electrical data Power supply (via I/O USB cable and display cable) Display Backlight inverter Logic / USB Voltage Current (typ./max. mA; approx.) 4.9 V - 5.25 V 420 / 700 12 V +/- 5% 900 / 1100 5.0 V - 5.2 V 350 / 1050 Power consumption Typical, approx. 15 W Maximum approx. 25 W Mechanical data Dimensions Width: 483 mm Height: 355 mm Depth: 53 mm Mounting depth without PCU: 42 mm Mounting depth with PCU 50: 127 mm *) Mounting depth with PCU 70: 167 mm *) Mounting depth with TCU: 78 mm *) Weight Max. tightening torques: Approx. 8.4 kg Tension jack screws: 0.5 Nm Mechanical ambient conditions (with PCU) M3 screws: 0.8 Nm M4 screws: 1.8 Nm Operation Transport (in transport packaging) Vibratory load 10 - 58 Hz: 0.074 mm 58 - 200 Hz: 1 g 5 - 9 Hz: 3.1 mm 9 - 200 Hz: 1 g Shock load 5 g, 30 ms, 18 shocks 30 g, 6 ms, 18 shocks Climatic environmental conditions Cooling By natural convection Moisture condensation, water spray and the formation of ice Air inlet Applicable standards Climate class Temperature limits Temperature change Limits for relative humidity Permissible change in the relative air humidity Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Not permissible without aggressive gases, dusts and oils Operation Storage/shipping (in transport packaging) EN 60721-3-3 EN 60721-3-1 / -3-2 3K5 1K3 / 2K4 0 ... 45 C (at front) 0 ... 55 C (at rear) -20 ... 60 C (cyclic) max. 10 K/h max. 18 K/h 5 ... 65% (annual mean) and max. 85% over max. 2 months/year 5 ... 95% at 25C Max. 6%/h 177 Operator panel front: OP 015A 10.5 Technical specifications Display Size / resolution 15 " TFT / 1024 x 768 pixels MTBF backlight typ. 50 000 h at 25 C (dependent on the temperature) *) 178 measured from the (exterior) mounting wall surface; plus 10 mm clearance for cable and ventilation Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Operator panel front: OP 015A 10.6 Spare parts 10.6 Spare parts 10.6.1 Overview The diagram shows the OP 015A operator panel front dismantled into its individual parts. The components provided with an order number are available as individual spare parts. Figure 10-6 Individual parts for the OP 015A operator panel front Spare parts Order number Remarks 6FC5248-0AF17-0AB0 Without LCD unit, mouse, USB port and keyboard controller (1) Operator panel front (2) Keyboard controller (3) Background lighting with backlight inverter Spare parts Order number Direct control key module 6FC5247-0AF11-0AA0 Mounting kit for direct key module 6FC5247-0AF30-0AA0 (4) LCD unit (5) Display support Spare parts (6) USB mouse (7) Cap for the USB port Remarks Order number Remarks 6FC5247-0AF01-0AA0 6FC5248-0AF05-0AA0 Set of 10 Tension jacks 6FC5248-0AF06-0AA0 Set of 9 Mounting bracket 6FC5248-0AF20_2AA0 Slide-in labels *) (DIN A4 films) 6FC5248-0AF24-0AA0 Set of 3 *) The dimensions for production of film slide-in labels for softkey labeling can be seen in the following diagram. Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 179 Operator panel front: OP 015A 10.6 Spare parts 3DUW 3DUW )LOP ',1$ &HQWHURIWKHNH\ Figure 10-7 10.6.2 Dimensions for vertical slide-in labels Replacement CAUTION Parts must only be replaced by trained personnel (danger of damage to sensitive components due to static electricity)! USB cap / tension jack The replacement of the USB sealing cap and tension jacks will not be described since it is simple and self-explanatory. 180 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Operator panel front: OP 015A 10.6 Spare parts Operator panel front When the operator panel front is replaced, the display, keyboard controller, mouse, and USB port can be used again. They are therefore disassembled and re-assembled after the front panel has been replaced. Note We recommend that the keypad controller be re-used so that the control parameters that have been programmed-in are not lost. Dismounting individual parts from the operator panel front 1. Place the OP 015A on a soft, horizontal support. Remove the retaining screw (1) from the cover plate (2) and lift off the cover plate. 2. Loosen the 13 casing screws (see also figure: "Rear side of OP 015A operator panel front" in section: "Mounting" "Assembling OP 015A and PCU") 3. Lift off the cover. Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 181 Operator panel front: OP 015A 10.6 Spare parts Figure 10-8 182 OP015A Housing open (1) Screws (M4) for display support (2) Slide-in strips (Part1) (3) Display support (4) Slide-in strips (Part2) (5) Slide-in strips (Part3) (6) Slide-in strips (Part4) (7) USB interface (8) Display cable (9) Ribbon cable for keyboard controller / USB connection (10) Retainer for the mouse / keyboard controller cable (11) Port for the mouse (12) Cable plug for mouse / keyboard controller (13) Backlight inverter cable (14) I/O USB cable (15) Keyboard cable Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Operator panel front: OP 015A 10.6 Spare parts Backlight inverter cable 4. Remove the two cables to the backlight inverter (to the left and right of the display support) by raising the clips with a flat screwdriver and pulling out the cables. Connection of keyboard controller / mouse 5. Disconnect the connection from the keyboard controller to the mouse by carefully pushing the plug back with a screwdriver. 6. Remove the retainer for the cable from the keyboard controller to the mouse. Connection of keyboard controller / USB port 7. Disconnect the connection from the USB port to the keyboard controller by pulling back the terminal clamps to the left and right of the plug. Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 183 Operator panel front: OP 015A 10.6 Spare parts 8. Remove the plug of the USB cable from the keyboard controller. Keyboard cable 9. Disconnect the 3 keyboard cables by pushing up the terminal holders (1) on the keyboard controller and pulling the keyboard cables from the bracket. For detailed information about removal and insertion of membrane connectors, see also chapter: "Connection conditions" "Handling membrane connectors". 184 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Operator panel front: OP 015A 10.6 Spare parts Display supports 10. Remove the 12 screws (1) from the display support. For the arrangement of the screws on the display support, refer to figure: "OP 015A Housing open". 11. Insert the USB ribbon cable in the direction of the arrow through the opening and pull it out. 12. Lift off the display support. 13. Place the display support on its back side to avoid damaging the display. Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 185 Operator panel front: OP 015A 10.6 Spare parts USB board 14. Remove the USB port by sliding up both retaining clamps and pulling out the board. Mouse board 15. Loosen the 4 screws (M3) on the bracket for the mouse board. Lift off both the bracket and the mouse board. 186 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Operator panel front: OP 015A 10.6 Spare parts Installing the individual parts in the operator panel front 1. Remove the transportation safety precautions (adhesive strip for securing cables) and the screen protective sheeting from the inside. 2. Install the components in the new operator panel front in the order indicated: 15. 14. Mouse board and bracket USB board Press the USB board into place until you hear it lock into the retaining clamps. Check the secured position of the USB cable behind the guide pins (1). 13. - 10. Display support 13. Bend the keyboard cables (1) back slightly before inserting the display support. Otherwise, the keyboard cables could become squeezed or damaged, thus rendering them inoperable. 11. 9. 8. - 7. Insert the USB ribbon cable against the direction of the arrow through the opening and pull it out. Keyboard cable Connection of keyboard controller / USB port 8. Ensure that the contact side (1) of the USB plug faces up. 6. - 5. Connection of keyboard controller / mouse 4. Backlight inverter cable 3. - 1. Cover Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 187 Operator panel front: OP 015A 10.6 Spare parts Note Pay attention to the torques when tightening the screws (see section: "Technical specifications"). 188 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Operator panel front: TP 015A 11.1 11 Description The SINUMERIK TP 015A touch operator panel front and 15" TFT color display with a resolution of 1024 x 768 pixels (XGA) and touch screen features a 62-key membrane keyboard as well as 2 x (8 + 2) horizontal and 2 x 8 vertical softkeys and an integral mouse. The 2 x 8 vertical softkeys can be used as direct keys. The operator panel front is secured from the rear using special clamps supplied with the panel. Validity The description below applies to the TP 015A operator panel front (order number 6FC5203-0AF08-0AB0) Features 15" TFT flat screen (color) with resolution 1024 x 768 pixels Touch screen (analog resistive, 5-wire) Membrane keyboard with alphabetic, numeric, cursor, and control keypad Soft keys/direct keys: - 2 x (8 + 2) horizontal rows of keys with softkey function - 2 x 8 vertical rows of keys with softkey and direct control key function - The direct control keys can be connected through the direct control key module (optional) or directly to the I/O peripherals Shift key for switchover to the second key level (not for switching over the letters, since they are uppercase only) Integrated mouse Status LEDs for power supply and overtemperature USB front interface (USB 1.1) Degree of protection IP65 (front side) Attachment: tension jacks at the rear Can be combined with PCU, TCU, or Videolink receiver Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 189 Operator panel front: TP 015A 11.2 Operator controls and indicators 11.2 Operator controls and indicators 11.2.1 View Figure 11-1 190 Front view, TP 015A operator panel front (1) Status LED: POWER (2) Status LED: TEMP (illuminated LEDs indicate increased wear) (3) Softkeys and direct keys (4) Alphabetic key group (5) Numeric key group (6) Cursor key group (7) Control key group (8) Mouse (9) Etc. key (10) Area switchover (11) Softkeys (12) Machine area (13) Recall (14) Front USB interface Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Operator panel front: TP 015A 11.2 Operator controls and indicators 11.2.2 Operation The operator panel front is operated by using the touch screen to select the application-specific functions, e.g. by touching one of the displayed buttons. Softkeys Keys Mouse CAUTION Do not touch the operating elements with pointed or hard objects. This may considerably reduce their service lives. 11.2.3 Keyboard and display Keyboard Several keys and key pads are installed on the operator panel front: The alphabetic key group contains the letters A - Z and the space character for entering text. The numeric key group contains the digits 0 - 9, the "-", "+", "=" characters, the slash "/", and the decimal point for entering numeric characters and operators. The cursor key group is used to navigate on the screen. The control key group includes special functions. The mouse comprises the actuation field (corresponds to the function of a tracker ball) and two mouse keys for navigation. The area switchover shows the area menu. The etc. key allows for an expansion of the horizontal softkey bar in the same menu. The softkeys call up functions that are available on screen via a menu bar. The machine area key switches directly into the "Machine" operating area. The recall key jumps back to the superordinate menu. One window is closed. The key symbols used on the operator panel front appear below along with the corresponding function keys on the PC keyboard. Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 191 Operator panel front: TP 015A 11.2 Operator controls and indicators Key Function corresponds to PC key function Key Function corresponds to PC key function Esc End F11 Backspace F12 Tab Space (only intended for internal keyboard changeover) Home Ctrl key Page up Alt key Page down Delete Cursor up Insert Cursor left Enter Cursor right F9 Cursor down F10 5 (in numeric key group) <Shift> F9 A, ..., Z <Shift> A, ..., Z <Shift> F10 You will find information about softkeys in \BAD\ Operator's Guide HMI Advanced \BEM\ Operator's Guide HMI Embedded Display Note Pixel error acc. to DIN EN ISO 13406-2 Class II. 192 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Operator panel front: TP 015A 11.2 Operator controls and indicators 11.2.4 Screen saver If a screen with high contrast is displayed unchanged for longer than 1 hour, the screensaver must be activated (screen switched dark) to protect the TFT display from "burn-in" of the last displayed screen. For more information see: /BEM/: HMI Embedded Operator's Guide /IAM/: IM2 Installation and Start-up HMI Embedded; IM4 Installation and Start-up HMI Advanced CAUTION You may do irreversible damage to your TFT display if the screen saver is not activated. Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 193 Operator panel front: TP 015A 11.3 Interfaces 11.3 Interfaces The TP 015A operator panel front has the following interfaces: Front USB 1.1 to connect an external keyboard or mouse (see figure in section: "Control and display elements" --> "View") Note Note that the electromagnetic compatibility of commercially available peripheral devices operated via the USB port is usually rated for office use only. For industrial use, components with a higher degree of certification are recommended. Rear side Two cables for connecting the PCU (see figure below): - I/O USB cable K1 (ribbon cable): All signals that are used for the display interface and the connection of operator panel fronts (e.g. supply voltages) - Display cable K2 Under the interface cover: Direct control key interface X11: Signals from the 16 "vertical softkey" direct control keys Interface X12 (reserved) Figure 11-2 194 TP 015A - connections at the rear of the enclosure: Connections to the PCU (1) Direct control key interface X11 (2) Interface X12 (reserved) (3) Interface cover (4) Display cable K2 (5) I/O USB cable K1 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Operator panel front: TP 015A 11.3 Interfaces Pin assignment and assignment of keys Information on this can be found in the section: "Direct control key module". Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 195 Operator panel front: TP 015A 11.4 Mounting 11.4 Mounting 11.4.1 Preparation for mounting Table 11-1 Dimensions of the mounting hole (see figure) Used PCU type PCU 50 PCU 70 Width (mm) Height (mm) 450 335 Depth + clearance (mm) measured from the mounting panel surface 127 + 10 167 + 10 Thanks to the tension jacks on the TP 015A, drill-holes or screw holes are not needed. This retaining method also affords a degree of protection IP65 (but only in conjunction with a circumferential seal and when the protective USB cap is fitted). PLQPD[ 6HDO DUHD 5] 7HQVLRQMDFNVZLWKVHWVFUHZV 3UHVVXUHSRLQWVIRU WHQVLRQMDFNV 0RXQWLQJZDOO LQVHDODUHD Figure 11-3 196 Dimension sheet for mounting the TP 015A operator panel front Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Operator panel front: TP 015A 11.4 Mounting 11.4.2 Assembling TP 015A and PCU Figure 11-4 Back side of the TP 015A operator panel front (1) Casing screw (1x concealed under cable K1) (2) Mounting slots for PCU lugs (3) Slots for inserting softkey labeling strips (4) Display cable K2 (5) I/O / USB cable K1 (6) Cover plate for keyboard controller connections (7) Retaining screw for the cover plate If you want to combine the TP 015A with a PCU and possibly a direct control key module (see section: "Direct control key module"), assemble the components before installing them on the mounting wall. Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 197 Operator panel front: TP 015A 11.4 Mounting Procedure 1. Place the front end of the TP 015A on a soft, horizontal support (4) to avoid damaging the surface of the operator panel front. 2. Remove the interface cover (2) of the PCU. 3. Position the PCU so that the mounting lugs (3) engage with the TP 015A. (1) PCU (2) Interface cover of the PCU (cover plate removed) (3) Mounting lugs (4) Mounting support 4. Connect cable plugs K1 and K2 to the interfaces of the PCU. 5. Make sure that you hear the connectors lock in and the that locks are closed see (marked rings). (1) I/O USB cable K1 (2) Display cable K2 6. Swing the PCU in the direction of the TP 015A, making sure the cables are folded correctly. 198 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Operator panel front: TP 015A 11.4 Mounting (1) 11.4.3 7. Secure the PCU with two knurled-head screws (1) on ends of each mounting angle (torque: 1.8 Nm). To tighten the screws, use a torque screwdriver (e. g. FACOM A.302A, torque: 0.5 - 2.5 Nm). Knurled-head screws Mounting on the mounting wall The clearance at the rear of the PCU must be at least 10 mm to ensure sufficient ventilation. For more detailed information, please refer to the relevant PCU chapters and section: "Heat dissipation." NOTICE Permitted mounting position: deviating by up to 5 from the vertical. This value can be further restricted by installed components (PCU, video link receiver, ...). Procedure 1. Insert the assembled components (operator panel front and PCU) from the front into the panel cutout (see figure:. "Dimension sheet for installing the operator panel front", section: "Preparation for mounting"). 0RXQWLQJEUDFNHW /XJV 3&8VZLYHOHGE\r 2. Secure the operator panel front in the panel cutout from the rear using the twelve tension jacks by tightening the setscrews (torque: 0,5 Nm). 3&8LQHQGSRVLWLRQ 0RXQWLQJEUDFNHW 23$ 73$ ERWWRP0RXQWLQJEUDFNHWZLWKKLQJHGFDWFKHV Figure 11-5 Mounting the PCU to the TP 015A operator panel front (as seen from above) Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 199 Operator panel front: TP 015A 11.4 Mounting 11.4.4 Calibration of the touch screen Whenever a new operator panel front is connected, the touch screen must be calibrated. Procedure For a description of calibration, refer to chapters: "PCU 50", section: "Calibration of the touch screen" or "PCU 50.3", section: "Start-up" "Calibration of the touch screen". 11.4.5 Softkey labeling User-specific functions can be assigned to the two vertical softkey bars. Printed labeling strips can be used to label the softkeys. Blank labels are already factory-installed. DIN A4 films are available for preparing the vertical strips. You will find the order number in section: "Spare parts" "Overview". Note Use the "Arial" font to format text. This font is comparable to the "Univers S57" font, used by Siemens for the key labeling. Proceed as follows 1. Label the mat side of the film with a laser printer or another printer that allows "Film" to be set as a printable medium. 2. Cut the printed labels along the preprinted lines. 3. Insert the labeling strips into the slits provided from the rear of the operator panel front (refer to figure: "TP 015A housing open" in section: "Spare parts" "Replacement". Note In order to facilitate insertion of the "Part1" strip when the PCU is mounted, it is recommended that you - unscrew the 4 retaining screws of the PCU and - swing the PCU up. Once you have inserted the strip, swing the PCU back to the operator panel and secure by tightening the screws. 200 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Operator panel front: TP 015A 11.5 Technical specifications 11.5 Technical specifications Safety Safety class III; PELV acc. to EN 50178 Degree of protection per EN 60529 Front: IP 65 Rear side: IP00 Approvals CE / cULus Electrical data Power supply (via I/O USB cable and display cable) Display Backlight inverter Logic / USB Voltage Current (typ./max. mA; approx.) 4.9 V - 5.25 V 420 / 700 12 V +/- 5% 900 / 1100 5.0 V - 5.2 V 350 / 1050 Power consumption Typical, approx. 15 W Maximum approx. 25 W Mechanical data Dimensions Width: 483 mm Height: 355 mm Depth: 53 mm Mounting depth without PCU: 42 mm Mounting depth with PCU 50: 127 mm *) Mounting depth with PCU 70: 167 mm *) Mounting depth with TCU: 78 mm *) Weight Max. tightening torques: Approx. 8.4 kg Tension jack screws: 0.5 Nm Mechanical ambient conditions (with PCU) M3 screws: 0.8 Nm M4 screws: 1.8 Nm Operation Transport (in transport packaging) Vibratory load 10 - 58 Hz: 0.074 mm 58 - 200 Hz: 1 g 5 - 9 Hz: 3,1 mm 9 - 200 Hz: 1 g Shock load 5 g, 30 ms, 18 shocks 30 g, 6 ms 18 shocks Climatic environmental conditions Cooling By natural convection Moisture condensation, water spray and the formation of ice Air inlet Applicable standards Climate class Temperature limits Temperature change Limits for relative humidity Permissible change in the relative air humidity Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Not permissible without aggressive gases, dusts and oils Operation Storage/shipping (in transport packaging) EN 60721-3-3 EN 60721-3-1 / -3-2 3K5 1K3 / 2K4 0 ... 45 C (at front) 0 ... 55 C (at rear) -20 ... 60 C (cyclic) max. 10 K/h max. 18 K/h 5 ... 65% (annual mean) and max. 85% over 2 months/year, max. 5 ... 95% at 25C Max. 6%/h 201 Operator panel front: TP 015A 11.5 Technical specifications Display Size / resolution 15" TFT / 1024 x 768 pixels MTBF backlight typ. 50 000 h at 25 C (dependent on the temperature) *) 202 measured from the (exterior) mounting panel surface; plus 10 mm clearance for cable and ventilation Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Operator panel front: TP 015A 11.6 Spare parts 11.6 Spare parts 11.6.1 Overview The diagram shows the TP 015A operator panel front dismantled into its individual parts. The components provided with an order number are available as individual spare parts. Figure 11-6 Individual parts for the TP 015A operator panel front Spare parts Order No.: (1) Operator panel front (2) Keyboard controller (3) Background lighting with backlight inverter Spare parts 6FC5248-0AF17-0AB0 Order No.: Direct control key module 6FC5247-0AF11-0AA0 Mounting kit for direct key module 6FC5247-0AF30-0AA0 (4) LCD unit (5) Display support Spare parts Order No.: Comments Without LCD unit, mouse, USB port and keyboard controller Comments Comments (6) USB mouse 6FC5247-0AF01-0AA0 (7) Cap for the USB port 6FC5248-0AF05-0AA0 Set of 10 Tension jacks 6FC5248-0AF14-0AA0 Set of 9 Mounting bracket 6FC5248-0AF20-2AA0 Slide-in labels *) (DIN A4 films) 6FC5248-0AF24-0AA0 Set of 3 *) The dimensions for production of slide-in film labels for softkey labeling can be seen in the following diagrams. Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 203 Operator panel front: TP 015A 11.6 Spare parts 3DUW 3DUW )LOP ',1$ &HQWHURIWKHNH\ Figure 11-7 11.6.2 Dimensions for vertical slide-in labels Replacement CAUTION Parts must only be replaced by trained personnel (danger of damage to sensitive components due to static electricity)! USB cap / tension jack The replacement of the USB sealing cap and tension jacks will not be described since it is simple and self-explanatory. 204 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Operator panel front: TP 015A 11.6 Spare parts Operator panel front When the operator panel front is replaced, the display, keyboard controller, touch controller, mouse and USB port can be used again. They are therefore disassembled and re-assembled after the appropriate component has been replaced. Note We recommend that the keypad controller be re-used so that the control parameters that have been programmed-in are not lost. Dismounting individual parts from the operator panel front 1. Place the TP 015A on a soft, horizontal support. Remove the retaining screw (1) from the cover plate (2) and lift off the cover plate. 2. Remove the 13 casing screws (see also figure "Rear of TP 015A operator panel front" in section: "Installation" "Assembling TP 015A and PCU") 3. LIft off the cover. Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 205 Operator panel front: TP 015A 11.6 Spare parts Figure 11-6 206 TP 015A housing open (1) Screws (M4) for display support (2) Slide-in labels (Part1) (3) Display support (4) Slide-in labels (Part2) (5) Touch controller (6) Retainer for the cable of the touch controller (7) Slide-in labels (Part4) (8) Slide-in labels (Part3) (9) USB interface (10) Display cable (11) Ribbon cable for keyboard controller/USB connection (12) Retainer for the mouse/keyboard controller cable (13) Port for the mouse (14) Cable plugs for mouse/keyboard controller (15) Backlight inverter cable (16) I/O USB cable (17) Keyboard cable Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Operator panel front: TP 015A 11.6 Spare parts Touch controller 4. Remove the screws (M3) that are holding the touch controller to the display support. Do this with a TX10 screwdriver. 5. Remove the retainer of the touch screen/touch controller cable with a flat screwdriver. 6. Remove the plug connectors from the touch controller by pushing in the retaining lug. Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 207 Operator panel front: TP 015A 11.6 Spare parts Backlight inverter cable 7. Remove the two cables to the backlight inverter (to the left and right of the display support) by raising the clamps with a flat screwdriver and pulling out the cables. Keyboard controller/mouse connection 8. Disconnect the connection from the keyboard controller to the mouse by carefully pushing the plug back with a screwdriver. 9. Remove the retainer for the cable from the keyboard controller to the mouse. Keyboard controller/USB port connection 10. Disconnect the connection from the USB port to the keyboard controller by pulling back the terminal clamps to the left and right of the plug. 208 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Operator panel front: TP 015A 11.6 Spare parts 11. Remove the plug of the USB cable from the keyboard controller. Keyboard cable 12. Disconnect the 3 keyboard cables by pushing up the terminal holders (1) on the keyboard controller and pulling the keyboard cables from the bracket. For detailed information about removal and insertion of membrane connectors, see also chapter: "Connection conditions" "Handling membrane connectors". Display support Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 13. Remove the 12 screws (1) from the display support. For the arrangement of the screws on the display support, refer to figure: "TP 015A housing open". 209 Operator panel front: TP 015A 11.6 Spare parts 14. Before removing the display support, secure the touch controller with a screw (1) that you tighten by hand. This ensures that the touch controller is protected when storing the display support. Otherwise, the touch controller could get squeezed or damaged, thus rendering it inoperable. 15. Insert the USB ribbon cable in the direction of the arrow through the opening and pull it out. 16. LIft off the display support. 210 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Operator panel front: TP 015A 11.6 Spare parts 17. Place the display support down on its back side to avoid damaging the display. USB board 18. Remove the USB port by sliding up both retaining clamps and pulling out the board. Mouse board 19. Remove the 4 screws (M3) on the bracket for the mouse board. Lift off both the bracket and the mouse board. Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 211 Operator panel front: TP 015A 11.6 Spare parts Installing the individual parts in the operator panel front 1. Remove the transportation safety precautions (adhesive strip for securing cables) and the screen protective sheeting from the inside. 2. Install the individual parts in the new operator panel front in the order indicated: 19. 18. Mouse board and bracket USB board Press the USB board until you hear it lock into the retaining clamps. Check the secured position of the USB cable behind the guide pins (1). 17. - 13. Display support 12. 17. Bend the keyboard cables (1) back slightly before inserting the display support. Otherwise, the keyboard cables could become squeezed or damaged, thus rendering them inoperable. 15. Insert the USB ribbon cable against the direction of the arrow through the opening and pull it out. Keyboard cable 11. - 10. Keyboard controller/USB port connection 11. Ensure that the contact side (1) of the USB cable faces up. 212 9. - 8. Keyboard controller/mouse connection 7. Backlight inverter cable 6. - 4. Touch controller 3. - 1. Cover Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Operator panel front: TP 015A 11.6 Spare parts Note Pay attention to the torques when tightening the screws (see section: "Technical specifications"). Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 213 Operator panel front: TP 015A 11.6 Spare parts 214 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Operator panel front: OP 015AT 12.1 12 Description The SINUMERIK OP 015AT operator panel front with 15" TFT color display and 1024 x 768 pixels (XGA) enables the distributed installation of the operator panel front and the controller. It features a membrane keyboard with 62 keys and 2 x (8 + 2) horizontal and 2 x 8 vertical softkeys and an integrated mouse. The distance to the operator panel fronts is determined by the maximum distance between two network nodes/access points (100 m/328 ft). The OP 015AT operator panel front is connected to the PCU/NCU via Ethernet as a Thin Client in its own subnet (via DHCP server to PCU/NCU). Mixed operation with an operator panel connected directly to the PCU is possible. The operator panel front is secured from the rear using special clamps supplied with the panel. Validity The description below applies to operator panel OP 015AT (Order No. 6FC5203-0AF05-1AB0) Features Ethernet 10/100 Mbit/s 3 x USB 1.1 (2 x rear, 1 x front) 15" TFT flat screen (color) with resolution 1024 x 768 pixels Membrane keyboard with alphabetic, numeric, cursor, and control keypad Soft keys/direct keys: - 2 x (8 + 2) horizontal rows of keys with softkey function - 2 x 8 vertical rows of keys with softkey and direct key functions (can be used with SINUMERIK 840D sl /840Di sl) Shift key for switchover to the second key level (not for switching over the letters, since they are uppercase only) Integrated mouse Status LEDs for power supply and overtemperature Slight mounting depth Panel cutout (W x H): 450 x 335 mm IP65 protection rating Attachment: tension jacks at the rear Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 215 Operator panel front: OP 015AT 12.1 Description The SINUMERIK TP 015AT operator panel front can be used for: SINUMERIK 810D/840D SINUMERIK PCU 50/PCU 70 * with Windows XP and PCU Base software Thin Client as from 7.4 MLFB 6FC5253-7CX10-4XA8 6FC5253-7CX11-5XU8 * with Windows XP SP2 MLFB 6FC5253-7CX11-5XU8 6FC5253-7CX10-5XU8 SINUMERIK 840 D sl - NCU 710.1 / NCU 720.1 / NCU 730.1 - SINUMERIK PCU 50.3 SINUMERIK 840 Di sl 216 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Operator panel front: OP 015AT 12.2 Operator controls and display elements 12.2 Operator controls and display elements 12.2.1 View Figure 12-1 Front view of the OP 015AT operator panel front (1) Status LED: POWER (2) Status LED: TEMP (illuminated LEDs indicate increased wear) (3) Softkeys and direct keys (4) Alphabetic key group (5) Numeric key group (6) Cursor key group (7) Control key group (8) Mouse (9) Etc. key (10) Area switchover (11) Softkeys (12) Machine area (13) Recall (14) Front USB interface Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 217 Operator panel front: OP 015AT 12.2 Operator controls and display elements 12.2.2 Keyboard and display Keyboard Several keys and key pads are installed on the operator panel front: The alphabetic key group contains the letters A - Z and the space character for entering text. The numeric key group contains the digits 0 - 9, the "-", "+", "=" characters, the slash "/", and the decimal point for entering numeric characters and operators. The cursor key group is used to navigate on the screen. The control key group includes special functions. The mouse comprises the actuation field (corresponds to the function of a tracker ball) and two mouse keys for navigation. The area switchover shows the area menu. The etc. key allows for an expansion of the horizontal softkey bar in the same menu. The softkeys call up functions that are available on screen via a menu bar. The machine area key switches directly into the "Machine" operating area. The recall key jumps back to the superordinate menu. One window is closed. The key symbols used on the operator panel front appear below along with the corresponding function keys on the PC keyboard. Key 218 Function corresponds to PC key function Key Function corresponds to PC key function Esc End F11 Backspace F12 Tab Space (only intended for internal keyboard changeover) Home Ctrl key Page up Alt key Page down Delete Cursor up Insert Cursor left Enter Cursor right F9 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Operator panel front: OP 015AT 12.2 Operator controls and display elements Key Function corresponds to PC key function Key Cursor down 5 (in numeric key group) <Shift> F9 Function corresponds to PC key function F10 A, ..., Z <Shift> A, ..., Z <Shift> F10 You will find information about softkeys in \BAD\ Operator's Guide HMI Advanced \BEM\ Operator's Guide HMI Embedded Display Note Pixel error acc. to DIN EN ISO 13406-2 Class II. 12.2.3 Screen saver If a screen with high contrast is displayed unchanged for longer than 1 hour, the screensaver must be activated (screen switched dark) to protect the TFT display from "burn-in" of the last displayed screen. For more information see: /BEM/: HMI Embedded Operator's Guide /IAM/: IM2 Installation and Start-up HMI Embedded; IM4 Installation and Start-up HMI Advanced CAUTION You may do irreversible damage to your TFT display if the screen saver is not activated. Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 219 Operator panel front: OP 015AT 12.3 Interfaces 12.3 Interfaces 12.3.1 Overview The OP 015AT operator panel front has the following interfaces: Front USB 1.1 to connect an external keyboard, mouse, or USB FlashDrive (see Fig.: "Front view of OP 015AT operator panel front" in section: "Control and display elements" "View") Note Note that the electromagnetic compatibility of commercially available peripheral devices operated via the USB port is usually rated for office use only. For industrial use, components with a higher degree of certification are recommended. Rear side Figure 12-2 OP 015AT - Rear with interfaces (1) 220 Blanking plate screws (M4) (2) X206 (3) X202 Ethernet port (4) X203 / X 204 USB interface (5) Power Supply Strain relief for connecting cable Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Operator panel front: OP 015AT 12.3 Interfaces 12.3.2 Description Signal type BI Bi-directional V Supply voltage O Output I Input Ethernet interface X202 Interface: Ethernet Connector designation: X202 Type: 8-pole RJ45 socket Cable length max.: 100 m (shielded twisted pair) Pin Name 1 TxD+ Type Meaning Transmit data + 2 TxD- O 3 RxD+ I Receive data + 4/5 GND - terminated internally with 75 ; not required for data transmission 6 RxD - I Receive data - 7/8 GND - terminated internally with 75 ; not required for data transmission Transmit data - Note The direct keys are also led out through this interface. Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 221 Operator panel front: OP 015AT 12.3 Interfaces USB interfaces Front: The USB interface on the front side of the operator panel front can be loaded with 500 mA. Rear panel: X203 / X 204 Interface: USB Connector designation: X203 / X204 Type: 2 x 4-way USB socket, type A (one of the interfaces can be loaded with 500 mA (high current), the other of the two, with 100 mA.) Cable length max.: Mouse, keyboard: 5m if hub used: 3.5 m *) *) Length incl. supply lead to hub and connected terminal unit; max. 1 hub permissible. Please note that some keyboards already include a hub. Pin USB port Name Type Meaning A1 2 USB_P5 V + 5V fused A2 2 USB_1M A3 2 USB_1P BI Data + A4 2 USB_GND B1 3 USB_P5 B2 3 USB_2M B3 3 B4 3 V DataGround (reference potential) + 5V fused Data- USB_2P BI Data + USB_GND V Ground (reference potential) Power supply X206 The pin assignment of this interface can be found in Section: "Connection conditions" "Pin assignments of the interfaces". 222 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Operator panel front: OP 015AT 12.4 Assembly Assembly 12.4.1 Mounting 12.4 Figure 12-3 OP 015AT with TCU (integrated) Thanks to the tension jacks on the OP 015AT, drill-holes or screw holes are not needed. This retaining method also affords a degree of protection IP65 (but only in conjunction with a circumferential seal and when the protective USB cap is fitted). Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 223 Operator panel front: OP 015AT 12.4 Assembly PLQPD[ 6HDO DUHD 5] 7HQVLRQMDFNVZLWKVHWVFUHZV 3UHVVXUHSRLQWVIRU WHQVLRQMDFNV 0RXQWLQJZDOO LQVHDODUHD Figure 12-4 12.4.2 Dimension sheet for installing the OP 015AT operator panel front Softkey labeling User-specific functions can be assigned to the horizontal and vertical softkey bars. Printed labeling strips can be used to label the softkeys. Blank labels are already installed on delivery. To make the vertical labels, DIN-A4 film is available (Order No., see Section: "Spare parts"). Note Use the "Arial" font to format text. This font is comparable to the "Univers S57" font, used by Siemens for the key labeling. Proceed as follows 1. Letter the mat side of the film using a laser printer. 2. Cut the printed labels along the preprinted lines. 3. Insert the labeling strips into the slits provided at the rear of the operator panel front (refer to Fig.: "OP 015AT Housing open" in Section: "Spare parts" "Replacement"). 224 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Operator panel front: OP 015AT 12.5 Technical data 12.5 Technical data Safety Safety class Degree of protection to EN 60529 III; PELV acc. to EN 50178 Front: IP65 Rear side: IP00 Certificates and approvals CE / cULus Electrical data Power Supply 24 V DC Current input Typical, approx. 0.9 A Max. approx. 1.5 A Power consumption Typical, approx. 22 W Maximum approx. 36 W Mechanical data Dimensions Width: 483 mm Height: 355 mm Depth: 53 mm Mounting depth: 42 mm Weight Tightening torques, max. Approx. 7.6 kg Tension jack screws: 0.5 Nm Mechanical ambient conditions M3 screws: 0.8 Nm M4 screws: 1.8 Nm Operation Transport (in transport packaging) Vibration stressing 10 - 58 Hz: 0.074 mm 58 - 200 Hz: 1g 5 - 9 Hz: 3.1 mm 9 - 200 Hz: 1g Shock stressing 5 g, 30 ms, 18 shocks 30 g, 6 ms, 18 shocks Climatic environmental conditions Cooling By natural convection Condensation, spraying water and icing Air inlet Applicable standards Climate class Temperature limits Temperature change Limits for relative humidity Permissible change in the relative air humidity Not permitted Without caustic gases, dusts and oils Operation Storage/shipping (in transport packaging) EN 60721-3-3 EN 60721-3-1 / -3-2 3K5 1K3 / 2K4 0 ... 45 C (at front) 0 ... 55 C (at rear) -20 ... 60 C (cyclic) Max. 10 K/h Max. 18 K/h 5 ... 65% (annual average) 10 ... 95% at 25C Max. 6%/h Display Size / resolution 15 " TFT / 1024 x 768 pixels MTBF backlight typ. 50 000 h at 25 C (dependent on the temperature) Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 225 Operator panel front: OP 015AT 12.6 Spare parts 12.6 Spare parts 12.6.1 Overview The diagram shows the OP 015AT operator panel front disassembled into its individual parts. The components provided with an order number are available as individual spare parts. Figure 12-5 Individual parts for the OP 015AT operator panel front Spare parts Order No.: (1) Operator panel front (2) Keyboard controller (3) Background lighting with backlight inverter (4) LCD unit (5) Display support Spare parts Comment 6FC5248-0AF17-0AB0 Order No.: Without LCD unit, mouse, USB port and keyboard controller Comment (6) USB mouse 6FC5247-0AF01-0AA0 (7) Cap for the USB port 6FC5248-0AF05-0AA0 Set of 10 Tension jacks 6FC5248-0AF14-0AA0 Set of 9 Slide-in labels *) (DIN A4 films) 6FC5248-0AF24-0AA0 Set of 3 *) The dimensions for production of film slide-in labels for softkey labeling can be seen in the following diagram. 226 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Operator panel front: OP 015AT 12.6 Spare parts 3DUW 3DUW )LOP ',1$ &HQWHURIWKHNH\ Figure 12-6 12.6.2 Dimensions for vertical slide-in labels Replacement CAUTION Parts must only be replaced by trained personnel (danger of damage to sensitive components due to static electricity)! USB cap / tension jack The replacement of the USB sealing cap and tension jacks will not be described since it is simple and self-explanatory. Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 227 Operator panel front: OP 015AT 12.6 Spare parts Operator panel front When the operator panel front is replaced, the display, keyboard controller, mouse, and USB port can be used again. They are therefore disassembled and re-assembled after the front panel has been replaced. Note We recommend that the keypad controller be re-used so that the control parameters that have been programmed-in are not lost. Dismounting individual parts from the operator panel front 1. Place the OP 015AT on a soft horizontal surface. Loosen the 13 casing screws (see also figure: "OP 015AT - rear with interfaces" in Section: "Interfaces" "Overview"). 2. Lift off the cover. 228 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Operator panel front: OP 015AT 12.6 Spare parts Figure 12-7 OP 015AT housing opened (1) Screws (M4) for display support (2) Slide-in strips (Part1) (3) Display support (4) Slide-in strips (Part2) (5) Slide-in strips (Part3) (6) Slide-in strips (Part4) (7) USB interface (8) Display cable (9) Ribbon cable for keyboard controller / USB connection (10) Retainer for the mouse / keyboard controller cable (11) Port for the mouse (12) Cable plug for mouse / keyboard controller (13) Backlight inverter cable (14) I/O USB cable (15) Direct key cable (16) Keyboard cable Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 229 Operator panel front: OP 015AT 12.6 Spare parts Backlight inverter cable 3. Remove the two cables to the backlight inverter (to the left and right of the display support) by raising the clips with a flat screwdriver and pulling out the cables. Connection of keyboard controller / mouse 4. Disconnect the connection from the keyboard controller to the mouse by carefully pushing the plug back with a screwdriver. 5. Remove the retainer for the cable from the keyboard controller to the mouse. Connection of keyboard controller / USB port 6. Disconnect the connection from the USB port to the keyboard controller by pulling back the terminal clamps to the left and right of the plug. 230 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Operator panel front: OP 015AT 12.6 Spare parts 7. Remove the plug of the USB cable from the keyboard controller. Keyboard cable 8. Disconnect the 3 keyboard cables by pushing up the terminal holders (1) on the keyboard controller and pulling the keyboard cables from the bracket. For detailed information about removal and insertion of membrane connectors, see also chapter: "Connection conditions" "Handling membrane connectors". Display support Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 9. Remove the 12 screws (1) from the display support. For the arrangement of the screws on the display support, refer to figure: "OP 015AT housing opened". 231 Operator panel front: OP 015AT 12.6 Spare parts 10. Insert the USB ribbon cable in the direction of the arrow through the opening and pull it out. 11. Lift off the display support. 12. Place the display support on its back side to avoid damaging the display. USB board 13. Remove the USB port by sliding up both retaining clamps and pulling out the board. Mouse board 14. Loosen the 4 screws (M3) on the bracket for the mouse board. Lift off both the bracket and the mouse board. 232 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Operator panel front: OP 015AT 12.6 Spare parts Installing the individual parts of the operator panel front 1. Remove the transportation safety precautions (adhesive strip for securing cables) and the screen protective sheeting from the inside. 2. Install the components in the new operator panel front in the order indicated: 14. Mouse board and bracket 13. USB board Press the USB board into place until you hear it lock into the retaining clamps. Check the secured position of the USB cable behind the guide pins (1). 12. - 9. Display support 12. 10. 8. Bend the keyboard cables (1) back slightly before inserting the display support. Otherwise, the keyboard cables could become squeezed or damaged, thus rendering them inoperable. Insert the USB ribbon cable against the direction of the arrow through the opening and pull it out. Keyboard cable Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 233 Operator panel front: OP 015AT 12.6 Spare parts 7. - 6. Connection of keyboard controller / USB port 7. Ensure that the contact side (1) of the USB plug faces up. 5. - 4. Connection of keyboard controller / mouse 3. Backlight inverter cable 2. - 1. Cover Note Pay attention to the torques when tightening the screws (see section: "Technical specifications"). 234 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Operator panel front: TP 015AT 13.1 13 Description The SINUMERIK TP 015AT operator panel front with 15" TFT color display, 1024 x 768 pixels (XGA), and touch screen enables the distributed installation of the operator panel front and the controller. It features a membrane keyboard with 62 keys and 2 x (8 + 2) horizontal and 2 x 8 vertical softkeys and an integrated mouse. The distance to the operator panel fronts is determined by the maximum distance between two network nodes/access points (100 m/328 ft). The TP 015AT operator panel front is connected to the PCU/NCU via Ethernet as a Thin Client in its own subnet (via DHCP server to PCU/NCU). Mixed operation with additional TCUS and an operator panel connected directly to the PCU is possible. The operator panel front is secured from the rear using special clamps supplied with the panel. Validity The description below applies to operator panel front TP 015AT (Order No. 6FC5203-0AF08-1AB0) Features Ethernet 10/100 Mbit/s 3 x USB 1.1 (2 x rear, 1 x front) 15" TFT flat screen (color) with resolution 1024 x 768 pixels Membrane keyboard with alphabetic, numeric, cursor, and control keypad Soft keys/direct keys: - 2 x (8 + 2) horizontal rows of keys with softkey function - 2 x 8 vertical rows of keys with softkey and direct key functions (can be used with SINUMERIK 840D sl /840Di sl) Shift key for switchover to the second key level (not for switching over the letters, since they are uppercase only) Integrated mouse Status LEDs for power supply and overtemperature Slight mounting depth Panel cutout (W x H): 450 x 335 mm IP65 protection rating Attachment: tension jacks at the rear Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 235 Operator panel front: TP 015AT 13.1 Description The SINUMERIK TP 015AT operator panel front can be used for: SINUMERIK 810D/840D SINUMERIK PCU 50/PCU 70 * with Windows XP and PCU Base software Thin Client as from 7.4 MLFB 6FC5253-7CX10-4XA8 6FC5253-7CX11-5XU8 * with Windows XP SP2 MLFB 6FC5253-7CX11-5XU8 6FC5253-7CX10-5XU8 SINUMERIK 840 D sl - NCU 710.1 / NCU 720.1 / NCU 730.1 - SINUMERIK PCU 50.3 SINUMERIK 840 Di sl 236 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Operator panel front: TP 015AT 13.2 Operator controls and display elements 13.2 Operator controls and display elements 13.2.1 View Figure 13-1 Front view of the TP 015AT operator panel front (1) Status LED: POWER (2) Status LED: TEMP (illuminated LEDs indicate increased wear) (3) Softkeys and direct keys (4) Alphabetic key group (5) Numeric key group (6) Cursor key group (7) Control key group (8) Mouse (9) Etc. key (10) Area switchover (11) Softkeys (12) Machine area (13) Recall (14) Front USB interface Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 237 Operator panel front: TP 015AT 13.2 Operator controls and display elements 13.2.2 Operation The operator panel front is operated by using the touch screen to select the application-specific functions, e.g. by touching one of the displayed buttons. Softkeys Keys Mouse CAUTION Do not touch the operating elements with pointed or hard objects. This may considerably reduce their service lives. 13.2.3 Keyboard and display Keyboard Several keys and key pads are installed on the operator panel front: The alphabetic key group contains the letters A - Z and the space character for entering text. The numeric key group contains the digits 0 - 9, the "-", "+", "=" characters, the slash "/", and the decimal point for entering numeric characters and operators. The cursor key group is used to navigate on the screen. The control key group includes special functions. The mouse comprises the actuation field (corresponds to the function of a tracker ball) and two mouse keys for navigation. The area switchover shows the area menu. The etc. key allows for an expansion of the horizontal softkey bar in the same menu. The softkeys call up functions that are available on screen via a menu bar. The machine area key switches directly into the "Machine" operating area. The recall key jumps back to the superordinate menu. One window is closed. The key symbols used on the operator panel front appear below along with the corresponding function keys on the PC keyboard. 238 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Operator panel front: TP 015AT 13.2 Operator controls and display elements Key Function corresponds to PC key function Key Function corresponds to PC key function Esc End F11 Backspace F12 Tab Space (only intended for internal keyboard changeover) Home Ctrl key Page up Alt key Page down Delete Cursor up Insert Cursor left Enter Cursor right F9 Cursor down F10 5 (in numeric key group) <Shift> F9 A, ..., Z <Shift> A, ..., Z <Shift> F10 You will find information about softkeys in \BAD\ Operator's Guide HMI Advanced \BEM\ Operator's Guide HMI Embedded Display Note Pixel error acc. to DIN EN ISO 13406-2 Class II. Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 239 Operator panel front: TP 015AT 13.2 Operator controls and display elements 13.2.4 Screen saver If a screen with high contrast is displayed unchanged for longer than 1 hour, the screensaver must be activated (screen switched dark) to protect the TFT display from "burn-in" of the last displayed screen. For more information see: /BEM/: HMI Embedded Operator's Guide /IAM/: IM2 Installation and Start-up HMI Embedded; IM4 Installation and Start-up HMI Advanced CAUTION You may do irreversible damage to your TFT display if the screen saver is not activated. 240 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Operator panel front: TP 015AT 13.3 Interfaces 13.3 Interfaces 13.3.1 Overview The TP 015AT operator panel front has the following interfaces: Front USB 1.1 to connect an external keyboard, mouse, or USB FlashDrive (see Fig.: "Front view of TP 015AT operator panel front" in Section: "Control and display elements" "View") Note Note that the electromagnetic compatibility of commercially available peripheral devices operated via the USB port is usually rated for office use only. For industrial use, components with a higher degree of certification are recommended. Rear side Figure 13-2 TP 015AT - Rear with interfaces (1) Blanking plate screws (M4) (2) X206 (3) X202 Ethernet port (4) X203 / X204 USB interfaces (5) Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Power Supply Strain relief for connecting cable 241 Operator panel front: TP 015AT 13.3 Interfaces 13.3.2 Description Signal type BI Bi-directional V Supply voltage O Output I Input Ethernet interface X202 Interface: Ethernet Connector designation: X202 Type: 8-pole RJ45 socket Cable length max.: 100 m (shielded twisted pair) Pin Name 1 TxD+ Type Meaning Transmit data + 2 TxD- O 3 RxD+ I Receive data + 4/5 GND - terminated internally with 75 ; not required for data transmission 6 RxD - I Receive data - 7/8 GND - terminated internally with 75 ; not required for data transmission Transmit data - Note The direct keys are also led out through this interface. 242 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Operator panel front: TP 015AT 13.3 Interfaces USB interfaces Front: The USB interface on the front side of the operator panel front can be loaded with 500 mA. Rear panel: X203 / X 204 Interface: USB Connector designation: X203 / X204 Type: 2 x 4-way USB socket, type A (one of the interfaces can be loaded with 500 mA (high current), the other of the two, with 100 mA.) Cable length max.: Mouse, keyboard: 5 m if hub used: 3.5 m *) *) Length incl. supply lead to hub and connected terminal unit; max. 1 hub permissible. Please note that some keyboards already include a hub. Pin USB port Name Type Meaning A1 2 USB_P5 V + 5V fused A2 2 USB_1M A3 2 USB_1P BI Data + A4 2 USB_GND B1 3 USB_P5 B2 3 USB_2M B3 3 B4 3 V DataGround (reference potential) + 5V fused Data- USB_2P BI Data + USB_GND V Ground (reference potential) Power supply X206 The pin assignment of this interface can be found in Section: "Connection conditions" "Secondary electrical conditions" "Pin assignments of the interfaces". Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 243 Operator panel front: TP 015AT 13.4 Assembly Assembly 13.4.1 Mounting 13.4 Figure 13-3 TP 015AT with TCU (integrated) Thanks to the tension jacks on the TP 015AT, drill-holes or screw holes are not needed. This retaining method also affords a degree of protection IP65 (but only in conjunction with a circumferential seal and when the protective USB cap is fitted). 244 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Operator panel front: TP 015AT 13.4 Assembly PLQPD[ 6HDO DUHD 0RXQWLQJZDOO Figure 13-4 13.4.2 5] 7HQVLRQMDFNVZLWKVHWVFUHZV 3UHVVXUHSRLQWVIRU WHQVLRQMDFNV LQVHDODUHD Dimension sheet for installing the TP 015AT operator panel front Touchscreen calibration Whenever a new operator panel front is connected the touchscreen must be calibrated. Procedure For a description of calibration, refer to Chapter: "PCU 50.3", section: "Start-up" "Calibration of the touch screen". 13.4.3 Softkey labeling User-specific functions can be assigned to the horizontal and vertical softkey bars. Printed labeling strips can be used to label the softkeys. Blank labels are already installed on delivery. To make the vertical labels, DIN-A4 film is available (Order No., see Section: "Spare parts"). Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 245 Operator panel front: TP 015AT 13.4 Assembly Note Use the "Arial" font to format text. This font is comparable to the "Univers S57" font, used by Siemens for the key labeling. Proceed as follows 1. Letter the mat side of the film using a laser printer. 2. Cut the printed labels along the preprinted lines. 3. Insert the labeling strips into the slits provided at the rear of the operator panel front (refer to Fig.: "TP 015AT Housing open" in Section: "Spare parts" "Replacement"). 246 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Operator panel front: TP 015AT 13.5 Technical data 13.5 Technical data Safety Safety class Degree of protection to EN 60529 III; PELV acc. to EN 50178 Front: IP65 Rear side: IP00 Certificates and approvals CE / cULus Electrical data Power Supply 24 V DC Current input Typical, approx. 0.9 A Max. approx. 1.5 A Power consumption Typical, approx. 22 W Maximum approx. 36 W Mechanical data Dimensions Width: 483 mm Height: 355 mm Depth: 53 mm Mounting depth: 42 mm Weight Tightening torques, max. Approx. 7.6 kg Tension jack screws: 0.5 Nm Mechanical ambient conditions M3 screws: 0.8 Nm M4 screws: 1.8 Nm Operation Transport (in transport packaging) Vibration stressing 10 - 58 Hz: 0.074 mm 58 - 200 Hz: 1g 5 - 9 Hz: 3.1 mm 9 - 200 Hz: 1g Shock stressing 5 g, 30 ms, 18 shocks 30 g, 6 ms, 18 shocks Climatic environmental conditions Cooling By natural convection Condensation, spraying water and icing Air inlet Applicable standards Climate class Temperature limits Temperature change Limits for relative humidity Permissible change in the relative air humidity Not permitted Without caustic gases, dusts and oils Operation Storage/shipping (in transport packaging) EN 60721-3-3 EN 60721-3-1 / -3-2 3K5 1K3 / 2K4 0 ... 45 C (at front) 0 ... 55 C (at rear) -20 ... 60 C (cyclic) Max. 10 K/h Max. 18 K/h 5 ... 65% (annual average) 10 ... 95% at 25C Max. 6%/h Display Size / resolution 15 " TFT / 1024 x 768 pixels MTBF backlight typ. 50 000 h at 25 C (dependent on the temperature) Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 247 Operator panel front: TP 015AT 13.6 Spare parts 13.6 Spare parts 13.6.1 Overview The diagram shows the TP 015AT operator panel front disassembled into its individual parts. The components provided with an order number are available as individual spare parts. Figure 13-5 Individual parts for the TP 015AT operator panel front Spare parts Order No.: (1) Operator panel front (2) Keyboard controller (3) Background lighting with backlight inverter (4) LCD unit (5) Display support Spare parts Comment 6FC5248-0AF17-0AB0 Order No.: Without LCD unit, mouse, USB port and keyboard controller Comment (6) USB mouse 6FC5247-0AF01-0AA0 (7) Cap for the USB port 6FC5248-0AF05-0AA0 Set of 10 Tension jacks 6FC5248-0AF14-0AA0 Set of 9 Slide-in labels *) (DIN A4 films) 6FC5248-0AF24-0AA0 Set of 3 *) The dimensions for production of film slide-in labels for softkey labeling can be seen in the following diagram. 248 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Operator panel front: TP 015AT 13.6 Spare parts 3DUW 3DUW )LOP ',1$ &HQWHURIWKHNH\ Figure 13-6 13.6.2 Dimensions for vertical slide-in labels Replacement CAUTION Parts must only be replaced by trained personnel (danger of damage to sensitive components due to static electricity)! USB cap / tension jack The replacement of the USB sealing cap and tension jacks will not be described since it is simple and self-explanatory. Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 249 Operator panel front: TP 015AT 13.6 Spare parts Operator panel front When the operator panel front is replaced, the display, keyboard controller, touch controller, mouse and USB port can be used again. They are therefore disassembled and re-assembled after the front panel has been replaced. Note We recommend that the keypad controller be re-used so that the control parameters that have been programmed-in are not lost. Dismounting individual parts from the operator panel front 1. Place the TP 015AT on a soft horizontal surface. Remove the 13 casing screws (see also figure "TP 015AT rear view with interfaces" in Section: "Interfaces" "Overview") 2. Lift off the cover. 250 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Operator panel front: TP 015AT 13.6 Spare parts Figure 13-7 (1) TP015AT housing opened Screws (M4) for display support (2) Slide-in strips (Part1) (3) Display support (4) Slide-in strips (Part2) (5) Touch controller (6) Cable of the touch controller (7) Slide-in strips (Part4) (8) Slide-in strips (Part3) (9) USB interface (10) Display cable (11) Retainer for the mouse / keyboard controller cable (12) Ribbon cable for keyboard controller / USB port (13) Port for the mouse (14) Cable plug for mouse / keyboard controller (15) Backlight inverter cable (16) I/O USB cable (17) Direct key cable (18) Keyboard cable Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 251 Operator panel front: TP 015AT 13.6 Spare parts Touch controller 3. Remove the screws (M3) that are holding the touch controller to the display support. Do this with a TX10 screwdriver. 4. Remove the retainer of the touch screen/touch controller cable with a flat screwdriver. 5. Remove the plug connectors from the touch controller by pushing in the retaining lug. 252 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Operator panel front: TP 015AT 13.6 Spare parts Backlight inverter cable 6. Remove the two cables to the backlight inverter (to the left and right of the display support) by raising the clips with a flat screwdriver and pulling out the cables. Connection of keyboard controller / mouse 7. Disconnect the connection from the keyboard controller to the mouse by carefully pushing the plug back with a screwdriver. 8. Remove the retainer for the cable from the keyboard controller to the mouse. Connection of keyboard controller / USB port 9. Disconnect the connection from the USB port to the keyboard controller by pulling back the terminal clamps to the left and right of the plug. Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 253 Operator panel front: TP 015AT 13.6 Spare parts 10. Remove the plug of the USB cable from the keyboard controller. Keyboard cable 11. Disconnect the 3 keyboard cables by pushing up the terminal holders (1) on the keyboard controller and pulling the keyboard cables from the bracket. For detailed information about removal and insertion of membrane connectors, see also chapter: "Connection conditions" "Handling membrane connectors". Display support 254 12. Remove the 12 screws (1) from the display support. For the arrangement of the screws on the display support, refer to figure: "TP 015AT housing open". Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Operator panel front: TP 015AT 13.6 Spare parts 13. Before removing the display support, secure the touch controller with a screw (1) that you tighten by hand. This ensures that the touch controller is protected when storing the display support. Otherwise, the touch controller could get squeezed or damaged, thus rendering it inoperable. 14. Insert the USB ribbon cable in the direction of the arrow through the opening and pull it out. Lift off the display support. 15. Place the display support on its back side to avoid damaging the display. Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 255 Operator panel front: TP 015AT 13.6 Spare parts USB board 16. Remove the USB port by sliding up both retaining clamps and pulling out the board. Mouse board 17. Loosen the 4 screws (M3) on the bracket for the mouse board. Lift off both the bracket and the mouse board. 256 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Operator panel front: TP 015AT 13.6 Spare parts Installing the individual parts in the operator panel front 1. Remove the transportation safety precautions (adhesive strip for securing cables) and the screen protective sheeting from the inside. 2. Install the components in the new operator panel front in the order indicated: 17. Mouse board and bracket 16. USB board Press the USB board into place until you hear it lock into the retaining clamps. Check the secured position of the USB cable behind the guide pins. 15. - 12. Display support 14. Bend the keyboard cables (1) back slightly before inserting the display support. Otherwise, the keyboard cables could become squeezed or damaged, thus rendering them inoperable. Insert the USB ribbon cable against the direction of the arrow through the opening and pull it out. 11. Keyboard cable 10. - 9. Connection of keyboard controller / USB port 10. Ensure that the contact side (1) of the USB plug faces up. 8. - 7. Connection of keyboard controller / mouse 6. Backlight inverter cable 5. - 3. Touch controller 2. - 1. Cover Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 257 Operator panel front: TP 015AT 13.6 Spare parts Note Pay attention to the torques when tightening the screws (see section: "Technical specifications"). 258 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 14 Operator panel 15" TFT with VLE 14.1 Description 14.1.1 Validity The following description applies to the following components: Description Properties Order No.: SINUMERIK operator panel front 15" TFT, width 416 mm, with mech. buttons with a videolink receiver For integrated installation 6FC5203-0AF50-0AA0 For distributed installation up to 10 m 6FC5203-0AF50-1AA0 For distributed installation up to 20 m 6FC5203-0AF50-2AA0 SINUMERIK 810D/840D machine control panel, 416 mm wide Variant Milling, mech. keys, rapid traverse and feed override, mouse, standard / US layout 6FC5203-0AF50-3AA0 Variant Turning, mech. keys, handwheel and feed override, mouse, standard / US layout 6FC5203-0AF50-4AA0 SINUMERIK operator panel front, videolink transmitter for distributed installation 1 - 10 m 6FC5247-0AF20-0AA0 1 - 20 m 6FC5247-0AF21-0AA0 SINUMERIK 810D / 840D mounting bracket for mounting PCU and Videolink transmitter for distributed configuration Flat mounting 6FC5248-0AF20-0AA0 Upright mounting 6FC5247-0AF20-1AA0 SINUMERIK 810D/840D mounting bracket Mounting of PCU behind operator panel front 6FC5247-0AF20-2AA0 Videolink cable for connection between display unit and Videolink transmitter with detachable connection housing 10 m 6FX2002-1VL01-1BA01) 15 m 6FX2002-1VL00-1BF01) 20 m 6FX2002-1VL00-1CA01) 1) ...-1XX0: XX is the length code: A = 0, B = 1, etc. Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 259 Operator panel 15" TFT with VLE 14.1 Description 14.1.2 Overview The 15" TFT operator panel (416 mm wide) comprises an operator panel front with preassembled videolink receiver, a machine control panel (MCP) with CNC keyboard (QWERTY) with integrated mouse. The PCU belonging to the overall system (see Section: "Operating and Display Elements" "View of Function Blocks") is mounted separately from the operator panel (distributed configuration). CAUTION The PCU should not be mounted in the "air flow downward" position (i.e. the interfaces at the top) to prevent heat accumulation. Communication is implemented between the NC controller and PCU, operator panel front and MCP using MPI, USB and videolink transmission technology (see Section: "Control and Display Elements" --> "View of Function Blocks"). Note Where the Windows NT operating system is used, the USB interface only supports keyboards and mouse units. If other USB devices are used, the noise immunity of the entire system may be reduced. The end user takes responsibility for the use of such devices. The operator panel front consists of a 15" display with horizontal and vertical softkeys (in the form of short-stroke keys) with preinstalled videolink receiver. In the case of turning and milling technologies, the MCP keys are labeled differently, the displays on the operator panel front are different and a handwheel instead of the second override switch is provided for the turning variant. 14.1.3 System Features Operator panel The operator panel (see Section: "Control and Display Elements" --> "View of Function Blocks") consists of an operator panel front with integrated operator control functions in the form of vertical and horizontal softkeys and a preinstalled videolink receiver, and a machine control panel with integrated CNC keyboard 260 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Operator panel 15" TFT with VLE 14.1 Description Communication Since the PCU is installed physically separated from the operator panel (distributed configuration), a data transmission path has been created: The operator panel (operator panel front + MCP) communicates with the PCU via a cable and a videolink transmitter. The image data is transmitted by means of videolink technology and the keyboard data by USB technology. As a result, the PCU and operator panel can be installed up to 20 m apart (XGA resolution). The NC and MCP functions on the operator panel communicate via MPI. NC and PCU also communicate by means of MPI. Only TFT displays (12" and 15") are supported Hardware support for USB only for Version 1.1 and earlier EMERGENCY STOP key There is an EMERGENCY STOP button on the operator panel. This also has to be wired up (see Fig: "Block diagram of emergency stop button", paragraph: "Mechanical Design" "Machine Control Panels") Power Supply The operator panel and PCU must be supplied with 24V. Note To prevent error messages when the PCU is booted, the operator panel front and PCU should be switched on simultaneously using the 24V supply. Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 261 Operator panel 15" TFT with VLE 14.1 Description 14.1.4 Mechanical design 14.1.4.1 Operator panel front Figure 14-1 (1) 262 Front, side and rear views Video link receiver Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Operator panel 15" TFT with VLE 14.1 Description Figure 14-2 (1) Rear view of the operator panel front with premounted videolink receiver Video link receiver (2) Keyboard interface (3) Power Supply (4) Supporting plate (5) Sockets for video link cables (6) 2x USB-A (7) Operator panel front Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 263 Operator panel 15" TFT with VLE 14.1 Description 14.1.4.2 Machine control panels Milling MCP Front and side view Figure 14-3 (1) "Milling" MCP Threaded bolt M5 (for detailed view, see "Threaded Bolts") The following figure shows the rear view of the milling MCP and the turning MCP with the position of the connections, the S3 programming switch and the status LEDs H1 to H4 X302 X301 X401 X303/4 X404 S3 87654321 X402 X403 H4 H3 H2 H1 Figure 14-4 (1) 264 Rear view of the milling MCP and turning MCP Ground connection (M5 threads) Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Operator panel 15" TFT with VLE 14.1 Description The meaning of the status LEDs and assignment of DIP-fix switch S3 is given in the tables below. Table 14-1 No. Meaning of status LEDs Color Meaning H1 Red Hardware faults H2 Red Temperature error H3 Green Power OK H4 yellow Interface operator panel front active Table 14-2 1 Assignment of DIP Fix switch S3 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Meaning / value Meaning / value Baud rate On Off 1.5 MBaud 187.5 kBaud on off off off on off Transmission cycle time Reception monitoring 200 ms 100 ms 50 ms 2400 ms 1200 ms 600 ms Bus address off off on off on 1 Off 2 3 off Off 4 on 5 on Off 6 on 7 off Off 8 on 9 Off 10 on on on 0 on off on Off off on on 11 Off 12 on 13 Off 14 on 15 On Off Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Interface MPI customer operator panel Series HW 265 Operator panel 15" TFT with VLE 14.1 Description Threaded bolt Welded threaded bolts are used instead of drill holes with press-in sleeves to secure the operator panel front and the MCP. M5 10 5 23 Figure 14-5 Bolt for securing operator panel front and MCP (1) Threaded bolt M5 (2) Spacer ring (3) Front panel EMERGENCY STOP key The emergency stop key wiring is shown in the block diagram below. 1 Figure 14-6 266 2 1 2 Block diagram of emergency stop button Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Operator panel 15" TFT with VLE 14.1 Description Turning MCP The turning MCP only differs from the milling MCP by a handwheel in place of the second override switch and different keys Figure 14-7 "Turning" MCP (1) Exchangeable keys (2) Threaded bolt M5 (for detailed view, see "Threaded Bolts") (3) Exchangeable key caps Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 267 Operator panel 15" TFT with VLE 14.1 Description 14.1.4.3 Videolink transmitter PCU 50 with attached videolink transmitter PCU 50 114 PCU 50 PCU 50 (1) Mounting bracket (2) Mounting screws for the video link transmitter (3) Videolink transmitter You can find the mounting instructions in the section: "Mounting" "Videolink transmitter". 268 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Operator panel 15" TFT with VLE 14.1 Description 14.1.4.4 Cable 1. Video link cable - 10 m: Order No. 6FX2002-1VL01-1BA0 - 15 m: Order No. 6FX2002-1VL00-1BF0 - 20 m: Order No. 6FX2002-1VL00-1CA0 2. MPI cable - MPI/PROFIBUS cable (cut-to-length) and connector from Siemens 3. USB connection cable between X205 (operator panel front ) and X301 (MCP): - 10-pole ribbon cable with fitted socket connectors (supplied with operator panel front) Figure 14-8 Video link cable Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 269 Operator panel 15" TFT with VLE 14.2 Operator controls and indicators 14.2 Operator controls and indicators 14.2.1 View of function blocks The entire system is shown in the schematic diagram in the figure. 2SHUDWRUSDQHOIURQWZLWKYLGHROLQNUHFHLYHU 9LGHROLQN ZLWK86% 9LGHROLQN 6HQGLQJ VWDWLRQV ; ; ; ; ; 86%$ ; 9 3&8 7)7 ; [86%$ ; 03, 86% ; 0DFKLQHFRQWUROSDQHO ; 127 2)) 4:(57< ; 86%% ; [86%$ 03, 0&3 1& ; 2YHUULGH ; 9 2YHUULGHKDQGZKHHO FRQWUROSDQHO Figure 14-9 Function blocks of SINUMERIK operator panel 15" TFT (width 416 mm) 1. Operator panel front with videolink receiver behind the operator panel front (not visible in the figure) 2. MCP with QWERTY keyboard and machine control panel (MCP) 3. Videolink transmitter 4. PCU 5. NC unit Function blocks 1 to 3 are the subject of this hardware description. 270 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Operator panel 15" TFT with VLE 14.2 Operator controls and indicators 14.2.2 Description of the function blocks 14.2.2.1 Operator panel front * Resolution: XGA (1024x768 pixels), 15" TFT * Control elements: Horizontal and vertical softkeys * Interfaces: Inputs: - 1 x videolink MDR 36 - 1 x USB B - 1 x 24V power supply, 3-pole terminal Outputs: - 1 x plug connector 2x5-pole with interlock - 2 x USB-A * Dimensions: WxHxD (in mm): 416 x 382 x 65 * Edge of support: Top/bottom: 18 mm Right/left: 16 mm * Attachment: Four welded-on threaded bolts M5 * Seal: To be provided by customer * Degree of protection: Max. IP54 at front / IP00 at rear Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 271 Operator panel 15" TFT with VLE 14.2 Operator controls and indicators 14.2.2.2 Machine control panel for turning and milling 1. QWERTY keyboard area The QWERTY keyboard features: * MF2 keyboard (without function keys) * Operating area keys: MACHINE, PROGRAM, OFFSET, PROGRAM MANAGER, ALARM and CUSTOM * Other keys: ALARM CANCEL, HELP, GROUP CHANNEL, INSERT, SELECT and NEXT WINDOW * Integrated mouse 2. MCP area The MCP features: * 54 keys (technology-specific and manufacturer-specific) * Turning: - 1 x feed override (0 - 120%, 23 latched positions) - 1 x handwheel (100 pulses/revolution), approx. 60 mm wheel diameter * Milling: - 1 x feed override (0 - 120 %, 23 latched positions) - 1 x rapid traverse override (0 -100%, 23 latched positions) 272 3. Other components of the machine control panel * 1 x emergency stop button, 2-channel (small) * 1 x illuminated pushbutton, machine 'ON' (22 mm system) 4. Interfaces * Inputs: - 1 x plug connector (2x5-pole) with lock - 1 x USB B 2 - 1 x MPI interface, Sub-D, 9-pole - 1 x 24V power supply: terminal (3-pole) * Outputs: - 2x USB-A - 2 x 4-pole (reserved for optional interfaces, not equipped in series production) 5. Dimensions * W x H x D (mm): 416 x 370 x 107 (turning) / 84 (milling) 6. Mounting * Four welded-on threaded bolts M5 7. Seal * To be provided by customer 8. Degree of protection * Max. IP54 at front, IP00 at rear Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Operator panel 15" TFT with VLE 14.2 Operator controls and indicators 14.2.2.3 Videolink transmitter 1. Videolink transmitter 1 ... 10 m * Function: Transmitter module for video transmission * Interfaces: - Inputs: 1 x plug connector (20-pole) with lock 1 x plug connector (26-pole) with lock - Outputs: 1 x videolink MDR 36 for 1, ..., 10 m (max. 20 m) (video data plus USB signals) 1 x USB A 2. Videolink transmitter 1 ... 20 m * Function: As above, plus ExtremeUSB for 20 m and branch for second operator panel front with videolink output for 1 to 20 m * Interfaces: - Outputs 2 x videolink MDR 36 for 1, ..., 15 m (max. 20 m) 2x USB-A Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 273 Operator panel 15" TFT with VLE 14.2 Operator controls and indicators 14.2.2.4 Internal operating displays (LEDs) The following tables give an overview of the LEDs for indicating the operating statuses of the transmitter and receiver. Sending stations Table 14-3 Operating status indicators on the transmitter Description Color Source Meaning + 3V3 Red Red On ExtremeUSB module at X21/22/23 + 3.3 V supply OK +5V H1 Green ExtremeUSB module at X21/22/23 Host OK On ExtremeUSB module at X11/12/13 + 3.3 V supply OK ExtremeUSB module at X11/12/13 Host OK H2 Green + 3V3 Red +5V Red H3 Green H4 Green + 5 V supply OK Link OK + 5 V supply OK Link OK When the ExtremeUSB line is operating properly, both green LEDs of the transmitter module (LEX) and both green LEDs of the receiver module (REX) light up on the videolink transmitter. Receiver Table 14-4 Operating status indicators on the receiver Description Color Source Meaning + 3V3 Red On the ExtremeUSB module + 3.3 V supply OK +5V Red + 5 V supply OK ExtremeUSB module H1 Green H2 Green H3 Green OpenLDI receiver H4 Green + 12 V, + 3.3 V, + 5 V of the power unit USB port OK Link OK Video interface (OpenLDI) active Power o.k. When the ExtremeUSB line is operating properly, both green LEDs of the transmitter module (LEX) and both green LEDs of the receiver module (REX) light up on the videolink receiver. 274 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Operator panel 15" TFT with VLE 14.2 Operator controls and indicators 14.2.3 Screen saver If a screen with high contrast is displayed unchanged for longer than 1 hour, the screensaver must be activated (screen switched dark) to protect the TFT display from "burn-in" of the last displayed screen. For more information see: /BEM/: HMI Embedded Operator's Guide /IAM/: IM2 Installation and Start-up HMI Embedded; IM4 Installation and Start-up HMI Advanced CAUTION You may do irreversible damage to your TFT display if the screen saver is not activated. Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 275 Operator panel 15" TFT with VLE 14.3 Interfaces 14.3 Interfaces 14.3.1 Hardware 14.3.1.1 Overview Table 14-5 Overview of hardware interfaces Interfaces Type Function Videolink interface (incl. USB) USB input (reserved) Operator panel front MCP (QWERTY keyboard) Videolink transmitter 1 to 10 m Videolink transmitter 1 to 20 m Type X201 MDR 36 X202 USB-B X203/204 2x USB-A USB output X205 Plug connector, 2 x 5-pole, with lock 24V voltage supply X206 Terminal 3-pole USB input X301 Plug connector, 2 x 5-pole, with lock USB input (reserved - as an option to X301) X302 USB-B 2 x USB output USB output MCP Designation X303/304 2x USB-A MPI X401 SUB-D, 9-pole Optional interface (input reserved) X402 Plug connector, 1 x 4-pole Option interface (input reserved) X403 Plug connector, 1 x 4-pole 24V voltage supply X404 Terminal 3-pole Videolink (incl. USB) X101 MDR 36 USB interface X102 USB-A LVDS input X103 Plug connector, 2 x 10-pole I/O interface for panel fronts from the PC X104 Plug connector, 2 x 13-pole LVDS output X107 Plug connector, 2 x 10-pole I/O interface to local operator panel front X108 Plug connector, 2 x 13-pole As videolink transmitter 1 to 10 m; plus: second videolink (incl. USB) X105 MDR 36 USB interface Videolink transmitter <=> Display unit X106 Video link USB-A 5 m: 6FX2002-1VL01-1AF0 10 m: 6FX2002-1VL01-1BA0 15 m: 6FX2002-1VL01-1BF0 Cable 276 20 m: 6FX2002-1VL01-1CA0 Videolink transmitter <=> PCU LVDS Flat ribbon, 20-pole Videolink transmitter <=> PCU I/O Flat ribbon, 26-pole Display unit <=> Operator panel front USB Flat ribbon, 10-pole NC <=> Operator panel front MPI Standard Profibus Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Operator panel 15" TFT with VLE 14.3 Interfaces Signal types Meaning of the abbreviations in table column "Signal type" for the interface assignments of the individual components: I Input O Output B Bi-directional V Power supply OC 14.3.1.2 Open Collector Interface assignment for operator panel front X201 (videolink incl. USB) Connector designation: Table 14-6 X201; mini D ribbon (MDR), socket connector, 36-pole X201 pin assignments Pin Signal name Signal type 1 A0M I 2 A0P I 3 A1M I 4 A1P I 5 A2M I 6 A2P I 7 CLK1M I 8 CLK1P I 9 ENVCC_12V I 10 M_12V VI 11 Shield } } } } OPENLDI clock Enabling of LCD power supply (12V level) Reference ground for signals with 12V level Shield for twisted pair cables; connected to ground Reserved M (GND) Reserved (ground) 23 24 M (GND) 25 M (GND) 26 Shield Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 OPENLDI data } 12, ..., 21 22 Meaning } V Reserved Reserved (ground) Ground Shield for the twisted pair cables 277 Operator panel 15" TFT with VLE 14.3 Interfaces Pin Signal name Signal type 27 RX_A / USB_M I/B 28 RX_B / USB_P I/B 29 TX_A O 30 TX_B O 31 BL_ON_12V I 32 M_12V VI 33 XRESET_HUB I 34 M_12V } } } } 35 XPAN-PRES O 36 XPAN-PRES I } Meaning Received data A (Extreme USB) / USB data Received data B (Extreme USB) / USB data + Transmitted data A (Extreme USB) Transmitted data B (Extreme USB) Backlight ON (12V signal) Ground RESET to hub (low active, 12V signal) Ground Operator panel front is present Ground of videolink transmitter, transmitted to Pin 35 } Twisted Pair (shielded) X202 (USB interface input) Connector designation: Table 14-7 Pin X202; USB socket, 4-pole, type B X202 pin assignments Signal name Signal type 1 2 278 Meaning reserved (capacitive connection to ground) USB_DM 3 USB_DP B 4 USB_GND V Data-; USB channel 0 Data+; USB channel 0 Ground for external USB interface Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Operator panel 15" TFT with VLE 14.3 Interfaces X203 / 204 (USB interface output) Connector designation: Table 14-8 X203/ 204; USB socket, 2 x 4-pole, type A X203 / 204 pin assignments Pin Signal name Signal type Meaning A1 P5V_3_fused VO + 5 V (fused) for external USB interface A2 USB_D3M Data-; USB channel 3 A3 USB D3P B A4 USB_GND V Ground for external USB interface VO + 5 V (fused) for external USB interface B1 B2 USB_D4M B3 USB_D4P B B4 USB_GND V Data+; USB channel 3 Data-; USB channel 4 Data+; USB channel 4 Ground for external USB interface X205 (QWERTY interface) Connector designation: Table 14-9 X205; plug connector, 2 x 5-pole, grid 2.54 mm Interface is designed as a "high current USB" (500 mA). X205 pin assignments Pin Signal name Signal type Meaning 1 P5V_fused VO + 5 V (fused) for external USB interface 2 USB_DM 3 USB_DP B 4/5 M (GND) V 6, ..., 10 N.C. Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Data-; USB channel 0 Data+; USB channel 0 Ground Not connected 279 Operator panel 15" TFT with VLE 14.3 Interfaces X206 (24 V power supply) Connector designation: X206; terminal block, 3-pole Table 14-10 X206 pin assignments Pin Signal name 1 P24 2 M24 3 Shield Signal type Meaning 24V potential Ground 24V V Shield connection Coding switch S1 Accessible internally only with "Extreme USB": both switches set to 1 (factory setting) without "Extreme USB": both switches set to 2 14.3.1.3 Interface assignment for QWERTY keyboard The QWERTY keyboard has a total of five USB ports, four of which can be used by the user (see figure in Section: "Control and Display Elements" --> "View of Function Blocks"). The integrated mouse is connected to the fifth USB port (X305). Interface X301 connects the keyboard to the videolink receiver. The max. cable length is 10 m. The keyboard can be connected to the PCU using interface X302 and a cable of max. 5 m in length. The two interfaces X303 and X304 are accessible by means of a two-tier USB-A connector. X301 / X302 The two interfaces X301 and X302 (see Fig. in Section: "Operating and display elements" "View of function blocks") are switched in parallel and designed as a "high powered interface" with max. 500 mA, 5 V. X301 is used to form the connection to the videolink receiver. Max. permissible ribbon cable length: 1 m. X302 supports a standard USB cable with length of max. 5 m. This cable can be used to form a direct connection to, for example, the PCU (e.g. for loading customer-specific keyboard tables). 280 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Operator panel 15" TFT with VLE 14.3 Interfaces CAUTION The two interfaces X301 and X302 should not be used simultaneously because they are connected in parallel. Connector designation: X301; plug connector 2 x 5-pole with lock Table 14-11 X301 pin assignments Pin Signal name Signal type Meaning 1 P5 V Power supply 5 V 2 USB_P 3 USB_M B V Data + Data- 4/5 M (GND) 6/7/8 N.C. Ground 9 SDA B Serial data for EEPROM 10 SCL I Clock for EEPROM Unassigned Table 14-12 X302 pin assignments Pin Signal name Signal type Meaning 1 P5 V Power supply + 5 V 2 USB_DM0 3 4 Data-; channel 0 USB_DP0 B Data+; channel 0 M (GND) V Ground X303 / X304 X303 / 304 is a double standard USB A connector (see Figure in Section: "View of Function Blocks"). X303 and X304 are configured as "low powered interfaces" with max. of 100 mA, 5 V. Connector designation: X303; USB-A connector, 4-pole Table 14-13 X303 pin assignments Pin Signal name Signal type Meaning A1 1P5 V + 5 V power supply for external USB device A2 USB_DM2 A3 USB_DP2 B Data+; channel 2 A4 M (GND) V Ground Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Data-; channel 2 281 Operator panel 15" TFT with VLE 14.3 Interfaces Connector designation: X304; USB-A connector, 4-pole Table 14-14 X304 pin assignments 14.3.1.4 Pin Signal name Signal type Meaning B1 2P5 V + 5 V power supply for external USB device B2 USB_DM3 B3 USB_DP3 B Data+; channel 0 B4 M (GND) V Ground Data-; channel 0 Interface assignment for MCP X401 (MPI) The MCP is connected to the MPI of the NC by means of interface X401. Connector designation: X401; 9-pole Sub-D socket Table 14-15 X401 pin assignments Pin Signal name Signal type Meaning 1/2 N.C. 3 RS_OPI B RS-485 data Unassigned 4 ORTSAS_OPI O Output Request to Send, user interface 5 M5EXT 6 P5EXT V 5 V external potential 5 V external ground 7 N.C. 8 XRS_OPI B RS-485 data Unassigned 9 IRTSPG_OPI I In Request to Send PG Baud rate (max. of 1.5 Mbaud) and station address of the MCP at the MPI bus are set at DIP switch S3 of the keyboard controller. X402 / X403 Not available 282 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Operator panel 15" TFT with VLE 14.3 Interfaces X404 (power supply) see X206 Section: "Interface assignment for operator panel front" X11 / X12 (axis override interface) Depending on the variant, the operator panel front has one or two axis override switches. These switches are connected to the MCP by means of ribbon cables. Connector X11 is used to connect the rotary selector switch for feedrate override (32 graduations), irrespective of its installation position. With the "milling" version, the rotary selector switch for rapid traverse (32 graduations) is connected to X12. With the "turning" version, a handwheel is fitted in place of the rotary selector switch. The handwheel is directly connected to the NC controller. Connector designation: X11; plug connector, 2 x 5-pole, with lock Table 14-16 X11 pin assignments Pin Signal name 1/2 N.C. 3/4 M (GND) 5 N.C. Signal type Meaning Unassigned V Ground Unassigned Setting of override rotary selector switch 6 IN3_4 Significance 16 7 IN3_3 Significance 8 8 IN3_2 9 IN3_1 10 IN3_0 Connector designation: Significance 4 I Significance 2 Significance 1 X12; (optional interface for "milling" variant) Plug connector, 2 x 5-pole, with lock Table 14-17 X12 pin assignments Pin Signal name Signal type Meaning 1/2 N.C. 3/4 M (GND) Unassigned 5 N.C. 6 IN7_4 Significance 16 7 IN7_3 Significance 8 8 IN7_2 9 IN7_1 10 IN7_0 V Ground Unassigned Setting of override rotary selector switch Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 I Significance 4 Significance 2 Significance 1 283 Operator panel 15" TFT with VLE 14.3 Interfaces 14.3.1.5 Interface assignment for videolink transmitter X101/X105 (videolink incl. USB) Connector designation: X101/105; mini D ribbon (MDR), socket connector, 36-pole Table 14-18 X101/105 pin assignments Pin Signal name Signal type 1 A0M O 2 A0P O 3 A1M O 4 A1P O 5 A2M O 6 A2P O 7 CLK1M O 8 CLK1P O 9 ENVCC_X 10 M (GND) 11 Shield Meaning } } OPENLDI data } } } OPENLDI clock Enabling of LCD power supply (12V level) Ground Shield for twisted pair cables; connected to ground 12, ..., 22 23 } 24 25 M (GND) V 26 Shield 27 TX_A / USB_M O/B 28 TX_B / USB_P O/B 29 RX_A I 30 RI_B I 31 BL_ON_x O 32 M_ O 33 XRESET_HUB O 34 M (GND) 35 XPAN-PRES_x 36 M (GND) Reserved Ground Shield for the twisted pair cables } } } } V } Transmitted data A (Extreme USB) / USB data Transmitted data B (Extreme USB) / USB data+ Received data A (Extreme USB) Received data B (Extreme USB) Backlight On (12V signal) Ground RESET to downstream hub (low active, 12 V signal) Ground Operator panel front is present Ground } Twisted Pair (shielded) 284 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Operator panel 15" TFT with VLE 14.3 Interfaces X102 / X106 (USB downstream) Interface is configured as high-current USB (500 mA). Connector designation: X102 / X106; USB socket, 4-pin, type A Table 14-19 X102 or X106 pin assignments Pin Signal name Signal type Meaning 1 USB_P5V_fused VO + 5 V (fused) for external USB interface 2 USB_D0M 3 USB_D0P O Data+; USB channel 0 4 USB_GND V Ground for external USB interface Data-; USB channel 0 Note X106 is not available at present. Connector designation: X103; plug connector, 2 x 10-pin, grid 2.54 mm Table 14-20 X103 pin assignments Pin Signal name Signal type 1/2 P5V VI 3 RXIN0- 4 RXIN0+ I 5/6 P3V3 VI 7 RXIN1- 8 RXIN1+ I 9/10 GND V 11 RXIN2- 12 RXIN2+ I LVDS input signal Bit 2 (+) 13/14 GND V Ground 15 RXCLKIN- 16 17/18 19/20 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Meaning +5V LVDS input signal Bit 0 (-) LVDS input signal Bit 0 (+) + 3.3 V LVDS input signal Bit 1 (-) LVDS input signal Bit 1 (+) Ground LVDS input signal Bit 2 (-) LVDS clock signal (-) RXCLKIN+ I LVDS clock signal (+) GND V Ground Reserved 285 Operator panel 15" TFT with VLE 14.3 Interfaces X104 (I/O interface for operator panel fronts from the PC) Connector designation: X104; plug connector, 2-row, grid 2.54 mm Table 14-21 X104 pin assignments Pin Signal name Signal type Meaning 1 GND V Ground 2 P12V VI Power supply for inverter (max. 1.1 A) 3 BL_ON I Backlight On (5 V ... 12 V = On) 4 P5V_fused VI + 5 V VCC (fused) 5 GND V Ground 6 P3V3_fused VI + 3.3 V VCC (fused) 7, ..., 10 Reserved 11 P5V_fused 12 USB_D1M VI 13 USB_D1P B 14 GND V 15 LCDSEL0 Display type-Select signal 0 16 LCDSEL1 Display type-Select signal 1 17 LCDSEL2 18 LCDSEL3 19 RESET_N O + 5 V VCC (fused) USB data- Channel 1 USB data+ Channel 1 Ground Display type-Select signal 2 Display type-Select signal 3 Reset signal (low active, with pull-up resistor set to high) 20 (Port for system loudspeaker) 21 (HD LED) *) 22 (MIP/DP LED) *) 23 (Ethernet LED) *) 24 TEM_ERR O (Temperature error LED) *) 25 (Watchdog error LED) *) 26 (Watchdog OK LED) *) *) Anode with 1k in series on mainboard 286 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Operator panel 15" TFT with VLE 14.3 Interfaces X107 (LVDS output to operator panel) Connector designation: X107; plug connector, 2 x 10-pin, grid 2.54 mm Table 14-22 X107 pin assignments Pin Signal name Signal type 1/2 P5V VO 3 TXOUT0- 4 TXOUT0+ O 5/6 P3V3 VO 7 TXOUT1- 8 TXOUT1+ O LVDS output signal Bit 1 (+) 9/10 GND V Ground 11 TXOUT2- 12 TXOUT2+ O 13/14 GND V 15 TXCLKOUT- 16 17/18 Meaning +5V LVDS output signal Bit 0 (-) LVDS output signal Bit 0 (+) + 3.3 V LVDS output signal Bit 1 (-) LVDS output signal Bit 2 (-) LVDS output signal Bit 2 (+) Ground LVDS clock signal (-) TXCLKOUT+ O LVDS clock signal (+) GND V Ground 19/20 Reserved X108 (I/O interface for local operator panel front) Connector designation: X108; plug connector, 2 x 13-pin, grid 2.54 mm Table 14-23 X108 pin assignments Pin Signal name Signal type Meaning 1 GND V Ground 2 P12V VI Power supply for inverter (max. 1.1 A) 3 BL_ON I Backlight On (5 V ... 12 V = On) 4 P5V_fused VI + 5 V VCC (fused) 5 GND V Ground 6 P3V3_fused VI + 3.3 V VCC (fused) VI + 5 V VCC (fused) 7, ..., 10 N.C. 11 P5V_fused 12 USB_D1M 13 USB_D1P B USB data+ Channel 1 14 GND V Ground O (LED temperature drift; anode with 1 k in series on the mainboard) 15, ..., 23 N.C. 24 TEMP_ERR 24/26 N.C. Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Not connected USB data- Channel 1 Not connected Not connected 287 Operator panel 15" TFT with VLE 14.3 Interfaces Rotary selector switch S1 Factory setting for the choice of display type: Position 9 corresponds to the 15" TFT display. Note All the displays used in a system must be of the same type (e.g. 3 times 15" TFT XGA resolution). If the setting is incorrect, the display may be irreparably damaged in a short time. DIP switch S2 10 m transmitter variant (1 x Videolink): - 1 and 3 = any or S2 not equipped - 2, 4 - 8 = OFF 20 m transmitter variant (2 x Videolink): - 1 and 3 = ON - 2. 4 - 8 = OFF 14.3.2 Software Key layout of the MCP Layout of the machine control keys (applies to "turning" and "milling") /RZDFWLYHNH\V 288 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Operator panel 15" TFT with VLE 14.3 Interfaces Input screen of the MCP Table 14-24 Assignment of the input words/bytes to the machine control keys (the number keys 00 - 54 correspond to the key numbers in the figure above) Input Bit7 (MSB Bit6 Bit5 Bit4 Bit3 Bit2 Bit1 Bit0 (LSB) Word 0 Low Key 40 *) Key 36 Key 35 Key 34 Key 30 Key 00 Key 10 Key 20 Word 0 High Key 42 Key 09 Key 08 *) Key 07 Key 04 Key 02 Key 01 Key 11 Word 1 Low Key 46 Key 45 *) Key 03 Key 05 Key 43 Key 33 Key 23 Key 13 Word 1' High Key 31 Key 06 Key 14 Override 1E Override 1D Override 1C Override 1B Override 1A Word 2 Low Key 49 Key 47 Key 28 Key 15 Key 16 Key 17 Key 19 Key 21 Word 2 High Key 22 Key 24 Key 25 Key 26 Key 18 Key 38 Key 29 Key 27 Word 3 Low Key 32 Key 37 Key 39 Key 44 Key 12 Key 48 Key 50 Key 51 Word3 High Key 52 Key 53 Key 54 Override 2E Override 2D Override 2C Override 2B Override 2A *) Low-active keys Remarks: The "Override2" function only exists in the "milling" version. This function does not exist in the "turning" version; the bits concerned are each set to 1. Significance with override: A = 1, B = 2, C = 4, D = 8, E = 16. Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 289 Operator panel 15" TFT with VLE 14.4 Mounting 14.4 Mounting 14.4.1 Operator panel front with videolink receiver 'LPHQVLRQVLQPP Figure 14-10 Panel cutout for operator panel front The operator panel front is connected to the other components by means of cables (see Fig. Section: "Control and Display Elements" --> "View of Function Blocks") 290 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Operator panel 15" TFT with VLE 14.4 Mounting Cable connections Machine control panel (MCP) - For noise immunity reasons, the USB ribbon cable connection from the operator panel front (interface X205) to the MCP (interface X301) must always be installed and secured close to the top side of the metal plate. - No other cables which could cause noise interference should be installed in the immediate vicinity. Video link receiver - The videolink cable connects interface X201 of the videolink receiver (mounted on the rear of the operator panel front) to interface X101 of the videolink transmitter (mounted on the rear of the PCU). - The cable is secured at the U-shaped panel cutouts on the rear of the operator panel front using cable ties (see picture below). Securing in this way also relieves the strain on connectors which do not have strong connector catches (e.g. USB). Figure 14-11 Cable attachment on rear of operator panel front (1) Panel cutouts for cable attachment (2) Cable tie (3) Video link cable (4) Back of operator panel front (5) Video link receiver Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 291 Operator panel 15" TFT with VLE 14.4 Mounting Note In cases where a high degree of noise interference is likely or the distance between the operator panel front and the MCP is relatively large, it is advisable to purchase USB cables with shielding. Interface X203 behind the front and interface X302 behind the machine control panel are then connected to each other. The ribbon cable does not need to be fitted in this case. Connector X302 on the machine control panel (QWERTY keyboard) can also be connected directly to the PCU or a PC using a standard USB cable. 14.4.2 Machine control panel 'LPHQVLRQVLQPP Figure 14-12 Panel cutout for machine control panel 292 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Operator panel 15" TFT with VLE 14.4 Mounting Procedure 1. Insert the operator panel front with its four threaded bolts (see Fig. "MCP turning", Section: "Mechanical Design") into the mounting holes of the prepared mounting cut-out (picture above). The spacer rings ensure that the rubber seal is not squashed when installed. 2. Secure the operator panel front from the rear side using the M5 nuts and suitable circlips. 3. Attach the ground connection (see Figure below). 4. Connect all interfaces except for interface X404. 5. Connect interface X404 to the 24 V power supply. X302 X301 X401 X303/4 X404 S3 87654321 X402 X403 H4 H3 H2 H1 Figure 14-13 Rear view of MCP ("milling" and "turning") showing position of the connections, programming switch S3 and the status LEDs H1, ..., H4 14.4.3 Videolink transmitter The videolink transmitter is mounted between the mounting brackets under the PCU (see Fig: "PCU 50 with videolink transmitter", Section: "Mechanical Design" "Videolink Transmitter") You will find the reference diagrams for the individual mounting stages at the end of the description of the procedure. Procedure 1. Plug the supplied cables into the connectors of the videolink transmitter(A). 2. Mount the first mounting bracket on the PCU (B). 3. Hook the videolink transmitter into this mounting bracket (D). Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 293 Operator panel 15" TFT with VLE 14.4 Mounting 4. Mount the second mounting bracket after attaching it to the opposite hinge bolt (A) of the videolink transmitter. 5. Plug the connecting cable into the connectors on the PCU (C) . 6. Swivel the videolink transmitter into place on the PCU (D) . 7. Push the videolink transmitter forwards in the locking mechanism (D, see arrow, to the left) until it locks down into place (E). 8. Secure the videolink transmitter to the mounting brackets with the screws supplied (E). The videolink transmitter is now firmly secured to the PCU mounting brackets (F) and can be correctly mounted with the PCU. CAUTION If it is necessary to dismantle the videolink transmitter, please release the fastening screws and slide the video transmitter horizontally before swiveling it away from the PCU, in accordance with step 7 (D). Otherwise, damage is likely. Reference diagrams (A) Figure 14-14 Videolink transmitter with connecting cables (1) Hinge bolts (2) Threaded holes for fastening screws CAUTION To prevent damages: Only plug the cable connectors into the sockets shown in the figure. 294 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Operator panel 15" TFT with VLE 14.4 Mounting (B) Figure 14-15 PCU 50 with mounting brackets (1) Mounting bracket (C) PCU 50 Figure 14-16 Videolink transmitter hooked into place with the hinge bolts (1) Videolink transmitter Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 295 Operator panel 15" TFT with VLE 14.4 Mounting (D) Figure 14-17 Hinge of the videolink transmitter before being locked in position (1) Hinge bolts (2) PCU 50 (E) Figure 14-18 Videolink transmitter, locked in position and screwed tight (1) 296 Videolink transmitter (2) Hinge bolts (3) PCU 50 (4) Mounting screw Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Operator panel 15" TFT with VLE 14.4 Mounting (F) Figure 14-19 Videolink transmitter fully mounted to the PCU 50 (1) Videolink transmitter (2) PCU 50 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 297 Operator panel 15" TFT with VLE 14.5 Technical specifications 14.5 Technical specifications 14.5.1 Operator panel front Table 14-25 Technical specifications for operator panel front 14.5.2 Dimensions (WxHxD) approx. 416 x 382 x 65mm Weight Approx. 6.5 kg Display 15" TFT Keys Vertical and horizontal softkeys (short-stroke keys) Voltage supply Rated voltage 24 V, voltage range 19 - 31 V Power consumption Approx. 19 W Interfaces Videolink, USB, 24 V terminal connection Degree of protection Front: IP54 Rear side: IP00 Ambient temperature during operation External: 0 C to 45 C (on the display) Internal: 0 C to 55 C Ventilation Free convection, without fan Casing Front panel: Stainless steel, brushed diagonally (grain 240) Rear side: Galvanized steel plate Machine control panel Table 14-26 Technical data for MCP Dimensions (WxHxD) 298 Turning: approx. 416 x 370 x 107 mm Milling: approx. 416 x 370 x 84 mm Mounting depth Max. 65 mm Weight Approx. 4.4 kg Keys Mechanical short-stroke keys Voltage supply Rated voltage 24 V, voltage range 19 - 31 V Power consumption Approx. 19 W Interfaces USB, MPI, 24 V terminal connection Degree of protection Front: IP54 Rear side: IP00 Ambient temperature during operation External: 0 C to 45 C (due to display) Internal: 0 C to 55 C Ventilation Free convection, without fan Casing Front panel: Stainless steel, brushed diagonally (grain 240) Rear side: Galvanized steel plate Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Operator panel 15" TFT with VLE 14.5 Technical specifications 14.5.3 Videolink transmitter Table 14-27 Technical data for videolink transmitter Dimensions (WxHxD) approx. 265 x 277 x 35 mm Weight approx. 2.2 kg with two brackets, without PCU Voltage supply Videolink transmitter is supplied with power from the PCU Power consumption Approx. 19 W Interfaces Videolink, USB, LVDS, keyboard and special interface Degree of protection IP00 Ambient temperature 0 C to 55 C during operation Ventilation Free convection, without fan Casing Galvanized steel plate Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Mounted on PCU: IP20 299 Operator panel 15" TFT with VLE 14.6 Replacement parts 14.6 Replacement parts 14.6.1 Overview The following spare part kits are available for the operator panel front 15" TFT (width 416 mm): Name Description Order number (MLFB) Hand wheel Handwheel for machine control panel, width 416mm, T-version 6FC5247-0AF50-0AA0 Rotary switch Rotary selector switch for feedrate / rapid traverse override, 1x23G, grad=32, knob and cover 6FC5247-0AF50-1AA0 Mouse EMERGENCY STOP 1) Illuminated pushbuttons 1) 1) USB mouse for front 6FC5247-0AF01-0AA0 Button 3SB2000-1AC01 Holder 3SB2908-0AA Switching element 3SB2404-0C Complete 3SB3001-0AA71 Switching element 3SB3400-0A Switching element with lamp 3SB3400-1D Submit orders to SIEMENS Amberg 14.6.2 Replacement 14.6.2.1 Hand wheel Removing the handwheel 1. Loosen the two opposing grub screws (6) of the rotary button (1). 2. Pull the rotary button from the shaft. 3. Loosen the three fastening screws M3 (4) with the Torx screwdriver T10. 4. Pull the handwheel (3) backward out of the front plate. 5. Remove the wiring. 300 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Operator panel 15" TFT with VLE 14.6 Replacement parts Figure 14-20 Removing the handwheel (1) Rotary knob (detached on the right) (2) Connection terminals (3) Hand wheel (4) Fastening screws M3 (5) O-ring (6) Grub screw (Inbus) (7) Handwheel shaft Installing the handwheel Installation is undertaken in reverse order. Ensure that the O-ring (5) is seated correctly. 14.6.2.2 Rotary switch Removing the rotary switch 1. Lever the cover (6) off of the rotary button (2) (snap-on connection!). 2. Remove the nut of the collet (1) with a wrench (width 10). 3. Remove the entire rotary button (2). 4. Remove the lock nut (4) on the shaft of the rotary switch (3) with a wrench (width 14). 5. Remove the connector on the end of the rotary switch cable from the socket. 6. Remove the rotary switch Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 301 Operator panel 15" TFT with VLE 14.6 Replacement parts Figure 14-21 Removal of rotary switch (1) Nut of the collet (2) Rotary knob (3) Rotary switch shaft (4) Lock nut (5) Scale (6) Cap Installing the rotary switch 1. Push the O-ring (1) onto the shaft of the new rotary switch as a seal. 2. Insert the rotary switch into the front cutout so that pressure is applied to the O-ring. 3. Screw the lock nut (4) on the shaft of the rotary switch from the front with a wrench (width 14). 4. Connect arrow ring (2) and rotary button (5). 5. Slide both parts onto the shaft of the rotary switch. 6. Tighten the collet nut of the rotary button with a wrench (width 10). Align the arrow point on the ring with position "0" on the scale. 7. Place the cover (3) on the rotary button and snap it into position. 8. Fold and fasten the connecting cable (6) as shown in the figure on the right. 302 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Operator panel 15" TFT with VLE 14.6 Replacement parts Figure 14-22 Installation of rotary switch (1) O-ring (2) Arrow ring (3) Cap (4) Lock nut (5) Rotary knob (6) Connecting cable (7) Terminal board When installing the second rotary switch, proceed in the same manner. The recommended folding method for the cables is shown in the figure. Figure 14-23 Both rotary selector switches installed (top switch [right] not yet connected) Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 303 Operator panel 15" TFT with VLE 14.6 Replacement parts 14.6.2.3 Mouse Removing the mouse Figure 14-23 Mouse prior to removal (1) Connecting cable (2) Mouse board (3) Cable connector (4) Mounting screw (5) Retainer frame 1. Remove the cable connector (3) from the mouse (2). 2. Loosen the four fixing screws M3x6 (4) on the retaining frame (5) using Torx screwdriver T10. 3. Remove the retaining frame. 4. Lift the mouse out of the front panel. Figure 14-24 Mouse fastening released 304 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Operator panel 15" TFT with VLE 14.6 Replacement parts Installing the mouse The mouse is installed in reverse order. Ensure the alignment is correct based on the mouse symbol. Figure 14-26 Removed mouse Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 305 Operator panel 15" TFT with VLE 14.6 Replacement parts 306 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 15 Operator panel 15" TFT without VLE 15.1 Description 15.1.1 Validity The following description applies to the following components: Description 15.1.2 Properties Order No.: SINUMERIK operator panel front, width 416 mm With mech. keys, without integrated videolink receiver 6FC5203-0AF50-0AA0 SINUMERIK machine control panel MCP 416C-M Variant Milling, mech. keys, rapid traverse and feed override, mouse 6FC5203-0AF50-3AA1 SINUMERIK machine control panel MCP 416C-T Variant Turning, mech. keys, handwheel and feed override, mouse 6FC5203-0AF50-4AA1 Overview Overview The operator panel consists of a 15" TFT operator panel front, a machine control panel (MCP 416C-M or T) with integrated CNC keyboard and mouse. CAUTION The PCU should not be mounted in the "air flow downward" position (i.e. the interfaces at the top) to prevent heat accumulation. Note The videolink receiver must be ordered separately. Order No.: 6FC5247-0AF22-0AA0 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 307 Operator panel 15" TFT without VLE 15.1 Description 15.1.3 System Features Operator panel The operator panel (see Section: "Control and Display Elements" --> "View of Function Blocks") consists of an operator panel front with 15" display and integrated operator control functions in the form of vertical and horizontal softkeys and a machine control panel with integrated CNC keyboard. The key labels and displays on the operator panel front are different for variants "T" (Turning) and "M" (Milling). The "T" variant has a handwheel instead of the second override switch. Communication A data transmission path has been created to allow the PCU to be installed at a distance (distributed configuration) from the operator panel: The operator panel (operator panel front + MCP) communicates with the PCU via a transmission chain: videolink - receiver - videolink - cable - videolink transmitter. The image data is transmitted by means of videolink technology and the keyboard data by USB technology. As a result, the PCU and operator panel can be installed up to 20 m apart (XGA resolution). The NC and MCP functions on the operator panel communicate via MPI. NC and PCU also communicate by means of MPI. Only TFT displays are supported. Hardware support for USB only for version 1.1 and earlier EMERGENCY STOP key There is an EMERGENCY STOP button on the machine control panel. This also has to be wired up (see Fig. ). "Block diagram of emergency stop button," Section: "Mechanical Design" "Machine Control Panels"). Power Supply The machine control panel and PCU must be supplied with 24 V DC. Note To prevent error messages when the PCU is booted, the operator panel front and PCU should be switched on simultaneously using the 24V supply. 308 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Operator panel 15" TFT without VLE 15.1 Description 15.1.4 Mechanical design 15.1.4.1 Operator panel front ,2IURQWLQWHUIDFH SLQ . /9'6 SLQ . 'LPHQVLRQVLQPP Figure 15-1 Front, side and rear views Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 309 Operator panel 15" TFT without VLE 15.1 Description Figure 15-2 310 Example: Side and rear views of operator panel front with videolink receiver installed (for mounting see Chapter "Distributed Configuration with Videolink Receiver") (1) Operator panel front (2) Videolink receiver Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Operator panel 15" TFT without VLE 15.1 Description 15.1.4.2 Machine control panels MCP 416C-M The following diagrams show the "milling" machine control panel in front and side view and the position of the exchangeable key caps. Figure 15-3 (1) Front and side view of the MCP 416C-M Threaded bolt M5 (for detailed view, see "Threaded Bolts") Figure 15-4 Exchangeable key caps (1) Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 311 Operator panel 15" TFT without VLE 15.1 Description The MCP 416C-M is supplied with 10 exchangeable key caps (color: light basic). The printed symbols and there meaning are given in the table below. Symbol Meaning Symbol Meaning i Info (7155) + (6035) $[LV Q (7159) Spray gun (7156) Chuck open/closed (7158) Unlock door for workpiece conveyor (7162) Axis switching (7154) (7161) Acknowledgement (7158) Chip conveyor (7160) The following figure shows the rear view of the milling MCP and the turning MCP with the position of the connections, the S3 programming switch and the status LEDs H1 to H4. X302 X301 X303/4 2 3 X401 1 X404 S3 87654321 X402 X403 Figure 15-5 312 H4 H3 H2 H1 Rear of machine control panel (MCP 416C-M and MCP416C-T) (1) X404 power supply unit (detailed view) (2) Ground connection (M5 threads) (3) Status LEDs (4) Programming switch Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Operator panel 15" TFT without VLE 15.1 Description The meaning of the status LEDs and assignment of DIP-fix switch S3 is given in the tables below. Table 15-1 No. Meaning of status LEDs Color Meaning H1 Red Hardware faults H2 Red Temperature error H3 Green Power OK H4 yellow Interface operator panel front active Table 15-2 Assignment of DIP Fix switch S3 No. Meaning Default Setting 1 Baud rate 2 Cycle 3 Value ON 1.5 Mbaud OFF Cyclic transmit time frame: 100 ms Receipt monitoring: 1200 ms ON 4 OFF 5 ON Bus address 6 6 ON 7 OFF 8 HW platform OFF Standard hardware Threaded bolt Welded threaded bolts are used instead of drill-holes with press-in sleeves are used to secure the operator panel front and the MCP. M5 10 5 23 Figure 15-6 Bolt for securing operator panel front and MCP (1) Threaded bolt M5 (2) Spacer ring (3) Front panel Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 313 Operator panel 15" TFT without VLE 15.1 Description EMERGENCY STOP key The emergency stop key wiring is shown in the block diagram below. 1 Figure 15-7 2 1 2 Block diagram of emergency stop button MCP 416C-T The MCP 416C-T only differs from the MCP 426C-M in that it has a handwheel in place of the second override switch and different keys. 2 Figure 15-8 314 MCP 416C-T (1) Threaded bolt M5 (for detailed view, see "Threaded Bolts") (2) Exchangeable key caps Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Operator panel 15" TFT without VLE 15.1 Description The MCP 416C-T is supplied with 30 exchangeable key caps (color: light basic). The printed symbols and there meaning are given in the table below. Symbol Meaning Meaning Pick-up (7136) Conveyor belt (7138) Minus (7111) Plus (7112) Program control (7141) Revolver (7092) Revolver_2 (7095) Chuck_4 (7147) Spindle (7148) 3 Symbol P8 (7068) 3 Revolver_1 (7094) Teststop_Safety (7149) Workpiece_counter (7152) Tool_monitor_Artis (7136) Control_switching (7137) Workpiece_time (7153) Oil_trap (7140) 3 P1 (7055) P7 (7067) 3 P2 (7056) Tailstock (7143) 3 P3 (7059) Chuck_3 (7146) 3 P4 (7060) Bar_feed (7150) 3 P5 (7063) Workpiece_changer (7093) 3 P6 (7064) Tool_monitor_Leukhardt (7151) 15.1.4.3 unlabeled Cable 1. Videolink cable - see section: "Distributed configuration with videolink receiver" 2. MPI cable - MPI/PROFIBUS cable (cut-to-length) and connector from Siemens 3. USB connection cable between X203/204 (videolink receiver) and X302 (MCP): Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 315 Operator panel 15" TFT without VLE 15.2 Operator controls and indicators 15.2 Operator controls and indicators 15.2.1 View of function blocks The figure shows the embedding of the individual components in an overall system with distributed configuration (see Section: "Distributed configuration with videolink receiver") 9LGHR OLQN 9LGHROLQN 6HQGLQJ VWDWLRQV 'LUHFWPRXQWLQJ [DVVLJQHG [86%$ 9LGHROLQN 5HFHLYHU ; 7)7RSHUDWRUSDQHOIURQW 9 3&8 (PHU JHQF\ 2)) 2YHUULGH KDQGZKHHO ,2IURQWLQWHUIDFH SLQ /9'6 SLQ 2YHUULGH &RQWURODUHD ; 86%% &1& NH\ERDUGDUHD 0DFKLQHFRQWUROSDQHO 7KHYLGHROLQNUHFHLYHUPXVWEHRUGHUHGVHSDUDWHO\ Figure 15-9 Configuration with SINUMERIK 15" TFT operator panel front, 416 mm wide, without integrated videolink receiver The function blocks of the operator panel front and machine control panel are the subject of this hardware description. 316 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Operator panel 15" TFT without VLE 15.2 Operator controls and indicators 15.2.2 Description of the function blocks 15.2.2.1 Operator panel front * Control elements: Horizontal and vertical softkeys * Interfaces: - I/O-interface cable K1 (connector 2 x 13 -pin) - Display cable K2 (connector 2 x 10-pole) * Edge of overlay plate: Up/Down: 18 mm right/left: 16 mm * Attachment: Four welded-on threaded bolts M5 * Seal: 15.2.2.2 To be provided by customer Machine control panel for turning and milling 1. CNC keyboard * MF2 keyboard (without function keys) * Operating area keys: MACHINE, PROGRAM, OFFSET, PROGRAM MANAGER, ALARM and CUSTOM * Other keys: ALARM CANCEL, HELP, GROUP CHANNEL, INSERT, SELECT and NEXT WINDOW * Integrated mouse 2. Operating elements of the MCP * 54 keys (technology-specific and manufacturer-specific) * Turning: - 1 x feed override (0 - 120 %, 29 latched positions) - 1 x handwheel (100 pulses/revolution), approx. 60 mm wheel diameter * Milling: - 1 x feed override (0 - 120 %, 29 latched positions) * 1 x rapid traverse override (0 -100 %, 23 latched positions) 3. Other Components of the Machine Control Panel * 1x EMERGENCY STOP button, 2 x NC contacts (16 mm system) * 1 x illuminated key, machine 'ON' (22 mm system) Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 317 Operator panel 15" TFT without VLE 15.2 Operator controls and indicators 15.2.3 4. Interfaces * Inputs: - 1 x plug connector (2x5-pole) with lock - 1 x USB B 2 - 1 x MPI interface, Sub-D, 9-pole - 1 x 24V power supply: terminal (3-pole) * Outputs: - 2x USB-A - 2 x 4-pole (reserved for optional interfaces, not equipped in series production) 5. Mounting * Four welded-on threaded bolts M5 6. Seal * To be provided by customer Screen saver If a screen with high contrast is displayed unchanged for longer than 1 hour, the screensaver must be activated (screen switched dark) to protect the TFT display from "burn-in" of the last displayed screen. For more information see: /BEM/: HMI Embedded Operator's Guide /IAM/: IM2 Installation and Start-up HMI Embedded; IM4 Installation and Start-up HMI Advanced CAUTION You may do irreversible damage to your TFT display if the screen saver is not activated. 318 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Operator panel 15" TFT without VLE 15.3 Interfaces 15.3 Interfaces 15.3.1 Hardware 15.3.1.1 Overview Table 15-3 Overview of hardware interfaces Interfaces Type Function Operator panel front MCP I/O interface cable Display interface cable Designation Type K1 Connector 2 x 13-pole K2 Connector 2 x 10-pole USB input X301 Plug connector, 2 x 5-pole USB input (reserved - as an option to X301) X302 USB-B USB output X303 USB-A USB output X304 USB-A MPI X401 SUB-D, 9-pole Option interface (input reserved) X402 Plug connector, 1 x 4-pole Option interface (input reserved) X403 Plug connector, 1 x 4-pole 24V voltage supply X404 Terminal 3-pole Signal types Meaning of the abbreviations in table column "Signal type" for the connector interface assignments of the individual components: 15.3.1.2 I Input O Output B Bi-directional V Power supply Interface assignment for operator panel front IO/USB and LVDS interface Connecting cables K1 and K2 between the control panel front and the videolink receiver (s. Fig. in Section: "Control and Display Elements" --> "View of Function Blocks") For details of the pin assignment of the IO/USB and LVDS interfaces, see Section: "Connection Conditions". Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 319 Operator panel 15" TFT without VLE 15.3 Interfaces 15.3.1.3 Interface assignment for MCP X301 / X302 The two interfaces X301 and X302 (s. Fig. Section: "Operating and display elements" "View of function blocks") are switched in parallel and designed as a "high powered interface" with max. 500 mA, 5 V. X301 is not assigned. The connection between the keyboard and videolink receiver (X203/204) is established via X302. CAUTION These two interfaces must not be used simultaneously because they are connected in parallel. Connector designation: Table 15-4 X301 pin assignments Pin Signal name Signal type Meaning 1 P5 V Power supply 5 V 2 USB_P 3 USB_M B 4/5 M (GND) V Ground 6/7/8 N.C. - Unassigned 9 N.C. - Unassigned 10 N.C. - Unassigned Connector designation: Table 15-5 320 X301; plug connector 2 x 5-pole with lock Data + Data- X302; USB-B connector (4-pole) X302 pin assignments Pin Signal name Signal type Meaning 1 P5 V + 5 V power supply for external USB device 2 USB_DM0 3 4 Data-; channel 0 USB_DP0 B Data+; channel 0 M (GND) V Ground Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Operator panel 15" TFT without VLE 15.3 Interfaces X303 / X304 X303 / 304 are used to connect simple USB expansions such as a USB mouse or USB keyboard and are designed as a "low powered interface" with max. 100 mA, 5 V. Connector designation: Table 15-6 X303 pin assignments Pin Signal name Signal type Meaning A1 1P5 V + 5 V power supply for external USB device A2 USB_DM2 A3 A4 Connector designation: Table 15-7 X401 (MPI) X303; USB-A connector, 4-pole Data-; channel 2 USB_DP2 B Data+; channel 2 M (GND) V Ground X304; USB-A connector, 4-pole X304 pin assignments Pin Signal name Signal type Meaning B1 2P5 V + 5 V power supply for external USB device B2 USB_DM3 B3 B4 Data-; channel 0 USB_DP3 B Data+; channel 0 M (GND) V Ground The MCP is connected to the MPI of the NC by means of interface X401. Connector designation: Table 15-8 X401; 9-pole Sub-D socket X401 pin assignments Pin Signal name Signal type Meaning 1/2 N.C. 3 RS_OPI B RS-485 data Unassigned 4 ORTSAS_OPI O Output Request to Send, user interface 5 M5EXT 6 P5EXT 5 V external ground V 5 V external potential 7 N.C. 8 XRS_OPI B RS-485 data 9 IRTSPG_OPI I In Request to Send PG Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Unassigned 321 Operator panel 15" TFT without VLE 15.3 Interfaces X402 / X403 Option X404 (power supply) Connector designation: Table 15-9 15.3.2 X404; 3-pole Phoenix terminal block (see Section: "Mechanical Design" Diagram: "Back of machine control panel") Assignments of connector X404 Pin Signal name 1 PI 2 0V 3 24V Signal type Meaning Shield connection Ground V Power supply +24 V Software Key layout of the MCP Layout of the machine control keys (applies to "turning" and "milling") /RZDFWLYHNH\V 322 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Operator panel 15" TFT without VLE 15.4 Mounting 15.4 Mounting Procedure 1. Insert the operator panel front and the machine control panel with their four threaded bolts into the mounting holes of the prepared panel cut-out [(A) and (B)]. The spacer rings on the threaded bolts ensure that the rubber seal is not squashed when installed (required to ensure degree of protection IP54; not included in scope of delivery). 2. Secure the components from the rear side using the M5 nuts and suitable circlips (torque 1.8 Nm). 3. Make the ground connections (C). 4. Connect the interfaces, except X404 (C). 5. Connect X404 to the 24 V power supply(C). (A) 'LPHQVLRQVLQPP Panel cutout for operator panel front Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 323 Operator panel 15" TFT without VLE 15.4 Mounting (B) 'LPHQVLRQVLQPP Figure 15-10 Panel cutout for machine control panel (C) X302 X301 X303/4 2 3 X401 1 X404 S3 87654321 X402 X403 H4 H3 H2 H1 Figure 15-11 Rear of machine control panel (MCP 416C-M and MCP 416C-T) 324 (1) X404 (power supply) (detailed view) (2) Grounding connection (M5 threads) (3) Status LEDs (4) Programming switch Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Operator panel 15" TFT without VLE 15.5 Technical specifications 15.5 Technical specifications 15.5.1 Operator panel front Security Safety class III; PELV acc. to EN 50178 Degree of protection per EN 60529 Front panel IP54 Rear side IP 00 Approvals CE / UL Electrical specifications Power supply (via I/O USB cable and display cable) Display Voltage Current (typ./max. mA; approx.) 5 V +/- 5% 420 / 600 Backlight inverter Logic / USB (with / without load) Power consumption 12 V +/- 10% 900 / 1050 Typical, approx. 15 W 5.2 V +/- 2% 350 / 1000 Maximum approx. 24 W Mechanical data Dimensions Width: 416 mm Height: 382 mm Weight Depth: 59.5 mm Approx. 6 kg Tightening torques, max. Tension jack screws: 0.5 Nm Mechanical ambient conditions (with PCU) Weld bolts: M3: 0.45 Nm / M4: 1 Nm M5 : 1.8 Nm Operation Transport (in transport packaging) Vibratory load 10 -58 Hz: 0.075 mm 58 -200 Hz: 9.8 m/s2 3M4 per EN 60721-3-3 5 -9 Hz: 3.5 mm 9 -200 Hz: 9.8 m/s2 2M2 per EN 60721-3-2 Shock stressing 50 m/s2, 30 ms, 18 shocks 3M2 per EN 60721-3-3 300 m/s2, 6 ms, 18 shocks 2M2 to EN 60721-3-2 Climatic ambient conditions Cooling By natural convection Condensation, spraying water and icing Supply air Applicable standards Climate class Temperature limits Temperature change Limits for relative humidity Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Not permitted Without caustic gases, dusts and oils Operation Storage/shipping (in transport packaging) EN 60721-3-3 EN 60721-3-1 / -3-2 3K5 1K3 / 2K4 0 ... 45 C (at front) 0 ... 55 C (at rear) -25 ... 55 C Max. 10 K/h Max. 18 K/h 5 ... 80% 5 ... 95% 325 Operator panel 15" TFT without VLE 15.5 Technical specifications Limits for relative humidity 5 ... 80% 5 ... 95% Permissible change in the relative air humidity max. 0.1% /min Display 15.5.2 Size / resolution 15 " TFT / 1024 x 768 pixels MTBF backlight typ. 50 000 h at 25 C (dependent on the temperature) Machine control panel Security Safety class Degree of protection per EN 60529 III; PELV acc. to EN 50178 Front panel IP54 Rear side IP 00 Approvals CE / UL Electrical specifications Input voltage DC 24 V Power consumption, max. 2W Mechanical data Dimensions Mechanical ambient conditions (with PCU) Width: 416 mm Height: 370 mm Depth MCP-M: 84 mm Depth MCP-T: 100 mm Operation Transport (in transport packaging) Vibratory load 10 -58 Hz: 0.015 mm 58 -200 Hz: 19.6 m/s2 3M4 per EN 60721-3-3 5 -9 Hz: 3.5 mm 9 -200 Hz: 9.81 m/s2 2M2 per EN 60721-3-2 Shock stressing 150 m/s2, 11 ms, 18 shocks 3M2 per EN 60721-3-3 150 m/s2, 11 ms, 18 shocks 2M2 per EN 60721-3-2 Climatic ambient conditions Cooling By natural convection Condensation, spraying water and icing Supply air Applicable standards Climate class Temperature limits Temperature change Limits for relative humidity Permissible change in the relative air humidity 326 Not permitted Without caustic gases, dusts and oils Operation Storage/shipping (in transport packaging) EN 60721-3-3 EN 60721-3-1 / -3-2 3K5 1K3 / 2K4 0 ... 45 C (at front) 0 ... 55 C (at rear) -25 ... 55 C Max. 10 K/h Max. 18 K/h 5 ... 80% 5 ... 95% max. 0.1% /min Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Operator panel 15" TFT without VLE 15.6 Replacement parts 15.6 Replacement parts 15.6.1 Overview Name Description Order number (MLFB) Hand wheel Handwheel for machine control panel, width 416mm, T-version 6FC9320-5DM00 Rotary switch rapid traverse 1x23G, T=32, cap, button, pointer and dial 6FC5247-0AF21-0AA0 Rotary switch for feed 1x29G, T=32, cap, button and pointer 6FC5247-0AF21-0AA0 USB mouse for front 6FC5247-0AF01-0AA0 Button 3SB2000-1AC01 Mouse Emergency stop Illuminated pushbuttons Key covers with label fields 15.6.2 Replacement 15.6.2.1 Hand wheel Holder 3SB2908-0AA Switching element 3SB2404-0C Complete 3SB3001-0AA71 Switching element 3SB3400-0A Switching element with lamp 3SB3400-1D 1 set of 90, ergo-gray and 20 each of red / green / yellow / mid-gray 6FC5248-0AF12-0AA0 Removing the handwheel 1. Loosen the grub screw (1) of the rotary button (6). 2. Pull the rotary button from the shaft. 3. Remove lock nut M15 (2). 4. Remove the washer. 5. Pull the handwheel backward out of the front plate. 6. Remove the wiring. Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 327 Operator panel 15" TFT without VLE 15.6 Replacement parts Figure 15-12 Mounting kit for handwheel (1) Grub screw (socket-head) - not visible (2) M15 lock nut (3) Handwheel shaft (4) Connection terminals (5) Seal (6) Rotary knob Installing the handwheel Installation is performed in the reverse order. Make sure the seal is correctly positioned (5). 15.6.2.2 Rotary switch Removing the rotary switch 1. Lever the cover (6) off of the rotary button (2) (snap-on connection!). 2. Remove the nut of the collet (1) with a wrench (width 10). 3. Remove the entire rotary button (2). 4. Remove the lock nut (4) on the shaft of the rotary switch (3) with a wrench (width 14). 5. Remove the connector on the end of the rotary switch cable from the socket. 6. Remove the rotary switch 328 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Operator panel 15" TFT without VLE 15.6 Replacement parts Figure 15-13 Removal of rotary switch (1) Nut of the collet (2) Rotary knob (3) Rotary switch shaft (4) Lock nut (5) Scale (6) Cap Installing the rotary switch 1. Push the O-ring (1) onto the shaft of the new rotary switch as a seal. 2. Insert the rotary switch into the front cutout so that pressure is applied to the O-ring. 3. Screw the lock nut (4) on the shaft of the rotary switch from the front with a wrench (width 14). 4. Connect arrow ring (2) and rotary button (5). 5. Slide both parts onto the shaft of the rotary switch. 6. Tighten the collet nut of the rotary button with a wrench (width 10). Align the arrow point on the ring with position "0" on the scale. 7. Place the cover (3) on the rotary button and snap it into position. 8. Fold and fasten the connecting cable (6) as shown in the figure on the right. Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 329 Operator panel 15" TFT without VLE 15.6 Replacement parts Figure 15-14 Installation of rotary switch (1) O-ring (2) Arrow ring (3) Cap (4) Lock nut (5) Rotary knob (6) Connecting cable (7) Terminal board When installing the second rotary switch, proceed in the same manner. The recommended folding method for the cables is shown in the figure. Figure 15-15 Both rotary selector switches installed (top switch [right] not yet connected) 330 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Operator panel 15" TFT without VLE 15.6 Replacement parts 15.6.2.3 Mouse Removing the mouse Figure 15-16 Mouse prior to removal (1) Connecting cable (2) Mouse board (3) Cable connector (4) Mounting screw (5) Retainer frame 1. Remove the cable connector (3) from the mouse (2). 2. Loosen the four fixing screws M3x6 (4) on the retaining frame (5) using Torx screwdriver T10. 3. Remove the retaining frame. 4. Lift the mouse out of the front panel. Figure 15-17 Mouse fastening released Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 331 Operator panel 15" TFT without VLE 15.6 Replacement parts Installing the mouse The mouse is installed in reverse order. Ensure the alignment is correct based on the mouse symbol. Figure 15-18 Removed mouse 332 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 16 Direct control key module 16.1 Description The task of the direct control key module (DKM) is to directly transfer the operating signals for the two rows of keys on the sides of an operator panel front to SIMATIC without diversion through intermediate firmware. The signal-to-key assignments are shown in the table and figure in section: "Interfaces" "Operator panel front." The DKM can be combined with operator panel fronts of type OP 012, OP 012T, OP 015A or TP 015A. The DKM converts the key signals to the PROFIBUS DP protocol by means of the ASIC LSPM2 (PROFIBUS DIN 19245 Part 1, 12 MBaud). Power is supplied via the operator panel front. The PROFIBUS is completely isolated from the DKM/operator panel front by means of an opto-coupler and DC/DC converter. The DKM operates as a slave on PROFIBUS. The address can be set between 1 and 99 using rotary switches. Two bytes of data are transferred. In SIMATIC, the keys are handled as if they were 16 ordinary digital inputs. Validity This description applies to the following components Name Order number Direct control key module (with kit for OP 012) 6FC5247-0AF11-0AA0 Direct key module mounting kit for OP 015A, TP 015A and OP 012T 6FC5247-0AF30-0AA0 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 333 Direct control key module 16.2 Operating and display elements 16.2 Operating and display elements On the front of the direct key module there are coding switches: unit places coding switches: decimal places LED: Bus error, Not connected LED: Diagnostics Figure 16-1 334 Direct control key module complete with coding switches and LEDs (1) Top coding switches: Units digits Bottom coding switches: Tens digits (2) LEDs (3) Connection for OP 012 cable (not visible) Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Direct control key module 16.3 Interfaces 16.3 Interfaces The direct control key module has a Profibus connection (1) and a connection for the operator panel front (2). Figure 16-2 Direct control key module with connections Operator panel connection The ribbon cable for the operator panel front is inserted through the cut-out in the casing (2). Here, the switching states of the vertical direct control keys can be picked up without intermediate firmware. These signals can be evaluated in the direct control key module. Direct control key interface X11 on the keyboard controller for the operator panel front: per DIN 41651, plug connector, cable length max. 0.5 m. Table 16-1 Pin Assignment of interface X11: 2 x 8 vertical direct control keys Name 1, ..., 16 DT 1, ..., 16 Data 17 / 18 PSV_D_fused 19 / 20 GND Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Type O V Remarks Data output, direct control key #1, ..., 16 + 5 V (fused) Ground 335 Direct control key module 16.3 Interfaces Figure 16-3 '7 '7 '7 '7 '7 '7 '7 '7 '7 '7 '7 '7 '7 '7 '7 '7 Assignment of direct control keys on an operator panel front PROFIBUS connection 9-pin connector Note The Profibus cable used should have a connector with a straight outgoing cable. 336 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Direct control key module 16.4 Mounting 16.4 Mounting 16.4.1 Overview The DKM is installed to one side of the PCU on the operator panel front and connected to the keyboard controller via a short ribbon cable. Mounting the DKM requires an installation kit appropriate to the operator panel front used (kit for the OP 012 already included with the DKM). An installation kit is needed for OP 015A and TP 015A (see figure) and this has to be ordered. You will find the order number in section: "Description". Figure 16-4 DKM installation kit for OP 015A and TP 015A (1) Cover plate for keyboard controller for OP 015A (2) DKM cable for OP 015A (3) DKM cable for TP 015A Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 337 Direct control key module 16.4 Mounting 16.4.2 Combination with OP 012 The OP 012 outputs the signals from the direct control keys at connector X11(3). 23 Figure 16-5 Rear side of OP 012 (1) I/O USB cable K1 (2) Display cable K2 (3) Direct control key interface X11 Preparation :LGWK &RYHUSODWHIRU .H\ERDUGFRQWUROOHU &DEOH FODPS 'LVSOD\ FDEOH. ,286% FDEOH. 0RXQWLQJVORWVIRU3&8OXJV 6OLWIRUVRIWNH\ODEHOLQJVWULSV Figure 16-6 338 +HLJKW 'LVSOD\ VXSSRUWSODWH &DEOHVKRZQIROGHGWRJHWKHU &DVLQJVFUHZV Rear side of OP 012 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Direct control key module 16.4 Mounting 1. Deinstall the PCU (if it is already installed) by removing the knurled-head screws at the four corners and lifting off the PCU. 2. Remove the ribbon cable clamp (1) alongside the keyboard controller cover plate by inserting a pointed tool in each of the two slits and loosening the fixing cams by levering in the direction shown (3). 3. Unscrew the cover plate for the keyboard controller (4). It is no longer needed for assembly. 4. Remove the rubber rim (5) from the edge of the housing cutout (used to secure a pushbutton panel cable). Figure 16-7 Removing the cable clamp from the OP 012 (1) Cable clamp (2) OP 012 (3) Tipping motion of tool (4) Previous cover plate (5) Rubber rim Assembly You will find the reference diagrams for the individual mounting stages at the end of the description of the procedure. 1. Insert the non-rubber-coated end of the ribbon cable supplied with the DKM through the slit in the cover also supplied with the DKM and into socket X11 on the keyboard controller. 2. Screw down the new cover tightly using the screws supplied (A). 3. Install the PCU as described in section "OP 012," section: "Mounting." Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 339 Direct control key module 16.4 Mounting 4. Set Profibus addresses 01 to 99 using the top (units) and bottom (tens) coding switches of the DKM (see Fig. in section: "Operating and display elements"). 5. Connect the ribbon cable to the DKM (B). 6. Screw the DKM firmly to the cover using the knurled screws on the side. 7. Insert the Profibus plug (with straight outgoing cable) into the socket of the DKM (C). If the DKM is not connected to Profibus connector (or in the event of another fault), the "bus error" LED lights up. Note The direct control key module must be removed first on deinstallation of the PCU. (A) Figure 16-8 340 Installation of the direct control key module on the OP 012 (1) New cover plate (2) Securing nipple for DKM (1 of 3) (3) Cable to direct control key module (4) OP 012 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Direct control key module 16.4 Mounting (B) Figure 16-9 (1) Installation of the direct control key module on the OP 012 OP 012 (2) Direct control key module (3) PCU 50 (4) Cable from OP 012 to DKM (5) Securing nipple for DTM (6) Cover plate (7) Retaining screws (C) Figure 16-10 Pre-installed direct control key module (1) PCU 50 (2) DKM (3) OP 012 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 341 Direct control key module 16.4 Mounting 16.4.3 Combination with OP 015A Preparation 1. Deinstall the PCU (if it is already installed) by removing the knurled-head screws at the four corners and lifting off the PCU. 2. Unscrew the cover plate for the keyboard controller (see figure). Figure 16-11 OP 015A rear side (1) Cover plate for keyboard controller Assembly You will find the reference diagrams for the individual mounting stages at the end of the description of the procedure. 1. Insert the non-rubber-coated end of the DKM ribbon cable (figure in section: "Mounting" "Overview") in socket X11 of the keypad controller (A). Note the fold! 2. Screw down the cover plate supplied with the installation kit and labeled "OP 015A". 3. Fold the DKM cable as shown in (B). 4. Fit the PCU as described in Chapter: "OP 012", section: "Mounting". 5. Set Profibus addresses 01 to 99 using the top (units) and bottom (tens) coding switches of the DKM (see Fig. in section: "Operating and display elements"). 342 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Direct control key module 16.4 Mounting 6. Connect the ribbon cable to the DKM (C). 7. Screw the DKM firmly to the keyboard controller cover plate using the knurled screws. (A) Figure 16-12 OP 015A: Keyboard controller connections (1) Display cable K2 (2) I/O USB cable K1 (3) Direct control key cable (4) Direct control key interface X11 (B) Figure 16-13 OP 015A: DKM cable routing (1) DKM cable (2) I/O USB cable K1 (3) Display cable K2 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 343 Direct control key module 16.4 Mounting (C) DTM PCU 50 OP 015A Figure 16-14 Installation of the direct control key module on the OP 015A 344 (1) Cable from TP 013A to direct control key module (2) Cover plate for keyboard controller (3) Securing nipple for direct control key module (4) Retaining screws Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Direct control key module 16.4 Mounting 16.4.4 Combination with TP 015A Preparation 1. Deinstall the PCU (if it is already installed) by removing the knurled-head screws at the four corners and lifting off the PCU. 2. Unscrew the cover plate for the keyboard controller (see figure). The plate is required for re-installation. ab Figure 16-15 TP 015A rear side (1) Cover plate for keyboard controller Assembly You will find the reference diagrams for the individual mounting stages at the end of the description of the procedure. 1. Insert the DKM ribbon cable into socket X11 of the keyboard controller (A) The cable has already been folded (B). 2. Tighten the screws in the cover plate. Fold the DKM cable around as shown in (C). 3. Fit the PCU as described in section: "OP 012," section: "Mounting." 4. Set Profibus addresses 01 to 99 using the top (units) and bottom (tens) coding switches of the DKM (see Fig. in section: "Operating and display elements"). 5. Connect the ribbon cable to the DKM (D). 6. Screw the DKM onto the securing nipple with the knurled screws. Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 345 Direct control key module 16.4 Mounting Reference diagrams (A) Figure 16-16 TP 015A: Keyboard controller connections (1) DKM interface X11: (2) I/O USB cable K1 (3) Display cable K2 (B) Figure 16-17 TP 015A: DKM cable routing 346 (1) Display cable K2 (2) DKM cable (3) I/O USB cable K1 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Direct control key module 16.4 Mounting (C) Figure 16-18 TP 015A: Installing the cover plate (1) DKM cable (2) I/O USB cable K1 (3) Display cable K2 (D) 3&8 '70 73$ Figure 16-19 Installation of the direct control key module on the TP 015A (1) Cable from TP 015A to DKM (2) Securing nipple for direct control key module (3) Retaining screws Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 347 Direct control key module 16.4 Mounting 348 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 17 PCU 20 17.1 Description The high-performance SINUMERIK PCU 20 does not need a hard disk and has the communication MPI / PROFIBUS DP already onboard. The following connections are possible: Ethernet (SW option) Floppy disk drive The SINUMERIK PCU 20 is equipped as standard with the HMI-Embedded operator interface software (Simplified Chinese, German, English, French, Italian, Spanish as of SW version 6.5). Other languages may be ordered separately. You can find information on this in the catalog: HMI software for CNC controls. The PCU 20 is available in the following variants: Processor clock speed User memory (SDRAM) Onboard FLASH memory Order No.: 166 MHz 166 MHz 16 MB 8 MB 6FC5210-0DF00-0AA0 32 MB 16 MB 6FC5210-0DF00-0AA1 233 MHz 32 MB 16 MB 6FC5210-0DF00-1AA0 233 MHz 32 MB 16 MB 6FC5210-0DF00-1AA1 266 MHz 32 MB 16 MB 6FC5210-0DF00-0AA2 333 MHz 32 MB 16 MB 6FC5210-0DF00-1AA2 Features Rugged, easy-to-service design (continuous operation, high noise immunity) Compact construction for space-saving installation Single-chip PC processor with embedded operating system Linear Flash Memory Card (ATA Flash) or Flash Card 100/200 Type I/II, max. 64 MB or CompactFlash Card (Type I/II) with adapter Screen resolution 640 x 480 (VGA), up to 1024 x 768 (XGA) Power supply: 24V DC Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 349 PCU 20 17.1 Description Interfaces for I/O devices Serial V24 interface (COM1) Serial V24 interface (COM2) PS/2 keyboard Interface USB 1.1 MPI/DP interface RS485, max. 1.5 MBaud Ethernet connection 10/100 Mbaud Memory card interface Floppy disk drive interface Interfaces for operator panel front LVDS interface for TFT operator panel front CMOS interface for STN operator panel front (not on the variants that are clocked at 266 MHz and 333 MHz) Operator panel front I/O interface for USB data signal / display selection / LEDs / power supply View Figure 17-1 350 (1) top (2) Right (3) Left Perspective view of PCU 20 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 PCU 20 17.1 Description +HLJKW 5HWDLQLQJVFUHZV )L[LQJOXJV ,QWHUIDFHV 3RZHUVXSSO\LQWHUIDFH H[WIORSS\GLVNGULYH RSWLRQ 5HWDLQLQJVFUHZV )L[LQJOXJV :LGWK 7\SHSODWH 'HSWKPP ZLWKRXWVFUHZVSURWUXGLQJ Figure 17-2 Top view of PCU 20 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 351 PCU 20 17.2 Interfaces 17.2 Interfaces 17.2.1 Right-hand casing side Figure 17-3 PCU 20 side view from right with interfaces (1) Drill holes for mounting the strain relief (USB cable / Ethernet cable) (2) PC card interlock Table 17-1 Interfaces on the right side of the housing Name Connection Function (3) PC card (submodule slot) 68-pole PC card connector Slot for * Linear Flash Memory Card (ATA Flash) or * Flash Card 100/200 type I/II or * CompactFlash Card (type I/II) with adapter (4) MPI/DP (RS-485) 9-pole sub-D socket Multi-point interface / PROFIBUS DP connection Connection of an S7 programmable controller (5) Ethernet 8-pole RJ45 socket Connection for local area network (LAN), software option (6) USB 1.1 4-pole USB socket External connection for Universal Serial Bus (7) COM2/RS-232 9-pole male sub D connector Serial interface (V24) (8) COM1/RS-232 25-pole sub-D socket Serial interface (V24) (9) PS/2 keyboard PS/2 Keyboard connection 352 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 PCU 20 17.2 Interfaces 17.2.2 Left-hand casing side PCU 20 - clocked at 166 MHz / 233 MHz Figure 17-4 Interfaces for PCU 20 (166 MHz/233 MHz) - left side of housing Interfaces Function CMOS (X420) Connection of an STN display (OP 010) (2) I/O Operator panel front (interface for USB data signal etc.) (3) LVDS Connection of the TFT display of the operator panel front Floppy disk drive Connection for external 3.5" floppy disk drive (34-pole ribbon connector socket) (1) (4) (5) Shield connection (6) (7) Reset 24 V (8) Power connector Ground terminal Note Pressing the Reset button will cause a hardware reset. The PCU reboots. Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 353 PCU 20 17.2 Interfaces PCU 20 - clocked at 266 MHz / 333 MHz Figure 17-5 Interfaces for PCU 20 (266 MHz/333 MHz) - left side of housing Interfaces Function (1) I/O Operator panel front (interface for USB data signal etc.) (2) LVDS Connection of the TFT display of the operator panel front Floppy disk drive Connection for external 3.5" floppy disk drive (34-pole ribbon connector socket) (3) (4) Shield connection (5) (6) (7) 354 Reset 24 V Power connector Ground terminal Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 PCU 20 17.2 Interfaces 17.2.3 Pin assignment of the interfaces Connection Length of cable X9 Serial interface COM1 X11 Serial interface COM2 X6 PS/2 keyboard interface1) X40 USB interface X800 MPI/DP interface X805 Ethernet RJ45 interface X400 Display interface (LVDS) for TFT operator panel Max. 0.5 m X44 I/O interface for operator panel front Max. 0.5 m X420 STN interface for operator panel front (not on the PCUs that are clocked at 266 MHz and 333 MHz) Max. 0.5 m 1) Note Max. 30 m The pin assignment of these interfaces can be found in Chapter: "Connection Conditions", section: "Secondary electrical conditions". Max. 5 m max. of 200 m at 1.5 Mbaud Accessible via the opening in base plate The interface is located on the motherboard and is thus not visible from the outside. This interface can only be accessed by opening the casing. Details can be found in the documentation for the operator panel fronts. Pin 2 and pin 6 of the PS/2 interface are not assigned for the PCU 20. CAUTION STN interface The STN interface is mechanically identical to the external floppy disk interface which is accessible from the outside. The devices may be damaged permanently if the STN display is inadvertently connected to the floppy disk interface! Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 355 PCU 20 17.3 Mounting 17.3 Mounting 17.3.1 Preparation for mounting Screw the right and left mounting brackets (1) onto the PCU 20 before you mount an operator panel front (see Fig.: "Perspective view of PCU 20" in Section: "Description"). Figure 17-6 17.3.2 View of PCU 20 from below with mounting bracket Assembly of PCU and operator panel front Procedure 1. Secure the PCU 20 to the operator panel front (e.g. OP 012). 2. Secure this combination using the tension jacks on the mounting wall. A detailed sample description can be found in Chapter: "OP 012", section: "Assembling the OP 012 and PCU 50". 17.3.3 Notes on installation Observe the following during installation: Avoid extreme environmental conditions as far as possible. Protect the PCU from dust, humidity and heat. Do not expose the PCU directly to the sun's rays. Install the equipment in such a way that it cannot present a hazard (e.g. by toppling). The clearance at the rear of the PCU must be at least 10 mm to ensure sufficient ventilation (see following Figure). Clearances on the sides in Section: "Heat dissipation". Make sure that the vent slots are not covered. 356 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 PCU 20 17.3 Mounting &OHDUDQFHIRUYHQWLODWLRQPP ,QWHUIDFHV ,QWHUIDFHV ,QWHUIDFHV ,QWHUIDFHV ,QWHUIDFHV ,QWHUIDFHV 3UHIHUUHGLQVWDOODWLRQRULHQWDWLRQ IRUXVHZLWK236 Figure 17-7 17.3.4 7REHDYRLGHG 3UHIHUUHGLQVWDOODWLRQRULHQWDWLRQ IRUXVHZLWKRSHUDWRUSDQHOIURQWV Permitted installation positions of the PCU 20 with the 19" operator panel fronts Inclined position of 5 is permitted. Vertical mounting is recommended. Locking the PC card 1. Unscrew the fastening screw (1) far enough out of the PCU 20 housing until the lock (2) is loose. 2. Slide the lock upward (and lock it in this position, if necessary, by tightening the fastening screw). Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 357 PCU 20 17.3 Mounting 3. Slide the PC card into the slot. Lock the card, by sliding the lock downward and tightening the fastening screw. (1) Eject button 4. To remove the card from the slot, remove the screw, slide the lock (2) upward and push the eject button (1). Note CompactFlash card Only CF cards in the CHS mode are supported by BIOS and the chip set of the PCU 20. CF cards formatted in other modes (e.g. LBA mode) do not function. Therefore, when a CF card is not recognized by the PCU 20, it is either defective or not formatted in CHS mode. A CF card can only have its format changed to CHS mode with low-level tools from the card manufacturer. 358 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 PCU 20 17.3 Mounting 17.3.5 Strain relief 1. Mount the strain relief as shown in the figure. 2. Plug in the corresponding cable(s) and secure it at the strain relief with a cable tie Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 359 PCU 20 17.4 Connectors 17.4 Connectors 17.4.1 Overview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igure 17-8 360 PCU 20 connection overview Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 PCU 20 17.4 Connectors 17.4.2 Ground terminal The ground connection of the PCU 20 is located on the back of the housing (see Section: "Interfaces" "Left side of housing"). 17.4.3 I/O devices Before you connect the PCU to a power supply, you must connect an operator panel front. Procedure 1. Insert the connecting cables for the operator panel front into the corresponding sockets on the interface side of the PCU 20 (see Section: "Interfaces"). 2. After the operator panel front has been connected, the device is ready. Information on how to adapt and set the interface and which connection cable is required, is to be found in the manual of your I/O device. Note When connecting I/O devices, please make sure that the components are designed for use in industry. CAUTION When plugging/unplugging I/O connections (keyboard, mouse, printer, memory card, etc.), make sure that the I/O devices and the PCU are disconnected from the power supply. Otherwise damage may result. This does not apply to USB connections. 17.4.4 Power Supply The PCU 20 is supplied with 24 V direct voltage. Switching on Since there is no line switch, engage the power by plugging in the main power plug. Then the pre-installed system automatically powers up and shows the start screen. Switching off Shut down the power supply by pulling the main power plug. Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 361 PCU 20 17.5 Technical specifications 17.5 Technical specifications Security Safety class III; PELV acc. to EN 61800-5-1 Degree of protection per EN 60529 IP20 (IPXXB) Approvals CE, UL/CSA Electrical specifications Input voltage DC 24 V Power consumption 60 W Mains buffering time 20 ms Mechanical data Dimensions (mm) Width: 297 Height: 267 Weight Mechanical ambient conditions Depth: 56 Approx. 4 kg Operation Transport (in transport packaging) Vibratory load 10 -58 Hz: 0.075 mm 58 -200 Hz: 1 g according to EN 60721-3-3 5 -9 Hz: 3.5 mm 9 -200 Hz: 1 g according to EN 60721-3-2 Shock stressing 5 g, 30ms 18 shocks according to EN 60721-3-3 30 g, 6ms 18 shocks according to EN 60721-3-2 Climatic ambient conditions Cooling Open circuit ventilation Condensation, spraying water and icing Supply air Applicable standards Climate class Temperature limits Temperature change Limits for relative humidity Permissible change in the relative air humidity 362 Not permitted Without caustic gases, dusts and oils Operation Storage/shipping (in transport packaging) EN 60721-3-3 EN 60721-3-1 / -3-2 3K5 1K3 / 2K4 0 ... 55 C -25 ... 55 C Max. 10 K/h Max. 18 K/h 5 ... 80% at 25C 5 ... 95% at 25C max. 0.1 % /min Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 PCU 20 17.6 Accessories 17.6 Accessories An external 3.5" floppy disk drive can be connected to the PCU 20. The connection for this is located on the left side of the housing (see Section: "Interfaces"). Information on the floppy disk drive can be found in Section: "3.5" Floppy Disk Drive". Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 363 PCU 20 17.6 Accessories 364 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 18 PCU 50 18.1 Description The high-performance SINUMERIK PCU 50 features interfaces for communication via Ethernet and PROFIBUS DP/MPI, leaving the integrated slots free for other tasks. The USB port at the back of the device provides "hot plug and play" functionality for a standard PC keyboard and mouse. The SINUMERIK PCU 50 comes supplied with the operating system Windows NT 4.0 EmbSys or Windows XP ProEmbSys, and for backing up and restoring data, the Ghost 6 data backup software. The HMI-Advanced user interface software can be ordered additionally. Validity The description applies to the following devices: Processor Pentium II, 333 MHz Pentium II, 500 MHz Celeron, 566 MHz Celeron, 1.2 GMHz Operating system NT 4.0 RAM Other features 128 MB Order No.: 6FC5210-0DF01-0AA0 128 MB incl. HMI Advanced 6FC5210-0DF02-0AA0 128 MB incl. MCI board 6FC5220-0AA00-1AA0 128 MB 6FC5210-0DF05-0AA0 NT 4.0 128 MB NT 4.0 128 MB XP 256 MB 6FC5210-0DF21-2AA0 256 MB 6FC5210-0DF22-0AA0 incl. MCI board 6FC5220-0AA01-1AA0 incl. MCI board 6FC5220-0AA20-0AA0 128 MB NT 4.0 256 MB XP 256 MB 6FC5210-0DF20-0AA0 incl. MCI board 6FC5220-0AA22-0AA0 6FC5210-0DF22-2AA0 Features Rugged design (continuous operation, high noise immunity) Compact construction for space-saving installation Easy-to-service design Easy installation with four screws on the rear of the operator panel front Mounting position and location to a large degree variable Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 365 PCU 50 18.1 Description Processor variants (see table) User memory (RAM), max. 512 MB 10.4 GB hard drive Operating system Windows NT (not touch panels) or Windows XP Screen resolution - Max. 1024 x 768 pixels (XGA) with Pentium processors - Max. 1600 x 1200 pixels with Celeron processors Power supply: 24 VDC Interfaces for I/O devices: - Parallel interface LPT1 - Serial interfaces: 1 x RS-232-C (25-pole), 1 x RS-232-C (9-pole) - PS/2 keyboard interface - PS/2 mouse interface - MPI/DP (max. 12 Mbaud) - VGA interface for external monitor - Ethernet connection 10/100 Mbaud - 2 slots: 1x PCI and 1x shared PCI/ISA - PC card slot - USB interface (for Windows NT: for standard PC keyboard and mouse) - for PCU > 500 MHz: Additional USB interface Interfaces to operator panel front: - LVDS interface - CMOS interface - I/O interface Note Where the Windows NT operating system is used, the USB interface only supports keyboards and mouse units. Combination with touch panels TP 012 and TP 015A is only possible under Windows XP. If other USB devices are used, the noise immunity of the entire system may be reduced. The end user takes responsibility for the use of such devices. 366 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 PCU 50 18.1 Description View Figure 18-1 (1) top (2) Right PCU 50 500 MHz: Perspective view with built-in hard disk drive based on operating with the OP 012 ,QWHUIDFHIRUH[WHUQDOIORSS\GLVNGULYH :LGWK +RXVLQJFRYHUVFUHZV +DQGOH 6KLSSLQJORFN +DUGGLVN GULYH +HLJKW ,QWHUIDFHV 6FUHZVIRUSRZHUVXSSO\FRYHU 7\SHSODWH 3RZHU6XSSO\ 'HSWKPP ZLWKRXWVFUHZVSURWUXGLQJ Figure 18-2 Top view of PCU 50 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 367 PCU 50 18.2 Interfaces 18.2 Interfaces 18.2.1 Right-hand casing side 9SRZHUVXSSO\ &RYHUSODWHIRUFRQQHFWLRQ 3&,VORW &RYHUSODWHIRUFRQQHFWLRQ 3&,,6$VORW 'HSWK 6ORW 6ORW 36PRXVH /37 36NH\ERDUG &20 &20 &RYHUSODWHIRU3&&DUGVORW 03,'3 VHULDO 9*$ PRXVH 86% (WKHUQHW XSSHU86%LQWHUIDFHRQO\IRU3&8!0+] Figure 18-3 PCU 50 side view from right with interfaces Interface/connection Parallel interface (e.g. printer), 25-pole sub D socket COM1/RS-232 Serial interface 1 (V24), 25-pole sub D socket COM2 Serial interface 2 (RS-232), 9-pole male sub D connector Keyboard PS/2 keyboard connection Mouse PS/2 mouse connector USB PCU 50 500 MHz One external USB connection PCU 50 500 MHz Two external USB connections Windows NT: one connection can be used for a standard PC or mouse MPI/DP (RS-485) Multi-Point Interface/Profibus DP connection Connection of an S7 programmable controller, 9-pole sub D socket VGA VGA interface for external monitor, 15-pole sub D socket Ethernet Connection for local area network (LAN) PC card slot Slot for ATA flash card/memory card or Flash Card 100/200 Type I/II PCI slot Slot for expansion boards 1) PCU/ISA slot Slot for expansion boards 1) Power supply connection 24 V DC 1) 368 Function LPT1/Printer If expansion modules are plugged in, the cover plates (figure above) are replaced by the front plates of the respective module. Refer to the module documentation for more details. Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 PCU 50 18.2 Interfaces 18.2.2 Left-hand casing side The connection for an external floppy disk drive (3) is on the left side of the housing. Figure 18-4 Side view of PCU 50 from left with the port for an external floppy disk drive (1) Device fan (2) Reset button (3) Connection for external floppy disk drive (34-pole plug connector) Figure 18-5 External floppy disk drive Note Pressing the Reset button (2)will cause a hardware reset. The PCU reboots. Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 369 PCU 50 18.2 Interfaces 18.2.3 Casing rear side The two interfaces for the operator panel front to be mounted are located behind a rectangular cut-out in the rear side of the casing. the IO interface for connecting the IO USB cable and LVDS interface for connecting a TFT display 18.2.4 Pin assignment of the interfaces For the pin assignments of the individual interfaces, refer to Chapter: "Connection Conditions", section: "Secondary electrical conditions". 370 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 PCU 50 18.3 Mounting 18.3 Mounting 18.3.1 Preparation for mounting Appropriate mounting brackets are provided for each of the following PCU 50 mounting options (see Section: "Accessories"): 1. Standard mounting for assembly of PCU + operator panel front 2. Flat mounting for distributed installation of PCU + videolink transmitter 3. Upright mounting for distributed installation of PCU + videolink transmitter 4. Central mounting for distributed installation of PCU + videolink transmitter Before assembling with an operator panel front or a videolink transmitter, secure the appropriate mounting brackets to the PCU. The illustration shows the PCU and mounting brackets (standard) correctly aligned before they are screwed together. Torque M3: 0.8 Nm; M4: 1.8 Nm. M4 M3 M3 M4 M4 M3 M3 M4 Figure 18-6 PCU 50 with standard mounting brackets (1) Lugs without hinged catch (2) Lugs with hinged catch Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 371 PCU 50 18.3 Mounting NOTICE Only use M3x8 and M4x8 screws (provided) to mount the mounting brackets. The mainboard will be damaged if you - screw in the M3x8 and M4x8 screws without mounting brackets, - if you use other 8 mm screws (without a flat washer or tension ring) or - if you use longer screws. 18.3.2 Assembly of PCU and operator panel front Install the PCU and operator panel front as described in section: "OP 012," section: "Mounting" "Assembling OP 012 and PCU". 18.3.3 Assembling the PCU and videolink transmitter Mount the PCU and videolink transmitter as per the description in Chapter: "Distributed configuration with videolink" Section: "Mounting" "Flat mounting "Upright mounting "Central mounting 18.3.4 Notes on installation Observe the following during installation: Avoid extreme environmental conditions as far as possible. Protect the PCU from severe vibrations, jolts, dust, humidity and heat. An external fire protection housing is required. Do not expose the PCU directly to the sun's rays. Install the device in such a way that no danger (e.g. by falling down) may result. Ventilation clearances: - On the side of the fan: 100 mm - At rear side: 10 mm (see Fig.) Make sure that the vent slots are not covered. 372 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 PCU 50 18.3 Mounting Permitted installation positions of the PCU 50 ,QWHU IDFHV +DUGGLVN +DUGGLVN ,QWHU IDFHV 'HYLFHIDQ ,QWHUIDFHV 'HYLFHIDQ +DUGGLVN 'HYLFHIDQ 'HYLFHIDQ +DUG GLVN ,PSHUPLVVLEOHPRXQWLQJSRVLWLRQ +DUGGLVN ,QWHUIDFHV ,QWHUIDFHV 'HYLFHIDQ ,QWHU IDFHV 'HYLFHIDQ ,QWHUIDFHV 0RXQWLQJSRVLWLRQ ZKHQXVHGZLWK23 PPFOHDUDQFHIRUYHQWLODWLRQ Figure 18-7 Inclined position: Deviations of 5 in comparison to the installation positions shown in the figure are permitted. Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 373 PCU 50 18.4 Connectors 18.4 Connectors 18.4.1 Ground terminal The ground terminal (1) of the PCU 50 is on the underside of the casing. Figure 18-8 18.4.2 Underside of PCU 50 I/O devices Before you connect the PCU to a power supply, you must connect the hard disk and the I/O devices (operator panel front, keyboard, and mouse). Procedure 1. Insert the connecting cables for the I/O devices into the corresponding sockets on the interface side of the PCU 50 (see Section: "Interfaces"). 2. After the operator panel front has been connected, the device is ready. Information about how to adjust and set your interface and the required connecting lead can be found in the Operator Guide that goes with the peripheral. Note When connecting I/O devices, please make sure that the components are designed for use in industry. CAUTION When plugging in / unplugging I/O connections (keyboard, mouse, printer, etc.), make sure that the I/O devices and the PCU are disconnected from the power supply. Otherwise damage may result. This does not apply to USB connections. 374 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 PCU 50 18.4 Connectors 18.4.3 Power Supply The PCU 50 is supplied with 24 V direct voltage. CAUTION The device should only be connected to a 24V DC power supply which satisfies the requirements of safe extra low voltage (SELV). The cable cross-section must be large enough to ensure that no damage can be caused by the cables if there is a short-circuit at the PCU. Switching on and switching off A main power switch is not provided which means that the device must be switched on and off at the external power supply. Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 375 PCU 50 18.5 Commissioning 18.5 Commissioning 18.5.1 Power-up When the power supply is switched on, the preinstalled system boots automatically and finally shows the start screen (see IM4: Start-up Guide, Section "Booting the system"). When the system boots, the system parameters stored in the BIOS (Basic Input Output System, see below) become operative. Boot manager If you let the system boot automatically, a query will appear on the screen asking whether you wish to go 1. to the User main menu or 2. Service menu branched. As a user you will generally select number 1. With the input key (see diagram in Section: "Changing the Bios settings") confirm your selection and allow the system to power up to the desired menu. 18.5.2 Changing the Default values The following table contains the adjustable BIOS parameters together with their default values: Description Menu / Parameter Standard setting PCU 50 / 70 500 MHz PCU 50 / 70 > 500 MHz Main System Time xx:xx:xx System Date xx/xx/xxxx Floppy disk A: 1.44 MB, 3 1/2" (connected externally => disable additional HD test) Primary master Depending on hard disk Primary slave None Secondary master None Secondary slave None Memory cache 376 Write back Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 PCU 50 18.5 Commissioning Description Boot options Standard setting Quick boot mode Enabled SETUP prompt Enabled POST errors Enabled Floppy check Disabled Summary screen Enabled Keyboard features Num Lock Off Key click Disabled Keyboard auto-repeat rate 30/s Keyboard auto-repeat delay 1/2 s Hardware options PCI MPI/DP Enabled On-board Ethernet Enabled LAN remote boot Enabled Cardbus/PCMCIA slot Enabled Fan control ---- Enabled SafeCard functions Enabled Legacy USB support Enabled CRT/LCD selection Simultaneous LCD screensize Expand DSTN contrast 154 PS2 mouse Auto Detect Advanced COM/LPT Configuration Internal COM1 Enabled Base I/O address 3F8 Interrupt IRQ4 Internal COM2 Enabled Base I/O address 2F8 Interrupt IRQ3 Internal LPT1 Enabled Mode Base I/O address Interrupt EPP 378 ---IRQ7 PCI configuration: PCI Device Slot 1 / 2 Option ROM scan Enabled Enable master Enabled Latency timer 0040 h PCI Device Slot 3 / 4 *) Option ROM scan Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Disabled 377 PCU 50 18.5 Commissioning Description Standard setting Enable master Disabled Latency timer 0040 h PCI/PnP ISA IRQ exclusion IRQ3 Available IRQ4 Available IRQ5 Available IRQ7 Available IRQ9 Available IRQ10 Available IRQ11 Reserved PCI IRQ line 1 5 PCI IRQ line 2 Auto-select PCI IRQ Line 3 / 4 *) Auto-select Installed O/S Other Reset configuration data No Floppy disk controller Local bus IDE adapter Enabled Primary & Secondary Large disk access mode Hard disk pre-delay Both DOS Disabled Memory gap at 15 MB ---Disabled Video Adapter Settings Frame buffer size ---- 8 MB AGP Rate ---- 4x Default Primary Video Adaptor ---- AGP Security Supervisor password is Disabled User password is Disabled Set supervisor password [Enter] Set user password [Enter] Password on boot Disabled Fixed disk boot sector Normal Floppy disk access Supervisor Power APM Enabled Power savings Disabled Standby timeout SuspendTimeout Hard disk timeout 378 Off Off ---Disabled Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 PCU 50 18.5 Commissioning Description Boot sequence Standard setting Hard drive Removable devices CD-ROM Drive ---- IBA 4.0 22 Slot 0048 *) BIOS lines "PCI Device Slot 3 / Slot 4" and "PCI IRQ Line 3 / Line 4": relevant only for PCU 70 18.5.3 Changing the BIOS settings After installing or mounting additional components (e.g. ext. floppy disk drive), these must be registered with the system in the BIOS setup. You can activate this via the operator panel front (see figure). Procedure 1. Ramp up the device. 2. After you are prompted to activate BIOS Setup, press key F2. The BIOS Setup menu will appear. 3. In the menu, use the cursor keys for navigating to the desired selection field, e.g. "Disk A:" 4. Change the setting using the + key (press <SHIFT> and <X> at the same time) or the <-> key (on the numerical keypad). 5. Press the right or left cursor keys to access other setup menus if required. 6. Press <Escape> (<Alarm Cancel> key) to go to the "Exit" menu (or press the right cursor key again). 7. Press the <Enter> key to exit the setup menu. 8. Press the Input key to confirm your decision to exit BIOS Setup with "Yes". The system will then boot as described above. Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 379 PCU 50 18.5 Commissioning 6KLIWNH\ 6+,)7 $/$50 &$1&(/ (VFDSHNH\ ,QSXWNH\ ,1387 SUHVV)!WRHQWHU%,26VHWXS )NH\ Figure 18-9 PCU 50: Using the BIOS Setup via an operator panel front Note With the exception of the boot sequence and the LPT mode (EPP, EPC), an OEM contract must be concluded in order to make changes to the BIOS settings. 18.5.4 Calibration of the touch screen Whenever a new touch panel (TP 012 or TP 015A, combined with PCU 50 with 500 MHz processor and Windows XP) is connected, a calibration must be performed. For this purpose, the basic software WinXP up to and incl. V07.03.03 contains Version 5.63 SR3 of the 3M Touch-Software and in the basic software as of WinXP V07.03.05 contains Version 5.64 SR3. Procedure A functioning touch panel system with PCU 50 (see above) is required. 1.Boot up the system in service mode. 2.Start the SINUMERIK desktop (password-protected). 3. Call up the calibration menu with "Start" "Programs" "Touchware" "Touchware" (see Fig.). Note On the TP 015A the default calibration is centrosymmetric to the center point. This means that you must press the top right of the screen to activate the "Start" button (bottom left). 380 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 PCU 50 18.5 Commissioning Figure 18-10 Menu for touch screen calibration (Touchware version 5.64 SR3) Note Depending on the software version and setting, the screen can include 2, 4 or 5 calibration points. You can toggle between 2 and 5 points (Touchware version 5.63 SR3) or between 2 and 4 points (Touchware version 5.64 SR3) from the menu "Tools" "Options" "Advanced" "Style". 4.Press the "Calibrate" button. The following display appears: Figure 18-11 Calibration screen Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 381 PCU 50 18.5 Commissioning 5.Using the tip of one finger, touch the calibration point indicated by the hand symbol as precisely as possible for as long as the "Hold" prompt is displayed. The "Hold" instruction disappears after a few seconds and the hand moves to the next calibration point. 6.Repeat the step under item 5 until all available points have been calibrated. When the parameters have been saved, the following menu appears: Figure 18-12 Test menu 7.To test the calibration, move your finger around the screen and watch the cursor. You can calibrate the screen again if necessary by pressing "Calibrate". 8.Once calibration has been successful, leave the menu by pressing "Done" "Close". If you take too long, the action will be aborted with a "timeout" and you will have to start again. 18.5.5 Use of PC cards The PCU 50 is equipped with a PC card interface. This can be used to operate Cardbus cards (32 bit) and PCMCIA cards (16 bit). Communication boards for MODEM, FAX MODEM, ISDN, Token Ring, ETHERNET, memory extensions and SCSI interfaces can be inserted in checkcard format. Before using these cards: Software The "Cardware" software is required for Windows NT. See catalog for information on ordering. 382 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 PCU 50 18.5 Commissioning BIOS settings see IAD, Start-up Guide, SINUMERIK 840D CAUTION Before you insert the PC card, the ejector for Cardbus/PC cards must be fully depressed. Otherwise, if you are inserting slim PC cards (e.g. Flash Memory Cards), the card may get stuck in the slot. The PC card then cannot be inserted properly. Before you insert or withdraw Cardbus/PC card, you must discharge your body's static loading by briefly touching a grounded object. Otherwise faults can occur. When you plug it in, the PC card nameplate must point towards the back of the PCU. Otherwise the PC card and/or the PCU could be damaged. Only take out the card when data is no longer being transferred (risk of loss of data and system crash). Inserting the card 1. Open the interface cover by loosening the plastic rivets with a flat-bladed screwdriver (there are two parts). 2. Remove the cover plate from the guide. 3. Insert the required PCMCIA card or Cardbus card. Figure 18-13 PC card interface (1) Cover plate fastening rivets (2) Cover plate for PC card slot (3) PC card eject button Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 383 PCU 50 18.6 Technical specifications 18.6 Technical specifications Security Safety class III; PELV acc. to EN 50178 Degree of protection per EN 60529 IP20 Approvals CE Electrical specifications Input voltage DC 24 V Max. power consumption PCI / ISA slot Total 2A 3A 5V 12 V 0.3 A 0.6 A -12 V 0.1 A 0.15 A Power consumption Typ. 40 W Max. 130 W Power loss ride-through time 20 ms Mechanical data Dimensions (mm) Width: 297 Height: 267 Weight Depth: 77 Approx. 6 kg Mechanical ambient conditions (with OP 012) Operation Transport (in transport packaging) Vibratory load 10 -58 Hz: 0.075 mm 58 -200 Hz: 9.8 m/s2 3M4 per EN 60721-3-3 5 -9 Hz: 3.5 mm 9 -200 Hz: 9.8 m/s2 2M2 per EN 60721-3-2 Shock stressing 50 m/s2, 30 ms, 18 shocks 3M2 per EN 60721-3-3 300 m/s2, 6 ms, 18 shocks 2M2 to EN 60721-3-2 Noise < 55 dB(A) to DIN 45635 Climatic ambient conditions Cooling Open circuit ventilation Condensation, spraying water and icing Supply air Applicable standards Climate class Temperature limits Temperature change Limits for relative humidity Permissible change in the relative air humidity 1)max. 384 Not permitted Without caustic gases, dusts and oils Operation Storage/shipping (in transport packaging) EN 60721-3-3 EN 60721-3-1 / -3-2 3K5 1K3 / 2K4 15 W 1) 5 ... 55 C 20 W 1) 5 ... 50 C 30 W 1) 5 ... 45 C -20 ... 60C Max. 10 K/h Max. 18 K/h 10 ... 80% 5 ... 95% max. 0.1 % /min output expansions (PCI/ISA slots, PC card, USB interface) Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 PCU 50 18.7 Replacement parts 18.7 Replacement parts 18.7.1 Overview Table 18-1 Spare parts for the PCU 50 Replacement part Hard disk with mounting plate and damper PCU variant Order no. PCU 50 500 MHz 6FC5247-0AF08-0AA0 PCU 50 > 500 MHz 6FC5247-0AF08-0AA1 *) Equipment fan A5E00019079 3.0 V backup battery A5E00331143 24 V DC power supply PCU 50 500 MHz A5E00166828 PCU 50 > 500 MHz A5E00100846 *) Can also be installed in PCU 50 500 MHz 18.7.2 Replacement 18.7.2.1 Hard disk The installed hard disk drive is connected via a ribbon cable to the socket in the PCU mother board. Figure 18-14 PCU 50 500 MHz: Perspective view with the hard disk drive swung out (1) Hard disk holder (2) Ribbon cable for hard disk connection (3) Plug connector for connecting an external floppy disk drive Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 385 PCU 50 18.7 Replacement parts Procedure 1. Lock the shipping lock of the hard disk by turning the handle to the "non-operating" position (see Fig. on bottom left). 2. Loosen the four fastening screws of the hard disk mount. 3. Fold up the hard disk mount (see Figure above). 4. Remove the ribbon cable from the socket. To do this, push back the two latching lugs on the connector. 5. Repeat the above steps in reverse order to install the new drive. The new drive must be of the same type as the removed one. 6. Release the shipping lock or else the system will not boot ("operating" position; see Fig. at bottom right). Figure 18-15 Transport lock for hard disk drive: left locked; right unlocked 386 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 PCU 50 18.7 Replacement parts 18.7.2.2 Power Supply Figure 18-16 Removal/installation of the power supply (Art. No. A5E00166828) (1) Retaining screws for the power supply cover (2) Power supply cover (3) Power Supply (4) Fastening screws of the power (5) Device fan (6) Split rivets for device fan Procedure 1. Lock the transport lock for the hard disk (see section "hard disk", figure below). 2. Loosen the fastening screws of the hard disk. The hard disk cables, however, may remain connected. 3. Open the casing by loosening the casing cover screws (see Section: "Description"), figure: "Top view of PCU 50"). 4. Remove the screws securing the power supply cover to the casing and lift off the cover (see Fig. above ). Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 387 PCU 50 18.7 Replacement parts 5. Only for power supply No. A5E00100846: Unplug the connecting cable connector from the main board (see Fig. below). 6. Release the two fastening screws on the casing. 7. Pull the power supply up and out of the casing. 8. Repeat the above steps in reverse order to install the new power supply. Figure 18-17 Removal/installation of the power supply (Art. No. A5E 00100846) 18.7.2.3 (1) Retaining screws (2) Power supply cover (3) Retaining screws (4) Power Supply (5) Connector for power supply Device fan Procedure 1. Open the casing by loosening the casing cover screws (see Section: "Description", figure "Top view of PCU 50"). 2. Pull the top, long card (if inserted) out of the PCI slot (see Section: "Accessories", figure: "Mounting an expansion board"). 388 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 PCU 50 18.7 Replacement parts 3. Remove the card guide rail by taking out the split rivets (see Fig. below). 4. Pull the device fan cable out of the socket (see figures, Section: "Battery"). 5. Pull the two split rivets, then the hollow rivets outward (see figures, Section: "Battery"). 6. Change the device fan. 7. Installation is in reverse order. Note When installing the device fan, note the direction of flow from the device fan (blower outward; note the arrow on the device fan casing). *) Figure 18-18 Device fan replacement PCU 50 500 MHz (1) Split rivets for fastening the card guide rail (2) Split rivets for device fan fastening (3) Device fan *) Direction of air flow Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 389 PCU 50 18.7 Replacement parts 18.7.2.4 Battery Battery supply for clock and configuration A backup battery (3.0 V lithium battery) supplies the hardware clock with power even when the device has been switched off. In addition to the time, the BIOS settings of the device are also stored. If the backup battery fails to operate or if it is separated from the plug contact, these data are lost. Thanks to the low power consumption of the clock and the high capacity of the lithium battery, the battery can back up the clock for at least 8.5 years. For this reason, changing the battery is hardly ever necessary. Battery voltage too low If the battery voltage is too low, the current time will be lost and a correct device configuration can no longer be ensured. In this case, the backup battery must be replaced with a new one. The battery is located on the motherboard (see figure below). WARNING Risk of injury, material damage, release of hazardous substances. A lithium battery can explode if handled incorrectly. Pollutants can be discharged if all batteries are not disposed of correctly. Do not throw new or discharged lithium batteries into a fire. Do not solder the cell body. Do not recharge lithium batteries. Do not force open lithium batteries. Lithium batteries should only be ordered from Siemens (Order No.: A5E00331143) Wherever possible, all lithium batteries should be returned to the battery manufacturer/recycler and disposed of as special waste. Changing the battery The reference diagrams for the PCU 50 500 MHz (A) and the PCU 50 > 500 MHz (B) can be found at the end of the description of the procedure. 1. Turn off the device, remove the main power cable and release all interconnecting cables. 2. Open the casing by loosening the casing cover screws (see Section: "Description", figure "Top view of PCU 50"). 3. Pull the battery plug out of the socket on the motherboard and remove the battery fastener (see Section: "Accessories" "Expansion boards", figure: "Mounting an expansion board"). 4. Install the new battery and secure it. 5. Reconnect the battery connector to the motherboard. 6. Close the device. 390 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 PCU 50 18.7 Replacement parts Reference diagrams (A) Figure 18-19 Main board PCU 50 500 MHz (cut-out) with location of RAMs and backup battery (1) RAM bank 0 (2) Socket for RAM bank 1 (not assigned) (3) Locating hole for board retainer (4) Connector for device fan (5) Connector for battery connector (6) Backup battery (B) Figure 18-20 Main board PCU 50 > 500 MHz (cut-out) with location of RAMs and backup battery (1) RAM bank 1 (2) RAM bank 0 (3) Connector for connecting the processor fan (4) Backup battery (5) Connector for device fan Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 391 PCU 50 18.8 Accessories 18.8 Accessories 18.8.1 Overview The following accessories are available for the PCU 50: Component Order No.: Component PCU 50 Mounting bracket Memory expansion 4) standard 1) flat 2) upright 2) central 3) PCU 50 _ 500 MHz: PCU 50 > 500 MHz 6ES7791-0KS00-0XA0 6ES7791-0KT00-0XA0 6ES7648-2AC10-0CA0 6ES7648-2AC20-0CA0 6FC5248-0AF20-2AA0 6FC5248-0AF20-0AA0 6FC5248-0AF20-1AA0 6FC5248-0AF20-3AA0 PCU 50 _ 500 MHz (SO-DIMM PC 100) 128 MB 256 MB Expansion boards 6ES7791-0KS00-0XA0 6ES7791-0KT00-0XA0 PCU 50 > 500 MHz (SO-DIMM PC 133) 6ES7648-2AC10-0CA0 6ES7648-2AC20-0CA0 (according to AT/PCI specification) Floppy disk device (parallel connection; see section: "3.5" Floppy Disk Drive". 6FC5235-0AA05-0AA1 Floppy disk device (USB connection; see section: "3.5" Floppy Disk Drive with USB interface") 6FC5235-0AA05-1AA1 1) for PCU or videolink receiver behind operator panel front 2) for PCU + videolink transmitter in control cabinet (see Section: "Distributed installation") 3) for PCU + videolink transmitter behind the operator panel front (see Section: "Distributed configuration") 4) see figures in Section: "Spare parts" "Replacement" "Battery" 18.8.2 Description of components 18.8.2.1 Mounting bracket In the section: "Mounting Preparation", the four mounting options for the PCU 50 have already been described. A special set of mounting brackets is available for each of these mounting options. You will find the respective order numbers in section: "Accessories" "Overview". 392 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 PCU 50 18.8 Accessories 18.8.2.2 Memory expansion There are two slots on the mother board for 144-pin SO DIMM memory modules (see figures in Section: "Spare parts" "Replacement" "Battery"). You can use these modules to expand the user memory of the PCU by up to 512 MB. Standard memory The basic configuration is a 128/256 MB SDRAM module. Memory (MB) 64 MB module 128 MB module 256 MB module 128 128 2 - - - 1 - 192 1 1 - 256 - 2 - 256 - - 1 320 1 - 1 384 - 1 1 512 - - 2 Mounting 1. Open the casing by loosening the casing cover screws (see Section: "Description"), figure: "Top view of PCU 50"). 2. Insert the module(s) into the base (see Section: "Spare parts" "Replacement" "Battery", figure: "Main board PCU 50 500 MHz with location of RAMs and backup battery"). When doing so, pay attention to the recess (anti-rotation element) on the plug side of the SODIMM module. 3. Press the module(s) downwards, applying slight pressure until the locking snaps into place. 4. Close the device. CAUTION Risk of damage! The submodules must be seated firmly in the receptacle, otherwise they may fall out and be damaged. System boot The memory configuration is detected automatically when the system is booting (see IAM: Start-up Guide, Section: "System boot") Memory optimization (Windows NT *) After expanding the memory, it is advisable to then optimize the use of the computer resources. To do this, in the Windows interface Control Panel, increase the size of virtual memory (also called the "SWAP file") to correspond to the memory extension. Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 393 PCU 50 18.8 Accessories Proceed as follows: 1. When booting, use the Service menu to start the SINUMERIK Desktop, as described in the "HMI Advanced installation and startup (IM4)" document in Subsection 3.4.5. 2. Activate the Control Panel by means of "Start" "Settings" "Control Panel". 3. In the Control Panel, choose "System" "Performance" "Virtual Memory" "Change". This will display a window corresponding to the figure below. 4. Modify the values "Initial Size" and "Maximum Size". These should be the same size and exceed the installed RAM by at least 12 MB. *) For Windows XP: See IM4 (Start-up Guide for HMI Advanced). 5. Activate the "Set" menu button and exit the menu by pressing "OK". Typical recommended values: Memory capacity (MB) Initial Size Maximum Size 512 550 550 Figure 18-21 Adjusting the virtual memory Note In the event of a repair and return of equipment, the memory extension is taken into account. In the event of a spare parts and return goods service, the memory extension is not taken into account. 394 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 PCU 50 18.8 Accessories 18.8.2.3 Expansion boards The PCU 50 is designed for use of boards according to the AT/PCI specification (see Fig. "Slots for Expansion Boards"). Note You must sign an OEM agreement before you can use PCI/ISA modules. It is not recommended to use ISA modules, since with future PCUs, this interface is not installed. The dimensions of the boards must not exceed the specified dimensions. Otherwise, contact problems, malfunctions and installation errors cannot be ruled out. The diagrams show cards of the full AT/PCI overall length. Depending on the slot, restrictions may apply with respect to the overall length. PP PP $ $ Figure 18-22 XT module PP PP & & $ $ Figure 18-23 AT module Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 395 PCU 50 18.8 Accessories PP PP PP Figure 18-24 Short PCI module (5V) PP PP PP Figure 18-25 2/3-length PCI module (5 V) Note To allow longer PCI modules to be guided along the guide rails of ISA modules, they must be provided with a so-called extender. This should be included in the scope of supply of the longer PCI module. 396 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 PCU 50 18.8 Accessories Figure 18-26 Expansion slots (1) Cover plates (2) PCI slot for expansion modules (3) shared ISA/PCI slot (for expansion modules) (4) Bus board (5) Device fan (6) Split rivets for device fan (7) Retaining screw for module bracket (8) Remove module bracket (9) Retaining screws for slot cover plates and/or external module connections Figure 18-27 Mounting an expansion board (1) Device fan (2) Retaining screw for module bracket (3) Remove module bracket (4) Connector for battery (5) Plastic support (6) Guide rail for expansion board Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 397 PCU 50 18.8 Accessories Mounting NOTICE When installing PCI cards, ensure that you do not touch or smudge the golden plug connections of the card. This protects the card from malfunctioning. 1. Open the casing by loosening the casing cover screws (see Section: "Description"), figure: "Top view of PCU 50"). 2. Release the fastening screw to remove the board retainer and remove the plastic support (if fitted) from its slot by pushing it through to the inside. 3. Remove the appropriate cover plate after loosening the fastening screw. 4. Carefully insert the module into the desired slot; firm seat should be ensured. 5. Screw the connecting plate of the module tight. 6. Mount the board retainer. 7. Locate the module by inserting a new plastic holder (enclosed) into the appropriate slot of the board retainer until it locates the edge of the module with its groove. Use a diagonal cutter to cut off the protruding part of the plastic holder. 8. Close the device. 398 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 19 PCU 50.3 19.1 Description The powerful SINUMERIK PCU 50.3 not only has an integrated 150 W main power section but also all of the interfaces for communication via Ethernet and PROFIBUS DP and MPI already on board. Four high-speed USB ports (USB 2.0) offer points where a keyboard, mouse and other peripheral devices can be connected. A covered slot is available for CompactFlash cards (CF cards). Two internal PCI slot connections are available for specific expansions. A slot connection can be occupied depending on the device version. Two 7-segment displays and/or LEDs are integrated for diagnostic purposes. These indicate the current operational state or, during powering up, the BIOS error codes. The SINUMERIK PCU 50.3 is supplied with an operating system based on Windows XP. Validity The description applies to the following devices: Processor Operating system RAM (DDR2) SINUMERIK PCU 50.3-C Celeron M 1.5 GHz WinXP ProEmbSys Other features Order No.: 512 MB 6FC5210-0DF31-2AA0 SINUMERIK PCU 50.3-P Pentium M 2.0 GHz WinXP ProEmbSys 1024 MB 6FC5210-0DF33-2AA0 Features Robust design (continuous operation, high noise immunity) Compact construction for space-saving installation Service-friendly layout (e.g. battery can be accessed externally) Can be expanded via two PCI cards (min. 140 mm to max. 288 mm in length) The installation location and length vary due to the different types of mounting and mounting brackets Integrated 2-digit diagnostics display and status LEDs (e.g. for operating without a monitor) Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 399 PCU 50.3 19.1 Description Powerful processors - Celeron M 1.5 GHz, 400MHz FSB or - Pentium M 2.0 GHz, 533 MHz FSB Working memory of 512 MB or 1024 MB (DDR2-RAM), max. 2048 MB Hard disk drive with cable dampers and 2.5" S-ATA hard disk > 40 GB Operating system based on Windows XP Screen resolutions with 32 bit colors , 85 Hz) - 640 x 480 - 800 x 600 - 1024 x 768 - 1280 x 1024 - 1600 x 1200 (max.) Power supply: DC 24V, 150 W with On / Off switch Interfaces to peripheral devices: - PROFIBUS / MPI (max. 12 MBaud) - DVI-I interface for external monitor - 2 Ethernet connections of 10/100 Mbit/s - CF card shaft (covered) - 4 high-speed USB ports (USB 2.0) Interfaces to operator panel front: - LVDS panel interface (channel 1 and optional channel 2) - I/O USB panel interface - Additional high-speed USB port (USB 2.0) View Figure 19-1 400 Perspective view of PCU 50.3 (without plug-in card) Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 PCU 50.3 19.1 Description Figure 19-2 Top view of PCU 50.3 (1) Housing cover screws (2) Power supply cover screws (3) Interfaces on right side of housing (labeling of the interfaces on the upper side) (4) Rating plate for power supply (5) Component label (with designation, order no., series no., version of the device) (6) Hard disk module screws (7) Hard disk drive (8) Handle for shipping lock Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 401 PCU 50.3 19.2 Operating and display elements 19.2 Operating and display elements On / Off switch Figure 19-3 PCU 50.3 On / Off switch The integrated 24 V main power section of the PCU is always switched on and off via the On / Off switch (1). It also serves as a substitute for the reset button which is no longer provided. WARNING Before opening the device, always disconnect the main power plug because the On / Off switch does not guarantee separation of the power supply unit from the main power supply, from an electrical standpoint. When in switch position '0', the power supply unit is only placed in standby mode during which all output voltages are zero, but the main power section itself remains energized! 402 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 PCU 50.3 19.3 Interfaces 19.3 Interfaces 19.3.1 External interfaces Right-hand casing side Figure 19-4 (2) X1 (3) PCU 50.3 side view from right with interfaces (without plug-in card) Interface/connection (1) Function Line breaker On / Off switch (for standby) for the power supply unit Power supply connection 24 V DC, max. 190 W PCI slot (Slot 1 / Slot 2) 2 slots for expansion modules (4) X302 DVI-I interface Bus for external monitor (VGA monitors via optional adapter) (5) X4 CompactFlash card Slot for CF card under cover plug, not hot plug-capable (6) X600 PROFIBUS DP/MPI 12 MBit/s connection for connecting an S7 automation unit, potentialseparated (7) X41 USB 4 / USB 5 (8) X40 USB 0 / USB 2 4 external high-speed USB connections (USB 2.0) - max. 2 can be operated at the same time as high-current 1) (9) X501 Ethernet 1 (10) X500 Ethernet 2 1) 2 x 10/100 MBit/s, connections for local networks (LAN), RJ45 The max. current carrying capacity of the 4 USB connections is a total of 1.2 A. The max. current carrying capacity of a USB connection is 500 mA. Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 403 PCU 50.3 19.3 Interfaces Left-hand casing side Figure 19-5 Side view of PCU 50.3 from left (1) Status displays (2) Cover plate with retaining screw (3) Type plate of the PC unit (4) Device fan (5) Cover plate for battery The cover plate (2) for the interfaces for connecting the operator panel fronts (see figure in Section: "Rear side of housing") is not installed at the factory and is delivered separately packaged. Install it if the PCU 50.3 is built into a control cabinet. Casing rear side Figure 19-6 PCU 50.3 interfaces for connecting operator panel fronts Interface/connection 404 (1) X44 I/O interface for connecting the I/O cable of the operator panel front (2) X42 Optimum connection for the operator panel front with USB 2.0 front port (3) X400 LVDS interface for connecting a TFT display cable Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 PCU 50.3 19.3 Interfaces Pin assignment for external interfaces For the pin assignments of the individual external interfaces, refer to section: "Connection Conditions", section: "Secondary electrical conditions". 19.3.2 Internal interfaces 19.3.2.1 Connector assignment of motherboard Overview ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; Figure 19-7 ; ; PCU 50.3 - Motherboard interfaces *) Internal Connector Interface Description X1 Processor Socket for FCPGA mobile processor X3 Optical drive Parallel ATA 44-pin, 2 mm male connector X10 Bus expansion Socket for bus expansion, uses PCI bus signals X13 Power supply 20-pin connection plug for power supply Memory 2 DIMM sockets, 64-bit X19 / X20 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 405 PCU 50.3 19.3 Interfaces Connector X24 Interface Description Backup battery Power supply for backup battery, 2-pin male connector X25 SATA 0 Power Supply X26 X602 X43 SATA 1 SATA 2 USB port USB channel 6 and 7 Serial ATA Data cable for serial ATA X128 Connection for equipment fan Power supply for equipment fan, 3-pin male connector X129 Connection for PS fan Power supply for CPU fan, 3-pin male connector X240 Tap for backup battery Voltage tap ( = 3V) of the backup battery, 2-pin, male connector X50 X51 SATA 0 X52 SATA 1 SATA 2 X607 Lock status detection for MC hard disk module SATA Signal type: 406 I Input O Output V Power supply - Ground (reference potential) or N.C. (not connected) Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 PCU 50.3 19.3 Interfaces Connection for DVD-ROM drive X3 Table 19-1 X3 connector assignment Connector Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Pin Name Type Remarks 1 RESET i Reset 2 GND - Ground reference potential 3 D7 4 D8 Data signal D7 I/O Data signal D8 5 D6 Data signal D6 6 D9 Data signal D9 7 D5 8 D10 Data signal D5 9 D4 Data signal D4 10 D11 Data signal D11 11 D3 Data signal D3 12 D12 I/O I/O Data signal D10 Data signal D12 13 D2 Data signal D2 14 D13 Data signal D13 15 D1 16 D14 17 D0 Data signal D1 I/O Data signal D14 Data signal D0 18 D15 19 GND - Ground (reference potential) Data signal D15 20 N.C. - Do not use 21 DREQ I DMA request 22 GND - Ground (reference potential) 23 IOW_N O I/O write (writing signal) 24 GND - Ground (reference potential) 25 IOR_N O I/O read (reading signal) 26 GND - Ground (reference potential) 27 IORDY I I/O ready (ready signal) 28 - - Reserved 29 DACK_N O DMA acknowledgment 30 GND - Ground (reference potential) 31 IOCS16 - I/O Chip Select 16 32 N.C. - Do not use 33 AD_1 O Address 1 34 - - Reserved 35 AD_0 O Address 0 36 AD_2 O Address 2 37 CS1_N - Chip Select 1 38 CS3_N - Chip Select 3 39 HDACT_N I HD active 407 PCU 50.3 19.3 Interfaces Connector Pin Name Type Remarks 40 GND - Ground (reference potential) 41 P5V V +5V voltage supply (LOGIC) 42 P5V V +5V voltage supply (MOTOR) 43 GND - Ground (reference potential) 44 - - Reserved DC interface of the power supply X13 Table 19-2 X13 connector assignment Connector 408 Pin Name 1 P5V 2 P5V 3 P5V Type Remarks +5 V +5 V V +5 V 4 P5V +5 V 5 P5V +5 V 6 PS_NAU_N Power loss early warning signal 7 PS_PWROK Power Good Signal 8 GND 9 GND 10 GND 11 N12V 12 GND 13 GND 14 GND 15 P12V 16 P12V 17 P3V 18 P3V 19 P3V 20 P3V Ground - Ground V -12V Ground Ground - Ground Ground V +12V +12V +3.3V V +3.3V +3,3V +3.3V Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 PCU 50.3 19.3 Interfaces Connector for backup battery X24 The battery for backing up the CMOS-RAM is connected to this connection. A 3V lithium battery with a capacity of 750 mAh is used for this purpose. Table 19-3 Assignment of the X24 connector Connector Pin Name Type Remarks 1 + VI Plus pole 2 - VI Minus pole Pin Name Type 1 VCC 3.3V O +3.3 V, fused 2 VCC 5V O +5 V, fused 3 USB3 4 USB5 USB port connector X43 Table 19-4 X43 connector assignment Connector Remarks USB3_M I/O USB5_M 5 USB3 6 USB5 USB3_B 7 GND - Ground (reference potential) 8 GND - Ground (reference potential) 9 GND - Ground (reference potential) 10 GND - Ground (reference potential) Pin Name Type 1 GND - Ground (reference potential) 2 +12V V Switched power supply 3 CPU FAN_CLK I Clock signal USB5_B Connection for equipment fan X128 Table 19-5 X128 connector assignment Connector Remarks Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 409 PCU 50.3 19.3 Interfaces Connection for power supply fan X129 Table 19-6 X129 connector assignment Connector Pin Name Type 1 GND - Ground (reference potential) 2 +12V O Switched power supply 3 PG1 FAN_CLK I Clock signal Remarks Tap for backup battery X240 This connection is intended for expansion modules with their own CMOS-RAM. The voltage of the backup battery can be tapped here to back up the CMOS-RAM data of the expansion module. Table 19-7 Assignment of the X240 connector Connector Pin Name Type Remarks 1 + VO Plus pole 2 - VO Minus pole NOTICE No battery should be connected to this connection. Lock status detection connection X607 This connection serves to detect a locked MC hard disk. Table 19-8 Pin assignment of connector X607 Connectors Pin Name Type Note 1 SATA_GP0 I Detection input 2 GND - Ground 410 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 PCU 50.3 19.3 Interfaces 19.3.2.2 Connector assignment of bus board The bus board is designed as a link between the motherboard and the expansion modules. It is mounted using two screws. The bus board has two PCI slots (1x short, 1x long). Expansion modules can be installed acc. to the PCI specification (rev. 2.2) for 5 V and 3.3 V. All PCI slots are capable of being masters. The expansion modules are supplied with power via the bus board's connection to the motherboard. Figure 19-8 (1) PCU 50.3 bus board Slot 1 (2) Slot 2 (3) 12V power supply connection for WinAC module Interrupt assignment (PCI-IRQ) PCU 50.3 PCI devices interrupt assignment (PCI IRQ) INT - A Graphics, USB A (channel 0+1), USB B (channel 2+ 3) INT - B Slot 1 INT - C Slot 2 INT - D Serial ATA INT - E Ethernet 1 INT - F MPI/DP INT - G Ethernet 2, USB C (channel 4+5), USB D (channel 6 + 7) INT - H USB 2.0 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 411 PCU 50.3 19.3 Interfaces Exclusive PCI hardware interrupt Applications which have stringent requirements in terms of interrupt performance need a fast interrupt response time from the hardware. The PCI hardware interrupt may only be assigned by one resource if a fast hardware response time is to be available. To enable this, the Ethernet 1, PROFIBUS/MPI interfaces and the two slots each have an exclusive interrupt. IRQ assignments for Windows XP operating system (APIC mode) IRQ assignments for DOS-based operating systems (PIC mode) Ethernet 1 20 10 PROFIBUS / MPI 21 7 Slot 1 17 5 Slot 2 18 3 PCI slot pin assignment 5V System Environment Side B Side A 412 1 -12V TRST# 2 TCK +12V 3 Ground TMS 4 TDO TDI 5 +5 V +5 V 6 +5 V INTA# 7 INTB# INTC# 8 INTD# +5 V 9 PRSNT1# Reserved 10 Reserved +5V (I/O) 11 PRSNT2# Reserved 12 Ground Ground 13 Ground Ground 14 Reserved Reserved 15 Ground RST# 16 CLK +5V (I/O) 17 Ground GNT# 18 REQ# Ground 19 +5V (I/O) Reserved 20 AD[31] AD[30] 21 AD[29] +3.3V 22 Ground AD[28] 23 AD[27] AD[26] 24 AD[25] Ground 25 +3.3V AD[24] Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 PCU 50.3 19.3 Interfaces 5V System Environment Side B Side A 26 C/BE[3]# IDSEL 27 AD[23] +3.3V 28 Ground AD[22] 29 AD[21] AD[20] 30 AD[19] Ground 31 +3.3V AD[18] 32 AD[17] AD[16] 33 C/BE[2]# +3.3V 34 Ground FRAME# 35 IRDY# Ground 36 +3.3V TRDY# 37 DEVSEL# Ground 38 Ground STOP# 39 LOCK# +3.3V 40 PERR# SDONE 41 +3.3V SBO# 42 SERR# Ground 43 +3.3V PAR 44 C/BE[1]# AD[15] 45 AD[14] +3.3V 46 Ground AD[13] 47 AD[12] AD[11] 48 AD[10] Ground 49 Ground AD[09] 50 CONNECTOR KEY 51 CONNECTOR KEY 52 AD[08] C/BE[0]# 53 AD[07] +3.3V 54 +3.3V AD[06] 55 AD[05] AD[04] 56 AD[03] Ground 57 Ground AD[02] 58 AD[01] AD[00] 59 +5V (I/O) +5V (I/O) 60 ACK64# REQ64# 61 +5 V +5 V 62 +5 V +5 V Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 413 PCU 50.3 19.3 Interfaces Pin assignment 12V power supply connection for WinAC module 414 Pin Name Signal type Remarks 1 +12V V 12V voltage 2 GND - Ground (reference potential) 3 GND - Ground (reference potential) 4 +5 V V 5V voltage Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 PCU 50.3 19.4 Mounting 19.4 Mounting 19.4.1 Preparation for mounting Mounting of the PCU 50.3 depends on how it is going to be used. A distinction is made between the following types of mounting: 1. Standard mounting for assembly of PCU and operator panel front 2. Flat mounting for distributed configuration of PCU and video link transmitter 3. Upright mounting for distributed configuration of PCU and video link transmitter (optional: upright mounting without video link for server operations) 4. Central mounting for distributed installation of PCU and video link transmitter and operator panel front A corresponding set of mounting brackets is required for each type of mounting. You will find the corresponding order numbers in section: "Accessories". First, screw corresponding mounting bracket to PCU before mounting the PCU on an operator panel front or video link transmitter. The diagram shows the PCU and mounting bracket (standard mounting) in correct orientation before screwing together (tightening torque M3: 0.8 Nm, tightening torque M4: 1.8 Nm). Figure 19-9 PCU 50.3 with mounting brackets (standard mounting) (1) Lugs without hinged catch (2) M4x8 countersunk screw with high tension ring and washer (3) M3x8 countersunk screw with high tension ring and washer (4) B bracket (5) Lugs with hinged catch (6) A bracket Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 415 PCU 50.3 19.4 Mounting WARNING Securing the PCU to ceiling or wall Ensure that the wall or ceiling can support 4 times the total weight of the PCU (including mounting brackets and additional expansion modules). The total weight of the PCU is a max. of 7 kg. NOTICE For installing the mounting brackets for the upright installation, use only M4x10 screws. For all remaining mounting brackets, use M3x8 and M4x8, (provided). The mainboard will be damaged if you screw in the M3x8 and M4x8 screws without mounting brackets, - or if you use other 8 mm screws (without a flat washer or tension ring) or - longer screws, - use the M4x10 screws for mounting the brackets on the PCU 50 (previous model). 416 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 PCU 50.3 19.4 Mounting Dimension drawings for mounting QRQRSHUDWLQJ RSHUDWLQJ Figure 19-10 PCU 50.3 dimension drawing for mounting without ETH strain relief All dimensions in mm 1) M3x8 countersunk screw with high tension ring and washer 2) M4x8 countersunk screw with high tension ring and washer 3) M4 (only present on this side) Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 417 PCU 50.3 19.4 Mounting Figure 19-11 PCU 50.3 dimension drawing for mounting with ETH strain relief All dimensions in mm 19.4.2 1) M3x8 countersunk screw with high tension ring and washer 2) M4x8 countersunk screw with high tension ring and washer 3) M4 (only present on this side) Assembly of PCU and operator panel front Install the PCU and operator panel front as described in section: "OP 012," section: "Mounting" "Assembling OP 012 and PCU." 418 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 PCU 50.3 19.4 Mounting 19.4.3 Notes on installation Observe the following during installation: Avoid extreme environmental conditions as far as possible. Protect the PCU from severe vibrations, jolts, dust, humidity and heat. An external fire protection housing is required. Do not expose the PCU directly to the sun's rays. Install the device in such a way that no danger (e.g. by falling down) may result. Ventilation clearances: - Both fan sides: 50 mm each. - On top, on the bottom, on the rear side: 10 mm (see Fig.) Make sure that the vent slots are not covered. Permissible mounting positions of PCU 50.3 acc. to UL508 (1) Position of hard disk Inclined position On the basis of the standard mounting positions shown above (checked with a variance of 5), an inclined position of up to 20 is permitted if sufficient ventilation is still ensured. Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 419 PCU 50.3 19.4 Mounting 19.4.4 Mounting the Ethernet tension relief The ETHERNET strain relief serves to secure the main power connector on the PCU 50.3. The ETH strain relief is not mounted and is delivered in a separate package. Procedure 1. Remove the cable ties (1), the ETH strain relief (2) and the two screws (M3) from the separate package. 2. Secure the ETH strain relief on the PCU by tightening the two screws with a Torx screwdriver T10. 3. Plug in the Ethernet cable. 420 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 PCU 50.3 19.4 Mounting 4. Secure the Ethernet cable at the ETH strain relief with a cable tie. 19.4.5 Installing the anchor tie The anchor tie (2) ensures strain relief for the cable to the USB interfaces. It has an interlock and can therefore be reused. The anchor tie is supplied in a separate package from the factory. Figure 19-12 PCU 50.3 - anchor tie Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 421 PCU 50.3 19.4 Mounting Mounting 1. Press the anchor tie firmly in the drill-hole above the PROFIBUS DP / MP - interface (1). 2. Undo the release and insert the USB cable. 3. After inserting the cable, tighten the anchor tie again, so that the cable is reliably relieved of strain. 4. Rotate the anchor tie in such a manner that the interfaces and connector remain freely accessible. 422 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 PCU 50.3 19.5 Connectors 19.5 Connectors 19.5.1 Ground terminal The ground terminal (1) of the PCU 50.3 is on the underside of the casing. Figure 19-13 Underside of PCU 50.3 19.5.2 I/O devices NOTICE When connecting up I/O devices, check that they are suitable for industrial applications acc. to EN 61000-6-2:2001. Operator panel front If you are using the PCU together with an operator front panel, before switching on the PCU first connect up the operator front panel. Note The simultaneous operation of the operator panel and monitor is no longer a standard activation under Windows XP. DVI / VGA monitor Only switch on the PCU once you have connected the external monitor. Otherwise, this interface is automatically deactivated. Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 423 PCU 50.3 19.5 Connectors CF card Only switch on the PCU once you have plugged in the CompactFlash card. The CompactFlash interface is not capable of acting as a hot-plug. Never plug-in or pull a card while the PCU is operating. Units based on USB You can connect or disconnect units based on USB (USB 1.1 or 2.0) during PCU operations if they are supported by the operating system (e.g. Windows XP). Note If you are using commercially available USB devices, the interference immunity of the entire system can be reduced. The end user takes responsibility for the use of such devices. Information on which connection cable is required and how to adapt and set the interface can be found in the User's Manual for your I/O device. 19.5.3 DC power supply (24V) The PCU 50.3 is supplied with 24 V DC voltage. WARNING The cable cross-section must be adapted to the short-circuit current of the 24V DC power source so that no damage is caused by the cables if a short-circuit occurs. Only cables with a cross-section of at least 1.3 mm2 (AWG16) and maximum 3.3 mm2 (AWG12) may be connected. NOTICE The 24V-DC power source must be adapted to the input data of the PCU (see section: "Technical data"). Connecting the PCU to the 24V-DC power supply 1. Ensure that the PCU's On/Off switch is in the '0' (Off) position to prevent unintentional startup of the device when connecting it to the power supply. 2. Switch off the 24 V DC power supply. 3. Connect the DC connector. 424 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 PCU 50.3 19.5 Connectors 19.5.4 Equipotential A low-impedance ground connection ensures that interference signals generated by external power supply cables, signal cables or cables to the I/O modules are safely discharged to ground. The equipotential bonding terminal (1) on the device (large surface, large-area contact) must be connected with the central grounding busbar of the cabinet or plant in which the PCU is to be installed. The minimum cross-section must not fall below 5 mm2. Figure 19-14 PCU 50.3 equipotential connection Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 425 PCU 50.3 19.6 Commissioning 19.6 Commissioning 19.6.1 Locking / unlocking hard disk Protect the PCU hard disk drive during any form of transport by locking it. Interlock To lock the hard disk drive, turn the black rotary knob to the "non-operating" position. The sensitive dampers are then reliably protected from damage during transport. QRQRSHUDWLQJ RSHUDWLQJ Figure 19-15 PCU 50.3 hard disk drive locked Unlocking To unlock the hard disk drive, turn the black rotary knob to the "operating" position. The sensitive dampers are then reactivated for subsequent operations. QRQRSHUDWLQJ RSHUDWLQJ Figure 19-16 PCU 50.3 hard disk drive unlocked 426 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 PCU 50.3 19.6 Commissioning Error message during locking When the PCU BIOS is powered up, the system checks whether the hard disk drive has been unlocked. If it has not been unlocked, the following error message is output on the screen: "Error System halted - hard disk drive (HDD) locked! Please switch power off, remove HDD-interlock and reboot the system" The status display is "A8" while the error message is output. Action to take during error message: 1. Switch off the PCU. 2. Unlock the hard disk drive. 3. Switch the PCU on again. 19.6.2 System start More information on the system start can be found in the manual "IM8 start-up of PCU base software." 19.6.3 Switching off / reset Closing Windows XP To close the Windows XP operating system, select "Start" "Shut down". This ensures that the system and operating system can be restarted without any problems. Switching off the PCU Once you have closed and shut down Windows XP, the power supply module of the PCU is still on. If you also want to switch off the power supply module, tip the PCU's On / Off switch into the "0" position. Reset The PCU does not have a special reset button to restart the system. If you want to enforce a system restart, use the On / Off switch to switch your PCU off and on again. Note When undertaking service work (opening the PCU), also disconnect the main power connector from the 24V power supply. This is the only way of totally de-energizing the unit! Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 427 PCU 50.3 19.6 Commissioning 19.6.4 Calibration of the touch screen If you want to connect a new Touch Panel (TP 012 or TP 015A) to the PCU, you have to recalibrate the Touch Screen of the operator panel front. Touch software, required for the calibration, is included in the basic Windows XP software. Proceed as follows A functioning touch panel system with PCU 50.3 is required. 1. Boot up the system in service mode. 2. Start the SINUMERIK desktop (password-protected). 3. Invoke the calibration menu from "Start" "Programs" "Touchware" "Touchware" (see figure). Note On the TP 015A the default calibration is centrosymmetric to the center point. This means that you must press the top right of the screen to activate the "Start" button (bottom left). Figure 19-17 Menu for touch screen calibration (Touchware version 5.64 SR3) 428 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 PCU 50.3 19.6 Commissioning Note Depending on the software version and setting, the screen can include 2, 4 or 5 calibration points. You can toggle between 2 and 5 points (Touchware version 5.63 SR3) or between 2 and 4 points (Touchware version 5.64 SR3) from the menu "Tools" "Options" "Advanced" "Style". 4. Press the "Calibrate" button. The following display will appear on the screen: Figure 19-18 Calibration screen 5. Using the tip of a finger, touch the calibration point indicated by the hand symbol as precisely as possible for as long as the "Hold" prompt is displayed. The "Hold" instruction disappears after a few seconds and the hand moves to the next calibration point. 6. Repeat the instructions in step 5 until all available points have been calibrated. Once the calibration point parameters have been saved, the following menu appears: Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 429 PCU 50.3 19.6 Commissioning Figure 19-19 Test menu 7. To test the calibration values, move your finger around the screen and watch the cursor. If necessary, recalibrate using "Calibrate." 8. Exit the calibration menu via "Done" "Close". If you take too long on calibration, the whole process is aborted by a "timeout" and you have to start again from the beginning. 19.6.5 BIOS 19.6.5.1 BIOS powering up Once you have switched the PCU on, the preinstalled system powers up automatically. During powering up, the parameters saved in the BIOS setup take effect. If necessary, you can reactivate the factory-preset parameters (default values) at anytime during the setup using the <F2> key. 1. Press the <F9> (default load) key to do this. 2. Store the settings by pressing the <F10> button (save settings). Once powering up is complete, the start screen is displayed (see IM8: start-up of PCU base software). 430 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 PCU 50.3 19.6 Commissioning Checking the boot sequence If you want to check or change the boot sequence: 1. Switch on the PCU. 2. Press the <Esc> key (or <Alarm Cancel> on the operator panel), if you are prompted to do so. The boot list with all of the booted devices is displayed. 3. Select the desired boot device and press the enter key. Booting using the USB FlashDrive If you connect an external USB device or start from a boot-capable USB FlashDrive for servicing purposes, you have to manually call up the USB device from setup. Two options are available: USB device is entered in boot list 1. Switch on the PCU. 2. Press the <F2> key. 3. Press the <Esc> key (or <Alarm Cancel> on the operator panel). 4. Select the corresponding USB device from the boot list. USB device is not entered in boot list 1. Switch on the PCU. 2. Press the <F2> key. 3. Select the <Go to Setup> menu item to reach the Setup menu. 4. Go to the menu bar for <Boot>. 5. Use the '' button to reach the "Excluded from boot order" entry and select the USB device you want to enter in the boot list. 6. Press the 'x' key. The device is entered in the boot list 7. If you want to change the sequence of devices within the boot list, select the corresponding device and press the '+' key to move further up the list or the '-' key to move further down the list. 8. Then reboot the PCU. PCU doesn't boot up If the PCU no longer boots up as a result of incorrect settings in the BIOS: 1. Take the battery out (see section: "Spare parts" "Replacement" "Battery"). 2. Bridge the pins of the PCU's battery connector for approx. 10 seconds with a conductive object. 3. Then wait approx. 1 minute. 4. Put the battery back in. All the BIOS settings (including time and date) are thereby reset. Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 431 PCU 50.3 19.6 Commissioning 5. You can set the time and date using the <F2> key. 6. Use the <F9> button to load the default values and the <F10> button to save these. 19.6.5.2 Changing the BIOS settings If additional components (e.g. an external USB diskette drive) are attached or removed, you may need to change the BIOS settings (see section: "BIOS start up" "Booting using the USB FlashDrive"). WARNING Only change the BIOS settings if you are fully aware of the consequences of doing so! Incorrect settings may result in the entire system (including the operating system) no longer starting (see section: "BIOS start up" "PCU not booting up"). Changing the BIOS settings using the standard keyboard Creating your own user profile Use the "User" profile in the setup menu if you need your own settings in the BIOS and want to permanently save these settings (also used after changing the battery). 1. Switch on the PCU and wait a few seconds. 2. Once you have been prompted to switch to the BIOS setup, press the <F2> button. The BIOS Setup menu will appear. 3. Select "User" under "Exit" "Profile". 4. Make your specific settings in the other menu items. 5. Save the new settings permanently using the <F10> button by confirming the dialog with "Yes." 6. Your specific settings will be available once the machine has been restarted. Calling up your own user profile As soon as you select the "User" selection from the "Exit" "Profile" setup setting and save with the <F10> button and "Yes," the values saved originally appear after a reboot, provided that you do not change any data (with the exception of the time and date). Changing data (with the exception of the time and date) is the same as creating a new user profile (see "Creating your own user profile"). Changing the BIOS settings via an operator panel front 1. Switch on the PCU and wait a few seconds. 2. Once you have been prompted to switch to the BIOS setup, press the <F2> button. The BIOS Setup menu will appear. 432 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 PCU 50.3 19.6 Commissioning 3. Use the cursor keys for navigating in the menu to the desired selection field (e.g. "Disk A:"). 4. Change the setting using the <+> key (press <SHIFT> and <X> at the same time) or the <-> key on in the numeric keypad. 5. You can also use the cursor keys <> (right) and <> (left) to reach other setup menu items. 6. Press the <Esc> button (<Alarm Cancel> button) to go to the "Exit" menu. (This menu can also be reached by pressing and holding down the <> (right) cursor key.) 7. Press the <Input> key to quit the setup menu. 8. Press the <Input> key to confirm your decision to exit BIOS Setup with "Yes". Then power up the system (see section: "BIOS start up"). 6KLIWNH\ 6+,)7 $/$50 &$1&(/ (VFDSHNH\ ,QSXWNH\ ,1387 SUHVV)!WRHQWHU%,26VHWXS )NH\ Figure 19-20 Using the BIOS Setup via an operator panel front 19.6.5.3 Status display The status display consists of two 7-segment displays with two 2-color LEDs. Figure 19-21 PCU 50.3 status display (1) 2 x 7-segment display (2) LED H2 (3) LED H1 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 433 PCU 50.3 19.6 Commissioning Function of the 7-segment display During the BIOS powering up process, the POST codes of the corresponding test stage are displayed. Once power up has been completed correctly, code 00 is displayed. If an error occurs, the POST code of the last test stage started is displayed. Application codes can also be displayed if required. Function of LEDs H1 and H2 During the BIOS powering up process, both LEDs light up in two colors (red and green) to test their function. Both LEDs are switched off once powering up is completed correctly. Applications can trigger the two LEDs if required. 434 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 PCU 50.3 19.7 Technical specifications 19.7 Technical specifications 19.7.1 PCU 50.3 Safety Safety class III (PLEV) acc. to EN 61800-5-1 Degree of protection in accordance with EN 60529 IP 20 Approvals CE / cULus Electrical data Input voltage Max. current output Power consumption 24 V DC (20.4 V ... 28.8 V) USB external, each 0.5 A (in total: 1.2 A) 3.3 V 2A 5V 2A 12 V 0.3 A -12 V 0.05 A PCU basic unit PCI slots typ. 5.5 W (at 55 C) max. 15 W 1) Main power outage buffering time min. 20 ms Mechanical data Dimensions (mm) Width: 297 Height: 267 Depth: 82 Weight Max. 7 kg Slot 1: Card length max. 288 mm (measured without slot plate) 2) Slot 2: Card length max. 175 mm (measured without slot plate) 2) Mechanical ambient conditions Operation Transport (in transport packaging) Vibratory load 10 - 58 Hz: 0.075 mm 58 - 200 Hz: 9.8 m/s2 DIN IEC 60068-2-6 5 -9 Hz: 6.2 mm 9 - 200 Hz: 19.6 m/s2 DIN IEC 60068-2-6 Shock stressing 50 m/s2, 30 ms 18 shocks DIN IEC60068-2-27 300 m/s2, 6 ms 18 shocks DIN IEC60068-2-27 Noise < 55 dB(A) according to DIN 45635-1 Climatic ambient conditions Heat dissipation Open-circuit-ventilated Condensation, spraying water and icing Supply air Applicable standards Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Not permitted Without caustic gases, dusts and oils Operation Transport (in transport packaging) DIN IEC 60068-2-1 DIN IEC 60068-2-2 / -2-14 435 PCU 50.3 19.7 Technical specifications Climate class 3K5 1K3 / 2K4 Temperature limits 5 ... 55 C 2) -20 ... 60 C Temperature change Max. 10 K/h Max. 18 K/h Limits for relative humidity 5 ... 80% at 25 C Permissible change in the relative air humidity 19.7.2 5 ... 95% at 25C max. 0.1 % / min 1) All of the slots must not exceed this total output 2) With total power of slots amounting to 15 W DC power supply module of 24 V (integrated) Technical data Safety Protective class III (PELV) acc. to EN 61800-5-1 Degree of protection in accordance with EN 60529 IP 20 (when mounted) Approvals CE / cULus Electrical data Input voltage DC 24 V (20.4 V ... 28.8 V) Input current Continuous current to 9 A (to 14 A for 30 ms at startup) Power consumption max. 190 W Temperature-limited output power max. 105 W (operation at 55 C) Main power outage buffering time Min. 20 ms Output voltages Voltage Max. current +12 V 6.5 A, peak 8 A - 12 V 0.3 A +5V 16.5 A 1), peak 18.5 A + 3.3 V 8.5 A 1) 1) The max. permitted accumulated power of the + 5 V and 3.3 V is 90 W. 436 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 PCU 50.3 19.7 Technical specifications Power good signal on DC 24V power supply (diagram) 9LQSXWYROWDJH 999RXWSXW 32:(5*22' 7 7 7SUHVHWWLPHPV 7KROGXSWLPHPLQPV Figure 19-22 Power good signal on DC 24V power supply NAU signal on DC 24V power supply (diagram - main power failure alarm) 9LQSXWYROWDJH 32:(5*22' 1$8 7 7 7SUHVHWWLPHPLQPV 7KROGXSWLPHPLQPV GDWDUHVFXHWLPH Figure 19-23 NAU signal on DC 24V power supply Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 437 PCU 50.3 19.8 Replacement parts 19.8 Replacement parts 19.8.1 Overview The following spare parts are available for the PCU 50.3: Component Order number Hard disk with mounting plate and damper 6FC5247-0AF08-4AA0 Device fan (60 mm) A5E00319306 Power supply module fan (50 mm) A5E00319305 CMOS battery 3V lithium CR 1/2AA A5E00331143 150W DC power supply (24V) A5E00320852 19.8.2 Replacement 19.8.2.1 Hard disk drive The installed hard disk drive is connected to the main board by three cables. S-ATA data cable Power supply cable Cable for detection of lock status Figure 19-24 PCU 50.3 with hard disk drive folded up (1) 438 Hard disk module (2) Ribbon cable (S-ATA) for hard disk connection to port 0 (3) Power supply cable of the hard disk module to X602 (4) Locking cable for switch to X607 (5) Fastening clip for power supply cable Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 PCU 50.3 19.8 Replacement parts Proceed as follows 1. Disconnect the PC from the power supply. 2. Lock the hard disk's transport lock by turning the black rotary knob to the "non-operating" position (see Fig. "PCU 50.3 hard disk module locked" in section: "Start up" "Locking / unlocking hard disk"). 3. Loosen the four fastening screws of the hard disk module. 4. Fold up the hard disk module (see Figure above). 5. Disconnect the ribbon cable (2) from the main board and note its position. 6. Also disconnect the other two cables (3) and (4) and note their slots on the main board. 7. When installing the new hard disk module, proceed in reverse order. The new module must be of the same type or a compatible successor. 8. Unlock the hard disk's transport lock by turning the black rotary knob to the "operating" position (see Fig. "PCU 50.3 hard disk module unlocked" in section: "Start up" "Locking / unlocking hard disk"). 19.8.2.2 Power supply Removing the power supply Figure 19-25 Removal and installation of PCU 50.3 power supply (1) Retaining screws for the power supply cover (2) Power supply cover (3) Power supply retaining screws (4) Connector for power supply (5) Power supply Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 439 PCU 50.3 19.8 Replacement parts WARNING The power supply may only be replaced by authorized personnel. 1. Disconnect the PCU from the power supply. 2. Lock the transport lock for the hard disk (see section: "Start-up" "Lock/unlock hard disk") and remove the hard disk. 3. Undo the retaining screws (1) from the power supply cover (2) and take off the power supply cover. 4. Unscrew the power supply retaining screws (3) (Torx T10). 5. Disconnect the connection plug for the power supply (4) from the power supply. 6. Pull the power supply up and out of the casing. Installing the power supply Install the new power supply in reverse order. Note Observe the correct position of the resting hook of the power supply for upright bus boards. 440 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 PCU 50.3 19.8 Replacement parts 19.8.2.3 Power supply module fan To be able to replace the power supply module fan, you must first remove the power supply. You will find a description of this process in section: "Spare parts" "Replacement" "Power supply". Removing the power supply module fan Figure 19-26 PCU 50.3 power supply module fan (1) Connector for power supply (2) Power supply module fan (correct installation position - fan blows outward) 1. Remove the power supply. 2. Remove the connector to the fan's power supply (1). 3. Loosen the four black plastic rivets or screws on the rear of the casing and take out the fan. Installing the power supply module fan Re-install the new fan in reverse order. Ensure the correct mounting position is used (see arrow in diagram above). NOTICE Only a fan of the same type may be mounted. Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 441 PCU 50.3 19.8 Replacement parts 19.8.2.4 Device fan Removing the device fan Figure 19-27 Replacement of the PCU 50.3 device fan (1) Expansion rivets for mounting the device fan (2) Power supply cable for device fan (3) Device fan (blows outward) *) Direction of air flow 1. Disconnect the PC from the power supply. 2. Remove the casing cover by loosening the two screws (see diagram "Plan view of PCU 50.3" in section: "Description") 3. Pull the device fan's power supply cable out of the socket. 4. Loosen the four black plastic rivets on the rear of the casing. 5. Take the fan out of the casing. Installing the device fan Re-install the new fan in reverse order. Ensure the correct mounting position is used (see arrow in diagram above). NOTICE Only a fan of the same type may be mounted. 442 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 PCU 50.3 19.8 Replacement parts 19.8.2.5 Battery Note Batteries are wear-susceptible parts. They should be replaced every 5 years to ensure that the device functions permanently. If a mounted PCI plug-in card is also supplied (central battery concept), preventive replacement intervals are shortened to 4 years. The backup battery supplies voltage to not only to any plug-in cards used during operations but also to the hardware clock once the device has been switched off. In addition to the clock time, the BIOS settings of the device are also stored. This data is lost if the backup battery fails for longer than 1 minute or remains separate from the plug-in contact while the PCU is not switched on. WARNING Only use 3.0 V lithium batteries for the PCU 50.3 because any plug-in cards present must not be subjected to any permanent voltage in excess of 3.0 V. Figure 19-28 Main board of PCU 50.3 with assignment of RAMs and the backup battery (1) Equipment fan (2) Backup battery (3) Plug for connecting device fan (4) Plug for connecting backup battery (5) Socket for RAM bank 1 (not assigned) (6) RAM bank 0 (7) Locating hole for board retainer Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 443 PCU 50.3 19.8 Replacement parts Note before replacing the battery CAUTION Risk of damage! The lithium battery may only be replaced with an identical battery or with a type recommended by the manufacturer (Order No.: A5E00331143). All lithium batteries should be returned to the battery manufacturer / recycler for disposal or treated as special grade waste. Note the current BIOS Setup settings. This must be done in particular if you have undertaken different settings which are not saved in the user profile. If you have saved all settings in the user profile or if you are working with the standard settings, the settings will not be lost when the battery is replaced. WARNING Risk of explosion and release of harmful substances! Therefore, do not throw Lithium batteries into an open fire, do not solder or open the cell body, do not short-circuit or reverse polarity, do not heat up above 100 C, dispose as regulated and protected against direct exposure to sunlight, humidity and condensation. Changing the backup battery You will find the reference diagrams after this description. Note If you reconnect the new battery within one minute, all the settings (including time / date) and backed up data will be retained. 1. Open the battery box (A). 2. Take out the battery holder (B). 3. Remove the connection cable (C). 4. Remove the old battery from the holder. 5. Secure the new battery in the holder. 6. Reconnect the connection cable. 7. Close the battery box. 444 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 PCU 50.3 19.8 Replacement parts Reference diagrams (A) Figure 19-29 Opening the battery compartment (B) Figure 19-30 Removing the battery holder (C) Figure 19-31 Unplugging the cable Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 445 PCU 50.3 19.9 Accessories 19.9 Accessories 19.9.1 Overview The following accessories are available for the PCU 50.3: Component Order no. Mounting bracket Standard Flat 2) 6FC5248-0AF20-0AA0 Upright 2) 6FC5248-0AF20-1AA0 Upright (only PCU) 6ES7648-1AA10-0YA0 Central Memory expansion 6FC5248-0AF20-2AA0 1) 6FC5248-0AF20-3AA0 3) 128 MB, DDR2 533, SODIMM 6ES7648-2AG10-0GA0 256 MB, DDR2 533, SODIMM 6ES7648-2AG20-0GA0 512 MB. DDR2 533, SODIMM 6ES7648-2AG30-0GA0 1024 MB, DDR2 533, SODIMM 6ES7648-2AG40-0GA0 Compact Flash card 512 MB (empty) 6FC5313-4AG00-0AA0 SINUMERIK service pack Recovery Media WIN XP ProEmbSys for PCU with Windows XP ProEmbSys on CD 6FC5253-8CX10-1XU8 CD1: Windows XP ProEmbSys incl. SP2 CD2: Ghost of basic software; emergency boot CD3 to CD5: Multilingual user interface pack (Chinese simplified, Chinese traditional, Danish, German. Finnish, French, Italian, Japanese, Korean, Dutch, Polish, Portuguese/Brazilian, Russian, Swedish, Czech, Turkish, Hungarian) Documentation (German / English) PCI Multi I/O module 2 x COM, LPT for PCU 50.3 (only for use with applications within the framework of HMI Open Architecture, occupies 1 to 2 PCI expansion slots) 6ES7648-2CA00-0AA0 1) for PCU or video link receiver behind operator panel front 2) for PCU and video link receiver in switch cabinet (see section: "Distributed installation") 3) for PCU and video link transmitter behind operator panel front (see section: "Distributed installation") 446 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 PCU 50.3 19.9 Accessories 19.9.2 Installing and removing expansion modules 19.9.2.1 Memory expansion Expansion options On the main board there are two slots for memory modules (RAM banks). If you fill these slots with one or two modules, you can increase the memory capacity of the PCU to up to 2 GB. 184-pin DDR2 memory modules, unbuffered, no ECC can be used. The following combinations are possible: Combination Slot X1 1 128/256/512/1024 MB 2 128/256/512/1024 MB Slot X2 Removal max. 1 GB 128/256/512/1024 MB 2 GB Note It does not matter which modules are inserted into which slots. Installation of memory module 1. Disconnect the device from mains. 2. Remove the screws from the casing cover (see diagram "Plan view of PCU 50.3" in section: "Description") and take off the casing cover. 3. Insert module in socket (see "Main board of PCU 50.3 with assignment of RAMs and the backup battery" diagram in section: "Spare parts" "Replacement" "Battery"). When doing so, pay attention to the recess (anti-rotation element) on the plug side of the RAM module. 4. Press the module downwards, applying slight pressure until the locking snaps into place. 5. Re-install the casing cover. CAUTION Insert the module well into the socket so that it cannot fall out or become damaged. The electrostatic components on the PCBS are highly sensitive to electrostatic discharge. It is therefore vital to take precautionary measures when handling these components. Refer to the directives for handling components that are sensitive to electrostatic charge. Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 447 PCU 50.3 19.9 Accessories The installed memory module is detected automatically by the PCU. When the device is switched on, the division into "Base-Memory" and "Extended-Memory" is shown. Removal of memory module 1. Disconnect the device from main power and unplug all cables. 2. Loosen the casing cover screws (see Figure: "Plan view of PCU 50.3" in section: "Description") and take off the casing cover. 3. Loosen locks on left and right sides of memory module (see Fig.). 4. Pull the memory module out of the slot. Figure 19-32 Unplug locks 448 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 PCU 50.3 19.9 Accessories 19.9.2.2 PCI cards The PCU 50.3 is designed for use with modules conforming to PCI specifications V 2.2. It has two PCI slots (1) for expansion modules. Figure 19-33 Expansion slots (1) PCI slots for expansion modules (2) Bus board (3) Rear guide rail (4) Retaining screw for module bracket (5) Module retainer (6) Retaining screws for slot cover plates and/or external module connections (7) Cover plates for slots PCI modules with 5 V and 3.3 V supply voltage can be used. PP PP The dimensions of the boards must not exceed the specified dimensions. Otherwise, contact problems, malfunctions and installation difficulty cannot be ruled out. Figure 19-34 Typical PCI module (with a length between 170 - 175 mm) Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 449 PCU 50.3 19.9 Accessories PP PP PP Figure 19-35 Maximum size of PCI module (only possible on slot 1) Installing PCI expansion modules NOTICE When installing PCI modules, ensure that you do not touch or smudge the golden plug connections of the module. This protects the module from malfunctioning. Figure 19-36 Installation of an expansion module (1) Retaining screw for module bracket (2) Module retainer (3) Slider (4) PCI module (in slot 1 with short shape) (5) Retaining screw for the slot-steel sheet cover 1. Separate the PCU 50.3 from the main power by disconnecting the main power connector. 2. Loosen the casing cover screws (see Figure: "Plan view of PCU 50.3" in section: "Description") and take off the casing cover. 450 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 PCU 50.3 19.9 Accessories 3. Remove the fastening screw of the module bracket (2) and remove the bracket (3). 4. Undo the retaining screws of the slot cover plate (6) for the corresponding upper or lower slot and remove the slot plate. 5. Carefully insert the PCI module (4); firm seat should be ensured. When using long PCI modules, be aware of the rear guide rail. 6. Install the module bracket (2). 7. Lock the PCI module (4) by inserting a slider (in the separate package) through guide slot until it securely holds the edge of the module in its groove. CAUTION No pressure should be applied to the module. Therefore, do not apply excessive force to the slider when you push it onto the module. 8. Use a diagonal cutter to cut off the excess part of the slider (3). 9. Mount the casing cover. For half-height PCI modules, the following points do not apply: 7. and 8. Note If you use the modules with a battery connection, connect the connecting cable to the battery before you install the housing cover (point 9) (see Section: "Installing battery cable") PCI Multi I/O module If you use the PCI module Multi I/O (order no.: 6ES7648-2CA00-0AA0), install the driver from the accompanying driver CD per the instructions. To ensure the module works properly, it is necessary to make a change in the BIOS setup. Make settings in the menu: Advanced I/O Device Configuration Internal COM 1: Disabled Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 451 PCU 50.3 19.9 Accessories Installing battery cable - only for MC-specific PCI modules Figure 19-37 Installing the battery cable for PCI modules (1) Plug for connecting device fan (2) Plug for connecting backup battery (3) Connector plug for connecting the PCI module to the battery Connect the PCI module via the cable (3) to the battery connection (see figure) 19.9.2.3 CompactFlash card The PCU 50.3 has a slot for CompactFlash cards (types I/II). We recommend using CF cards for industrial applications (e.g. industrial grade types produced by SANDISK) because they offer special data security, service life and data transfer speeds. NOTICE The slot for the CF card is not capable of acting as a hot-plug. You should therefore fit the CompactFlash card before you switch on the PCU and only remove the card once you have switched the PCU off. 452 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 PCU 50.3 19.9 Accessories Installing the CF card 1. Separate the PCU from the power supply by disconnecting the main power connector. 2. Loosen the fastening screw (4) for the cover plate (3) of the card slot. 3. Fold up the cover plate (3) and slide it towards the DVI-I interface (2). Lift the cover plate slightly until it unlatches on the left side. Then slide it back until it unlatches on the right side. 4. Carefully slide the CF card straight into the card slot until it snaps in. 5. Close the card slot by inserting the cover plate and lock it on the left and right. Figure 19-38 Installing CF card (1) Cover plates for PCI slots (2) DVI-I interface (3) Cover plate for PC card slot (4) Retaining screw for cover plate Note The slot for the CompactFlash card is coded to prevent incorrect plugging of the card. If the CF card is incorrectly plugged, it protrudes out of the housing approx. 1 cm and remains functionless. Removing the CF card 1. Open card slot as described under "Installing the CF card" (point 1-3). 2. Press the eject button on the right-hand side of the module slot (e.g. with narrow end of the cover plate - see Fig.). 3. Remove the CF card. 4. Close the card slot. Figure 19-39 Press the eject button Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 453 PCU 50.3 19.9 Accessories 454 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 20 PCU 70 20.1 Description Note The component PCU 70 is based on the PCU 50. For this reason, reference is frequently made to the PCU 50 in the following technical description. The main difference is the increased number of PCI slots and the resulting increase in the overall depth of the device. The SINUMERIK component PCU 70 can be installed in two different ways: Centrally (on the rear panel of a SINUMERIK operator panel front: see relevant operator panel front chapter) distributed (in a switch cabinet; see Section: "Distributed configuration") Validity The description applies to the following devices: Processor Operating system RAM Screen resolution max. Order No.: Pentium III, 500 MHz NT 4.0 126 MB 1024 x 768 pixels (XGA) 6FC5210-0DF04-0AA0 Celeron 1.2 GHz NT 4.0 256 MB 1600 x 1200 pixels 6FC5210-0DF24-0AA0 Celeron 1.2 GHz XP 256 MB 1600 x 1200 pixels 6FC5210-0DF24-2AA0 Features Robust and easy-to-service design (continuous operation, high noise immunity) Compact construction for space-saving installation User memory (RAM), max. 512 MB Hard disk, min. 10.4 GB (interchangeable) Power supply: 24 VDC Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 455 PCU 70 20.1 Description Interfaces: - Parallel interface LPT1 / 2 serial interfaces V.24 - PS/2 keyboard interface /PS/2 mouse interface - MPI/DP (max. 12 Mbaud) - VGA interface for additional monitor - Ethernet connection 10/100 Mbaud - 4 slots: 3 x PCI and 1 x shared PCI/ISA - PC card slot - USB interface (for Windows NT: for standard PC keyboard and mouse) - for PCU (1.2 GHz): Two USB interfaces - 2 interfaces to the operator panel front or videolink transmitter: LVDS interface/IO interface View Figure 20-1 456 (1) Left (2) top (3) Right Perspective view of PCU 70 (1.2 GHz version) Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 :LGWK +RXVLQJFRYHUVFUHZV 6FUHZV +DUGGLVNED\ +DQGOH 6KLSSLQJORFN +DUGGLVNED\ +HLJKW 6UHZVIRUSRZHUVXSSO\FRYHU ,QWHUIDFHV ,QWHUIDFHIRUH[WHUQDOIORSS\GLVNGULYH PCU 70 20.1 Description 5DWLQJSODWHIRUSRZHUVXSSO\ 'HSWK PP ZLWKRXWVFUHZVSURWUXGLQJ Figure 20-2 Top view of PCU 70 (1.2 GHz version) Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 457 PCU 70 20.2 Interfaces 20.2 Interfaces 20.2.1 Right-hand casing side &RYHUSODWHVIRU3&,VORWFRQQHFWLRQV 9SRZHUVXSSO\ 6ORW VODYH 36PRXVH 'HSWK 6ORW VODYH 2Q3&8 0+] RQO\ RQH86%LQWHUIDFH 6ORW PDVWHUVODYH Figure 20-3 6ORW PDVWHUVODYH /37 36NH\ERDUG &RYHUSODWHIRUFRQQHFWLRQ 03,'3 &20 3&,,6$VORW VHULDO 9*$ PRXVH 86% (WKHUQHW &RYHUSODWHIRU3&&DUGVORW &20 Side view of PCU 70 (1.2 GHz) from right with interfaces Connection Function LPT1/Printer Parallel interface (e.g. printer), 25-pole sub D socket connector COM1/RS-232 Serial interface 1 (V24), 25-pole sub D socket connector COM2 Serial interface 2 (RS-232), 9-pole male Sub-D connector Keyboard PS/2 trackball to keyboard connection Mouse USB PS/2 mouse connector PCU (500 MHz) an ext. USB port (can be used only for standard PC keyboard or mouse) PCU (1.2 GHz) Two external USB connections MPI/DP (RS-485) Multi-Point Interface/Profibus DP connection; connection of an S7 automation unit, 9-pole sub D socket connector VGA VGA interface for external monitor, 15-pole sub D connector Ethernet Connection for local area network (LAN) PC card slot Slot for ATA flash card/memory card or 100/200 Type I/II flash card PCI slot 3 slots for expansion modules1) PCI/ISA slot Slot for expansion board 1) Power supply 24 V DC 1)If expansion modules are plugged in, the cover plates (diagram above) are replaced by the front plates of the respective module. See description of the relevant board. Note The MCI board of the SINUMERIK 840Di should be fitted in Slot 1 only. 458 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 PCU 70 20.2 Interfaces 20.2.2 Left-hand casing side Figure 20-4 Side view of PCU 70 from left (1.2 GHz) (1) Connection for external floppy disk drive (34-pin plug connector) (2) Reset pushbutton (3) Device fan An external floppy disk drive can be connected via the connection (1) shown in the figure (see Section: "Accessories" "External floppy disk drive"). Note Pressing the Reset button will cause a hardware reset. The PC performs a restart (cold start). 20.2.3 Casing rear side The two interfaces for connecting an operator panel front or, in a distributed configuration, a videolink transmitter are behind a rectangular cutout in the rear side of the casing: the IO interface for connecting the IO cable and LVDS interface for connecting a TFT display. Procedure for mounting, see Section: "Mounting". 20.2.4 Pin assignment of the interfaces For the pin assignments of the individual interfaces, refer to Chapter: "Connection Conditions", section: "Secondary electrical conditions". Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 459 PCU 70 20.3 Mounting 20.3 Mounting Mounting A special set of mounting brackets is required for each mounting method. These are not supplied with the PCU 70 and must be ordered separately (see Section: "Accessories"). Two methods can be used to mount the PCU 70: 1. Central installation when PCU is mounted on the operator panel front. Mounting instructions, see corresponding Section of the operator panel front, Section: "Mounting" 2. Flat installation for distributed configuration of PCU + videolink transmitter. In this case, the PCU can be installed at a distance of up to 20 m from the operator panel front, (e.g. in a control cabinet). Mounting instructions, see Chapter: "Distributed configuration", Section: "Mounting PCU with videolink transmitter". NOTICE When attaching the mounting brackets, make sure that they are positioned correctly (the brackets are not symmetrical). The hinged catches must point towards the fan end. Notes on installation Please note the following during installation: As far as possible, extreme environmental conditions should be avoided. Protect the PCU against severe vibration / shocks, dust, humidity, direct sunlight and heat. An external fire protection casing is required. Install the device in such a way that no danger (e.g. by falling down) may result. Ventilation clearances: - Fan side: 100 mm - Remaining sides: 10 mm Do not cover the vent slots. 'HYLFHIDQ 'HYLFHIDQ 'HYLFHIDQ ,QWHUIDFHV +DUGGLVN ,QWHUIDFHV ,QWHUIDFHV +DUG GLVN +DUG GLVN ,PSHUPLVVLEOHPRXQWLQJSRVLWLRQ Figure 20-5 Preferred mounting positions of PCU 70 Inclined position: Deviations of 5 in comparison to the installation positions shown in the figure are permitted. 460 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 PCU 70 20.4 Connectors 20.4 Connectors 20.4.1 Ground terminal The ground terminal (1) of the PCU 70 is on the underside of the casing. Figure 20-6 20.4.2 Bottom side of PCU 70 (1.2 GHz) with ground connection I/O devices CAUTION In a distributed configuration, the display type must be set on the videolink transmitter before the system is first switched on as it is not automatically detected (see Section "Distributed configuration", Section: "Control and display elements") If the setting is incorrect, the display could sustain damage within a few seconds. Before you connect the PCU to a power supply, you must release the hard disk and connect the I/O devices (operator panel front, keyboard, mouse, ...) . Procedure 1. Insert the connecting cables for the I/O devices into the corresponding sockets on the interface side of the PCU 70 (see Section: "Interfaces" "Right side of housing"). 2. Once the peripherals have been connected, the device is ready. Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 461 PCU 70 20.4 Connectors Information about how to adjust and set your interface and the required connecting lead can be found in the Operator Guide that goes with the peripheral. Note When connecting I/O devices, please make sure that the components are designed for use in industry. CAUTION When plugging in / unplugging I/O connections (keyboard, mouse, printer, etc.), make sure that the I/O devices and the PCU are disconnected from the power supply. Otherwise, they can become damaged. This does not apply to USB connections. 20.4.3 Power Supply The PCU 50 is supplied with 24 V direct voltage. CAUTION The device should only be connected to a 24V DC power supply which satisfies the requirements of safe extra low voltage (SELV). The cable cross-section must be large enough to ensure that no damage can be caused by the cables if there is a short-circuit at the PCU. Switching on and switching off A main power switch is not provided which means that the device must be switched on and off at the external power supply. 462 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 PCU 70 20.5 Commissioning 20.5 Commissioning Information on the power-up, read-out or changing of BIOS settings, the boot manager and the use of PC cards can be found in Section: "PCU 50", section: "Commissioning". Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 463 PCU 70 20.6 Technical specifications 20.6 Technical specifications Security Safety class III; PELV acc. to EN 50178 Degree of protection per EN 60529 IP20 Approvals CE, cULus Electrical specifications Input voltage DC 24 V Max. power consumption PCI / ISA slot Total 2A 3A 5V 12 V 0.3 A 0.6 A -12 V 0.1 A 0.15 A Power consumption Typ. 40 W Max. 140 W Power outage overriding time 20 ms Mechanical data Dimensions (mm) Width: 297 Height: 267 Weight Depth: 122 Approx. 6.5 kg Mechanical ambient conditions (with OP 012) Operation Transport (in transport packaging) Vibratory load 10 -58 Hz: 0.075 mm 58 -200 Hz: 9.8 m/s2 3M4 per EN 60721-3-3 5 -9 Hz: 3.5 mm 9 -200 Hz: 9.8 m/s2 2M2 per EN 60721-3-2 Shock stressing 50 m/s2, 30 ms, 18 shocks 3M2 per EN 60721-3-3 300 m/s2, 6 ms, 18 shocks 2M2 to EN 60721-3-2 Noise < 55 dB(A) to DIN 45635 Climatic ambient conditions Cooling Open circuit ventilation Condensation, spraying water and icing Not permitted Supply air Applicable standards Climate class Temperature limits Temperature change Limits for relative humidity Permissible change in the relative air humidity 1)max. 464 Without caustic gases, dusts and oils Operation Storage/shipping (in transport packaging) EN 60721-3-3 EN 60721-3-1 / -3-2 3K5 1K3 / 2K4 15 W 5 ... 55 C 20 W 1) 5 ... 50 C 30 W 1) 5 ... 45 C -20 ... 60C Max. 10 K/h Max. 18 K/h 10 ... 80% 5 ... 95% 1) max. 0.1 % /min output expansions (PCI/ISA slots, PC card, USB interface Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 PCU 70 20.7 Replacement parts 20.7 Replacement parts Overview Component Order No.: Hard disk with mounting plate and damper 6FC5247-0AF08-0AA1 Device fan A5E00019079 Backup battery 3.6 V W79084-E1003-B1 24 V DC power supply 500 MHz (85 W) A5E00117073 1.2 GHz (105 W) A5E00188815 replacement Description of spare parts replacement (see Chapter: "PCU", Section: "Spare parts" "Replacement". Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 465 PCU 70 20.8 Accessories 20.8 Accessories 20.8.1 Overview The following accessories are available for the PCU 70: Component Order No.: 3.5" floppy disk drive, external 6FC5 235-0AA05-0AA1 3.5" floppy disk drive, USB Memory expansion (SDRAM PC 100) 3) 6FC5 235-0AA05-1AA1 PCU 70 (500 MHz) PCU 70 (1.2 GHz) 128 MB 6ES7791-0KS00-0XA0 6ES7648-2AC10-0CA0 256 MB 6ES7791-0KT00-0XA0 6ES7648-2AC20-0CA0 Expansion modules Mounting bracket (according to AT/PCI specification) Standard 1) 6FC5248-0AF20-2AA0 Flat 2) 6FC5248-0AF20-0AA0 1) for PCU + operator panel front assembly 2) for distributed installation of PCU + videolink transmitter 3) see figures in Chapter: "PCU 50", section: "Spare parts" "Replacement" "Battery" 20.8.2 Description of components 20.8.2.1 External floppy disk drive The figure shows the external floppy disk drive, which can be plugged in at the drive connection on the left side of the housing (see Section: "Interfaces"). Information on this can be found in Chapter: "3.5" Floppy Disk Drive". Figure 20-7 466 External floppy disk drive Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 PCU 70 20.8 Accessories 20.8.2.2 Memory expansion There are two slots on the motherboard (see figures in Chapter: "PCU 50", Section: "Spare parts" "Replacement" "Battery") available for 144-pin SO-DIMM memory modules. You can use these modules to expand the user memory of the PCU by up to 512 MB. Standard memory The basic configuration is a 128/256 MB SDRAM module. Memory (MB) 128 MB module 256 MB module 128 1 - 256 2 - 256 - 1 384 1 1 512 - 2 You can find information on the assembly and system start-up in Chapter: "PCU 50", section: "Accessories" "Description of the Components" "Memory Expansion". 20.8.2.3 Expansion boards You can find information on the expansion modules and mounting in Chapter: "PCU 50", section: "Accessories" "Description of the Components" "Expansion modules". Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 467 PCU 70 20.8 Accessories 468 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 21 Videolink (VL) 21.1 Description 21.1.1 Validity With "Distributed Installation with Videolink" in SINUMERIK, up to three identical operator panel fronts can be operated at a distance of up to 20 m from the PCU. This spatial flexibility allows you to install the PCU at less hazardous locations of the system (e.g. control cabinet). The following description applies to the following components: Description Characteristics Order No.: Videolink receiver Videolink transmitter Mounting bracket for videolink receiver ...-0AA0 1 : 1 1) 1:2 behind the operator panel front (identical to that for PCU) Flat for PCU 50/70 6FC5247-0AF22-... 6FC5248-0AF20-... ...-0AA0 ...-1AA0 ...-3AA0 10 m 6FX2002-1VL01-... ...-1BA0 2) 15 m 6FX2002-1VL00-... ...-1BF0 2) 20 m 6FX2002-1VL00-... ...-1CA0 2) 1) see "View" in this Section 2) ...-1XX0 is the length code: A = 0, B = 1, etc. Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 ...-2AA0 ...-2AA0 Mounting bracket for Upright for PCU 50 the videolink transmitter Central for PCU 50 Videolink cable ...-1AA0 469 Videolink (VL) 21.1 Description 21.1.2 Overview Features Used in - Slimline operator consoles with any orientation - Closed fan-free operator consoles Rugged thanks to separate installation of the PCU in protected areas (e.g. control cabinet) Simple implementation of a second/third operator panel front with digital screen quality Additional USB ports for service and I/O devices (keyboard, mouse, etc.) Extensive use of software-neutral technology for all operating systems Communication Figure 21-1 470 View of distributed installation with videolink: Example with two OP 012 operator panel fronts (1) Videolink transmitter 1 : 2 (2) PCU 50 (3) Videolink cable ( 20 m) Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Videolink (VL) 21.1 Description The figure shows the components for the distributed configuration with videolink: The PCU communicates with two operating panel fronts (here OP 012) via the videolink transmitters 1:2 mounted on the PCU two Videolink cables Two videolink receivers (not visible in the figure, because it is mounted behind the operator panel fronts, see Section: "Components" and Section: "Mounting" "Videolink receiver on operator panel front") Combinations Table 21-1 Possible combinations of the various transmitter and receiver types Transmitt er 6FC5247-0AF20- 0AA0 6FC5247-0AF21- 0AA0 6FC5247-0AF22- 1AA0 6FC5247-0AF22- 2AA0 Receiver 6FC5247-0AF20- 1AA0 + + - - 6FC5247-0AF21- 1AA0 + + - - 6FC5247-0AF22- 0AA0 - - + + Table 21-2 Maximum permitted number of operator panel fronts which can be combined with a PCU in a distributed installation with videolink Number OP 010 as of .._0AA1 OP010S OP010C OP 012 TP 012 OP 015 OP015A 15" OPs 416 mm TP015A PCU 50 3 2 3 3 3 3 3 2 3 PCU 70 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 21.1.3 Configurations The maximum cable length for the videolinks is 20 m. CAUTION All of the displays used in a system must have the same resolution since they can be damaged within a few seconds if they are incorrectly set. That is why the "Caution" note in Section: "Control and monitoring elements" "Videolink transmitter" must be observed! Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 471 Videolink (VL) 21.1 Description Configuration with up to two operator panel fronts );9/[[ 9LGHROLQNWUDQVPLWWHU 9LGHROLQNUHFHLYHU 3&8 2SHUDWRUSDQHO IURQW [86% 86% 86% 86% 0RXQWLQJEUDFNHW )&$)$$RU )&$)$$UHTXLUHG );9/[[ 9LGHROLQNUHFHLYHU 9LGHROLQNWUDQVPLWWHU 3&8 2SHUDWRUSDQHO IURQW [86% 86% );9/[[ 9LGHROLQNUHFHLYHU 86% 86% 0RXQWLQJEUDFNHW )&$)$$RU )&$)$$UHTXLUHG 2SHUDWRUSDQHO IURQW [86% 3&8 3&8 0RXQWLQJEUDFNHW IODW )&$)$$ Figure 21-2 9LGHROLQN 6HQGLQJVWDWLRQV 86% 9LGHROLQNWUDQVPLWWHU 0RXQWLQJEUDFNHW )&$)$$ UHTXLUHG 0RXQWLQJEUDFNHW XSULJKW )&$)$$ Distributed installation with videolink configuration with up to two operator panel fronts In the figure on the top left and center, the PCU and videolink transmitter components are combined to form a unit. They can be mounted physically separated from the operator panel front, i.e. in a distributed installation (e.g. in a control cabinet). The two installation options shown bottom left can be used: the "flat mounting" and "upright mounting". 472 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Videolink (VL) 21.1 Description A third installation option (not shown here), "central mounting", is identical to "flat mounting", except an additional operator panel front is directly mounted behind the videolink transmitter (see figure in Section: "Configuration with up to 3 operator panel fronts"). The mounting kits must be ordered separately. The associated operator panel front and videolink receiver components which are combined to form a unit are shown on the right. They can be mounted in an operator console. Configuration with up to 3 operator panel fronts 3&8 86% 9LGHROLQNWUDQVPLWWHU );9/[[ 2SHUDWRUSDQHO IURQW 9LGHROLQNUHFHLYHU 2SHUDWRUSDQHO IURQW 86% 86% [86% 86% 0RXQWLQJEUDFNHW )&$)$$UHTXLUHG 3&8 86% 9LGHROLQNWUDQVPLWWHU );9/[[ 2SHUDWRUSDQHO IURQW 2SHUDWRUSDQHO IURQW 86% 86% 0RXQWLQJEUDFNHW )&$)$$ UHTXLUHG [86% 86% );9/[[ [86% 86% Figure 21-3 9LGHROLQNUHFHLYHU 9LGHROLQNUHFHLYHU 2SHUDWRUSDQHO IURQW 0RXQWLQJEUDFNHW )&$)$$ UHTXLUHG Configuration with up to three operator panel fronts on one PCU The figure shows another possible application of the distributed configuration with videolink: The PCU with the Videolink transmitter is mounted behind an additional (central) operator panel front (not intended for OP 010S). This allows up to three operator panel fronts to be operated at a PCU at the same time. Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 473 Videolink (VL) 21.1 Description NOTICE If a central operator panel front is used, it is important to ensure that DIP switch S2 of the videolink transmitter is set to the correct position (see Section: "Operating and monitoring elements" "Videolink transmitter"! 21.1.4 Components 21.1.4.1 Overview SINUMERIK "distributed installation with videolink" comprises a selection of components based on the building block principle - suitable for a wide variety of operator panel fronts: Videolink transmitter for mounting on a PCU 50/70 - 1:1 (with one output) or - 1:2 (with two outputs) Videolink receiver for mounting on a TFT operator panel front (OP 010 S/C, OP 012, OP 015, OP 015 A, TP 012 or TP 015A) Note OP 010 is not supported (owing to STN color display) Videolink cable in standard lengths 5 m, 10 m, 20 m and 25 m Application-specific fixing sets such as - flat mounting bracket for PCU with videolink transmitter in control cabinet - upright mounting bracket for PCU with videolink transmitter in control cabinet - central mounting bracket for PCU with videolink transmitter behind operator panel front (not with OP 010S) - standard mounting bracket for mounting the receiver on the operator panel front (not required for OP 010S). 474 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Videolink (VL) 21.1 Description 21.1.4.2 Videolink receiver Configuration Videolink receiver for mounting to OP 010C, OP 012, OP 015, OP 015A, TP 012 or TP 015A (1) Videolink cable (2) 2x USB-A (3) Videolink receiver (4) Hinged catches (covered) to help attach videolink receiver to operator panel front (see Section ) "Mounting" "Videolink receiver on operator panel front" (5) Standard mounting bracket (not needed for OP 012S) (6) Supporting plate (7) Power Supply (8) Keyboard interface (9) Cable ties (see Section: "Mounting" videolink receiver on operator panel front") Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 475 Videolink (VL) 21.1 Description Description The figure shows the position of the receiver interfaces: Inputs: - 1 x videolink for 1, ..., 20m (video data plus USB signals) - 1 x 24 V DC power supply Outputs: - 2x USB-A - 1 x keyboard interface (for USB keyboard) - 1 x LVDS interface (not visible in the figure) - 1 x IO/USB interface (not visible in the figure) - 21.1.4.3 Videolink transmitter Configuration The figure shows a videolink transmitter (mounted on the PCU with the aid of the "flat" mounting bracket, see Section: "Mounting" "Videolink transmitter on PCU" "Flat mounting"). Figure 21-4 476 PCU with videolink transmitter (1:2 variant) and flat mounting bracket (1) Mounting bracket (flat) (2) Cover plate for covering the opening used to connect a central operator panel front (3) Videolink transmitter (4) PCU 50 (5) USB-A (6) Connections for videolink cables (7) USB-A (8) Display coding switch S1 (you must observe Section: "Control and monitoring elements" "Videolink transmitter"!) Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Videolink (VL) 21.1 Description Description The videolink transmitter is mounted on the underside of the PCU between the mounting brackets. It does not require a separate power supply because it is supplied via the interfaces to the PCU. The videolink transmitter is available in two versions: 1. Videolink transmitter 1 : 1 * Inputs (not visible in figure): - 1 x LVDS interface - 1 x IO/USB interface * Outputs: - 1 x videolink for 1, ..., 20m (video data plus USB signals) -1 x USB A - 1 x LVDS interface (for connecting a centr. operator panel front) - 1 x IO/USB interface (for connecting a centr. operator panel front) 2. Videolink transmitter 1 : 2 * Inputs: same as 1. * Outputs: - 2 x videolink for 1, ..., 20m (video data plus USB signals) -2 x USB A - 1 x LVDS interface (for connecting a centr. operator panel front) - 1 x IO/USB interface (for connecting a centr. operator panel front) 21.1.4.4 Cable The videolink cable comes in three standard lengths: 10 m: Order No. 6FX2002-1VL01-1BA0 15 m: Order no. 6FX2002-1VL00-1BF0 20 m: Order no. 6FX2002-1VL00-1CA0 Other lengths require special preparation and have longer delivery times. Figure 21-5 Videolink cable The housing can be removed on angular connectors. This reduces the outer dimensions and allows the connector to be introduced into conduits with 35 mm diameter or greater. The minimum diameter for permanently mounted connectors is 42 mm. Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 477 Videolink (VL) 21.1 Description Note These high-quality cables should not be shortened or lengthened. For technical reasons, the length is limited to max. of 20 m. 478 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Videolink (VL) 21.2 Control and monitoring elements 21.2 Control and monitoring elements 21.2.1 Videolink transmitter Display coding switch S1 The display coding switch S1 is a rotary switch for selecting the display type. Position 0: Display switched off (delivered status) Position 8: 12" TFT SVGA 800 x 600 pixels Position 9: 15" TFT XGA 1024 x 768 pixels Position B: 10" TFT VGA 640 x 480 pixels 9LGHROLQN 6HQGLQJVWDWLRQ 86% ,QWHUIDFH ,OOXVWUDWLRQQRWWRVFDOH Figure 21-6 Display coding switch S1 for setting the display type The values 1, 3, ..., F are displayed as dashes due to lack of space. Note On delivery, S1 is set to "0". Before starting operation, S1 must be set to the display type being used as described in the list above. The selected switch setting only becomes effective when the PCU is switched on (again). All displays used in a system must have the same resolution. CAUTION If the setting is incorrect, the displays could be damaged within a few seconds. Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 479 Videolink (VL) 21.2 Control and monitoring elements DIP switch S2 With the 1:2 configuration, the USB signal must be switched to the selected interfaces (X106 or X108) using S2. The default setting is activation of the internal interface X108. Interface X106 can only be used for flat and upright mounting. Table 21-3 Function of selector S2 1/1 USB signal X108 (X106 without function, central operator panel front active) 2/2 (default) Figure 21-7 ; Switch setting ; Function USB signal X106 (X108 without function, 2nd USB port active) DIP switch S2 for control of the USB signal The default setting of S2 = 2/2 (central operator panel front) is recommended. NOTICE For connecting a central operator panel front (see Section: "Description" "Configurations" to X107/108, the DIP switch S2 must be set to the position "X108" (2/2), otherwise the keyboard, mouse and USB plug of the panel do not function. The second USB interface X106 cannot be used in this case. 21.2.2 Videolink receiver Temperature monitor A temperature monitor is integrated in the receiver module. If the threshold 75 5 C is exceeded, the "TEMP" LED on the operator panel front illuminates. The LED extinguishes again when the 69 5 C threshold is undershot. 480 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Videolink (VL) 21.2 Control and monitoring elements 21.2.3 Operator panel interlock The purpose of the operator panel interlock is to prevent operator inputs being made at different panels simultaneously. The screen display must remain active and is not affected by the interlock. Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 481 Videolink (VL) 21.3 Interfaces 21.3 Interfaces 21.3.1 Overview Interfaces Type Function - Videolink (incl. USB) Videolink transmitter 1:1 Videolink transmitter 1:2 Videolink receiver Designation Input/Out put Type X101 A Socket connector, 36pin USB interface X102 A USB-A - LVDS interface X103 E Plug connector, 2 x 10pin I/O interface for operator panel from the PC X104 I/O Plug connector, 2 x 13pin - LVDS interface to the central operator panel front X107 A Plug connector, 2 x 10pin - I/O interface for central operator panel front X108 I/O Plug connector, 2 x 13pin X105 A Socket connector, 36pin such as videolink transmitter 1:1; additional - second Videolink (incl. USB) USB interface X106 A USB-A - Videolink (incl. USB) X201 E Socket connector, 36pin USB interface X203/204 A 2x USB-A - Keyboard interface X205 A Plug connector, 2 x 5pin - Power supply X206 E Terminal block, 3-pin - I/O interface for operator panel X207 I/O Plug connector, 2 x 13pin - LVDS interface X208 A Plug connector, 2 x 10pin 5m cable - Videolink transmitter <=> Videolink receiver - Videolink transmitter <=> PCU 482 Videolink I/O 10 m 20 m 25 m LVDS I/O I/O Flat ribbon, 20-pin Flat ribbon, 26-pin Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Videolink (VL) 21.3 Interfaces 21.3.2 Interface pin assignment for videolink transmitter Signal types The abbreviations in the "Signal type" column in the tables below have the following meanings: I Input O Output B Bi-directional V Power supply OC Open Collector X102/X106 (USB) Interface is configured as high-current USB (500 mA) Connector designation: X102 / X106; USB socket, 4-pin, type A Max. cable length 5 m Max. number of hubs: 3 Note It is advisable to use only "self-powered" hubs (i.e. hubs with their own power supply). For transmitter 1:2 , X106 is disconnected via switch S2 (see Section: "Operating and monitoring elements." 21.3.3 Interface assignment for videolink receiver X203/X204 (USB) Both interfaces are designed as high-current USB (500 mA). Connector designation: X203/X204; USB socket,2 x 4-pin, type A Max. cable length Mouse, printer, keyboard: 5 m If hub used: 3.5 m *) __________________________________________________________________________________ __ *) length incl. the supply cable to hub and connected terminal; a max. of 1 hub is allowed. It should be noted that some keyboards already have a hub. Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 483 Videolink (VL) 21.3 Interfaces X205 (USB keyboard interface) Interface is configured as high-current USB (500 mA) Connector designation: X205; plug connector, 2 x 5-pin Max. cable length 0.5 m Table 21-4 Pin assignment of connector X205 (USB keyboard interface) Pin Signal name Signal type Meaning 1 P5V_fused VO + 5 V (fused) for external USB interface 2 USB_DM 3 USB_DP B USB data + 4,5 GND V Ground 6, ..., 10 N.C. --- Unassigned USB data - X206 (power supply) Connector designation: X206; terminal block, 3-pin Table 21-5 21.3.4 Pin assignment of connector X206 (videolink receiver) Pin Signal name Signal type Meaning 1 24 VDC VI DC 24 V 2 GND V Ground for 24 V DC 3 PI --- Protective earth Pin assignment of the interfaces For the pin assignments of the individual interfaces, refer to section: "Connection Conditions", section: "Secondary electrical conditions". 484 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Videolink (VL) 21.4 Mounting 21.4 Mounting 21.4.1 Videolink transmitter to PCU 21.4.1.1 Flat mounting Note The tightening torques for all screws are: M3: 0.8 Nm / M4: 1.8 Nm We recommend the following mounting directions for optimum heat dissipation: * "Device fan upwards" * "Device fan to left" (not possible with "upright" mounting) You will find the reference diagrams for the individual mounting stages at the end of the description of the procedure. Procedure 1. Check the DIP switch S2 (if available). With "flat" mounting, it must be set to 1/1 (X 106) (see Section: "Control and monitoring elements" "Videolink transmitter"! 2. Select display coding switch S1 according to the display type used (to prevent damage when setting S1, you must note the variants under Section: "Control and monitoring elements" "Videolink transmitter"! 3. First, install the mounting bracket on the PCU (B). 4. Hook the videolink transmitter into this mounting bracket (D). 5. Mount the second mounting bracket after attaching it to the opposite hinge bolt (A) of the video link transmitter. 6. Plug the connecting cable into the sockets on the PCU (C). 7. Swivel the videolink transmitter into place on the PCU (D) . 8. Slide the videolink transmitter along the angular hinge bearing (to left in Fig. D, see arrow) and push it into the position shown in the illustration(E). 9. Secure the videolink transmitter to the mounting brackets with the screws supplied (F). The videolink transmitter is now firmly secured to the PCU mounting brackets (F) / (G) and can be correctly mounted with the PCU. Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 485 Videolink (VL) 21.4 Mounting CAUTION If it is necessary to dismantle the videolink transmitter, please release the fastening screws and slide the video transmitter horizontally before swiveling it away from the PCU, in accordance with step 8 of the instruction and figure (D). Otherwise, damage is likely. Reference diagrams (A) Figure 21-8 486 Videolink transmitter 1:2 with connecting cables (1) IO/USB cable K1 (to the PCU) (2) Display cable K2 (to the PCU) (3) Hinge bolts (4) Threaded holes for fastening screws (5) Display coding switch S1 (rotary switch) (6) USB port X106 (7) DIP switch S2 (8) USB port X102 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Videolink (VL) 21.4 Mounting (B) Figure 21-9 PCU with flat mounting brackets (1) Connection for central operating panel front (2) PCU 50 (3) Mounting bracket (flat) (C) 3&8 Figure 21-10 Videolink transmitter hooked into place with the hinge bolts (1) Videolink transmitter (2) Display cable K2 (3) I/O / USB cable K1 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 487 Videolink (VL) 21.4 Mounting (D) 3&8 Figure 21-11 Hinge of the videolink transmitter prior to alignment on the PCU (1) Mounting bracket (flat) (2) Hinge bearing (3) Videolink transmitter (4) Hinge bolts (E) 3&8 Figure 21-12 Videolink transmitter, aligned and screwed tight 488 (1) Mounting screw (2) Videolink transmitter (3) Hinge bolts Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Videolink (VL) 21.4 Mounting (F) Figure 21-13 PCU/transmitter unit assembled for "flat" mounting (1) Videolink transmitter (2) Cover plate over connection for central operator panel front (3) PCU 50 (G) 3&8 3&8 5HWDLQLQJVFUHZV IRUWKHYLGHROLQNWUDQVPLWWHU 0RXQWLQJEUDFNHW IODW 0RXQWLQJ VORWVIRU 0VFUHZV 9LGHROLQN 6HQGLQJVWDWLRQV 3&8 'HYLFHIDQ 'LPHQVLRQVLQPP Figure 21-14 Joining of PCU 50 and videolink transmitter using the flat mounting brackets Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 489 Videolink (VL) 21.4 Mounting Installation of PCU/transmitter unit For flat installation, the PCU Videolink transmitter mounting unit is installed flat on the control cabinet wall (see figure "Configuring the distributed configuration with videolink with up to two operator panel fronts", Section: "Description" "Configurations"). Features: Hard disk easily accessible Space required in control cabinet relatively high 21.4.1.2 Upright mounting Procedure 1. Set DIP switch S2 (if present) to 1/1 (X106; see Section: "Control and monitoring elements" "Videolink transmitter". 2. Disconnect the two cables from the transmitter. 3. Insert the free ends of the ribbon cables in the sockets of the PCU first (see Fig. C "flat mounting"). 4. Reconnect the two cable ends to the transmitter. 5. Screw the PCU and videolink transmitter together using the "upright" mounting bracket (see Fig. below). 6. Set the S1 display coding switch to the display type being used. CAUTION To prevent damage when setting S1, it is essential to observe Section: "Control and monitoring elements" "Videolink transmitter"! 490 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 9LGHROLQNWUDQVPLWWHU 3&8 'HYLFHIDQ 3&8 8SULJKWPRXQWLQJEUDFNHW 3&8 8SULJKWPRXQWLQJEUDFNHWIRUMRLQLQJWKH3&8DQGYLGHROLQNWUDQVPLWWHU WRJHWKHU 8SULJKWPRXQWLQJEUDFNHWIRUMRLQLQJWKH3&8DQGYLGHROLQNWUDQVPLWWHU WRJHWKHUDVZHOODVPRXQWLQJWRLQVWDOODWLRQZDOO Videolink (VL) 21.4 Mounting 0RXQWLQJ VORWVIRU 00VFUHZV 'LPHQVLRQVLQPP Figure 21-15 Joining of PCU 50 and videolink transmitter using the upright mounting brackets Installation of PCU/transmitter unit For upright mounting, the PCU videolink transmitter unit is installed with the rear wall plate at a 90 angle to the rear wall (see figure "Configuring the distributed configuration with videolink with up to two operator panel fronts" in Section: "Description" "Configurations"). Features: Only one mounting position possible: Fan at top Space required with PCU 50 less than that required for flat mounting Keep a clearance for hard disk operation (approx. 10 cm). Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 491 Videolink (VL) 21.4 Mounting 21.4.1.3 Central mounting on operator panel front The components are joined together in the same way as for "upright" mounting, with the following exceptions: DIP switch S2 (see Section: "Control and monitoring elements" "Videolink transmitter"), if present, must be set to 2/2 (X108). The cover plate on the transmitter (see Fig. F "Flat mounting") must be removed prior to mounting. The "central" mounting brackets are used (see Fig. below). The assembled PCU videolink transmitter unit is connected to an operator panel front and secured to the mounting bracket with the knurled screws as described in Chapter: "Operator panel front OP 012", Section: "Mounting". 3&8 0RXQWLQJEUDFNHW FHQWUDO 3&8 9LGHROLQNWUDQVPLWWHU 3&8 'HYLFHIDQ 'LPHQVLRQVLQPP Figure 21-16 Joining of PCU 50 and videolink transmitter using the central mounting brackets to be attached to the operator panel front 492 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Videolink (VL) 21.4 Mounting Installation of PCU/transmitter unit With "central" mounting, the PCU/videolink transmitter unit is mounted in the usual way directly behind an operator panel front. Features: Mounting depth of the operator panel front increased by approx. 30 mm Not possible with OP 010S, not possible with PCU 70 (too heavy). 21.4.2 Videolink receiver on operator panel front Before the receiver is mounted on the panel front, the two interface cables for the panel front (IO/USB cable K1 and display cable K2) must be inserted into the correct sockets on the videolink receiver (visible behind the casing cut-out). For more detail, see section: "OP 012," section: "Interfaces" / "Mounting." OP 010S The operator panel front OP 010S and the receiver are screwed together without additional mounting brackets. 236 )L[LQJVFUHZV [0IRU PRXQWLQJWKH UHFHLYHUVXSSRUW SODWHWRIURQWRI WKHFRQWUROSDQHO RI 9LGHROLQN 5HFHLYHU 6XSSRUWLQJSODWH 86%FDEOH 9LGHROLQNFDEOH 'LPHQVLRQVLQPP Figure 21-17 Front, side and rear view of operator panel front OP 010S with screwed-on videolink receiver Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 493 Videolink (VL) 21.4 Mounting OP 010C, OP 012, OP 015, OP 015A, TP 12, TP 015A For mounting on an operator panel front OP 010C, OP 012, OP 015, OP 015A, TP 012 or TP 015A (see figure in Section: "Description" "Components" "Videolink receiver") two separately ordered mounting brackets are needed (see Section: "Description" "Configurations"). 1. Screw the mounting bracket onto the receiver. The ends with the hitch-type lugs must point to the right (see figure in Section: "Description" "Components" Videolink receiver") or to the left (see figure below). 23 2. Hook the receiver mounting bracket (like a PCU) with the two hitched lugs into the operator panel front, swing it shut and secure it with the four knurled screws . 23 +LQJHWDEIRULQVHUWLRQLQWRWKH IURQWRIWKHFRQWUROSDQHO RI 0RXQWLQJEUDFNHW 9LGHROLQN 5HFHLYHU 23 9LGHROLQNFDEOH 'LPHQVLRQVLQPP 86%FDEOH .QXUOHGVFUHZVIRU IL[LQJWKHPRXQWLQJ EUDFNHWVWRWKHIURQWRI WKHFRQWUROSDQHO RI 0RXQWLQJEUDFNHW Figure 21-18 Operator panel front (example, OP 012 with attached videolink receiver Order No. 6FC5247-0AF22-0AA0), front, rear and side view 494 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Videolink (VL) 21.5 Connectors 21.5 Connectors 21.5.1 Cable connections The figure in Section: "Description" "Components" "Videolink receiver") shows the connections for connecting to the outside: the double USB port, the video link interface (cable inserted) the keyboard interface, the power supply connection As some of the connections used do not have strain-relief-cable, it is recommended to secure the cables with cable binders to the u-shaped cover cutouts on the mounting plate. 21.5.2 Power Supply Operator panel fronts, PCU and videolink receivers should be supplied with 24 V DC (the videolink transmitter is supplied with power from the PCU). Note To prevent error messages when the PCU is booted, the operator panel front should be switched on at the same time as the PCU via the 24 V DC supply. Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 495 Videolink (VL) 21.6 Technical specifications 21.6 Technical specifications 21.6.1 Operator panel front For the technical data of the operator panel fronts, please refer to the corresponding sections: "OP 010S", "OP 010C", "OP 012", "OP 015", "OP 015A", "TP 012" and "TP 015A". 21.6.2 PCU 50 / PCU 70 For the technical data of the PCUs, please refer to the corresponding Sections: "PCU 50" and "PCU 70". 21.6.3 Videolink transmitter Security Safety class III; PELV acc. to EN 50178 Degree of protection per EN 60529 IP00 / mounted on PCU: IP20 Approvals CE / cULus Electrical specifications Voltage supply Power consumption, max. from the PCU ...-1AA0: 1.9 W ...-2AA0: 2.5 W Mechanical data Dimensions (mm) Weights Width: 265 Height: 277 Depth: 35 Videolink transmitter Mounting bracket flat/central: 0.6 kg Upright mounting bracket 1.0 kg 1.2 kg Mechanical ambient conditions Operation Transport (in transport packaging) Vibratory load 10 -58 Hz: 0.075 mm 58 -200 Hz: 9.8 m/s2 3M4 per EN 60721-3-3 5 -9 Hz: 3.5 mm 9 -200 Hz: 9.8 m/s2 2M2 per EN 60721-3-2 Shock stressing 50 m/s2, 30 ms, 18 shocks 3M2 per EN 60721-3-3 300 m/s2, 6 ms, 18 shocks 2M2 to EN 60721-3-2 Climatic ambient conditions Cooling Free convection, without fan Condensation, spraying water and icing Supply air Applicable standards Climate class Temperature limits Temperature change 496 Not permitted Without caustic gases, dusts and oils Operation Storage/shipping (in transport packaging) EN 60721-3-3 EN 60721-3-1 / -3-2 3K5 1K3 / 2K4 5 ... 55 C -25 ... 55 C Max. 10 K/h Max. 18 K/h Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Videolink (VL) 21.6 Technical specifications Limits for relative humidity 10 ... 80% Permissible change in the relative air humidity 21.6.4 5 ... 95% max. 0.1 % /min Videolink receiver Security Safety class III; PELV acc. to EN 50178 Degree of protection per EN 60529 IP00 Approvals CE / cULus Electrical specifications Voltage supply from the PCU Power consumption, max. 40 W Mechanical data Dimensions (mm) Width: 260 Height: 265 Weight Mechanical ambient conditions Depth: 37 1.8 kg Operation Transport (in transport packaging) Vibratory load 10 -58 Hz: 0.075 mm 58 -200 Hz: 9.8 m/s2 3M4 per EN 60721-3-3 5 -9 Hz: 3.5 mm 9 -200 Hz: 9.8 m/s2 2M2 per EN 60721-3-2 Shock stressing 50 m/s2, 30 ms, 18 shocks 3M2 per EN 60721-3-3 300 m/s2, 6 ms, 18 shocks 2M2 to EN 60721-3-2 Climatic ambient conditions Cooling Free convection, without fan Condensation, spraying water and icing Supply air Applicable standards Climate class Temperature limits Temperature change Limits for relative humidity Permissible change in the relative air humidity Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Not permitted Without caustic gases, dusts and oils Operation Storage/shipping (in transport packaging) EN 60721-3-3 EN 60721-3-1 / -3-2 3K5 1K3 / 2K4 0 ... 45 C (at front) 0 ... 55 C (at rear) -25 ... 55 C Max. 10 K/h Max. 18 K/h 10 ... 80% 5 ... 95% max. 0.1 % /min 497 Videolink (VL) 21.6 Technical specifications 498 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 22 Thin Client Unit (TCU) 22.1 Description 22.1.1 Overview The Thin Client Unit (TCU) for distributed installation permits physical separation of SINUMERIK OP/TP operator panel fronts and SINUMERIC PCU/NCU as well as connection of up to four operator panel fronts each with a TCU to a PCU/NCU. For this reason, the user interface is copied to several OPs with one TCU each. Validity This description applies to: Name Order number: Thin Client Unit (TCU) 6FC5312-0DA00-0AA1 Thin Client Unit (TCU) 6FC5312-0DA00-0AA1 Features Design of flat operator panels through shallow installation depth and low power dissipation. Graphics: Resolution 640 x 480 to 1024 x 768 pixels; 16-bit color resolution More stable mounting of the SINUMERIK PCU in the control cabinet. Efficient operator control of larger machines thanks to up to 5 operator panels Signal transmission between PCU/NCU and operator panel front via Industrial Ethernet (see section: "Accessories") Easy installation and service-friendly layout thanks to the component structure The same operating screen is shown synchronously on all OPs and can be used from all OPs. Operation on a Thin Client has the same authorization rights as operation on an operator panel front connected directly to the PCU. Mixed use of operator panel fronts on a TCU or with an integrated TCU and an operator panel front directly on the PCU is possible. The distance between PCU and operator panel fronts is determined by the maximum distance of two access points (100 m). Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 499 Thin Client Unit (TCU) 22.1 Description Prerequisites SINUMERIK 810D / 840D / 840Di - SINUMERIK PCU 50 / PCU 70 with PCU base software WinXP 7.4 and later and PCU base software Thin Client, operator panel fronts - SINUMERIK PCU 50.3 - Operator panel fronts: OP 010 / OP 010C / OP 010S / OP 012 / OP 012T/ TP 012 / OP015 / OP 015A / TP 015A with TFT display SINUMERIK 840D sl/840Di sl - NCU 710.1 / NCU 720.1 / NCU 730.1 - SINUMERIK PCU 50.3 - Operator panel fronts: OP 010 / OP 010C / OP 010S / OP 012 / OP 012T/ OP 015 / OP 015A / TP 015A with TFT display Design The TCUs are coupled via Ethernet as Thin Clients in a dedicated subnetwork (via DHCP server on the PCU/NCU) to the PCU/NCU. Ports: 2 x USB 1.1 for connection of mouse and keyboard Ethernet 10/100 Mbit/s 22.1.2 Configurations Configurations 7&8 3&8 2SHUDWRUSDQHOIURQW ,QGXVWULDO(WKHUQHW 0RXQWLQJEUDFNHWVUHTXLUHG IODWIRU3&8)&$)$$ PRXQWLQJLQFDELQHW %RRNIRU3&8)&$)$$ PRXQWLQJLQFDELQHW IRU7&8)&$)$$ Figure 22-1 500 Distributed installation with TCU: minimum configuration with no central operator panel front on the PCU Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Thin Client Unit (TCU) 22.1 Description 7&8 3&8 2SHUDWRUSDQHOIURQW 2SHUDWRUSDQHOIURQW ,QGXVWULDO(WKHUQHW 0RXQWLQJEUDFNHWVUHTXLUHG)&$)$$ IRU3&8DQG7&8 Figure 22-2 Distributed installation with TCU: Configuration with central operator panel front on the PCU 7&8 ,QGXVWULDO (WKHUQHW 2SHUDWRUSDQHO IURQW 7&8 3&8 2SHUDWRUSDQHO IURQW ,QGXVWULDO (WKHUQHW ,QGXVWULDO (WKHUQHW 2SHUDWRUSDQHO IURQW ,QGXVWULDO (WKHUQHW 2SHUDWRUSDQHO IURQW ,QGXVWULDO (WKHUQHW 2SHUDWRUSDQHO IURQW 6ZLWFK 7&8 7&8 0RXQWLQJEUDFNHWVUHTXLUHG IRU3&8DQG7&8)&$)$$ ZLWKRXWIURQWRIFRQWUROSDQHOVHHLOOXVWUDWLRQ Figure 22-3 Distributed installation with TCU: Configuration with five operator panel fronts on PCU Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 501 Thin Client Unit (TCU) 22.1 Description 3&8 7&8 3&8 ,QGXVWULDO(WKHUQHW 2SHUDWRUSDQHOIURQW 0RXQWLQJEUDFNHWUHTXLUHG IRUPRXQWLQJLQWKHHOHFWULFDOFDELQHW )&$)$$RU )&$)$$ ,QGXVWULDO (WKHUQHW 7&8 2SHUDWRUSDQHOIURQW ,QGXVWULDO 7&8 (WKHUQHW 2SHUDWRUSDQHOIURQW 1&8 1&8 1&8 ,QGXVWULDO (WKHUQHW 6ZLWFK ,QGXVWULDO 7&8 (WKHUQHW 2SHUDWRUSDQHOIURQW ,QGXVWULDO (WKHUQHW 7&8 2SHUDWRUSDQHOIURQW 0RXQWLQJEUDFNHWUHTXLUHG IRUPRXQWLQJRQRSHUDWRUSDQHOIURQW 7&83&8)&$)$$ QRWIRU236 7&8UHTXLUHGIRURSHUDWRUSDQHOIURQWVZLWKLQWHJUDWHG7&8 Figure 22-4 Connection overview for TCU, several TCUs on NCU 710.1/NCU 720.1/NCU 730.1 Reference: /IAM/ Commissioning Manual (HMI) Installation and start-up TCU (IM5) 502 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Thin Client Unit (TCU) 22.2 Interfaces 22.2 Interfaces Overview Function Designation Input/output Type * Ethernet interface X202 O 8-pin RJ45 socket * USB port X203/204 O 2x USB-A 3-pin terminal block * Reserved X205 * Power supply 24 V DC X206 I * I/O interface *) X207 I/O 2 x 13-pin plug connector * LVDS display interface *) X208 O 2 x 10-pin plug connector *) for connection to an operator panel front 9 9 3( Figure 22-5 (1) Front view of the TCU with interfaces (Ethernet cable inserted, one mounting bracket mounted) X203 / X204 (2) Mounting bracket (1 of 2) (3) (4) Hinged catch for latching into operator panel front (1 of 2) X206 24 V DC power supply (detail) X205 Reserved (5) (6) Cable tie to secure the connector (7) (8) 2 USB-A ports Ground terminal X202 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Ethernet port 503 Thin Client Unit (TCU) 22.2 Interfaces Figure 22-6 Rear view of the TCU with interfaces (1) X208 Display cable K2 (2) X207 I/O USB cable K1 Description X202 Ethernet port 8-pin standard Ethernet socket X203/ X204 USB One of the interfaces can be loaded with 500 mA (high current), the other, with 100 mA. Connector designation: X203/X204; USB socket, 2 x 4-pin, type A Max. cable length Mouse, keyboard: 5 m if hub used: 3.5 m *) *)Length including the supply cable to hub and connected terminal; only one hub is allowed. It should be noted that some keyboards already have a hub. X206 Power Supply X207/ X208 Pin assignments 504 3-pin terminal block DC 24 V; for connection assignment, see detail in figure above X207 26-pin plug connector for the IO/USB cable K1 for connecting the operator panel front X208 20-pin plug connector for the LVDS display cable K2 for connecting the operator panel front Unless explicitly specified, you can take the pin assignment for the connections from section: "Connection conditions". Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Thin Client Unit (TCU) 22.3 Mounting the TCU on the operator panel front 22.3 Mounting the TCU on the operator panel front Before the two components are assembled, the two interface cables for the operator panel front (IO/USB cable K1 and display cable K2, see Fig. A) must be inserted into the correct sockets on the TCU (visible behind the casing cut-out). For more detail, see section: "OP 012," section: "Interfaces" / "Mounting." OP 010S The operator panel front OP 010S and the TCU are screwed together without additional mounting brackets. (A) 236 236 7&8 )L[LQJ VFUHZV [0WR VHFXUH 7&8FDUULHUSODWH RQRSHUDWRU SDQHOIURQW RI 236 (WKHUQHW [86% Figure 22-7 6XSSRUWLQJSODWH 'LPHQVLRQVLQPP Mounted TCU with OP 010S, front, side and rear view Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 505 Thin Client Unit (TCU) 22.3 Mounting the TCU on the operator panel front OP 010, OP 010C, OP 012, OP 015, OP 015A, TP 012, TP 015A Two mounting brackets (must be ordered separately) are required for mounting on an operator panel front of type OP 010, OP 010C, OP 012, OP 015, OP 015A, TP 012 or TP 015A (see Section: "Accessories"). 1. Screw the mounting bracket onto the TCU. The ends of the hitch-type catches (see Fig. B) must be facing left. 2. Use the two hitch catches to suspend the TCU mounting bracket unit (like a PCU) in the operator panel front. Swing closed after inserting cables K1 and K2 and use four knurled screws to secure. 23 (B) 23 +LQJHFDWFKIRUKDQJLQJ LQRSHUDWRUSDQHOIURQW RI 0RXQWLQJEUDFNHW 7&8 3RZHUVXSSO\ FRQQHFWLRQ 23 (WKHUQHWFDEOH [86% Figure 22-8 .QXUOHGVFUHZIRU VHFXULQJPRXQWLQJ EUDFNHWRQRSHUDWRU SDQHOIURQW RI 0RXQWLQJEUDFNHW 'LPHQVLRQVLQPP Mounted TCU (example with with OP 012) in front, side and rear view Cable connections Fig. (B) shows the outward-bound connections: the double USB port, the Ethernet port (cable inserted), 506 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Thin Client Unit (TCU) 22.3 Mounting the TCU on the operator panel front the keyboard interface, and the power supply connection. Since some of the connections do not have a cable strain relief, it is recommended to secure the cables to the U-shaped lugs on the supporting plate using cable ties (see Fig., section: "Interfaces"). Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 507 Thin Client Unit (TCU) 22.4 Technical data 22.4 Technical data Table 22-1 Thin Client Unit Safety Protective class III; PELV acc. to EN 50178 Degree of protection per EN 60529 (IEC 60529) IP00 Approvals CE / cULus Electrical data Power supply 24 V DC Power consumption, max. 36 Watts Mechanical data Dimensions (mm) Width: 260 Height: 265 Weight Mechanical ambient conditions Depth: 40 1.7 kg Operation Transport (in transport packaging) Vibratory load 10 - 58 Hz: 0.075 mm 58 - 200 Hz: 9.8 m/s2 3M4 per EN 60721-3-3 5 - 9 Hz: 3.5 mm 9 - 200 Hz: 9.8 m/s2 2M2 per EN 60721-3-2 Shock stressing 50 m/s2, 30 ms, 18 shocks 3M2 per EN 60721-3-3 300 m/s2, 6 ms, 18 shocks 2M2 to EN 60721-3-2 Climatic ambient conditions Heat dissipation Free convection, without fan Condensation, spraying water and icing Supply air Applicable standards Climate class Temperature limits Temperature change Limits for relative humidity Permissible change in the relative air humidity 508 Not permissible Without caustic gases, dusts and oils Operation Storage/shipping (in transport packaging) EN 60721-3-3 EN 60721-3-1 / -3-2 3K5 1K3 / 2K4 0 ... 55 C (at rear) -25 ... 55 C Max. 10 K/h Max. 18 K/h 10 ... 80% at 25C 5 ... 95% at 25C max. 0.1 % /min Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Thin Client Unit (TCU) 22.5 Accessories 22.5 Accessories Table 22-2 Thin Client Unit Compon. Description Mounting bracket Mounting bracket for PCU, video link receiver or TCU behind operator panel front Flat mounting bracket for PCU 50/70 with video link transmitter in control cabinet Amount 6FC5248-0AF20-2AA0 1 set (2 items) Upright mounting bracket, book for PCU 50 with video link transmitter in control cabinet Industrial Ethernet cable Industrial Ethernet switch Order No.: 6FC5248-0AF20-0AA0 6FC5248-0AF20-1AA0 IE FC Standard Cable GP 2 x 2 (Type A) 4-core, shielded TP installation cable for connection to IE FC Outlet RJ45/ IE FC RJ45 Plug; PROFINET-compatible; with UL approval; sold by the meter (max. 1000 m; min. 20 m); 1 6XV1840-2AH10 IE FC Trailing Cable GP 2 x 2 (Type C) 4-core, shielded TP installation cable for connection to IE FC Outlet RJ45/ IE FC RJ45 Plug 180/90 for use in trailing cables; PROFINET-compatible; without UL approval; sold by the meter (max. 1000 m; min. 20 m); 1 6XV1840-3AH10 IE FC RJ45 Plug 180 RJ plug connector for Industrial Ethernet with robust metal casing and integrated cutting/clamping contacts; with 180 outgoing cable 1 6GK1001-1BB10-2AA0 SCALANCE X108 unmanaged with 8 RJ45 ports 10/100 Mbit/s for configuring star topologies 1 6GK5108-0BA00-2AA3 SCALANCE X208 managed with 8 RJ45 ports 10/100 Mbit/s for configuring linear, star and annular topologies 1 6GK5208-0BA00-2AA3 SCALANCE X208PRO managed with 8 RJ45 ports 10/100 Mbit/s for configuring linear, star and annular topologies; degree of protection IP65 incl. 8 RJ45 and 3 M12 dust protection caps 1 6GK5208-0BA00-2AA6 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 509 Thin Client Unit (TCU) 22.5 Accessories 510 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Handheld Terminal HT 6 23.1 23 Description The SINUMERIK HT 6 (handheld terminal with a 6" display diagonal) is an operation and programming device and can be used in conjunction with the SINUMERIK 810D, 840D, FM 357-2H and 840Di controls. Validity The following description applies to the handheld terminal HT 6 (Order No.: 6FC5403-0AA10-0AA1) Function blocks 80486DX4 microprocessor - Operating system DR-DOS - Clock frequency 100 MHz Memory: - SDRAM 16 MB - FLASH 8 MB - PC memory card: 8 MB FLASH, can be plugged in externally LCD with - 5.7" diagonal, monochrome (blue) STN, 320*240 pixels (1/4 VGA), backlit, variable brightness and contrast - 16, ..., 20 lines, 38, ..., 52 characters per line (as configured) Membrane keyboard with - Machine control key block: RESET, ALARM CANCEL, JOG, TEACH, AUTO, CONTROL PANEL FUNCTION, STOP, START, twelve traversing keys (6 + and 6 - with slide-in labels) - Horizontal softkey bar with eight keys - Number block (twelve keys, shift key switches to alpha characters) - Cursor key block (nine keys) - Customer-configurable keys: S1, S2, U1, ..., U8 (can be labeled with slide-in labels) - Function keys: Operating area (MENU SELECT), HELP, Recall (^) Rotary override switch (19 positions with stop) Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 511 Handheld Terminal HT 6 23.1 Description EMERGENCY STOP key At the rear of the device: - Enabling buttons (two buttons with two channels each, with two positions for Safety Category 3) - HT 6 cable connection - Serial RS-232 interface (COM1) - PC memory card interface - PS/2 keyboard interface - Reset pushbutton - Belt fastener - Two M5 threaded holes for customized bracket. M5 threaded bushings for mounting bracket For a mounting bracket of the user, there are two M5 threaded bushes on the rear side of the HT 6, see figure. For the two threads, adhere to a tightening torque of 1.8 Nm, so that the bushings are not overloaded. 0 Figure 23-1 512 M5 threaded bushes for fixing bracket Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Handheld Terminal HT 6 23.2 Operator controls and indicators 23.2 Operator controls and indicators 23.2.1 View X 1 Y 2 Z 3 A 4 B 5 C 6 Figure 23-2 (1) User interface of the HT 6 Rear side: Two enabling switches (2) Override rotary switch (with limit stop) (3) Traversing keys, user-configurable, can be labeled (see Section: "Spare parts") (4) Softkeys (5) Special keys, user-configurable (6) Connecting cable (7) Function keys, user-configurable, can be labeled (see Section: "Spare parts") (8) Display (9) EMERGENCY STOP key Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 513 Handheld Terminal HT 6 23.2 Operator controls and indicators 23.2.2 Description Number block The Shift key is used to switch the function of the number block keys between text and numerical mode. Changeover only becomes effective when the Shift key is released. In text mode, each key is assigned to several alpha characters. The required character is selected with Shift + character key. EMERGENCY STOP key Emergency stop button Press the red button in emergencies when people are at risk, there is the danger of machines or the workpiece being damaged. As a rule, when operating the EMERGENCY STOP button, all drives are brought to a standstill with max. braking torque. Turn the EMERGENCY STOP button to the left to unlatch it. Machine manufacturer For other reactions to the EMERGENCY STOP: refer to the machine tool manufacturer's instructions Enabling button The enabling button is designed as a 2-channel, 2-position switch (see Section: "Interfaces" "Distributor"). In the case of operations that require enabling (e.g. manual traversing within a danger zone), only one enabling button has to be operated. Note Press the enabling button firmly as far as the stop to ensure reliable action. 514 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Handheld Terminal HT 6 23.2 Operator controls and indicators Figure 23-3 Rear of the HT 6 with the interfaces (1) V.24 interface (under the cover) (2) M5 threaded bushes for mounting bracket (3) Agreement button (4) Belt fastener (5) Connecting cable (6) Interface cover - PC memory card interface - MF2 keyboard interface RESET button (under the cover) Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 515 Handheld Terminal HT 6 23.3 Interfaces 23.3 Interfaces Cable interface (X101) Connector designation: X101 Connector type: 15-pole high-density sub-D pin with UNC 4 screwed joint Table 23-1 Pin assignments on connector X101 Pin Signal name Signal mode Signal type 1 B RS 485 differential signal B 2 N.C. Not connected 3 ZS2.2 Enabling button, Contact 2 4 ZS1.2 Enabling button, Contact 1 5 NA1.1 EMERGENCY STOP button, Contact 1 6 A RS 485 differential signal B 7 N.C. Not connected 8 ZS1.1 Enabling button, Contact 1 9 NA1.2 EMERGENCY STOP button, Contact 1 10 NA2.1 EMERGENCY STOP button, Contact 2 11 GND M (Mext for HT 6) VI 12 Ub 24 V (power supply for HT 6) VI 13 ZS2.1 Enabling button, Contact 2 14 SHIELD Shield 15 NA2.2 EMERGENCY STOP button, Contact 2 Installation of connecting cable 1. Remove the two M3 Torx screws of the connecting cable cover. 2. Take off the cover. 3. Connect the connecting cable to the bushing and secure it with the screws. 4. Put the cover on and tighten the screws again. 516 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Handheld Terminal HT 6 23.3 Interfaces V24 interface X201 Connector designation: X201 Plug-connector type 9-pole Sub-D (pin) Max. cable length 10 m Table 23-2 X201 pin assignments Pin Signal name 1 DCD Data Carrier Detect Signal mode Signal type O 2 RxD Receive Data I 3 TxD Transmit Data O 4 DTR Data Terminal Ready I 5 1M 6 DSR Ground Data Send Ready VO O 7 RTS Request To Send I 8 CTS Clear To Send O 9 RI Ring Indicator I Signal type B: Bi-directional I: Input O: Output VI: Voltage Input VO: Voltage Output Releasing the V.24 cover 1. Move the lug of the cover upward. 2. Rotate the cover to the side; the V.24 interface is accessible. 3. Put the cover for the assembly on the HT 6 and allow it to click in place by pressing down carefully. Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 517 Handheld Terminal HT 6 23.3 Interfaces PS/2 keyboard interface (X301) for MF2 keyboard Connector designation: X301 Connector type: 6-pole mini-DIN socket Table 23-3 X301 pin assignments Pin Signal name Signal mode 1 KDATA Keyboard Data 2 N.C. Not connected 3 1M Ground 4 1P5 +5 V (power supply) 5 KCLK 6 NC Keyboard Clock Signal type I VO O Not connected Signal type I: Input O: Output VO: Voltage Output Release interface cover: 1. Release the cover by pressing in the catch. 2. Pull off the cover from the two recesses. 3. Put the cover for the assembly on the HT 6 and allow it to click in place by pressing down carefully. 518 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Handheld Terminal HT 6 23.3 Interfaces PC memory card interface (X401) Connector designation: X401 Connector type: 68-pole PC card connector Table 23-4 X401 pin assignments Pin Signal name Signal type Pin V0 Signal name 1 1M 35 1M 2 D3 36 XCARDDET 3 D4 37 D11 4 D5 38 D12 5 D6 39 D13 6 D7 40 D14 7 XCSCARDF 41 D15 8 A10 42 XCSCARDF 9 XOEP 43 N.C. 10 O11 44 N.C. B O 11 A9 45 N.C. 12 A8 46 A17 13 A13 47 A18 14 A14 48 A19 15 XWEP 49 A20 16 N.C. 50 O21 17 1P5 51 1P5 18 VPP 52 VPP 19 A16 53 A22 20 A15 54 A23 21 A12 55 A24 22 A7 56 A25 23 A6 57 N.C. VO O 24 A5 58 RESET 25 A4 59 N.C. 26 A3 60 N.C. 27 A2 61 XREG 28 A1 62 N.C. 29 1M 30 D0 31 D1 32 63 N.C. 64 D8 65 D9 D2 66 D10 33 N.C. 67 N.C. 34 1M 68 1M Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 VO B VO Signal type VO O B O O VO O O O B VO 519 Handheld Terminal HT 6 23.3 Interfaces Explanation A0, ..., A25: Address 0, ..., 25 D0, ..., D15: Data O, ...., 15 B: Bidirectional O: Output VO: Voltage Output Release interface cover: 1. Release the cover by pressing in the catch. 2. Pull off the cover from the two recesses. 3. Put the cover for the assembly on the HT 6 and allow it to click in place by pressing down carefully. RESET button The HT 6 can be booted up again using the RESET button. The RESET button is accessible via an opening under the interface cover by means of a screwdriver. Release interface cover: 1. Release the cover by pressing in the catch. 2. Pull off the cover from the two recesses. 3. Put the cover for the assembly on the HT 6 and allow it to click in place by pressing down carefully. Additional references The following manuals are available for the handheld terminal (HT 6): References: /BAH/ Operating Instructions HT 6 /IAM IM2/ Chapter: "Start-Up of the HT 6" /PJE/ HMI Embedded Configuring Package /IAM BE1/ Expanding the Operator Interface. Note The IP 54 degree of protection is only ensured when the interface covers and the RS-232-C covers are closed. 520 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Handheld Terminal HT 6 23.4 Connectors 23.4 Connectors The following components and cables are necessary for connection: &RPSXWHUXQLW 2WKHU EXVQRGH %766 0ESV IRU6,180(5,.' 03,FDEOH 03, NESV IRU6,180(5,.'' ; 03, 0ESV IRU6,180(5,.'L ; +DQGKHOG 7HUPLQDO +7 ; 'LVWULEXWLRQERDUGHJ );%+ +7FDEOH Figure 23-4 7HUPLQDOEORFN IRU+7SRZHUVXSSO\ (PHUJHQF\6WRSZLULQJRIWKH+7 $JUHHPHQWEXWWRQZLULQJRIWKH+7 Connection diagram for handheld terminal HT 6 The handheld terminal must be connected to the MPI bus as the final node. The bus terminating resistors are integrated in the device. Note The HT6 cannot be connected using the MPI cable 6FX2002-4EA04-... because the bus terminators are integral components of this cable. Please use the MPI cable specified in the catalog. References:/Z/ Catalog NCZ Table 23-5 HT 6 cable MLFB Note suitabledistributor 6FX2002...-1AA83-1__0 3-wire enabling cable 6FX2006-1BC01 6FX2002...-1AA23-1__0 4-wire enabling cable 6FX2006-1BH01 Table 23-6 Examples (available by the meter, max. 40 m): 6FX2002-1AA83-1BA0 10 m 6FX2002-1AA23-1CA0 20 m Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 521 Handheld Terminal HT 6 23.4 Connectors Note Distributor 6FX2006-1BF00 cannot be used. CAUTION An EMERGENCY STOP is triggered if the connection between the HT 6 and the distributor box is interrupted (e.g. the HT 6 cable was unplugged). EMERGENCY STOP overriding does not take place automatically (see Section: "Connecting/disconnecting during operation"). 522 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Handheld Terminal HT 6 23.5 Unplugging/plugging during operation 23.5 Unplugging/plugging during operation Trouble-free disconnection and connection of the HT 6 during machine operation requires the following: Release or override of the HT 6 EMERGENCY STOP Connection of the HT 6 to the OPI/MPI via a PROFIBUS repeater. 1&8 &&8 21 03,23, 2)) 2)) 21 21 'LVWULEXWLRQOLVW 21 21 'LVWULEXWLRQOLVW +7 5HSHDWHU56 Figure 23-5 2)) 7HUPLQDWLQJUHVLVWRURSHQ 21 7HUPLQDWLQJUHVLVWRUFORVHG 21 Connecting the HT 6 using a PROFIBUS repeater A PROFIBUS repeater must be connected upstream of the HT 6 distributor box for each branch. The individual bus segments (MPI/OPI cable and/or the local segments between repeater and HT 6) must be terminated with connector resistors at the ends of the bus. Repeater RS-485 The repeater can be ordered under Order No. 6ES7972-0AA01-0XA0. For further information please refer to the Catalog: /IK10/ Industrial Communication Networks SIMATIC-NET Note The HT 6 already has an installed bus terminating resistor. The cable length from the repeater to the distributor box must not exceed 2 m. Cable lengths for MPI/OPI, see /IAD/ Start-Up Guide 840D or /IAC/ Start-Up Guide 810D, Chapter 3. Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 523 Handheld Terminal HT 6 23.5 Unplugging/plugging during operation 6DPSOHFLUFXLW (0(5*(1&<6723FLUFXLW V\VWHP(0(5*(1&<6723 .H\VZLWFK ZLWKSRVLWLYHDFWLRQFRQWDFWV 9 .H\VZLWFK 21 (PHUJHQF\6WRSRYHUULGHSDVVLYH +7FRQQHFWHG 6LJQDOWR3/& 0 ; 3 9 'LVWULEXWLRQERDUG );%& ; 0 9 +7 ; GLVWULEXWRU (0(5*(1&<6723 EXWWRQ 6KRUWFLUFXLWFRQQHFWRU .H\VZLWFKFRQVLVWLQJRI VZLWFKLQJHOHPHQWV6%$DQG $FWXDWLQJHOHPHQW6%RU6% FRUUHVSRQGLQJVDIHW\ORFNDVUHTXLUHG &DWDORJ6ZLWFKLQJGHYLFHVDQGV\VWHPV 16. DW$ '&' Figure 23-6 WULJJHUVWLPHPRQLWRULQJ ,IDIWHUWKHHQGRIWLPHPRQLWRULQJ PLQPD[ WKHVLJQDOOHYHOLVVWLOO/RZRU2SHQDQ HPHUJHQF\6723PXVWEHWULJJHUHGE\WKH3/& 7RHQVXUHWKH+LJK/RZOHYHOWUDQVLWLRQLWPD\EH QHFHVVDU\WRLQFOXGHDSXOOGRZQUHVLVWRU Distributor 6FX2006-1BC01: Circuit proposal for EMERGENCY STOP bridging (the "keyswitch =ON" status is indicated when the HT6 is plugged in) Note Please note that the customer is responsible for implementing the circuit recommendations. 524 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Handheld Terminal HT 6 23.5 Unplugging/plugging during operation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igure 23-7 Distributor 6FX2006-1BH01: Circuit proposal for EMERGENCY STOP bridging (the "keyswitch =ON" status is indicated when the HT6 is plugged in) Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 525 Handheld Terminal HT 6 23.5 Unplugging/plugging during operation Note Please note that the customer is responsible for implementing the circuit recommendations. Disconnecting the HT 6 Keyswitch is set to "ON" position, HT 6 connection at distributor is active (incl. EMERGENCY STOP). 1. Override the EMERGENCY STOP circuits of the HT 6 using the keyswitch. 2. This connects the HT 6 supply voltage and the signal to the PLC to the LOW signal level (provide a pull-down resistor if necessary). This HIGH-LOW transition starts a timer in the PLC, which opens the EMERGENCY STOP circuit via the relevant PLC outputs and series-connected relays after the changeover period (approx. 5 min) if the keyswitch is not reset to its initial position within this period. 3. The HT 6 must be removed within the changeover period and the EMERGENCY STOP circuit overridden using a short-circuit connector. Connecting the HT 6 Changeover from short-circuit connector to HT 6 connection is carried out in reverse order. DANGER EMERGENCY STOP buttons that are inactive * may not be recognizable as such * may not be accessible This is to prevent the EMERGENCY STOP button from being used inadvertently. 526 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Handheld Terminal HT 6 23.6 Commissioning 23.6 Commissioning 23.6.1 Standard configuration (without MCP) Note Interface parameters are configured using the IK Screen Kit. References:/FBPH/, Configuring HT 6 Operator Interface IK, installation package: Software Update and Configuration Standard setting For the default setting of the HT 6, the FB1 call in DB100 available on the basic program diskette (tool box) must be used. This call applies to the first MCP or the HT 6. This setting corresponds to the hardware of the HT 6 when supplied. The default setting is: * MPI address: 14 Parameterization of the PLC basic program (FB1) The parameter settings in FB1 for the HT 6 correspond to those of the first MCP: MCPNum:=1 // One HT 6 MCPIn:=P#E0.0// HT 6 input signals MCPOut:=P#A0.0// HT 6 output signals MCPStatRec:=P#A12.0// Status double word MCPStatSend:=P#A8.0// MCPMPI:=TRUE// MCP1BusAdr:=14// PLC SW Please note the following when using SW 05.03.04 (for 840D) or SW 03.03.04 (for 810D): During power-up of the OB 100 you must set: DB8.DBB2=0, if HT 6 is configured as the first MCP, DB8.DBB64=0, if HT 6 is configured as the second MCP. This is not necessary with any of the higher SW versions. Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 527 Handheld Terminal HT 6 23.6 Commissioning 23.6.2 Interface signals MCP simulation is available for the HT 6. MCP simulation of the HT 6 must be parameterized with the function block FB1 as MCP, to enable the basic PLC program to monitor the HT 6 for failure. Input signals The parameter setting for the start address n is set in the PLC user program (FB1). %\WH (%Q (%Q ,%Q ,%Q %LW %LW %LW 5() 7($&+ $872 (%Q &RQWURO 3DQHO )XQFWLRQ 8 %LW %LW %LW 0'$ 48,7 5(6(7 :&60&6 8 ,1& 5(326 -2* -2* -2* -2* -2* -2* 6WHS UHVHUYHG UHVHUYHG 6) 6) 67$57 6723 ' & % $ -2* 8 UHVHUYHG 8 -2*NH\VSRVLWLYHGLUHFWLRQ UHVHUYHG $;6(/ $;6(/ -2* UHVHUYHG UHVHUYHG -2* UHVHUYHG 8 8 -2* -2* -2*NH\VQHJDWLYHGLUHFWLRQ -2* -2* UHVHUYHG 8 8 6WDUWNH\EORFN UHVHUYHG +: +: (%Q Figure 23-8 %LW )XQFWLRQNH\EORFN ,%Q ,%Q %LW )XQFWLRQNH\EORFN UHVHUYHG UHVHUYHG )HHGRYHUULGH ( HT 6 interface PLC Note: 528 * Signals on light gray background are evaluated by the basic PLC program (FC26). * Signals on dark gray background are evaluated in FC26 from SW 6.1. * Signals shown in () brackets do not exist, but are emulated by the software (e.g. with a softkey). * Transfer of the signals to the PLC can be inhibited in the software, except for those signals marked with *. * Use of keys U1 to U8 and S1, S2 and their inputs can be customized by the PLC user. Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Handheld Terminal HT 6 23.6 Commissioning Output signals The parameter setting for the start address n is set in the PLC user program (FB1). %\WH %LW %LW %LW %LW %LW %LW %LW %LW :&60&6 4%Q 4%Q 7UDYHUVLQJNH\VD[LVV\VWHP 4%Q UHVHUYHG $;6(/ 4%Q 4%Q 4%Q 4%Q 4%Q Figure 23-9 PLC HT 6 interface Note: * Signals are evaluated by the HT 6 status display. * Signals on a gray background are supplied by the basic PLC program (FC26). * The other signals may need to be supplied by the user program. FC 26 exists analogous to PLC functions FC 19 and FC 25. It is described in References: /FB/ P3, basic PLC program Machine data that specify the coding of compensation values must be set as follows: MD 12000: OVR_AX_IS_GRAY_CODE = 1 MD 12020: OVR_FEED_IS_GRAY_CODE = 1 MD 12040: OVR_RAPID_IS_GRAY_CODE = 1 MD 12060: OVR_SPIND_IS_GRAY_CODE = 1. Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 529 Handheld Terminal HT 6 23.6 Commissioning Signals not supported As standard, the following signals cannot be influenced by means of MCP emulation; they are initialized on control power-up: Keyswitch to position 0 Spindle speed override to 0 Rapid traverse overlay to 0 The only parameters for FC 26 are "BAGNo" and "ChanNo". That is why the information that is normally transmitted to the caller via the parameters "FeedHold" and "SpindleHold" has to be calculated by the user. 530 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Handheld Terminal HT 6 23.7 Distributor for handheld unit 23.7 Distributor for handheld unit 23.7.1 Overview Distributors and HT 6 The handheld terminal is connected to a distributor. The distributor has an interface to the MPI bus and a terminal block for connecting the EMERGENCY STOP circuit, enabling button circuit, 24 V power supply and an equipotential bonding connection. The following are suggested for the connections Distributor (Order No. 6FX2006-1BC01) for 3-core enabling cable (Order No. 6FX2002-1AA83) Distributor (Order No. 6FX2006-1BH01) for 4-core enabling cable (Order No. 6FX2002-1AA23) EMC measures To ensure that the drained currents do not become a source of interference in their own right, compliance with the following points is essential: Use a stranded reference potential conductor (of up to 30cm in length and at least 10 mm2 cross-section). Securely tighten all retaining screws of cable connectors, modules and cables referred to a potential. Make sure that all contacting areas of cables referred to a potential are protected against corrosion. In order to avoid capacitive charges on unused cable cores, the unused cores of the EMERGENCY STOP and enabling buttons (terminals NAUS1.1, NAUS1.2, NAUS2.1, NAUS2.2, ZS1, ZS2, ZUSTICO) must be connected to the equipotential bonding terminal. Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 531 Handheld Terminal HT 6 23.7 Distributor for handheld unit 23.7.2 Distributor for 3-core enabling cable (Order No. 6FX2006-1BC01) Location of interfaces and terminal blocks 7\SHSODWH ; ; ; (TXLSRWHQWLDO ERQGLQJ FRQQHFWLRQ ; ; +ROH PPE IRUFRQQHFWRU 0 ; PPE Figure 23-10 Distributor 6FX2006-1BC01: Location of interfaces and terminal blocks 24 V supply for the HT 6 The 24 V supply is connected to terminal block X3 (see figure below): Terminal 9 Ub Terminal 10 GND Connecting the HT 6 The HT 6 is connected to the X4 screw terminal on the distributor by means of the HT 6 cable. Note When drilling a hole (e.g. into a housing) for the X4 screw terminal, the requirements of degree of protection IP54 must be complied with. 532 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Handheld Terminal HT 6 23.7 Distributor for handheld unit Connection to MPI bus The distributor is connected to the appropriate interface via MPI bus terminal X5, e.g. on the MPI bus. EMERGENCY STOP button connections The EMERGENCY STOP button is connected to the terminal block X3 (see figure below). Terminal Assignment 1/2 EMERGENCY STOP contact 1 Input / output 11 / 12 EMERGENCY STOP contact 2 Input / output Connection of the enabling button (3-core) (0(5*(1&<6723EXWWRQ $JUHHPHQWEXWWRQ +7 ; &DEOHFRQQHFWRU +7FDEOH );$$ ; 'LVWULEXWLRQOLVW );%& ; 8E *1' Figure 23-11 Distributor 6FX2006-1BC01: Connection to the HT 6 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 533 Handheld Terminal HT 6 23.7 Distributor for handheld unit Terminal block X3 Connector designation: X3 Connector type: Terminal block for 1.5 mm2 Table 23-7 Distributor 6FX2006-1BC01: X 3 pin assignments for terminal block Pin Signal name Signal mode Signal type 1 NA1.1 EMERGENCY STOP button 1.1 (24 V, 1 A) I 2 NA1.2 EMERGENCY STOP button 1.2 (24 V, 1 A) O 3, ..., 6 NC 7 ZS1.1 Not connected Enabling button (24 V, 1 A) 8 ZS2.1 Enabling button (24 V, 1 A) 9 Ub 10 GND M (Mext for HT 6) 11 NA2.1 EMERGENCY STOP button 2.1 (24 V, 1 A) 12 NA2.2 EMERGENCY STOP button 2.2 (24 V, 1 A) O 13 ZS1.2/ZS2.2 Enabling button (24 V, 1 A) I O 24 V (power supply for HT 6) I HT 6 interface (X4) Connector designation: X4 Connector type: Round connector for screw connection Special feature: Interface must comply with IP54 Table 23-8 Pin 534 Distributor 6FX2006-1BC01: Pin assignment of connector X4 Signal name Signal mode Signal type 1 NA2.1 EMERGENCY STOP button (24 V, 1 A) I 2 MPI_A 3 GND 4 Ub 5 M (Mext for HT 6) 24 V (power supply for HT 6) I ZS1.1 Enabling button (24 V, 1 A) O Enabling button (24 V, 1 A) I 6 ZS1.2/ZS2.2 7, 8 NC 9 NA1.2 10 NA1.1 11 NC 12 NA2.2 13 MPI_B 14 ZS2.1 15, ..., 17 NC Not connected EMERGENCY STOP button (24 V, 1 A) O EMERGENCY STOP button (24 V, 1 A) I Not connected EMERGENCY STOP button (24 V, 1 A) O Enabling button (24 V, 1 A) O Not connected Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Handheld Terminal HT 6 23.7 Distributor for handheld unit MPI interface (X5) Connector designation: X5 Connector type: 9-pole sub-D socket Max. cable length 200 m at 1.5 Mbaud Table 23-9 Distributor 6FX2006-1BC01: Pin assignment of connector X5 Pin Signal name 3 MPI_B 8 MPI_A Signal mode Signal type B Connection of equipotential bonding Equipotential bonding has to be made using a low-resistance connection between the distributor and the ground potential. 23.7.3 Distributor box for 4-core enabling cable (order no. 6FX2006-1BH01) Location of interfaces and terminal blocks 7\SHSODWH ; ; ; (TXLSRWHQWLDO ERQGLQJ FRQQHFWLRQ ; ; +ROH PPE IRUFRQQHFWRU 0 ; Figure 23-12 Distributor 6FX2006-1BH01: Location of interfaces and terminal blocks Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 535 Handheld Terminal HT 6 23.7 Distributor for handheld unit 24 V supply for the HT 6 The 24 V power supply is connected to terminal block X3. Terminal 9 Ub Terminal 10 GND Connecting the HT 6 The HT 6 is connected to the X4 screw connection on the distributor by means of the HT 6 cable. Note When drilling a hole (e.g. into a housing) for the X4 screw terminal, the requirements of degree of protection IP54 must be complied with. Connection to MPI bus The distributor is connected to the appropriate interface via MPI bus terminal X5, e.g. on the MPI bus. EMERGENCY STOP button connections The EMER STOP button is connected to the terminal block X3 (see figure below). Terminal 536 Assignment 1/2 EMERGENCY STOP contact 1 Input / output 11 / 12 EMERGENCY STOP contact 2 Input / output Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Handheld Terminal HT 6 23.7 Distributor for handheld unit Connection of the enabling button (4-core) (0(5*(1&<6723EXWWRQ $JUHHPHQWEXWWRQ +7 ; &DEOHFRQQHFWRU +7FDEOH );$$ ; 'LVWULEXWLRQOLVW );%+ ; 8E *1' Figure 23-13 Distributor 6FX2006-1BH01: Connection to the HT 6 Terminal block X3 Connector designation: X3 Connector type: Terminal block for 1.5 mm2 Table 23-10 Distributor 6FX2006-1BH01: X 3 pin assignments for terminal block Pin Signal name 1 NA1.1 EMERGENCY STOP button (24 V, 1 A) Signal mode I 2 NA1.2 EMERGENCY STOP button (24 V, 1 A) O 3, ..., 6 N.C. 7 ZS1.1 Enabling button (24 V, 1 A) 8 ZS2.1 Enabling button (24 V, 1 A) Not connected 9 Ub 10 GND M (Mext for HT 6) 11 NA2.1 EMERGENCY STOP button (24 V, 1 A) 12 NA2.2 EMERGENCY STOP button (24 V, 1 A) 13 ZS1.2 Enabling button (24 V, 1 A) 14 ZS2.2 Enabling button (24 V, 1 A) 15 KEY2 Indicator showing whether shorting plug is connected, If yes 24V Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Signal type O 24 V (power supply for HT 6) I O I 537 Handheld Terminal HT 6 23.7 Distributor for handheld unit HT 6 interface (X4) Connector designation: X4 Connector type: Round connector for screw connection Special feature: Interface must comply with IP54 Table 23-11 Distributor 6FX2006-1BH01: Assignment of connector X4 Pin Signal name 1 NA2.1 2 MPI_A 3 GND 4 Ub 5 6 Signal mode Signal type EMERGENCY STOP button (24 V, 1 A) I B M (Mext for HT 6) 24 V (power supply for HT 6) I ZS1.1 Enabling button (24 V, 1 A) O ZS2.2 Enabling button (24 V, 1 A) I 7, 8 N.C. 9 NA1.2 10 11 Not connected EMERGENCY STOP button (24 V, 1 A) O NA1.1 EMERGENCY STOP button (24 V, 1 A) I KEY2 Indicator showing whether jump plug is connected, If yes 24V O 12 NA2.2 EMERGENCY STOP button (24 V, 1 A) O 13 MPI_B 14 ZS2.1 15 N.C. 16 ZS1.2 Enabling button (24 V, 1 A) 17 HR_B Not connected B Enabling button (24 V, 1 A) O Not connected MPI interface (X5) Connector designation: X5 Connector type: 9-pin Sub-D socket connector Max. cable length 200 m at 1.5 Mbaud Table 23-12 Distributor 6FX2006-1BH01: Assignment of connector X5 Pin Signal name 3 MPI_B 8 MPI_A Signal mode Signal type B Connection of equipotential Equipotential bonding has to be made using a low-resistance connection between the distributor and the ground potential. 538 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Handheld Terminal HT 6 23.8 Technical specifications 23.8 Technical specifications Security Safety class III; PELV acc. to EN 50178 Degree of protection per EN 60529 IP54 Approvals CE / cULus Electrical specifications Input voltage Current, typ. DC 24 V (via HT 6 cable) 500 mA Emergency stop/enabling button: 1A Power consumption, max. 12 W Mechanical data Dimensions (mm) Diameter: approx. 290 Weight Mechanical ambient conditions 53 Depth: 70 (incl. override) 1.5 kg Operation Transport (in transport packaging) Vibratory load 10 -58 Hz: 0.075 mm 58 -200 Hz: 9.8 m/s2 3M4 per EN 60721-3-3 5 -9 Hz: 3.5 mm 9 -200 Hz: 9.8 m/s2 2M2 per EN 60721-3-2 Shock stressing 50 m/s2, 30 ms, 18 shocks 3M2 per EN 60721-3-3 300 m/s2, 6 ms, 18 shocks 2M2 to EN 60721-3-2 Climatic ambient conditions Cooling By natural convection Condensation, spraying water and icing Supply air Applicable standards Climate class Temperature limits Temperature change Limits for relative humidity Permissible change in the relative air humidity Not permitted Without caustic gases, dusts and oils Operation Storage/shipping (in transport packaging) EN 60721-3-3 EN 60721-3-1 / -3-2 3K5 1K3 / 2K4 0 ... 45 C -20 ... 60C Max. 10 K/h Max. 18 K/h 5 ... 80% 5 ... 95% max. 0.1 % /min Display Size Resolution Service life Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 5.7 " STN 320 x 240 pixels For ambient temperatures > 40 C and long periods of non-use it is recommended that you switch on the screen saver function (via the machine data display DISPLAY_BLACK_TIME). 539 Handheld Terminal HT 6 23.9 Replacement parts 23.9 Replacement parts 23.9.1 Overview The following spare parts are available for the HT 6: Table 23-13 Spare parts for HT 6 Description Order No.: Note Front with keyboard 6FC5448-0AA10-0AA0 EMERGENCY STOP button and rotary override switch 6FC5447-0AA10-0AA0 Kit contains both spare parts WARNING Spare parts must always be replaced by properly trained personnel! Hazard due to unwanted movements of the machine! We therefore strongly recommend a function test after spare part replacement. 23.9.2 Replacement 23.9.2.1 Front with keyboard Replace the front with keyboard as described in Section: "Accessories" "Slide-in labels" "Replacement". Figure 23-14 Front with keyboard 540 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Handheld Terminal HT 6 23.9 Replacement parts Note The inner protective film on the front face must be pulled off before the new front with keyboard is installed. 23.9.2.2 Emergency stop button and rotary override switch CAUTION * Ensure that your workspace is ESD-protected! * Use EMC clothing! * Protect the display and protective screen from being scratched! You will find the reference diagrams for the individual work steps at the end of the description of the procedure. Removal 1. Remove the front with keyboard (see Section: "Accessories" "Slide-in labels" "Replacement" as in point 1 through 3). 2. Remove the lower part of the housing by removing the 8 housing screws and carefully swing it up. One of the screws is located under the cover of the connecting cable (A). This cover (secured with 2 screws) must therefore be removed beforehand. 3. Disconnect the connectors on the two cables which are still connecting the housing parts (EMERGENCY STOP and MPI connecting cable) and put the housing base to one side. 4. Remove the EMERGENCY STOP button by unscrewing the threaded ring, either manually or with a wrench (supplied by Rafi, Order No. 5.58002.019) and pull the switch out downwards. 5. Remove the override connector and backlight inverter connector from the board. 6. Remove the clamping frame of the LCD ribbon cable and carefully pull it out to the side (C). 7. Undo the 8 fixing screws in the board. 8. Pull the board carefully upwards off the housing lid and turn the lid over. Important: Protect the plug connectors on the rear against damage! 9. Unscrew the nut securing the rotary override switch (12 mm wrench width) and pull the switch out downwards. Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 541 Handheld Terminal HT 6 23.9 Replacement parts Reference diagrams (A) Figure 23-15 HT 6 after housing has been unscrewed and opened (1) Housing base (2) Cover of the connecting cable (rear side) (3) MPI connecting cable (4) LCD interface cable (5) Housing lid (6) Override cable (7) EMERGENCY STOP cable (B) Figure 23-16 Rear view of housing lid after housing base has been removed 542 (1) Backlight inverter connector (2) LCD ribbon cable (3) Override rotary switch (covered) (4) Override connector (5) emergency stop push button Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Handheld Terminal HT 6 23.9 Replacement parts (C) Figure 23-17 Removing (left) and attaching (right) a membrane connector (as in the OP 012 example) (1) Clamping frame of socket (D) Figure 23-18 Dismantled EMERGENCY STOP switch (1) Positioning pin (2) Flat gasket (3) Threaded ring (4) emergency stop push button (5) Rear face of housing lid (E) Figure 23-19 Dismantled rotary override switch (1) Sealing ring (2) Lock nut (wrench size 12) Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 543 Handheld Terminal HT 6 23.9 Replacement parts Mounting Install the unit by following the same procedure in the reverse order, but note the following points: Emergency stop push button Hole in flat gasket must be centered on the positioning pin. Positioning pin must latch into hole in housing. Torque for threaded ring: 0.8 Nm Rotary override switch Make sure that the sealing ring is seated correctly. When being installed, the cable must show in the direction of the housing and it must be folded in such a manner that it remains inside the housing seal. Torque for lock nut: 0.7 Nm Board Prior to installation, the backlight inverter cable must be connected and the ribbon cable must be threaded through the slit in the board. Place the board in position vertically, making sure that you do not bend the plug connectors. Tighten the board fastening screws (torque: 0.8 Nm). Connect the cable again (carefully insert the ribbon cable as far as the stop, then secure it using the clamping frame). Front with keyboard Install as described in Section: "Accessories" "Slide-in labels" "Replacement". Push the override knob (in zero position) onto the axis and tighten the screws. Fit the cover to the override knob. Casing Place base on lid, making sure that seal is correctly seated. Screw together with a torque of 0.8 Nm 544 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Handheld Terminal HT 6 23.10 Accessories 23.10 Accessories 23.10.1 Overview The following accessories are available for the HT 6: 23.10.2 Description Order No.: Note Distributor incl. shorting plug 6FX2 006-1BH01 for 4-core enabling Connecting cable for distributor 6FX2006-1BC01 6FX2 002-1AA83-1__0 for 3-core enabling, length max. 40 m Connecting cable for distributor 6FX2006-1BH01 6FX2 002-1AA23-1__0 for 4-core enabling, length max. 40 m Slide-in labels (included in the HT 6 delivery) for self-labeling Slide-in labels 23.10.2.1 replacement For the HT 6, the traversing and function keys U1, ..., U8 can be labeled by the user as desired (see Section: "Control and display elements" --> "View"). The labeling strips can be replaced after the HT 6 front with keyboard has been disassembled (Fig. , right). Note The dismounted front with keyboard must be totally protected from soiling, otherwise the readability of the display and key labels can be permanently affected. If the inner face becomes dirty, any dirt must be carefully removed using an Isopropanol cleansing agent or a cellulose cloth soaked in Isopropanol. Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 545 Handheld Terminal HT 6 23.10 Accessories Figure 23-20 Changing the slide-in labels (1) Film labels (2) Flat connector (3) Clamping lugs (2 of 4) (4) Grooves for levering off the front with keyboard (5) Knob of rotary override switch (6) Cover Procedure - dismantling 1. Remove the knob of the rotary override switch (5) in zero position. 2. Lever the cover off (6) using a flat tool (screwdriver) and remove the expanding screw. 3. Pull the button from the shaft. 4. Press in the four clamping lugs (3) and lever the front with keyboard off by inserting a screwdriver into the grooves(4) in the handhold opening. 5. Carefully pull out the flat connector (2) vertically. 6. Turn the front with keyboard around and pull out the labeling film (1), if present. 7. Guide in the new labeling strip. 8. When replacing the front with keyboard, plug in the flat connector (2) vertically taking care not to bend the protruding pins in the base and allow the cover to latch in place by applying gentle pressure. 546 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Handheld Terminal HT 6 23.10 Accessories Procedure - Mounting Install the override button in reverse order. Put the override button on with the pointer in the zero position. Tighten it with the expanding screw. Put the cover on. 23.10.2.2 Labeling You can also use your own self-labeled label strips made of normal paper (80 g/m2). The dimensions (in mm) can be obtained from the figure. The crosses indicate the center of the text or symbol. 6OLGHLQODEHOV IRUWUDYHUVLQJNH\V 6OLGHLQODEHOV IRUIXQFWLRQNH\V 5 5 Figure 23-21 Dimensional drawing for labeling the slide-in labels Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 547 Handheld Terminal HT 6 23.10 Accessories 548 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 24 Handheld Terminal HT 8 24.1 Description The SINUMERIK HT 8 is an handheld operating and programming device that combines the functions of an operator panel front and a machine control panel. It allows direct system and machine operation from any location and works according to the Thin Client principle (mobile Thin Client, see Section: "Thin Client Unit"). The HT 8 has a 7.5" TFT color display and is operated via a touch screen and membrane keys. It is equipped with an EMERGENCY STOP button and two 3-stage enabling buttons for left and right-handed people. Its safety concept allows working in the danger zone of the machine, which is needed for teaching. The HT 8 is connected to the terminal box Plus PN Hot plug-capable. This allows troublefree connecting and disconnecting of the connector during operation, without triggering an emergency stop. The HT 8 can be safely kept and operated in a stationary manner in the wall holder. The wall holder is available as an accessory (s. Chapter: "Accessories"). The HT 8 is available in two variants: with enabling button, emergency stop button, override rotary switch with enabling button, emergency stop button, rotary override switch and handwheel (available soon) Validity The following description applies to the following components: Description Characteristics HT 8 Enabling button, emergency stop button, override rotary switch Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Order No.: 6FC5403-0AA20-0AA0 549 Handheld Terminal HT 8 24.1 Description Function blocks In the unit: PCB with CPU, memory Ethernet Controller Device front: LC display as a Touch Screen - 640 x 480 (VGA) Color TFT - Inverter on board 52-key touch-sensitive keypad - 24 machine control keys - 28 control keys (number block keys, cursor pad, function keys) Emergency stop button Rotary override switch (19 positions) Handwheel (optional) Device rear side: 2 enabling buttons (2-channel, 3-stage) Serial interfaces: - HT 8 connecting cable to terminal box / connection module - USB interface (with dummy plugs) +24 V power supply Buffer battery (optional) Connectable controls SINUMERIK 810D / 840D with PCU 50.3 550 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Handheld Terminal HT 8 24.2 Unplugging/plugging during operation 24.2 Unplugging/plugging during operation Trouble-free disconnection and connection of the HT 8 during machine operation requires the following: Release or override of the HT 8 EMERGENCY STOP Plugging the dummy plug after unplugging the HT 8 DANGER Emergency stop switches that are inactive * may not be recognizable as such or * may not be accessible This is to prevent the EMERGENCY STOP switch from being used inadvertently. Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 551 Handheld Terminal HT 8 24.2 Unplugging/plugging during operation (PHUJVWRSFLUFXLW V\VWHPHPHUJVWRS .H\VZLWFK ZLWKSRVLWLYHDFWLRQFRQWDFWV .H\VZLWFK 21 (PHUJHQF\6WRSRYHUULGHSDVVLYH +7SOXJJHGLQ ; 6LJQDOWR3/& (OHFWU VZLWFK &RQQHFWLRQPRGXOH )&$$$$ *1' ; 9 ; )LOWHU &XUUHQWOLPLW 9 0 6KLHOG *1' +7 (PHUJVWRSEXWWRQ .H\VZLWFKFRQVLVWLQJRI VZLWFKLQJHOHPHQWV6%$DQG RSHUDWRUFRQWUROHOHPHQW6%RU6% DSSURSULDWHVDIHW\ORFNDVUHTXLUHG &DWDORJ6ZLWFKLQJGHYLFHVDQGV\VWHPV 16. DW$ '&' Figure 24-1 552 7ULJJHUVDWLPHU ,IWKHVLJQDOOHYHOLVVWLOOORZDIWHUWKHPRQLWRULQJSHULRG DSSUR[PLQ WKH3/&HPHUJHQF\VWRS PXVWEHWULJJHUHG 7RHQVXUHWKH+,*+/2:WUDQVLWLRQRIWKHOHYHO LWPD\EHQHFHVVDU\WRXVHDSXOOGRZQUHVLVWRU Connecting module 6FC5303-0AA01-1AA0: Recommended circuit for EMERGENCY STOP override (illustration shows keyswitch set to "ON" with HT 8 connected) Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Handheld Terminal HT 8 24.2 Unplugging/plugging during operation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igure 24-2 Connection module 6FC5303-0AA01-1AA0: EMERGENCY STOP override (illustration shows keyswitch set to "ON" with shorting plug connected) Disconnecting the HT8 Keyswitch is set to "ON" position, HT 8 connection at distributor is active (incl. emergency stop) 1. With the keyswitch in the "OFF" position, the emergency stop circuits of the HT 8 are jumpered. 2. At the same time, the HT 8 supply voltage is disconnected and a monitoring signal to the PLC is set to the LOW level (provide a pull-down resistor if necessary). This HIGH-LOW transition starts a timer in the PLC, which opens the EMERGENCY STOP circuit via the relevant PLC outputs and series-connected relays after the changeover period (approx. 5 min) if the keyswitch is not reset to its initial position within this period. Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 553 Handheld Terminal HT 8 24.2 Unplugging/plugging during operation 3. The HT 8 must be removed within the changeover period and the EMERGENCY STOP circuit overridden using a shorting plug. Connecting the HT8 Changeover from shorting plug to HT 8 connection is carried out in reverse order. Detectability of a connected HT 8 in the PLC 1. HW solution: The X7 interface of the connecting module Basic PN signals "HT 8 Present" on pin 1 for the "active" connecting module (see Section: "Connections" "Connecting module Basic PN" "Interfaces"). If the connecting module is "inactive", this signal is not set. This makes the "active" connecting module detectable in the PLC by wiring the abovementioned pins of all connecting modules to digital I/Os on PLC I/O modules. 2. Permanently configured MCPs / HT 8 on one control: If there are only permanently configured MCPs / HT 8 on a control, removal of the MCP or HT 8 triggers the PLC alarm "400260 Machine Control Panel failed". Based on this, an "active" or "inactive" MCP / HT 8 in the PLC can be detected. The failure of an MCP / HT 8 is, however, only detected in the PLC if max. 2 MCP / HT 8 are permanently configured and no MCP changeover by means of FB9 (e.g. triggered by HMI when operator focus is switched). 554 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Handheld Terminal HT 8 24.3 Technical specifications 24.3 Technical specifications Security Safety class III according to IEC 60536 Degree of protection per EN 60529 IP 65 Approvals CE / cULus Electrical specifications Input voltage Current carrying capacity 24 V DC (via HT 8 cable, via cable connection box) Enabling button: 10 - 400 mA / 2-channel, 3-stage EMERGENCY STOP button: Max. current carrying capacity USB 1.1 interface: Power consumption, max. 10 - 1000 mA / 2-channel 100 mA Approx. 13 W Mechanical data Dimensions (mm) Diameter approx. 290 Height (without operating elements) approx. 65 Weight 1,730 g Fall height, max. 1.20 m Mechanical ambient conditions Operation Transport (in transport packaging) Vibratory load 10 -58 Hz: 0.075 mm 58 -500 Hz: 10 m/s2 3M4 per EN 60721-3-3 5 -9 Hz: 3.5 mm 9 -500 Hz: 9.8 m/s2 2M2 per EN 60721-3-2 Shock stressing 150 m/s2, 11 ms, 18 shocks according to EN 60068-2-27 250 m/s2, 6 ms 6000 shocks according to EN 60068-2-29 Climatic ambient conditions Cooling By natural convection Condensation, spraying water and icing Supply air Applicable standards Climate class Temperature limits Temperature change Limits for relative humidity Permissible change in the relative air humidity Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Not permitted Without caustic gases, dusts and oils Operation Storage/shipping (in transport packaging) EN 60721-3-3 EN 60721-3-1 / -3-2 3K5 1K3 / 2K4 0 ... 45 C -20 ... 60C Max. 10 K/h Max. 18 K/h 5 ... 85% 5 ... 95% max. 0.1 % /min 555 Handheld Terminal HT 8 24.4 Spare parts Display Size 24.4 7.5" TFT Resolution 640 x 480 pixels Service life At ambient temperatures of > 40C and long periods of non-use, it is advisable to activate the screen saver function (via the display machine data DISPLAY_BLACK_TIME). Spare parts The following spare parts are available for the HT 8: Description Service pack connection box 556 Note Number Blind plugs for cable compartment 1 Cable glands for connection box 2 1 set of screws for connection box cover 1 Terminal blocks for connection box 2 Order No.: 6XV6574-1AA04-4AA0 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Handheld Terminal HT 8 24.5 Operator controls and indicators 24.5 Operator controls and indicators 24.5.1 View Front Figure 24-3 (1) Operator interface of the HT8 Emergency Stop button (2) Rotary override switch (3) Protective collar (4) Display / Touch screen (5) HMI control keys (6) Function keys machine control panel Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 557 Handheld Terminal HT 8 24.5 Operator controls and indicators Rear side Rear side of unit HT 8 USB 1.1 connection (1) Enabling buttons (one left and one right, under the handhold) (2) Cable duct cover (3) Second cable entry (connector with integrated USB 1.1 connection) (4) Sleeve for connecting cable (5) Connecting cable (1) Connector with integrated USB 1.1 connection (2) USB protective cap Bottom The HT 8 consists of a double-walled housing (upper and lower shells). On the lower shell, the HT 8 has three small drill-holes (2). These drill-holes are attached for the purpose of diverting the liquid that can penetrate into the space between the doublewalled housing if the malleable protective shroud on the upper shell is pushed through. Figure 24-4 (1) 558 Lower shell HT 8 Upper shell (2) Holes (3) Lower shell Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Handheld Terminal HT 8 24.5 Operator controls and indicators 24.5.2 Description Display / Touch screen The display is a backlit CCFL unit. Its service life can be prolonged if the brightness is reduced by dimming. All the application-specific functions are displayed on the touch-sensitive display. One touch of a finger on the corresponding key, triggers the respective function. CAUTION Do not touch the operating elements of the display with pointed or hard objects. This may considerably reduce their service lives. In order to achieve precise assignment by pixels, the touch-sensor must be calibrated and adjusted to the touch screen. Information on calibrating the touch screen of the HT8 can be found under: IM5 / Commissioning TCU and HT 8 Note Calibration of the touch sensor may also become necessary during operation, because the resistance values of the touch membrane change when there is a temperature change. Membrane keyboard On the front side of the HT8, 52 keys are arranged in several key blocks (see Section: "Control and display elements" --> "View") Function keys machine control panel links: START, STOP, RESET, AUTO, JOG, TEACH, ALARM CANCEL Bottom: U (User button) right: 2 x 6 traversing keys, 4 user keys (can be freely assigned) HMI operating keys The number block contains the numbers 1-9, the decimal point and the minus sign The cursor pad is used to navigate on the screen. 7 keys for - Input - Menu change - Switch-over of the softkey bars - Help function Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 559 Handheld Terminal HT 8 24.5 Operator controls and indicators Emergency Stop button The red mushroom-shaped head of the EMERGENCY STOP button is provided with a yellow ring. Directly under the mushroom-shaped head, there is also a black ring which identifies the position status of the EMERGENCY STOP button. State Ring (black) visible not visible Emergency Stop button Not pressed Pressed If an EMERGENY STOP is triggered, the button locks into place. If the button is locked in place, it can be unlocked by rotating it to the right. Emergency stop button Press the red button in emergencies when people are at risk, there is the danger of machines or the workpiece being damaged. As a rule, when operating the EMERGENCY STOP button, all drives are brought to a standstill with max. braking torque. Machine manufacturer For other reactions to the EMERGENCY STOP: refer to the machine tool manufacturer's instructions The signals are sent via the the connecting cable to the terminal box or the connection module and are available for further wiring. Rotary override switch The rotary override switch of the HT 8 has 19 positions. The evaluation scale (0 to max.) is specified by the machine's manufacture in the form of machine data. Agreement button The HT 8 has two enabling buttons that are logically grouped. This allows the enabling function to be triggered by either the left or the right hand during normal operation. The enabling buttons are configured as 2-channel, 3-position switches for the following button positions: Released (no activation) Enabling (center position) - enabling for channel 1 and 2 is on the same switch. Panic (completely pushed through) 560 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Handheld Terminal HT 8 24.5 Operator controls and indicators The signals are sent via the the connecting cable to the terminal box or the connection module and are available for further wiring in the control cabinet. Interface USB 1.1 For connecting the keyboard and mouse, there is a USB 1.1 interface. It is integrated in the connector, which closes off one of the two cable inlets on the rear side of the HT 8 (see Section: "Control and display elements" --> "View") NOTICE The service life of the USB connector is a max. of 1,300 connection cycles. After this period, it should be replaced. Note Replace the USB connector if its protective cap is torn, because in this case, the connector is no longer protected from dirt. Only plug a USB FlashDrive into this port for service purposes. NOTICE A plugged-in USB FlashDrive can be damaged or broken off if the device falls. 24.5.3 Screen brightness control If a screen with high contrast is displayed unchanged for longer than 1 hour, the screen brightness control must be activated (screen switched dark) in order to protect the TFT display against so-called "burn-in" of the last displayed screen. For more information see: /BEM/: Operator's Guide HMI Advanced /IAM/: IM4 Start-up of HMI Advanced CAUTION You may do irreversible damage to your TFT display if the screen brightness control is not activated. Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 561 Handheld Terminal HT 8 24.6 Interfaces 24.6 Interfaces 24.6.1 Overview The following figure shows the connection of the individual function units to the interfaces of the HT 8. $JUHHPHQWEXWWRQ ZLWK/RJLF (PHUJHQF\ 6WRSEXWWRQ 2YHUULGHVZLWFK +DQGZKHHO 7RXFK 0HPEUDQHNH\E 0DWUL[NH\VDQG GLUHFWNH\V &&)/ %DFNOLJKW 7)7'LVSOD\ +70DLQERDUG ; 9HPHUJHQF\ VWRSSXVKEXWWRQ $JUHHPHQWEXWWRQ ; ; (WKHUQHW 86%VRFNHW 033+7& Figure 24-5 Block diagram of HT8 interfaces 24.6.2 Description &RQQHFWLQJPRGXOH %DVLF31 FDELQHWPRXQWLQJ &RQQHFWLQJER[ ,3 %DVLF31 3OXV31 Signal type 562 B Bi-directional signal O Signal output V Power supply I Signal input VI Voltage input VO Voltage output K Contact Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Handheld Terminal HT 8 24.6 Interfaces X3: Ethernet Connector designation: X3 Connector type: 8-pole RJ45-socket with interlock (above) Table 24-1 X3 connector assignment Pin Signal Signal type 1 TD+ 2 TD- 3 RD+ I Receive data + 4 - - Unassigned 5 - - Unassigned 6 RD- I Receive data - 7 - - Unassigned 8 - - Unassigned O Meaning Transmit data + Transmit data - X5: USB 1.1 connection Connector designation: X5 Connector type: 6-pole plug connector Table 24-2 Assignment of connector X5 Pin Signal Signal type Meaning 1 Shield V Shield connection 2 +5 V VO Power supply for external devices 3 USB-DN 4 USB-DP B 5 0V VO Ground 6 Shield V Shield connection Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 USB data channel 1 USB data+, channel 1 563 Handheld Terminal HT 8 24.6 Interfaces X51: Supply 2 $ $ $ $ $ SLQ $ % Figure 24-6 (1) % % % % % X51: Supply 2 Recess Connector designation: X 51 Connector type: 12-pole connector plug with coding and locking Pin Signal Signal type Meaning Pin Signal Signal type Meaning A1 N.C. - Unassigned B1 N.C. - Unassigned A2 Enable 2+ O Enabling button Channel 2, digital B2 ENABLE 2- O Enabling button Channel 2, digital A3 Enable 1+ Enabling button Channel 1, digital B3 ENABLE 1- A4 STOP -13 EMERGENCY STOP circuit 2 B4 STOP -14 A5 STOP -23 EMERGENCY STOP circuit 1 B5 STOP -24 A6 P24 +24V power supply B6 M24 564 K VI Enabling button Channel 1, digital K EMERGENCY STOP circuit 2 EMERGENCY STOP circuit 1 VI External ground Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Handheld Terminal HT 8 24.7 Connectors 24.7 Connectors 24.7.1 Overview The HT 8 is connected via Ethernet (see Section: "Interfaces" "Overview."). For a connection via Ethernet the individual bus participants communicate via terminal box Basic PN / terminal box Plus PN Connection module Basic PN (for control cabinet installation) or MPP 483HTC HT 8 with Terminal box Basic PN / Plus PN Connection module Basic PN (WKHUQHW MPP 483HTC (WKHUQHW (WKHUQHW (WKHUQHW 6DIHW\ VLJQDOV (WKHUQHW 6DIHW\ VLJQDOV (WKHUQHW (WKHUQHW 6DIHW\ VLJQDOV (WKHUQHW The connection via the terminal box Plus PN allows quick connecting and disconnecting while the machine is operating without the EMER STOP being triggered. If no HT 8 is connected, observe: DANGER Emergency stop switches that are inactive * may not be recognizable as such * may not be accessible. This is to prevent the EMERGENCY STOP switch from being used inadvertently. 24.7.2 MPP 483HTC The MPP 483HTC variant of the machine control panel MPP 483 has an integrated connection module thereby providing a connection option for the HT 8. Emergency Stop override For the MPP 483HTC, the EMER STOP circuit is overridden by a keyswitch. The activation of the keyswitch is sent to the PLC, which generates a message after a certain period of time if the keyswitch was held for too long or remains activated due to a defect. Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 565 Handheld Terminal HT 8 24.7 Connectors 24.7.3 Connecting cable The connecting cable is an industrial cable and, thus, resistant to many solvents and lubricants. The flexural strength is geared to the actual usage conditions. The connecting cable is available in different lengths. You will find detailed information in Section: "Accessories." Figure 24-7 Connecting cable of the HT 8 (1) Metallic push-pull circular connector (ODU connector) (2) Strain relief and kink protection for connecting cable (3) RJ45 connector (Ethernet connection) (4) Plug-in connector for (Enabling button, EMER STOP, 24V and safety signals) The connecting cable is connected to the HT8 via the RJ45 connector (3) and the plug-in connector (4). The ODU connector (1) serves to connect the connecting cable to the terminal box PN or the connection module PN (control cabinet installation). The tightening torque for the nut of the ODU socket is 6.5 Nm. The HT 8 has two cable inlets on its rear side for connecting the cable. This makes it possible to attach the connecting cable on either the right or left side. One of the cable inlets is closed at the factory by a connector in which an IP65-capable USB 1.1-connection is integrated. 566 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Handheld Terminal HT 8 24.7 Connectors Figure 24-8 Rear side of the HT 8 with cable inlets (1) Cable inlet without connecter plug (2) Cable inlet with connector plug Laying the connecting cable 1. Open the cable duct cover by unscrewing the six PT screws (4 x 20 mm) approximately 1 cm. Use a size 2 Phillips screwdriver Ensure that you do not exceed the tightening torque of max. 0.4 - 0.5 Nm. Cable duct cover open Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 567 Handheld Terminal HT 8 24.7 Connectors 2. Insert the connecting cable into the cable inlet that suits your intended application (left or right). Press the cable downward slightly until it rests completely on the fastening burls (2) . Put a plug in the cable inlet that you do not intend to use. 3. Press the plug connector firmly into the power supply socket (1). NOTICE When plugging in the connector plug, ensure that all cables are lying straight in the cable guide. Otherwise, crushed wires can negatively impact the functionality. Check to ensure that all wires are aligned and straight and check the firm seating of the plug-in connector before you carry out the next step. 4. Connect the RJ-45 connector to the Ethernet socket. 568 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Handheld Terminal HT 8 24.7 Connectors Correctly laid connecting cable HT 8 left rear side HT 8 right rear side 5. Put the cable duct cover on and secure it by tightening the six screws. NOTICE The housing of the HT 8 is made of plastic. Therefore, the mounting hole threads cannot handle the same amount of stress as a comparable metallic housing. Therefore, do not exceed 0.4 to 0.5 Nm of torque when tightening the screws (also for protecting the connecting cable). If you use electric screwdrivers, ensure the max. speed of 600 RPM is adhered to (torque: 1 Nm). The screws of the cable duct cover may only be loosened or tightened a maximum of 20 times. Otherwise, there is the danger that the threads might become damaged and the seal of the housing will be compromised which could lead to failure of the device. 24.7.4 Power Supply The HT 8 is supplied with power via the connecting cable of the terminal box PN or of the connecting module PN. The input voltage range is designed for +24 V DC. Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 569 Handheld Terminal HT 8 24.7 Connectors 24.7.5 Terminal Box PN 24.7.5.1 Features Figure 24-9 Terminal Box PN (1) LEDs (2) Screwed joint for power supply cable and shield (3) Screwed joint for cable with supplementary Stop and enabling button signals and for PLC-accompanying signals (4) Connecting socket for the connector plug of the connecting cable (covered with dummy cap) (5) Screwed joint for process data line (Ethernet) Note Protection class IP65 at the terminal box is ensured with plugged-in HT 8 or plugged-in dummy cap. The terminal box PN is available in two variants. Terminal box Basic PN Terminal box Plus PN Note The exterior of the terminal box PN variants differ only in the printing on the side. 570 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Handheld Terminal HT 8 24.7 Connectors Terminal box Plus PN The terminal box PN is not capable of acting as a hot-plug. This means that it is possible to connect and disconnect during operation without any disruption. The EMER STOP circuit is automatically maintained during the switching of connectors. The Terminal box Plus PN is available under order no.6AV6671-5AE11-0AX0. Terminal box Basic PN The terminal box Basic PN can be used if no hot plug-capability is required. The EMER STOP circuit can be overridden here by external mechanisms. The Terminal box Basic PN is available under order no.6AV6671-5AE01-0AX0. Clearance The following clearances are required around the Terminal Box PN: Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 571 Handheld Terminal HT 8 24.7 Connectors 24.7.5.2 Terminal box Plus PN The Terminal Box Plus PN differs from a Terminal Box Basic PN due to four relays that are mounted on the board. Figure 24-10 Terminal box Plus PN (1) Board (2) Relay Switching statuses of the EMERGENCY STOP circuit with HT 8 connectedwith emergency stop button and terminal box Plus PN HT 8 Emergency Stop button connected Not pressed connected Pressed not connected - Switch status, Emergency Stop circuit Emergency stop circuit in the terminal box remains closed. The EMER STOP circuit in the terminal box is open. The system to be monitored is stopped. Emergency stop circuit in the terminal box remains closed. WARNING disconnect HT 8 If you disconnect the HT 8 from the terminal box Plus PN, the EMER STOP circuit is closed and the stop state of the system to be monitored is cleared. This occurs irrespective of whether the EMER STOP button has been pressed on the HT 8. 572 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Handheld Terminal HT 8 24.7 Connectors 24.7.5.3 Terminal box Basic PN In contrast to the Terminal Box Plus PN, the "Stop loop through" function is not implemented in the Terminal Box Basic PN. Relays are therefore not required. Figure 24-11 Terminal box Basic PN CAUTION The EMER STOP circuit is controlled via the EMER STOP button when the HT 8 is connected. If the connecting cable of the HT 8 is disconnected from the terminal box Basic PN, the EMER STOP circuit is interrupted. This leads to a reliable machine stop or an EMER STOP of the system to be monitored. Switching statuses of the EMERGENCY STOP circuit with HT 8 connectedwith emergency stop button and terminal box Basic PN HT 8 EMERGENCY STOP key Switch status EMERGENCY STOP circuit connected Not pressed connected Pressed The EMER STOP circuit in the terminal box is open. The system to be monitored is stopped. - The EMER STOP circuit in the terminal box is open. The system to be monitored is stopped. not connected Emergency stop circuit in the terminal box remains closed. WARNING If you have shut down the system to be monitored, you can only release the EMER STOP button or place the system to be monitored back into operation if the condition that triggered the EMER STOP function has been corrected and a safe restart is carried out. Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 573 Handheld Terminal HT 8 24.7 Connectors 24.7.5.4 Interface assignments Information for interface assignment of the terminal box PN can be found under SIMATIC HMI/Operating unit Mobile Panel 177 (WinCC flexible) www.siemens.de\simatic-doku 24.7.6 Connection module Basic PN 24.7.6.1 Features The connection module Basic PN was specially developed for installation in the control cabinet. The connector protrudes through the wall of the control cabinet so that the HT 8 can be connected from the outside. The Connection module box Basic PN is available under order no.6FC5303-0AA01-1AA0. 3&8 +0, (WKHUQHW 03, 0DFKLQH FRQWUROSDQHO +7 (PHUJHQF\VWRS FLUFXLWV &RQQHFWLRQ PRGXO31 3 &RPELQHGOLQH +7 3 6WDWXVVLJQDOV (PHUJHQF\VWRS 3DQHOSUHVHQW 3 &RQWUROOHUV ' ' 6DIHW\ &RPELQDWLRQ 7. Figure 24-12 Block diagram - control cabinet installation 574 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Handheld Terminal HT 8 24.7 Connectors The connection module Basic PN is not hot plug-capable. The EMER STOP lines of the HT 8 are not monitored, but are placed directly on the EMER STOP circuit For overriding the EMER STOP circuit during connecting or disconnecting the HT 8, there is a button or keyswitch (see Section: "Connecting/disconnecting during operation"). Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 575 Handheld Terminal HT 8 24.7 Connectors 24.7.6.2 Dimension drawing 6 6 ; ; ; ; 0 *URXQG ; ; ; DO RQ SWL R )L[LQJKROHV 0 0 0 (ORQJDWHGKROHVWREHXVHGLIPRGXOHVDUHWREHVFUHZPRXQWHGWRWKHLQVLGHRIWKHFDELQHW Figure 24-13 HT8 connection module Basic PN - dimension drawing for control cabinet installation 576 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Handheld Terminal HT 8 24.7 Connectors 24.7.6.3 Interfaces The HT 8 is connected to the connection module Basic PN via a round connector. The interfaces of the connection module are located on the rear side (see figure). 6 6 6 6 ; ; ; ; ; ; ; S1 / S2 DIP Fix switches (rotary coding switch) (1) Interfaces with attached connectors Information on setting the bus addresses can be found under: IM5 / Commissioning TCU and HT 8 PN pin assignments of the connectors Signal type: I Input (Input) O Output (Output) B Bi-directional signals P Potential X3: Power supply For the pin assignments of the power supply interface X3, refer to Section: "Connection conditions" "Secondary electrical conditions" "Pin assignments of the interfaces". Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 577 Handheld Terminal HT 8 24.7 Connectors X7: Panel Present Connector designation: X7 Connector type: 6-pole Phoenix terminal Table 24-3 Assignment of the interface Panel Present X7 Pin Signal name Signal type Meaning 1 PRES O "High": Panel (HT 8) plugged in 2 XCTL O "Low": EMER STOP button pressed 3 XFAULT O "Low": Error in EMER STOP electronics 4 N.C. - Unassigned 5 N.C. - Unassigned 6 M (GND) P Ground 1) Function 1) 1) not implemented in Basic PN variant, output is not switched to "High" X8: Emergency Stop wiring terminal Connector designation: X8 Connector type: 4-pole Phoenix terminal Table 24-4 Assignment of the EMER STOP wiring terminal X8 Pin Protective circuit 1 On-board jumper between 1 and 2 2 3 4 On-board jumper between 3 and 4 Note Use this terminal for simple routing of the emergency stop cables, optional. The connector is only used to assist looping through. The connected pins 1 and 2 as well as 3 and 4 have no additional function on the connection module. 578 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Handheld Terminal HT 8 24.7 Connectors X20: Enabling buttons Connector designation: X20 Connector type: 8-pole Phoenix terminal Table 24-5 Assignment of the interface enabling buttons X20 Pin Signal name Signal type Meaning 1 ZUST1P I Electronic enabling button 1 P 2 ZUST1M O Electronic enabling button 1 M 3 ZUST2P I Electronic enabling button 2 P 4 ZUST2M O Electronic enabling button 2 M 5 N.C. - Unassigned 6 N.C. - Unassigned 7 N.C. - Unassigned 8 N.C. - Unassigned X21: EMER STOP and keyswitch Connector designation: X21 Connector type: 10-pole Phoenix terminal Table 24-6 Assignment of the interface EMER STOP and keyswitch X21 Pin Signal name 1 STOP23 2 STOP24 3 STOP13 4 STOP14 5 M P 6 N.C. - 7 IN_E9 8 P24_FILT 9 IN_E9_EXT 10 IN_E12_EXT Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Signal type Meaning Emergency Stop circuit B Emerg. stop circuit Emerg. stop circuit Emerg. stop circuit Ground P24 switched by keyswitches P Filtered 24 V module power supply O "High": Terminating connector plugged in "High": Key-operated switch actuated 579 Handheld Terminal HT 8 24.7 Connectors 24.7.6.4 Installing the dummy plug Procedure (1) Lock nut 1. Unscrew the lock nuts. 2. Attach the dummy plug bracket. 3. Tighten the lock nut and put the dummy plug into the bracket. 580 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Handheld Terminal HT 8 24.7 Connectors Note If you never remove the HT8 from the connection module, it is not necessary to install the dummy plug. Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 581 Handheld Terminal HT 8 24.8 Accessories 24.8 Accessories 24.8.1 Overview The following accessories are available for the HT 8: Description Note Number Order No.: Connection box Plus PN with automatic emergency stop override for mounting in the system 1 6AV6671-5AE11-0AX0 Connection box Basic PN without automatic emergency stop override for mounting in the system 1 6AV6671-5AE01-0AX0 Connecting module Basic PN without automatic emergency stop override for mounting in the system Wall holder for safekeeping, also suitable for stationary operation 1 6AV6574-1AF04-4AA0 Length: 2 m 1 6XV1440-4BH20 Length: 5 m 1 6XV1440-4BH50 Length: 8 m 1 6XV1440-4BH80 Length: 10 m 1 6XV1440-4BN10 Length: 15 m 1 6XV1440-4BN15 Length: 20 m 1 6XV1440-4BN20 Length: 25 m 1 6XV1440-4BN25 Connecting cable 24.8.2 6FC5303-0AA01-1AA0 Wall holder The HT 8 can be safely kept and operated in a stationary manner in the wall holder. (1) Hook for the grip on the handheld unit (2) Drill holes for screw fixing 582 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Handheld Terminal HT 8 24.8 Accessories Ensure that you position the wall holder in such a manner that the display of the hung-in HT 8 is not exposed directly to the sun's rays. the HT can be hung in based on ergonomic considerations. Therefore, choose a suitable mounting height. Dimension drawing Figure 24-14 HT8 wall holder - dimension drawing Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 583 Handheld Terminal HT 8 24.8 Accessories 584 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Mini handheld unit 25.1 25 Description The mini handheld unit (Mini HHU) is a small easy-to-handle unit for setting up and operating simple machines in the JobShop area or similar applications. Special attention has been paid to ergonomics and logical operating in the design of the housing and the arrangement of the control elements. The Mini HHU is intended for connection to 810D and 840D controls. It can also be used with the 840C and FM-NC. Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 585 Mini handheld unit 25.2 Operator controls and indicators 25.2 Operator controls and indicators 25.2.1 View Figure 25-1 586 83.5 Mini handheld unit (1) Emergency Stop button, two channels (2) Handwheel (3) Rapid traverse key for high-speed travel with traversing keys or handwheel (4) Magnetic clamps for securing to metal components (5) Enabling button, two channels, 3-positions (6) Connecting cable 1.5 m ... 3.5 m (7) Selection switch for 5 axes and neutral position (8) Function keys F1, F2, F3 (9) Traversing keys + direction / - direction Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Mini handheld unit 25.2 Operator controls and indicators 25.2.2 Description Emergency Stop button The emergency stop button must be pressed in an emergency 1. when a person is at risk, 2. When there is a danger of the machine or workpiece being damaged. Enabling button The enabling button is designed as a 3-way switch. This must be held in its central position for movements to be triggered. Axis selection switch The axis selection switch can be used to select up to five axes. The coding is carried out in Gray Code. Table 25-1 Coding of axis selection switch Connector X1 Switch position Function 0 - Mini HHU not connected 0 0 No axis selected Pin 8 Pin 9 Pin 10 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 Z Z axis selected 0 1 1 X X axis selected 1 1 1 Y Y axis selected 1 0 1 4 Axis 4 selected 0 0 1 5 Axis 5 selected Function keys The function keys can be used to trigger machine-specific functions. Traversing keys The + and - traversing keys can be used to trigger traversing movements on the axis selected via the axis selection switch. Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 587 Mini handheld unit 25.2 Operator controls and indicators Handwheel The handwheel can be used to initiate movements at the selected axis using the axis selection switch. The handwheel supplies two guide signals with 100 I/U. Rapid traverse key The rapid traverse key increases the traversing speed of the selected axis with the axis selector switch. The rapid traverse button is active both for traversing commands issued via the +/- keys and for handwheel signals. 588 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Mini handheld unit 25.3 Connection 25.3 Connection Connection kit A connection kit that must be ordered separately is required for connection of the mini HHU. This connection kit contains a flange socket made of metal for installation at the machine and a dummy plug for overriding the EMERGENCY STOP circuit when the HHU is not connected. You will find the order number in section: "Accessories." Mounting the flange socket on the control housing Figure 25-2 1. 2. 3. 4. Angle box Hole pattern for mounting Use the hole pattern for the wall of the control housing. Route the connecting cable through the large drill hole into the control housing. Mount the flange socket (with seal) onto the control housing. Connect the connecting cables according to the circuit diagram. An angle box is available as an option, which permits the cable outlet direction to be rotated through 90. You will find the order number in section: "Accessories." Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 589 Mini handheld unit 25.3 Connection Adapter plate To install the angle box or the metal flange socket in the location for plastic flange sockets, an adapter plate is available to enable installation in the existing holes / threads of the plastic flange socket. You will find the order number in section: "Accessories." Figure 25-3 Dimension drawing of the adapter plate Mini HHU connection The mini HHU is connected to the PLC or the connector for handwheels via a flange socket. The flange socket is part of the connection kit. The signals are sent to the NC in parallel (without MPI). There is no need for an additional distributor. E 9LEUDWLRQSURWHFWLRQ 2ULQJ Figure 25-4 Flange socket 1. Plug the connecting plug of the mini-HHU (or the jumper connector) into the detent lugs / guideways of the flange socket. 2. Use the twist lock to fasten it. Note If the plug is connected incorrectly, the twist lock will be damaged! 590 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Mini handheld unit 25.3 Connection Handwheel signals connection The 6FX8002-4AA21-1xx0 cable can be used to connect the handwheel signals to the NC. The pin contacts on the cable must be replaced with the socket contacts contained in the connection kit. Use the contacts supplied when connecting the cables. 24 x InterContec crimp socket contacts: 60.001.11 0.14 - 1.00 mm2 / AWG 25 -17 Note The crimping tool suggested should be used: InterContec crimping tool C0.101.00 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 591 Mini handheld unit 25.3 Connection Circuit diagram and sample connection PP \H PP JU PP UV PP EX PP UG PP EN PP YW PP \HEQ PP JUUV PP UGEX PP ZKJQ PP EQJQ PP ZK\H PP ZKJU PP 6 & $ $ EX PP & $ $ 6 6 6 6 6 ) 6 ) ) ) ) ) 9 % PP PP PP PP 6KLHOG 9 * UVEQ ZKEX EQEX ZKUG PP PP % % $ $ JUEQ ZKUV % 60 9'& 60 9 +DQGZKHHO 592 JQ 7 9'& PP $[LVVHOHFWLRQ =;< EQ 6 (QDEOLQJEXWWRQ 7R3/& PP 6 ; (PHUJHQF\VWRS (PHUJHQF\6WRSHQDEOLQJFLUFXLW ZK % % $ $ Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Mini handheld unit 25.4 Configuring 25.4 Configuring The FC76 module supplied in the toolbox supports configuration of the mini HHU. It is located in the toolbox in the BSP_PROG directory in the file Minibhg.zip. This module is included in the toolbox in version 5.1 and later only. For example in toolbox 5.1.x(8x0d\050104\disk1\Bsp_prog\Minibhg.zip or in toolbox 6.1.2(8x0d\060102\bsp_prog\Minibhg.zip. The FC76 contains a standard program for the mini HHU and is valid for use with SINUMERIK 840D/810D. The program is generally valid and therefore requires several input and output signals when called. To avoid collisions (caused by simultaneous access to one and the same signal), the FC2 (NCK-PLC interface) that occurs in the basic program must be processed before the FC76. Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 593 Mini handheld unit 25.5 Technical data 25.5 Technical data Table 25-2 Handheld unit Operator controls Enabling button 1 x: floating 2 channels, 3positions NO contact Emergency Stop button 1 x: floating 2 channels NC contact, locked by twisting Selection switch 5 axes: X, Y, Z. 4. 5 and neutral position Jog key + Positive traverse direction Jog key - Negative traverse direction Jog key Rapid traverse for jog keys and handwheel Function keys 3 x: F1, F2, F3 Handwheel 100 I/U Electrical data Operating voltage for switching signals 24 V Operating voltage for handwheel 5V 5 V current consumption Approx. 90 mA Handwheel signals RS 422 Emergency stop button 24 V 2A NC contact Enabling buttons 24 V 2A NO contact General data Housing Ergonomically optimized housing made from polyamide 6, control elements arranged by sense of touch Mounting 2 magnetic clamps Connecting cable Spiral cable 1.5 m; can be stretched to beyond 3.5 m; connector with pin contacts CE conformity Yes Mechanical data Dimensions approx. Height: 250 mm Weight Approx. 0.8 kg without connection cable Width: 110 mm Depth: 90 mm Ambient conditions Temperature ranges Temperature change Application/operati on Storage/transport 0 ... 55 C -20 ... 60 C Within 1 minute max. 0.2 K Permissible change in relative humidity EN 60721-3-3, Class 3K5 Within 1 minute Protection class Max. 0.1% IP65 Connection kit 594 Flange socket Made of metal with female contacts and dummy plug Dummy plug For overriding the EMERGENCY STOP circuit Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Mini handheld unit 25.6 Spare parts 25.6 Spare parts The following spare parts are available: Item name Order number Can be used with 6FX20071AD00 1AD10 2 x ZST PVC connectors 1AD01 1AD11 3 x ZST PVC connectors 1AD02 1AD12 3 x ZST Metal connectors Servo handwheel (5 VDC, A / B - push-pull, without dial) 1009439 x x x x x x Rotary selector switch (6 positions, without dial) 1009219 x x x x x x EMERGENCY STOP button (complete with keyset, label and switching element) 1009221 x x x x x x Enabling button, 2 stages (complete) 1009233 x x Enabling button, 3 stages (complete) 1009561 x x x x Set of operator buttons (for servo handwheel, rotary selector, enable key) 1009227 x x x x x Connection cable (coiled, wired on PVC connector, connection end preassembled) 1009081 x Connection cable (coiled, wired on metal connector, connection end preassembled) 1009700 Connection cable (straight, wired on PVC connector, connection end preassembled) 1009279 Connection cable (straight, wired on metal connector, connection end preassembled) 1009710 Flange-mounting socket-outlet, PVC (complete with seals and contacts) 1009084 Flange-mounting socket-outlet, metal (complete with seals and contacts) 1009714 Jumper connector, PVC (with jumpered EMERGENCY STOP contacts) 1009046 Jumper connector, metal (with jumpered EMERGENCY STOP contacts) 1009713 Connector housing PVC (without contacts) 1009040 Connector housing metal (without contacts, with anti-kink protection) 1009694 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x 595 Mini handheld unit 25.6 Spare parts Can be used with 6FX2007Coupling ring connector (for PVC connector mini HHU) 1009518 x x x x Set of crimp contact sockets for PVC connector (consisting of: 10 x 0.12-0.25 mm2, 30 x 0.20-0.56 mm2) 1009222 x x x x Set of crimp contact sockets for metal connector (consisting of: 30 x 0.14-1.00 mm2) 1009723 Set of crimp contact pins for PVC connector (consisting of: 10 x 0.12-0.25 mm2, 30 x 0.20-0.56 mm2) 1009223 Set of crimp contact pins for metal connector (consisting of: 30 x 0.14-1.00 mm2) 1009724 Crimp contacts: x x x x x x x x x x x x Tool: Ejector for crimp socket and pin contacts, PVC connector 0080811 x x x x Assembly tools for EMERGENCY STOP button 1009224 x x x x Pressure-cap remover for enable key 1009217 x x Extraction tool for contact insulator, metal connector 1009725 Order address R & D Steuerungstechnik GmbH + Co KG Service department Hocksteiner Weg 87-95 D-41189 Monchengladbach Tel. +49 (0) 2166-5506-34 Fax +49 (0) 2166-5506-55 596 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Mini handheld unit 25.7 Accessories 25.7 Accessories The following components are available as accessories for the mini handheld unit: Component Connection kit Order number: 6FX2006-1BG02 Remarks Flange socket made of metal with socket contacts and dummy plug for overriding the emergency stop circuit Angle box 6FX2006-1BG55 Angle box for connection kit, metal version Adapter plate 6FX2006-1BG44 Adapter plate for installing the metal flange socket in the plastic flange socket installlation location Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 597 Mini handheld unit 25.7 Accessories 598 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Handheld unit / distributor box 26.1 26 Description The handheld unit and the distributor box are offered in two wiring variants. 1. in the variant with a 2-channel enable key and 3-core connection of these keys, 2. in the variant with a 2-channel enable key and 4-core connection of these keys. In this version, monitoring for cross short-circuit in the enable circuit is possible. Due to modified connector design, these HHUs can only be operated on the distributor box designed for the corresponding mode. In the version with 4-core connection of the enable keys, the connector insert of the connector is arranged coded at an angle of 45 to avoid destruction of the unit by accidental wrong connection. A retaining shell is available as an accessory for B-MPI and A-MPC type HHUs. The HHU can therefore also be securely fastened to non-magnetic surfaces (see section: "Accessories"). Note The handheld unit is designed for operation with SINUMERIK. It cannot be used with SIMATIC. Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 599 Handheld unit / distributor box 26.2 Operator controls and indicators 26.2 Operator controls and indicators 26.2.1 View Handheld unit (1) 600 1 enabling button designed as a 3-position switch, two channels (2) Emergency Stop button, two channels (3) Two-line digital display 2 x 16 characters (4) 20 keys freely assignable by user (5) 16 LEDs freely controllable by user (6) Override switch with 12 positions (7) Key-switch with On/Off position (8) Electronic handwheel (9) Connecting cable, 10 m, or max. 3.5 m as a coiled cable (10) Suspension lug (11) Magnetic clamp Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Handheld unit / distributor box 26.2 Operator controls and indicators Key symbols The key symbols are on a slide-in label that can be changed as necessary. The labeling strip is located between the PCB and the front of the housing and can be accessed from the right. Replacing labeling strips To change the labeling strip, proceed as follows: Remove the labeling strip carefully to approx. halfway using flat pliers. Slide half of the new labeling strip under the old one. Remove the old labeling strip and slide the new one in to its final position. Magnetic clamp The magnetic clamp is not intended for permanent securing the HHU to the perpendicular sheet metal parts. CAUTION The HHU cannot be connected using the MPI cable 6FX 2002-4EA04-IAF0 (or other lengths) since the bus terminators are integral components of this cable. Please use the MPI cable specified in the catalog Literature: /Z/ Catalog NCZ If the connection between the HHU and the distributor box is interrupted (HHU cable pulled out), an emergency stop is triggered. There is no automatic EMERGENCY STOP overriding function. Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 601 Handheld unit / distributor box 26.2 Operator controls and indicators 26.2.2 Description Emergency stop button, NC contact, 24V/2A contact load Emergency stop button Press the red button in emergencies when people are at risk, there is the danger of machines or the workpiece being damaged. As a rule, when operating the EMERGENCY STOP button, all drives are brought to a standstill with max. braking torque. Turn the EMERGENCY STOP button counterclockwise to unlatch it. Machine manufacturer For other reactions to the EMERGENCY STOP: refer to the machine tool manufacturer's instructions Enabling button The enabling button is designed as a 3-position switch and is located at the left of the handheld unit. The buttons are NO contacts. They are two-channel keys. The connection is 3- or 4-core, depending on type. A 4-core connection allows cross short-circuit monitoring in the enable circuit. 24V/2A contact load. Handwheel The electronic handwheel supplies two tracks with rectangular signals. The signals can be tapped from the distributor box and taken to the NCU connector X121 via the cable distributor. Keylock switch Keyswitch with two positions is transmitted to the PLC. Override switch Switch with 12 positions is transmitted to the PLC. Keys 20 keys are transmitted to the PLC and are freely assignable by the user. The labeling symbols can be changed (unscrew HHU). 602 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Handheld unit / distributor box 26.2 Operator controls and indicators LED 16 LEDs in the keys, freely controllable via the PLC. Digital display 2-tier digital display, each with 16 characters controlled via the PLC Internal circuit of HHU and distributor box with 3-core connection for enabling button (PHUJHQF\6WRSEXWWRQ +DQGZKHHO (QDEOLQJEXWWRQ 7 ++8 ; 'LVWULEXWRUER[ ; $ $ % % =6 =6 9 9 &20 (0(5*(1&<6723 Figure 26-1 Internal circuit of EMERGENCY STOP button, handwheel, enabling buttons 3-core Internal circuit of HHU and distributor box with 4-core connection for enabling button +DQGZKHHO (QDEOLQJEXWWRQ 7 (PHUJHQF\6WRS EXWWRQ ++8 ; 'LVWULEXWRUER[ $ $ % % =6 =6 99 =6 ; =6 (0(5*(1&<6723 Figure 26-2 Internal circuit of EMERGENCY STOP button, handwheel; enabling buttons 4-core Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 603 Handheld unit / distributor box 26.3 Connectors 26.3 Connectors 26.3.1 Connecting a device Connecting cable The HHU is connected to the distributor box via the connecting cable (either a coiled cable with max. length 3.5 m or a 10 m connecting cable). Interface to distributor box The EMERGENCY STOP button and the enable keys, as well as handwheel signals and power supply are connected to terminal block X3. Connector to distributor box The HHU is connected to the distributor box, connector X4. The EMERGENCY STOP button, enabling buttons and handwheel signals are not transmitted to the PLC but decoupled in the distributor box terminal block X3. Power supply to the HHU is via the distributor box. All other signals are transmitted to the PLC via the MPI/OPI bus. Note Bus terminating resistors are integral components of the HHU. A maximum of two handheld units may be connected per bus segment. Further HHUs may be connected using repeaters. 604 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Handheld unit / distributor box 26.3 Connectors 26.3.2 Connecting several devices If more than one HHU is to be connected to a bus segment, or if the HHU cannot be connected at the end of the bus, a PROFIBUS repeater is recommended for the connection of the HHUs. 2)) 21 1&8 &&8 03,23, 2)) 2)) 21 2)) 0&3 'LVWULEXWRUER[ 'LVWULEXWRUER[ ++8 ++8 21 21 5HSHDWHU56 2)) 7HUPLQDWLQJUHVLVWRURSHQ 21 7HUPLQDWLQJUHVLVWRUFORVHG Figure 26-3 Connecting the HHU via repeater NOTICE The numerical control must be located at the end of the connection! Repeater RS-485 The repeater can be ordered under Order No. 6ES7972-0AA01-0XA0. For further information please refer to the Catalog: /IK10/ Industrial Communication Networks SIMATIC-NET Note * The cable length from the repeater to the distributor box must not exceed 2 m * Cable lengths for MPI/OPI, see /IADC/ Start-Up Guide 840D/810D, Section 3. More information on simultaneously operating several HHUs on a NCU can be found in the function description of the main machine, part 1, section: PLC basic program (P3), paragraph: "Projectability of machine control panels, handheld unit" under the key point: "MPI switchover, OPI address." Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 605 Handheld unit / distributor box 26.4 Unplugging/plugging during operation 26.4 Unplugging/plugging during operation Trouble-free plugging and unplugging of the HHU during machine operation requires: activation and deactivation of the power supply to the distributor box, release or override of the EMERGENCY STOP switch of the HHU, connection of the HHU to the OPI/MPI via PROFIBUS repeater. 1&8 &&8 21 03,23, 2)) 2)) 21 21 21 21 'LVWULEXWRUER[ 'LVWULEXWRUER[ ++8 5HSHDWHU56 2)) 7HUPLQDWLQJUHVLVWRURSHQ 21 7HUPLQDWLQJUHVLVWRUFORVHG Figure 26-4 21 Connecting the HHU via PROFIBUS repeater A PROFIBUS repeater must be connected upstream of the HHU distributor box for each branch. The individual bus segments (MPI/OPI line and/or the repeater and HHU) must be terminated with terminating resistors at the ends of the bus. Repeater RS-485 The repeater can be ordered under the number 6ES7 972-0AA00-0XA0. For more information, see catalog: /IK10/ Industrial Communication Networks SIMATIC-NET Note The HHU already has an installed bus terminating resistor. The cable length from the repeater to the distributor box must not exceed 2 m. A keyswitch with two positions and two contacts must be installed at each HHU connection point. 606 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Handheld unit / distributor box 26.4 Unplugging/plugging during operation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igure 26-5 Circuit proposal for EMERGENCY STOP bridging (the "keyswitch =ON" status is indicated when the HHU is plugged in) Note Please note that the customer is responsible for implementing the sample circuits. Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 607 Handheld unit / distributor box 26.4 Unplugging/plugging during operation Connecting the HHU Initial state Keyswitch is set to "OFF" position, HHU connection at distributor is passive. EMERGENCY STOP terminals to the HHU are short-circuited. Signal "HHU Stop" = 1 (or "HHU"=0), end communication. 1. Plug in HHU connector and screw down EMERGENCY STOP of HHU must be unlocked. 2. Set keyswitch to "ON", active. HHU becomes active. 3. Signal "HHU Stop" = 0, communication commences with the HHU. Disconnecting the HHU Initial state Keyswitch is set to "ON" position, HHU connection at distributor is active (incl. EMERGENCY STOP). Set keyswitch to "OFF," passive position. Signal "HHU Stop" = 0 switchover to 1 (end communication). HHU has no voltage and goes into passive mode. EMERGENCY STOP of HHU is short-circuited. 1. Loosen the HHU connector and unplug it. 2. The keyswitch is required for reasons of security, to ensure that an EMERGENCY STOP is triggered if an attempt is made to activate the HHU while it is not connected. DANGER Emergency stop switches that are inactive * should not be detected as such or * should not be accessible This is to prevent the emergency stop button (e.g. on the HHU) from being used inadvertently. 608 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Handheld unit / distributor box 26.5 Commissioning 26.5 Commissioning 26.5.1 Settings in handheld unit Displaying the HHU's software version The software version of the HHU is displayed after booting as long as the HHU is not communicating with the PLC. Example: HHU display Waiting for PLC V04.01.01 F / 1.5 M *) SW version of HHU is V04.01.01 Bus address of HHU is Fhex (15dec) *) Display changes between F and 1.5 M Baud rate of HHU is 1.5 MBaud DIP switch To set the bus parameters and the IDLE time, two quadruple DIP switches are provided on the basic module of the HHU. The HHU must be opened for access to the DIP switches. Note Open the device only if the HHU connector has been previously removed! 6ZLWFKVHWWLQJV 6HWWLQJIRUEDXG UDWHDQGEXVDGGUHVV 21 2)) 6 YLD',3 VZLWFK 0%DXG 21 6 6 ,'/(WLPH PV 2)) YLD GLVSOD\ 6 6ZLWFKSRVLWLRQ 1RHIIHFW 6 21 2)) %XV DGGUHVV 6ZLWFKSRVLWLRQ 1RHIIHFW 6 BBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBB IURP6:9 Figure 26-6 DIP switches in the HHU Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 609 Handheld unit / distributor box 26.5 Commissioning Meaning of DIP switches Table 26-1 Settings on switches S1 and S2 in HHU Meaning Baud rate and bus address setting IDLE time *) Baud rate Bus address *) S1 1 S1 2 S1 3 S1 4 via display (only SW 4.1.1) on via DIP switches (all SW versions off 100 ms off S2 2 S2 3 S2 4 on 1.5 Mbaud on 187.5 kbaud off 15 on on on 14 on on on off 13 on on off on 12 on on off off 11 on off on on 10 on off on off 9 on off off on on 8 on off off off 7 off on on on 6 off on on off 5 off on off on 4 off on off off 3 off off on on 2 off off on off 1 off off off on 0 Delivery condition (default) S2 1 off off off off SW V01.01.02 off on on off on on on on SW V04.01.01 off on on on on on on on *) If S1.4 = on and SW version V04.01.01: Switch has no function Note The maximum possible transmission rate for SINUMERIK 810D is 187.5 kbaud. Therefore set switch S1.3 to "off" before start-up. With switch position S1.4 = on and software version V04.01.01, bus addresses from 0 to 31 can be set, i.e. up to 32 nodes can be supported on the OPI/MOI. Bus addresses that are already assigned are preceded by the * character on the display. 610 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Handheld unit / distributor box 26.5 Commissioning 26.5.2 Configuring It is necessary to set the GD parameters for the sub module to communicate via the MPI interface. The setting can be undertaken during the powering up phase (while waiting for the first GD telegram) of the the PLC ("Waiting for PLC" status) via the HHU interface using the key combination Jog (top left, outside) and 7 T2 (top right, outside) are activated. The individual parameters are then interrogated via the HHU display and entered via the HHU keyboard. The default values can be changed within the permissible value range by means of keys + and -. The Automatic key selects the next parameter. Selection of the next parameter causes the preceding parameter to be stored in the flash EPROM. The parameters need therefore only be set during start-up and when interfaces are changed. If interface parameter assignment is not activated after power On, the stored values are accepted or the default values (see table) are loaded. 6HQG $6 3/& ++8 5HFHLYH Figure 26-7 Sending and receiving seen from the HHU Meaning of GD parameters There are separate GD parameters for sending and receiving. *' 2EMHFWQXPEHU *%=QXPEHU JOREDOLGHQWLILHUQXPEHU *'FLUFOHQXPEHU JOREDOGDWDQXPEHU Figure 26-8 Meaning of GD parameters Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 611 Handheld unit / distributor box 26.5 Commissioning Note The GD parameters of the HHU and AS315 or PLC block FB1/0B100 must be set identically. Name Receive GD circle no. SW 4 and higher 26.5.3 Display Default value Rec-GD-No: 2 Range of values 1-16 Receive global identifier number Rec-GI-No 1 - (fixed) Object number for receive global identifier number Rec-Obj-No: 1 - (fixed) Transmit GD circle no. Transmit-GD-No: 2 - (fixed) Transmit GI no. Transmit-GI-No: 2 - (fixed) Object number for send global identifier number Transmit-Obj-No: 1 - (fixed) Baud rate Baud rate: 1.5 M (Baud) 187,5 / 1.5 M Bus address Bus address: 15 0-31 Interface signals PLC module The FC13 "HHUDisp" supports operation of the LCD display. For a detailed description, please refer to: Literature: /FB/, P3, "Basic PLC Program". Note The customer is responsible for programming the transfer of key signals to the interface in a PLC user program. User interface Layout of keys and LEDs 612 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Handheld unit / distributor box 26.5 Commissioning 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 D 6WDQGDUGLQVFULSWLRQ Figure 26-9 E 1XPEHULQJ HHU control keys Input image of handheld unit You can tap the signals for the keys, feed rate override switch, keyswitch and acknowledgment of the digital display at the input area. The address range is set by parameter assignment with STEP7 tools. Byte no. Input signals to PLC Byte Bit7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 EB m Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved EB m+1 Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved EB m +2 Feed start T8 Free key T7 AUTOMATIC T6 NC stop T5 Spindle stop T4 Feed stop T3 Free key T2 JOG T1 EB m +3 Free key T16 Hand wheel T15 Free key T14 Free key T13 Free key T12 Free key T11 NC start T10 Spindle start T9 EB m +4 Direction key T24 Rapid transverse override T23 Direction key + T22 Free key T21 EB m +5 Acknowledg ement digital display Keyswitch E Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Rapid traverse/feed rate override switch D C B O 613 Handheld unit / distributor box 26.5 Commissioning HHU rotary switch positions Setting % EDCBA 1 0 00001 2 10 00100 3 20 01100 4 30 01101 5 40 01111 6 50 01110 7 60 01010 8 70 01011 9 80 01000 10 90 11001 11 100 11010 12 110 11111 HHU keyswitch 0 (horizontal position) 1 (vertical position) Output image of handheld unit The signals for controlling the LEDs, HHU mode, display signals and digital display are present at the output area. / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / Figure 26-10 Control keys with integrated LEDs in HHU 614 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Handheld unit / distributor box 26.5 Commissioning Byte no. Output signals to PLC Byte Bit 7 AB m 1 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 AB m+1 New data for selected line AB m +2 L8 L7 L6 L5 L4 L3 L2 L1 AB m +3 L16 L15 L14 L13 L12 L11 L10 L9 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Selection line Lx = 1 LED lights up Output image of digital display Control of the digital display in the HHU Byte no. Byte Output signals to HHU Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 AB m +4 Default setting of 1st character (right) of selected line AB m +5 Default setting of 2nd character of selected line AB m +6 Default setting of 3rd character of selected line AB m +7 Default setting of 4th character of selected line AB m +8 Default setting of 5th character of selected line AB m +9 Default setting of 6th character of selected line AB m +10 Default setting of 7th character of selected line AB m +11 Default setting of 8th character of selected line AB m +12 Default setting of 9th character of selected line AB m +13 Default setting of 10th character of selected line AB m +14 Default setting of 11th character of selected line AB Default setting of 12th character of selected line Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 615 Handheld unit / distributor box 26.5 Commissioning Byte no. m +15 Output signals to HHU AB m +16 Default setting of 13th character of selected line AB m +17 Default setting of 14th character of selected line AB m +18 Default setting of 15th character of selected line AB m +19 Default setting of 16th character (left) of selected line Note Output byte ABm bit 7 must always have the value 1! This sets the display's output mode. Display The digital display is used as a 2-line alphanumeric display with 16 digits per line. The display data is coded according to the character set given in the ASCII code table for the digital display via the QBm + 4...19 bytes. The decimal point is a separate character. The display always starts line by line right-justified with the byte QBm + 4 and is built up towards the left up to QBm + 19. Selecting the line ABm + 1, bit 0 This bit is used to select the line to be written. Bit 0 = 0: The 1st line is selected Bit 0 = 1: The 2nd line is selected. New data for selected line ABm + 1, bit 7 This bit is used to request writing in of new data into a line. The bit is set by the user program and can be reset on detection of the acknowledgment bit IBm + 5, bit 7. Bit 7 = 0: Reset request. Bit 7 = 1: Set request 616 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Handheld unit / distributor box 26.5 Commissioning Acknowledgement digital display EBm + 5, bit 7 This bit is set by the system after the new data has been accepted. Bit 7 = 0: No new data Bit 7 = 1: New data has been accepted Example of signal chart Example of a signal chart when writing data for two lines 1. Selecting the line with QBm + 1, bit 0. 2. Writing new data with QBm + 4...19. 3. Set request: New data for selected line QBm + 1, bit 4. Acknowledgment digital display IBm + 5, bit 7, via system. 5. Reset request Note The request must be reset before a new line is written! 6HOHFWLQJWKHOLQH :ULWLQJQHZGDWD /RZHUOLQH 8SSHUOLQH 'DWDIRU ORZHUOLQH 'DWDIRU XSSHUOLQH 5HTXLUHPHQW1HZGDWD E E D D F F G $FNQRZOHGJHPHQW GLJLWDOGLVSOD\ G D3/&XVHUVHWVVLJQDODQGZDLWVIRUDFNQRZOHGJPHQW E6\VWHPVHWVDFNQRZOHGJPHQW F8VHUUHVHWVUHTXHVW G6\VWHPUHVHWVDFNQRZOHGJHPHQW Figure 26-11 Signal chart example for writing data into the HHU display Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 617 Handheld unit / distributor box 26.5 Commissioning ASCII code for digital display Representation of characters on specifying the corresponding bit pattern or hexadecimal format in the bytes QBm + 4...19. The characters from Hex 20 to Hex 7F are default values. 0010 0011 0100 0101 0110 0111 1010 1011 1100 1101 1110 1111 Bits 7... 4 20H 30H 40H 50H 60H 70H A0H B0H C0H D0H E0H F0H Bit 3 0 0000 21H 31H 41H 51H 61H 71H A1H B1H C1H D1H E1H F1H 22H 32H 42H 52H 62H 72H A2H B2H C2H D2H E2H F2H 23H 33H 43H 53H 63H 73H A3H B3H C3H D3H E3H F3H 24H 34H 44H 54H 64H 74H A4H B4H C4H D4H E4H F4H 25H 35H 45H 55H 65H 75H A5H B5H C5H D5H E5H F5H 26H 36H 46H 56H 66H 76H A6H B6H C6H D6H E6H F6H 27H 37H 47H 57H 67H 77H A7H B7H C7H D7H E7H F7H 28H 38H 48H 58H 68H 78H A8H B8H C8H D8H E8H F8H 29H 39H 49H 59H 69H 79H A9H B9H C9H D9H E9H F9H 2AH 3AH 4AH 5AH 6AH 7AH AAH BAH CAH DAH EAH FAH 2BH 3BH 4BH 5BH 6BH 7BH ABH BBH CBH DBH EBH FBH 2CH 3CH 4CH 5CH 6CH 7CH ACH BCH CCH DCH ECH FCH 618 0001 0010 0011 0100 0101 0110 0111 1000 1001 1010 1011 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Handheld unit / distributor box 26.5 Commissioning 1100 2DH 3DH 4DH 5DH 6DH 7DH ADH BDH CDH DDH EDH FDH 2EH 3EH 4EH 5EH 6EH 7EH AEH BEH CEH DEH EEH FEH 2FH 3FH 4FH 5FH 6FH 7FH AFH BFH CFH DFH EFH FFH Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 1101 1110 1111 619 Handheld unit / distributor box 26.6 Distributor box for handheld unit 26.6 Distributor box for handheld unit 26.6.1 Overview Distributor box and HHU The handheld unit is connected to the distributor box The distributor box is intended for mounting in the switch cabinet or in a separate casing. The distributor box has an interface to the MPI bus and a terminal block for connecting EMERGENCY STOPS, enabling buttons, handwheels and the 24V power supply. The equipotential bonding connector is also arranged at the distributor box. Equipotential bonding has to be made using a low-resistance connection between the distributor box and the ground potential. The equipotential bonding conductor should be a stranded cable having a cross-section of at least 10 mm2 and a length of < 30 cm. Literature: /PHF/ Configuring, Manual /PHD/ Configuring, Manual Versions of the distributor box The distributor box is available both in standard version and in a UL-certified version. The UL-certified distributor box with power limitation is only needed for UL-conform HPU operations because this does not have UL certification. The HHUs are UL-certified and can therefore be operated on standard distributor boxes. The distributor box must be designed for 3-core or 4-core connection of the enabling keys, depending on the HHU used. 620 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Handheld unit / distributor box 26.6 Distributor box for handheld unit 26.6.2 Interfaces Location of the interfaces (TXLSRWHQWLDOERQGLQJ &RQQHFWLRQ )URQWYLHZ 6LGHYLHZ ; ; ; ; ; ; ; +ROH PPGLDP IRUFRQQHFWRU 0 PPGLDP ; Figure 26-12 Distributor box for MPI and MPC bus X111 and X121 only present for 3-core connection version of enabling buttons. X3/term. 14/15 only present for 4-core connection version of enabling buttons. X111, X121 To connect to the MPC line. The distributor box can be used for the MPI bus or MPC bus. Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 621 Handheld unit / distributor box 26.6 Distributor box for handheld unit X3 Terminal block for HHU control elements Terminal block designation: X3 Terminal strip: Table 26-2 Terminals for 1.5 mm2 Assignment of terminal block X3 with enabling key, 3-core Pin Signal name 1 Emergency stop button 1.1 (24V, 2A) I, input 2 Emergency stop button 1.2 (24V, 2A) O, output 3/4 Handwheel track A / handwheel track A 5/6 Handwheel track B / handwheel track B 7/8 Enabling button ZS1 (24V, 2A) / Enabling button ZS2 (24V, 2A) 9 24V (power supply for HHU) 10 0V (Mext for HHU) 11 Emergency stop button 2.1 (24V, 1A) 12 Emergency stop button 2.2 (24V, 1A) 13 Enabling button (24V, 2A) Table 26-3 I/O, bi-directional O, output I, input O, output I, input Signal assignment of terminal block X3 with enabling button, 4-core Pin Signal name Signal type 1 Emergency stop button 1.1 (24V, 2A) I, input 2 Emergency stop button 1.2 (24V, 2A) O, output I/O, bi-directional 3/4 Handwheel track A / handwheel track A 5/6 Handwheel track B / handwheel track B 7/8 Enabling button ZS1 (24V, 2A) / Enabling button ZS2 (24V, 2A) 9 24V (power supply for HHU) 10 0V (Mext for HHU) 11 Emergency stop button 2.1 (24V, 1A) 12 13 / 14 15 622 Signal type Emergency stop button 2.2 (24V, 1A) Enabling button ZS 2.2 / Enabling button ZS 1.2 Key 2 O, output I, input O, output I, input Do not use Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Handheld unit / distributor box 26.6 Distributor box for handheld unit X4 HHU interface Connector designation: X4 Plug-connector type: Round connector for screw connection Special feature: Interface must comply with IP54 Signal names Emergency stop button Emergency stop button Grounding conductor Enabling button Enabling button +24V 0V Handwheel track A Handwheel track A Handwheel track B Handwheel track B MPI bus cables X5 MPI interface Connector designation: X5 Plug-connector type: 9-pin Sub-D socket connector Max. cable length 200 m Special feature: Electrical isolation Table 26-4 Assignment of connector X5 Pin 1/2 Signal name Signal type Do not use 3 RS_KP B 4 RTSAS_KP O 5 M (GND) VO 6 P5 VO 7 Do not use 8 XRS_KP B 9 RTSPG_KP I Signal names RS_KP, XRS_KP differential RS485 data - K-bus from PLC RTSAS_KP Request to Send AS - K-bus from PLC RTSPG_KP Request to Send PG - K-bus from PLC M ground P5 5 V Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 623 Handheld unit / distributor box 26.6 Distributor box for handheld unit Signal type B Bi-directional O Output I Input VO Voltage Output EMC measures The interference currents are grounded via the shield plates. To prevent these discharged currents from becoming a source of interference themselves, make sure that the path of the interference currents to ground is of low-resistance. Securely tighten all retaining screws of cable connectors, modules and cables referred to a potential. Make sure that all contacting areas of cables referred to a potential are protected against corrosion. Use short potential reference cables of < 30cm and a cross section of 10 mm2. In order to avoid capacitive charges on unused cable cores, the unused cores of the EMERGENCY STOP and enabling buttons (terminals NAUS1.1, NAUS1.2, NAUS2.1, NAUS2.2, ZS1, ZS2, ZUSTICO) must be connected to the equipotential bonding terminal. 26.6.3 Mounting The HHU is connected to the distributor box via the X4 screw connection. When producing a hole (e.g. in a casing) for the X4 screw connection, degree of protection IP54 must be ensured. 26.6.4 Connections Connecting the 24VDC power supply The 24VDC power supply is connected to terminal block X3, terminals 9 and 10. Connecting the MPI bus or OPI The distributor box is connected to the relevant interface (e.g. to the MPI bus for FM-NC, 810D, 840D or to the OPI - possible only for 840D) via the X5 MPI bus connection. 624 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Handheld unit / distributor box 26.6 Distributor box for handheld unit Emergency stop key connection The first channel of the emergency stop key is connected to terminal block X3, terminals 1 and 2. The second channel of the emergency stop key is connected to terminal block X3, terminals 11 and 12. Handwheel connection The electronic handwheel can be connected to terminal block X3, terminals 3 to 6. If the handwheel is to be connected to the NCU, a connection must be made to the cable distributor. Enabling button connection The enabling button is connected to terminal block X3. Equipotential connection Equipotential bonding has to be made using a low-resistance connection between the distributor box and the ground potential. The equipotential bonding cable should be a stranded cable having a cross-section of at least 10 mm2 and a length of < 30 cm. CAUTION The 2nd channel of the EMERGENCY STOP circuit may be connected only if a 2-channel handheld unit is used, namely 6FX2007-1AC01 or 6FX2007-1AC11 and 6FX2007-1AC02 or 6FX2007-1AC12 and 6FX2007-1AC03 or 6FX2007-1AC13 and 6FX2007-1AE03 or 6FX2007-1AE13 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 625 Handheld unit / distributor box 26.7 Technical data 26.7 Technical data Table 26-5 Handheld unit Electrical data Power supply 24V Power consumption approx. 250 mA Emergency Stop button 24 V 2A NC contact Enabling button designed as 3-position switch 24 V 2A 2 parallel NO contacts Electrical handwheel 2 tracks 500 mA TTL level General data Keylock switch 2 positions Override switch 12 positions Connecting cable 3.5m or 10m long ON/OFF Mechanical data Dimensions Weight Height Width Depth 252 mm 114 mm 110 mm 1.2 kg without connecting cable Ambient conditions Temperature ranges Temperature change Application/operati on Storage/transport 0 ... 55 C -20 ... 60 C within 1 minute max. 0.2 K Permissible change in relative humidity EN 60721-3-3, Class 3K5 Within 1 minute Protective class 626 max. 0.1% IP65 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Handheld unit / distributor box 26.8 Spare parts 26.8 Spare parts The following spare parts are available: Name Coiled cable Length Plug connector Coding Remarks 3.5 m 17-pin 0 for 6FX2007-1AB03 for 6FX2007-1AC03 075384 45 for 6FX2007-1AE03 078999 0 for 6FX2007-1AB13 for 6FX2007-1AC13 075385 45 for 6FX2007-1AE13 079000 17-pin 0 for 6FX2006-1BC01 for 6FX2006-1BF00 072764 17-pin 45 for 6FX2006-1BH01 078952 Complete 072604 Straight cable 10 m Terminator with chain Terminator with chain 17-pin Keylock switch Spare key for Euchner ident no. order no. Key-operated switch 075387 Emergency stop button, unlocked by twisting with 1 opener contact Replacement for old HHUs 6FX2007-1Axx0 052958 EMERGENCY STOP switch, pull to reset, 2-channel, tamper-proof Replacement for new HHUs 6FX2007-1Axx1 and the following 073985 Handwheel (encoder HKD100V100A05) with ribbon connection cable 057036 Setting wheel C1702 (operating wheel) for handwheel 071380 keyboard 075772 Cover for Slide-in labels Override stepper switch, 12-way Rotary button for override stepper switch Cover diaphragm for enabling button, 2 stages Block: 1x printed, 1x not printed 075909 gray-coded 077097 with arrow dial 073973 2x 055419 Enabling button, 3-positions 095256 For detailed description, see Prodis, article no. 186 519 26 from 07.12.2004. Order address Euchner GmbH + Co Vertrieb Technik Kohlhammerstr. 16 D-70771 Leinfelden-Echterdingen Phone: +49 711 7597-0 Fax: +49 711 7597 303 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 627 Handheld unit / distributor box 26.9 Accessories 26.9 Accessories The following components are available as accessories for this HHU: Component Retaining shell Order number 6FX2006-1HA00 Remarks Polystyrene, black, weight: 0.3 kg The retaining shell is secured to the mounting face by four M5 countersunk screws (not included in delivery kit). Dimension drawing s r s r s s Figure 26-13 Retaining shell for HHU 628 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 27 Machine control panel: MCP 483C 27.1 Description The machine control panel permits user-friendly control of machine functions. It is suitable for machine-level operation of milling, turning, grinding and special machines. All keys are designed with replaceable caps for machine-specific adaptations. The covers can be freely inscribed using laser. Clear key covers can be used as an alternative. The machine control panel is mounted from the rear with special clamping elements supplied with the panel. Validity The description applies to the following machine control panels: Type Key type Order No.: MCP 483C Mechanical 6FC5203-AF22-0AA2 Features Operating modes and function keys - 50 keys with LEDs - Direction keys for milling machines with rapid traverse override (key covers for direction keys for turning machines supplied separately packaged) - Default key assignment includes 17 freely assignable customer keys Spindle control with spindle (rotary switch with 16 positions) Feed control with feed (rotary switch with 23 positions) Keyswitch (4 positions and 3 different keys) Emergency-off pushbutton (2 NC contacts) Ports: MPI Expansion slots: 2 slots for control devices (d = 16 mm) Key type: Mechanical keys "Turning" version Key cap covers for the Turning version are supplied separately packaged (see Section: "Accessories"). Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 629 Machine control panel: MCP 483C 27.2 Operator controls and indicators 27.2 Operator controls and indicators 27.2.1 Front Overview 64 inputs (50 keys, two rotary selector switches, keyswitch with four positions) 48 outputs (LEDs, assigned to the keys) Figure 27-1 630 Front view of machine control panel (milling version) (1) EMERGENCY STOP key (2) Installation locations for control devices (d = 16 mm) (3) Reset button (4) Program control (5) Operating modes, machine functions (6) User keys T1 to T15 (7) Direction keys with rapid traverse override (R1 to R15) (8) Spindle control with override switch (9) Feed control with override switch (10) Keyswitch (four positions) Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Machine control panel: MCP 483C 27.2 Operator controls and indicators EMERGENCY STOP button Emergency stop button Press the red button in emergencies when people are at risk, there is the danger of machines or the workpiece being damaged. As a rule, when operating the EMERGENCY STOP button, all drives are brought to a standstill with max. braking torque. Turn the emergency stop button counterclockwise to unlatch it. Machine manufacturer For other reactions to the EMERGENCY STOP: refer to the machine tool manufacturer's instructions Circuit for EMERGENCY STOP button (PHUJHQF\VWRS %XWWRQ 3XVKRQ FRQQHFWLRQ 3OXJFDEOHRQWR WKHSXVKEXWWRQ (0(5*(1&<6723PDFKLQHFRQWURO &RQQHFWLRQQXPEHULQJ'HIDXOWVLQEUDFNHWV2SWLRQDO Figure 27-2 Suggested circuit for EMERGENCY STOP circuit Mounting slots for control devices WARNING The openings for mounting control devices (2) in Fig.: "Front view of machine control panel" must not be knocked out (risk of damage), but drilled to the required width. Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 631 Machine control panel: MCP 483C 27.2 Operator controls and indicators 27.2.2 Rear side Operating and display elements are located on the rear of the panel: 6KLHOG 0 3 Figure 27-3 Interfaces, operating and display elements on rear of MCP 483C (1) Customer grounding terminal (2) S3 DIP switch (3) EMERGENCY STOP key (4) Slot for 2 additional control devices (16 mm) (5) LED 1 ... 4 (6) Operator panel interface (MPI) X20 (7) Power supply interface X10 S3 DIP switch Sets e.g. baud rate, addresses and protocol (see section: "Settings") Diagnostic LEDs 1 ... 4 LED1 (H1): Hardware test running. A red LED lights up to indicate a fault. LED2 (H2): Temperature monitor: When the temperature of 60 C (+/- 3C) is exceeded, a red LED lights up. LED3 (H3): Voltage monitoring responded LED4 (H4): During data transfer via the operator panel interfaces, a yellow LED flashes. 632 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Machine control panel: MCP 483C 27.3 Interfaces 27.3 Interfaces Overview X10: Power supply interface Phoenix terminal block: 3-pole, straight X20: Operator panel interface (MPI) Socket: 9-pole female Sub-D connector strip, straight X30: Interface for rotary switch feed override Plug connector, 2 x 5-pole, with lock X31: Interface for rotary switch spindle override Plug connector, 2 x 5-pole, with lock References: /PHF/, NCU 570 /PHD/, NCU 571 Manual Power supply interface Connector designation: X10 Type: 3-pole Phoenix terminal block, straight Table 27-1 X10 pin assignments Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Pin Name Meaning Type 1 P24 24V potential 2 M24 Ground 24V 3 SHIELD Shield connection V power supply 633 Machine control panel: MCP 483C 27.3 Interfaces Operator panel front interface (MPI) Connector designation: X20 Type: 9-pole sub-D socket Max. cable length: 200 m at 1.5 Mbaud (MPI connection) Table 27-2 X20 pin assignments for machine control panel Pin Name Type Meaning 1/2 unassigned - - 3 RS_OPI B Differential RS-485 data 4 ORTSAS_OPI O Out Request to Send AS (not connected) 5 M5EXT V 5 V external ground 6 P5EXT V 5 V external potential 7 unassigned - _ 8 XRS_OPI B Differential RS-485 data 9 IRTSPG_OPI I In Request to Send PG Signal type 634 B Bi-directional O Output V Voltage (supply voltage) I Input Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Machine control panel: MCP 483C 27.4 Mounting 27.4 Mounting 482.6 32.1 155 45.1 20.2 18.9 95.8 A 132.6 132.4 95.9 Rz 120 1,5mm-6mm 37 164.6 A 37 114.7 103.3 A-A 2:1 Figure 27-4 Dimension drawing for machine control panel MCP 483C (1) Mounting frame (2) Surface quality to DIN ISO 2768-L (3) Tension jacks (x 9) (4) Mounting frame Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 635 Machine control panel: MCP 483C 27.4 Mounting Tension jacks The machine control panel is attached by means of 9 tension jacks (tightening torque 0.8 Nm; see dimension drawing). Figure 27-5 Panel cutout for machine control panel MCP 483C Mounting position Max. 60 to the vertical. For mounting positions greater than 60 , a fan must also #be installed to keep the ambient temperature of the machine control panel constantly below 55 C. 636 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Machine control panel: MCP 483C 27.5 Settings 27.5 Settings S3 DIP switch With the DIP switch S3 (see diagram in Section: "Control and display elements" --> "Rear side"), the following settings are possible: Table 27-3 8 7 S3 jumpering on machine control panel 6 5 4 3 2 1 on off off on off on off on On Off Off On Off on On Off Off On Off on On Off Off On Off on On Off Off Meaning / value Baud rate Transmission cycle time 200 ms 100 ms 50 ms on off off 1.5 Mbaud 187.5 kBaud Receipt monitoring 2400 ms 1200 ms 600 ms Bus address 15 14 on 13 12 on 11 10 off 9 8 7 6 on 5 4 off 3 2 off 1 0 On Off Interface MPI customer operator panel Series HW The following default setting (840D) is suggested: Table 27-4 Default settings S3 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 Off Off on on Off on Off on Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Meaning Baud rate: 1.5 Mbaud / Transmission cycle time: 100 ms Bus address: 6 / serial hardware 637 Machine control panel: MCP 483C 27.5 Settings Settings for transmission cycle time The PLC expects a message frame from the machine control panel at least every 500 ms. The machine control panel sends a message frame to the PLC at cyclic intervals when no key is pressed. This cycle time is set with S3 DIP switches 2 and 3. This enables the load on the PLC resulting from the machine control panel to be adjusted. Settings for receipt cycle time The machine control panel receives message frames at cyclic intervals from the PLC and answers these at cyclic intervals. The receipt monitoring time is linked to the transmission cycle time of the machine control panel and is set with the S3 DIP switch (2 and 3). Bus address The bus address for 840D must be set to "6". Other addresses can be selected, but these must then also be set at FB1 in the basic PLC program. Interface parameters for communication via global data Before the machine control panel can exchange data with the PLC CPU via the MPI interface, the appropriate interface parameters for the configuration must be activated. They are activated by means of the MPI bus address settings using DIP switch S3 in accordance with the following table. Table 27-5 Correlation between MPI bus address and GD parameters with machine control panel MPI address 638 Preset GD parameters Receive - Transmit 0, ..., 3 Reserved 4 5.1.1 - 5.2.1 5 5.1.1 - 5.2.1 6 Reserved 7 4.1.1 - 4.2.1 8 4.1.1 - 4.2.1 9 3.1.1 - 3.2.1 10 3.1.1 - 3.2.1 11 2.1.1 - 2.2.1 12 2.1.1 - 2.2.1 13 1.1.1 - 1.2.1 14 1.1.1 - 1.2.1 15 1.1.1 - 1.2.1 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 0DFKLQH FRQWUROSDQHO Machine control panel: MCP 483C 27.5 Settings Figure 27-6 6HQG 3/& 5HFHLYH Receiving and transmitting from view of machine control panel Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 639 Machine control panel: MCP 483C 27.6 Connectors 27.6 Connectors Connecting the 24V supply The 24V power supply is connected via a 3-pole terminal block (see figure section: "Control and display elements" "Rear side") to the connector X10 on the rear side of the machine control panel. The equipotential bonding conductor is fixed with an M5 screw. Connection of the MPI connector (X20) The machine control panel is connected to the OPI on the NCU (X101) using an MPI bus cable via the PCU interface (MPI/DP). The MPI connector is plugged into the X20 on the rear side of the machine control panel (see Fig. section: "Control and display elements" --> "Rear side") and secured using two locking screws. 640 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Machine control panel: MCP 483C 27.7 Technical specifications 27.7 Technical specifications Security Safety class Degree of protection per EN 60529 III; PELV acc. to EN 50178 Front: IP54 Keyswitch: IP54 Approvals Rear side: IP00 CE Electrical specifications Input voltage DC 24 V Power consumption, max. 5W Mechanical data Dimensions Width: 483 mm Height: 155 mm Depth: 77 mm Mounting depth: 45 mm Weight Mechanical ambient conditions approx. 1.6 kg Operation Transport (in transport packaging) Vibratory load 10 -58 Hz: 0.015 mm 58 -200 Hz: 19.6 m/s2 3M4 per EN 60721-3-3 5 -9 Hz: 3.5 mm 9 -200 Hz: 9.81 m/s2 2M2 per EN 60721-3-2 Shock stressing 150 m/s2, 11 ms, 18 shocks 3M2 per EN 60721-3-3 150 m/s2, 11 ms, 18 shocks 2M2 per EN 60721-3-2 Climatic ambient conditions Cooling By natural convection Condensation, spraying water and icing Supply air Applicable standards Climate class Temperature limits Temperature change Limits for relative humidity Permissible change in the relative air humidity Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Not permitted Without caustic gases, dusts and oils Operation Storage/shipping (in transport packaging) EN 60721-3-3 EN 60721-3-1 / -3-2 3K5 1K3 / 2K4 0 ... 45 C (at front) 0 ... 55 C (at rear) -25 ... 55 C Max. 10 K/h Max. 18 K/h 5 ... 80% 5 ... 95% max. 0.1% /min 641 Machine control panel: MCP 483C 27.8 Replacement parts 27.8 Replacement parts 27.8.1 Overview Table 27-6 Spare part kits for machine control panel MCP 483C Name Description Qua Order No.: ntity Variant A Actuating element 16 mm emergency stop mushroom-head pushbutton (red) 1 3SB2000-1AC01 Switching element with one contact, 1NO contact 1 6FC5247-0AF13-0AA0 Switching element with one contact, 1 NC contact 2 6FC5247-0AF13-0AA0 Holder for 2 switching elements 1 6FC5247-0AF13-0AA0 22 mm actuating element, emergency stop mushroom pushbutton, red, mushroomshaped button and bracket 1 3SB3000-1HA20 Switching element 1 3SB3400-0A Key switch Keyswitch with key 1 6FC5247-0AF02-0AA0 Set of keys Set of keys MSTT 10 6FC5148-0AA03-0AA0 Rotary switch for spindle SINUMERIK 810D/840D, override spindle / rapid traverse, rotary switch 1x16G, T=24, cap, knob, pointer, dials for spindle and rapid traverse 6 6FC5247-0AF12-0AA0 Rotary switch for feed SINUMERIK 810D/840D, override feed / rapid traverse, rotary switch 1x 23G, T=32, cap, knob, pointer, dials for feed and rapid traverse 6 6FC5247-0AF13-0AA0 Set of tension jacks SINUMERIK 810D/840D, tension jack set for supplementary components with 2.5 mm profile, length 20 mm 9 6FC5248-0AF14-0AA0 EMERGENCY STOP button Variant B EMERGENCY STOP key 27.8.2 Replacement Replacement of the handwheel, rotary switch and mouse is described in section: "15" TFT Operator Panel, 416 mm wide, without videolink receiver". 642 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Machine control panel: MCP 483C 27.9 Accessories 27.9 Accessories Component Description Quantit Order No.: y Key cover (for labeling) 1 set of 90, ergo-gray and 20 each of red / green / yellow / medium gray 1 6FC5248-0AF12-0AA0 Key cover (for labeling) 1 set of 90, clear 1 6FC5248-0AF21-0AA0 Key covers for turning supplied separately packaged with MCP Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 643 Machine control panel: MCP 483C 27.9 Accessories 644 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 28 Machine control panel: MCP 483 28.1 Description The machine control panel MCP 483 permits user-friendly and clear operation of the machine functions. It is suitable for machine-level operation of milling and turning machines, and particularly grinding machines. Forty-six keys and both control device slots are equipped with user-inscribed slide-in strips for adapting to specific machines. A DIN A4 film for labeling the slide-in strips is included in the delivery kit. The machine control panel is secured from the rear using special clamps supplied with the panel. Validity The description applies to the machine control panel: Type Key type Order No.: MCP 483 Film 6FC5203-0AF22-1AA2 Features Control elements: Operating mode and function keys: - 50 keys with LEDs when connected via PROFIBUS DP - 48 keys with LEDs when connected via MPI - Direction keys for milling machines with rapid traverse override - Default key assignment includes 17 freely assignable customer keys Spindle control with override spindle (rotary switch with 16 positions) Feed control with override feed/rapid traverse (rotary switch with 23 positions) Keyswitch (4 positions and 3 different keys) 2 emergency stop pushbuttons (1 NO + 1 NC) Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 645 Machine control panel: MCP 483 28.1 Description Interfaces: PROFIBUS-DP/MPI interface for 6 control devices (6 inputs/6 outputs) for connection over PROFIBUS DP (additional cable set required for control devices, see section: "Accessories".) for 16 direct keys of OP 012/OP 015A/TP 015A when connected via PROFIBUS DP (Option: direct keys required). For 2 handwheels when connected via PROFIBUS DP (max. cable length: 5 m) (handwheel connection option required. The handwheel connection function depends on the NCU software.) Expansion slots: 2 slots for control devices (d = 16 mm) Key type: Membrane keys 646 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Machine control panel: MCP 483 28.2 Operator controls and indicators 28.2 Operator controls and indicators 28.2.1 Front Overview Figure 28-1 (1) Position of control elements on machine control panel MCP 483 (milling version) EMERGENCY STOP key (2) Installation locations for control devices (d = 16 mm) (3) Reset button (4) Program control (5) Operating modes, machine functions (6) User keys T1 to T15 (7) Direction keys with rapid traverse override (R1 to R15) (8) Spindle control with override switch (9) Feed control with override switch (10) Keyswitch (four positions) Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 647 Machine control panel: MCP 483 28.2 Operator controls and indicators EMERGENCY STOP key Emergency stop button Press the red button in emergencies when people are at risk, there is the danger of machines or the workpiece being damaged. As a rule, when operating the EMERGENCY STOP button, all drives are brought to a standstill with max. braking torque. Turn the EMERGENCY STOP button counterclockwise to unlatch it. Machine manufacturer For other reactions to the EMERGENCY STOP: refer to the machine tool manufacturer's instructions Circuit for EMERGENCY STOP button (PHUJHQF\ VWRSEXWWRQ 3OXJFDEOHRQWR WKHSXVKEXWWRQ Figure 28-2 EMERGENCY STOP key circuit Mounting slots for control devices WARNING The openings for mounting control devices (2) in Fig.: "Position of control elements of machine control panel MCP 483" must not be chipped out (risk of damage), but drilled to the required width. 648 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Machine control panel: MCP 483 28.2 Operator controls and indicators 28.2.2 Rear side COM board The control and display elements on the rear of the MCP 483 are located on the COM board (shown with a gray background in the illustration): The detailed cutout under or above the interface name shows the position of pin 1 on the connectors. (TXLSRWHQWLDO ; ; ; ++ ; ; ; 6 ; &20ERDUG ; ; 6 ; Figure 28-3 ; ; Rear of the MCP 483 showing the control and display elements and the interfaces Jumper S1 Setting the handwheel signal type - S1 open: TTL - S1 closed: differential interface S3 DIP switch Sets e.g. baud rate, addresses and protocol (see section: "Settings via DIP switch S3") Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 649 Machine control panel: MCP 483 28.2 Operator controls and indicators Diagnostic LEDs 1 ... 5 650 No. Monitoring of Effect: LED ... Diagnostics H1 Hardware lights up red Initialization error H2 (reserved) - - H3 Voltage lights up green Logic voltages on board OK H4 (reserved) - - H5 PROFIBUS flashes green Ready for communication lights up green Communication in progress lights up red Channel interference or not yet ready (default after Power On) Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Machine control panel: MCP 483 28.3 Interfaces 28.3 Interfaces MCP 483 communication is handled by the COM board where the interfaces are located (see section: "Control and display elements" --> "Rear side"). Overview X10: Power supply interface 3-pin Phoenix terminal block X20:Operator panel interface (MPI/PROFIBUS) 9-pin Sub-D socket connector X30: Interface for connecting rotary feed override switch (23 graduations) 2 x 5-pin plug connector with lock X31: Interface for connecting rotary spindle override switch (16 graduations) 2 x 5-pin plug connector with lock X50: Interface to 4-way keyswitch 1 x 6-pin plug connector X51-X54: Interface for additional control devices (buttons incl. 24V lamps) each 1 x 4-pin plug connector X60/X61: Connection for 2 handwheels (TTL/DTTL) 15-pin sub-D socket each X70: Connection of direct keys (16 digital inputs; opto-decoupled) 2 x 10-pin plug connector Equipotential The equipotential bonding conductor is attached by means of an M5 screw. Interfaces for additional control devices Connector designation: X51, ..., X54 Type: 4-pin plug connector X51 / X52 Only switches (passive inputs) may be connected to the inputs X51 / X52. Table 28-1 Pin assignment for connectors X51/X52 Pin Name Meaning 1 KT-IN 1/4 *) Customer key 1/4 2 KT-IN 2/5 *) Customer key 2/5 3 KT-IN 3/6 *) Customer key 3/6 4 M (GND) Ground Type I V *) KT-IN 1/2/3: X51; KT-IN 4/5/6: X52 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 651 Machine control panel: MCP 483 28.3 Interfaces 3,3V 10K 1 3,3V X51 KT-IN1 2 KT-IN2 3 KT-IN3 4 M 3,3V M 10K 1 3,3V X52 KT-IN4 2 KT-IN5 3 KT-IN6 4 M M Figure 28-4 Circuit for inputs X51 / X52 Outputs X53 / X54 The outputs X53 / X54 are intended to activate lamps in the buttons. We would recommend using 1.2 W lamps with max. 0.3 A per output. High-side switches which limit the current during short circuits are used as output drivers. CAUTION Do not connect any relays, valves or other inductive loads. Table 28-2 Pin Pin assignment for connectors X53/X54 Name Meaning Type 1 KT-OUT 1/4 *) Customer key 1/4 lamp 2 KT-OUT 2/5 *) Customer key 2/5 lamp 3 KT-OUT 3/6 *) Customer key 3/6 lamp 4 M24 Ground 24V O V *) KT-OUT 1/2/3: X53; KT-OUT 4/5/6: X54 652 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Machine control panel: MCP 483 28.3 Interfaces High Side Switch P24 KT-OUT1 X53 1 KT-OUT2 2 KT-OUT3 3 M24 4 M24 P24 KT-OUT4 X54 1 KT-OUT5 2 KT-OUT6 3 M24 4 M24 Figure 28-5 Circuit for outputs X53 / X54 Interfaces for 2 handwheels Connector designation: X60, X61 Type: 15-pin Sub-D socket Table 28-3 Pin assignment for connectors X60/X61 *) Pin Name Meaning Type 1 PV5 Supply voltage 5V 2 M (GND) Ground 3 HWi_A *) Handwheel pulses track A 4 Hwi_XA Handwheel pulses track A (negated) I 5 N.C. Unassigned - V 6 HWi_B Handwheel pulses track B 7 HWi_XB Handwheel pulses track B (negated) 8 N.C. Unassigned - 9 PV5 Supply voltage 5V V 10 N.C. Unassigned - 11 M (GND) Ground V 12 - 15 N.C. Unassigned - I *) I = 1: X60; i = 2: X61 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 653 Machine control panel: MCP 483 28.3 Interfaces Interface for direct control keys Connector designation: X70 Type: 2 x 10-pin male connector, 2.54 mm grid Table 28-4 Pin assignment for connector X70 Pin Name Meaning Type i = 1, ..., 16 DT_i Direct control key i I 17, 18 P5V_TACO P5 keyboard controller 19, 20 M_TACO M keyboard controller V Power supply interface Connector designation: X10 Type: 3-pin Phoenix terminal block, straight Table 28-5 654 X10 pin assignments Pin Name Meaning Type 1 P24 24V potential V power supply 2 M24 Ground 24V 3 SHIELD Shield connection Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Machine control panel: MCP 483 28.4 Mounting 28.4 Mounting Dimension drawing for machine control panel MCP 483 482.6 32.1 155 45.1 20.2 18.9 A 95.9 Rz 120 95.8 132.4 132.6 1,5mm-6mm 37 A 164.6 114.7 37 A-A 2:1 (1) In the sealing area (2) Mounting frame (3) Tension jack (9 parts) tightening torque 0.8 Nm (4) Mounting frame Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 655 Machine control panel: MCP 483 28.4 Mounting Tension jacks The machine control panel is attached by means of 9 tension jacks (tightening torque 0.8 Nm; see dimension drawing). Figure 28-6 Panel cutout for machine control panel MCP 483 Mounting position Max. 60 to the vertical. For mounting positions greater than 60, a fan must also be installed to keep the ambient temperature of the machine control panel constantly below 55 C. 656 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Machine control panel: MCP 483 28.5 Settings via DIP switch S3 28.5 Settings via DIP switch S3 Choosing the connection type The connection type is set via switches 9 and 10: Table 28-6 Connection type 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Meaning / value - - - - - - - - on on PROFIBUS DP - - - - - - - - Off Off MPI Connection type: MPI For connection type MPI, the MPIs are set using switches 1 to 7: Table 28-7 1 MPI parameters 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Meaning / value Data transfer rate on - - - - - - - - 1.5 Mbaud Off - - - - - - - - 187.5 kbaud Transmission cycle time Reception monitoring - on Off - - - - - - - 200 ms 2400 ms - Off on - - - - - - - 100 ms 1200 ms - Off Off - - - - - - - 50 ms 600 ms MPI - - - Off Off Off Off - - - 0 - - - Off Off Off on - - - 1 - - - Off Off on Off - - - 2 - - - Off Off on on - - - 3 - - - Off on Off Off - - - 4 - - - Off on Off on - - - 5 - - - Off on on Off - - - 6 - - - Off on on on - - - 7 - - - on Off Off Off - - - 8 - - - on Off Off on - - - 9 - - - on Off on Off - - - 10 - - - on Off on on - - - 11 - - - on on Off Off - - - 12 - - - on on Off on - - - 13 - - - on on on Off - - - 14 - - - on on on - - - 15 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 on 657 Machine control panel: MCP 483 28.5 Settings via DIP switch S3 Connection type: PROFIBUS-DP For connection type PROFIBUS DP, the PROFIBUS is set using switches 1 to 7: Table 28-8 1 PROFIBUS address 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Meaning / value PROFIBUS Off Off Off Off Off Off Off - - - 0 on Off Off Off Off Off Off - - - 1 Off on Off Off Off Off Off - - - 2 on on Off Off Off Off Off : : : - - - 3 : : : : - - - : (etc.) on Off on on on on on - - - 125 Off on on on on on - - - 126 on Hardware code The code for the series is set with switch 8: Table 28-9 Hardware code 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 - - - - - - - Off - - Meaning / value Series Standard setting The default setting for DIP switch S3 is: Data transfer rate: 1.5 Mbaud Transmission cycle time: 100 ms; reception monitoring 1200 ms Bus address: 6 Connection type: MPI Table 28-10 Standard setting 658 1 2 3 4 5 on Of f on Off on 6 7 8 9 10 Meaning / value on Off Off Off Off Series Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Machine control panel: MCP 483 28.5 Settings via DIP switch S3 Note Via switches 9 and 10 of the DIP switch S3 (see Section: "Operating and Display Elements" "Rear Side") the connection type, i.e. the transfer protocol and the interface used are set: MPI If MPI is selected, the MPI parameters are set using switches 1 to 7. PROFIBUS DP If PROFIBUS DP is selected, the PROFIBUS address is set using switches 1 to 7. The same code should be used for the standard hardware (switch 8 = off). Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 659 Machine control panel: MCP 483 28.6 Connection via PROFIBUS DP 28.6 Connection via PROFIBUS DP 28.6.1 Overview This section describes: Requirements for adding a DP slave MCP to the hardware configuration for a SIMATIC S7 project. Configuring a DP slave MCP with STEP7 "HW config." Details of how to link the DP slave MCP to the basic PLC program and user program (optional) Note The instructions given in this chapter are essentially limited to the special requirements for configuring the DP slave MCP. For more details about working with SIMATIC STEP 7 please refer to the relevant SIMATIC documentation or online help. Note Both units can be linked up using the supplied 20-pin ribbon cable in order to transfer the direct control key signals of the operator panel front to the COM board of the machine control panel. The direct control key module therefore no longer needs to be connected. 28.6.2 Prerequisites The following components are needed as prerequisites for adding a DP slave MCP to the hardware configuration: SIMATIC STEP 7 GSD file of DP slave MCP Graphics files of DP slave MCP SIMATIC STEP 7 SIMATIC STEP 7 is required in the following version or later: SIMATIC STEP 7 version 5.2 or later, Service Pack 1 660 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Machine control panel: MCP 483 28.6 Connection via PROFIBUS DP GSD file The GSD file of the DP slave MCP is required in the following version or later: SI008109.GSD version 1.0 or later A GSD file contains all the properties of a DP slave in ASCII format. For each DP slave SIMATIC STEP 7 requires a module-specific GSD file so that the DP slave can be found in the hardware catalog. The DP slave MCP is shown in SIMATIC STEP 7 in the hardware catalog of "HW Config" under the following path: Profile: Standard PROFIBUS-DP > Other field devices > NC/RC > Motion Control > SINUMERIK MCP If the module is not displayed, the GSD file must be installed. To do this, in "HW config" use menu command Tools > Install new GSD file. Before installing the GSD file, please read the following instructions concerning the graphics files. Graphics files The graphics files belonging to the GSD file: SI8109_N.BMP SI8109_S.BMP are used to display the DP slave MCP in the "HW config" station window. They are automatically installed by STEP 7 when the GSD file is installed. They must be located in the same directory as the GSD file. 28.6.3 Functions of the machine control panel The machine control panel offers the following functions: Standard Handwheel Additional I/Os Standard The function transfers input/output data from the function keys and user-specific keys and outputs: Input data: 8 bytes Output data: 8 bytes Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 661 Machine control panel: MCP 483 28.6 Connection via PROFIBUS DP The input/output data is compatible with the input/output data from the previous machine control panel: The input/output data for machine control panel MCP 483 is compatible with the input/output data from the previous machine control panel: Machine control panel (MCP), MPI 19'' machine control panel Handwheel The function transfers the absolute values for the two handwheels that can be connected to the machine control panel: Absolute value 1. Handwheel Absolute value 2. Handwheel Low byte High byte For each handwheel the current handwheel value is transferred as a 16-bit absolute value relative to the starting value. The starting value for the sensor counter in the handwheel is 0. The absolute values are transferred in big endian format. The data for both handwheels is always transferred. The absolute value for a handwheel that is not connected is always 0. Additional I/Os The function transfers the data for all non-standard inputs/outputs: Direct control keys Customer keys: 6 signals (bit 0 to bit 6) Rotary switch with the following distribution: Input data: 5 bytes Direct control keys (OP 012) User keys 1. Rotary switch Low byte 2. Rotary switch High byte Output data: 2 bytes Reserved always 0 Low byte 662 Customer LEDs High byte Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Machine control panel: MCP 483 28.6 Connection via PROFIBUS DP 28.6.4 Configuring the DP slave MCP This section describes how to configure a DP slave MCP with reference to the hardware configuration for a SIMATIC S7 project shown in the figure by way of example. The hardware configuration has the following modules: SIMATIC station 300 with SINUMERIK 810D/840D and PLC 317-2DP SINUMERIK MCP with module: standard, handwheel, extended Procedure Configuring the DP slave MCP as an S7 project involves the following steps: 1. Add the DP slave MCP to the configuration (1) 2. Set the PROFIBUS address 3. Add the appropriate module to the DP slave MCP according to the functions required. (2) 4. Set the I/O addresses for the individual slots. HW-Konfig - [SINUMERIK840D (Konfiguration) -- PROFIBUS-MCP] Station Bearbeiten Einfugen Zielsystem Ansicht Extras Fenster Hilfe PROFIBUS(1): DP-Mastersystem (1) (0) 810D/840D 2 PLC 317-2DP 2AJ10 X1 X2 MPI DP IM 360 3 4 Profil: Standard I/O NC/RC MOTION CONTROL SINUMERIK MCP Universalmodul (9) SINUME S7 FM-NCU standard standard, handwheel standard, extended standard, handwheel, ex PROFIBUS(1): DP-Mastersystem (1) Steckplatz 1 2 3 Figure 28-7 DP-Kennung 55 2EA 192 Bestellnummer / Bezeichnung E-Adresse A-Adresse standard, handwheel, extended --> standard, handwheel, exten --> standard, handwheel, exten 0...7 258...261 8...12 0...7 Kom... 8...9 Configuration with DP slave MCP Requirements: S7 project The following status is required for the S7 project to which the DP slave MCP is to be added: You have created the S7 project You have set up a SIMATIC 300 station with PROFIBUS master-capable SINUMERIK controller Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 663 Machine control panel: MCP 483 28.6 Connection via PROFIBUS DP Adding a DP slave MCP To add a DP slave MCP to the configuration, open the hardware catalog using the menu command View > Catalog. The DP slave MCP can be found at: Profile: Standard PROFIBUS-DP > Other field devices > NC/RC > Motion Control > SINUMERIK MCP Click with the left mouse button on the DP slave MCP (SINUMERIK MCP) in the hardware catalog and drag it onto the DP master system in the station window by holding down the left mouse button. The DP master system is displayed in the station window with the following symbol: When you release the left mouse button, the DP slave MCP is added to the configuration. Note As you drag the DP slave the cursor appears as a circle with a slash through it. When the cursor is positioned exactly over the DP master system, it changes to a plus sign, and the DP slave can be added to the configuration. PROFIBUS parameters Once you have added the DP slave MCP to the configuration, the "Properties - PROFIBUS interface SINUMERIK MCP" dialog box is displayed. The following PROFIBUS parameters must either be set or verified: PROFIBUS address Data transfer rate Profile Dialog Dialog: Properties - PROFIBUS interface SINUMERIK MCP Tab card: parameters Address: <PROFIBUS address> Button: "Properties..." Dialog: Properties - PROFIBUS Tab card: Network settings Data transfer rate: 12 Mbaud Profile: DP OK OK 664 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Machine control panel: MCP 483 28.6 Connection via PROFIBUS DP Note The PROFIBUS address of the DP slave MCP set in the S7 project must match the PROFIBUS address set on the module (DIP switch S3) (see Section: "Settings via DIP switch S3" There is no automatic adjustment! The following data must agree: 1. SIMATIC S7 configuration of DP slave MCP PROFIBUS address 2. Machine control panel MCP 483 PROFIBUS address (DIP switch S3) Adding a module The active functions and hence the number of user data elements to be transferred are chosen by selecting the appropriate pre-configured module. The modules in the hardware catalog are positioned below the DP slave MCP. The following modules are available: Universal module (not applicable) standard standard, handwheel standard, extended standard, handwheel, extended Module: standard The module transfers the data for the "Standard" function: Input data: 8 bytes Standard data (8 bytes) Output data: 8 bytes Standard data (8 bytes) Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 665 Machine control panel: MCP 483 28.6 Connection via PROFIBUS DP Module: standard, handwheel The module transfers the data for the "Standard" and "Handwheel" functions: Input data: 12 bytes Standard data (8 bytes) Absolute value 1st handwheel (2 bytes) Absolute value 2nd handwheel (2 bytes) Low byte High byte Output data: 8 bytes Standard data (8 bytes) Module: standard, extended The module transfers the data for the "Standard" and "Additional I/Os" functions: Input data: 13 bytes Standard data (8 bytes) Direct control keys (OP 012) (2 bytes) Customer keys (1 byte) 1. Rotary switch (1 byte) Low byte 2. Rotary switch (1 byte) High byte Output data: 10 bytes Standard data (8 bytes) Reserved (1 byte) Customer LEDs (1 byte) Low byte High byte Module: standard, handwheel, extended The module transfers the data for the "Standard", "Handwheel" and "Additional I/Os" functions: Input data: 17 bytes Standard data (8 bytes) Absolute value 1st handwheel (2 bytes) Absolute value 2nd handwheel (2 bytes) Direct control keys (OP 012) (2 bytes) Low byte Customer keys (1 byte) 1. Rotary switch (1 byte) 2. Rotary switch (1 byte) High byte 666 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Machine control panel: MCP 483 28.6 Connection via PROFIBUS DP Output data: 10 bytes Standard data (8 bytes) Reserved (1 byte) Customer LEDs (1 byte) Low byte High byte I/O addresses If you add a module to slot 1 of the DP slave MCP, the input/output addresses are automatically assigned by STEP 7. Double clicking with the left mouse button on a slot opens the "Properties - DP slave" dialog box. The starting addresses for the I/O data for the slot can be set here. 28.6.5 Linking the DP slave MCP This section describes how to link the DP slave MCP in the basic PLC program for transferring the standard input / output data in the VDI interface to the PLC user program (optional) to implement a user-specific response to a module failure Note "Handwheel" function The "Handwheel" function is not currently supported by the basic PLC program. "Additional I/Os" function Processing of additional I/O data is the sole responsibility of the user (machine manufacturer) and is not supported by the basic PLC program. PLC basic program In order to transfer the standard I/O data for the DP slave MCP using the basic PLC program, the corresponding I/O address range must be added to the communication parameters for function block FB1. Function block FB1 The communications parameters of the MCP are called MCPx... (x = 1 or 2) in function block FB1. A maximum of 2 machine control panels are supported by the basic PLC program. To synchronize several MCPs, the PLC program must be adapted accordingly. This is the user's (machine manufacturer's) responsibility. To operate a machine control panel MCP 483 as a DP slave, only the following parameters are relevant: Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 667 Machine control panel: MCP 483 28.6 Connection via PROFIBUS DP MCPNum: INT // see below: Note MCP1In: POINTER // Address of input signals MCP1Out: POINTER // Address of output signals The MCP2... parameters are only needed if a 2nd MCP is used in addition to the 1st MCP: MCP2In: POINTER // Address of input signals MCP2Out: POINTER // Address of output signals The parameters listed below serve to synchronize two MCPs: MCP1Stop: BOOL // Transfer of relevant operator components: MCP2Stop: BOOL // FALSE = start; TRUE = stop MCP1NotSend: BOOL // Send and receive mode of the relevant MCP2NotSend: BOOL // operator components: // FALSE = Send and receive is active // TRUE = only receive is active Note Parameter: MCPNum Up to and including basic PLC program, Version 7.1, for the parameter: MCPNum, 0 should always be specified. Parameter: MCPxStop and MCPxNotSend These parameters are irrelevant for connection via PROFIBUS DP. References A detailed description of the basic PLC program and/or FB 1 function block can be found in: /FB1/ Function description of bases: Basic P3 PLC program Section: FB 1: RUN_UP Basic program, startup section VDI interface parameter assignment The following function blocks can be used to assign the VDI interface: FC 19: Machine control panel MCP 483, version M (milling) FC 25: Machine control panel MCP 483, version T (turning) 668 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Machine control panel: MCP 483 28.6 Connection via PROFIBUS DP Note Function blocks FC 19, FC 24 and FC 25 are part of the basic PLC program. It is the user's (machine manufacturer's) responsibility to call the block correctly and/or assign the interface the appropriate parameters. References A detailed description of the function blocks for transferring the machine control panel signals to the VDI interface can be found in: /FB1/ Function description of bases: Basic P3 PLC program Section: FC 19: MCP_IFM ... Section: FC 24: MCP_IFM2 ... Section: FC 25: MCP_IFT ... Example The following example shows the communication parameter settings for function block FB 1 for a machine control panel: MCPNum := 0 // Number of active MCP MCP1In := P#E 0.0 // Address of input data (8 bytes) MCP1Out := P#A 0.0 // Address of output data (8 bytes) MCP1StatSend := P#A 0.0 // Presetting; no meaning MCP1StatRec := P#A 0.0 // Presetting; no meaning MCP1BusAdr := 0 // Presetting; no meaning MCP1Timeout := S5T#700MS // Presetting; no meaning MCP1Cycl := S5T#200MS // Presetting; no meaning MCPMPI := FALSE // MCP/HT 6 is operated on the "extended " MPI bus MCP1Stop := FALSE // Presetting; no meaning MCP1NotSend := FALSE // Presetting; no meaning MCPSDB210 := FALSE // Presetting; no meaning PLC user program If an MCP is connected via PROFIBUS DP, the basic PLC program does not check for module failure. In this case the MCP is monitored by a standard mechanism to monitor the active DP slave: PLC operating system PROFIBUS controller If a failure of a DP slave MCP is detected, the PLC defaults to STOP. Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 669 Machine control panel: MCP 483 28.6 Connection via PROFIBUS DP Customized response The following organization blocks can be added to the PLC user program to customize the response to a DP slave MCP failure: OB 82: Diagnostics interrupt OB 86: Rack failure Please refer to the corresponding SIMATIC literature for details of linking organization blocks and evaluating diagnostic data. Note In the event of the failure of a machine control panel connected via OPI/MPI, the following alarm is triggered by the basic PLC program: * Alarm "40026x machine control panel (x+1) failure"; with x = 0, 1 If the machine control panel is being operated as a DP slave, the user (machine manufacturer) is responsible for triggering a corresponding alarm. 28.6.6 Input/output image of DP slave MCP Arrangement: Keys and LEDs A key and the LED positioned above it form a logical unit. The key and the LED have the same number. Key: Sxy = Key number xy LED: LEDxy = LED number xy The Fig. shows the arrangement of keys and LEDs on the machine control panel together with their internal designation. For the sake of clarity, the LED designations are not shown in full. 670 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Machine control panel: MCP 483 28.6 Connection via PROFIBUS DP /(' /(' /(' /(' /(' /(' 6 Figure 28-8 /(' /(' /(' 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 /(' .H\ 6 6 6 6 Designation of keys and LEDs Input image Table 28-11 Arrangement of key signals in the input image of the DP slave MCP Signals from machine control panel (keys) Byte Bit7 Bit6 D C REPOS S01 Bit5 Bit4 Bit3 Bit2 B O JOG S09 TEACH S10 MDA S11 AUTO S12 REF S02 var. INC S03 10000 INC S08 1000 INC S07 100 INC S06 10 INC S05 1 INC S04 Keyswitch Keyswitch Feed Start S47 *Feed Stop S49 *NC Stop position 2 *Spindle Stop S47 NC Start position 0 Spindle Start S48 S16 S15 RESET S13 Keyswitch Single Block S14 I D C B O R1 S32 R4 S35 R7 S38 R10 S41 R9 S40 R8 S39 R6 S37 T14 S30 T15 S31 not used T6 S22 T7 S23 T8 S24 Spindle override EB n+0 EB n+1 EB n+2 EB n+3 Bit1 Bit0 Operating mode Machine functions EB n+4 position 1 Feed rate override Keyswitch Direction keys R15 S46 R13 S44 R14 S45 position 3 R2 S33 R3 S34 R5 S36 R12 S43 T9 S25 T10 S256 T11 S27 T1 S17 T2 S18 T3 S19 EB n+5 Axis selection Axis selection EB n+6 R11 S42 Freely assignable customer keys EB n+7 T12 S28 T13 S29 Freely assignable customer keys T4 S20 T5 S21 Signals marked with * are inverse signals Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 671 Machine control panel: MCP 483 28.6 Connection via PROFIBUS DP Output image Table 28-12 Arrangement of LED signals in the output image of the DP slave MCP Signals to machine control panel (LEDs) Byte Bit7 Bit6 1000 INC LED07 100 INC LED06 Feed Start LED50 Feed Stop LED49 R13 LED44 R1 LED32 AB n+0 AB n+1 Bit5 Bit4 Bit3 Bit2 10 INC LED05 1 INC LED04 JOG LED09 TEACH LED10 NC Start NC Stop LED15 REPOS LED01 REF LED02 var. INC LED03 10000 INC LED08 R7 LED38 R10 LED41 Single Block Spindle Start Spindle Stop LED48 LED47 R6 LED37 R15 LED46 T14 LED30 T15 LED31 Axis selection R2 LED33 Machine function AB n+2 MDA LED11 AUTO LED12 Machine functions Axis selection AB n+3 Bit0 Operating mode LED16 R4 LED35 Bit1 LED14 Axis selection R3 LED34 R5 LED36 AB n+4 R12 LED43 R11 LED42 R9 LED40 R8 LED39 Freely assignable customer keys T9 LED25 T10 LED26 T11 LED27 AB n+5 T12 LED28 T13 LED29 Freely assignable customer keys T1 LED17 T2 LED18 T3 LED19 T4 LED20 T5 LED21 T6 LED22 T7 LED23 T8 LED24 AB n+6 not used not used not used not used not used not used RESET1) LED13 R141) LED45 AB n+7 not used not used not used not used not used not used not used not used 1) New signal for MCP 483 672 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Machine control panel: MCP 483 28.7 Technical specifications 28.7 Technical specifications Security Safety class Degree of protection per EN 60529 III; PELV acc. to EN 50178 Front: IP65 Keyswitch: IP54 Approvals Rear side: IP00 CE Electrical specifications Input voltage Power consumption, max. DC 24 V Board 7W Lamps 7.2 W (6 x 1.2 W) *) Handwheels 2 x 0.9 W Total 16 W Mechanical data Dimensions Width: 483 mm Height: 155 mm Depth: 70 mm Mounting depth: 38 mm Distance from NCU/PCU MPI interface: 200 m PROFIBUS DP: 100 m Weight Mechanical ambient conditions Approx. 1.6 kg Operation Transport (in transport packaging) Vibratory load 10 -58 Hz: 0.015 mm 58 -200 Hz: 19.6 m/s2 3M4 per EN 60721-3-3 5 -9 Hz: 3.5 mm 9 -200 Hz: 9.81 m/s2 2M2 per EN 60721-3-2 Shock stressing 150 m/s2, 11 ms, 18 shocks 3M2 per EN 60721-3-3 150 m/s2, 11 ms, 18 shocks 2M2 per EN 60721-3-2 Climatic ambient conditions Cooling By natural convection Condensation, spraying water and icing Supply air Applicable standards Climate class Temperature limits Temperature change Limits for relative humidity Permissible change in the relative air humidity Not permitted Without caustic gases, dusts and oils Operation Storage/shipping (in transport packaging) EN 60721-3-3 EN 60721-3-1 / -3-2 3K5 1K3 / 2K4 0 ... 45 C (at front) 0 ... 55 C (at rear) -20 ... 60C Max. 10 K/h Max. 18 K/h 5 ... 80% at 25C 5 ... 95% at 25C max. 0.1% /min *) If the outputs for the illuminated pushbuttons (X53/X54) are loaded with the max. permissible current of 0.3 A, this results in additional power consumption of 36 W. The total power consumption is then 52 W. Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 673 Machine control panel: MCP 483 28.8 Replacement parts 28.8 Replacement parts 28.8.1 Overview Table 28-13 Spare parts for machine control panel MCP 483 Name Description Qua Order No.: ntity Variant A Actuating element 16 mm emergency stop mushroom-head pushbutton (red) 1 3SB2000-1AC01 Switching element with one contact, 1NO contact 1 3SB2404-0B Switching element with one contact, 1 NC contact 2 3SB2404-0C Holder for 2 switching elements 1 3SB2908-0AA 22 mm actuating element, 40 mm mushroom pushbutton, snap action with tamper protection, latching, red, with holder, unlit 1 3SB3000-1HA20 Contact block with 2 contacts 1 NO + 1 NC, 2-pole screw terminal 1 3SB3400-0A Key switch Keyswitch with key 1 6FC5247-0AF02-0AA0 Sets of keys Set of keys (10 sets) for machine control panel 1 set 6FC5148-0AA03-0AA0 Set of tension jacks Tension jack set (9 items) for supplementary components with 2.5 mm profile, length 20 mm 1 set 6FC5248-0AF14-0AA0 Override for rotary spindle switch Spindle/rapid traverse override, rotary switch 1x16G, T=24, cap, button, pointer, spindle and rapid-traverse dials 1 6FC5247-0AF12-0AA0 Rotary feed override switch Feed rate/rapid traverse, override rotary switch 1x23G, T=32, cap, button, pointer, feed and rapid-traverse dials 1 6FC5247-0AF13-0AA0 Override for rotary spindle switch Spindle/rapid traverse override, solid-state rotary switch 1x16G, T=24, cap, button, pointer, spindle and rapid-traverse dials 1 6FC5247-0AF12-1AA0 EMERGENCY STOP button Variant B EMERGENCY STOP key Obsolescent type (up to 12/2004) Replacement type (as of 01/2005) 674 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Machine control panel: MCP 483 28.8 Replacement parts 28.8.2 Name Description Rotary feed override switch Feed rate/rapid traverse, override solid-state rotary switch 1x23G, T=32, cap, button, pointer, feed and rapid-traverse dials Qua Order No.: ntity 1 6FC5247-0AF13-1AA0 Replacement Replacement of the rotary switch is described in chapter: "15" TFT Operator Panel, 416 mm wide, without videolink receiver". Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 675 Machine control panel: MCP 483 28.9 Accessories 28.9 Accessories 28.9.1 Overview Accessories and options for machine control panel MCP 483 Component Description Quantit y Order No.: Slide-in labels- SINUMERIK 810D/840D slide-in labels (3 A4 films) 1 set 6FC5248-0AF22-1AA1 Cable set for additional control devices SINUMERIK 810D/840D cable set (60 pieces) for additional control devices of machine control panels Length: 500 mm 1 set 6FC5247-0AA35-0AA0 Cable for handwheel connection *) SINUMERIK 810D/840D, cable for handwheel connection, max. cable length: 5m 1 6FX8002-2CP00-1xxx Direct keys/handwheel connection Direct keys/handwheel connection Option for 6FC5203-0AF22-1AA1/- 0AF23-1AA0 1 6FC5252-0AF00-0AA0 *) see Figure 'LPHQVLRQVLQPP 3LQ /HQJWKDFFRUGLQJWROHQJWKFRGH 6KLHOG 3 0 $B+: ;$B+: %B+: ;%B+: 3 0 *1 *1 <( *( 2* 25 5' 57 %8 %/ 97 9, %1 %5 6RIWZDUH%. 6KLHOG &DVLQJ ([SODQDWLRQ 6LJQDOFRQQHFWRU 6LJQDOOLQH Figure 28-9 3OXJFRQQHFWRULQVXODWHG 5LQJFDEOHOXJLQVXODWHG )OH[LEOHOLQHPP PD[DOORZHGV\VWHPOLQHOHQJWKP Connecting cable for handwheel Order No. 6FX8002-2CP00-1xxx (xx is the length code: A = 0, B = 1, etc.) 676 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Machine control panel: MCP 483 28.9 Accessories 28.9.2 Membrane keyboard: Labeling the slide-in labels Figure 28-10 Machine control panel MCP 483 The machine control panel (MCP) shown above is the standard shipped variant. You can create your own slide-in labels to label the keys differently. A printable blank film (A4) is supplied with the panel for this purpose. A spare parts kit containing three blank films is also available: MLFB: 6FC5248-0AF22-1AA1 (Item no. A5E00179123) Figure 28-11 Blank film for MCP 483 Preparing slide-in labels Instructions are given below on how to print the required key symbols on the supplied film or how to create your own individual film: The software on the DOConCD / Catalog NC 61 (CD enclosed) includes four files for Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 677 Machine control panel: MCP 483 28.9 Accessories the blank films: Template_M_MCP483.doc [default assignment for milling - standard; (A)] Template_T_MCP483.doc [defaults for turning; (B)] Template_MCP483.doc (blank template for film: Item No. A5E00205579; (C)] Symbols.doc Key symbols as Word file, inscription on labels as jpg file (D) Files Template_M_MCP483.doc, Template_T_MCP483.doc and Template_MCP483.doc include a table function showing the corresponding keyboard positions. An example of each of the MCP files (milling and turning) is given below: (A) < = 3DUW ; 3DUW 3DUW 3DUW 3DUW 3DUW 3DUW Figure 28-12 Template_M_MCP483.doc for the "Milling" version 678 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Machine control panel: MCP 483 28.9 Accessories (B) < ; & 3DUW = = 3DUW & ; < 3DUW 3DUW 3DUW 3DUW 3DUW Figure 28-13 Template_T_MCP483.doc for the "Turning" version (C) 3DUW 3DUW 3DUW Figure 28-14 Template_MCP483.doc (blank template for film: Item No. A5E00205579) Within the table cells the key symbol required in each case can be copied and pasted into the corresponding table field. Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 679 Machine control panel: MCP 483 28.9 Accessories The vertical bars shown in the diagram do not appear on the printed-out labels. The strip "Part5" is included twice so that it is available optionally as either a 1-color or 3-color strip. Note Use the "Arial" font to format text. This font is comparable to the "Univers S57" font, used by Siemens for the key labeling. (D) Table 28-14 File Symbols.doc 7001 7013 7025 7002 7014 7026 7003 7015 7027 7004 7016 7005 7017 7029 7006 7018 7030 7007 7019 7031 7008 7020 7009 7021 7010 ; = 7028 7032 7033 7022 7120 7011 7023 7121 7012 7024 7123 < 7124 & ; < = ; < = & 7125 7126 7127 7128 7129 7130 7131 7132 Creating your own symbols Printing in a vector program (e.g. Designer, Freehand, CorelDraw): - Draw a 15 x 15 mm square, fill with the color white and give it an invisible border line. - Place the symbol in the center of this square. - Copy the entire image (square and symbol) and paste it into a Word document (Symbols.doc). Drawing in an image editing program (e.g. Photoshop, Picture Publisher, Paint): - Create a square area (e.g. 100 x 100 pixels) filled with the color white. - Draw the symbol in the center of this square. - Copy the entire image (square and symbol) and paste it into the Word document (Symbols.doc). 680 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Machine control panel: MCP 483 28.9 Accessories Dimension drawings The following is a dimension drawing for the blank template for MCP 483: 1DUURZODEHOZLGWKFPKHLJKWFP +HLJKWFP +HLJKWFP +HLJKWFP +HLJKWFP 1DUURZODEHOZLGWKFPKHLJKWFP 3DUW +HLJKWFP 3DUW +HLJKWFP :LGWKFP :LGWKFP :LGWKFP :LGWKFP :LGWKFP 3DUW +HLJKWFP Figure 28-15 Dimension drawing for slide-in labels for MCP 483 Note The slide-in strips are printed on the front with a laser printer. HP Color Laser Jet film C2936A is used. To make the labels easier to slide in, they should be rounded by about 1.5 mm. The outer lines of the strip are the cutting edge. It is advisable to run a test print on normal paper before printing the labels on film. Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 681 Machine control panel: MCP 483 28.9 Accessories 682 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 29 Machine control panel: MCP 310 29.1 Description The machine control panel MCP 310 permits user-friendly and clear operation of the machine functions. It is suitable for machine-level operation of milling, turning, grinding and special machines. The 49 keys are equipped with user-labeled slide-in strips for adapting to specific machines. A DIN A4 film for labeling the slide-in strips is included in the delivery kit. The machine control panel is secured from the rear using special clamps supplied with the panel. Validity This description applies to the machine control panel: Type Key type Order No.: MCP 310 Film 6FC5203-0AF23-1AA0 Features Operator Controls Operating mode and function keys: - 49 keys with LEDs when connected via PROFIBUS DP - 48 keys with LEDs when connected via MPI - Direction keys for milling machines with rapid traverse override - Default key assignment includes 16 freely assignable customer keys Feed control with override feed/rapid traverse (rotary switch with 23 positions) Keyswitch (4 positions and 3 different keys) Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 683 Machine control panel: MCP 310 29.1 Description Interfaces: PROFIBUS-DP/MPI interface for 6 control devices (6 inputs/6 outputs) (additional cable set required for control devices; see section: "Accessories") for 16 direct keys of OP 012/OP 015A/TP 015A when connected via PROFIBUS DP (Option: direct keys required). For 2 handwheels when connected via PROFIBUS DP (max. cable length: 5 m) (handwheel connection option required. The handwheel connection function depends on the NCU software.) Expansion slots: 6 slots for control devices (d = 16 mm) 1 slot for emergency stop key or rotary override switch (to d = 22 cm) Key type: Membrane keys 684 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Machine control panel: MCP 310 29.2 Operator controls and indicators 29.2 Operator controls and indicators 29.2.1 Front side Overview Figure 29-1 (1) Position of control elements on machine control panel MCP 310 Operating modes and machine functions (2) 16 customer keys (3) Spindle control (4) Slot for EMERGENCY STOP button or spindle override switch (5) Feed control with override switch (6) Slots locations for control devices 16 mm*) (7) Program control (8) Keylock switch *) see slots for control devices Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 685 Machine control panel: MCP 310 29.2 Operator controls and indicators EMERGENCY STOP key If an EMERGENCY STOP button is added: see section: "Machine control panel MCP 483," section: "Display and operating elements" "Front side." Mounting slots for control devices WARNING The openings for mounting control devices must not be chipped out (risk of damage!), but drilled to the required width. 29.2.2 Rear side COM board The control and display elements on the rear of the MCP 310 are located on the COM board (shown with a gray background in the illustration). The detailed cutout under or above the interface name shows the position of pin 1 on the connectors. ; ; ; ++ ; ; ; 6 ; &20ERDUG (TXLSRWHQWLDOERQGLQJFRQQHFWLRQ ; .H\VZLWFK ; ; Figure 29-2 6 ; ; Rear of the MCP 310 showing the control and display elements and the interfaces Description of rear control and display elements see section: "Machine control panel MCP 483", section: "Control and display elements" --> "Rear side" 686 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Machine control panel: MCP 310 29.3 Interfaces 29.3 Interfaces Location of the interfaces MCP 310 communication is handled by the COM board where the interfaces are located (see section: "Control and display elements" --> "Rear side"). Description of the Interfaces see section: "Machine control panel MCP 483," section: "Interfaces" Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 687 Machine control panel: MCP 310 29.4 Mounting 29.4 Mounting Dimension drawing 310 31.3 175 33 20.2 104.65 109.25 78.9 A Rz 120 15.3 1,5mm - 6mm A-A 2:1 109.65 73.9 A 109.25 Figure 29-3 688 Dimension drawing for machine control panel MCP 310 (1) Mounting frame (2) Tension jack (6 parts) - tightening torque 0.8 Nm Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Machine control panel: MCP 310 29.4 Mounting Tension jacks The machine control panel is attached by means of 6 tension jacks (0.8 Nm; see dimension drawing). Figure 29-4 Panel cutout for machine control panel MCP 310 Mounting position Max. 60 to the vertical. For mounting positions greater than 60, an additional fan must be installed to keep the ambient temperature of the machine control panel constantly below 55 C. Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 689 Machine control panel: MCP 310 29.5 Settings via DIP switch S3 29.5 Settings via DIP switch S3 Choosing the connection type The connection type is set via switches 9 and 10: Table 29-1 Connection type 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Meaning / value - - - - - - - - on on PROFIBUS DP - - - - - - - - Off Off MPI Connection type: MPI For connection type MPI, the MPIs are set using switches 1 to 7: Table 29-2 1 MPI parameters 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Meaning / value Data transfer rate on - - - - - - - - 1.5 Mbaud Off - - - - - - - - 187.5 kbaud Transmission cycle time Reception monitoring - on Off - - - - - - - 200 ms 2400 ms - Off on - - - - - - - 100 ms 1200 ms - Off Off - - - - - - - 50 ms 600 ms MPI 690 - - - Off Off Off Off - - - 0 - - - Off Off Off on - - - 1 - - - Off Off on Off - - - 2 - - - Off Off on on - - - 3 - - - Off on Off Off - - - 4 - - - Off on Off on - - - 5 - - - Off on on Off - - - 6 - - - Off on on on - - - 7 - - - on Off Off Off - - - 8 - - - on Off Off on - - - 9 - - - on Off on Off - - - 10 - - - on Off on on - - - 11 - - - on on Off Off - - - 12 - - - on on Off on - - - 13 - - - on on on Off - - - 14 - - - on on on - - - 15 on Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Machine control panel: MCP 310 29.5 Settings via DIP switch S3 Connection type: PROFIBUS-DP For connection type PROFIBUS DP, the PROFIBUS is set using switches 1 to 7: Table 29-3 1 PROFIBUS address 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Meaning / value PROFIBUS Off Off Off Off Off Off Off - - - 0 on Off Off Off Off Off Off - - - 1 Off on Off Off Off Off Off - - - 2 on on Off Off Off Off Off : : : - - - 3 : : : : - - - : (etc.) on Off on on on on on - - - 125 Off on on on on on - - - 126 on Hardware code The code for the series is set with switch 8: Table 29-4 Hardware code 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 - - - - - - - Off - - Meaning / value Series Standard setting The default setting for DIP switch S3 is: Data transfer rate: 1.5 Mbaud Transmission cycle time: 100 ms; reception monitoring 1200 ms Bus address: 6 Connection type: MPI Table 29-5 Standard setting 1 2 3 on Of f on Off on Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Meaning / value on Off Off Off Off Series 691 Machine control panel: MCP 310 29.5 Settings via DIP switch S3 Note Via switches 9 and 10 of the DIP switch S3 (see Section: "Operating and Display Elements" "Rear Side") the connection type, i.e. the transfer protocol and the interface used are set: MPI If MPI is selected, the MPI parameters are set using switches 1 to 7. PROFIBUS DP If PROFIBUS DP is selected, the PROFIBUS address is set using switches 1 to 7. The same code should be used for the standard hardware (switch 8 = off). 692 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Machine control panel: MCP 310 29.6 Connection via PROFIBUS DP 29.6 Connection via PROFIBUS DP 29.6.1 Overview This section describes: Requirements for adding a DP slave MCP to the hardware configuration for a SIMATIC S7 project. Configuring a DP slave MCP with STEP7 "HW config." Details of how to link the DP slave MCP to the basic PLC program and user program (optional) Note The instructions given in this chapter are essentially limited to the special requirements for configuring the DP slave MCP. For more details about working with SIMATIC STEP 7 please refer to the relevant SIMATIC documentation or online help. Note Both units can be linked up using the 20-pin ribbon cable supplied in order to transfer the direct control key signals of the operator panel front to the COM board of the machine control panel. The direct control key module therefore no longer needs to be connected. 29.6.2 Prerequisites The following components are needed as prerequisites for adding a DP slave MCP to the hardware configuration: SIMATIC STEP 7 GSD file of DP slave MCP Graphics files of DP slave MCP SIMATIC STEP 7 SIMATIC STEP 7 is required in the following version or later: SIMATIC STEP 7 version 5.2 or later, Service Pack 1 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 693 Machine control panel: MCP 310 29.6 Connection via PROFIBUS DP GSD file The GSD file of the DP slave MCP is required in the following version or later: SI008109.GSD version 1.0 or later A GSD file contains all the properties of a DP slave in ASCII format. For each DP slave SIMATIC STEP 7 requires a module-specific GSD file so that the DP slave can be found in the hardware catalog. The DP slave MCP is shown in SIMATIC STEP 7 in the hardware catalog of "HW Config" under the following path: Profile: Standard PROFIBUS-DP > Other field devices > NC/RC > Motion Control > SINUMERIK MCP If the module is not displayed, the GSD file must be installed. To do this, in "HW config" use menu command Tools > Install new GSD file. Before installing the GSD file, please read the following instructions concerning the graphics files. Graphics files The graphics files belonging to the GSD file: SI8109_N.BMP SI8109_S.BMP are used to display the DP slave MCP in the "HW config" station window. They are automatically installed by STEP 7 when the GSD file is installed. They must be located in the same directory as the GSD file. 29.6.3 Functions of the machine control panel The machine control panel offers the following functions: Standard Handwheel Additional I/Os Standard The function transfers input/output data from the function keys and user-specific keys and outputs: Input data: 8 bytes Output data: 8 bytes The input/output data for machine control panel MCP 310 is compatible with the input/output data from the previous machine control panel OP 032S. 694 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Machine control panel: MCP 310 29.6 Connection via PROFIBUS DP Handwheel The function transfers the absolute values for the two handwheels that can be connected to the machine control panel: Absolute value 1. Handwheel Absolute value 2. Handwheel Low byte High byte For each handwheel the current handwheel value is transferred as a 16-bit absolute value relative to the starting value. The starting value for the sensor counter in the handwheel is 0. The absolute values are transferred in big endian format. The data for both handwheels is always transferred. The absolute value for a handwheel that is not connected is always 0. Additional I/Os The function transfers the data for all non-standard inputs/outputs: Direct control keys Customer keys: 6 signals (bit 0 to bit 6) Rotary switch with the following distribution: Input data: 5 bytes Direct control keys (OP 012) User keys 1. Rotary switch Low byte 2. Rotary switch High byte Output data: 2 bytes Reserved always 0 Customer LEDs Low byte 29.6.4 High byte Configuring the DP slave MCP This section describes how to configure a DP slave MCP with reference to the hardware configuration for a SIMATIC S7 project shown in Figure by way of example. The hardware configuration has the following modules: SIMATIC station 300 with SINUMERIK 810D/840D and PLC 317-2DP SINUMERIK MCP with module: standard, handwheel, extended Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 695 Machine control panel: MCP 310 29.6 Connection via PROFIBUS DP Procedure Configuring the DP slave MCP as an S7 project involves the following steps: 1. Add the DP slave MCP to the configuration (1) 2. Set the PROFIBUS address 3. Add the appropriate module to the DP slave MCP according to the functions required. (2) 4. Set the I/O addresses for the individual slots. HW-Konfig - [SINUMERIK840D (Konfiguration) -- PROFIBUS-MCP] Station Bearbeiten Einfugen Zielsystem Ansicht Extras Fenster Hilfe PROFIBUS(1): DP-Mastersystem (1) (0) 810D/840D 2 PLC 317-2DP 2AJ10 X1 X2 MPI DP IM 360 3 4 Profil: Standard I/O NC/RC MOTION CONTROL SINUMERIK MCP Universalmodul (9) SINUME S7 FM-NCU standard standard, handwheel standard, extended standard, handwheel, ex PROFIBUS(1): DP-Mastersystem (1) Steckplatz 1 2 3 Figure 29-5 DP-Kennung 55 2EA 192 Bestellnummer / Bezeichnung E-Adresse A-Adresse standard, handwheel, extended --> standard, handwheel, exten --> standard, handwheel, exten 0...7 258...261 8...12 0...7 Kom... 8...9 Configuration with DP slave MCP Requirements: S7 project The following status is required for the S7 project to which the DP slave MCP is to be added: You have created the S7 project You have set up a SIMATIC 300 station with PROFIBUS master-capable SINUMERIK controller Adding a DP slave MCP To add a DP slave MCP to the configuration, open the hardware catalog using the menu command View > Catalog View > Catalog. The DP slave MCP can be found at: Profile: Standard PROFIBUS-DP > Other field devices > NC/RC > Motion Control > SINUMERIK MCP 696 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Machine control panel: MCP 310 29.6 Connection via PROFIBUS DP Click with the left mouse button on the DP slave MCP (SINUMERIK MCP) in the hardware catalog and drag it onto the DP master system in the station window by holding down the left mouse button. The DP master system is displayed in the station window with the following symbol: When you release the left mouse button, the DP slave MCP is added to the configuration. Note As you drag the DP slave the cursor appears as a circle with a slash through it. When the cursor is positioned exactly over the DP master system, it changes to a plus sign, and the DP slave can be added to the configuration. PROFIBUS parameters Once you have added the DP slave MCP to the configuration, the "Properties - PROFIBUS interface SINUMERIK MCP" dialog box is displayed. The following PROFIBUS parameters must either be set or verified: PROFIBUS address Data transfer rate Profile Dialog Dialog: Properties - PROFIBUS interface SINUMERIK MCP Tab card: parameters Address: <PROFIBUS address> Button: "Properties..." Dialog: Properties - PROFIBUS Tab card: Network settings Data transfer rate: 12 Mbaud Profile: DP OK OK Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 697 Machine control panel: MCP 310 29.6 Connection via PROFIBUS DP Note The PROFIBUS address of the DP slave MCP set in the S7 project must match the PROFIBUS address set on the module (DIP switch S3) (see Section: "Settings via DIP switch S3") There is no automatic adjustment! The following data must agree: 1. SIMATIC S7 configuration of DP slave MCP PROFIBUS address 2. Machine control panel MCP 310 PROFIBUS address (DIP switch S3) Adding a module The active functions and hence the number of user data elements to be transferred are chosen by selecting the appropriate pre-configured module. The modules in the hardware catalog are positioned below the DP slave MCP. The following modules are available: Universal module (not applicable) standard standard, handwheel standard, extended standard, handwheel, extended Module: standard The module transfers the data for the "Standard" function: Input data: 8 bytes Standard data (8 bytes) Output data: 8 bytes Standard data (8 bytes) 698 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Machine control panel: MCP 310 29.6 Connection via PROFIBUS DP Module: standard, handwheel The module transfers the data for the "Standard" and "Handwheel" functions: Input data: 12 bytes Standard data (8 bytes) Absolute value 1st handwheel (2 bytes) Absolute value 2nd handwheel (2 bytes) Low byte High byte Output data: 8 bytes Standard data (8 bytes) Module: standard, extended The module transfers the data for the "Standard" and "Additional I/Os" functions: Input data: 13 bytes Standard data (8 bytes) Direct control keys (OP 012) (2 bytes) Customer keys (1 byte) 1. Rotary switch (1 byte) Low byte 2. Rotary switch (1 byte) High byte Output data: 10 bytes Standard data (8 bytes) Reserved (1 byte) Customer LEDs (1 byte) Low byte High byte Module: standard, handwheel, extended The module transfers the data for the "Standard", "Handwheel" and "Additional I/Os" functions: Input data: 17 bytes Standard data (8 bytes) Absolute value 1st handwheel (2 bytes) Absolute value 2nd handwheel (2 bytes) Direct control keys (OP 012) (2 bytes) Low byte Customer keys (1 byte) 1. Rotary switch (1 byte) 2. Rotary switch (1 byte) High byte Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 699 Machine control panel: MCP 310 29.6 Connection via PROFIBUS DP Output data: 10 bytes Standard data (8 bytes) Reserved (1 byte) Customer LEDs (1 byte) Low byte High byte I/O addresses If you add a module to slot 1 of the DP slave MCP, the input/output addresses are automatically assigned by STEP 7. Double clicking with the left mouse button on a slot opens the "Properties - DP slave" dialog box. The starting addresses for the I/O data for the slot can be set here. 29.6.5 Linking the DP slave MCP This section describes how to link the DP slave MCP in the basic PLC program for transferring the standard input / output data in the VDI interface to the PLC user program (optional) to implement a user-specific response to a module failure Note "Handwheel" function The "Handwheel" function is not currently supported by the basic PLC program. "Additional I/Os" function Processing of additional I/O data is the sole responsibility of the user (machine manufacturer) and is not supported by the basic PLC program. PLC basic program In order to transfer the standard I/O data for the DP slave MCP using the basic PLC program, the corresponding I/O address range must be added to the communication parameters for function block FB1. Function block FB1 The communications parameters of the MCP are called MCPx... (x = 1 or 2) in function block FB1. A maximum of 2 machine control panels are supported by the basic PLC program. To synchronize several MCPs, the PLC program must be adapted accordingly. This is the user's (machine manufacturer's) responsibility. 700 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Machine control panel: MCP 310 29.6 Connection via PROFIBUS DP To operate a machine control panel MCP 310 as a DP slave, only the following parameters are relevant: MCPNum: INT // see below: Note MCP1In: POINTER // Address of input signals MCP1Out: POINTER // Address of output signals The MCP2... parameters are only needed if a 2nd MCP is used in addition to the 1st MCP: MCP2In: POINTER // Address of input signals MCP2Out: POINTER // Address of output signals The parameters listed below serve to synchronize two MCPs: MCP1Stop: BOOL // Transfer of relevant operator components: MCP2Stop: BOOL // FALSE = start; TRUE = stop MCP1NotSend: BOOL // Send and receive mode of the relevant MCP2NotSend: BOOL // operator components: // FALSE = Send and receive is active // TRUE = only receive is active Note Parameter: MCPNum Up to and including basic PLC program, Version 7.1, for the parameter: MCPNum, 0 should always be specified. Parameter: MCPxStop and MCPxNotSend These parameters are irrelevant for connection via PROFIBUS DP. References A detailed description of the basic PLC program and/or FB 1 function block can be found in: /FB1/ Function description of bases: Basic P3 PLC program Section: FB 1: RUN_UP Basic program, startup section VDI interface parameter assignment The following function blocks can be used to assign the VDI interface: FC 24: Machine control panel MCP 310, version M (milling) Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 701 Machine control panel: MCP 310 29.6 Connection via PROFIBUS DP Note Function blocks FC 19, FC 24 and FC 25 are part of the basic PLC program. It is the user's (machine manufacturer's) responsibility to call the block correctly and/or assign the interface the appropriate parameters. References A detailed description of the function blocks for transferring the machine control panel signals to the VDI interface can be found in: /FB1/ Function description of bases: Basic P3 PLC program Section: FC 19: MCP_IFM ... Section: FC 24: MCP_IFM2 ... Section: FC 25: MCP_IFT ... Example The following example shows the communication parameter settings for function block FB 1 for a machine control panel: MCPNum := 0 // Number of active MCP MCP1In := P#E 0.0 // Address of input data (8 bytes) MCP1Out := P#A 0.0 // Address of output data (8 bytes) MCP1StatSend := P#A 0.0 // Presetting; no meaning MCP1StatRec := P#A 0.0 // Presetting; no meaning MCP1BusAdr := 0 // Presetting; no meaning MCP1Timeout := S5T#700MS // Presetting; no meaning MCP1Cycl := S5T#200MS // Presetting; no meaning MCPMPI := FALSE // MCP/HT 6 is operated on the "expanded " MPI bus MCP1Stop := FALSE // Presetting; no meaning MCP1NotSend := FALSE // Presetting; no meaning MCPSDB210 := FALSE // Presetting; no meaning PLC user program If an MCP is connected via PROFIBUS DP, the basic PLC program does not check for module failure. In this case the MCP is monitored by a standard mechanism to monitor the active DP slave: PLC operating system PROFIBUS controller If a failure of a DP slave MCP is detected, the PLC defaults to STOP. 702 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Machine control panel: MCP 310 29.6 Connection via PROFIBUS DP Customized response The following organization blocks can be added to the PLC user program to customize the response to a DP slave MCP failure: OB 82: Diagnostics interrupt OB 86: Rack failure Please refer to the corresponding SIMATIC literature for details of linking organization blocks and evaluating diagnostic data. Note In the event of the failure of a machine control panel connected via OPI/MPI, the following alarm is triggered by the basic PLC program: * Alarm "40026x machine control panel (x+1) failure"; with x = 0, 1 If the machine control panel is being operated as a DP slave, the user (machine manufacturer) is responsible for triggering a corresponding alarm. 29.6.6 Input/output image of DP slave MCP Arrangement: Keys and LEDs A key and the LED positioned above it form a logical unit. The key and the LED have the same number. Key: Sxy = Key number xy LED: LEDxy = LED number xy The Fig. shows the arrangement of keys and LEDs on the machine control panel together with their internal designation. For the sake of clarity, the LED designations are not shown in full. Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 703 Machine control panel: MCP 310 29.6 Connection via PROFIBUS DP /(' /(' /(' /(' /(' /(' /(' /(' /(' /(' 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 Figure 29-6 /(' .H\ Designation of keys and LEDs Input image Table 29-6 Arrangement of key signals in the input image of the DP slave MCP Signals from machine control panel (keys) Byte Bit7 Bit6 *NC stop S19 SPS36 NC Start S20 SP right S39 EB n+1 Bit3 Bit2 Sp100% S37 Feed rate SP+ S38 position 0 INC 1000 S07 INC 100 S06 I D Keyswitch Keyswitch Keyswitch position 1 Opt. K. T16 S18 KT5 X52.3 EB n+6 MDA S10 AUTO S13 REP S01 TEACH S11 Machine function INC 10 S05 INC 1 S04 B O KT1 X51.2 KT0 X51.1 Feed rate override Direction keys Free K. Bit0 Machine function position 3 Mach. fu. RESET S17 S48 JOG S09 REF S02 SP left S41 INC VAR S03 + S50 Single Block S16 Keyswitch *SP Stop S40 *Feed Stop S34 position 2 Bit1 Operating mode Feed Start S35 EB n+4 EB n+5 Bit4 Spindle EB n+2 EB n+3 Bit5 Spindle override EB n+0 C Optional customer keys Rapid traverse S49 KT4 X52.2 KT3 X52.1 6 S47 5 S46 4 S45 KT2 X51.3 Axis selection Freely assignable customer keys T9 S29 T10 S30 T11 S31 T1 S21 T2 S22 T3 S23 EB n+7 T12 S32 WCS/MCS S33 Z S44 Y S43 X S42 Freely assignable customer keys T13 S12 T14 S14 T15 S15 T6 S26 T7 S27 T8 S28 Freely assignable customer keys T4 S24 T5 S25 Signals marked with * are inverse signals 704 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Machine control panel: MCP 310 29.6 Connection via PROFIBUS DP Output image Table 29-7 Arrangement of LED signals in the output image of the DP slave MCP Signals to machine control panel (LEDs) Byte Bit7 Bit6 *NC Stop LED19 SPLED36 NC Start LED20 SP right LED39 AB n+0 AB n+3 Bit3 Bit2 SP+ LED38 Single block LED16 JOG LED09 Feed rate *SP Stop LED40 SP left LED41 Reset 1) LED17 REF LED02 Mach. Fu. not used 1000 INC LED07 100 INC LED06 10 INC LED05 1 INC LED04 not used not used not used not used *Hold LED34 var. INC LED03 not used not used not used Free K. Opt. K. T16 LED18 KT5 AB n+6 AUTO LED13 not used REP LED01 TEACH LED11 Optional customer keys Rapid traverse LED49 KT4 KT3 6 LED47 5 LED46 4 LED45 KT2 KT1 KT0 Y LED43 X LED42 Axis selection Freely assignable customer keys T9 LED29 T10 LED30 T11 LED31 T1 LED21 T2 LED22 T3 LED23 AB n+7 1) MDA LED10 Machine function Direction keys LED48 Bit0 Machine function Start LED35 + LED50 Bit1 Operating mode SP100% LED37 Spindle AB n+4 AB n+5 Bit4 Spindle override AB n+1 AB n+2 Bit5 T12 LED32 WCS/MCS LED33 Z LED44 Freely assignable customer keys T13 LED12 T14 LED14 T15 LED15 T6 LED26 T7 LED27 T8 LED28 Freely assignable customer keys T4 LED24 T5 LED25 New signal for MCP 310 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 705 Machine control panel: MCP 310 29.7 Technical specifications 29.7 Technical specifications Security Safety class Degree of protection per EN 60529 III; PELV acc. to EN 50178 Front: IP65 Keyswitch: IP54 Approvals Rear side: IP00 CE Electrical specifications Input voltage Power consumption, max. DC 24 V Board 7W Lamps 7.2 W (6 x 1.2 W) *) Handwheels 2 x 0.9 W Total 16 W Mechanical data Dimensions Width: 310 mm Height: 175 mm Depth: 65 mm Mounting depth: 33 mm Distance from NCU/PCU MPI interface 200 m PROFIBUS DP: 100 m Weight Mechanical ambient conditions Approx. 1.2 kg Operation Transport (in transport packaging) Vibratory load 10 -58 Hz: 0.015 mm 58 -200 Hz: 19.6 m/s2 3M6 per EN 60068-2-6 5 -9 Hz: 3.5 mm 9 -200 Hz: 9.81 m/s2 2M2 per EN 60068-2-27 Shock stressing 150 m/s2, 11 ms, 18 shocks 3M4 per EN 60721-3-3 150 m/s2, 11 ms, 18 shocks 2M2 per EN 60721-3-2 Climatic ambient conditions Cooling By natural convection Condensation, spraying water and icing Supply air Applicable standards Climate class Temperature limits Temperature change Limits for relative humidity Permissible change in the relative air humidity Not permitted Without caustic gases, dusts and oils Operation Storage/shipping (in transport packaging) EN 60721-3-3 EN 60721-3-1 / -3-2 3K5 1K3 / 2K4 0 ... 45 C (at front) 0 ... 55 C (at rear) -20 ... 60C Max. 10 K/h Max. 18 K/h 5 ... 80% at 25C 5 ... 95% at 25C max. 0.1% /min *) If the outputs for the illuminated pushbuttons (X53/X54) are loaded with the max. permissible current of 0.3 A, this results in additional power consumption of 36 W. The total power consumption is then 52 W. 706 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Machine control panel: MCP 310 29.8 Replacement parts 29.8 Replacement parts 29.8.1 Overview Table 29-8 Spare parts for machine control panel MCP 483 Name Description Key switch Keyswitch with key Sets of keys Qua Order No.: ntity 1 6FC5247-0AF02-0AA0 Set of keys (10 sets) for machine control panel 1 set 6FC5148-0AA03-0AA0 Set of tension jacks Tension jack set (9 items) for supplementary components with 2.5 mm profile, length 20 mm 1 set 6FC5248-0AF14-0AA0 Override for rotary spindle switch Spindle/rapid traverse override, rotary switch 1x16G, T=24, cap, button, pointer, spindle and rapid-traverse dials 1 6FC5247-0AF12-0AA0 Rotary feed override switch Feed rate/rapid traverse, override rotary switch 1x23G, T=32, cap, button, pointer, feed and rapid-traverse dials 1 6FC5247-0AF13-0AA0 Override for rotary spindle switch Spindle/rapid traverse override, solid-state rotary switch 1x16G, T=24, cap, button, pointer, spindle and rapid-traverse dials 1 6FC5247-0AF12-1AA0 Rotary feed override switch Feed rate/rapid traverse, override solid-state rotary switch 1x23G, T=32, cap, button, pointer, feed and rapid-traverse dials 1 6FC5247-0AF13-1AA0 Obsolescent type (up to 12/2004) Replacement type (as of 01/2005) 29.8.2 Replacement Replacement of the rotary switch is described in chapter: "15" TFT Operator Panel, 416 mm wide, without videolink receiver". Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 707 Machine control panel: MCP 310 29.9 Accessories 29.9 Accessories 29.9.1 Overview Accessories and options for machine control panel MCP 310 Component Description Quantit y Order No.: Actuating element 16 mm Emergency Stop mushroom-head pushbutton (red) 1 3SB2000-1AC01 Switching element with one contact, 1NO contact 1 3SB2404-0B Switching element with one contact, 1 NC contact 1 3SB2404-0C Holder for 2 switching elements 1 3SB2908-0AA 22 mm actuating element, emergency stop mushroom pushbutton, red, mushroomshaped button and bracket 1 3SB3000-1HA20 Contact block with 2 contacts 1 NO + 1 NC, 2-pole screw terminal 1 3SB3400-0A Variant A EMERGENCY STOP button Variant B EMERGENCY STOP button Slide-in labels- SINUMERIK 810D/840D inscribable slidein labels (3 DIN A4 films) 1 set 6FC5248-0AF22-1AA1 Cable set for additional control devices SINUMERIK 810D/840D cable set for additional control devices Length: 500 mm 1 set 6FC5247-0AA35-0AA0 Cable for handwheel connection *) SINUMERIK 810D/840D, cable for handwheel connection, max. cable length: 5 m 1 6FX8002-2CP00-1xxx Direct keys/handwheel connection Direct keys/handwheel connection Option for 6FC5203-0AF22-1AA1/- 0AF23-1AA0 1 6FC5252-0AF00-0AA0 *) see Figure 708 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Machine control panel: MCP 310 29.9 Accessories 'LPHQVLRQVLQPP 3LQ /HQJWKDFFRUGLQJWROHQJWKFRGH 6KLHOG 3 0 $B+: ;$B+: %B+: ;%B+: 3 0 *1 *1 <( *( 2* 25 5' 57 %8 %/ 97 9, %1 %5 6RIWZDUH%. 6KLHOG &DVLQJ ([SODQDWLRQ 6LJQDOFRQQHFWRU 6LJQDOOLQH Figure 29-7 3OXJFRQQHFWRULQVXODWHG 5LQJFDEOHOXJLQVXODWHG )OH[LEOHOLQHPP PD[DOORZHGV\VWHPOLQHOHQJWKP Connecting cable for handwheel Order no. 6FX8002-2CP00-1xxx (xx is the length code: A = 0, B = 1, etc.) 29.9.2 Labeling the slide-in labels Figure 29-8 Machine control panel MCP 310 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 709 Machine control panel: MCP 310 29.9 Accessories The figure shows the Machine Control Panel (MCP) in its standard version. You can create your own slide-in labels in order to change the key labels. A printable blank film (A4) is supplied with the panel for this purpose. A spare parts kit containing three blank films is also available: MLFB: 6FC5248-0AF23-1AA0 (Item No. A5E00179115) Figure 29-9 (1) Blank film for MCP 310 Print direction Files for printing the blank film The DOConCD / Catalog NC 61 (CD enclosed) contains three files for printing the blank films: Template_M_MCP310.doc [defaults for milling - standard shipped file; (A)] Template_MCP310.doc (blank template for film: Item No. A5E00205580; (B)] Symbols.doc Key symbols as Word file, inscription on labels as jpg file (C) 710 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Machine control panel: MCP 310 29.9 Accessories (A) 3DUW 3DUW 3DUW 3DUW 3DUW 3DUW 3DUW Figure 29-10 Template_M_MCP310.doc for the "Milling" version (1) Outer edges Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 711 Machine control panel: MCP 310 29.9 Accessories (B) Figure 29-11 Template_MCP310.doc (acc. to labeling plan /template: Item No. A5E00205580) (C) Table 29-9 File Symbols.doc 7001 7013 7025 7002 7014 7026 7003 7015 7027 7004 7016 7005 7017 7029 7006 7018 7030 7007 7019 7031 7008 7020 7009 7021 712 7028 7032 7033 7022 7120 7011 7023 7121 7012 7024 7123 7010 ; = < 7124 & ; < = ; < = & 7125 7126 7127 7128 7129 7130 7131 7132 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Machine control panel: MCP 310 29.9 Accessories Creating labeling strips with the aid of the file: "Template_M_MCP310.doc" (A) Open the file Template_M_MCP310.doc in the word-processing program MS Word. To obtain optimum printing results, remove all separating lines in each labeling strip (2) above, below and between the symbols. 3DUW Do not highlight the labeling strips using the table symbol (1), but rather: 1. Place the cursor directly before the first symbol on the first labeling strip. 2. Highlight the entire row of the labeling strip by - pressing and holding the left mouse key and dragging it to the end of the row or - pressing the F8 key and the cursor key "" until the entire row is selected. 3. Click on the highlighting with the right mouse key. 4. In the menu that appears, select the entry: "Table properties". 5. On the "Table" tab, select the entry: "Borders and shading...". 6. Select the tab "Borders" and click on "Setting:" in the symbol with the designation: "None". 7. Confirm the selection with "OK" and remove the highlighting. This removes all separating lines (with the exception of the outer edges) from this row. &XWHGJHV 3DUW 8. Remove the separating lines of the other labeling strips in the same way. 9. Place the blank film in the printing direction in the slot of your laser printer (see figure: "Blank film for MCP 310"). 10.Select "film" as the printable medium if your printer allows this setting. 11.Start the printing process using MS Word. Note For labeling the labeling strips, HP Color Laser Jet film C2936A is used. Make a test print on paper before you print on the film. Allow the film to cool after printing so that the ink can dry. Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 713 Machine control panel: MCP 310 29.9 Accessories 12.Cut the labeling strips out of the film along the edges. 13.Round off the corners of the labeling strips approx. 1.5 mm to facilitate insertion. Preparing the labeling strips with the aid of "Template_MCP310.doc" (B) Inserting symbols with the"Symbols.doc" file (C) 1. Open both the "Template_MCP310.doc" file and the "Symbols.doc" file in MS Word. 2. Copy the desired key symbol from the file "Symbols.doc". 3. Position the cursor in the desired field of the template (B) and add the symbol. 4. If all the desired symbols have been added, remove the separating lines and start the printing process in accordance with the instructions in Section: Preparing the labeling strips with the aid of "Template_M_MCP310.doc". Inserting characters/text 1. Open the "Template_MCP310.doc" file in MS Word. 2. Set the "Arial" font to format characters. (This font is comparable to the "Univers S57" font, used by Siemens for the key labeling.) 3. Position the cursor in the desired table cell and enter characters/text. Creating your own symbols Printing in a vector program (e.g. Designer, Freehand, CorelDraw): - Draw a 15 x 15 mm square, fill with the color white and give it an invisible border line. - Place the symbol in the center of this square. - Copy the entire image (square and symbol) and paste it into the Word document (Template_MCP310.doc). Drawing in an image editing program (e.g. Photoshop, Picture Publisher, Paint): - Create a square area (e.g. 100 x 100 pixels) filled with the color white. - Draw the symbol in the center of this square. - Copy the entire image (square and symbol) and paste it into the Word document (Template_MCP310.doc). 714 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Machine control panel: MCP 310 29.9 Accessories Dimension drawings The figure shows a dimension drawing for the blank template of the MCP 310: 1DUURZODEHOZLGWKFPKHLJKWFP +HLJKWFP +HLJKWFP +HLJKWFP +HLJKWFP +HLJKWFP +HLJKWFP +HLJKWFP :LGWKFP :LGWKFP :LGWKFP Figure 29-12 Dimension drawing for slide-in labels for MCP 310 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 715 Machine control panel: MCP 310 29.9 Accessories 29.9.3 Inserting the slide-in label "Part1" The slide-in label "Part1" (8) is located under the earthing angle (1). Therefore, first remove the earthing angle before you pull out or insert the slide-in label "Part 1". Figure 29-13 MCP 310 - Rear side with slide-in labels (1) Earthing angle (2) Fastening screws (M3) for the earthing angle (housing) (3) Fastening screw (M5) for the earthing angle (COM board) (4) Slide-in labels "Part5" (5) Slide-in labels "Part4" (6) Slide-in labels "Part3" (7) Slide-in labels "Part2" (8) Slide-in labels "Part1" Removing the earthing angle 1. Remove the fastening screw (M5) using a TX 25 screwdriver. 716 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Machine control panel: MCP 310 29.9 Accessories 2. Remove the two fastening screws (M3) using a TX 10 screwdriver. 3. Take off the earthing angle. 4. Pull out the slide-in label. Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 717 Machine control panel: MCP 310 29.9 Accessories Installing the earthing angle Secure the earthing angle after you have inserted the slide-in label by tightening the three fastening screws. Note Observe the proper torque values when tightening the screws: - M3: 0.8 to 1.3 Nm - M5: 3.0 to 6.0 Nm 718 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 30 Machine control panel: OP 032S 30.1 Description Validity This description applies to the machine control panel Type Order number OP 032S 6FC5203-0AD10-1AA0 Features Key caps (49 pcs., 48 with LED, can all be assembled variably) Feed override switch Installation possibilities of optional customer keys, emergency stop buttons or second override switch 10 free 24 V inputs 6 free 24 V/250 mA outputs Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 719 Machine control panel: OP 032S 30.2 Operator controls and indicators 30.2 Operator controls and indicators Control elements in delivered status When supplied, the following control elements are provided on the machine control panel: Key caps (49 pcs., 48 with LED, can all be assembled variably) Feed override switch Figure 30-1 Front view of machine control panel, overview and location of control elements (1) Key 1 / LED 1 (2) Key 10 / LED 10 (3) Depression for washer for supplementing the EMER STOP button or override switch (4) Feed override switch (5) Key 50 / LED 50 (6) Control elements for supplementation (6 buttons, 1 keyswitch) (7) Key 41 / LED 41 (8) Key 11 / LED 11 Making the openings with a drilling tool The openings for the control elements to be supplemented are imprinted on the rear side of the MCP. For the horizontal openings, the diameter is 16.2 to 16.4 mm. For the emergency stop switch opening, the diameter is 22.2 to 22.4 mm. 720 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Machine control panel: OP 032S 30.2 Operator controls and indicators Recommendation: Drill the openings from the rear as follows: Clamp the machine control panel for machining on the rear (use suitable drilling support) Switch the chip extractor on or cover the electrical parts to prevent chips from falling on them Note Before drilling the opening, metal chips must be removed from the drills. Use the appropriate drill to drill the desired openings (openings are centered) Making the cutouts by knocking out The cutouts should be knocked out only if the control elements used cover the broken edges on the front panel (no sharp broken edges). Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 721 Machine control panel: OP 032S 30.3 Interfaces 30.3 Interfaces ; 2SHUDWRUSDQHOIURQW LQWHUIDFH 03, 2XWSXWV ',3VZLWFK 21 /(' 6 3OXJFRQQHFWRU [SLQ ; 3LQ 3RZHUVXSSO\ ,QWHUIDFHV 3URWHFWLYHHDUWK 3LQ ',3VZLWFK SRVLWLRQV -XPSHULQJ ,QSXWV 'LVSOD\ /(' QRWXVHG /(' JUHHQ 32:(5 9SRZHUVXSSO\ /(' RUDQJH 6(1'VWDWXV IODVKHVLQQRUPDOPRGH 0RGXOHYDULDQWVVHHLOOXVWUDWLRQV5HDUYLHZRIPDFKLQHFRQWUROSDQHOZLWKGLPHQVLRQDOGDWD Figure 30-2 Rear view of the machine control panel with overview and location of interfaces Table 30-1 Example showing connection of additional override switch Pin Meaning X31 pin 4 Ground = C X31 pin 3 Value 22 = 4 X32 pin 2 Value 24 = 16 X32 pin 1 Value 23 = 8 X31 pin 2 Value 21 = 2 X31 pin 1 Value 20 = 1 Switch/wiring & 1& 1& 1& 1& 1& 8QGHUVLGHRI RYHUULGHVZLWFK 722 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Machine control panel: OP 032S 30.3 Interfaces ; ',3VZLWFK /(' 3OXJFRQQHFWRU [SLQ ; 9 ,QVWDOODWLRQVSDFHSURYLGHGIRU(PHUJHQF\6WRSRUVHFRQGRYHUULGHVZLWFK PP 5HFRPPHQGHGGHVLJQ 6,(0(166%+$ &RQWDFW6%$12FRQWDFW1&FRQWDFW 0RGXOHYDULDQWV /RFDWLRQIRUVHYHQFRQWUROGHYLFHV PP Figure 30-3 Rear view of machine control panel with dimensional data Power supply interface (X10) Connector designation: X10 Connector type: 3-pole Phoenix terminal block Recommended type: Phoenix CombiCon Order no.: MVSTBR 2.5/3-ST-5.08 Table 30-2 X10 pin assignments Pin Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Name Meaning Type 1 P24 24V potential V 2 M24 Ground 24V (Supply 3 SHIELD Shield connection voltage) 723 Machine control panel: OP 032S 30.3 Interfaces Note The power supply interface should be wired in accordance with the labeling on the module. OPI interface (X20) Connector designation: X20 Connector type: 9-pole Sub-D socket connector, straight Max. cable length 200 m Special situations: 1.5 Mbaud / 187.5 kBaud data rate Table 30-3 X20 connector pin assignments Pin Signal, name Signal type 1 Unassigned - 2 Unassigned - 3 RS_BTSS, RS485 data I/O, bi-directional 4 ORTSAS_BTSS, Out Request To Send AS O, output 5 M5EXT, 5V ground, external V, supply voltage 6 P5EXT, 5V potential, external V, supply voltage 7 Unassigned - 8 XRS_BTSS, RS485 data I/O, bi-directional 9 IRTSPG_BTSS, In Request To Send PG I/O, bi-directional Note The inputs/outputs implemented via X31 to X36 can be used as desired. The function of the inputs/outputs is determined in the PLC user program. The following listed inputs/outputs via X31 to X36 and their usage are exemplary. 724 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Machine control panel: OP 032S 30.3 Interfaces Jumpering S3 The following settings are possible with this DIP switch (8-way): Table 30-4 8 7 S3 jumpering on machine control panel 6 5 4 3 2 1 on off off on off on off On Off On Off On Off On Off On Off On Off On Off on off off on on on off on 13 12 11 10 7 6 on off on Receipt monitoring 2400 ms 1200 ms 600 ms 9 8 off off cyclical transmit time frame 200 ms 100 ms 50 ms Bus address 15 14 on off Meaning / value Baud rate 1.5 Mbaud 187.5 kBaud off off On Off 5 4 3 2 1 0 Interface MPI customer operator panel Series HW Settings for transmission cycle time The PLC expects a message frame from the MCP at least every 500 ms. The machine control panel sends a message frame to the PLC at cyclic intervals when no key is pressed. This cycle time is set with S3 DIP switches 2 and 3. This enables the load on the PLC resulting from the machine control panel to be adjusted. Settings for receipt cycle time The MCP receives message frames from the PLC at cyclic intervals and responds to them at cyclic intervals. The receipt monitoring time is linked to the transmission cycle time of the machine control panel and is set with S3 DIP switches 2 and 3. Bus address The bus address must be set to the value 6. Any other setting will be ignored by the software. Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 725 Machine control panel: OP 032S 30.3 Interfaces Standard setting The following default settings are suggested: Table 30-5 Default settings S3 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 off off on on off on off on Meaning Baud rate: 1.5 Mbaud Cyclical transmit time frame: 100 ms Bus address: 6 Series HW Indicators (LED 1 .... 4) These LEDs display the following: LED 1, LED 2: not used LED 3 POWER (24 V supply) LED 4: TRANSMIT Status change on protocol transmission Interfaces for optional customer keys (X31, X32, inputs) Connector designation: X31, X32 Connector type: 4-pole plug connector Connection plug: Berg type Dubox Table 30-6 X31 and X32 assignments Pin Signal, name Signal type X31 X32 1 KT-IN 0, user key 1 KT-IN 3, user key 4 2 KT-IN 1, user key 2 KT-IN 4, user key 5 3 KT-IN 2, user key 3 KT-IN 5, user key 6 4 M5, ground M5, ground I, input Note: The inputs switch to ground (active low). 8VHUNH\ ; ; 8VHUNH\ ; ; UW *URXQG 8VHUNH\ ; ; 9LHZIURPFRQQHFWRUVLGHRI 'XER[SOXJ VRFNHWFRQQHFWRU 3LQ ; ; 0DFKLQHFRQWUROSDQHO236 UHDUSDQHO 726 3OXJFRQQHFWRU &RORURIZLUHUHG3LQLQFDEOHVHW Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Machine control panel: OP 032S 30.3 Interfaces Interfaces for optional keyswitches (X33, X34, inputs) Connector designation: X33, X34 Connector type: 4-pole plug connector Connection plug: Berg type Dubox Table 30-7 X33 and X34 assignments Pin Signal, name Signal type X33 X34 1 SS 0, Keyswitch input 0 SS 2, Keyswitch input 2 2 SS 1, Keyswitch input 1 SS 3, Keyswitch input 3 M5, ground M5, ground 3/4 I, input Note: The inputs switch to ground (active low) Other control elements can also be connected to these inputs. ; 3LQ 6HWWLQJ 6HWWLQJ .H\ VZLWFK ; 3LQ *URXQG Interfaces for optional user lamps (X35, X36, outputs) Connector designation: X35, X36 Connector type: 4-pole plug connector Connection plug: Berg type Dubox Table 30-8 X35 and X36 assignments Pin Signal, name X35 Signal type X36 1 KT-OUT 0, user lamp 1 KT-OUT 3, user lamp 4 2 KT-OUT 1, user lamp 2 KT-OUT 4, user lamp 5 3 KT-OUT 2, user lamp 3 KT-OUT 5, user lamp 6 4 M24, 24V ground M24, 24V ground O, output Note: The outputs are designed for 24V/250mA. 8VHUODPS ; ; 8VHUODPS ; ; 3LQ *URXQG9 8VHUODPS ; ; Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 727 Machine control panel: OP 032S 30.4 Mounting 30.4 Mounting Dimension drawing *URXQGWHUPLQDO0PLQPP Figure 30-4 Dimension drawing of machine control panel Panel cutout 0 ',1,623HUPLVVLEOHPRXQWLQJSRVLWLRQRIWKHRSHUDWRUSDQHOSODQHPD[GHJUHHV WRWKHSHUSHQGLFXODU )URQWSDQHOFXWRXWIRUUHDUPRXQWLQJ:[+ [PP 5HDUPRXQWLQJLVHJUHTXLUHGLIFXVWRPNH\VDUHLQVWDOOHG Figure 30-5 728 Panel cutout of machine control panel Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Machine control panel: OP 032S 30.5 Technical specifications 30.5 Technical specifications Security Safety class Degree of protection per EN 60529 III; PELV acc. to EN 50178 Front: IP54 Rear side: IP00 Approvals CE Electrical specifications Input voltage DC 24 V Power consumption, max. 10.8 W Mechanical data Dimensions Width: 310 mm Height: 175 mm Depth: 56 mm Mounting depth: 12 mm Weight Mechanical ambient conditions Approx. 1.3 kg Operation Transport (in transport packaging) Vibratory load 10 -58 Hz: 0.015 mm 58 -200 Hz: 19.6 m/s2 3M4 per EN 60721-3-3 5 -9 Hz: 3.5 mm 9 -200 Hz: 9.81 m/s2 2M2 per EN 60721-3-2 Shock stressing 150 m/s2, 11 ms, 18 shocks 3M2 per EN 60721-3-3 150 m/s2, 11 ms, 18 shocks 2M2 per EN 60721-3-2 Climatic ambient conditions Cooling By natural convection Condensation, spraying water and icing Supply air Applicable standards Climate class Temperature limits Temperature change Limits for relative humidity Permissible change in the relative air humidity Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Not permitted Without caustic gases, dusts and oils Operation Storage/shipping (in transport packaging) EN 60721-3-3 EN 60721-3-1 / -3-2 3K5 1K3 / 2K4 0 ... 45 C (at front) 0 ... 55 C (at rear) -25 ... 55 C Max. 10 K/h Max. 18 K/h 5 ... 80% 5 ... 95% max. 0.1% /min 729 Machine control panel: OP 032S 30.6 Accessories 30.6 Accessories Supplementary control elements The following control elements can be added: EMERGENCY STOP button - Operator control element 3SB3000-1HA20 - Switching element (1 NO contact + 1 NC contact) 3SB3400-0A Cable set for additional control devices for interfaces X31-X36 Max. 6 cables are needed per MCP. 60, each 500 mm Order No. 6FC5247-0AA35-0AA0 6 buttons with lamps + 1 keyswitch The buttons and the keyswitch are connected via X31 - X34 (input signals). The lamps are connected to X35 and X36 (output signals). Recommended type for the keys and keyswitches: Rafix 16, Lumotast 25, Schlegel QUARTRON Reference sources: Schlegel (http://schlegel-ekontakt.de), RAFI (http://www.rafi.de) Key cap (for labeling) 6FC5148-0AA13-0AA0 90 ergo-gray items 20 red items 20 yellow items 20 green items 20 medium gray items Transparent key cap (with adhesive label) 6FC5148-0AA14-0AA0 Fastening screws (100 units) 6FC3988-7BJ10 Additional override switch 6FC5247-0AA34-0AA1 Override switch with wing cap, cover, two dials. - CBS 1/1x1GG (16/15) switch - Spindle override 50-120% dial - Rapid traverse override 0-100% dial. The second override switch must be connected via X31-X32. 730 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 31 Machine Pushbutton Panel: MPP 483 31.1 Description 31.1.1 Overview The machine control panel MPP483 permits user-friendly operation of the machine functions on complex machining stations. It is suitable for machine-level operation of milling, turning, grinding and special machines. In addition to the standard elements of machine control, several freely assignable slots are integrated on the operator panel for connecting other control devices. The function of the MPP 483 can be extended considerably by fitting additional keys and through the EKS identification system provided by Euchner. The machine control panel is easy to mount on the rear side using special tension jacks. All keys have user-inscribed slide-in strips for machine-specific adaptations. Two DIN-A4 sheets (printed and white) for inscribing are supplied by the factory. The machine control panel MPP 483 is available as standard, in extended standard versions and in special versions. Validity The following description applies to the following machine control panels: Table 31-1 Standard versions Identifier Features MPP 483 Without handheld unit connection 6FC5303-1AF00-0AA1 MPP 483 - EKS with cut-out for EKS identification system 6FC5303-1AF00-0AE1 Table 31-2 Order No.: Extended standard versions Identifier Features MPP 483 H with handheld unit connection HT 6 6FC5303-1AF00-1AA1 MPP 483 HTC with handheld unit connection HT 8 6FC5303-1AF00-8AA1 MPP 483 HTC-EKS with handheld connection HT 8 and cut-out for EKS 6FC5303-1AF00-8AE1 MPP 483 A for mounting applications (without override) 6FC5303-1AF01-0AA1 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Order No.: 731 Machine Pushbutton Panel: MPP 483 31.1 Description Table 31-3 Special versions Identifier Features Order No.: MPP 483 S MPP 483 Sxx Height: 155 mm - with customer specific equipment 6FC5303-1AF02-0__0 1) MPP 483 H Sxx Height: 155 mm - with customer-specific complement - with handheld unit connection HT 6 6FC5303-1AF02-1__0 1) MPP 483 HTC Sxx Height: 155 mm - with customer-specific complement - with handheld unit connection HT 8 6FC5303-1AF02-8__0 1) MPP 483 L MPP 483 /L Lxx Height: 244 mm - with customer specific equipment 6FC5303-1AF03-0__0 1) MPP 483 H/L Lxx Height: 244 mm - with customer-specific complement - with handheld unit connection HT 6 6FC5303-1AF03-1__0 1) MPP 483 HTC/L Lxx Height: 244 mm - with customer-specific complement - with handheld unit connection HT 8 6FC5303-1AF03-8__0 1) 1) You can put together the components for occupancy of the free module locations according to your practical needs. The DOConCD / Catalog NC 61 (accompanying CD) contains a configuring tool and instructions for this purpose. Connectable controls SINUMERIK 840D sl SINUMERIK 840D / 840Di (as of software version 840D-NCK 7.2) SINUMERIK 810D (Can only be connected in MPI standard mode.) SIMATIC S7-300 31.1.2 System features Standard for all versions: Profibus or MPI/OPI Function keyboard with 5 x 5 key matrix, can be freely projected and labeled 8 long-stroke keys with LEDs, Interfaces for 2 handwheels for connection via PROFIBUS DP (function depends on NCU software) Emergency stop button (4-wire), latching, tamper-proof 732 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Machine Pushbutton Panel: MPP 483 31.1 Description Keyswitch with 2 settings - leftward probing setting and rightward probing setting right setting is customer-specific) Direction control key connection for OP 012 2 free 22.5 mm slots or space for EKS Space for override Supplementary elements for the extended standard and special versions: Integration of max. 3 override switches Handheld unit connection HGA for HHU / HT 6 or HT 8 (instead of the handheld unit connection, the MPP 483 L can be equipped with 1 extension key.) EKS identification system Protective shroud for emergency stop button, REES emergency stop Emergency stop overridden by 2-position keyswitch (probing position) 2 extension keys with LEDs can be variably fitted with contact blocks (on MPP 483) 10 extension keys with LEDs can be variably fitted with contact blocks (on MPP 483 L) Mushroom-shaped button (SR) Authorization lock switch (ALS) BA selector switch, 4-positions as key or knob switch The positions of the individual elements on the machine control panels is shown in section: "Control and display elements" "Special versions". Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 733 Machine Pushbutton Panel: MPP 483 31.1 Description System configuration The figures show the possibilities for integrating the MPP 483 H and the MPP 483 HTC into the control system. (WKHUQHW7&3,3 2SHUDWRUSDQHO 2SHUDWRUSDQHO 'LUHFWFRQWURONH\V 03,23, 'LUHFWFRQWURONH\V 03,23, 033 Auto Next axes Single NC Stop NC Start Feed Stop Feed Start LE 033 Man Auto Next axes Single Step NC Stop NC Start Feed Stop Feed Start LE Step REF Point Man REF Point LE +7 LE +7 3URIL EXV ++8KDQGZKHHO %+7 %+7 6,180(5,. 6,0$7,& 9DULDQW03,23, Figure 31-1 734 +DQGZKHHO 6,180(5,. 6,0$7,& 9DULDQW3URILEXV +DQGZKHHORQO\ZLWKRXW++8 System configuration of the MPP 483 H Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Machine Pushbutton Panel: MPP 483 31.1 Description 2 handwheels can be used with the PROFIBUS version. 2SHUDWRUSDQHO 2SHUDWRUSDQHO (WKHUQHW (WKHUQHW (WKHUQHW7&3,3 (WKHUQHW7&3,3 'LUHFWFRQWURONH\V 033+7& +DQGZKHHO 'LUHFWFRQWURONH\V 033+7& 03, 352),%86'3 +DQGZKHHO 03, 352),%86'3 6,180(5,. 6,0$7,& 6,180(5,. 6,0$7,& +7 +7 9DULDQW033 SO Figure 31-2 9DULDQW033 VO System configuration of the MPP 483 HTC Note The connection cables are not part of the scope of supply. Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 735 Machine Pushbutton Panel: MPP 483 31.1 Description 31.1.3 Mechanical design The machine control panel MCP 483 consists of Control panel flat module with handheld unit connection (option) Flat module customer keys Flat module COM board 'LUHFWFRQWURONH\V (PHUJVWRS (PHUJVWRSRYHUULGH 03, +DQGZKHHO (QDEOLQJEXWWRQV ; 03,3URILEXV ; ; ; ; +DQGZKHHO ; ; ; 3& ;6 ; 3& % ++ ; 8 03,3URILEXV ; %& 20 ; ; +DQGZKHHO 9'& ER DUG ; 3& % .7 ; 2YHUULGH VSHHG :6 ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ;; ;; 2YHUULGH IHHG :6 $XWKRUL]DWLRQ NH\VZLWFK :6 ; 2YHUULGH UDSLG WUDYHUVH :6 5 10 20 30 40 70 80 90 100 EB [RSWRGHFRXSOHGLQSXWV LQFO[IRU+*$[RXWSXWV 0RGH VHOHFWRU VZLWFK:6 50 60 3 2 1 0 VK ES ER 6FDQ 6FDQ ,OOXP 0XVKURRPVKDSHG EXWWRQ HPHUJVWRS WHUPLQDWLQJ (PHUJHQF\ EXWWRQ 65 RYHUULGH FRQQHFWRU+*$ VWRSNH\ PRGHVHOHFWLRQ Figure 31-3 736 Mechanical design taking example of the MPP 483 L Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Machine Pushbutton Panel: MPP 483 31.2 Operator controls and indicators 31.2 Operator controls and indicators 31.2.1 Standard versions Standard versions The machine control panel is available in the following standard versions: MPP 483 / MPP 483-EKS NC Stop NC Start Machine on Initial state Start Machine off Stop after end of cycle Immediate Stop Acknowledge fault Next- Axes Lock/release protective doors 50 30 70 80 10 90 6 100 110 2 120 0 % (1) Key switch (2) Emergency stop button (3) Soft keys with LED (4) Customer keys (long-stroke keys) (5) Dummy element (6) cut-out for EKS identification system (7) Feed override Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 737 Machine Pushbutton Panel: MPP 483 31.2 Operator controls and indicators Extended standard versions The machine control panel is available in the following extended standard versions: MPP 483 H NC Stop NC Machine on Initial state Start Machine off Stop after end of cycle Immediate Stop Start Acknowledge fault Next- Axes Lock/release protective doors 50 70 30 80 10 90 6 100 110 2 120 0 % (1) Emergency stop button (2) Key switch (3) Handheld unit connection HT 6 (4) Soft keys with LED (5) Customer keys (long-stroke keys) (6) Dummy element (7) Feed override MPP 483 HTC / MPP 483 HTC-EKS NC Stop NC Machine on Initial state Start Machine off Stop after end of cycle Immediate Stop Start Acknowledge fault Next- Axes Lock/release protective doors 50 30 70 80 10 90 6 100 110 2 120 0 % (1) 738 Emergency stop button (2) Key switch (3) Handheld unit connection HT 8 (4) Soft keys with LED (5) Customer keys (long-stroke keys) (6) Dummy element (7) cut-out for EKS identification system (8) Feed override Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Machine Pushbutton Panel: MPP 483 31.2 Operator controls and indicators MPP 483 A (1) Key switch (2) Emergency stop button (3) Soft keys with LED (4) Customer keys (long-stroke keys) (5) Dummy element Machine on Initial state Start Machine off Stop after end of cycle Immediate Stop Acknowledge fault Lock/release protective doors Note When using the 8 byte MPI function, only the function keys in the first column can be used (see section: "Interfaces" "Input / output image" "Input image of MPI standard"). If you use the WS1 selector switch, you use this to assign these keys. The free slots can be assigned operator elements which are listed in section: "Operation and display elements" "Special versions" for the MPP 483 S or MPP 483 L variants. A description of the individual components can be found in section: "Accessories" "Retrofit operation elements". Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 739 Machine Pushbutton Panel: MPP 483 31.2 Operator controls and indicators 31.2.2 Special versions The machine control panel is available in the following special versions: MPP 483 S 50 30 70 60 110 50 120 110 2 120 0 % % 65 /( Special version MPP 483 S Designation bearing element can only be equipped without EKS (4) **) Component in this slot needs a new shutter ***) Labeling only for variants without EKS (1) Key switch (9) Mode selector switch (2) Protective shroud for Emergency stop button (10) Feedrate override (3) Handheld unit HT 6 1) (11) Spindle / rapid traverse override (4) EKS identification system (12) RJ 45 bushing (5) Key with LED, actuator 2) (13) Handheld unit HT 8 3) (6) Long Element, button with LED 2) (14) Knob switch (7) Mushroom-shaped button - rapid withdrawal (15) Tag holder (8) Authorization Lock Switch (16) Adhesive label 4) 2) /( *) 1) only 65 /( Figure 31-4 100 90 100 80 6 90 80 70 10 in variant MPP 483 H Sxx can be assigned according to section: "Accessories" "Retrofit operation elements" 3) only in variant MPP 483 HTC Sxx 4) xxxx... 740 - place holder for the number of possible font characters Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Machine Pushbutton Panel: MPP 483 31.2 Operator controls and indicators Note You can use a configurator to put together the components for occupancy of the free module locations according to your practical needs. The DOConCD / Catalog NC 60, NC 61 (accompanying CD) contains the following files for this purpose: - KonfigMPP483.zip (configuration tool) - AnleitungKonfigurator_MPP483.pdf Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 741 Machine Pushbutton Panel: MPP 483 31.2 Operator controls and indicators MPP 483 L LE LE LE LE 0 0 LE 10 20 30 40 50 30 70 5 70 30 60 3 2 1 0 60 40 50 50 SR *) 3 0 LE LE 80 20 1 LE 90 10 20 80 10 90 LE 2 LE LE 70 80 90 100 40 60 30 70 70 30 30 70 90 10 80 20 60 40 40 60 50 50 40 60 70 30 LE 10 90 80 20 0 0 90 10 20 80 10 90 20 80 0 0 50 50 60 40 LE SR Figure 31-5 Special version MPP 483 L *) Mushroom-shaped button can only be used if the adjacent spot is not occupied **) Component in this slot needs a new shutter (1) Key switch (10) Feedrate override (2) Protective shroud for Emergency stop button (11) Spindle / rapid traverse override (3) Handheld unit HT 6 (4) EKS identification system (5) Key with LED, actuator 2) (6) Long Element, button with LED 1) 2) (12) Rapid traverse override (13) RJ45 bushing (14) Handheld unit HT 8 3) (15) Handwheel (7) Mushroom-shaped button - rapid withdrawal (16) Knob switch (8) Authorization Lock Switch (17) Tag holder (9) Mode selector switch (18) Adhesive label 4) 1) only 2) in variant MPP 483 H/L Lxx can be assigned according to section: "Accessories" "Retrofit operation elements" 3) only in variant MPP 483 HTC/L Lxx 4) xxxx... 742 - place holder for the number of possible font characters Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Machine Pushbutton Panel: MPP 483 31.2 Operator controls and indicators Note You can use a configurator to put together the components for occupancy of the free module locations according to your practical needs. The DOConCD / Catalog NC 60, NC 61 (accompanying CD) contains the following files for this purpose: - KonfigMPP483.zip (configuration tool) - AnleitungKonfigurator_MPP483.pdf 31.2.3 Examples of assignment of free slots MPP 483 H / MPP 483 A / MPP 483 S S13 HS13 S11 Figure 31-6 HF1 HF2 HF3 HF4 HF5 F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 HF6 HFT7 HF8 HF9 HF10 F6 F7 F8 F9 F10 HF11 HF12 HF13 HF14 HF15 F11 F12 F13 F14 F15 HF16 HF17 HF18 HF19 HF20 F16 F17 F18 F19 F20 HF21 HF22 HF23 HF24 HF25 F21 F22 F23 F24 F25 S1 S2 S3 S4 ES EB VK ER WS3 WS1 HS1 HS2 HS3 HS4 S7 S8 S9 S10 HS7 HS8 HS9 HS10 WS4 2 1 3 WS2 0 XS12 Example of MPP 483 H/A/S (1) Emergency stop button (2) Function keys (3) Mode selector switch (4) EKS identification system or 2 extension elements 22.5 mm (5) Spindle / rapid traverse override (6) Feedrate override (7) Authorization Lock Switch (8) Customer keys (long-stroke keys) (9) Handheld unit connection or EKS identification system (10) Key switch Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 743 Machine Pushbutton Panel: MPP 483 31.2 Operator controls and indicators MPP 483 H - EKS / MPP 483 L - EKS S13 HS13 HF1 HF2 HF3 HF4 F1 F2 F3 F4 HFT7 HF8 HF6 HF5 F5 HF9 S1 S2 S3 S4 S14 HS1 HS2 HS3 HS4 HS14 S7 S8 S9 S10 S15 HF10 F6 F7 F8 F9 F10 HF11 HF12 HF13 HF14 HF15 F11 F12 F13 F14 F15 HF16 HF17 HF18 HF19 HF20 F16 F17 F18 F19 F20 WS3 20 30 40 5 HF21 HF22 HF23 HF24 HF25 F21 F22 F23 F24 F25 10 3 HS7 HS8 HS9 HS10 HS15 2 1 0 WS2 50 60 70 80 90 100 XS12 S11 EKS 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 H51 H52 H53 H54 H55 H56 H57 H58 WS5 Figure 31-7 744 Example of MPP 483 H/L-EKS (1) Key switch (2) Emergency stop button (3) Connection for handheld units (4) Function keys (5) Spindle / rapid traverse override (6) Rapid traverse override (7) Feedrate override (8) Extension keys (9) EKS identification system or 2 extension elements 22.5 mm Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Machine Pushbutton Panel: MPP 483 31.2 Operator controls and indicators 31.2.4 Description 31.2.4.1 Device front Connectable control elements Inputs for 25 function keys 18 long-stroke keys (max.) 3 rotary selector switches Keyswitch with four positions Outputs for 47 LEDs (14 led to plug connector) Emergency stop chain Emergency stop button Press the red button in emergencies when people are at risk, there is the danger of a machine or workpiece being damaged. An emergency stop generally shuts down all drives with the greatest possible braking torque in a controlled manner. Turn the EMERGENCY STOP button counterclockwise to unlatch it. When the emergency stop button is activated, the emergency stop chain of the MPP 483 will ensure personal safety and protect the machine in hazardous situations. The emergency stop chain is also active if the handheld units are removed. To prevent the emergency stop chain from being interrupted while you plug in or pull out the handheld unit, press the override selector switch S11. This overrides the emergency stop button on the handheld unit. Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 745 Machine Pushbutton Panel: MPP 483 31.2 Operator controls and indicators DANGER To effectively deal with a malfunction of the S11 override selector switch (e.g. jamming), the user PLC program must generate an emergency stop when a monitoring time (approximately 5 min) expires (see figure in Section: "Connections" "Connection for handheld units"). The emergency stop chain of the MPP 483 should be integrated in the system emergency stop by the user. Machine manufacturer For other reactions to the EMERGENCY STOP: refer to the machine tool manufacturer's instructions! Actuation elements Actuation elements S1 to S4, S7 to S10, S14 and S15 are activated by the control. They also have electrically isolated contacts (common roots) for user-specific wiring. The following spaces can be connected to control devices corresponding to the table in section: "Accessories" "Retrofit operation elements": S1 to S4 S7 to S10 S14 S15 S51 to S58 Lamps Lamps HS1 to HS4, HS7 to HS10, HS14 and HS15 are connected to the control by MPI/OPI. Alternatively, they can also be activated by externally linked potential. WS1 selector switch 2-way, 4 stages, 60 switching angle Centrally mounted with front ring Designed as keyswitch CG4-1A251-600 *FS1 V750D/2J Can be changed by customer as knob switch variant FS1 Key can be removed in all positions 746 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Machine Pushbutton Panel: MPP 483 31.2 Operator controls and indicators Note When used as a mode selector switch, the keyswitch should be used according to Guideline 89/392/EEC. When the WS1 mode selector switch and MPI standard input image (8 bytes) are used, function keys F1, F6, F11 and F16 have no effect. The function keys cannot be used in such cases. 31.2.4.2 Device rear side COM board S1 (jumper) Setting the handwheel signal type S1 open: TTL interface S1 closed: differential interface S3 (coding switches) Baud rate, address and protocol setting Diagnostics LEDs LED1 (H1) Hardware test underway. If errors are found, the LED lights up red. LED2 (H2) not used LED3 (H3) Voltage monitoring responded. LED4 (H4) During data transfer via the operator panel interfaces, the LED flashes yellow. LED5 (H5) LED for PROFIBUS DP LED1 (H1) Voltage monitoring of customer keys LED2 (H2) Voltage monitoring of customer keys LED3 (H3) Voltage monitoring of customer keys Customer key board Diagnostics LEDs HGA board HT 6 The arrangement of the LEDs on the HGA board HT 6 is shown in the figure: "Rear side of MPP 483H with interfaces" in section: "Interfaces" "Overview". Diagnostics LEDs Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 LED1 (H1) Bus request Repeater Segment 2 LED2 (H2) Bus request Repeater Segment 1 LED3 (H3) Voltage of repeater segment 1 (>4.7V) LED4 (H4) Voltage of repeater segment 2 (>4.7V) 747 Machine Pushbutton Panel: MPP 483 31.2 Operator controls and indicators HGA board HT 8 ; 6 6 + 6 + + 6 + + ; ; ; ; ; ; + + + + 6 ;6 ; ; ; ; ; ; Figure 31-8 Rear MPP 483HTC with LEDs on HGA board HT 8 (1) Diagnostics LEDs LED1 (H1) LNK Color for Green X1 RJ45 Meaning Connection established LED2 (H2) ACT yellow X1 RJ45 Transmission active LED3 (H3) LNK Green X2 RJ45 Connection established LED4 (H4) ACT yellow X2 RJ45 Transmission active LED5 (H5) LNK Green HT 8 transmission LED6 (H6) ACT yellow HT 8 transmission LED7 (H7) Power OK Green LED8 (H8) FAULT STAT1 Red Fault LED9 (H9) FAULT STAT2 Red Fault S1 (coding switches) Module address bit 4 ... 7 S2 (coding switches) Module address bit 0 ... 3 748 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Machine Pushbutton Panel: MPP 483 31.3 Interfaces 31.3 Interfaces 31.3.1 Overview ; ; ; + + + :6 6 6 6 ; + + + + + ; 6 ; + + + + ; ; &20%RDUG :6 ; ; 6 ; ; ; ; ;6 ; ; 6 Figure 31-9 Rear side of MPP 483H with interfaces Control panel (2) Protective Ground Connection S13 Emergency stop button S11 Emergency stop override COM board X10 Voltage supply X20 PROFIBUS DP/MPI X60 Handwheel 1 X61 Handwheel 2 X70 Interface for direct control keys Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 749 Machine Pushbutton Panel: MPP 483 31.3 Interfaces (1) (3) Customer keys X11 Voltage supply X20 Connector X20 X21 Connector X21 X22 Connector X22 X23 Connector X23 X24 Connector X24 X25 Connector X25 Individual wiring Expansion Connection for handheld units X1 MPI/OPI X20 Enable X21 Emergency stop override X22 Handwheel XS12 Connection for handheld units Signal type O Outputs I Inputs B Bi-directional signals V Supply voltage VI Voltage input VO Voltage output 31.3.2 Description 31.3.2.1 Control panel Protective Ground Connection Pin Signal PE 750 Connection Connection crosssection M5 x 2.5 cable lug 2.5 mm2 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Machine Pushbutton Panel: MPP 483 31.3 Interfaces Emergency stop button S13 Key designation: S13 Key type: Mushroom, push-pull key 3SB3000-1HA20 with holder 3SB3901-0AB and 1 x NO 3SB3400-0B (internal use) Table 31-4 Switching element for NC Pin Signal 11 OE_S13.11 12 BZ_S13.12 21 OE_S13.21 22 BZ_S13.22 Type Signal name Function NC contact O1, S13 I/O Reference potential O1, S13 NC contact O2, S13 Reference potential O2, S13 Emergency Stop override S11 Key designation: S11 Key type: left probing, right probing, safety lock with actuation element acc. to catalog: Switching devices and systems (NSK) at A&D CD carrier 3SB3901-0AC with pressure pieces 1 x NO contact 3SB3400-0B 2 x 3SB3400-0A switching element 1O/1S elements positive-action Table 31-5 Emergency stop override Pin Signal Type Signal name 14 BZ_S11.14 Reference potential S1, S11 13 S_S11.13 NO contact S1, S11 21 OE_S11.21 NC contact O2, S11 22 BZ_S11.22 Reference potential O2, S11 I/O 24 BZ_S11.24 23 S_S11.23 NO contact S2, S11 31 OE_S11.31 NC contact O3, S11 32 BZ_S11.32 Reference potential O3, S11 34 BZ_S11.34 Reference potential S3, S11 33 S_S11.33 NO contact S3, S11 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Function Reference potential S2, S11 751 Machine Pushbutton Panel: MPP 483 31.3 Interfaces WS1 selector switch Switch designation: WS1 Switch type: CG4-1 A251-600 *FS1 V750 D/2J Table 31-6 WS1 selector switch Pin Signal 11 ER 15 ES Type I/O Signal name Switch setting Mode 4 Mode 3 10 BZ_WS 13 EB Mode Reference signal 2 9 VK Mode 1 Rapid withdrawal (SR) Key designation: SR Key type: 3SB3000-1GA31 Switching element: NO contact 3SB3400-0B, input PLC Table 31-7 Pin 752 Rapid withdrawal (SR) Signal 14 BZ_SR.14 13 S_SR.13 Type I/O Signal name Function Reference potential S1, SR NO contact S1, SR Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Machine Pushbutton Panel: MPP 483 31.3 Interfaces 31.3.2.2 COM board X10 power supply Connector designation: X10 Type: 3-pin Phoenix terminal block Cable length (max.): 10 m Table 31-8 Interface power supply Pin Signal name 1 1P24 2 M24 3 Shield Type Meaning 24V potential V Ground 24V Shield connection PROFIBUS DP / MPI interface X20 Connector designation: X20 Type: 9-pin sub-D Socket Cable length (max.): 100 m at 12 Mbaud Table 31-9 PROFIBUS DP/MPI interface Pin Signal name Type Meaning 1 N.C. - not used 2 N.C. - not used 3 RS_DP B RS485 differential signal 4 RTS_DP O 5 M5EXT VO 5 V external ground 6 P5EXT VO 5 V external potential 7 N.C. - not used 8 XRS_DP B RS485 differential signal 9 N.C. - not used Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Request To Send 753 Machine Pushbutton Panel: MPP 483 31.3 Interfaces Handwheel 1: X60 Connector designation: X60 Type: 15-pin D-sub female connector Table 31-10 Interface for handwheel 1: Pin Signal name 1 P5V 2 M Type V 3 HW1_A 4 HW1_XA I 5 N.C. - Meaning Supply voltage 5V Chassis ground Handwheel pulse track A Handwheel pulse track A (negated) not used 6 HW1_B 7 HW1_XB 8 N.C. - not used 9 P5V V Supply voltage 5V 10 N.C. - not used 11 M V Chassis ground 12 N.C. - not used 13 N.C. - not used 14 N.C. - not used 15 N.C. - not used I Handwheel pulse track B Handwheel pulse track B (negated) Note Handwheels can only be connected up to the PROIFIBUS DP variant. They can either be operated with TTL or differential signals. You set the signal type using S1 (wire bridge) on the COM board. Cable length (max.) for handwheels: 5 m The handwheels are supplied with 5 V 5% and 100 mA via the interface. 754 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Machine Pushbutton Panel: MPP 483 31.3 Interfaces Handwheel 2: X61 Connector designation: X61 Type: 15-pin D-sub female connector Table 31-11 Interface for handwheel 2: Pin Signal name 1 P5V 2 M Type V 3 HW2_A 4 HW2_XA I 5 N.C. - Meaning Supply voltage 5V Chassis ground Handwheel pulse track A Handwheel pulse track A (negated) not used 6 HW2_B 7 HW2_XB 8 N.C. - not used 9 P5V V Supply voltage 5V 10 N.C. - not used 11 M V Chassis ground 12 N.C. - not used 13 N.C. - not used 14 N.C. - not used 15 N.C. - not used Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 I Handwheel pulse track B Handwheel pulse track B (negated) 755 Machine Pushbutton Panel: MPP 483 31.3 Interfaces Direct control key interface X70 The interface is used to connect the direct control keys of the operator panel front OP 012 by means of a 20-pin ribbon cable (< 0.6 m). 16 digital inputs (5V) can be interrogated by the X70 connector. Connector designation: X70 Type: 2 x 10-pin male connector, 2.54 mm grid Table 31-12 Interface for direct control keys Pin Signal name Type Meaning 1 DT 1 2 DT 2 3 DT 3 4 DT 4 Direct key 4 5 DT 5 Direct key 5 6 DT 6 Direct key 1 I I Direct key 2 Direct key 3 Direct key 6 7 DT 7 8 DT 8 Direct key 8 9 DT 9 Direct key 9 10 DT 10 11 DT 11 12 DT 12 Direct key 12 13 DT 13 Direct key 13 14 DT 14 I I 15 DT 15 16 DT 16 17 P5V_TACO 18 P5V_TACO 19 M_TACO 20 M_TACO Direct key 7 Direct key 10 Direct key 11 Direct key 14 Direct key 15 Direct key 16 V V P5 keyboard controller P5 keyboard controller M keyboard controller M keyboard controller Table 31-13 Electrical properties: Input voltage: HIGH level: 5V or open LOW level <= 0.8 V 756 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Machine Pushbutton Panel: MPP 483 31.3 Interfaces 31.3.2.3 User keys Power supply interface X11 Connector designation: X11 Type: Combicon MSTBA2.5/3-G-5.08 Cable length (max.): 10 m Table 31-14 Interface power supply Individual wiring Pin Signal name 1 2P24 2 M24 3 N.C. Connector X20 Connector designation: Type Meaning 24V potential V Ground 24V not used X20 Type: Mini-Combicon MC 1.5/4-G-3.81 Cable length (max.): 30 m Connector X21 Connector designation: X21 Type: Mini-Combicon MC 1.5/12-G-3.81 Cable length (max.): 30 m Table 31-15 Connector X20 / X21 Connector Pin X20 1 OE_S2 2 OE_S1 1 OE_S4 2 OE_S3 3 BZOE_S1-4 4 BZS_S1-S6 3 S_S4 NO contact S4 4 S_S3 NO contact S3 X21 X20 X21 Signal Typ e I/O I/O I/O I/O Signal name NC contact S2 NC contact S1 NC contact S4 NC contact S3 Reference potential NC contact S1 ... S4 Reference potential NO contact S1 ... S6 5 S_S2 6 S_S1.1 NO contact S1.1 7 BZS_S1.2 Reference potential NO contact S1.2 NO contact S2 8 S_S1.2 NO contact S1.2 9 HS 4 Signaling lamp S4 10 HS 3 11 HS 2 12 HS 1 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 I Function Signaling lamp S3 Signaling lamp S2 All inputs "High" active Signaling lamp S1 757 Machine Pushbutton Panel: MPP 483 31.3 Interfaces Connector X22 Connector designation: X22 Type: Mini-Combicon MC 1.5/12-G-3.81 Cable length (max.): 30 m Table 31-16 Connector X22 Pin Signal Type Signal name 1 OE_S7 2 OE_S8 3 OE_S9 4 OE_S10 NC contact S10 10 BZOE_S7-S10 Reference potential NC contacts S7-10 5 S_S7 NO contact S7 6 S_S8 NO contact S8 7 S_S9 8 S_S10 NO contact S10 9 BZS_S7-S10 Reference potential NO contacts S7-10 11 3P24 12 3P24 Function NC contact S7 NC contact S8 I/O I/O V NC contact S9 NO contact S9 +24V potential +24V potential Connector X23 Connector designation: X23 Type: 4-pin Mini-Combicon MC 1.5/4-G-3.81 Cable length (max.): 30 m Table 31-17 Connector X23 758 Pin Signal 1 HS 7 2 HS 8 3 HS 9 4 HS 10 Type Signal name Function Signaling lamp S7 I Signaling lamp S8 Signaling lamp S9 All inputs "High" active Signaling lamp S10 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Machine Pushbutton Panel: MPP 483 31.3 Interfaces Connector X24 Only the special versions MPP 483 S and MPP 483 L are equipped with these connectors. Connector X24 designation: Type: MCD 1.5/8-G1-3.81 HT BK Cable length (max.): 1.5 m Table 31-18 Connector X24 Pin Signal B1 Type Signal name Pin Signal S51 Ext. key S51 A1 H51 LED_S51 B2 S52 Ext. key S52 A2 H52 LED_ S52 B3 S53 Ext. key S53 A3 H53 LED_ S53 B4 S54 Ext. key S54 A4 H54 B5 S55 Ext. key S55 A5 H55 LED_ S55 B6 S56 Ext. key S56 A6 H56 LED_ S56 I Type O Signal name LED_ S54 B7 S57 Ext. key S57 A7 H57 LED_ S57 B8 S58 Ext. key S58 A8 H58 LED_ S58 Viewed from the PCB: B at top of plug connector A at bottom of plug connector Connector X25 Connector designation: X25 Type: MCD 1.5/8-G1-3.81 HT BK Cable length (max.): 1.5 m Table 31-19 Connector X25 Pin Signal Type Signal name Pin Signal Typ e B1 P24_OUT V B2 Reference potential +24V A1 M24_EXT V S13 Emergency stop button A2 HS13 Emergency stop LED B3 S14 KT-S14 A3 HS14 LED-S14 B4 S15 KT-S15 A4 HS15 B5 S59 *) KT-IN3/emergency stop override A5 H59 I Signal name Reference potential +24V LED-S15 O LED-S59 B6 S60 Mode selection A6 H60 LED-S60 B7 S61 Rapid withdrawal A7 H61 LED-S61 B8 S62 *) S32 / HGA enabling unit plugged in / terminating connector A8 M24_EXT V Reference potential +24V *) can only be used as a neutral input without HGA Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 759 Machine Pushbutton Panel: MPP 483 31.3 Interfaces 31.3.2.4 Handheld unit connection HT 6 MPI / OPI X1 interface The interface supports transfer rates of up to 1.5 MBit/s. Connector designation: X1 Plug-connector type: 9-pin sub-D socket Cable length (max.): 100 m Table 31-20 MPI / OPI X1 interface Pin Signal name Type 1 N.C. - Meaning Do not use 2 N.C. - 3 RS_DP I/O Do not use 4 N.C. - 5 M5EXT V 5 V external ground 6 P5EXT V 5 V external potential 7 N.C. - Do not use 8 XRS_DP I/O 9 N.C. - RS-465 differential signal Do not use RS-465 differential signal Do not use Enabling X20 Connector designation: X20 Type: MCV 1.5/8-G3.81 Cable length (max.): 30 m Table 31-21 Enabling X20 Pin 760 Signal name Type Meaning 1 ZS1.1 Enabling button 1 2 ZS1.2 Call-up enabling button 1 3 ZS2.1 Enabling button 2 4 ZS2.2 Call-up enabling button 2 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Machine Pushbutton Panel: MPP 483 31.3 Interfaces Emergency Stop override X21 Connector designation: X21 Type: MCV 1.5/8-G3.81 Cable length (max.): 30 m Table 31-22 Emergency Stop override X21 Pin Signal name 1 NOT_ HALT 1.1 Type EMERGENCY STOP NC contact 1.1 Meaning 2 NOT_ HALT 1.2 EMERGENCY STOP NC contact 1.2 3 NOT_ HALT 2.1 EMERGENCY STOP NC contact 2.1 4 NOT_ HALT 2.2 EMERGENCY STOP NC contact 2.2 5/6 N.C. - not used 7 XNAUE I Emergency Stop override negated 8 3P24_HGA V 24 V Handwheel X22 Connector designation: X22 Type: MCV 1.5/4-G5.08 Cable length (max.): 30 m Table 31-23 Handwheel X22 Pin Signal name 1 HR_A 2 HR_XA 3 HR_B 4 HR_XB Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Type Meaning Handwheel A O Handwheel A negated Handwheel B Handwheel B negated 761 Machine Pushbutton Panel: MPP 483 31.3 Interfaces Handheld unit connection XS12 Connector designation: XS12 Type: RC-17S1YM2H3SW Table 31-24 Handheld unit connection XS12 Pin 1 762 Signal name Type NOT_ HALT 2.1 I/O Meaning Function EMERGENCY STOP NC contact 2.1 EMERGENCY STOP RS-485 data MPI 2 MPI_A 3 3M24 4 3P24 5 ZS1.1 Enabling button 1 6 ZS1.2 Call-up enabling button 2 7 HR_B 8 HR_A 9 V Supply voltage +24 V Handwheel B Enabling function Handwheel A Handwheel NOT_ HALT 1.2 EMERGENCY STOP NC contact 1.2 EMERGENCY STOP 10 NOT_ HALT 1.1 EMERGENCY STOP NC contact 1.1 11 ASS 12 NOT_ HALT 2.2 13 MPI_B 14 ZS2.1 15 HR_XA 16 ZS1.2 17 HR_XB O Ground 24V I I/O Terminating connector Terminating connector plugged in EMERGENCY STOP NC contact 2.2 EMERGENCY STOP RS-485 data MPI Enabling button 2 Enabling function O Handwheel A negated Handwheel Call-up enabling button 1 Enabling function O Handwheel B negated Handwheel Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Machine Pushbutton Panel: MPP 483 31.3 Interfaces 31.3.2.5 Handheld unit connection HT 8 Ethernet X1 / X2 Connector designation: X1, X2 Type: RJ-45 jack Table 31-25 Ethernet X1 / X2 Pin Signal name 1 TD+ Type Meaning Transmit data + 2 TD- O 3 RD+ I Receive data + 4 N.C. - not used 5 N.C. - not used 6 RD- I Receive data - 7 N.C. - not used 8 N.C. - not used Transmit data - Panel Present X7 Connector designation: X7 Type: 6-pole Phoenix terminal Table 31-26 Assignment of the interface Panel Present X7 Pin Signal name Signal type Meaning 1 PRES O "High": Panel (HT 8) plugged in 2 N.C. - not used 3 N.C. - not used 4 N.C. - not used 5 N.C. - not used 6 M P Chassis ground Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 763 Machine Pushbutton Panel: MPP 483 31.3 Interfaces Emergency Stop wiring terminal X8 Connector designation: X8 Type: 4-pole Phoenix terminal Table 31-27 Assignment of the EMER STOP wiring terminal X8 Pin Protective circuit 1 On-board jumper between 1 and 2 2 On-board jumper between 3 and 4 3 4 Note Use this terminal for simple routing of the emergency stop cables, optional. The connector is only used to assist looping through. The connected pins 1 and 2 as well as 3 and 4 have no additional function on the connection module. Enabling X20 Connector designation: X20 Type: MCV 1.5/8-G3.81 Cable length (max.): 30 m Table 31-28 Enabling X20 Pin 764 Signal name Type Meaning 1 ZUST1P I Electronic enabling button 1P 2 ZUST1M O Electronic enabling button 1M 3 ZUST2P I Electronic enabling button 2P 4 ZUST2M O 5 N.C. not used 6 N.C. not used 7 N.C. not used 8 N.C. not used Electronic enabling button 2M Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Machine Pushbutton Panel: MPP 483 31.3 Interfaces Emergency Stop override X21 Connector designation: X21 Type: MCV 1.5/10-G3.81 Cable length (max.): 30 m Table 31-29 Emergency Stop override X21 Pin Signal name 1 STOP23 2 STOP24 3 STOP13 4 STOP14 Type Meaning Emergency Stop NC contact 1.1 Emergency Stop NC contact 1.1 I/O Emergency Stop NC contact 2.1 Emergency Stop NC contact 2.2 5 M V 6 N.C. - not used 7 IN_S59 I Emergency Stop override negated 8 P24_FILT V 9 IN_S59_EXT 10 IN_S62_EXT 24 V Key-operated switch actuated O Terminating connector plugged in Handheld unit connection XS12 Connector designation: XS12 Type: 9GX3BXC-T22QF10-0004 Table 31-30 Handheld unit connection XS12 Pin Signal Type Meaning Function 1 HH_PR_P 2 HH_PR_M I 3 HP24 V 24 V HH for present 4 ZUST2M O Enabling button 2M 5 ZUST1P I Enabling button 1P 6 ZUST1M O Enabling button 1M 7 ZUST2P I Enabling button 2P 8 HH_L2.2 9 HH_L2.1 10 HH_L1.2 11 HH_L1.1 12 M V Chassis ground Voltage supply 13 ABS_ST_PRES I Terminating connector Terminating connector plugged in Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 + Present line - Present line Voltage supply Enabling function HH emergency stop L2.2 I/O HH emergency stop L2.1 HH emergency stop L1.2 Emergency stop HH emergency stop L1.1 765 Machine Pushbutton Panel: MPP 483 31.3 Interfaces Pin 31.3.3 Signal Type 14 HH_P24 V 15 IDENT_B I/O 16 TX- 17 TX+ 18 RX+ 19 O Meaning 24 V HH supply Ethernet Transmit - Ethernet transmitted data Ethernet Transmit + Ethernet receive + RX- Ethernet receive - 20 SHIELD - Cable shield 21 M 22 IDENT_A V Voltage supply Diff Signal Module Addr. I I/O Function Ethernet receive data Chassis ground Voltage supply Diff Signal Module Addr. Connection elements for COM board, customer keys and handheld unit connection This table shows plug connection elements for the following modules: COM board (COM) Customer keys (KT) Connection for handheld units (HGA) Table 31-31 Connection elements Module COM KT HGA HT 6 HGA HT 8 Connector Units Terminal element X10 1 MSTB2,5/3-STZ-5,08,1776168 X20 1 6ES7972-0BA50-0XA0 6ES7972-0BB50-0XA0 *) X60 / X61 2 6FC9348-7HX X70 1 A5E00026403 X11 1 MSTB2,5/3-ST-5,08,1757022 Connectable crosssection (max.) Manufacturer 2.5 mm2 PHOENIX CONTACT 0.75 mm2 SIEMENS 2.5 mm2 PHOENIX CONTACT mm2 X20 / X23 2 MC1.5/4-ST-3.81, 1803594 1.5 X21/X22 2 MC1.5/12-ST-3.81, 1803675 1.5 mm2 X24:A/B X25: A/B 4 MC1.5/8-ST-3.81, 1803633 1.5 mm2 X1 1 6ES7972-0BA50-0XA0 SIEMENS mm2 X20/X21 2 MC1.5/8-ST-3.81, 1803633 1.5 X22 1 MC1.5/4-ST-5.08, 1836095 1.5 mm2 X1 / X2 2 6GK1901-1BB10-2AB0 PHOENIX CONTACT SIEMENS mm2 X7 1 MC1.5/6-STZ-3.81 GY BD1-6.1713198 1.5 X8 1 MC1.5/4-STZ-3.81 GY BD1-4.1713185 1.5 mm2 mm2 X 20 1 MC1.5/8-STZ-3.81 GY BD-1-8, 1713208 1.5 X 21 1 MC1.5/10-STZ-3.81 GY BD1-10, 1901658 1.5 mm2 PHOENIX CONTACT *) with PG connection 766 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Machine Pushbutton Panel: MPP 483 31.3 Interfaces 31.3.4 Input / output images MPI standard input image Byte Bit7 Bit6 n+0 Bit5 Bit4 BA switch Bit3 Bit2 Function key HG connection XS12:11 1) XS12:13 2) n+1 WS1/4 WS1/3 WS1/2 WS1/1 F16*) F11*) F6*) F1*) Customer key Key Customer key Extension key S15 WS4, pos.0 S14 S51 n+2 Key WS4, pos.3 n+3 F21 WS4, pos.1 Extension key Emergency stop S53 S13 n+4 S61 Emergency stop override S11 S11 right-hand left-hand side side momentary momentary -contact -contact S62 S60 S4 S3 S2 S59 S1 Rapid traverse override WS5/8 WS5/4 WS5/2 Customer keys S10 Bit0 Customer keys SR key WS4, pos.2 Bit1 S9 WS5/1 Extension key S8 S7 S52 DT3 DT2 DT1 DT12 DT11 DT10 DT9 WS3/8 WS3/4 Direct control keys DT8 DT7 DT6 n+5 DT5 DT4 Direct control keys DT16 DT15 n+6 DT14 DT13 Extension keys S58 n+7 S57 Spindle override Extension keys S56 S55 WS3/2 WS3/1 WS2/2 WS2/1 Feedrate override S54 WS2/16 WS2/8 WS2/4 *) The function keys are not active if WS1 is assigned. 1) HT 6 / 2) HT 8 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 767 Machine Pushbutton Panel: MPP 483 31.3 Interfaces MPI extended input image Byte Bit7 Bit6 n+0 Bit5 Bit4 BA switch Bit3 Bit2 Function key HG connection XS12:11 1) XS12:13 2) n+1 WS1/4 WS1/3 WS1/2 WS1/1 F16*) F11*) F6*) F1*) Customer key Key Customer key Extension key S15 WS4, pos.0 S14 S51 n+2 Key WS4, pos.3 n+3 F21 WS4, pos.1 Extension key Emergency stop S53 S13 n+4 S61 Emergency stop override S11 S11 right-hand left-hand side side momentary momentary -contact -contact S62 S60 S4 S3 S2 S59 S1 Rapid traverse override WS5/8 WS5/4 WS5/2 Customer keys S10 Bit0 Customer keys SR key WS4, pos.2 Bit1 S9 WS5/1 Extension key S8 S7 S52 DT3 DT2 DT1 DT12 DT11 DT10 DT9 WS3/8 WS3/4 Direct control keys DT8 DT7 DT6 DT16 DT15 DT14 n+5 DT5 DT4 Direct control keys n+6 DT13 Extension keys S58 n+7 Spindle override S57 Extension keys S56 S55 WS3/2 WS3/1 WS2/4 WS2/2 WS2/1 F3 F2 F1 F11 F10 F9 F19 F18 F17 Feedrate override S54 n+8 WS2/16 WS2/8 Function keys F8 F7 F6 F5 F16 F15 F14 F13 F25 F24 F23 F22 n+9 F4 Function keys n+10 F12 Function keys n+11 F20 Reserve *) The function keys are not active if WS1 is assigned. 1) HT 6 / 2) HT 8 768 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Machine Pushbutton Panel: MPP 483 31.3 Interfaces PROFIBUS-DP input image Byte Bit7 Bit6 n+0 Bit5 Bit4 BA switch Bit3 Bit2 Function key HG connection XS12:11 1) XS12:13 2) n+1 WS1/4 WS1/3 WS1/2 WS1/1 F16*) F11*) F6*) F1*) Customer key Key Customer key Extension key S15 WS4, pos.0 S14 S51 WS4, pos.3 WS4, pos.2 WS4, pos.1 Extension key Emergency stop S53 S13 n+2 Key n+3 F21 n+4 S11 S11 right-hand left-hand side side momentary momentary -contact -contact S62 S60 S4 S3 S2 S59 S1 Rapid traverse override WS5/8 WS5/4 WS5/2 Customer keys S10 Bit0 Customer keys SR key S61 Bit1 Emergency stop override S9 WS5/1 Extension key S8 S7 S52 DT3 DT2 DT1 DT11 DT10 DT9 Direct control keys DT8 DT7 DT6 n+5 DT5 DT4 Direct control keys DT16 DT15 n+6 DT14 DT13 DT12 Extension keys n+7 Spindle override S58 S57 WS3/8 WS2/8 Extension keys WS3/4 WS3/2 WS3/1 WS2/4 WS2/2 WS2/1 F3 F2 F1 F11 F10 F9 F19 F18 F17 WS2/2" WS2/1 WS3/2 WS3/1 Feedrate override S56 S55 S54 WS2/16 F8 F7 F6 F5 n+8 Function keys n+9 F4 Function keys F16 F15 F14 n+10 F13 F12 Function keys F25 F24 F23 n+11 F22 F20 Reserve n+12 Feedrate override WS2/16 WS2/8 n+13 WS2/4 Spindle override *) The function keys are not active if WS1 is assigned. 1) HT 6 / 2) HT 8 WS3/16 WS3/8 WS3/4 Optional 4-byte handwheel n+0 Handwheel 1 n+1 Handwheel 1 n+2 Handwheel 2 n+3 Handwheel 2 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 769 Machine Pushbutton Panel: MPP 483 31.3 Interfaces Keyboard layout - input image MPP 483 033 ) 6 033/ 6 ;6 6 6 6 ) ) 6SLQGOHRYHUULGH :6 ) ) ) ) ) ) ) ) ) ) ) ) 6 6 6 6 ) ) ) ) 2963 2963 )HHGRYHUULGH :6 ) ) ) ) ) ) 2963 2963 6 6 6 6 6 6 2996 2996 2996 2996 2996 5DSLGWUDYHUVHRYHUULGH :6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 29(O 29(, 6 29(, 29(, $UHD YDULDEOHHOHPHQWV 7KHHOHPHQWVZLWKLQWKH PDUNHGDUHDFDQEH LQWHUFKDQJHGDFFRUGLQJWRWKH SRVVLEOHHTXLSPHQWYDULDWLRQV $OWHUQDWLYHHTXLSPHQWRIWKH YDULDEOHDUHD ,WHP 6 ,WHP :6 ,WHP :6 :6 ,WHP :6 :6 :6 Figure 31-10 Front view 770 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Machine Pushbutton Panel: MPP 483 31.3 Interfaces Output image MPI / PROFIBUS-DP Byte Bit7 Bit6 Bit5 n+0 Bit4 Bit3 Bit2 Bit1 Bit0 HS3 HS2 HS1 Customer keys Hs8 HS7 HS15 HS14 HS4 n+1 Customer keys n+2 HS10 HS9 H52 H51 Extension keys H58 H57 H56 H55 n+3 H54 H53 SR key Feedback for Extension keys E9/E10 when S11 is not used emergency stop H61 n+4 HS13 H60 H59 HF3 HF2 HF1 HF11 HF10 HF9 HF19 HF18 HF17 Function keys HF8 HF7 HF6 n+5 HF5 HF4 Function keys HF16 HF15 HF14 n+6 HF13 HF12 Function keys HF24 HF23 n+7 HF22 HF21 HF20 Function key HF25 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 771 Machine Pushbutton Panel: MPP 483 31.3 Interfaces 033 Keyboard layout - output image MPP 483 +6 +) +) +) +) +) +) +) +) +) +) +) +) +) ;6 033/ 6 +) 6SLQGOHRYHUULGH :6 +6 +6 +6 +6 +6 +) +) )HHGRYHUULGH :6 +) +) +) +) +) +) +) +) +) +6 +6 +6 +6 +6 5DSLGWUDYHUVHRYHUULGH :6 + + + + + $UHD YDULDEOHHOHPHQWV 7KHHOHPHQWVZLWKLQWKH PDUNHGDUHDFDQEH LQWHUFKDQJHGDFFRUGLQJWRWKH SRVVLEOHHTXLSPHQWYDULDWLRQV + + + + + $OWHUQDWLYHHTXLSPHQWRIWKH YDULDEOHDUHD + :6 :6 Figure 31-11 Front 772 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Machine Pushbutton Panel: MPP 483 31.4 Mounting 31.4 Mounting Dimensions for MPP 483 and MPP 483 L Figure 31-12 Dimension drawing for MPP 483 and MPP 483 L *) The depth of 105 mm is only attainable with a Profibus adapter. Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 773 Machine Pushbutton Panel: MPP 483 31.4 Mounting ! Panel cutout for MPP 483 and MPP 483 L 'LVWDQFHWRQH[W033!PP 033SDQHOFXWRXW ! Figure 31-13 Panel cutout for MPP 483 033/SDQHOFXWRXW 'LVWDQFHWRQH[W033!PP Figure 31-14 Panel cutout for MPP 483 L The MPP 483 is attached to the rear side of the operator panel using 9 tension jacks (contained in the delivery kit). The tightening torque is 0.4 mm. Installation position The mounting position is max. 60 to the vertical. For mounting positions greater than 60, a fan must also be installed to keep the ambient temperature of the machine control panel constantly below 55C. 774 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Machine Pushbutton Panel: MPP 483 31.4 Mounting 033/ 033 Mounting position of LEDs Figure 31-15 Mounting position for MPP 483 / MPP 483 L LEDs Table 31-32 Identification of anode connection Insert polarity+ of LEDs in key on side marked Installing Profibus adapter If no handwheels are connected, the installation depth can be reduced from 140 mm to 105 mm. For this, insert the PCB Profibus adapter (1) according to the figure. Figure 31-16 Installing Profibus adapter Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 775 Machine Pushbutton Panel: MPP 483 31.5 Connectors 31.5 Connectors 31.5.1 MPP 483 Connecting the 24V supply The 24V supply is connected via a 3-pin terminal block at connector X10 and X11 to the rear of the machine control panel (see Figure: "Rear side of MPP 483 with interfaces" in section: "Interfaces" "Overview"). The protective ground is secured to the M5 bolt (see Figure: "MPI connection"). DANGER The 24VDC power supply must always be grounded and designed as Protective Extra Low Voltage (PELV) - protection by function low voltage with safe isolation! Emergency stop circuit connection The emergency stop circuit connections are shown in figures "MPI connection" and "PROFIBUS DP connection." MPI connection Connection of X1 (HGA) to X20 (COM board) and to control 'LUHFWFRQWURONH\V 3&8 0 3 3( (PHUJVWRSFLUFXLW .7; .7; .7; (PHUJVWRSFLUFXLW ; :6 6 &20 6 &20; 6 &20 + + + &206 ; ; + + :6 + + + + ; (PHUJVWRSFLUFXLW &20 &20 ; ; 6 +*$ (PHUJVWRSFLUFXLW ;; 6 ;6 .7; .7; (PHUJVWRSFLUFXLW .7; .7; (PHUJVWRSFLUFXLW 03,EXV (QDEOH (PHUJVWRSFLUFXLWZR+*$ (PHUJVWRSFLUFXLWZLWK+*$ Figure 31-17 MPI connection 776 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Machine Pushbutton Panel: MPP 483 31.5 Connectors PROFIBUS DP connection DP connection via X20 (COM board) to control MPI connection via X1 (HGA) to PCU of panel Handwheel 1 from X60 (COM board) to connection X22 (HGA) for handheld unit 'LUHFWFRQWURONH\V 3&8 0 3 3( (PHUJVWRSFLUFXLW .7; .7; .7; (PHUJVWRSFLUFXLW ; :6 6 &20 6 &20; 6 &20 + + + &206 ; ; + + :6 + + + + ; (PHUJVWRSFLUFXLW &20 &20 ; ; 6 (PHUJVWRSFLUFXLW +*$ ;; 6 ;6 .7; .7; (PHUJVWRSFLUFXLW .7; .7; (PHUJVWRSFLUFXLW 352),%86'3 (QDEOH 03,EXV +DQGZKHHO +DQGZKHHO RU+*$ (PHUJVWRSFLUFXLWZR+*$ (PHUJVWRSFLUFXLWZLWK+*$ Figure 31-18 PROFIBUS DP connection Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 777 Machine Pushbutton Panel: MPP 483 31.5 Connectors Connection for HT 8 DP connection via X20 (COM board) to control Ethernet connection X1 / X2 (WKHUQHW 'LUHFWFRQWURONH\V 3&8 0 3 3( .7; .7; (PHUJVWRSFLUFXLW .7; (PHUJVWRSFLUFXLW &206 :6 ; &20; 6 &206 &20 :6 ; 6 ; ; &20 ; (PHUJVWRSFLUFXLW &20; 6 (PHUJVWRSFLUFXLW 6 ;6 ; ; (PHUJVWRSFLUFXLW .7; .7; .7; .7; (PHUJVWRSFLUFXLW (QDEOH 3URILEXV03, +DQGZKHHO +DQGZKHHO (WKHUQHW (PHUJVWRSFLUFXLWZR+*$ (PHUJVWRSFLUFXLWZLWK+*$ Figure 31-19 Ethernet connection Individual wiring connection Selector switches and individual contacts are connected in accordance with the customer-specific links required (see Figure in section: "Customer keys (KT) module"). Note Supply voltages for inputs and outputs must always be grounded! 778 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Machine Pushbutton Panel: MPP 483 31.5 Connectors 31.5.2 COM board The COM board provides communication via the bus and forms the interface to the superordinate system. The parameters are set on coding switch S3. .7; .7; .7; ; :6 6 &20 6 &20; + + + + 6 &20 + + + + + &206 :6 ; ; ; &20 &20 ; ; 6 +*$ ;; 6 ;6 .7; .7; .7; .7; &206 21 Figure 31-20 Coding switch S3 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 779 Machine Pushbutton Panel: MPP 483 31.5 Connectors 31.5.3 Customer keys The customer keys (KT) module links the operator panel, repeater and COM board. The inputs for handheld unit connection and extension keys are opto-decoupled. The outputs belonging to these are issued by high-side drivers. The floating individual contacts of function keys S1 ... S4 and S7 ... S10 are shown in the figure. 7R3/& J J J P J P %ORFN6 %ORFN6 %ORFN6 %ORFN6 %ORFN6 3 %ORFN6 ; %ORFN6 3 %ORFN6 6 J 6 J +6 P P P %ORFNV6+6 J %ORFNV6+6 %ORFNV6+6 J %ORFNV6+6 P %ORFNV6+6 P %ORFNV6+6 +6 %ORFN6+6 ; P %ORFNV6+6 P N K N K N K ; ; N K N K N K N K 0 D E F G H I D E FG 9 K 0 N DEFG DEFG DEFG DEFGDEFG DEFG ; ; ; ) ; ; Figure 31-21 Individual wiring of the customer keys (a, b, ..., m designate IN and OUT of the individual blocks) 31.5.4 Handheld unit connection HT 6 The connection for handheld units (HGA) of the HT 6 has three function complexes: Two-channel version of enabling function Integrated repeater Connection of HT6 and BHG 780 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Operator Components Manual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achine Pushbutton Panel: MPP 483 31.5 Connectors Figure 31-22 Handheld unit connection HT 6 781 Machine Pushbutton Panel: MPP 483 31.5 Connectors Terminating connector I12 (Word 0 Bit 2) is used to interrogate whether a connection plug or handheld unit is plugged in. Keyswitch S11 Key-operated button, left probing: "Emergency stop override" Interrogation via E59 Keyswitch, right probing: "Customer function" Interrogation via S60 Initiation of a monitoring time for checking the operability of the emergency stop override function Positive-action contacts between emergency stop override and emergency stop monitoring acc. to IEC 60 947-5-1, Annex K and DIN VDE 0660 part 200 Interruption to power supply for handheld unit connection when S11 is pressed (emergency stop override) Override S11 All functions correspond to the key-operated button S11. WARNING It is the user's responsibility to ensure that the enable key is designed per DIN EN 602041-1, Subsection 9.2.5.6, and, when released or pushed down, stops dangerous movements reliably. When using S11 with the "EMERGENCY STOP" jumper function, in addition to Fig.: "Handheld unit connection", dangerous movements should be interlocked by the PLC using S11 and time monitoring initiated at the same time. After the monitoring time (max. 5 min), if the signaling contacts on S11: 31/32 and 61/62 are not closed again correctly, an "emergency stop" should be triggered by the PLC. Functional reliability of emergency stop and enabling circuits (see Figure: "Handheld unit connection HT 6) Emergency stop override The emergency stop override is undertaken in the locking position of keyswitch S11. The emergency stop circuit in the handheld unit is overridden during connecting using the left-hand position (I). The right-hand position (II) is intended for user-specific use or for authorizing the operating mode selection. 782 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Machine Pushbutton Panel: MPP 483 31.5 Connectors Emergency stop circuits The emergency stop circuit is a two-channel configuration with the following layout: Kreis1 NC contact S13:31/32X21:3/S11:53XS12:9emergency stop handwheelXS12:10X21:4S11:54 Circuit2 NC contact S13:21/22X21:1/S11:43XS12:12emergency stop handwheelXS12:1X21:2S11:44 To avoid interruption of the emergency stop circuits on changeover between the handheld unit and the terminator at XS12, the emergency stop contacts of the handheld unit can be jumpered via S11. The S11:53/54 contact overrides the XS12:9/10 emergency control contact of the handheld unit in circuit 1 The S11:43/44 contact overrides the XS12:1/12 emergency control contact of the handheld unit in circuit 2 The time monitoring function in the PLC serves to detect malfunctions in switch S11: If contact S11:31/3261/62 does not close properly within the specified time frame, the PLC must interrupt the emergency stop circuit. The contact is interrogated via I9 Word 0, Bit 0 of the PLC input image (see section: "Interfaces" "Input / output images"). Enable circuits The enabling function for the MPP 483 is designed as two-channel function: The enabling buttons are called up via X20:2X12:16 and X20:4X12:6 The interrogation is undertaken via XS12:5X20:1 and XS12:14X20:3 In addition, the power supply for the handheld units connected at XS12:4 is interrupted via contact S11:31/32 and 61/62X21:7 when S11 is actuated. The interlock between S11 and the enable key must be implemented in the PLC. Note Only 2-channel handheld units can be connected. Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 783 Machine Pushbutton Panel: MPP 483 31.5 Connectors 31.5.5 Handheld unit connection HT 8 The connection for handheld units (HGA) of the HT 8 has four function complexes: Two-channel version of enabling function 3 Port Ethernet Switch Connection of HT8 Module address The function of the emergency off override via S11 corresponds to the handheld unit connection of the HT 6. Information on this can be found in Section: "Connections" "Connection for handheld units HT6". All other functions can be found in the figure. 784 Operator Components Manual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b 6LJQDOWRWKH3/& 9DULDQW$ (PHUJHQF\VWRSRYHUULGH XVLQJNH\6 WRWKH3/& 6 (PHUJHQF\VWRSRYHUULGH (PHUJHQF\VWRS 6 (PHUJVWRS RYHUULGH $XWKRUL]DWLRQ PRGHVHOHFWLRQ ; 6+,(/' 3B),/7 (PHUJVWRSFLUFXLW V\VWHPHPHUJVWRS 5; 5; 7; 7; 5; 5; 7; 7; 5 (WKHUQHW ,QWHUIDFH 0 )LOWHU '&'& 5HVHW (WKHUQHW 6ZLWFK ,1B( ,1B( 0 3B),/7 7; 7; 5; (PHUJVWRSFLUFXLW V\VWHPHPHUJVWRS 5; 6+,(/' Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 ++B3 ; ; ; Machine Pushbutton Panel: MPP 483 31.5 Connectors Figure 31-23 Handheld unit connection HT 8 785 Machine Pushbutton Panel: MPP 483 31.6 Circuits and wiring 31.6 Circuits and wiring External control of signaling lamps The following circuit diagram relates to the lights in HS1 to HS4 and HS7 to HS10. 3 +6Q 0 ;; ; Figure 31-24 External control of signaling lamps (1) Block Sn (2) External contact Circuit for emergency stop button .7;% 3 Figure 31-25 Circuit for emergency stop button 786 (1) Emergency stop button S13 (2) Emergency stop of the machine control Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Machine Pushbutton Panel: MPP 483 31.6 Circuits and wiring Emergency stop button Press the red button in emergencies: if life is at risk, When there is a danger of the machines or workpiece being damaged. Turn the EMERGENCY STOP button counterclockwise to unlatch it. Applies to drives: As a rule, when operating the emergency stop button, all drives are brought to a standstill with max. braking torque. Machine manufacturer For other reactions to the emergency stop: refer to the machine tool manufacturer's instructions Operator Components Manual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achine Pushbutton Panel: MPP 483 31.6 Circuits and wiring Extension keys connection Figure 31-26 Extension keys connection Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Machine Pushbutton Panel: MPP 483 31.6 Circuits and wiring Direct control key connection &20ERDUG 23 ; ) ) ) ) ) ) ) ) ) ) ) ) ) ) ) ) 9s Figure 31-27 Direct control key connection Customer function S11 The NC-NO combination 3SB34 03-0A is right probing and a customer function of the S11. The NO contact is wired on delivery and can be queried through the MPP 483. The probing function facilitates mode selection. If an external evaluation of both contacts is required, the internal wiring on the NO contact 1.3/1.4 of the S 11 must be removed (see Fig.: "Extension keys connection" in this section). Remove connection 1 and connection 4 If connection 2 exists, wire the connection of S11:1.3 to S13:1.4 Customer keys 2-channel connection This figure shows an example of a connection for the 2-channel evaluation of the keys S1 ... S4 and S7 ... S10. Connection: Nonequivalent sensor 2-channel non-equivalent connected Internal sensor power supply Connection to ET200S module, EM 4/8 F-DI DC24 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 789 Machine Pushbutton Panel: MPP 483 31.6 Circuits and wiring 7R3/& 033 H J J %ORFN6 J %ORFN6 %ORFN6 J %ORFN6 3 D E F G J %ORFN6 I %ORFN6 J %ORFN6 D E F G ; 6 %ORFN6 6 J 3 J DE FG DEF G DEF G DE FG DEF G DEF G ; ; (76 )', ',' ', ', ', 9V ', ', ', ', 'LJLWDOHOHFWURQLFPRGXOH )','&9352),VDIH $ 9V 9V 30( 0 0 / / 3RZHUPRGXOH 9V ', ', ', ', 'LJLWDOHOHFWURQLFPRGXOH )','&9352),VDIH $ )', ',' ', ', ', Figure 31-28 Customer keys 2-channel connection 790 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Machine Pushbutton Panel: MPP 483 31.7 Initialization 31.7 Initialization The configurations which are available for the MPP 483 are displayed broken down by PROFIBUS DP and MPI (GD) communication protocols. For PROFIBUS DP, the PROFIBUS slave ID which has been specified by PI is also named. Slave ID MPI (GD) PROFIBUS DP 8122 Configuration IN/OUT Standard 8/8 bytes Extended standard 12/8 bytes Standard 14/8 bytes Standard + handwheel 14/8 bytes + 2/0 words Software version If there is still no communication with the control / PROFIBUS master, the MPP 483 software version can be output on the panel using the LEDs. The output is activated by pressing the "F21" and "F25" buttons at the same time. Flashing of the LEDs is thereby suppressed and the software version output on the function key block using three digits. The individual digits are expressed in hexadecimal format by the number of LEDs activated in the first three LED lines on the MPP. The lowest value bit position is always on the right. The software version of the MPP V 02.01.00.00 is shown in the example given. VWGLJLW QGGLJLW UGGLJLW Figure 31-29 Sample displays of software version Note The software version can only be output while there is no communication with the control system. Once communication has taken place, the software version is only displayed again after the power to the MPP 483 has been switched OFF and ON! Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 791 Machine Pushbutton Panel: MPP 483 31.7 Initialization Settings for coding switch S3 Table 31-33 Settings for coding switch S3 for MPI 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 on 8 on 9 10 Meaning off MPP 483 with MPI Communication off - compatible mode 8/8 bytes I/O on - extended assignment 12/8 bytes I/O Reserved on off Parameter set 3 off on Parameter set 2 off off Parameter set 1 on on on on Bus address: 15 on on on off Bus address: 14 on on off on Bus address: 13 on on off off Bus address: 12 on off on on Bus address: 11 on off on off Bus address: 10 on off off on Bus address: 9 on off off off Bus address: 8 off on on on Bus address: 7 off on on off Bus address: 6 off on off on Bus address: 5 off on off off Bus address: 4 off off on on Bus address: 3 off off on off Bus address: 2 off off off on Bus address: 1 off off off off Bus address: 0 on 200 ms transmission cycle time off 100 ms transmission cycle time on Baud rate: 1.5 Mbaud OPI off Baud rate: 187.5 Kbaud MPI The switch positions highlighted correspond to the standard setting. Parameter set 1: GD parameters 1,1,1 - 1,2,1 (fixed, regardless of bus address) Parameter set 2: GD parameters 2,1,1 -2,2,1 (fixed, regardless of bus address) Parameter set 3: Assignment depends on the bus address set 792 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Machine Pushbutton Panel: MPP 483 31.7 Initialization Table 31-34 Settings for coding switch S3 for PROFIBUS DP 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 off off 10 on Meaning MPP 483 as PROFIBUS slave Reserved off off off off off off off Bus address: 0 on off off off off off off Bus address: 1 off on off off off off off Bus address: 2 on on off off off off off Bus address: 3 ... ... ... ... ... ... ... etc. off off on on on on on Bus address: 124 on off on on on on on Bus address: 125 off on on on on on on Bus address: 126 Bits 8 and 9 are reserved during PROFIBUS mode and should be assigned "off". Table 31-35 Module address connection module HT 8 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 S1 S2 0 to F o to F 1 Meaning Switch Module address LEDs HF1 to HF25 HS1 to HS4 HS7 to HS10 After power to the MPP 483 is switched ON, all LEDs / lights are first activated. Once the MPP 483 has been powered up internally, the LEDs flash at different frequencies. For setting the MPP 483 with GD communication (compatible mode) using ~ 80 Hertz For setting the MPP 483 as PROFIBUS slave using ~ 30 Hertz On the MPP 483, all LEDs above the buttons flash if there is no communication with the control system / PROFIBUS master. Table 31-36 LEDs on the COM board H1 H2 H3 H4 H5 Red off Green Yellow Red During GD communication Off Off Green Yellow*) Red PROFIBUS communication without master Red Off Green Off Green *) PROFIBUS communication with master Off Off Green Off Green Red *) Off Green *) Yellow*) Green *) After power ON Fatal error *) LED flashing Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 793 Machine Pushbutton Panel: MPP 483 31.8 Communication 31.8 Communication 31.8.1 MPI Communication GD parameters The following table contains the default parameters (which depend on the bus addresses) for the GD circuits on the MPP 483. Table 31-37 GD parameters GD parameters Parameter set Bus address MPI OPI 3 0 Reserved 2.38.0 - 2.22.0 3 1 Reserved 3.38.0 - 3.22.0 3 2 Reserved 4.38.0 - 4.22.0 3 3 Reserved 5.38.0 - 5.22.0 3 4 5.1.1 - 5.2.1 6.38.0 - 6.22.0 3 5 5.1.1 - 5.2.1 7.38.0 - 7.22.0 3 6 8.38.0 - 8.22.0 8.38.0 - 8.22.0 3 7 4.1.1 - 4.2.1 9.38.0 - 9.22.0 3 8 4.1.1 - 4.2.1 10.38.0 - 10.22.0 3 9 3.1.1 - 3.2.1 11.38.0 - 11.22.0 3 10 3.1.1 - 3.2.1 12.38.0 - 12.22.0 3 11 2.1.1 - 2.2.1 13.38.0 - 13.22.0 3 12 2.1.1 - 2.2.1 14.38.0 - 14.22.0 3 13 1.1.1 - 1.2.1 15.38.0 - 15.22.0 3 14 1.1.1 - 1.2.1 16.38.0 - 16.22.0 3 15 1.1.1 - 1.2.1 1.38.0 - 1.22.0 1 X 1.1.1 - 1.2.1 1.1.1 - 1.2.1 2 X 2.1.1 - 2.2.1 2.1.1 - 2.2.1 MPI mode The assignment, quantity structure and standard and extended modes are shown in section: "Interfaces" "Input / output images." The standard mode is compatible with PP 012. When compared with the extended mode, only the first column of the function keys can be interrogated in standard mode. 794 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Machine Pushbutton Panel: MPP 483 31.8 Communication 31.8.2 PROFIBUS communication 31.8.2.1 Prerequisites The assignment and quantity structure of PROFIBUS mode are shown in section: "Interfaces" "Input / output images". PROFIBUS mode also offers the following functions: Connection of two handwheels 5-position spindle override Prerequisites The following components are needed as prerequisites for adding a DP slave MPP to the hardware configuration: SIMATIC STEP 7 GSD file of DP slave MPP Graphics files of DP slave MPP SIMATIC STEP 7 The GSD file for the DP slave MPP is required in the following version or later: SI008122.GSD version 1.0 or later GSD file A GSD file contains all the properties of a DP slave in ASCII format. For each DP slave, SIMATIC STEP 7 requires a module-specific GSD file so that the DP slave can be found in the hardware catalog. Path The DP slave MPP is shown in SIMATIC STEP 7 in the hardware catalog of "HW Config" under the following path: PROFIBUS-DP > Other FIELD DEVICES > NC/RC > Motion Control > SINUMERIK MPP Import A GSD file SIMATIC STEP 7 is imported in "HW Config" using the menu: "Tools" > "Install new GSD file" Then select the file: SI8122.GSD and open it. Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 795 Machine Pushbutton Panel: MPP 483 31.8 Communication Graphics file The graphics files belonging to the GSD file: SI8122_n.bmp is used to depict the MPP in STEP 7. 31.8.2.2 Configuring the DP slave MPP 483 This section describes how to configure a DP slave MPP with reference to the hardware configuration for a SIMATIC S7 project shown in the figure by way of example. The hardware configuration has the following modules: SIMATIC station 300 with SINUMERIK 810D/840D and PLC 317-2DP SINUMERIK MPP with module: Standard, handwheel Procedure Configuring the DP slave MPP as an S7 project involves the following steps: 1. Add the DP slave MPP to the configuration (1) 2. Set the PROFIBUS address 3. Add the appropriate module to the DP slave MPP according to the functions required. (2) 4. Set the I/O addresses for the individual slots. Figure 31-30 Configuring the DP slave MPP 483 796 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Machine Pushbutton Panel: MPP 483 31.8 Communication Preconditions: S7 project The following status is required for the S7 project to which the DP slave MPP is to be added: You have created the S7 project You have set up a SIMATIC 300 station with PROFIBUS master-capable SINUMERIK controller Adding a DP slave MPP To add a DP slave MPP to the configuration, open the hardware catalog using the menu command View > Catalog View > Catalog. The DP slave MCP can be found at: Profile: Standard PROFIBUS-DP > Other field devices > NC/RC > Motion Control > SINUMERIK MPP Click with the left mouse button on the DP slave MPP (SINUMERIK MPP) in the hardware catalog and drag it onto the DP master system in the station window by holding down the left mouse button. The DP master system is displayed in the station window with the following symbol: When you release the left mouse button, the DP slave MPP is added to the configuration. Note As you drag the DP slave the cursor appears as a circle with a slash through it. When the cursor is positioned exactly over the DP master system, it changes to a plus sign, and the DP slave can be added to the configuration. PROFIBUS parameters Once you have added the DP slave MPP to the configuration, the "Properties PROFIBUS interface SINUMERIK MPP" dialog box is displayed. The following PROFIBUS parameters must either be set or verified: PROFIBUS address Data transfer rate Profile Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 797 Machine Pushbutton Panel: MPP 483 31.8 Communication Dialog Dialog: Properties - PROFIBUS interface SINUMERIK MPP Tab card: parameters Address: <PROFIBUS address> Button: "Properties..." Dialog: Properties - PROFIBUS Tab card: Network settings Data transfer rate: 12 Mbaud Profile: DP OK OK Note The PROFIBUS address of the DP slave MPP set in the S7 project must match the PROFIBUS address set on the module (coding switch S3) (see Section: "Initialization") There is no automatic adjustment! The following data must agree: 1. SIMATIC S7 configuration of DP slave MPP PROFIBUS address 2. Machine control panel MPP 483 PROFIBUS address (coding switch S3) Adding a module The active functions and hence the number of user data elements to be transferred are chosen by selecting the appropriate pre-configured module. The modules in the hardware catalog are positioned below the DP slave MPP. The following modules are available: Universal module (not applicable) Standard Standard, handwheel Module: Standard The module transfers the data for the "Standard" function: Input data: 14 bytes Standard data (14 bytes) 798 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Machine Pushbutton Panel: MPP 483 31.8 Communication Output data: 8 bytes Standard data (8 bytes) Module: Standard, handwheel The module transfers the data for the "Standard" and "Handwheel" functions: Input data: 18 bytes Standard data (14 bytes) Absolute value 1st handwheel (2 bytes) Absolute value 2nd handwheel (2 bytes) Low byte High byte Output data: 8 bytes Standard data (8 bytes) Setting the I/O addresses If you add a module to slot 1 of the DP slave MPP, the input/output addresses are automatically assigned by STEP 7. Double clicking with the left mouse button on a slot opens the "Properties - DP slave" dialog box. The starting addresses for the I/O data for the slot can be set here. 31.8.2.3 PLC user program If an MPP is connected via PROFIBUS DP, the basic PLC program does not check for module failure. In this case the MPP is monitored by a standard mechanism to monitor the active DP slave: PLC operating system PROFIBUS controller If a failure of a DP slave MPP is detected, the PLC defaults to STOP. Customized response: The following organization blocks can be added to the PLC user program to customize the response to a DP slave MPP failure: OB 82: Diagnostics interrupt Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 799 Machine Pushbutton Panel: MPP 483 31.8 Communication OB 86: Rack failure Please refer to the corresponding SIMATIC literature for details of linking organization blocks and evaluating diagnostic data. Note In the event of the failure of a machine control panel connected via OPI/MPI, the following alarm is triggered by the basic PLC program: * Alarm "40026x machine control panel (x+1) failure"; with x = 0, 1 If the machine control panel is being operated as a DP slave, the user (machine manufacturer) is responsible for triggering a corresponding alarm. 800 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Machine Pushbutton Panel: MPP 483 31.9 Technical specifications 31.9 Technical specifications 31.9.1 MPP 483 Safety Safety class III; PELV acc. to DIN EN 60204-1 Degree of protection in accordance with DIN EN 60529 Front: IP54 Rear side: IP10A Certificates and approvals Electrical data CE / UL Input voltage 24 V DC Power consumption, max. Flat modules 12 W Lamps LED 8.8 W Handheld unit 12 W Fuse to be added Mechanical data Handwheels Total 2 x 0.9 W 35 W 10 A Dimensions (mm) Height Width Depth (front) Weight Mounting depth MPP 483 155 483 60 140 / 105 *) Approx. 3 kg MPP 483 L 244 483 60 140 / 105 *) approx. 4.5 kg Mechanical ambient conditions Operation Transport (in product packaging) Vibration stressing 10 - 58 Hz: 0.15 mm 58 - 200 Hz: 2g 3M6 according to EN 60721-3-3 2 - 9 Hz: 3.1 mm 9 - 200 Hz: 1g 2M2 according to EN 60721-3-2 Shock stressing 5g, 30 ms, 18 shocks 3M4 per EN 60721-3-3 (limitation by relay on HGA) 30g, 6 ms 18 shocks 2M2 per EN 60721-3-2 Climatic environmental conditions Cooling By natural convection Condensation, spraying water and icing Air inlet Applicable standards Climate class Temperature limits Temperature change Limits for relative humidity Permissible change in the relative air humidity Not permitted Without caustic gases, dusts and oils Operation Storage/shipping (in transport packaging) EN 60721-3-3 EN 60721-3-1 / -3-2 3K5 0 ... 45 C (at front) 0 ... 55 C (at rear) -20 ... 60 C Max. 10 K/h Max. 18 K/h 5 ... 80% 10 ... 95% max. 0.1% /min *) when using a Profibus adapter Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 801 Machine Pushbutton Panel: MPP 483 31.9 Technical specifications 31.9.2 Input/output interface of individual wiring Button contact maker Table 31-38 Contacts with floating outputs S1 to S4; S7 to S10 (NC contact or NO contact) AC DC Ue 50 V 50 V Rated operating current Ie 2A Rated operating current at 24V Ie Min. rated operating current at 5 V Imin Rated insulation voltage 2A 1 mA Volume resistance < 20 m Switching capacity max. operating current for reference potential, roots, individual contacts 10 le 1.1 le 8A 8A AC DC 300 V 300 V Selector switch Table 31-39 Contacts with floating outputs WS1 / 9-11, 13, 15 Rated operating voltage Ue Switching capacity with resistive load 10 A Switching capacity with inductive load >2 A Switching capacity at 24V with resistive load 10 A Switching capacity at 24V with inductive load 6A Rated values for arc-free switching at 24 V 0.3 A 0.22 A Emergency stop button S13 SR mushroom-head button S61 Selector switch S11 Table 31-40 Contacts with floating outputs Usage category (EN 60947-5-1) AC DC Ue 24 V 24 V AC-12 le 10 A 6A Rated operating voltage Switching capacity Min. rated operating current at 5 V AC-15 le DC-12 le 10 A DC-13 le 3A Imin 1 mA For further parameters, see pushbutton and indicator light SIGNUM 3SB3 802 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Machine Pushbutton Panel: MPP 483 31.9 Technical specifications Inputs The inputs are opto-decoupled. Table 31-41 Extension keys S51 ... S62, S14, S15 emergency stop input S13 state Voltage switched Amount H signal L signal 15 Length of cable Input characteristics curve following IEC61131, type 1 Nominal value + 24V DC Signal level +15 V to +30 V Nominal value 0 V or open Signal level -3 V to +5 V In a group of Comment ) 1 max. 50 m AWG 16 Encoder power supply 18.5 V to 30 V LED outputs Table 31-42 LED-S51 ... LED S61 LED-S14 ... LED-S15 LED emergency stop HS13 state Amount Voltage switched Current switched 14 Load voltage 2P24 20.4 V ... 28.8 V Nominal value +24V DC 0.5 A H signal Signal level min. Ue - 0.16V max. 0.7A / output L signal Max. signal level 2V (idling) 0.3 mA Short-circuit protection yes Typ. activation threshold 1.1 A Eff. short circuit current 0.5 A Galvanic isolation no In a group of 1 Output total current Length of cable max. 3 A max. 50 m AWG 16 Handheld unit connection XS12 The currents depend on the connected handheld unit. The internal connecting cables of the handheld unit connection HT 6 are designed for a rated voltage of 24V DC and 2 A. The internal connecting cables of the handheld unit connection HT 8 are designed for a rated voltage of 24V DC and 0.5 A. Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 803 Machine Pushbutton Panel: MPP 483 31.10 Spare parts 31.10 Spare parts Contact your Siemens service center to order replacement parts. 804 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Machine Pushbutton Panel: MPP 483 31.11 Accessories 31.11 Accessories 31.11.1 Overview Numerous accessories are available for the MPP 483. Contact your Siemens service center to order accessories. 31.11.2 Labeling the slide-in labels NC Stop NC Start Machine on Initial state Start Machine off Stop after end of cycle Immediate Stop Acknowledge fault Next- Axes Lock/release protective doors 50 30 70 80 10 90 6 100 110 2 120 0 % Figure 31-31 MPP 483 pushbutton panel The figure shows the MPP 483 in the standard version. The same slide-in labels can be used for the MPP 483H and the MPP 483A. You can create your own slide-in labels in order to change the key labels. A printable blank film (DIN A4) is supplied with the panel for this purpose. A spare parts kit containing three blank films is also available (Item no.: A5E00414151). Figure 31-32 Blank film for MCP 483 film keyboard 1) Print direction Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 805 Machine Pushbutton Panel: MPP 483 31.11 Accessories Files for printing the blank film 7H[W 7H[W 7H[W 7H[W 7H[W 7H[W 7H[W 7H[W 76 7H[W 76 The DOConCD / Catalog NC 61 (CD enclosed) contains two files for printing the blank films: Template_MPP483.doc [assignment for standard variants of MPP 483 - (A)] SymbolsMPP483.doc [key symbols as Word file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igure 31-33 Template_MPP483.doc (B) Table 31-43 Symbols_MPP483.doc ; < = < < = = & & 9. (% (6 (5 ,2 60 1& 6WDUW 1& 6WRS 806 ; 66 68 ; 1H[W $[HV Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Machine Pushbutton Panel: MPP 483 31.11 Accessories Preparing standard slide-in labels with the aid of the file: "Template_MPP483.doc" (A) 1. Open the file "Template_MPP483.doc" in MS Word. The key symbols are arranged in a table on the position that corresponds to their location on the keyboard. The borders visible in the table are not printed. 2. Place the blank film in the printing direction in the slot of your laser printer (see figure: "Blank film for MPP 483 membrane keyboard"). 3. Select "film" as the printable medium if your printer allows this setting. 4. Start the printing process using MS Word. Note Make a test print on paper before you print on the film. Allow the film to cool after printing so that the ink can dry. 5. Cut the slide-in labels out of the film along the edges (outer lines). 6. Round off the corners of the labeling strips approx. 1.5 mm to facilitate insertion. 7. Slide in the printed slide-in label. 8. Shorten the labeling strip for the long-stroke keys for MPP 483 and MPP 483A, because only the first four text fields of the strips TS1 and TS2 are needed. Preparing specific slide-in labels with the aid of the file: "Symbole_MPP483.doc" (B) 1. Open both the "Symbole_MPP483.doc" file and the"Template_MPP483.doc" file. 2. Copy the desired key symbol from the file "Symbole_MPP483.doc". 3. Position the cursor in the desired field of the template (A), add the symbol and adjust its size accordingly by dragging it by the gripping points. 4. To move a symbol to a different position, - select the symbol, - cut it out and - add it into the desired table cell. 5. If all the symbols are positioned as desired, follow the instructions in Section: "Preparing standard slide-in labels with the aid of the file: "Template_MPP483.doc" as of point 2. Note Input of characters/text instead of symbols Use the "Arial" font to format text. This font is comparable to the "Univers S57" font, used by Siemens for the key labeling. Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 807 Machine Pushbutton Panel: MPP 483 31.11 Accessories Creating your own symbols Drawing in a vector program (e.g. Designer, Freehand, CorelDraw): - Draw a square 15 x 15 mm without frames, filled with the color white. - Place the graphic in the center of this square. - Group the graphic and square together and add this group to the file "Template_MPP483.doc". Drawing in an image editing program (e.g. Photoshop, Picture Publisher, Paint) - Create a square area (e.g. 100 x 100 pixels) filled with the color white. - Draw the graphic or add an image in the center of this square. - Copy the graphic and square and add them both to the file "Template_MPP483.doc". 808 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Machine Pushbutton Panel: MPP 483 31.11 Accessories 31.11.3 Handwheel connection 3LQ /HQJWKsDFFRUGLQJWROHQJWKFRGH s /DEHOLQJ 0/)%OHQJWKLQP PDQXIDFWXUHU PRQWK\HDURISURGXFWLRQ 6KLHOG *1 *( 25 57 %/ 9, %5 6: 3 0 $B+: ;$B+: %B+: ;%B+: 3 0 *1 <( 2* 5' %8 97 %1 %. 6KLHOG 6KLHOG +RXVLQJ ([SODQDWLRQ 6LJQDOFRQQHFWRU 6LJQDOFDEOH 3LQHQGFRQQHFWRULQVXODWHG )OH[LEOHFDEOHPP 5LQJHQGFRQQHFWRULQVXODWHG Figure 31-34 Connecting cable for COM board handwheel Order no.: 6FX8002-2CP00-1xxx (xx is the length code: A = 0, B = 1 etc.) 'LPHQVLRQVLQPP 3LQ 1 $B+: ;$B+: %B+: ;%B+: 6KLHOG +RXVLQJ ([SODQDWLRQ 6LJQDOFRQQHFWRU 6LJQDOFDEOH 6LJQDOFRQQHFWRU0&673+2(1,; Figure 31-35 Connecting cable for HHU handwheel Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 809 Machine Pushbutton Panel: MPP 483 31.11 Accessories 31.11.4 Retrofit control elements You can retrofit the following control elements: Function Upper section actuator / accessories Lower section contact block / signaling lamp Mounting location Usage Signaling lamp Illuminated nipple 28 mm RXJN-GB (yellow) RXJN-GN (green) RXJN-RT (red) RXJN-BL (blue) RXJN-KL (crystal clear) RXJN-WS (white) AL5 lamp fixture with spot LED S1 ... S4 S7 ... S10 Lamp Button Pushbutton 28 mm RXJN-GB (yellow) RXJN-GN (green) RXJN-RT (red) RXJN-BL (blue) RXJN-KL (crystal clear) RXJN-GWS (black) Button contact maker AT2 S1 ... S4 S7 ... S10 For S1 1O internal 2S + 1O ext. For S2 ... S4, S7 ... S10 1O internal, 1S + 1O ext. Illuminated key with fixture for T5.5K Pushbutton 28 mm RXJN-GB (yellow) RXJN-GN (green) RXJN-RT (red) RXJN-BL (blue) RXJN-KL (crystal clear) Illuminated button contact maker ATL2 with spot LED S1 ... S4 S7 ... S10 For S1 1O internal 2S + 1O ext. For S2 ... S4, S7 ... S10 1O internal, 1S + 1O ext. L5.5K28UW (white) S1 ... S4 S7 ... S10 Spot LED Keyswitch switching angle of 90, 2 positions Safety lock cylinder 28 Button contact maker AT2 mm RXJSSA 15 E key can be removed when in both positions S1 ... S4 S7 ... S10 Keys / position selector RX-JEWEL 22.3 mm Schlegel catalog Button contact maker AT2 S1 ... S4 S7 ... S10 Raised keys 6FC5247-0AA410AA0 2 RTAO pushbuttons with plunger elongation 2 AT2 special version S1 ... S4 S7 ... S10 Dummy plug BVR22 Selector switch Knob FS1 Spindle / feed rate rapid traverse override Emergency stop Control and signaling devices 810 For S1 1O internal 2S + 1O ext. For S2 ... S4, S7 ... S10 1O internal, 1S + 1O ext. S1 ... S4 S7 ... S10 WS1 MLFB 6FC5247-0AF12-1AA0 6FC5247-0AF13-1AA0 6FC5247-0AF14-1AA0 Conversion to knob switch WS3 WS2 WS5 Switching element: 2 NC contacts 3SB3400-0E S13 Extension NC contact EMERGENCY STOP Protective shroud for front plate mounting 3SB3921-0AK S13 Protection against coming loose by accident 3SB3 following selection from NSK catalog at A&D CD S51 ... S62 S14, S15 all elements marked with LE Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Machine Pushbutton Panel: MPP 483 31.11 Accessories Function Upper section actuator / accessories Lower section contact block / signaling lamp Mounting location Usage Serial port EKS-A-ISX-G01-ST09/03 S14 Euchner identification system EKS PROFIBUS DP interface USB interface EKS-A-IDX-G01-ST09/03 EKS-A-IUX-G01-ST01 Note When assigning the colors for keys and pilot lamps to the corresponding functionality, observe the standard EN 60204 Part1 or VDE 0113 Part1, section "Pushbuttons/Colors." Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 811 Machine Pushbutton Panel: MPP 483 31.12 Service information 31.12 Service information Changing the lamps on illuminated keys 1. Use a screwdriver to pull the key cap forward and off. 2. Use lamp remover LZ5 to lever out the key carrier. 3. Change the lamp using service tool LZ5 or a suitable insulating tube 4. Reinstall the key carrier and key cap in reverse order. Lamp remover LZ5 is not a SIEMENS product. It can be obtained from the Schlegel company. Georg Schlegel GmbH & Co. KG Am Kapellenweg Phone.: 0 73 71 / 502-0 88525 Durmentingen Fax: 0 73 71 / 502 49 Germany E-mail: info@schlegel.biz Changing the lamps on pilot lamps 1. Use a screwdriver to pull the calotte and name bearing element forward and off. 2. Change the lamp using the lamp remover of service tool LZ5 or a suitable insulating tube 3. Reinstall the calotte and name bearing element. NOTICE When using LEDs, make sure that they are connected with the correct polarity (see Fig.: "Mounting position of LEDs" in section: "Mounting") Mounting additional control elements 1. If necessary, unscrew the blank plug. 2. Place the contact maker on the socket and insert the lamp if required. 3. Insert pushbutton through front panel and screw on cap nut (by several turns). 4. Press pushbutton on contact maker. Note the position of the twist protection device! 5. Screw down cap nut (tightening torque 0.8 Nm). 812 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Machine Pushbutton Panel: MPP 483 31.12 Service information Insert slide-in labels 1. Create the slide-in label (see Section: "Accessories" "Labeling the slide-in labels"). 2. Pull protective films off slide-in slot. 3. Guide in the slide-in labels (labeling facing operator side). 4. Align text in window. Note Slide in the labels when the MPP 483 operator panel front is not yet installed. Changing a contact maker 1. Loosen cap nut off pushbutton until just in front of contact maker. 2. Pull the pushbutton and the contact maker approximately 3 mm out of the fixture (the locating pin of the pushbutton must be freed). 3. Remove the LED. 4. Change the contact element, remove defective contact maker from fixture and press new contact maker onto fixture. 5. Insert pushbutton into aperture and partially screw on cap nut. 6. Press pushbutton on contact maker until it snaps in. Note the position of the snap nose! 7. Screw down cap nut (tightening torque 0.8 Nm). Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 813 Machine Pushbutton Panel: MPP 483 31.12 Service information 814 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 32 Pushbutton panel: PP 012 32.1 Description 32.1.1 Overview Machine control panel for machine tools in conjunction with the control systems 810D, 840D, S7-300 and FM-NC. &RQWUROOHU'' 6$6RU0&8 2SHUDWRU3DQHO 1&&38 .H\ ERDUG FRQ WUROOHU &20 03, &20 23,03, )%*LQSXW )%*GLUHFW RXWSXW NH\V )%*335 EDVLF PRGXOH 3&%GLVWULEXWRU 3XVKEXWWRQ 3DQHO 33+ 3/& &RQQHFWLRQ IRU' &RQQHFWLRQIRU &38;<RU0&8 ,QWHUIDFHV ,QGLYLGXDOZLULQJ +7 ++8 33H[SDQVLRQ Figure 32-1 3URJUDPPLQJGHYLFH Pushbutton panel PP 012 in example configuration Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 815 Pushbutton panel: PP 012 32.1 Description Structure The PP 012 consists of the basic module the distributor the direct keys the frontplate. The basic module can be equipped with a handheld unit connection and/or additional inputs/outputs as options. Communication The distributor module is connected to the control system via the MPI interface. Flexibility 10 control devices can be installed, depending on the current requirements 4-stage mode selector switch A programming device can be connected to the front panel, COM connection Selector switch for speed/rapid traverse and feedrate override Handheld unit connection with jumpering pushbutton 16 inputs for direct keys PCB_IO as an option, scanning up to 14 individual keys or 120 keys in a matrix, control of a maximum of 16 lamps 32.1.2 Interfaces and monitoring MPI/OPI interface The PP 012 is connected to the appropriate control system via the MPI/OPI interface. DIP switches allow you to select a parameter set from three possible variants (see Section: "Initialization", tables under "communication parameters" and "global data table"). PU interface Data and control signals correspond to the OPI. Handheld programming devices require an external 24V power supply for operation. The interface is not supplied with an external 5V potential (P5.EXT). 816 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Pushbutton panel: PP 012 32.1 Description COM interface Carries the signals from the COM interface of the operator panel to the PP 012. Inputs/outputs in the control system 60 inputs and 26 outputs are assigned functions by the PP 012. The transmission is word by word. Voltage supply 24V input voltage Monitoring PP 012 has monitoring LEDs for service and start-up: Voltage monitoring (POWER ON > 4.7 V) Temperature monitoring (activate > 60 C; shutdown < 55 3 C) OPI LED flashes during data transfer Bus request Repeater Segment 1 Bus request Repeater Segment 2 32.1.3 Operator panel front interface Inputs for customer-specific wiring The printed circuit board distributor has three isolated inputs. EMERGENCY STOP chain When the EMER STOP button is activated, the EMERGENCY STOP chain will ensure personal safety and protect the machine in hazardous situations. The EMERGENCY STOP chain is also active when the handheld units are removed. The Emergency Stop button can be jumpered on the handheld unit by pressing S11 when the handheld unit is plugged/removed. This is necessary to prevent the EMERGENCY STOP chain from being interrupted. Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 817 Pushbutton panel: PP 012 32.1 Description Note To effectively deal with a possible malfunction of the WS11 override selector switch (e.g. jamming), the user PLC program must generate EMERGENCY STOP when a monitoring time (approximately 5 min) expires (see Fig in section: "Handheld unit connection" "Enabling function, 2-channel" and Figure "Button S11 with PLC function" in Section: "Circuits and wiring"). Actuation elements The actuating elements S1 to S4, S7 to S10, S14 and S15 are connected to the control system via the MPI/OPI. In addition, they have isolated contacts (common root) for custom-made wiring. Lamps The lamps HS1 to HS4, HS7 to HS10, HS14 and HS15 are connected to the control system via MPI/OPI. Alternatively, they can also be controlled from external non-isolated contacts. EMER STOP switch and mode selector switch Are also connected to the control system via MPI/OPI and have isolated contacts for custom-made wiring. 32.1.4 Function blocks PP 012 Interface/CPU/monitoring Distributor with repeater Handheld unit connection XS12 I/O connection X20, X21 Direct control key connection X19 Interconnecting cable COM X26 4-stage mode selector switch WS1 Feed override WS2 Speed/rapid traverse override WS3 818 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Pushbutton panel: PP 012 32.1 Description Max. 12 control devices, one of them an Emergency Stop button S13 and a jumper button S11 Max. 10 pilot lamps that can be controlled either from PLC or externally Inputs for configuring global data (GD) (DIP switches) Isolated operator panel front interface X15 with additional programming device interface X16 DIP switches for generating S16, S17, S18 (baud rate, node address) Power Supply PCB input/output 16 isolated outputs for controlling lamps, four of them optional (key matrix option) 14 isolated inputs for scanning individual keys/switches Key matrix option - up to 120 keys can be scanned Short-circuit-proof 24V output for external keys Matrix keys momentary-contact PCB direct keys 16 isolated inputs for scanning the direct keys from the operator panel. Operator Components Manual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igure 32-2 %ORFNV6+6 6 Pushbutton panel: PP 012 32.1 Description Block diagrams (PHUJHQF\6WRSFLUFXLW (PHUJHQF\6WRSFLUFXLW Block diagram of PP 012 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 %3 0 : : : : : : : : : : : : 5 5 5 %ORFN( %ORFN( %ORFN( %ORFN( %ORFN( %ORFN( %ORFN( %ORFN( %ORFN( %ORFN( %ORFN( %ORFN( 5 5 5 5 %ORFN( 3% ( ( ( ( ( ( ( ( ( ( ( ( ( ( /RFNZLWK DXWKRUL]DWLRQNH\VZLWFK 287B(1 9&& *1' ' *1' :'5 %ORFN +6+6 %ORFN +6+6 %ORFN +6+6 %ORFN +6+6 +6 +6 +6 +6 +6 +6 +6 +6 +6 +6 +6 +6 +6 +6 +6 +6 821 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 5 0 %ORFN( %ORFN( 5 ( 0 3 Block diagram of PCB expansion card 12E/12A Figure 32-3 ; ; ; 2SWLRQ .H\0DWUL[ ; ; ; ; 2XWSXWSRZHUVZLWFK 9$ ) $ ) $ 0 5 3B ,$ ; ; ; ; ; ; ; QHYH Pushbutton panel: PP 012 32.1 Description 0HPRU\ Pushbutton panel: PP 012 32.1 Description ; 0H[W %ORFN) %ORFN) %ORFN) %ORFN) %ORFN) %ORFN) %ORFN) %ORFN) %ORFN) %ORFN) %ORFN) %ORFN) %ORFN) %ORFN) ) ) ) ) ) ) ) ) ) ) ) ) ) ) ) 822 %ORFN) %ORFN) ) Figure 32-4 9&& *1' ; Block diagram of PCB direct keys PP 012 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Pushbutton panel: PP 012 32.2 Operator controls and indicators 32.2 Operator controls and indicators 32.2.1 View Arrangement of the control elements S1 HS1 LOGO S2 HS2 S3 HS3 S4 HS4 S14 HS14 Power S11 S7 HS7 XS12 1 2 0 3 (1) EMERGENCY STOP key (2) WS1 Selector switch (3) S11 Jump key (4) XS12 Connection for handheld units (5) X16 PG connection (7) S9 HS9 S10 HS10 S15 HS15 90 100 60 110 0 120 20 10 6 40 60 70 2 0 80 90 100 110 120 S13 (6) S8 HS8 80 70 Key-operated authorization switch (on request) X26 COM connection (9) WS2 Feedrate override (10) WS3 Speed/rapid override (8) Variably fitted control devices Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 823 Pushbutton panel: PP 012 32.2 Operator controls and indicators 32.2.2 Description EMERGENCY STOP key Emergency stop button Press the red button in emergencies when people are at risk, there is the danger of machines or the workpiece being damaged. As a rule, when operating the EMERGENCY STOP button, all drives are brought to a standstill with max. braking torque. Turn the EMERGENCY STOP button counterclockwise to unlatch it. Machine manufacturer For other reactions to the EMERGENCY STOP: refer to the machine tool manufacturer's instructions Power Displays power supply, lights green when controller operating voltage > 4.7 V Selector switch 2-way, 4 stages, 60 switching angle Centrally mounted with front ring Designed as keyswitch CG4-1A251-600 *FS1 V750D/2J Can be changed by customer as knob switch variant FS1 Key can be removed in all positions Note When used as a mode selector switch, the keyswitch should be used according to Guideline 89/392/EEC. Variably fitted actuating elements In slots S1 to S4, S7 to S10, S14 and S15, control devices can be installed as per the table in Section: "Configuration" "Project-specific components". Function and contacts see "block diagram PP 012" in Section: "Description" "Function Blocks". Pushbutton S11 (designed as a jumper button) is provided with a sealing cap. This prevents the pushbutton from being locked easily. To effectively deal with a possible malfunction of the WS11 override selector switch (e.g. jamming), the user PLC program must generate EMERGENCY STOP when a monitoring time (approximately 5 min) expires (see Fig in section: "Handheld unit connection" "Enabling function, 2-channel" and Figure "Button S11 with PLC function" in Section: "Circuits and wiring"). 824 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Pushbutton panel: PP 012 32.2 Operator controls and indicators 32.2.3 Labeling Device front 80 90 100 70 Power 60 110 WS3 120 0 WS1 PGSS COM 20 10 6 2 40 60 70 WS2 0 80 90 100 110 120 /DEHOLQJDUHDVFDQEHGHVLJQHGXVLQJVOLGHLQODEHOV Figure 32-5 Control panel (example) Dimensions for labeling the slide-in labels The following drawing is intended purely as an example; multiple slide-in labels can also be arranged. 'LPHQVLRQVIRUODEHOLQJWKHVOLGHLQXVHUODEHOV YDULDEOHVZLWFKLQJHOHPHQWV6WR6 &RUQHUVURXQGHG5 RUFKDPIHUHG[GHJUHHV 6OLGHLQGLUHFWLRQ :LQGRZDUHDERUGHULQJ PXVWQRWEHSULQWHG &XWWLQJHGJHERUGHULQJ PXVWEHSULQWHG 'LPHQVLRQVIRUODEHOLQJWKHVOLGHLQXVHUODEHOV YDULDEOHVZLWFKLQJHOHPHQWV6WR6 6OLGHLQGLUHFWLRQ Figure 32-6 Dimensions for texts on the slide-in labels Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 825 Pushbutton panel: PP 012 32.2 Operator controls and indicators Device rear side 6 3 +5% +5% +5$ +5$ 6 6 ; 2SWLRQ 6 6 ; ; +6 6 6 6 6 ; 6 :6 6 +6 6 +6 6 +6 6 +6 6 +6 6 +6 6 +6 6 +6 6 +6 6 +6 :6 :6 ; 6 6 +6 6 6 6 6 3 2SWLRQ 6 ; +6 +6 ; +6 ; +6 +6 +6 %RDUG,1287387 6 6 +6 6 6 +:)$8/7 !- 6$6 6$6 %86 5HTXHVW Figure 32-7 826 6 +6 ; $7 6 ' 6 6 6 2Q 2II Labeling on rear of device Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Pushbutton panel: PP 012 32.3 Interfaces 32.3 Interfaces 32.3.1 Overview $ ( 6 + :6 6 % ; ; ; ; 'LVW / ULEX ERD WLRQ UG ; ) & ; ; ; ;6 ; &38PDLQERDUG ; ; ; ; ; ; ; 1 ; ; 3&%B,2 0 & ; ; ; ; & . ; 'LUHFWFRQWURONH\ ; ; * ( ; ' + + + + ;; ; 666 Figure 32-8 Device rear side Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 827 Pushbutton panel: PP 012 32.3 Interfaces A S13 EMERGENCY STOP key B WS1 Selector switch C X1 to X4, X6, X10, X11, X22 and X24: D X8 E LED-basic module H1 .... H4 Input/output interface of individual wiring 24 V power supply H1 not used H2 Overtemperature H3 Power On H4 SEND: Status change on protocol transmission F X15 Operator Panel Interface socket: 9-pin Sub-D socket connector, straight G X30 Direct control key connection H S16, S17, S18 DIP switch, see table in Section: "Initialization" "Jumpering" K Connection for equipotential bonding connector via screw connection M5 L LED distributor H1 Bus segment 1 H2 Bus segment 2 X40 ... X43 M (GND ) Connection PCB_IO keyboard matrix/lamps N X44 24 V power supply X45 ...X47 Connection PCB_IO single contacts/lamps NOTICE When using the key-operated authorization switch, the inputs X47 are assigned: 1 ... 4. It cannot be used in this case to scan keys on the extension panel at X47. Signal type O 828 Outputs I Inputs I/O Bi-directional signals V Power supply Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Pushbutton panel: PP 012 32.3 Interfaces Emergency button S3 Key designation: S13 Key type: Mushroom turn-to-set button 3SB3000-1HA20 with holder 3SB3000-1HA20 and 1x NO contact 3SB34000B (internal use) max. 4 x NC contacts Table 32-1 Pin Switching element: NC contact 3SB3400-0E Signal 1 OE_S13.x 2 BZ_S13.x Type I/O Signal name Function NC contact S13.x EMERGENCY STOP Reference potential S13.x Selector switch interface WS1 Switch designation: WS1 Switch type: CG4-1 A251-600 FS1 V750 D/2J (keyswitch) Table 32-2 Pin 32.3.2 Selector switch interface Signal 11 ER 15 ES 10 BZ_WS 13 Single mode 9 Linked mode Type Signal name Mode I/O Switch position Function 4 3 Reference signal Mode 2 1 PP 012 individual wiring NOTICE When PLC signals are linked with signals of the individual wiring, note that the signal change of the individual contacts may take place at different moments. Simultaneously opening and closing the contacts of a key within the actuating travel is not possible. Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 829 Pushbutton panel: PP 012 32.3 Interfaces Connector X1 Connector X1: Direction -; Signaling lamp HS 14 Type: 4-pin Mini-Combicon MC 1.5/4-G-5.08 Table 32-3 Pin Connector X1 Signal 1 BZ_S14 2 S_S14.1 3 S_S14.2 4 HS 14 Type Signal name Function Reference potential NO contact S 14 I/O I NO contact S14.1 - direction NO contact S14.2 - direction Signaling lamp HS 14 Connector X2 Connector X2: Signaling lamps HS7 to HS10 Type: 4-pin Mini-Combicon MC 1.5/4-G-5.08 Table 32-4 Connector X2 Pin Signal 1 HS7 2 HS8 3 HS9 4 HS10 Type Signal name Function Pilot lamp HS7 I Pilot lamp HS8 All inputs "High" active Pilot lamp HS9 Pilot lamp HS10 Connector X3 Connector X3: Contacts S7 to S10 Connector type: 12-pin Mini-Combicon MC 1.5/12-G-5.08 Table 32-5 Connector X3 Pin Type Signal name 1 OE_S7 NC contact S7 2 OE_S8 NC contact S8 3 OE_S9 NC contact S9 4 OE_S10 NC contact S10 10 BZOE_S7-10 Reference potential NC contacts S7-10 5 S_S7 6 S_S8 7 S_S9 NO contact S9 8 S_S10 NO contact S10 9 BZS_S7-10 Reference potential NO contacts S7-10 11 12 830 Signal 2P24 I/O V Function NO contact S7 NO contact S8 +24 V potential Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Pushbutton panel: PP 012 32.3 Interfaces Connector X4 Connector X4: Euchner connection Connector type: 12-pin Mini-Combicon MC 1.5/12-G-5.08 Table 32-6 Connector X4 Pin Signal Type Signal name Connection XS12 pin 1 KEY 0 2 KEY 1 3 KEY 2 4 BZ_KEY 5 1M24 6 EMERGENCY STOP 2.2 7 EMERGENCY STOP 2.1 8 AUFR_RICHT 9 ZUST_TA 10 ZS1/ZS1.1 *) 11 ZS2/ZS2.1 *) 14 12 ZS Common / ZS 2.2 *) 6 Function Input 1 I Input 2 Input 3 11 Reference spot. KEY0...2 V Ground 24V EMER OFF CIRCUIT 2 12 6 1 I/O Direction call 6 Enabling button 6 (via S11) 3 6 ; 5 Connector X6 X6 Connector: Direction +; signaling lamp HS15 Connector type: 4-pin Mini-Combicon MC 1.5/4-G-5,08 Table 32-7 Connector X6 Pin 1 Signal Type BZ_S15 2 S_S15.1 3 S_S15.2 4 HS 15 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Signal name Function Reference potential NO contact S15 I/O NO contact S15.1 + direction NO contact S15.2 + direction I Singaling lamp HS 15 831 Pushbutton panel: PP 012 32.3 Interfaces Connectors X10/X11 Connectors X10/X11: Contacts S1 to S6; signaling lamps HS1 to HS6 Connector type X10: 4-pin Mini-Combicon MC 1.5/4-G-5,08 Connector type X11: 12-pin Mini-Combicon MC 1.5/12-G-5,08 Table 32-8 Connecto rs X10 X11 Connectors X10/X11 Pin Signal Type Signal name 1 OE_S2 2 OE_S1 3 BZOE_S1-4 4 BZS_S1-S6 Reference potential NO contact S1 S6 1 OE_S4 NC contact S4 2 OE_S3 NC contact S3 3 S_S4 NO contact S4 4 S_S3 5 S_S2 6 S_S1.1 NO contact S1.1 7 BZS_S1.2 Reference potential NO contact S1.2 8 S_S1.2 NO contact S1.2 9 HS 4 Pilot lamp HS4 10 HS 3 11 HS 2 12 HS 1 Function NC contact S2 I/O NC contact S1 Reference potential NC contact S1 S4 NO contact S3 I/O NO contact S2 Pilot lamp HS3 I All inputs "High" active Pilot lamp HS2 Pilot lamp HS1 Connector X22 Connector X22: Hand wheel Connector type: 4-pin Mini-Combicon MC 1.5/4-G-5,08 Table 32-9 Connector X22 Pin 832 Signal Type Signal name 1 HR_A Handwheel track A 2 XHR_A Handwheel track A negated 3 HR_B 4 XHR_B O Handwheel track B Handwheel track B negated Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Pushbutton panel: PP 012 32.3 Interfaces Connector X24 Connector X24: EMERGENCY STOP circuit 1 Connector type: 4-pin Mini-Combicon MC 1.5/4-G-5,08 Table 32-10 Connector X24 Pin Signal Type 1 2P24 2 OE_S11 / ZS2.2 *) V Signal name + 24 V NC contact S11 3 EMERGENCY_STOP 1.1 4 EMERGENCY_STOP 1.2 Function 6 ; 6 EMER OFF CIRCUIT 1 Power supply interface X8 Connector X8: Power Supply Connector type: 3-pin print terminal block MSTBA 2.5/3-G-5.08 Pin assignment: see section: "Connection conditions" "Secondary electrical conditions" Operator panel front interface (MPI) X15 Connector X15: Operator panel front interface (MPI) Connector type: 9-pin Sub-D socket connector, screw locking UNC4/40 NOTICE Use MPI bus connector 6FX2003-0AA02! Max. cable length 200 m at 1.5 Mbaud Table 32-11 Operator panel front interface (MPI) X15 Pin Signal Type Signal name 1 N.C. Unassigned 2 N.C. Unassigned 3 RS I/O RS-485 data 4 ORTSAS O Output Request to Send, user interface 5 GND_EXT 6 VCC_EXT 7 N.C. 8 XRS 9 IRTSPG Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 V 5 V external ground 5 V external potential Unassigned I/O RS-485 data In Request to Send PG 833 Pushbutton panel: PP 012 32.3 Interfaces Programming device interface (PD) X16 Connector X16: Programming device interface (PD) Connector type: 9-pin Sub-D socket connector, screw locking UNC4/40 Max. cable length 5m Table 32-12 Connector X16 Pin Signal Type Signal name 1 N.C. 2 3M24 3 RS I/O RS-485 data 4 ORTSAS O Output Request to Send, user interface GND_EXT V 5 6/7 N.C. 8 XRS 9 IRTSPG Unassigned V 24 V reference potential 5 V external ground Unassigned I/O RS-485 data In Request to Send PG The power supply potential P24 is not provided by PP 012. An external 24 V power voltage supply enables handheld programming devices 702 and 705. External terminals with a separate 5V power supply cannot be operated (fiber-optic technology). Serial interface RS-232-C (COM) X26 834 Connector X26: Serial interface (RS 232 C) Connector type: 9-pin Sub-D socket connector, straight, screw locking UNC4/40 Max. cable length 25 m Pin assignment: see section: "Connection conditions" "Secondary electrical conditions" Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Pushbutton panel: PP 012 32.3 Interfaces Handheld device interface XS12 Connector: Handheld device interface XS 12 Connector type: Euchner flanged connector RC-17S1NM2H3PW coding Y (315) Max. cable length 50 m Table 32-13 Handheld device interface XS12 Pin Signal enabling function 1 EMERGENCY_STOP 2.1 2 MPI_A 3 3M24 4 3P24 5 ZS1.1 Type I/O V Signal name Function Emergency Stop NC contact 2.1 EMERGENCY STOP RS-485 data MPI Ground 24V Power supply + 24 V Agreement button Enabling function 6 ZS2.2 Call enable key 7 HR_B Handwheel B 8 HR_A Handwheel A 9 EMERGENCY STOP 1.2 Emergency Stop NC contact 1.2 10 EMERGENCY STOP 1.1 Emergency Stop NC contact 1.1 EMERGENCY STOP 11 KEY2 Key scanning No.3 Bridge jump plug 12 EMERGENCY STOP 2.2 Emergency Stop NC contact 2.2 EMERGENCY STOP 13 MPI_B RS-485 data MPI 14 ZS2.1 Agreement button Enabling function 15 HR_XA Handwheel A negated Hand wheel 16 ZS1.2 NC / enabling button Not assigned/ enabling function 17 HR_XB Handwheel B negated Hand wheel Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 I I/O Handwheel 835 Pushbutton panel: PP 012 32.3 Interfaces Printed circuit board direct keys X30 Connector X30: Printed circuit board Direct keys Connector type: Flat ribbon connector, plug connector, with protective shroud 20-pin 2-row with interlock Table 32-14 Printed circuit board Direct keys Pin Signal Type Signal name 1 F1 Direct key 1 2 F2 DirectKey 3 F3 Direct key 3 4 F4 Direct key 4 5 F5 Direct key 5 6 F6 Direct key 6 7 F7 8 F8 9 F9 Direct key 9 10 F10 Direct key 10 11 F11 Direct key 11 12 F12 Direct key 12 13 F13 Direct key 13 14 F14 Direct key 14 15 F15 Direct key 15 I Direct key 7 Direct key 8 F16 Direct key 16 17 / 18 P5_TAC 5 V keyboard controller 19 / 20 M_TAC 16 V Ground of keyboard controller The direct key module serves to connect the 16 direct keys of the operator panel. 836 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Pushbutton panel: PP 012 32.3 Interfaces 32.3.3 Individual wiring PCB input/output Connector X40 Type: 4-pole, Combicon base casing MC 1.5/4-G-3.81 Table 32-15 Printed circuit board input/output Pin Signal Type Signal name 1 P24_5 2 M24 V 24V potential 3 E55/W8 I Input key 55/matrix row 8 4 N.C. - Not assigned Ground 24V Connector X41 Type: 8-pole, Combicon base casing MC 1.5/8-G-3.81 Table 32-16 Printed circuit board input/output X41 Pin Signal Type Signal name 1 E52/W1 Input key 52/matrix row 1 2 E53/W2 Input key 53/matrix row 2 3 E54/W4 4 E55/W8 Input key 55/matrix row 8 5 HS24 Connection of lamp HS24 6 HS25 7 HS26 8 HS27 I Input key 54/matrix row 4 Connection of lamp HS25 O Connection of lamp HS26 Connection of lamp HS27 Connector X42 Type: 8-pole, Combicon base casing MC 1.5/8-G-3.81 Table 32-17 Printed circuit board input/output X42 Pin Signal Type Signal name 1 W3 2 W5 3 W6 4 W7 Matrix row 7 5 HS28 Connection of lamp HS28 6 HS29 7 HS30 8 HS31 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Matrix row 3 Matrix row 5 I Matrix row 6 Connection of lamp HS29 O Connection of lamp HS30 Connection of lamp HS31 837 Pushbutton panel: PP 012 32.3 Interfaces Connector X43 Type: 4-pole, Combicon base casing MC 1.5/4-G-3.81 Table 32-18 Printed circuit board input/output X43 Pin Signal Type Signal name 1 W9 Matrix row 9 2 W10 Matrix row 10 3 W11 4 W12 I Matrix row 11 Matrix row 12 Connector X44 Type: 3-pole print plug-in terminal blocks M Table 32-19 Printed circuit board input/output X44 Pin Signal 1 Shield 2 M24 3 P24 Type I V Signal name Ground Ground 24V 24V potential Connector X45 Type: 4-pole, Combicon base casing MC 1.5/4-G-3.81 Table 32-20 Printed circuit board input/output X45 Pin 838 Signal 1 P24_5 2 M24 3 E12/R1 4 E24/R2 Type V I Signal name 24V potential Ground 24V Input key 12 / matrix line 1 Input key 24 / matrix line 2 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Pushbutton panel: PP 012 32.3 Interfaces Connector X46 Type: 8-pole, Combicon base casing MC 1.5/8-G-3.81 Table 32-21 Printed circuit board inputs/outputs X46 Pin Signal Type Signal name 1 E30/R3 2 E61/R4 Input key 30 / matrix line 3 3 E62/R5 4 E63/R6 Input key 63 / matrix line 6 5 HS16 Connection of lamp HS16 6 HS17 7 HS18 8 HS19 I O Input key 61 / matrix line 4 Input key 62 / matrix line 5 Connection of lamp HS17 Connection of lamp HS18 Connection of lamp HS19 Connector X47 Type: 8-pole, Combicon base casing MC 1.5/8-G-3.81 Table 32-22 Printed circuit board inputs/outputs X47 Pin Signal Type Signal name 1 E14/R7 2 E21/R8 3 E22/R9 4 E23 / R10 Input key 23 / matrix line 10 5 HS20 Connection of lamp HS20 6 HS21 7 HS22 8 HS23 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Input key 14 / matrix line 7 I O Input key 21 / matrix line 8 Input key 22 / matrix line 9 Connection of lamp HS21 Connection of lamp HS22 Connection of lamp HS23 839 Pushbutton panel: PP 012 32.3 Interfaces Connector parts for I/O module Connector PCBIO X40, X43, X45 X41, X42, X46, X47 Connector PCBIO X44 840 Connection Signal MINI COMBICON connector part Grid 3.81 Phoenix item number MC 1.5/4-ST-3.81 Screw 1.5 1803594 FRONT-MC 1.5/4-ST-3.81 Screw 1.5 1850686 FK MCP 1.5/4-ST-3.81 Spring force 1.5 1851067 Casing MCC 1/4-STZ-3.81 Crimp 1852192 Socket connector contact MCC-MT 0.2...0.35 MCC-MT 0.5...1.0 Crimp 0.2 to 0.35 Crimp 0.5 to 1.0 1859988 1859991 MC 1.5/8-ST-3.81 Screw 1.5 1803633 FRONT-MC 1.5/8-ST-3.81 Screw 1.5 1850725 FK MCP 1.5/8-ST-3.81 Spring force 1.5 1851106 Casing MCC 1/8-STZ-3.81 Crimp 1852231 Socket connector contact MCC-MT 0.2...0.35 MCC-MT 0.5...1.0 Crimp 0.2 to 0.35 Crimp 0.5 to 1.0 1859988 1859991 COMBICON connector part Grid 5.08 MSTBA 2.5/3-G-5.08 Connection Screw 2.5 Phoenix item nummer 1779990 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Pushbutton panel: PP 012 32.3 Interfaces 32.3.4 PLC interface Input signals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ll bits identified with DIP-S16/1 are simultaneously switched when S16/1 is actuated. Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 841 Pushbutton panel: PP 012 32.3 Interfaces Output signals 2XWSXWV :RUG /RZ %LW %LW %LW +6 +6 +6 :RUG +LJK +6 +6 +6 +6 +6 +6 +6 +6 +6 +6 +6 +6 +6 +6 +6 +6 ,2 +6 +6 QRWDVVLJQHG QRWDVVLJQHG QRWDVVLJQHG QRWDVVLJQHG :RUG /RZ :RUG +LJK +6 :RUG +LJK +6 2SWLRQ.H\PDWUL[RQ,2 +6 %LW 6LJQDOLQJODPSV :RUG /RZ +6 %LW ,2 :RUG +LJK +6 %LW QRWDVVLJQHG :RUG /RZ %LW %LW 6LJQDOLQJODPSV Legend: 6LJQDOVKLJKDFWLYH 6LJQDOVORZDFWLYH 66 66 6 6 ([+6[ +LJK DFWLYH/RZ DFWLYHVHWWDEOHYLD6 6FORVHG /RZDFWLYH 6RSHQ +LJKDFWLYH ,2RSWLRQDOYLDFOLSRQFDUG+LJKDFWLYH NOTICE When the mode is switched over, "Low" can be output briefly for all signals on selector switch SW1! I.e., all safety-relevant signals are linked such that they are only possible if switch WS1 has a defined position. 842 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Pushbutton panel: PP 012 32.4 Mounting 32.4 Mounting The PP 012 (for dimensions, see dimension drawing) is secured by means of tension jacks (in delivery kit) to the rear of the front plate. Due to the surrounding seal located on the rear side, the frame profile complies with degree of protection IP65 when all 9 tension jacks are fastened. Only IP54 can be achieved for the complete pushbutton panel, however, due to the installation of a keyswitch. If necessary, the tension jacks (9 items) can be supplied as spare parts (Order No. 6FC5 248-0AF13-0AA0). Dimension drawing ,GHQWLILFDWLRQRIDQRGHFRQQHFWLRQ ,QVHUWSRODULW\RI/('LQWRWKHSXVKEXWWRQ RQWKHLQGLFDWHGVLGH Figure 32-9 Dimension drawing of PP 012 Panel cutout $VVHPEO\EDFNJURXQG WRWKLFN 2SHUDWRUSDQHOIURQW $ 7HQVLRQMDFNV $$ % &XWRXWV\PPHWULFDOZLWKRSHUDWRUSDQHOIURQW % $ %% PD[WRUTXH 1P Figure 32-10 Panel cutout for PP 012 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 843 Pushbutton panel: PP 012 32.5 Connectors 32.5 Connectors 32.5.1 PP 012 Connecting the 24V supply The 24V power supply is connected via a 3-pole terminal block (see diagram "Rear side of Device" in Section: "Interfaces") at connector X8 on the rear of the MCP. The equipotential bonding conductor is fastened using an M5 screw and must be linked with the central ground standard part. DANGER The 24V DC power supply must always be grounded and designed as "Protective Extra-Low Voltage" (PELV) - protection through function low voltage with safe isolation! Connection of the MPI connector The PP 012 is connected to the 840D or S7-300 control by means of an MPI bus line. The MPI connector is plugged into X15 on the rear of the PP 012 and fixed with a screw. Individual wiring connection Emergency stop button, selector switch and single contacts are connected according to the required customer-specific links. (Function see diagrams in Section: "Circuits and wiring") Supply voltages for inputs and outputs must always be grounded! Note A key-operated switch CG4-1A251-600 *FS1 V750D/2J must be used when using the actuating element WS1 in the function of a mode selector switch in accordance with the EC guideline 89/392/EEC. 844 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Pushbutton panel: PP 012 32.5 Connectors 32.5.2 Connection for handheld units 32.5.2.1 Terminator and jump button S11 Terminator Whether a terminator or a handheld unit is connected can be determined by querying word 0 bit 2, KEY 2. 'Terminator connected' corresponds to "High" on input KEY2. Jump button S11 Interlocking of axis motion via the PLC Interlocking of the enable key Jumpering of EMERGENCY STOP contacts on the handheld unit Manipulation-proof: Sealing cap prevents accidental actuation of key Jump button, non-latching Initiation of a monitoring time for checking the operability of the EMERGENCY STOP jumpering function Interruption in power supply for handheld unit connection, two-channel variant, when S11 is actuated. WARNING It is the user's responsibility to ensure that the enable key is designed to DIN EN 602041-1, Subsection 9.2.5.8, and, when released or pushed down, stops dangerous movements reliably. When using S11 with the "EMERGENCY STOP" jumper function, in addition to Fig.: "Handheld unit connection ZS (two-channel)" in Section: "Handheld unit connection" "Enabling function two-channel", dangerous movements should be interlocked by the PLC using S11 and time monitoring initiated at the same time. If the signaling contact on S11:31/32 is not properly closed again on expiry of the monitoring time (approximately 5 minutes), then "EMERGENCY STOP" must be generated by the PLC. 32.5.2.2 Functional reliability of EMERGENCY STOP and enabling circuits See diagram in Section: "Handheld unit connection " "Enabling function two-channel" Emergency stop circuits The emergency stop circuit is a two-channel configuration with the following layout: For circuit 1: NC S13X4:6X5:12XS12:12EMERGENCY STOP handheld unitXS12:1X5:1X4:7 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 845 Pushbutton panel: PP 012 32.5 Connectors For circuit 2: NC S13X24:6X5:9XS12:9EMERGENCY STOP handheld unitXS12:10X5:10X24:3 To avoid interruption of the EMERGENCY STOP circuits on changeover between the handheld unit and the terminator at XS12, the EMERGENCY STOP contacts of the handheld unit can be jumpered via S11. Contact S11:13/14 jumpers via X23:1/2 the EMERGENCY STOP contact XS12:1/12 of the handheld unit in circuit 1, Contact S11:43/44 jumpers via X23:5/6 the EMERGENCY STOP contact XS12:9/10 of the handheld unit in circuit 2. The time monitoring function in the PLC serves to detect malfunctions of the button S11: If the contact S11:31/32 does not close properly in the predefined time, the PLC must interrupt the emergency stop chain. The contact is interrogated via the current path X23:8X4:8X4:1Opto-coupler KEY0Word 0, Bit 0 of the PLC input image (see Section: "Interfaces" "PLC interface"). Enable circuit The two-channel variant of the enable function is used for PP 012: The enabling buttons are called up via X4:12X5:17XS12:16 and X24:2X5:6 XS12:6. Interrogation via XS12:5X5:5X4:10 and XS12:14X5:14X4:11. In addition, the power supply for the handheld units connected at XS12:4 is interrupted via contact S11:31/32X23:8 and X5:4 when S11 is actuated. The interlock between S11 and the enable key must be implemented in the PLC. Note Only 2-channel handheld units can be connected. 32.5.2.3 two-channel enabling function The circuit is shown in the diagram and the terminal assignment is shown in the following table. Validity The 2-channel enabling function applies for MLFBs 6FC5203-0AF25-1AA0 and 6FC5203-0AF27-1AA0-Z 846 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 0 3 0 6 0 ; (PHUJHQF\VWRS 3 3*LQ WHUIDFH 33+ ; 23, Pushbutton panel: PP 012 32.5 Connectors ; )LOWHU ; 3 ; 3 3&%GLV WULEXWRU,, ; 0 5HSHDWHU 0 -XPSHU 6 ; 0 ; ++8+7 3 (0(5*(1&<6723 &LUFXLW ; ; %U %U (0(5*(1&<6723FLUFXLW $JUHHPHQWEXWWRQ &XVWRPHU6SHFLILF :LULQJ ;6 +DQGKHOG7HUPLQDO 7<3%03, );$( ++8 03, (PHUJHQF\VWRS +DQGKHOG7HUPLQDO +7 )&$$$$ 3RZHU VXSSO\ $JUHHPHQWEXWWRQ +DQGZKHHO +7 03, (PHUJHQF\VWRS 7HUPLQDWRU FRPSRQHQW33+ 3RZHU VXSSO\ $JUHHPHQWEXWWRQ 7HUPLQDWRU 3 6LJQDOWR3/&7ULJJHUVDPRQLWRULQJWLPHU ,IDIWHUHQGRIWLPHPRQLWRULQJ PLQPD[ WKHVLJQDOOHYHOLVVWLOO/RZRU2SHQ DQ(PHUJHQF\6723PXVWEHWULJJHUHGE\WKH3/& VHHDOVRLOOXVWUDWLRQ3XVKEXWWRQ6ZLWK3/&IXQFWLRQ Figure 32-11 Connection for handheld unit ZS (two-channel) Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 847 Pushbutton panel: PP 012 32.5 Connectors Table 32-23 Terminal assignments XS12 handheld unit (two-channel) Pin 848 PP 012H HHU(MPI) HT6 Termination connector 1 EMERGENCY STOP 2.1 EMERGENCY STOP button 2.1 EMERGENCY STOP button 2.1 2 MPI_A MPI_A MPI_A 3 3M24 M (GND) M (GND) 4 3P24 P24 P24 5 ZS1.1 ZS1.1 ZS1.1 6 ZS2.2 ZS2.2 ZS2.2 7 HR_B HRB _ 8 HR_A HRA _ 9 EMERGENCY STOP 1.2 EMERGENCY STOP button 1.2 EMERGENCY STOP button 1.2 BR2 10 EMERGENCY STOP 1.1 EMERGENCY STOP button 1.1 EMERGENCY STOP button 1.1 BR2 11 KEY2 KEY2 KEY2 BR3 12 EMERGENCY STOP 2.2 EMERGENCY STOP button 2.2 EMERGENCY STOP button 2.2 BR1 13 MPI_B MPI_B MPI_B 14 ZS2.1 ZS2.1 ZS2.1 15 HR_XA HR_XA - 16 ZS2.1 ZS2.1 ZS2.1 17 HR_XB HR_XB - BR1 BR3 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Pushbutton panel: PP 012 32.6 Circuits and wiring 32.6 Circuits and wiring Custom-made wiring There are various possible applications for connecting the key inputs KEY0 to KEY2: 1. The enabling button connection corresponds to the diagram in Section: "Handheld unit connection " "Enabling function two-channel" 2. Use as isolated inputs with reference potential at X4/5 3. Use of button S11 with PLC function without jumpering For the required jumper assignment and their meaning, please refer to the Tables below. Table 32-24 Custom-made wiring Br1 Br5 - - Use of the connections X4:1;2;3 as isolated inputs. The reference potential is at X4/4 here. X X PLC function Table 32-25 Use of the connections Potential Connection use X3/11,12 Control of inputs HS1 to HS4, HS7 to HS10, HS14 and HS15 X24/1 Control of inputs KEY0 to KEY2 KEY0 ... 2 X4/1 ... 3 Inputs KEY0 to KEY2 M24 X4/5 Reference potential of inputs KEY0 to KEY2; no external use 2P24 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 849 Pushbutton panel: PP 012 32.6 Circuits and wiring Button S11 with PLC function 6 3 ; 3 0 3 ; %U ; ; %U ([WHUQDOFRQWDFWV 6FRQQHFWLRQZLWKVLQJOHFKDQQHOYDULDQWRQO\ 6LJQDOWR3/&7ULJJHUVDPRQLWRULQJWLPHU ,IDIWHUWKHHQGRIWLPHPRQLWRULQJ PLQPD[ WKHVLJQDOOHYHOLVVWLOO/RZ RU2SHQDQ(PHUJHQF\6723PXVWEHWULJJHUHGE\WKH3/& VHHDOVRLOOXVWUDWLRQ0DQXDOXQLWFRQQHFWLRQ=6 GXDOFKDQQHO Figure 32-12 Button S11 with PLC function %ORFN6Q Ext. control of the indicator lamps HS1 ... HS10 3 +6Q 0 ; ;;;; ([WHUQDOFRQWDFW Figure 32-13 External control of indicating lamps in keys HSn 850 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Pushbutton panel: PP 012 32.6 Circuits and wiring Circuit for EMERGENCY STOP button (PHUJHQF\VWRS %XWWRQ 7R3/& 2SWLRQDO (0(5*(1&<6723PDFKLQHFRQWURO Figure 32-14 Suggested circuit for EMERGENCY STOP circuit Connecting the spindle speed override WS3 ; UW :6 )&$$$$ & UW ; Figure 32-15 Connection WS3 spindle override speed/input Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 851 Pushbutton panel: PP 012 32.6 Circuits and wiring Direct control key connection ; 3&%GLUHFWNH\V 33 ) ) ) ) ) ) ) ) ) ) ) ) ) ) ) ) 9 Figure 32-16 Direct control key connection 852 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Operator Components Manual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ushbutton panel: PP 012 32.6 Circuits and wiring Connecting the expansion panel +6 +6 +6 +6 +6 +6 +6 +6 +6 5 0 3 Figure 32-17 Connecting the expansion panel to PCB expansion card 12E/12A 853 Pushbutton panel: PP 012 32.6 Circuits and wiring Example of wiring 3B ,QGLYLGXDO NH\V 6( 6( 6( 6( ; 0 5 ( ; 5 ( 5 ( 6( 6( 6( 6( 5 ( 5 ( ; 5 ( 5 ( 6( 5 ( 6( ; 5 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 ( 5 ( : ( : ( : : ( : ,QSXWV3/& : ;; : : ( : : : ; QF QRWFRQQHFWHG QF QF QF QF 6(: *URXS 60 1RWXVDEOH LINH\RSHUDWHG DXWKRUL]DWLRQ VZLWFKLVXVHG : )URPFHQWUDO /RZHU VXSSO\ 0 3 33H[WHQVLRQ ; ; : 3B 0 3% HYHQ ( 3&%H[SDQVLRQFDUG($ Figure 32-18 Wiring example eleven single keys and seven matrix keys 854 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Pushbutton panel: PP 012 32.7 Initialization 32.7 Initialization Jumpering The following settings are possible with DIP switches S16, S17, S18: Table 32-26 Assignments of S16, S17, S18 on PP 012 S17 4 3 2 S16 1 4 3 2 S18 1 4 3 2 Meaning 1 On Baud rate: 1.5 Mbaud OPI Off Baud rate: 187.5 kbaud MPI On On not applicable On Off 200 ms cycl. Transmit time frame Off On 100 ms cycl. Transmit time frame Off Off 50 ms cycl. Transmit time frame On On On On Bus address: 15 On On On Off Bus address: 14 On On Off On Bus address: 13 On On Off Off Bus address: 12 On Off On On Bus address: 11 On Off On Off Bus address: 10 On Off Off On Bus address: 9 On Off Off v Bus address: 8 Off On On On Bus address: 7 Off On On Off Bus address: 6 Off On Off On Bus address: 5 Off On Off Off Bus address: 4 Off Off On On Bus address: 3 Off Off On v Bus address: 2 Off Off Off On Bus address: 1 Off Off Off Off Bus address: 0 Off Off Parameter set 1 On Off Parameter set 2 On On Parameter set 3 X Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 On Hardware reset "ON" Off Hardware reset "OFF" On Pushbutton panel - factory setting: NC function Off Pushbutton panel NO contact function Reserve GD project 855 Pushbutton panel: PP 012 32.7 Initialization DIP switch settings Table 32-27 Default setting for 840D Application: the PP 012 to an 840D S17 S16 S18 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 Meaning X Off On Off On On Off Off Off Off X Off 187.5 kbaud/1.5 Mbaud cycl. transmit time frame 100 ms bus address 6 parameter set 1 Prerequisite: None, can be directly connected to the MPI/OPI of the 840D Table 32-28 Default setting for S7-300 Application: Connecting the PP 012 to an S7-300 S17 S16 S18 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 Meaning Off Off On Off On On Off On Off Off X Off 187.5 kbaud/1.5 Mbaud cycl. Transmit time frame 100 ms bus address 6 parameter set 2 Prerequisite: A global data table created using HISTEP Table 32-29 Setting for S7-300 with two machine control panels Usage scenario: Connecting the PP 012 to an S7-300 S17 S16 S18 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 Meaning Off Off On Off On On Off On Off On X Off 187.5 kbaud/1.5 Mbaud cycl. Transmit time frame 100 ms bus address 6 parameter set 3 Prerequisite: A global data table created using HISTEP 856 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Pushbutton panel: PP 012 32.7 Initialization Settings for transmission cycle time The load on the PLC by the PP 012 can thus be adapted. The PLC expects a message frame at least every 500 ms from the PP 012. If no key is actuated, the PP 012 transmits a message frame cyclically to the PLC. This cycle time is set on S17 DIP switches 2 and 3. Communication parameters The switchover of the sets of parameters (GD identifications) for communication between control system and PP 012 is implemented via DIP switch S16/1 or S18/3. The switchover only takes effect after Power On at the PP 012. The following applies: Transmitted data = PP 012 control Received data = control PP 012 Table 32-30 Parameter set Index Description Parameter set 1 Parameter set 2 Parameter set 3 1 Receive GD circuit no. 1 2 2 Receive GI no. 1 1 3 Object number for receive GI 1 1 4 Send GD circuit no. 1 2 5 Transmit GI no. 2 2 6 Object number for transmit GI 1 1 internal assignment Global data table When the PP 012 is operated in conjunction with an S7-300 CPU, set of parameters 2 is selected and a global data table is created using HISTEP. The communication link to the PP 012 must be parameterized as follows: Table 32-31 Global data for set of parameters 2 GD identification ebf/s7-300: efb/PP 012: GD 1.1.1 >>ab60:8 eb0:8 GD 1.2.1 eb60:8 >>ab0:8 The specifications "ab60" and "eb60" for S7 are only examples; the signals can also be transferred to other locations. The GD identification is generated by the compiler. Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 857 Pushbutton panel: PP 012 32.7 Initialization GD 1.1.1 PP 012 is the receiver GD 1.2.1 PP 012 is the transmitter This assignment corresponds to set of parameters 2 as per Table: "Communication parameters" "Parameter set". Note Make sure that a data width of eight bytes is always assigned for the input and output image! If two PP 012s are to be connected to an S7-300 CPU, set of parameters 3 must be set, and the following global data table must be created using HISTEP. Table 32-32 Global data for set of parameters 2 GD identification ebf/s7-300:: ebf/PP 012:: GD 1.1.1 >>ab60:8 eb0:8 GD 1.2.1 eb60:8 >>ab0:8 GD 2.1.1 >>ab120:8 eb0:8 GD 2.2.1 eb118:8 >>ab0:8 Further GD communications can be configured in the following lines. DANGER The transmission path (MPI/OPI) from PP 012 to the central controller must be monitored by the user. 858 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Pushbutton panel: PP 012 32.8 Communication between SIMATIC S7 and PP 012 32.8 Communication between SIMATIC S7 and PP 012 Example of parameterization Your program can read the information of the GD package status from the operands you assign the corresponding GDS identification in the global data table in the STEP 7 tool "Communication Configuration". If a communication error occurs, the operating system writes error information to these operands (described in the Table below). You can then use this information to create conditional program branches as a response to the communication errors. For the status information of the communication, a double word (32 bit) is provided. For the contents of the double word, see the Table below: Table 32-33 Status information Bit Status: Description of error from transmitting CPU from receiving CPU 0 Area length error in sender + + 1 Block cannot be found in sender + + 2 I/O access error in sender + + 3 GD packet lost + + + + * with transmitter * in the connection * with receiver 4 Syntax error in GD packet 5 GD object missing from GD packet + 6 Wrong assignment of GD object length in sender and receiver + 7 Address range length error in sender + 8 GD package cannot be found in receiver + 9 I/O access error in receiver + 10 Timeout in receiver + 11 12-30 31 Restart of receiver + Reserved + Receive new data + References: Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 // SIMATC S7, User Manual 859 Pushbutton panel: PP 012 32.8 Communication between SIMATIC S7 and PP 012 Note Monitoring of the MPI link between SIMATIC S7 and PP 012 can be implemented with the global data bit, bit 31. The user can reset bit 31 and provide it with a watchdog. If this bit is not set again within the predefined time interval, a fault in the line is the cause. Table 32-34 Example 860 GD identification as314//cpu1: pp012_t//cpu1:: GST md120 GDS 1.1 md130 SR 1.1 4 1 GD 1.1.1 >>ab120:8 ab0:8 GDS 1.2 md140 SR 1.2 4 4 GD 1.2.1 eb118:8 >>eb0:8 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Pushbutton panel: PP 012 32.9 PP 012 expansion 32.9 PP 012 expansion Front view with section $ $ $$ &HQWHU 2SHUDWRUFRQWUROHOHPHQW Figure 32-19 PP 012 expansion Order code MLFB 6FC5247-0AA43-1AA0 Can be equipped with max. 12 control devices, diameter 22 mm, grid 33 mm Labeling with exchangeable text labels Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 861 Pushbutton panel: PP 012 32.9 PP 012 expansion Panel cutout $VVHPEO\EDFNJURXQG WRWKLFN 2SHUDWRUSDQHO IURQW % $$ $ % 7HQVLRQMDFNV $ PD[WRUTXH 1P %% Figure 32-20 Panel cutout for PP 012 extension Dimensions for labeling the slide-in labels The following drawing is intended purely as an example; multiple slide-in labels can also be arranged. 'LPHQVLRQVIRUODEHOLQJWKHVOLGHLQXVHUODEHOV YDULDEOHVZLWFKLQJHOHPHQWV6WR6 &RUQHUVURXQGHG5 RUFKDPIHUHG[GHJUHHV 6OLGHLQGLUHFWLRQ :LQGRZDUHDERUGHULQJ PXVWQRWEHSULQWHG &XWWLQJHGJHERUGHULQJ PXVWEHSULQWHG 'LPHQVLRQVIRUODEHOLQJWKHVOLGHLQXVHUODEHOV YDULDEOHVZLWFKLQJHOHPHQWV6WR6 6OLGHLQGLUHFWLRQ Figure 32-21 Dimensions for texts on the slide-in labels (PP 012 extension) 862 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Pushbutton panel: PP 012 32.10 Functions of PCB expansion card 12I/12O 32.10 Functions of PCB expansion card 12I/12O 32.10.1 Inputs/Outputs Inputs Table 32-35 Inputs (possible combinations) Without authorization key-operated switch With authorization key-operated switch Design Button matrix (option) Switch/ independent single contacts Design Button matrix (option) Switch/ independent single contacts 1 without 14 contacts 14 without 10 contacts 2 7 buttons 11 contacts 15 7 buttons 7 contacts 3 12 buttons 10 contacts 16 12 buttons 6 contacts 4 14 buttons 9 contacts 17 14 buttons 5 contacts 5 24 buttons 8 contacts 18 24 buttons 4 contacts 6 36 buttons 7 contacts 19 36 buttons 3 contacts 7 48 buttons 6 contacts 20 48 buttons 2 contacts 8 60 buttons 5 contacts 21 60 buttons 1 contacts 9 72 buttons 4 contacts 22 72 buttons 0 contacts 10 84 buttons 3 contacts Functions of buttons in the matrix: + non-locking buttons + individual button activation + no switch function 11 96 buttons 2 contacts 12 0108 buttons 1 contacts 13 120 buttons 0 contacts Outputs 16 outputs for controlling lamps, four of which are optional. Button matrix (option) 8 inputs W3, W5, W6, W7, W9, W10, W11, W12 for matrix 4 outputs A28 to A31 for controlling lamps Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 863 Pushbutton panel: PP 012 32.10 Functions of PCB expansion card 12I/12O 32.10.2 Button assignment within matrix Assignment paradigm Key value Wn Matrix row Rn Wn W8/ E55 W4/ E54 W2/ E53 W1/ E52 E19/ PB Rn E 12 E 24 E 30 E 61 E 62 E 63 E 14 E 21 E 22 E 23 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 0 0 1 0 0 2 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 3 0 0 1 1 1 3 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 4 0 1 0 0 0 4 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 5 0 1 0 1 1 5 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 6 0 1 1 0 1 6 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 7 0 1 1 1 0 7 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 8 1 0 0 0 0 8 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 9 1 0 0 1 1 9 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 10 1 0 1 0 1 10 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 11 1 0 1 1 0 12 1 1 0 0 1 864 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Pushbutton panel: PP 012 32.11 Technical specifications 32.11 Technical specifications 32.11.1 PP 012 Security Safety class Degree of protection per EN 60529 III; PELV acc. to EN 50178 Front: IP54 Rear side: IP10A Approvals CE / cULus Electrical specifications Input voltage DC 24 V Power consumption, max. 20 W Mechanical data Dimensions Width: 483 mm Height: 155 mm Depth: 175 mm Mounting depth: 105 mm Weight Mechanical ambient conditions Approx. 3 kg Operation Transport (in transport packaging) Vibratory load 2 -9 Hz: 3 mm 9 -200 Hz: 10 m/s2 3M4 per EN 60721-3-3 2 -9 Hz: 3.5 mm 9 -200 Hz: 10 m/s2 2M2 per EN 60721-3-2 Shock stressing 100 m/s2, 11 ms, 3M2 as per EN 60721-3-3 100 m/s2, 11 ms 2M2 as per EN 60721-3-2 Climatic ambient conditions Cooling By natural convection Condensation, spraying water and icing Supply air Applicable standards Climate class Temperature limits Temperature change Limits for relative humidity Permissible change in the relative air humidity Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Not permitted Without caustic gases, dusts and oils Operation Storage/shipping (in transport packaging) EN 60721-3-3 EN 60721-3-1 / -3-2 3K5 1K3 / 2K4 0 ... 45 C (at front) 0 ... 55 C (at rear) -40 ... 70 C Max. 10 K/h Max. 18 K/h 5 ... 80% 5 ... 95% max. 0.1% /min 865 Pushbutton panel: PP 012 32.11 Technical specifications 32.11.2 Input/output interface of individual wiring Button contact maker Contacts with floating outputs S1 to S4; S7 to S10; S11; S14; S15 (NC contact or NO contact) Table 32-36 NO contacts S1 to S4; S7 to S10; S14; S15 AC DC 50 V Rated insulation voltage Ue 50 V Rated operating current Ie 2A Rated operating current at 24V Ie Min. rated operating current at 5 V 2A Imin 1 mA Volume resistance < 20 m Switching capacity Max. operating current for reference potential 10 le 1.1 le 8A 8A AC DC 300 V 300 V Selector switch Contacts with floating outputs WS1/9-11; 13; 15; Table 32-37 Selector switch Load Rated operating voltage Ue Switching capacity resistive 10 A Inductive >2 A Switching capacity at 24 V resistive 10 A Inductive 6A Rated values for arc-free switching at 24 V 0.3 A 0.22 A EMERGENCY STOP button Contacts with floating outputs S13 Table 32-38 EMERGENCY STOP button Usage category (EN 60947-5-1) AC DC Ue 24 V 24 V AC-12 le 10 A AC-15 le 6A DC-12 le Rated operating voltage Switching capacity DC-13 Min. rated operating current at 5 V 10 A le 3A lmin 1 mA For further parameters, see pushbutton and indicator light SIGNUM 3SB3 866 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Pushbutton panel: PP 012 32.11 Technical specifications Inputs X4: KEY 0 to KEY 2 Table 32-39 Inputs X4: KEY 0 to KEY 2 State H signal Voltage switched Rated value 24 V Signal level +15 V to +30 V L signal Rated value 0V or open Signal level -3 V to +5 V In a group of 3 Length of cable max. 50 m AWG 20 - 16 Current switched min. 4 mA (at 15 V) max. 9.5 mA (at 30 V) X1, X2, X6, X11 Table 32-40 Inputs HS1 to HS4; HS7 to HS10; HS14; HS15 State Voltage switched Rated value 24 V Signal level +18 V to +30 V Pilot lamp OFF Rated value Open Length of cable Max. 10 m AWG 20-16 Pilot lamp ON Current switched 50 mA (switch-on current max. 600 mA) X30 Table 32-41 Input X30 direct keys, F1 to F16 State H signal L signal Voltage switched Rated value 5V Signal level +5 V or open Rated value Signal level In a group of 16 Length of cable Max 0.6 m AWG 28 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Current switched -3 V to +1 V 11 mA 867 Pushbutton panel: PP 012 32.11 Technical specifications Printed circuit board input/output (option) X44 Table 32-42 Inputs X44 Voltage supply Total current Nominal voltage Upper voltage limit Lower voltage limit Fuse Max. = 5 A, depending on the lamp load DC 24 V DC 30.2 V 18.5 VDC 2 x 10A Inputs X41, X42, X43, X45, X46, X47: E12, E14, E21 to E24, E30. E52 to E55, E61 to E63, W1 to W12 Table 32-43 Inputs State H signal L signal Voltage switched Rated value 24 V Signal level +15 V to +30 V Rated value 0V or open Signal level -3 V to +5 V In a group of Common root Length of cable Max 50 m AWG 16 Current switched min. 3.6 mA (at 15 V) max. 8 mA (at 30 V) Lamp outputs X41, X42, X43, X45, X46, X47: HS16 to HS31 Table 32-44 Lamp outputs State H signal Current switched Rated value 24 V Signal level +20 V to +30 V Max. 0.5 A/output Open 25 A Rated value L signal Signal level In a group of 16 Length of cable Max. 50 m AWG 16 Output aggregate current 868 Voltage switched Max. 5 A Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Pushbutton panel: PP 012 32.11 Technical specifications Outputs P24_5 X40:1, X45:1 Table 32-45 Outputs P24_5 State Voltage switched Output aggregate current Rated value Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Current switched max. 700 mA +24 V 869 Pushbutton panel: PP 012 32.12 Configuring 32.12 Configuring 32.12.1 Delivery variants Note When replacing the existing PP 031 devices with variants of the PP 012, downwards compatibility cannot always be assumed! Components Pushbutton panel PP 012 6fC5203-0AF2X-XAA0 PP 012 basic device 6FC5203-0AF24-0AA0 EMERGENCY STOP button with 2 NC contacts + 1 NO contact, keyswitch, 8 illuminated pushbuttons with incandescent lamps, button caps 2*GR, 2*RT, 2*GB, 2*Kl, 2* dummy plugs BVR22, programming device and 24V connection, feedrate override, cover plate for 2nd override, with blank special film for slide-in labels with dimensional drawing, PCB direct keys with ribbon cable 1) PP 012H As base unit, also with handheld unit connection 17-pole socket and jump button with repeater function and distributor, two-channel enabling function 6 F C 5 2 0 3 - 0 A F 2 5 -1 A A 0 PP 012/S Special variant based on PP 012; the respective equipment is unambiguously identified by a Z-option specification 6FC5203-0AF26-0AA0-Z PP 012/S Special variant based on PP 012H; the respective equipment is unambiguously identified by a Z-option specification, 2-channel enabling function 6 F C 5 2 0 3 - 0 A F 2 7 -1 A A 0 - Z 1) When assigning the colors for keys and pilot lamps to the corresponding functionality, observe the standard EN 60204 Part 1 or VDE 0113 Part 1, Section "Pushbuttons/Colors". Extensions to the PP 012 (can be ordered and installed by the customer separately) Override switch, 16-level speed 6FC5247-0AA34-0AA1 "+/-" keys raised 6FC5247-0AA41-0AA0 PCB expansion card 12E/12A 6FC5247-0AA42-0AA0 Extension panel with 12 slots 6 F C 5 2 4 7 - 0 A A 4 3 -1 A A 0 2 x NC contacts for Emergency Stop buttons 3SB3400-0E Replacement parts kit PP 031-MC 5 covers, 5 films, 2 sealing caps, button cap set, 5 incandescent lamps with sockets, 1 dummy plug, 1 illuminated contact maker key, 1 printing drawing A5E00122711A-A1 6 F C 5 2 4 7 - 0 A A 2 7 -0 A A 0 870 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Pushbutton panel: PP 012 32.12 Configuring Extensions for project-specific variants Slide-in labels as per customer layout Set of light emitting diodes (ultra-bright) Knob FS1 for WS1 Actuator and contact maker 1) corresponding table under Section: "Configuration" "Project-specific components" Key-operated authorization switch at customer request PCB_input/output with key matrix at customer request 1) When assigning the colors for keys and pilot lamps to the corresponding functionality, observe the standard EN 60204 Part 1 or VDE 0113 Part 1, Section: "Pushbuttons / Colors". 32.12.2 Project-specific components Retrofit control elements Function Upper section actuator / accessories Lower section switching element/ signaling lamp Mounting location use Signaling lamp Illuminated nipple 28 mm O RXJN-GB (yellow) RXJN-GN (green) RXJN-RT (red) RXJN-BL (blue) RXJN-KL (crystal clear) RXJN-WS (white) Lamp fixture AL5 with incandescent lamp T5.5K/30 or Spot LED L5.5K28UG (green) L5.5K28UR (red) L5.5K28UW (white) L5.5K28UY (yellow) L5.5K28UB(blue) S1 ... S4 S7 ... S10 S14, S15 Lamp Button Pushbutton 28 mm O RXJN-GB (yellow) RXJN-GN (green) RXJN-RT (red) RXJN-BL (blue) RXJN-KL (crystal clear) RXJN-GWS (black) Button contact maker AT2 S11 1NC internal, 2NO+1NC external for S1 1NC internal 2NO+1NC ext. for S2...S4, S7...S10 1NC internal, 1NO+1NC external for S14, S15, 1NC int., 2S external Illuminated key contact maker ATL2 with incandescent lamp T5.5K/30 or Spot LED L5.5K28UG (green) L5.5K28UR (red) L5.5K28UW (white) L5.5K28UY (yellow) L5.5K28UB (blue) S11 1NC internal, 2NO+1NC external for S1 1NC internal 2NO+1NC ext. for S2...S4, S7...S10 1NC internal, 1NO+1NC external for S14, S15, 1NC int., 2NO external, lamps can be externally controlled Illuminated pushbutton Pushbutton 28 mm with socket for T5.5K RXJN-GB (yellow) RXJN-GN (green) RXJN-RT (red) RXJN-BL (blue) RXJN-KL (crystal clear) Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 871 Pushbutton panel: PP 012 32.12 Configuring Function Upper section actuator / accessories Lower section switching element/ signaling lamp Keyswitch Switching angle 90 2 positions Key removable in both positions Safety lock cylinder 28 mm O RXJSSA 15 E Button contact maker AT2 Raised keys 2 RTAO pushbuttons 6FC5347-0AA41-0AA0 with plunger elongation Designation field Replaceable text insert strips Dummy plug BVR22 Selector switch Knob FS1 Speed/rapid override EMERGENCY STOP button Switching element: 2 NC contacts Mounting location use 1NC internal, 2NO+1NC external for S1 1NC internal 2NO+1NC ext. for S2...S4, S7...S10 1NC internal, 1NO+1NC external for S14, S15, 1NC int., 2NO external 2 AT2' Special version S14 and S15 with base unit WS1 Re-equipping to knob-operated switch 6FC5247-0AA34-0AA1 WS3 Connection to PCB PP 031R 3SB3400-0E S13 Expans. NC contact EMERGENCY STOP Note When assigning the colors for keys and pilot lamps to the corresponding functionality, observe the standard EN 60204 Part 1 or VDE 0113 Part 1, Section: "Pushbuttons / Colors". 32.12.3 Rating plates The components and modules are provided with the following rating plates: Components Example: )/ A5E00112382 A/B )&$)$$ 33 872 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Pushbutton panel: PP 012 32.12 Configuring Explanation: F2 Manufacturer site L3 Date of manufacture A5E00112382 ID number A/B/C/D Product version 6FC5 203-0AF24-0AA0 MLFB PP012 Component name Printed circuit boards Example: $($/) Explanation: A5E00017606 ID number A1 Product version L2 Date of manufacture F2 Manufacturer site In case of technical queries or service, please quote all data on the rating plate to the local SIEMENS office responsible for your equipment. Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 873 Pushbutton panel: PP 012 32.13 Service information 32.13 Service information Changing the lamps on illuminated keys 1. Use a screwdriver to pull the key cap forward and off. 2. Use lamp remover LZ5 to lever out the key carrier. 3. Change the lamp using service tool LZ5 or a suitable insulating tube 4. Reinstall the key carrier and key cap in reverse order. Lamp remover LZ5 is not a SIEMENS product. It can be obtained from the Schlegel company. Georg Schlegel GmbH & Co. KG Am Kapellenweg Phone.: 0 73 71 / 502-0 88525 Durmentingen Fax: 0 73 71 / 502 49 Germany E-mail: info@schlegel.biz Changing the lamps on pilot lamps 1. Use a screwdriver to pull the calotte and name bearing element forward and off. 2. Change the lamp using the lamp remover of service tool LZ5 or a suitable insulating tube 3. Reinstall the calotte and name bearing element. NOTICE When using LEDs, make sure that they are connected with the correct polarity (see Fig.: "Mounting position of LEDs" in section: "Mounting") Mounting additional control elements 1. If necessary, unscrew the blank plug. 2. Place the contact maker on the socket and insert the lamp if required. 3. Insert pushbutton through front panel and screw on cap nut (by several turns). 4. Press pushbutton on contact maker. Note the position of the twist protection device! 5. Screw down cap nut (tightening torque 0.8 Nm). 874 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Pushbutton panel: PP 012 32.13 Service information Insert slide-in labels 1. Create the slide-in label (see Section: "Accessories" "Labeling the slide-in labels"). 2. Pull protective films off slide-in slot. 3. Guide in the slide-in labels (labeling facing operator side). 4. Align text in window. Note Slide in the labels when the MPP 483 operator panel front is not yet installed. Changing a contact maker 1. Loosen cap nut off pushbutton until just in front of contact maker. 2. Pull the pushbutton and the contact maker approximately 3 mm out of the fixture (the locating pin of the pushbutton must be freed). 3. Remove the LED. 4. Change the contact element, remove defective contact maker from fixture and press new contact maker onto fixture. 5. Insert pushbutton into aperture and partially screw on cap nut. 6. Press pushbutton on contact maker until it snaps in. Note the position of the snap nose! 7. Screw down cap nut (tightening torque 0.8 Nm). Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 875 Pushbutton panel: PP 012 32.13 Service information 876 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 MPI interface for customer operator panel 33.1 33 Description A customer operator panel can be connected via the MPI interface. 64 digital inputs and 64 digital outputs with C-MOS level (5 V) are available on the module for this purpose. Validity The description below applies to the MPI interface (order number 6FC5203-0AE00-0AA0) Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 877 MPI interface for customer operator panel 33.2 Interfaces 33.2 Interfaces Location of the interfaces ; ; ; 03,FRQQHFWLRQ (TXLSRWHQWLDOERQGLQJWHUPLQDO 21 ; +ROHV 6 Figure 33-1 ; + + /('V + + Front view of the MPI interface for customer operator panel Power supply interface Connector designation: X10 Type: 3-pole Phoenix terminal block, straight Table 33-1 Table 33-2 878 X10 pin assignments Pin Name 1 SHIELD 2 M24 3 P24 Type VI Signal names SHIELD Shield connection M24 Ground 24V P24 24V potential Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 MPI interface for customer operator panel 33.2 Interfaces Table 33-3 Signal type VI Voltage input Note The maximum length of the equipotential connection (fine-core, 10 mm2) must not exceed 30 cm. MPI interface Connector designation: X20 Type: 9-pole sub D socket connector, straight Max. cable length 200 m Special situations: 1.5 Mbaud / 187.5 kBaud data rate Table 33-4 X20 pin assignments for MPI Pin Name Type 1/2 Not assigned Pin Name Type 6 2P5 VO 3 RS_OPI B 7 Not assigned 4 RTSAS_BTSS O 8 XRS_OPI B 5 2M VO 9 RTSPG_BTSS I Table 33-5 Signal names RS_OPI, XRS_OPI Differential RS485 data OPI RTSPG_OPI Request to Send PG OPI RTSAS_BTSS Request to Send AS OPI 2M Ground signal, isolated 2P5 +5 V, isolated Table 33-6 Signal type B Bi-directional O Output VO Voltage output I Input Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 879 MPI interface for customer operator panel 33.2 Interfaces Digital inputs/outputs with C-MOS level (5 V) Connector designation: X211, X221 (2x 32-pole) X231 (2 x 10-pole) Type: Ribbon cable connector DIN 41651 Max. cable length 0.5 m Potential pins: The inputs/outputs (interfaces X211, X221, X231) can be loaded with a maximum current of 0.2 A via the internal 5 V power supply of the MPI interface module. This value stands for the total of all currents flowing over this interface. 64 outputs may drive a maximum current of 200 mA. The maximum current per output is limited to 5 mA. X221 880 Pin Name 1 Type Pin Name Type OUT 1 33 IN 14 I 2 OUT 2 34 P5 V 3 OUT 3 35 IN 15 4 OUT 4 36 IN 16 5 OUT 5 37 IN 24 6 OUT 6 38 IN 17 7 OUT 7 39 IN 25 8 OUT 8 40 IN 18 O I 9 OUT 9 41 IN 26 10 OUT 10 42 IN 19 11 OUT 11 43 IN 27 12 OUT 12 44 IN 20 13 OUT 13 45 M (GND) 14 OUT 14 46 IN 21 15 OUT 15 47 IN 28 16 OUT 16 48 IN 22 17 M (GND) 49 IN 29 18 IN 0 50 IN 23 V 19 IN 8 51 IN 30 I 20 IN 1 52 P5 V 21 IN 9 53 IN 31 I 54 Not assigned V I 22 IN 2 23 IN 10 55 M (GND) 24 IN 3 56 OUT 16 25 IN 11 57 OUT 17 26 IN 4 58 OUT 18 27 M (GND) 59 OUT 19 V V I V Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 MPI interface for customer operator panel 33.2 Interfaces X221 Pin Name Type 28 IN 5 29 IN 12 30 IN 6 31 IN 13 63 OUT 23 32 IN 7 64 Not assigned Pin Name Pin Name 1 Not assigned 33 IN 39 2 OUT 47 34 IN 45 3 OUT 46 35 IN 38 4 OUT 45 36 IN 44 I Pin Name Type 60 OUT 20 O 61 OUT 21 62 OUT 22 X211 Type O 5 OUT 44 37 IN 37 6 OUT 43 38 M (GND) 7 OUT 42 39 IN 36 8 OUT 41 40 IN 43 9 OUT 40 41 IN 35 42 IN 42 43 IN 34 10 M (GND) 11 Not assigned V 12 IN 63 I 44 IN 41 13 P5 V 45 IN 33 14 IN 62 46 IN 40 15 IN 55 47 IN 32 16 IN 61 48 M (GND) 17 IN 54 49 OUT 39 I 18 IN 60 50 OUT 38 19 IN 53 51 OUT 37 20 M (GND) 52 OUT 36 21 IN 52 53 OUT 35 22 IN 59 54 OUT 34 23 IN 51 55 OUT 33 24 IN 58 56 OUT 32 25 IN 50 57 OUT 31 26 IN 57 58 OUT 30 27 IN 49 59 OUT 29 28 IN 56 60 OUT 28 29 IN 48 61 OUT 27 30 IN 47 62 OUT 26 V I 31 P5 V 63 OUT 25 32 IN 46 I 64 OUT 24 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Type I V I V O 881 MPI interface for customer operator panel 33.2 Interfaces Note The inputs/outputs are assigned to a C-MOS level (5 V). The outputs are not short-circuit-proof. Applying a higher voltage to the inputs will destroy them. X211 Pin Name 1 Type Pin Name OUT 48 11 OUT 56 2 OUT 49 12 OUT 57 3 OUT 50 13 OUT 58 4 OUT 51 14 OUT 59 15 OUT 60 O 5 OUT 52 6 OUT 53 16 OUT 61 7 OUT 54 17 OUT 62 8 OUT 55 18 OUT 63 9/10 M (GND) 19/20 P5 Table 33-7 V Inputs P5 5V power supply M (GND) oV Signal type O 882 V Outputs IN 0 ... 63 Output V Voltage I Input Table 33-9 O Signal names OUT 0 ... 63 Table 33-8 Type Signal description OUT 0 - OUT 63 Output signals with C-MOS level 5 V max. 5 mA IN 0 - IN 63 C-MOS inputs with 5V level Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 MPI interface for customer operator panel 33.2 Interfaces Note OUT 0 to OUT 47: are switched over at cyclic intervals between 5 V and 0 V level after POWER ON. After booting of the control, these outputs can be triggered via the PLC. OUT 48 to OUT 63: are set to 5 V level after POWER ON (connection and triggering of relay possible). After booting of the control, these outputs can be triggered via the PLC. IN 0 to IN 63: 5 V Status FALSE as seen from the PLC 0 V Status TRUE as seen from the PLC LEDs H1, ..., H4: H3: POWER: 24 V supply H1: not used H4: SEND: Status change on protocol transmission H2: not used Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 883 MPI interface for customer operator panel 33.3 Mounting 33.3 Mounting The mounting position is subject to the following restrictions: Mounting positions max. 75 off vertical permissible. For mounting positions greater than 60, a fan must also be installed to keep the ambient temperature constantly below 55 C. 884 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 MPI interface for customer operator panel 33.4 Settings 33.4 Settings Jumpering With the DIP switch S3 (see diagram in Section: "Interfaces"), the following settings are possible: Table 33-10 Assignments of S3 on MPI interface for customer operator panel 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 Meaning Baud rate on 1.5 Mbaud Off 187.5 kbaud Transmission cycle time Receipt monitoring Off on 200 ms 2400 ms on Off 100 ms 1200 ms Off Off 50 ms 600 ms Bus address on Off on Off on Off on Off on Off on Off on Off on Off 15 on off 14 on 13 12 on on off 10 Off 9 8 7 on off 6 on 5 4 Off on off 11 3 2 Off 1 0 Interface MPI customer operator panel Series HW on Off The following default settings are suggested: Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 885 MPI interface for customer operator panel 33.4 Settings Table 33-11 MPI interface for customer operator panel, default settings of S3 for 840D 1 2 on Off 3 on 4 Off 5 on 6 on 7 Off 8 on Meaning - Baud rate: 1.5 Mbaud - transmission cycle time: 100 ms - bus address: 6 - MPI interface to customer operator panel Table 33-12 MPI interface for customer operator panel, default setting S3 for 810D 1 2 Off Off 3 on 4 Off 5 on 6 on 7 Off 8 on Meaning - Baud rate: 187.5 kBaud - transmission cycle time: 100 ms - bus address: 6 - MPI interface to customer operator panel Settings for transmission cycle time The PLC expects a message frame from the interface module at least every 500 ms. If no key is pressed, the interface module sends message frames to the PLC at cyclic intervals. The S3 switches (2 and 3) are used to set this cycle time. In this way, the load on the PLC caused by the interface module can be adjusted. Settings for receipt cycle time The machine control panel receives message frames at cyclic intervals from the PLC and answers these at cyclic intervals. The receipt monitoring time is linked to the transmission cycle time of the machine control panel and is set with the S3 DIP switch (2 and 3). Bus address The bus address for 840D must be set to "6". Other addresses can be selected, but these must then also be set at FB1 in the basic PLC program. 886 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 MPI interface for customer operator panel 33.5 Technical specifications 33.5 Technical specifications Security Safety class III; PELV acc. to EN 50178 Degree of protection per EN 60529 IP00 Approvals CE / cULus Electrical specifications Input voltage DC 24 V Power consumption, max. max. 5 W Mechanical data Dimensions Width: 293 mm Weight Mechanical ambient conditions Height: 92 mm Depth: 15 mm Approx. 0.5 kg Operation Transport (in transport packaging) Vibratory load 10 - 58 Hz: 0.075 mm 58 -200 Hz: 9.8 m/s2 3M4 per EN 60721-3-3 5 -9 Hz: 3.5 mm 9 -200 Hz: 9.8 m/s2 2M2 per EN 60721-3-2 Shock stressing 50 m/s2, 30 ms, 18 shocks 3M2 per EN 60721-3-3 300 m/s2, 6 ms, 18 shocks 2M2 per EN 60721-3-2 Climatic ambient conditions Cooling By natural convection Condensation, spraying water and icing Supply air Applicable standards Climate class Temperature limits Temperature change Limits for relative humidity Permissible change in the relative air humidity Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Not permitted Without caustic gases, dusts and oils Operation Storage/shipping (in transport packaging) EN 60721-3-3 EN 60721-3-1 / -3-2 3K5 1K3 / 2K4 0 ... 55 C -20 ... 60C Max. 10 K/h Max. 18 K/h 5 ... 80% 5 ... 95% max. 0.1% /min 887 MPI interface for customer operator panel 33.5 Technical specifications 888 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 34 Electronic handwheels 34.1 Description Electronic handwheels are incremental encoders whose signals correspond to rotation of the wheel actuated by hand. They are equipped with a magnetic latching mechanism that supports traversing with incremental accuracy. The axis selected via the control can be positioned so that the axes are parallel. All handwheels have 100 I/U lines. The electronic handwheels are available in several variants. They can be distinguished by the interface and size of the front panel. The snapping torque and size of the setting wheel are adapted to the front plate. If necessary, the front panel may have to be removed. Figure 34-1 View (1) Front panel (2) Rotary knob Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 889 Electronic handwheels 34.1 Description The portable handwheel is intended for machine level usage. A magnet bracket and spiral cable can be found on its casing. The electronic handwheel with 24V operating voltage and a HTL signal level is designed for connecting to I/O modules. An adapter set is available for installing the handwheels with central mounting in front panels which are intended for the installation of handwheels with 3-hole mountings (see section: "Accessories"). Validity The description applies to the following electronic handwheels: Name Encoder with setting wheel Encoder with setting wheel Encoder without setting wheel (for mounting) Encoder with setting wheel Encoder with setting wheel, small 890 Dimensions of front panel (mm) Interface Order number 120 x 120 DC 5V, RS 422 6FC9320-5DB01 76.2 x 76.2 DC 5V, RS 422 6FC9320-5DC01 without front panel DC 5V, RS 422 6FC9320-5DF01 76.2 x 76.2 DC 24V, HTL 6FC9320-5DH01 without front panel DC 5V, RS 422 6FC9320-5DM00 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Electronic handwheels 34.2 Connections 34.2 Connections Connection for all variants of the electronic handwheel acc. to AWG14: Connection: 6-pin screw-type terminal Nominal area 2.5 mm2 single wire 1.5 mm2 ultra fine wire Note When a connected handwheel triggers pulses from its idle position or in the event of tiny contacts, connect it so that the label is facing the wrong way. Replace - the wire of terminal A with the wire of terminal /A - the wire of terminal B with the wire of terminal /B Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 891 Electronic handwheels 34.3 Technical data 34.3 Technical data Safety Protective class I Degree of protection per EN 60529/ IEC 529 Front: IP65 Connection side: IP50 Electrical data Type: 5 V Type: 24 V Nominal voltage DC 5 V 5% DC 10 V - 30V Rated current Max. 60 mA Max. 15 mA Output frequency Max. 2 kHz Number of pulses 2 x 100 I/U Displacement of phase A to B typ. 90 electrical Interface RS 422 (TTL) HTL Mechanical data Weight approx. 0.4 kg with 76.2 x 76.2 mm front panel approx. 0.6 kg with 120 x 120 mm front panel Housing material Steel / plastic Distance from NCU 25 m Actuating force 4 Ncm 8 Ncm (variant with 120 x 120 mm front panel) Spindle speed max. 1000 rpm Mechanical ambient conditions Vibratory load Shock stressing Operation 58 - 200 Hz: 10 m/s2 m/s2, 100 11 ms, 6 shocks per IEC 68-2-27 Transport (in transport packaging) 9 -200 Hz: 20 m/s2 300 m/s2, 6 ms, 6 shocks per IEC 68-2-27 Climatic ambient conditions Condensation, spraying water and icing Supply air Applicable standards Climate class Temperature limits Temperature change Limits for relative humidity Permissible change in the relative air humidity 892 Not permissible Without caustic gases, dusts and oils Operation Storage / shipping (in transport packaging) EN 60721-3-3 EN 60721-3-2 3K5 2K4 0 ... 70C -40 ... 85 C Max. 10 K/h Max. 15 K/h 5 ... 80% 10 ... 95% Max. 6%/h Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Electronic handwheels 34.4 Accessories 34.4 Accessories The following adapter set is available for installing the handwheels with central mounting in front panels which are intended for the installation of handwheels with 3-hole mountings: Component Description Adapter set For installation with 3-hole mounting Number Order number 1 6FC9320-5DN00 The figures show the adapter set with its individual parts and the dimension drawing for mounting. Figure 34-2 Components of adapter set (1) O-ring (2) Adapter ring (3) Axle adapter (4) Threaded stud (5) O-ring (6) Cylinder-head screw s r [ Figure 34-3 (1) Dimension drawing of adapter set Mounting frame Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 893 Electronic handwheels 34.5 Dimensional drawings 34.5 Dimensional drawings 34.5.1 Encoder with 120 mm x 120 mm front panel, setting wheel (...-5DB01) Front and side view $ $ (1) Flat connector for push-on contacts 6.3 mm Outputs A = Antivalent RS 422 A & $% $% Load current 20 mA 894 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Electronic handwheels 34.5 Dimensional drawings Pulse diagram r r $ $ r % % Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 895 Electronic handwheels 34.5 Dimensional drawings 34.5.2 Encoder with front panel, 76.2 mm x 76.2 mm, setting wheel (...-5DC01) Front and side view $ $ (1) Flat connector for push-on contacts 6.3 mm Outputs A = Antivalent RS 422 A & $% $% Load current 20 mA 896 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Electronic handwheels 34.5 Dimensional drawings Pulse diagram r r $ $ r % % Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 897 Electronic handwheels 34.5 Dimensional drawings 34.5.3 Encoder without front panel, without setting wheel, mounting (...-5DF01) Front and side view 0[ $ $ K (1) Flat connector for push-on contacts 6.3 mm Switch panel cutout for mounting version Outputs A = Antivalent RS 422 A & $% $% Load current 20 mA 898 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Electronic handwheels 34.5 Dimensional drawings Pulse diagram r r $ $ r % % Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 899 Electronic handwheels 34.5 Dimensional drawings 34.5.4 Encoder with front panel, 76.2 mm x 76.2 mm, setting wheel (...-5DH01) Front and side view $ $ (1) Flat connector for push-on contacts 6.3 mm Outputs & $% $% Load current 10 mA 900 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Electronic handwheels 34.5 Dimensional drawings Pulse diagram r r $ $ r % % Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 901 Electronic handwheels 34.5 Dimensional drawings 34.5.5 Encoder without front panel, setting wheel, small (...-5DM00) Components (1) Seal disc (2) Washer (3) Nut (4) Rotary button with crank Side view $ $ 902 (1) Flat connector for push-on contacts 6.3 mm (2) Seal disc (3) Recommended distance of 0.40 mm switch panel / rotary button (4) Switch panel thickness 2 to max. 6 mm Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Electronic handwheels 34.5 Dimensional drawings Switch panel cutout for mounting version Outputs A = Antivalent RS 422 A $% & $% Load current 20 mA Pulse diagram r r $ $ r % % Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 903 Electronic handwheels 34.5 Dimensional drawings 904 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 35 Full CNC keyboard: KB 483C 35.1 Description The SINUMERIK KB 483C full CNC keyboard permits user-friendly input of programs and text. It is fitted with short-stroke keys. The key layout is predefined and cannot be modified, i.e. the key caps cannot be transposed. The keyboard is secured from the rear using special clamps supplied with the panel. Validity The following description applies to the component: Name Key type Order number CNC full keyboard KB 483C mechanical 6FC5203-0AF20-0AA1 Features Keys - 78 mechanical keys in standard/US QWERTY layout Key groups - Alphabetic key group with special characters - Numeric key group with special characters - Cursor key group - CNC function keys with hot keys for fast selection of the control area Connections - USB 1.1 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 905 Full CNC keyboard: KB 483C 35.2 Operating and display elements 35.2 Operating and display elements Key assignments Figure 35-1 Layout of CNC full keyboard KB 483C Keyboard codes The key codes assigned to the relevant node in the matrix are stored in the keyboard table. When a key is actuated, the appropriate code is read from the table and sent to the PCU. Note The keyboard does not support Suspend mode or a Remote Wakeup function. 1. Keyboard level 906 2. Keyboard level USB code Labeling Key function on standard PC keyboard q 14 Q Q 14 w w 1a W W 1a e e 08 E E 08 r r 15 R R 15 Key function on standard PC keyboard q Shift key Shift key USB code Labeling t t 17 T T 17 y y 1c Y Y 1c u u 18 U U 18 i i 0c I I 0c o o 12 O O 12 p p 13 P P 13 a a s s d d f f g g none Switchover Key 04 A A 16 S S SHIFT 04 16 07 D D 07 09 F F 09 0a G G 0a Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Full CNC keyboard: KB 483C 35.2 Operating and display elements 1. Keyboard level Labeling Key function on standard PC keyboard h h 2. Keyboard level Shift key USB code Labeling Key function on standard PC keyboard 0b H H Shift key USB code 0b j j 0d J J 0d k k 0e K K 0e l l 0f L L 0f z z 1d Z Z 1d x x 1b X X 1b c c 06 C C 06 v v 19 V V 19 b b 05 B B 05 n n 11 N N 11 m m 10 M (GND) M (GND) 10 34 " " ' ' * * [ [ 2f { { 2f ] ] 30 } } 30 \ \ 31 | | 31 , , 36 < < 36 SHIFT 25 34 none 35 ; ; 33 : : 33 space character space character 2c +/- ~ 2c 1 1 1e ! ! 1e 2 2 1f @ @ 3 3 20 # # 4 4 21 $ $ 21 5 5 22 % % 22 6 6 23 ^ ^& 23 7 7 8 8 9 0 - none Switchover SHIFT 1f 20 24 & & 24 25 * * 25 9 26 ( ( 26 0 27 ) ) 27 -(NB) 56 _ Key 56 . . 37 > > 37 / / 38 ? ? 38 = = 2e + + 57 ~ ~ 35 BACKSPACE BACKSPACE 2a BACKSPACE Shift BACKSPACE 2a DEL DEL 4c DEL Shift DEL INSERT INSERT 49 INSERT Shift INSERT 49 INPUT RETURN 28 INPUT Shift RETURN 28 TAB TAB RIGHT 2b TAB TAB LEFT 2b Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Do not use SHIFT 4c 907 Full CNC keyboard: KB 483C 35.2 Operating and display elements 1. Keyboard level 2. Keyboard level Shift key USB code Labeling Key function on standard PC keyboard ALARM CANCEL ESC 29 HELP F12 45 CHANNEL F11 44 MACHINE Shift F11 PROGRAM MANAGER 7 (NB) PROGRAM 1 (NB) ALARM 9 (NB) OFFSET 3 (NB) CUSTOM Shift F12 NEXT WINDOW Home SHIFT Labeling 44 No Shift key 59 SHIFT 45 61 5b 4a NEXT WINDOW Shift Home Shift END END 4d END Page up 4b PAGE UP PAGE DOWN Page Down 4e PAGE DOWN 5 (NB) Cursor up CURSOR DOWN Cursor down CURSOR RIGHT Cursor right CURSOR LEFT Cursor left CTRL Control 908 USB code Do not use END SELECT Shift key 5f PAGE UP CURSOR UP Key function on standard PC keyboard none Switchover Key 5d 4a 4d SHIFT 4e Do not use 52 CURSOR UP Shift Cursor up 52 51 CURSOR DOWN Shift Cursor down 51 4f CURSOR RIGHT Shift Cursor right 50 SHIFT Shift Cursor left CTRL Shift Control SHIFT CONTROL ALT Shift Alt SHIFT ALT ALT Alt ALT Shift SHIFT 4f 50 CURSOR LEFT CONTROL SHIFT 4b Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Full CNC keyboard: KB 483C 35.3 Interfaces 35.3 Interfaces 3(FRQQHFWLRQ0VFUHZWHUPLQDO 86%FDEOHLQFOXGHGLQWKHGHOLYHU\NLW s s 'LPHQVLRQVLQPP Figure 35-2 ; 3(FRQQHFWLRQVFUHZWHUPLQDO &DEOHFODPS Front, side and rear views of CNC full keyboard KB 483C USB upstream port X302 The interface (see Fig.) is designed as a "high powered interface" (5 V/500 mA). As a result, the keyboard can be connected only to USB hubs which possess their own power supply and whose downstream ports are capable of supplying a 500 mA current. A standard USB 2.0 cable of max. 3 m in length (recommended: 1.5 m) is supported. Connector designation: X302 Plug-connector type: USB-B connector (4-pin) For pin assignment see section: "Connection Conditions", section: "Secondary electrical conditions" Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 909 Full CNC keyboard: KB 483C 35.4 Mounting 35.4 Mounting Panel cutout 'LPHQVLRQVLQPP Figure 35-3 Panel cutout for CNC full keyboard KB 483C (plate thickness 1.5 - 6.0 mm) Dimension drawing $ $ PPPP 5] ,QWKHVHDOLQJDUHD 0RXQWLQJIUDPH $$ 5HDUYLHZ ZLWKWHQVLRQMDFNV 'HWDLO0RXQWLQJRIWHQVLRQMDFNV 7RUTXHb1P 7HQVLRQMDFNV [ Figure 35-4 910 0RXQWLQJIUDPH 'LPHQVLRQVLQPP Dimension drawing for mounting the CNC full keyboard KB 483C Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Full CNC keyboard: KB 483C 35.4 Mounting Mounting position 0RXQWLQJSRVLWLRQPD[r WRWKHYHUWLFDO SHUPLWWHG )URQW Figure 35-5 Mounting position Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 911 Full CNC keyboard: KB 483C 35.5 Technical data 35.5 Technical data Safety Protective class / approvals Degree of protection per EN 60529 (IEC 60529) III; PELV acc. to EN 50178 / CE Front panel IP54 Rear side IP 00 Fusing to cabinet: IP65 Noise immunity ESD HF radio HF conducted (on USB cable) Air discharge 8 kV / contact discharge 4 kV 10 V/m, 80% AM, 1 kHz / 80 -1000 MHz 10 V, 80% AM, 1 kHz / 0.15 - 80 MHz Electrical data Supply volt. / current (typ.) 4,75, ... 5.25 V/102 mA Power consumption, max. 0.4 W Mechanical data Dimensions Width: 483 mm Height: 133 mm Weight approx. 1.3 kg Max. distance from PCU 3 m (recommended: 1.5 m) Basic color of casing Key color Mechanical ambient conditions Depth: 31 mm Mounting depth: 20.2 mm Anthracite 614 Pastel turquoise RAL 6034, pantone yellow light basic 700, medium basic 701 Operation Transport (in transport packaging) Vibratory load 10 - 58 Hz: 0.015 mm 58 - 200 Hz: 19.6 m/s2 3M4 per EN 60721-3-3 5 - 9 Hz: 3.5 mm 9 - 200 Hz: 9.81 m/s2 2M2 per EN 60721-3-2 Shock stressing 150 m/s2, 11 ms, 18 shocks 3M2 per EN 60721-3-3 150 m/s2, 11 ms, 18 shocks 2M2 per EN 60721-3-2 Climatic ambient conditions Heat dissipation By natural convection Condensation, spraying water and icing Supply air Applicable standards Climate class Temperature limits Temperature change Limits for relative humidity Permissible change in the relative air humidity 912 Not permissible Without caustic gases, dusts and oils Operation Storage/shipping (in transport packaging) EN 60721-3-3 EN 60721-3-1 / -3-2 3K5 1K3 / 2K4 0 ... 45 C (at front) 0 ... 55 C (at rear) -25 ... 55 C Max. 10 K/h Max. 18 K/h 5 ... 80% at 25C 5 ... 95% at 25C max. 0.1% /min Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Full CNC keyboard: KB 483C 35.6 Accessories 35.6 Accessories Set of tension jacks Component Description Number Order number Set of tension jacks for supplementary components with 2.5 mm profile, length: 20 mm Set of 9 6FC5248-0AF14-0AA0 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 913 Full CNC keyboard: KB 483C 35.6 Accessories 914 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 36 Full CNC keyboard: KB 310C 36.1 Description The SINUMERIK KB 310C full CNC keyboard permits user-friendly input of programs and text. It is equipped with short-stroke keys. The key layout is predefined and cannot be modified, i.e. the key caps cannot be transposed. The keyboard is secured from the rear using special clamps supplied with the panel. Validity The following description applies to the component: Name Keyboard Order number CNC full keyboard KB 310C mechanical 6FC5203-0AF21-0AA1 Features Keys - Standard/US QWERTY layout - 75 mechanical keys Key groups - Alphabetic key group with special characters - Numeric key group with special characters - Cursor key group - CNC function keys with hot keys for fast selection of the control area Connections - USB 1.1 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 915 Full CNC keyboard: KB 310C 36.2 Operating and display elements 36.2 Operating and display elements Key assignments Figure 36-1 Layout of CNC full keyboard KB 310C Keyboard codes For keyboard codes can be found in section: "CNC full keyboard KB 483C", section: "Operating and display elements". 916 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Full CNC keyboard: KB 310C 36.3 Interfaces 36.3 Interfaces 'LPHQVLRQVLQPP 0RXQWLQJEUDFNHWV ;86%% 3(WHUPLQDOV Figure 36-2 &DEOHFODPSIRU86%FDEOH Front, side and rear views of CNC full keyboard KB 310C USB upstream port X302 The interface (see Fig.) is designed as a "high powered interface" (5 V/500 mA). As a result, the keyboard can be connected only to USB hubs which possess their own power supply and whose downstream ports are capable of supplying a 500 mA current. A standard USB 2.0 cable of max. 3 m in length (recommended: 1.5 m) is supported. Connector designation: X302 Plug-connector type: USB-B connector (4-pin) For pin assignment see section: "Connection Conditions", section: "Secondary electrical conditions" Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 917 Full CNC keyboard: KB 310C 36.4 Mounting 36.4 Mounting Note When mounting, install and secure the USB connecting cable properly to ensure that it cannot chafe against the frame of the keyboard. Panel cutout Figure 36-3 918 Panel cutout for CNC full keyboard KB 310C (plate thickness 1.5 - 6.0 mm) Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Full CNC keyboard: KB 310C 36.4 Mounting Dimension drawing for mounting $ $ $$ ,QWKHVHDOLQJDUHD PPPP 5] 0RXQWLQJIUDPH 7HQVLRQMDFNV [ 0RXQWLQJIUDPH 5HDUYLHZZLWKWHQVLRQMDFNV Figure 36-4 'HWDLOHGYLHZ0RXQWLQJRIWHQVLRQMDFNV 7RUTXH1P Dimension drawing for mounting the CNC full keyboard KB 310C Mounting position 0RXQWLQJSRVLWLRQPD[r WRWKHYHUWLFDO SHUPLWWHG )URQW Figure 36-5 Mounting position Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 919 Full CNC keyboard: KB 310C 36.5 Technical data 36.5 Technical data Safety Protective class / approvals Degree of protection as per EN 60529 III; PELV acc. to EN 50178 / CE Front panel IP54 Rear side IP 00 Fusing to cabinet: IP65 Noise immunity ESD HF radio HF conducted (on USB cable) Air discharge 8 kV / contact discharge 4 kV 10 V/m, 80% AM, 1 kHz / 80 -1000 MHz 10 V, 80% AM, 1 kHz / 0.15 - 80 MHz Electrical data Supply volt. / current (typ.) 4,75, ... 5.25 V/102 mA Power consumption, max. 0.4 W Mechanical data Dimensions Width: 310 mm Height: 175 mm Weight approx. 0.9 kg Max. distance from PCU 3 m (recommended: 1.5 m) Basic color of casing Key color Mechanical ambient conditions Depth: 31 mm Mounting depth: 20 mm Anthracite 614 Pastel turquoise RAL 6034, pantone yellow light basic 700, medium basic 701 Operation Transport (in transport packaging) Vibratory load 10 - 58 Hz: 0.015 mm 58 - 200 Hz: 19.6 m/s2 3M4 per EN 60721-3-3 5 - 9 Hz: 3.5 mm 9 - 200 Hz: 9.81 m/s2 2M2 per EN 60721-3-2 Shock stressing 150 m/s2, 11 ms, 18 shocks 3M2 per EN 60721-3-3 150 m/s2, 11 ms, 18 shocks 2M2 per EN 60721-3-2 Climatic ambient conditions Heat dissipation By natural convection Condensation, spraying water and icing Supply air Applicable standards Climate class Temperature limits Temperature change Limits for relative humidity Permissible change in the relative air humidity 920 Not permissible Without caustic gases, dusts and oils Operation Storage/shipping (in transport packaging) EN 60721-3-3 EN 60721-3-1 / -3-2 3K5 1K3 / 2K4 0 ... 45 C (at front) 0 ... 55 C (at rear) -20 ... 55 C Max. 10 K/h Max. 18 K/h 5 ... 80% at 25C 5 ... 95% at 25C max. 0.1% /min Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Full CNC keyboard: KB 310C 36.6 Accessories 36.6 Accessories Set of tension jacks Component Description Number Order number Set of tension jacks for supplementary components with 2.5 mm profile, length: 20 mm Set of 9 6FC5248-0AF14-0AA0 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 921 Full CNC keyboard: KB 310C 36.6 Accessories 922 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Full CNC keyboard: OP 032S 37.1 37 Description Validity The following description applies to the full CNC keyboard OP 032S (Order No. 6FC5203-0AC00-1AA0) Features Keys - Standard/US QWERTY layout - 74 mechanical keys Key groups - Alphabetic key group with special characters - Numeric key group with special characters - Cursor key group - NC function keys Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 923 Full CNC keyboard: OP 032S 37.2 Operator controls and indicators 37.2 Operator controls and indicators Figure 37-1 924 Front view of CNC full keyboard OP 032S Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Full CNC keyboard: OP 032S 37.3 Interfaces 37.3 Interfaces PS2 keyboard interface to PCU (X111) Connector designation: X111 Type: Mini-DIN connector 6-pole, straight Cable length to the PCU max 2.5 m Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 925 Full CNC keyboard: OP 032S 37.4 Mounting 37.4 Mounting Figure 37-2 Dimension drawing of full CNC keyboard OP 032S 0 WLPHV WLPHV )URQWSDQHORXWFXWIRUUHDUPRXQWLQJ:[+ [PP Figure 37-3 926 5LYHWSUHVVILWQXW0 RUWKUHDGHGEROW0 Panel cutout for CNC full keyboard OP 032S (rear view) Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Full CNC keyboard: OP 032S 37.5 Technical specifications 37.5 Technical specifications Security Protective class / approvals Degree of protection per EN 60529 III; PELV acc. to EN 50178 / CE Front panel IP54 Rear side IP20 Interference immunity ESD HF radio Air discharge 8 kV / contact discharge 4 kV 10 V/m, 80% AM, 1 kHz / 80 -1000 MHz Burst (on USB cable) HF conducted 2.5 kV, 5/50 ns, 5 kHz 10 V, 80% AM, 1 kHz / 0.15 - 80 MHz Electrical specifications Supply volt. / current (typ.) 4.75, ... 5.25 V/80 mA Power consumption, max. 0.4 W Mechanical data Dimensions Width: 310 mm Height: 175 mm Weight Mechanical ambient conditions Depth: 24 mm Approx. 1.3 kg Operation Transport (in transport packaging) Vibratory load 10 -58 Hz: 0.015 mm 58 -200 Hz: 19.6 m/s2 3M4 per EN 60721-3-3 5 -9 Hz: 3.5 mm 9 -200 Hz: 9.81 m/s2 2M2 per EN 60721-3-2 Shock stressing 150 m/s2, 11 ms, 18 shocks 3M2 per EN 60721-3-3 150 m/s2, 11 ms, 18 shocks 2M2 per EN 60721-3-2 Climatic ambient conditions Cooling By natural convection Condensation, spraying water and icing Supply air Applicable standards Climate class Temperature limits Temperature change Limits for relative humidity Permissible change in the relative air humidity Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Not permitted Without caustic gases, dusts and oils Operation Storage/shipping (in transport packaging) EN 60721-3-3 EN 60721-3-1 / -3-2 3K5 1K3 / 2K4 0 ... 45 C (at front) 0 ... 55 C (at rear) -25 ... 55 C Max. 10 K/h Max. 18 K/h 5 ... 80% 5 ... 95% max. 0.1% /min 927 Full CNC keyboard: OP 032S 37.6 Accessories 37.6 Accessories Set of tension jacks 928 Description Number Order No.: Retaining screws 100 pieces 6FC3998-7BJ10 Labeled key cap 1 set 6FC5248-0AA02-0AA0 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 38 Standard PC keyboard KBPC PX US 38.1 Description The standard PC keyboard MF-II combines USB and PS2 technologies, depending on the connecting cable. This professional keyboard has a striking, modern design and useful extra features. For greater ease of use it includes five additional function keys for one-stroke launch of applications. The detachable trackball rest offers ergonomic operation and can simply be removed if space is at a premium. These features make the standard PC keyboard MF-II the ideal choice for professional tasks. Validity The description applies to the following components: Component Order No.: SINUMERIK 810D/840D/840C PC standard keyboard (MF-II) incl. 2m PS/2 line (KBPC PX/US; S26381-K340-V110) incl. removable hand rest 6FC5203-0AC01-0AA0 Features Compact design with low profile, ergonomic keys, up to 6 characters possible per key MF-II compatible, 104/105 key layout System compatibility: PS/2 and USB Interface: PS/2 or USB, depending on the cable used Power On function only with PS/2 cable, ACPI function only with USB cable (T26139-Y3812-V1) Operating systems: Windows 3.11/95/NT/XP Restricted suitability for industrial use; not intended for permanent use. Only for use in installation and servicing. Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 929 Standard PC keyboard KBPC PX US 38.2 Operator controls and indicators 38.2 Operator controls and indicators Figure 38-1 930 View of standard PC keyboard MF-II Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Standard PC keyboard KBPC PX US 38.3 Technical specifications 38.3 Technical specifications Input voltage + 5V DC Power consumption max. 0.3 W Degree of protection DIN EN 60529 (IEC 60529) Humidity classification in accordance with DIN EN 60721-3-3 Permissible ambient temperature IP20 Class 3K5 condensation and icing excluded, low air temperature 0 C Storage and transportation - 20 ... 50 C Weight Dimensions Operations 15 ... 32 C Approx. 1 kg Width Height Depth Without trackball rest 474 mm 36 mm 175 mm With trackball rest 474 mm 36 mm 248 mm Product safety Ergonomics Electromagnetic compatibility Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 IEC 60959, UL 1950 ISO 9241-4/EN 29241-4 CE certification in accordance with EU Directives 89/336/EEC (EN 55022/B) EN 55024, EN 61000-3-2, EN 61000-3-3 931 Standard PC keyboard KBPC PX US 38.3 Technical specifications 932 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 39 Standard PC keyboard KBPC CG US 39.1 Description Programs and texts can be edited easily with the KBPC CG US standard PC keyboard. The standard PC keyboard KBPC CG US is not suitable for industrial use (EMC) and should not be used as a permanent installation. It must be used only for servicing and commissioning. Validity The description applies to the following components: Description Note Order No.: PC standard keyboard KBPC CG US MF-II compatible, 104 key layout, connection: USB, length of connecting cable: 1.7 m 6FC5203-0AC01-3AA0 Features Flat compact design, ergonomic keys MF-II compatible, 104 key layout System compatibility: USB 1.1, USB 2.0 Interface: USB Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 933 Standard PC keyboard KBPC CG US 39.2 Operator controls and indicators 39.2 Operator controls and indicators Figure 39-1 934 View of PC standard keyboard: KBPC CG US Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Standard PC keyboard KBPC CG US 39.3 Technical data 39.3 Technical data Certificates and approvals FCC, GS, CE, c-tick, cURus Input voltage + 5.25V DC Power consumption 0.1 W Degree of protection DIN EN 60529 (IEC 60529) IP20 Permissible ambient temperature Storage and transportation - 20 ... 60 C Weight Dimensions (mm) Electromagnetic compatibility Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Operations 0 ... 50 C Approx. 1.3 kg Width: 405 Height: 44 Depth: 180 CE certification in accordance with EU Directives 89/336/EEC (EN 55022/B) EN 55024, EN 61000-3-2, EN 61000-3-3 935 Standard PC keyboard KBPC CG US 39.3 Technical data 936 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 40 Standard PC keyboard KBPC USB US 40.1 Description The standard PC keyboard KBPC USB US with hub has an integrated hub for three US connections. A USB mouse can be connected here. The wrist rest supplied with it supports ergonomic working. Programs and texts can be edited easily with the standard PC keyboard. Validity The description applies to the following components: Description Note Order No.: KBPC USB US standard PC keyboard MF-II compatible, 104/105 keyboard layout with 6FC5203-0AC01-2AA0 integrated hub, connection: USB, length of connecting cable: 1.9 m Features Flat compact design, ergonomic keys, up to 6 characters possible on one key MF-II-compatible, 104/105 keyboard layout with integrated hub System compatibility: USB 1.1 Interface: USB The ACPI key replaces the network key and provides the following functions: - standby mode and - power down Operating system: Windows XP Restricted suitability for industrial use; not intended for permanent use. Only for use in installation and servicing. Note The standard PC keyboard cannot be used in conjunction with the full CNC keyboard. Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 937 Standard PC keyboard KBPC USB US 40.2 Operating and display elements 40.2 Operating and display elements Figure 40-1 View of KBPC USB Activation of readiness for operation Press any key. Standby mode To activate standby mode, press the ACPI key for less than 4 seconds. Power down mode To activate power down mode, press the ACPI key for more than 4 seconds. 938 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Standard PC keyboard KBPC USB US 40.3 Technical data 40.3 Technical data Input voltage + 5.25V DC Power consumption max. 0.3 W Degree of protection DIN EN 60529 (IEC 60529) Humidity classification in accordance with DIN EN 60721-3-3 Permissible ambient temperature IP20 Class 3K5 condensation and icing excluded, low air temperature 0 C Storage and transportation - 20 ... 50 C Weight Dimensions (mm) Product security Ergonomics Electromagnetic compatibility Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Operations 15 ... 32 C Approx. 1 kg Width: 463 Height: 37 Depth: 166 IEC 60950, UL 1950 ISO 9241-4/EN 29241-4 CE certification in accordance with EU Directives 89/336/EEC (EN 55022/B) EN 55024, EN 61000-3-2, EN 61000-3-3 939 Standard PC keyboard KBPC USB US 40.3 Technical data 940 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 41 Standard PC keyboard KBPC SC US 41.1 Description Programs and texts can be edited easily with the KBPC SC US standard PC keyboard. Figure 41-1 View of the KBPC SC US Validity The description applies to the following components: Description Note KBPC SC US standard PC keyboard Order No.: 6FC5203-0AC01-1AA0 Features Simple operation Ergonomic key design and soft pressure point High-contrast key labeling Restricted suitability for industrial use; not intended for permanent use. Only for use in installation and servicing. Note The standard PC keyboard cannot be used in conjunction with the full CNC keyboard. Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 941 Standard PC keyboard KBPC SC US 41.2 Technical specifications 41.2 Technical specifications Input voltage + 5.25V DC Power consumption max. 0.3 W Degree of protection DIN EN 60529 (IEC 60529) Humidity classification in accordance with DIN EN 60721-3-3 Permissible ambient temperature IP20 Class 3K5 condensation and icing excluded, low air temperature 0 C Storage and transportation - 20 ... 50 C Weight Dimensions (mm) 942 Operations 15 ... 32 C Approx. 0.75 kg Width: 463 Height: 35 Depth: 156 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 42 Keyboard tray 42.1 Description The extremely stable 19" keyboard tray in anthracite facilitates your work when using a standard external keyboard with an operator panel. Special screws permit easy attachment of the keyboard tray, and equally easy removal after the work is finished. If required, a version with an additional removable tray for a mouse is also available. Validity The description applies to the following components: Name Remarks Order number Keyboard tray for keyboard with 2 collar screws 6FC5247-0AA40-0AA0 View Figure 42-1 View of keyboard tray Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 943 Keyboard tray 42.2 Technical data 42.2 Technical data Weight Dimensions (mm) 944 approx. 1.6 kg Width: 487 Depth: 196 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Compact FlashCard 43.1 43 Description The Compact Flash Card is suitable for archiving user data. It is suitable as additional memory for user data of the PCU 20 / PCU 50 / PCU 70 (via PC-Card adapter) and has a memory capacity of 512 MB. Validity The description below applies to the CompactFlash card (order number: 6FC5313-4AG00-0AA2 Key statement View Figure 43-1 View of Compact FlashCard Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 945 Compact FlashCard 43.2 Technical data 43.2 Technical data Safety Degree of protection per EN 60529 (IEC 60529) IP20 Mechanical data Dimensions (mm) Width: 43 Weight Height: 3.3 Depth: 37 12 g Climatic ambient conditions Condensation, spraying water and icing Applicable standards 946 Not permissible Operation Storage and transportation EN 60721-3-3 EN 60721-3-1 / -3-2 Permissible ambient temperature 0 ... 70C -25 ... 85C Limits for relative humidity 8 ... 95 % 8 ... 95 % Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 44 3.5" Floppy Disk Drive 44.1 Description The AT-compatible floppy disk drive with lockable front door is used to read and write data from/to 3.5" disks. It can be installed in a customer operator panel front. Validity The description below applies to the SINUMERIK 3.5" disk drive (order number 6FC5235-0AA05-0AA1) Features 3.5" disk drive, including connecting cable (length: max. 0.5 m) for connecting to PCU 20 PCU 50 PCU 70 View Figure 44-1 Front view Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 947 3.5" Floppy Disk Drive 44.1 Description 5LEERQFDEOH VRFNHWFRQQHFWRU Figure 44-2 Side view (right) Figure 44-3 948 Top view Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 3.5" Floppy Disk Drive 44.2 Interfaces 44.2 Interfaces Power supply interface X121 The power supply interface is located on the rear side of the 3.5" disk drive. 0IL[LQJVFUHZ PD[VFUHZLQGHSWKPP 5LEERQFDEOHVRFNHWFRQQHFWRU SLQ 6KLHOG FRQQHFWLRQ0 *URXQGWHUPLQDO ; QRWDVVLJQHG Figure 44-4 ; SRZHUVXSSO\LQWHUIDFH Rear view Connector designation: X121 Type: 3-pin terminal block Table 44-1 Pin assignments for power supply Pin Name Meaning 1 P24 external +24 V DC 2 M external Ground 3 PI Protective conductor Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Type VI (Voltage Input) 949 3.5" Floppy Disk Drive 44.3 Mounting 44.3 Mounting Installation instructions 3DQHOFXWRXW 0IL[LQJVFUHZ PD[VFUHZLQGHSWKPP 5 ,QVWDOODWLRQGHSWK IURPVXUIDFHRILQVWDOODWLRQZDOO PPGHSWKPHDVXUH VHHLOOXVWUDWLRQVVLGHYLHZULJKWDQGWRSYLHZ PP &OHDUDQFHIRURXWSRLQJFDEOHXQLW Figure 44-5 Dimension drawing for the installation CAUTION The disk drive can be mounted in any position, except upside down. 950 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 3.5" Floppy Disk Drive 44.3 Mounting Dimension drawing of blanking plate $ 6,(0(16 5 % 6HFWLRQ$% GHJUHHV BBBBBBB E FLUFXPIHUHQFLDO E Figure 44-6 Dimension drawing of blanking plate Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 951 3.5" Floppy Disk Drive 44.4 Technical specifications 44.4 Technical specifications Security Safety class Degree of protection per EN 60529 III; PELV acc. to EN 50178 Front panel IP54 Approvals Rear side IP 00 CE Electrical specifications Input voltage DC 24 V Power consumption max. 5 W Mechanical data Dimensions Width: 145 mm Height: 50 mm Weight Depth: 202 mm Mounting depth: 185 mm Approx. 0.8 kg Distance from PCU Max. 0.5 m Mechanical ambient conditions Vibratory load 10 -100 Hz: 1.5 g 101 -200 Hz: 1.0 g 201 -600 Hz: 0.5 g Climatic ambient conditions Cooling By natural convection Condensation, spraying water and icing Supply air Applicable standards Climate class Temperature limits Temperature change Limits for relative humidity Permissible change in the relative air humidity 952 Not permitted Without caustic gases, dusts and oils Operation Storage/shipping (in transport packaging) EN 60721-3-3 EN 60721-3-1 / -3-2 3K5 1K3 / 2K4 0 ... 55 C (at rear) -20 ... 60C Max. 10 K/h Max. 18 K/h 5 ... 80% 5 ... 95% max. 0.1% /min Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 45 Floppy disk drive 3.5" (USB) 45.1 Description The 3.5" disk drive (USB) is suitable for archiving user data and can be installed in front panels. It is connected via a USB1.1 interface. Validity This description applies to the following components: Component Order No.: 6FC5235-0AA05-1AA1 3.5" floppy disk drive with USB interface Features 6FC5235-0AA05-1AA2 The floppy disk drive is used to load and save data from/to 3.5" disk with a "Normal density" capacity (720 KB) and "High density" capacity (1.2 / 1.44 MB) Can be mounted in front panels System can be booted from floppy drive Connection: USB 1.1 Can be supplied in two variants to suit different operating conditions. The 3.5" floppy disk drive is supplied with a connected 1 m long USB cable. View Figure 45-1 Front view Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 953 Figure 45-2 Floppy disk drive 3.5" (USB) 45.1 Description Side view from right Figure 45-3 954 Top view Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Floppy disk drive 3.5" (USB) 45.2 Interfaces 45.2 Interfaces 45.2.1 Hardware Connector assignment Table 45-1 Connector assignment - USB standard 1.1 Contact No. Signal name Description 1 VCC Power supply 2 - Data Data- 3 + Data Data + 4 Ground Ground Cable The cable is fitted with a standard USB-A connector at the device end. 6WUDLQUHOLHI Figure 45-4 45.2.2 Strain relief of cable Software The drive complies with USB standard 1.1. Note The driver software is not included in the delivery kit. Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 955 Floppy disk drive 3.5" (USB) 45.3 Mounting 45.3 Mounting PP PP 0IL[LQJVFUHZ 0D[VFUHZLQ GHSWKPP PP PP PP GPP GPP PP Figure 45-5 Panel cutout CAUTION The mounting position of the floppy disk drive is shown in the following two figures. The drive must not be installed upside down. r Figure 45-6 956 Side view of mounting position Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Floppy disk drive 3.5" (USB) 45.3 Mounting r Figure 45-7 Front view of mounting position Note The front cover must be closed to prevent ingress of dirt or damage. Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 957 Floppy disk drive 3.5" (USB) 45.4 Notes about operation 45.4 Notes about operation 45.4.1 Overview Longer USB cable It is not permissible to extend the USB cable. Required power The drives are high-power devices (power consumption up to 500 mA); they therefore must not be operated on low-power USB outputs (up to 100 mA). Leaving floppy disks in drive Floppy disks should not be left in the drive for longer than necessary, since 1. they and the drive are not protected against dust in this situation, 2. the risk of data errors increases at temperatures higher than 45 C. 45.4.2 Disk drive (6FC5235-0AA05-1AA1) SINUMERIK PCU 50 and PCU 70 A PCU operating with PCU basic software WinNT4.0 = V07.03.03 is required to operate the USB floppy disk drive (Order No. ...-1AA1) on the SINUMERIK PCU 50 (566 MHz / 1.2 GHz) with Windows NT 4.0. You can obtain this version by installing the Service Pack V07.03.03 (available from your Siemens service center). The service pack V07.03.03 adds the driver for the USB floppy disk drive to the software version V07.03.02 which is preinstalled on shipped PCU 50. The USB disk drive can be operated on SINUMERIK PCU 50s and PCU 70s with Windows XP without a separate driver. SIMATIC panels and panel PCs To use the USB floppy disk drive on the following SIMATIC panels OP/TP 270 MP 270B MP 370 a separate driver is required. This driver can be downloaded from the Siemens website (Service & Support page for SIMATIC panels) (USB Storage Driver V1.0). The driver also includes documentation with installation instructions. No separate driver is required to operate the USB floppy disk drive on SIMATIC panel PCs (except for Windows NT 4.0 operating system). 958 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Floppy disk drive 3.5" (USB) 45.4 Notes about operation 45.4.3 Disk drive (6FC5235-0AA05-1AA2) SINUMERIK PCU 50 and PCU 70 A PCU 50/70 (566 MHz/1.2 GHz) with BIOS V02.03.07 and PCU basic software for WinNT4.0 V07.03.03 or PCU basic software for WinXP V07.03.02.01 are needed to operate the USB floppy disk drive (Order No. ...-1AA2). The PCU basic software for WinNT V07.03.03 can be obtained by installing the V07.03.03 Service Pack (available from your local Siemens service center). The service pack V07.03.03 adds the driver for the USB floppy disk drive to the software version V07.03.02 which is preinstalled on shipped PCU 50. The USB disk drive can be operated on SINUMERIK PCU 50s and PCU 70s with Windows XP without a separate driver. Only one floppy disk drive may be connected to each PCU 50 / 70; the drive must be connected before the PCU is switched on. The USB floppy disk drive can be activated as drive B without changing the BIOS settings: In operation with HMI Advanced, the entry "FloppyDisk=" in file MMC.INI must therefore be adapted. Reading the emergency boot disks V02.03.x or V02.04.x from the USB disk drive takes a very long time. We therefore recommend the use of the emergency boot disks V02.05.00 (available from your local Siemens service center). SIMATIC panel PCs The USB floppy disk drive is approved for operating systems MS Windows 2000 and MS Windows XP. The appropriate drivers for the disk drive are supplied with the operating system software. SIMATIC panels To use the USB floppy disk drive on the following SIMATIC panels OP/TP 270 MP 270B MP 370 a separate driver is required. This driver can be downloaded from the Siemens website (Service & Support page for SIMATIC panels) (USB Storage Driver V1.0). The driver also includes documentation with installation instructions. Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 959 Floppy disk drive 3.5" (USB) 45.5 Technical specifications 45.5 Technical specifications 45.5.1 Disk drive (6FC5235-0AA05-1AA1) Security Safety class Degree of protection per EN 60529 III; PELV acc. to EN 50178 Front panel IP54 Rear side IP 00 Approvals CE Electrical specifications Input voltage DC 5.25 V Power consumption max. 2.5 W Mechanical data Dimensions Width: 145 mm Height: 50 mm Depth: 161 mm Mounting depth: 144 mm Weight Approx. 0.3 kg Orientation any (except upside down) Distance from PCU Mechanical ambient conditions Vibratory load Shock stressing Applicable standards Max. 5 m Operation Storage/transport 10 -200 Hz: 0.5 g 10 -200 Hz: 1 g 5 g; 30 ms 10 g; 11 ms EN 60721-3-3; 3M4 EN 60721-3-2; 2M2 Climatic ambient conditions Cooling By natural convection Condensation, spraying water and icing Supply air Applicable standards Climate class Temperature limits Temperature change Limits for relative humidity Permissible change in the relative air humidity 960 Not permitted Without caustic gases, dusts and oils Operation Storage/shipping (in transport packaging) EN 60721-3-3 EN 60721-3-1 / -3-2 3K5 1K3 / 2K4 4 ... 50 C -20 ... 60C Max. 10 K/h Max. 18 K/h 20 ... 80% 5 ... 90% max. 0.1% /min Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Floppy disk drive 3.5" (USB) 45.5 Technical specifications 45.5.2 Disk drive (6FC5235-0AA05-1AA2) Security Safety class Degree of protection per EN 60529 III; PELV acc. to EN 50178 Front panel IP54 Rear side IP 00 Approvals CE Electrical specifications Input voltage DC 5.25 V Power consumption max. 2.5 W Mechanical data Dimensions Width: 145 mm Height: 50 mm Depth: 161 mm Mounting depth: 144 mm Weight Approx. 0.32 kg Orientation any (except upside down) Distance from PCU Mechanical ambient conditions Vibratory load Shock stressing Applicable standards Max. 5 m Operation Storage/transport 10 -200 Hz: 0.5 g 10 -200 Hz: 1 g 5 g; 30 ms 10 g; 11 ms EN 60721-3-3; 3M4 EN 60721-3-2; 2M2 Climatic ambient conditions Cooling By natural convection Condensation, spraying water and icing Not permitted Supply air Without caustic gases, dusts and oils Operation Applicable standards Climate class Temperature limits EN 60721-3-1 / -3-2 3K5 1K3 / 2K4 4 ... 50 C Max. 20 K/h Limits for relative humidity 20 ... 80% at 4 ... 52C Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Transport EN 60721-3-3 Temperature change Permissible change in the relative air humidity Bearings -22 ... 60C -40 ... 65 C Max. 30 K/h 5 ... 90% at -22 ... 60 C 5 ... 95 % at -40 ... 65 C max. 0.1% /min 961 Floppy disk drive 3.5" (USB) 45.6 Replacement parts 45.6 Replacement parts The following spare parts are available for the 3.5" floppy disk USB: 962 Description Description Floppy disk drive cover with shutter, cover and bearing bracket Number 1 Order No.: 6FC5247-0AA20-0AA0 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Card reader with USB interface 46.1 46 Description The SINUMERIK card reader is intended for archiving and exchanging user data. The card reader is connected via the USB interface. It can be installed in a front panel. This makes data exchange possible without opening the control cabinet. The card reader can be booted. All cards can be inserted and removed during operation. Validity This description applies to card reader Order No.: 6FC5335-0AA00-0AA0. Features Suitable for CF, SD, and MMC cards Installation in front panels Bootability Connection: USB 2.0 The card reader is supplied with a connected 1 m long USB cable. Possible connections The card reader is suitable for connection to: SINUMERIK PCU 50 / 70 with Windows XP SINUMERIK PCU 50.3 SINUMERIK TCU Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 963 ESD guidelines 46.2 Operator controls and indicators Figure 46-1 Front view of the USB card reader (1) Slot cover (2) USB cable (3) LED for displaying read and write processes (red) (4) LED for displaying operational readiness (green) (5) Slot for CF cards (6) Slot for SD / MMC cards Function of the LEDs Two LEDs (see Fig.) with different functions are located next to the slot for CF cards. LED Green Red Display lit permanently if the card reader is ready for operation lit if reading or writing is in progress Card slots The two card slots of the reader are located under the cover. Cards can be put in both slots at the same time as they operate simultaneously. In this way, it is possible to copy files from one card to the other, read or write to the media from various applications at the same time. 964 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 ESD guidelines Note Only use card types and sizes offered by Siemens. You will find the order numbers in Catalog NC 61. We cannot guarantee that every card available on the market can be used. Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 965 ESD guidelines 46.3 Interfaces The card reader has a USB interface (USB 2.0). The card reader can be connected via this interface to a USB interface of the PCU / TCU whose maximum current carrying capacity is 500 mA. Transmission speed If the card reader is connected to a USB 2.0 interface, the bus speed is automatically 480 Mbit/s (high speed). The card reader switches to 12 Mbits/s (full speed) on a USB 1.1 interface. 966 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 ESD guidelines 46.4 Installation PP PP 0IL[LQJVFUHZ PD[VFUHZ GHSWKPP PP PP PP GPP GPP PP Figure 46-2 Panel cutout Note The slot cover of the card reader must be closed to prevent dirt entering or damage during installation. Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 967 ESD guidelines 46.5 Memory cards The card reader is suitable for Compactflash cards (CF) SecureDigital cards (SD) Multimedia cards (MMC) MicroMemory cards (Simatic MMC) Note The read and write speed depends on the card used! Booting With the exception of the Simatic MMC, all other cards are bootable. Card type Bootable CF cards X SD cards X MMC cards X Simatic MMC cards - Note The card reader works like a USB drive. Please note therefore that restrictions in the BIOS or operating system may not always allow booting from such a drive. 968 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 ESD guidelines 46.6 Technical data Safety Safety class Degree of protection to EN 60529 III; PELV acc. to EN 50178 Front panel IP54 Rear side IP 00 Certificates and approvals CE Electrical data Input voltage 4.75 V to 5.25 V Mechanical data Dimensions Width: 145 mm Height: 50 mm Depth: 143 mm Mounting depth: 125 mm Weight Approx. 0.4 kg Card slots Mechanical ambient conditions Vibration stressing Applicable standards 2 (for every 10,000 mating cycles) Operation Storage/transport 10 - 58 Hz: 0.075 mm 10 - 200 Hz: 1 g EN 60721-3-3; 3M4 EN 60721-3-2; 2M2 Climatic environmental conditions Cooling By natural convection Condensation, spraying water and icing Not permitted Air inlet Without caustic gases, dusts and oils Operation Applicable standards Climate class Temperature limits Temperature change Limits for relative humidity Permissible change in the relative air humidity Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Storage Transport EN 60721-3-3 EN 60721-3-1 / -3-2 3K5 1K3 / 2K4 0 ... 60C -40 ... 70 C Max. 20 K/h Max. 90% -40 ... 70 C Max. 30 K/h Max. 90% Max. 90% max. 0.1% /min 969 ESD guidelines 46.7 Accessories The accesories listed in the overview are available for the card reader. 970 Component Description Cover for diskette drive and card reader Amount Order No.: 1 6FC5247-0AA20-0AA0 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 47 Cooling 47.1 Methods For the technical data for the control components (e.g. degree of protection, power loss, etc.), please refer to the section: "Technical data" of the relevant component Note To calculate the heat dissipation, the total power loss PVtotal of all heat-generating components in a casing must be taken into account. Total power loss PVtotal = PV1 + PV2 + PV3 +... [] Convection surface area A [m2]: The surface areas of the front and bottom faces are not included in the convection surface area calculation. Means of heat dissipation Heat dissipation can take place as follows: Heat dissipation by natural convection Heat dissipation by natural convection and internal air turbulence Heat dissipation by open-circuit cooling Heat dissipation by open-circuit ventilation Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 971 ESD guidelines +HDWGLVVLSDWLRQ E\QDWXUDOFRQYHFWLRQ +HDWGLVVLSDWLRQ E\QDWXUDOFRQYHFWLRQDQG LQWHUQDODLUWXUEXOHQFH 2SHUDWRU SDQHOIURQW 7 7 2SHUDWRU SDQHOIURQW 7 7 7KHIUHHFRQYHQWLRQVSDFHUHTXLUHG$>P@LQWKHVSDFHWREHFRQYHUWHG VWHHO RUDOXSODWHPPWKLFN LVFDOFXODWHGDSSUR[LPDWHO\ZLWKUHIHUHQFHWRWKH GLIIHUHQFHLQWHPSHUDWXUH77 7.IURP $>P@ 39WRWDO>:@ $>P@ 39WRWDO>:@ 1RWHV ,QRUGHUWRREVHUYHWKHSHUPLVVLEOHDPELHQW FRQGLWLRQVVSHFLILHGLQWKH7HFKQLFDO GDWDVHFWLRQDLUILOWHUVDUHSURYLGHG 9ROXPHWULFIORZRIDLUILOWHU PK 7>.@ 7>.@ +HDWGLVVLSDWLRQ E\RSHQFLUFXLWFRROLQJ 5HFRPPHQGDWLRQ 7KHIDQPXVWEHLQVWDOOHGLQVXFKDZD\WKDW RSWLPXPKHDWGLVVLSDWLRQLVDFKLHYHG &OHDUDQFHRIDWOHDVWPPVKRXOGEH REVHUYHGLQIURQWRIWKHIDQIRUWKLVSXUSRVH 'XULQJFRROLQJRUYHQWLODWLRQWKHFRROLQJ DQGYHQWLODWLRQVORWVPXVWUHPDLQIUHH +HDWGLVVLSDWLRQ E\RSHQFLUFXLWYHQWLODWLRQ 7KHYROXPHWULFIORZUHTXLUHGKHUHWRUHPRYH WKHORVWKHDWLVFDOFXODWHGDSSUR[LPDWHO\IURP 2SHUDWRU SDQHOIURQW 2SHUDWRU SDQHOIURQW 7 Figure 47-1 7 7 7 39WRWDO>:@ 9>PK@ 7>.@ Means of heat dissipation Note If the convection service area A [m2] is insufficient for "Heat dissipation by natural convection", then "Heat dissipation by natural convection and internal air turbulence" or "Heat dissipation by open-circuit cooling or ventilation" should be used. For hot spots and heat concentration in narrow casings, "Heat dissipation by natural convection and internal air turbulence" is recommended. The total power loss PVtotal can also be calculated as follows for applications of critical temperatures: - current measurement at 24 V power supply - power loss when PVtotal [W] = U (24 V) * | (measured in amps) 972 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 ESD guidelines 47.2 Sample calculation of thermal power loss Calculating the PCU thermal power loss of The power loss (thermal) dissipated by the components in an operator unit is to be dissipated using open-circuit ventilation. The volumetric flow V required for this should be calculated at a difference in temperature of T2 - T1 = T 10K. ([DPSOHIRUKHDWGLVVLSDWLRQ ZLWKRSHQFLUFXLWYHQWLODWLRQ 3&8ZLWK23 &DOFXODWLQJWKHWKHUPDOSRZHUORVV LQFOXGLQJLQWHUQDOSRZHUVXSSO\XQLW 23: 3&8: 39WRWDO : PD[: 7 7 2SHUDWRU SDQHOIURQW 3&8 39WRWDO>:@ 9 >PK@ 7>.@ ([WHUQDOWHPSHUDWXUH 7 GHJUHHV ,QWHUQDOWHPSHUDWXUH 7 GHJUHHV Figure 47-2 7 . Calculating heat dissipation for PCU with OP Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 973 ESD guidelines 974 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 ESD guidelines A ESD notices Electrostatically Sensitive Devices CAUTION Handling of modules containing devices sensitive to electrostatic discharge: When handling electrostatically sensitive devices, make sure that operator, workplace and packing material are properly grounded. Generally, electrostatic modules must not be touched unless work has to be carried out on them. When handling PC boards make absolutely sure that you do not touch component pins or printed conductors. Touch components only if - you are permanently grounded by means of an antistatic chain, - you are wearing ESD boots or ESD boots with grounding strips in conjunction with ESD flooring Modules may be placed only on electrically conductive surfaces (table with ESD top, conductive ESD foam plastic, ESD packing bags, ESD transport containers). Never place modules in the vicinity of display units, monitors, or television sets (minimum distance > 10 cm). Do not bring ESD-sensitive modules into contact with chargeable or highly-insulating materials, such as plastic, insulating table tops or clothing made of synthetic materials. Measurements on modules are allowed only if - the measuring instrument is properly grounded (e.g. equipment grounding conductor), or - before measuring with a potential-free measuring instrument, the probe is briefly discharged (e.g. touch the unpainted metal parts of the control housing). Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 975 ESD guidelines 976 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 List of abbreviations A&D Automation & Drives AC Alternating Current ALS Authorization Lock Switch AS Motor drive side ASIC Application Specific IC AT Advanced Technology BA Mode selector switch BIOS Basic Input Output System CCFL Cold Cathode Fluorescent Lamp CDROM Compact Disk ROM COM Communications module CPU Central Processing Unit CRT Cathode Ray Tube DC Direct Current DIE Handheld terminal DIE Integrated Drive Electronics DIP Dual In-Line Package DKM Direct Key Module DRAM Dynamic RAM EFP Single I/O module EKS Electronic Key System (Euchner's identification system) EMC Electromagnetic Compatibility EN European standard FB Function Block FBG Function Block Group FM Function Module GD Global data communication GND Ground GSD Collective unit file (file describes a PROFIBUS slave following the PROFIBUS standard) B HF Function keys LED HGA Connection for handheld units HHU HandHeld Unit HID Human Interface Device HMI Human Machine Interface: Operating functions of SINUMERIK for operation, programming, and simulation. MMC means the same as HMI. HS Customer keys LED HU Extension keys LED HW Hardware Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 977 List of abbreviations I/O Input/Output I/O Input/Output IC Integrated Circuit IE Industrial Ethernet IP ID letter for degree of protection ISA Industry Standard Architecture (AT standard) K-bus Communication bus KT Customer keys LCD Liquid Crystal Display LE Long Element LED Light Emitter Diode LPT Line Printer MCP Machine Control Panel MCP Machine Control Panel MCU Motion Control Unit, digital single-axis/positioning control MFII Multifunction keyboard II MLFB Machine-readable product designation Modem Modulator-demodulator MP Mobile Panel MPI Multi-Point Interface MPP Machine Pushbutton Panel N.C. Not Connected NC Numeric Control NCK Numerical Control Kernel NCU Numeric Control Unit NMI Non-maskable Interrupt OP Operator panel front OP Operator Panel Front OPI Operator panel front interface P-bus I/O bus PC/ Personal Computer PC/XT PC Extended Technology PCMCIA PC Memory Card International Association PCU PC Unit, PC box (computer unit) PE Potential Earth PELV Protective Extra Low Voltage PER Peripherals PG Programming device PG interface Programming device interface PLC Programmable Logic Control (: component of NC) PNO PROFIBUS User Organization PP Push-Button-Panel PROFIBUS Process Field Bus PS/2 Personal System/2 RAM Random Access Memory 978 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 List of abbreviations ROM Read Only Memory SCSI Small Computer System Interface (parallel interface for up to 7 simultaneous devices) SIM Single Inline Module SPC Serial I/O controller, Siemens PROFIBUS Controller SR Mushroom-shaped button for rapid withdrawal SS Interface STN Super Twisted Nematic (flat screen technology) SVGA Super VGA (screen resolution 800 x 600, 16 million colors) SW Software TCU Thin Client Unit TFT Thin Film Transistor (flat screen technology) UL Underwriters Laboratories UOP Unit Operator Panel USB Universal Serial Bus V.24 Interface standard in accordance with CCITT V.24 VGA Video Graphics Adapter (screen resolution 640 x 480, 16 colors) VLE Video link receiver WD Watch dog WS Selector switch XGA Extended VGA (screen resolution 1024 x 768) Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 979 List of abbreviations 980 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 C Appendix C.1 Key symbols OP 08T Table C-1 Key symbols OP 08T 5000 5001 5002 5003 5068 5069 5070 5071 5072 5073 5074 5075 5076 6000 6001 6002 6003 6004 6005 6006 6007 6008 6009 6010 6011 6012 6013 6014 6015 6016 6017 6018 6019 6069 6070 6071 6072 6073 6074 6075 6020 6021 6022 6023 6024 6025 6026 6027 6028 6029 6030 6031 6032 6033 6034 6035 6036 6037 6038 6040 6041 6042 6043 6044 6045 6046 6039 6048 6049 6050 6051 6052 6053 6054 6055 6056 6057 6058 6059 6060 6061 6062 6063 6064 6065 6066 6067 7133 7134 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 981 Appendix C.1 Key symbols OP 08T 982 7001 7002 7003 7004 7005 7006 7007 7008 7009 7010 7012 7013 7014 7015 7017 7018 7020 7021 7024 7025 7026 7027 7029 7030 7031 7040 7041 7042 7043 7044 7045 7046 7047 7048 7049 7051 7052 7053 7054 7055 7056 7057 7058 7059 7060 7061 7062 7063 7064 7065 7066 7067 7068 7069 7070 7071 7072 7073 7074 7075 7076 7077 7078 7086 7079 7080 7081 7082 7083 7084 7085 7087 7088 7089 7090 7091 7092 7093 7094 7095 7096 7099 7100 7101 7102 7103 7104 7105 7106 7107 7108 7109 7110 7111 7112 7113 7114 7115 7116 7120 7121 7122 7123 7124 7125 7126 7127 7128 7129 7130 7131 7132 7135 7136 7137 7138 7139 7140 7141 7142 7143 7144 7145 7146 7147 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Appendix C.1 Key symbols OP 08T 7148 7149 7150 7151 7152 7153 7154 7155 7156 7157 7158 7159 7160 7161 7162 7163 7164 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 983 Appendix C.2 Feedback on the documentation C.2 Feedback on the documentation This document will be continuously improved with regard to its quality and ease of use. Please help us with this task by sending your comments and suggestions for improvement via e-mail or fax to: E-mail: mailto:docu.motioncontrol@siemens.com Fax: +49 (0) 9131/98 - 63315 Please use the fax form on the back of this page. 7R 6,(0(16$* $ '0&06 32%R[ (5/$1*(1*(50$1< )URP 1DPH $GGUHVVRI\RXU&RPSDQ\'HSW 6WUHHW =LSFRGH &LW\ 3KRQH )D[ GRFXPHQWDWLRQ )D[ 6XJJHVWLRQVDQGRUFRUUHFWLRQV 984 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Appendix C.3 Documentation tree C.3 Documentation tree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perator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 5HFRPPHQGHGPLQLPXPVFRSHRIGRFXPHQWDWLRQ 985 Appendix C.3 Documentation tree 986 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Index AC power supply Connection conditions, 27 Agreement button HT 6, 520, 521 HT 8, 567 PP 012, 858, 859, 862 Ambient conditions Connection conditions, 25, 46 ASCII code Handheld unit B-MPI, 620 Axis override switch Operator panel 15 with VLE, 281 Axis selection switch Mini handheld unit, 593 Backlight inverter HT 6, 549 OP 010S, 93 OP 015, 163, 164 OP 015A, 178 OP 015AT, 224 TP 012, 150 TP 015A, 202 TP 015AT, 246 Backup battery Connection conditions, 45 PCU 50, 389, 394 PCU 50.3, 449 PCU 70, 473 Basic PLC program MCP 310, 698, 705 MCP 483, 663, 670 Basic software PCU 50, 383 BIOS parameters PCU 50, 379 BIOS setup PCU 50, 382 PCU 50.3, 436, 439 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Block diagram PP 012, 828 Boot list PCU 50.3, 436 Boot manager PCU 50, 379 PCU 70, 471 Bus address MCP 483C, 643 Card reader Dimensions, 973 Cardbus cards PCU 50, 386 Central mounting Distributed configuration with VLE, 481, 500 PCU 50, 374 PCU 50.3, 420 PCU 70, 468 CF card Dimensions, 950 Changeover time HT 6, 533 C-MOS level MPI interface, 893, 895 CNC keyboard 15 operator panel w/o VLE, 305 15 operator panel w/o VLE, 306 15 operator panel w/o VLE, 316 KB 310C, 927 KB 483C, 917 Operator panel 15 with VLE, 257, 258 Coding switches Direct control key module, 335, 341, 345, 347 Operator panel 15 with VLE, 278 COM board MCP 310, 690, 691, 698 MCP 483, 652, 654, 663 MPP 483, 789, 803 COM connection PP 012, 824, 831 987 Index Compact Flash card PCU 50.3, 454, 460 Configuration, distributed 15 operator panel w/o VLE, 306 Operator panel 15 with VLE, 257, 258 PCU 50, 374 PCU 70, 463, 468, 470 Configuration, integrated Operator panel 15 with VLE, 257 Configurations Distributed configuration with VLE, 480 Thin Client Unit, 508 Connection conditions AC power supply, 27 Ambient conditions, 25, 46 Backup battery, 45 DC power supply, 27 DIP switch, 47 EMC measures, 27, 32 Equipotential bonding cable, 32 Function-impairing dust, 46 Function-impairing gases, 46 Grounding concept, 30 Hard disk drives, 45 HHU, 47 HT6, 47 Membrane connectors, 43 MPI bus, 46 MPI connector, 47 network installation, 47 Protective separation, 27, 28 RI suppression, 26 Shielded signal cables, 31 User Interface, 27, 28 Connection for handheld units PP 012, 824, 826, 831, 858 Connection kit Mini handheld unit, 594, 601 Contact maker MPP 483, 822, 892 DC power supply Connection conditions, 27 Device fan Distributed configuration with VLE, 492 PCU 20, 372 PCU 50, 389, 393 PCU 70, 467, 473 DHCP server Thin Client Unit, 508 988 DHCP Server OP 012T, 129 DIP FIX switches 15 operator panel w/o VLE, 311 Operator panel 15 with VLE, 263, 280 DIP switch Connection conditions, 47 Distributed configuration with VLE, 482, 487, 492, 497, 499 Handheld unit B-MPI, 613 MCP 310, 662, 697, 703 MCP 483, 653, 662, 697 MCP 483C, 637, 641 MPI interface, 899 OP 032S, 729 PP 012, 824, 827, 872 DIP switch Operator panel 15 with VLE, 286 Direct control key Direct control key module, 338 PP 012, 824, 827, 840, 866 Direct control key module Coding switches, 335, 341, 345, 347 Direct control key, 338 DKM cable, 339, 345, 348 LEDs, 336 Profibus cable, 338 Profibus connector, 341 PROFIBUS DP, 335 Direct control keys MPP 483, 799 Display HT 8, 565 Display coding switch Distributed configuration with VLE, 484, 486, 492, 498 Display support OP 010, 79 OP 010S, 94 OP 012, 126 OP 015, 164 OP 015A, 178 OP 015AT, 224 TP 012, 150, 152 TP 015AT, 246 Display support OP 015, 163 Distributed configuration with VLE Central mounting, 481, 500 Configurations, 480 Device fan, 492 DIP switch, 482, 487, 492, 497, 499 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Index Display coding switch, 484, 486, 492, 498 Flat mounting, 480, 492 Mounting bracket, 477, 484, 492, 499, 502 Mounting positions, 499 Operator panel interlock, 488 SVGA resolution, 486 Temperature monitor, 488 TFT operator panel front, 482 Upright mounting, 480, 499 VGA resolution, 486 Videolink receiver, 477, 479, 481, 482 Videolink cable, 477, 479, 482, 485 Videolink transmitter, 477, 479, 481, 482, 492 XGA resolution, 486 Distribution list PP 012, 824, 825, 826 Distributor Handheld unit B-MPI, 609, 610 HT 6, 529, 530, 537, 538, 542, 553 Distributor box Handheld unit B-MPI, 603, 605, 608, 624, 628 DKM cable Direct control key module, 339, 345, 348 DP slave MCP MCP 310, 698, 701, 705 MCP 483, 663, 666, 670 DP slave MPP MPP 483, 806 Driver Floppy disk drive 3.5" (USB), 963, 964 EKS identification system MPP 483, 739 EMC measures Connection conditions, 27, 32 Handheld unit B-MPI, 627 HT 6, 537 Emergency stop button MPP 483, 796 Emergency Stop button Handheld unit B-MPI, 605, 608, 612, 627 HT 8, 566 Mini handheld unit, 592, 593 EMERGENCY STOP button HT 6, 533 MCP 483C, 635 PP 012, 889 EMERGENCY STOP button HT 6, 539 Emergency stop circuits Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 PP 012, 859 EMERGENCY STOP key 15 operator panel w/o VLE, 306, 312, 329 Handheld unit B-MPI, 628 HT 6, 522, 543 MCP 310, 688, 689, 713 MCP 483, 649, 651 MCP 483C, 633, 637, 646 OP 032S, 726, 736 Operator panel 15 with VLE, 259, 264, 271 PP 012, 826, 827, 831, 832, 839, 857, 865 Enabling button Handheld unit B-MPI, 606, 608, 624, 627, 628 HT 6, 522, 539, 543 Mini handheld unit, 592, 593 Equipotential bonding cable Connection conditions, 32 Equipotential bonding cable Handheld unit B-MPI, 629 Equipotential bonding conductor Handheld unit B-MPI, 624 MCP 483, 654 MCP 483C, 644 PP 012, 857 Ethernet PCU 50, 367, 371, 386 PCU 70, 464, 466 Ethernet cable OP 012T, 140 Thin Client Unit, 517 Ethernet switch OP 012T, 140 Thin Client Unit, 517 Ethernet, industrial OP 012T, 129 PCU 503, 406 Thin Client Unit, 507 Exchangeable key caps 15 operator panel w/o VLE, 308 expansion panel PP 012, 868 Extension keys MPP 483, 798 External floppy disk drive PCU 20, 372 PCU 70, 467, 474 Fastening angle PCU 50.3, 420 Feed override switch 989 Index OP 032S, 725 Film labels OP 010, 78 OP 012, 126 Flat mounting Distributed configuration with VLE, 480, 492 Operator panel 15 with VLE, 257 PCU 50, 374 PCU 50.3, 420 PCU 70, 468 Floppy disk drive 3.5" (USB) Driver, 963, 964 Mounting position, 962 Software, 963, 964 Front USB interface OP 010, 65, 66 OP 010C, 98 OP 010S, 81, 82 OP 012, 109, 111 OP 015, 153, 154 OP 015A, 167 TP 012, 141, 142 TP 015A, 189 Full CNC keyboard OP 032S Dimension drawing, 936 Dimensions, 937 Key covers, 938 Key groups, 935 Power consumption, 937 PS2 technology, 936 Function-impairing dust Connection conditions, 46 Function-impairing gases Connection conditions, 46 GD communication MPP 483, 803 GD configuring PP 012, 827 GD identifier PP 012, 875 GD parameters Handheld unit B-MPI, 615 MPP 483, 802 Grounding concept Connection conditions, 30 GSD file MCP 310, 698 MCP 483, 663 MPP 483, 805 990 Hand wheel 15 operator panel w/o VLE, 305, 306, 312, 329 MCP 310, 688, 713 MCP 483, 650, 656, 679 Operator panel 15 with VLE, 258, 265, 281, 299 Handheld Terminal HT 6, 519 Handheld unit B-MPI, 627 ASCII code, 620 Dimensions, 629 DIP switch, 613 Distributor, 609, 610 Distributor box, 603, 605, 608, 624, 628 EMC measures, 627 Emergency Stop button, 605, 608, 612, 627 EMERGENCY STOP key, 628 Enabling button, 606, 608, 624, 627, 628 Equipotential bonding cable, 629 Equipotential bonding conductor, 624 GD parameters, 615 Handwheel, 604, 606, 608, 624, 628, 630 Keylock switch, 604, 606, 610, 617, 630 Keys, 617 Labeling strips, 605 LEDs, 604, 606, 617 MPC bus, 625 MPI bus, 624, 625, 628 MPI cable, 605, 628 Override switch, 604, 606 Parameter assignment, 617 PLC, 606, 608, 613, 615, 617 Repeater, 608, 610 Slide-in labels, 630 Variants, 603 Handwheel Handheld unit B-MPI, 604, 606, 608, 624, 627, 628, 630 MCP 310, 699, 705 MCP 483, 653, 664 Mini handheld unit, 592, 594, 596 Hard disk drive PCU 50, 389 PCU 50.3, 431 PCU 503, 406 Hard disk drives Connection conditions, 45 Hardware code MCP 310, 662, 697 MCP 483, 662, 697 Heat dissipation Means of heat dissipation, 975 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Index HHU Connection conditions, 47 HT 6, 533 Agreement button, 520, 521 Backlight inverter, 549 Changeover time, 533 Dimensions, 545 Distributor, 529, 530, 537, 538, 542, 553 EMC measures, 537 EMERGENCY STOP button, 533, 539 EMERGENCY STOP key, 522, 543 Enabling button, 522, 539, 543 Handheld Terminal, 519 HT 6 cable, 529, 538 Key switch, 533 LC display, 519 MCP simulation, 534 MPI bus, 528, 537, 539, 543 MPI cable, 528, 539, 543 Parameterization, 534 PLC, 534 PLC, 533 Power consumption, 545 Repeater, 529 Reset pushbutton, 520, 527 Reset pushbutton switch, 523, 527 Rotary override switch, 519 Slide-in labels, 553 HT 8 Agreement button, 567 Dimensions, 561 Display, 565 Emergency Stop button, 566 Membrane keyboard, 566 Panel mounting, 581 Power consumption, 561 Thin Client, 557 USB interface, 567 HT6 Connection conditions, 47 Rotary override switch, 550 Slide-in labels, 555 Illuminated keys 15 operator panel w/o VLE, 316 MPP 483, 821, 891 Operator panel 15 with VLE, 271, 299 Illuminated pushbuttons 15 operator panel w/o VLE, 329 Individual parts Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 OP 010, 76 OP 010C, 107 OP 010S, 92 OP 012, 124 OP 015, 163 OP 015A, 178 OP 015AT, 224 TP 012, 150 TP 015A, 202 TP 015AT, 246 Jump key PP 012, 824, 826, 827, 831, 832, 858 KB 310C CNC keyboard, 927 Dimension drawing, 931 Dimensions, 932 Key codes, 928 Key groups, 927 Key layout, 927, 928 Mounting position, 932 Power consumption, 932 USB technology, 929 KB 483C CNC keyboard, 917 Dimension drawing, 923 Dimensions, 924 Key codes, 918 Key groups, 917 Key layout, 917, 918 Mounting position, 924 Power consumption, 924 USB technology, 921 KBPC CG US standard PC keyboard Dimensions, 942 Power consumption, 942 KBPC USB standard PC keyboard Dimensions, 944, 946 Key layout, 943 Power consumption, 944, 946 Key codes KB 310C, 928 KB 483C, 918 Key covers 15 operator panel w/o VLE, 329 Full CNC keyboard OP 032S, 938 991 Index MCP 483C, 633, 647 OP 010C, 108 OP 032S, 737 Key groups Full CNC keyboard OP 032S, 935 KB 310C, 927 KB 483C, 917 Key layout KB 310C, 927, 928 KB 483C, 917, 918 KBPC USB standard PC keyboard with integrated hub, 943 PC-standard keyboard MF-II, 939 Key switch HT 6, 533 MCP 310, 687, 712 MCP 483, 649, 651, 677 MCP 483C, 633, 635, 646 OP 032S, 726, 732, 736 PP 012, 832, 855, 857 Key symbols OP 010, 67 OP 010C, 99 OP 010S, 83, 155 OP 012, 112, 132 OP 012T, 112, 132 OP 015, 83, 155 OP 015A, 112, 132 OP 08T, 52 TP 015A, 112, 132 Keyboard controller OP 010, 78 OP 012, 126 OP 015, 163, 164 OP 015A, 178 OP 015AT, 224 Operator panel 15 with VLE, 280 TP 012, 150, 151 TP 015A, 202, 204 TP 015AT, 246, 248 Keyboard controller OP 010S, 93 Keyboard tray Dimensions, 948 Keylock switch Handheld unit B-MPI, 604, 606, 610, 617, 630 MCP 310, 689 Keys 15 operator panel w/o VLE, 305, 312, 316, 321 Handheld unit B-MPI, 617 MCP 310, 708 MCP 483, 673 992 Operator panel 15 with VLE, 258, 265, 270, 287 Keyswitch PP 012, 889 Labeling strips Handheld unit B-MPI, 605 Lamps PP 012, 824, 826, 827, 840, 880 LC display HT 6, 519 LCD unit OP 010, 78 OP 012, 126 OP 015, 163 OP 015A, 178 OP 015AT, 224 TP 015A, 202 TP 015AT, 246 LEDs 15 operator panel w/o VLE, 310, 325 Direct control key module, 336 Handheld unit B-MPI, 604, 606, 617 MCP 310, 708 MCP 483, 653, 673 MCP 483C, 637 MPI interface, 898 MPP 483, 803 OP 032S, 731 Operator panel 15 with VLE, 262, 292 PCU 50.3, 440 PP 012, 825 MCP 310 COM board, 690, 691, 698 Dimension drawing, 694 Dimensions, 711 DIP switch, 662, 697, 703 DP slave MCP, 698, 701, 705 EMERGENCY STOP key, 688, 689, 713 GSD file, 698 Hand wheel, 688, 713 Handwheel, 699, 705 Hardware code, 662, 697 Key switch, 687, 712 Keylock switch, 689 Keys, 708 LEDs, 708 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Index Mounting position, 695 MPI parameters, 661, 696 PLC basic program, 698, 705 Power consumption, 711 PROFIBUS DP, 661, 696, 707 PROFIBUS parameters, 702 Rotary switch, 687, 700, 712 Slide-in labels, 687, 713, 715 Slots, 688, 689 VDI interface, 705 MCP 483 COM board, 652, 654, 663 Dimension drawing, 658 Dimensions, 676 DIP switch, 653, 662, 697 DP slave MCP, 663, 666, 670 EMERGENCY STOP key, 649, 651 Equipotential bonding conductor, 654 GSD file, 663 Hand wheel, 650, 656, 679 Handwheel, 653, 664 Hardware code, 662, 697 Key switch, 649, 651, 677 Key symbols, 681 Keys, 673 LEDs, 653, 673 Mounting position, 660 MPI parameters, 661, 696 PLC basic program, 663, 670 Power consumption, 676 PROFIBUS DP, 661, 672, 696 PROFIBUS parameters, 667 PROFIBUS-DP, 649 Rotary switch, 665, 677, 678 Slide-in labels, 649, 679, 681 Slots, 651 VDI interface, 670 MCP 483C Bus address, 643 Dimension drawing, 640 Dimensions, 644 DIP switch, 641 DIP switch, 637 EMERGENCY STOP button, 635 EMERGENCY STOP key, 633, 637, 646 Equipotential bonding conductor, 644 Key covers, 633, 647 Key switch, 633, 635, 646 LEDs, 637 Mounting position, 641 MPI bus, 643 MPI connector, 644 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 PLC, 642 Power consumption, 644 Rotary switch, 633, 646 Turning, 633 MCP simulation HT 6, 534 Membrane connector OP 010S, 94 OP 012, 126 OP 015, 165 TP 012, 152 Membrane connectors Connection conditions, 43 Membrane keyboard HT 8, 566 Memory expansion PCU 50, 386, 397, 398 PCU 50.3, 454, 455 PCU 70, 474, 475 Milling 15 operator panel w/o VLE, 306, 308 Operator panel 15 with VLE, 271, 281, 292 Mini handheld unit Axis selection switch, 593 Connection kit, 594, 601 Dimensions, 599 Emergency Stop button, 592, 593 Enabling button, 592, 593 Function keys, 593 Handwheel, 592, 594, 596 Rapid traverse key, 592, 594 Traversing keys, 593, 594 Mounting bracket Distributed configuration with VLE, 477, 484, 492, 499, 502 OP 010S, 87 OP 012, 117 OP 015A, 179 Operator panel 15 with VLE, 257, 267, 292 PCU 50, 374, 397 PCU 70, 468, 474 Thin Client Unit, 511, 514, 517 TP 015A, 203 MPC bus Handheld unit B-MPI, 625 MPI PCU 50, 367 MPI bus Connection conditions, 46 Handheld unit B-MPI, 624, 625, 628 HT 6, 528, 537, 539, 543 MCP 483C, 643 993 Index PP 012, 846 MPI cable 15 operator panel w/o VLE, 314 Handheld unit B-MPI, 605, 628 HT 6, 528, 539, 543 Operator panel 15 with VLE, 267 MPI connector Connection conditions, 47 MCP 483C, 644 MPI interface, 894 PP 012, 857 MPI interface C-MOS level, 893, 895 Dimensions, 901 DIP switch, 899 LEDs, 898 Mounting position, 899 MPI connector, 894 PLC, 898, 900 PLC basic program, 900 Power consumption, 901 MPI parameters MCP 310, 661, 696 MCP 483, 661, 696 MPP 483 Actuation elements, 754 Anode connection for LEDs, 783 Coding switch S3, 789, 801 COM board, 755, 789 Contact maker, 822, 892 Customer key board, 755 Dimensions, 810 Direct control keys, 799 DP slave MPP, 806 EKS identification system, 739 Emergency stop button, 796 Extension keys, 798 GD communication, 803 GD parameters, 802 GSD file, 805 Illuminated keys, 821, 891 Installation position, 782 Lamps, 754 LEDs, 803 Power consumption, 810 PROFIBUS DP, 800 PROFIBUS parameters, 807 Selector switch, 754 Signaling lamps, 796, 821, 891 Slide-in labels, 739, 821, 891 Software Version, 801 Special versions, 740 994 Standard version, 739 Standard version, extended, 739 Supplementary elements, 741 System configuration, 741 MPP 483 COM board, 803 MPP 483H HGA board, 755 MPP 483HTC HGA board, 756 NC unit Operator panel 15 with VLE, 270 network installation Connection conditions, 47 Numerical control Operator panel 15 with VLE, 258, 281 On / Off switch PCU 50.3, 408 OP 010 Dimension drawing, 72 Dimensions, 74 Front USB interface, 65, 66 Individual parts, 76 Installation, 72 Key pads, 67 Key symbols, 67 Mounting hole, 71 Power consumption, 74 Slide-in labels, 77 TFT flat screen, 65 Tightening torques, 74 VGA resolution, 65 OP 010C Dimension drawing, 103 Dimensions, 105 Front USB interface, 98 Individual parts, 107 Key covers, 108 Key pads, 99 Key symbols, 99 Mounting hole, 103 Power consumption, 105 TFT flat screen, 97 Tightening torques, 105 VGA resolution, 97 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Index OP 010S Dimension drawing, 86 Dimensions, 90 Front USB interface, 81, 82 Individual parts, 92 Key symbols, 83, 155 Mounting bracket, 87 Mounting hole, 86 Power consumption, 90 TFT flat screen, 81 Tightening torques, 90 VGA resolution, 81 OP 012 Dimension drawing, 116 Dimensions, 122 Front USB interface, 109, 111 Individual parts, 124 Key pads, 112, 132 Key symbols, 112, 132 Mounting bracket, 117 Mounting hole, 116 Power consumption, 122 SVGA resolution, 109 TFT flat screen, 109 Tightening torques, 123 OP 012T DHCP Server, 129 Dimension sheet, 135 Dimensions, 139 Ethernet cable, 140 Ethernet switch, 140 Ethernet, industrial, 129 Key pads, 112, 132 Key symbols, 112, 132 Mounting hole, 135 Power consumption, 139 PROFIBUS-DP, 129 Signal transmission, 129 SVGA resolution, 129 TFT flat screen, 129 Thin Client, 129 Tightening torques, 139 OP 015 Dimension drawing, 158 Dimensions, 161 Front USB interface, 153, 154 Individual parts, 163 Key symbols, 83, 155 Mounting hole, 158 Power consumption, 161 TFT flat screen, 153 Tightening torques, 161 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 OP 015A Dimension drawing, 172 Dimensions, 177 Front USB interface, 167 Individual parts, 178 Key pads, 112, 132 Key symbols, 112, 132 Mounting bracket, 179 Mounting hole, 172 Power consumption, 177 TFT flat screen, 167 Tightening torques, 177 OP 015AT Dimension drawing, 222 Dimensions, 223 Individual parts, 224 Power consumption, 223 TFT flat screen, 213 Tightening torques, 223 OP 032S Dimension drawing, 734 Dimensions, 735 DIP switch, 729 EMERGENCY STOP key, 726, 736 Feed override switch, 725 Key covers, 737 Key switch, 726, 732, 736 LEDs, 731 Opening, 726 Override switch, 726, 727, 737 PLC, 730 Power consumption, 735 OP 08T Dimensions, 57 Power consumption, 57 Tightening torques, 57 Opening OP 032S, 726 Operating system PCU 503, 406 Operator panel 15 with V LE Hand wheel, 299 Operator panel 15 with VLE Axis override switch, 281 CNC keyboard, 257, 258 Coding switches, 278 Configuration, distributed, 257, 258 Configuration, integrated, 257 DIP FIX switches, 280 DIP switch, 286 DIP switches, 263 EMERGENCY STOP key, 259 995 Index EMERGENCY STOP key, 264 EMERGENCY STOP key, 271 Flat mounting, 257 Hand wheel, 258, 265, 281 Illuminated keys, 271 Illuminated pushbuttons, 299 Keyboard controller, 280 Keys, 258 Keys, 265 Keys, 270 Keys, 287 LEDs, 262, 292 Milling, 271, 281, 292 Mounting bracket, 257 Mounting bracket, 267 Mounting bracket, 292 MPI cable, 267 NC unit, 270 Numerical control, 258 Numerical control, 281 Override switch, 258 Override switch, 265 Qwerty keyboard, 257, 269, 270, 291 Rotary switch, 281, 286, 299 Threaded bolt, 262, 270, 271, 292 Turning, 271, 281, 292 Upright mounting, 257 Video link receiver, 257, 258 Video link receiver, 269 Video link receiver, 290 Video link cable, 257 Video link cable, 261 Video link cable, 290 Videolink cable, 267 Videolink transmitter, 258 Videolink transmitter, 269 Videolink transmitter, 290 Videolink transmitter, 292 XGA resolution, 270 Operator panel interlock Distributed configuration with VLE, 488 Override switch 15 operator panel w/o VLE, 306, 312 Handheld unit B-MPI, 606 OP 032S, 726, 727, 737 Operator panel 15 with VLE, 258, 265 Override switch Handheld unit B-MPI, 604 Panel mounting 996 HT 8, 581 Parameter assignment Handheld unit B-MPI, 617 Parameterization HT 6, 534 PC Cards PCU 70, 471 PCI card PCU 50.3, 454 PCU 503, 405 PCI module PCU 50.3, 459 PCMCIA cards PCU 50, 386 PC-standard keyboard MF-II Dimensions, 940 Hand rest, 939 Key layout, 939 Power consumption, 940 PS2 technology, 939 USB technology, 939 PCU 20 Device fan, 372 Dimensions, 364 External floppy disk drive, 372 Mounting positions, 359 Power consumption, 364 Reset button, 355, 372 Screen resolution, 351 Variants, 351 PCU 50 Backup battery, 389, 394 Basic software, 383 BIOS parameters, 379 BIOS setup, 382 Boot manager, 379 Cardbus cards, 386 Central mounting, 374 Configuration, distributed, 374 Device, 367 Device fan, 389, 393 Dimensions, 387 Ethernet, 367, 371, 386 Flat mounting, 374 Hard disk drive, 389 Memory expansion, 386, 397, 398 Mounting bracket, 374, 397 Mounting positions, 375 MPI, 367 PCMCIA cards, 386 Power consumption, 387 PROFIBUS-DP, 367 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Index Screen resolution, 368 Setup menu, 382 Standard mounting, 374 Touch software, 383 Upright mounting, 374 PCU 50.3 7-segment displays, 439 Backup battery, 449 BIOS setup, 436, 439 Boot list, 436 Central mounting, 420 Compact Flash card, 454, 460 Device fan, 448 Dimensions, 441 Fastening angle, 420 Flat mounting, 420 Hard disk drive, 431, 444 LEDs, 440 Memory expansion, 454, 455 Mounting bracket, 454 Mounting positions, 424 On / Off switch, 408 PCI card, 454 PCI module, 459 Power consumption, 441 Power supply, 446 Power supply module fan, 447 Standard mounting, 420 Touch software, 433 Upright mounting, 420 USB FlashDrive, 436 PCU 503 Processor, 405 PCU 503 PCI card, 405 PCU 503 Working memory, 406 PCU 503 Hard disk drive, 406 PCU 503 Operating system, 406 PCU 503 Screen resolution, 406 PCU 503 Ethernet, industrial, 406 PCU 70 Backup battery, 473 Boot manager, 471 Central mounting, 468 Configuration, distributed, 463, 468, 470 Device fan, 467, 473 Dimensions, 472 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Ethernet, 464, 466 External floppy disk drive, 467, 474 Flat mounting, 468 Memory expansion, 474, 475 Mounting bracket, 468, 474 Mounting positions, 469 PC Cards, 471 Power consumption, 472 Reset pushbutton, 467 Videolink transmitter, 468, 470 PG connection PP 012, 824, 831 PLC Handheld unit B-MPI, 606, 608, 613, 615, 617 HT 6, 533, 534 MPI interface, 898, 900 OP 032S, 730 PP 012, 858, 859, 874 PLC MCP 483C, 642 PLC basic program MPI interface, 900 PP 012 Actuation elements, 826 Agreement button, 858, 859, 862 Block diagram, 828 COM connection, 824, 831 Connection for handheld units, 824, 826, 831, 858 Dimension drawing, 855 Dimensions, 882 DIP switch, 824, 827, 872 Direct control key, 824, 827, 840, 866 Distribution list, 824, 825, 826 EMERGENCY STOP button, 889 Emergency stop circuits, 859 EMERGENCY STOP key, 826, 827, 831, 832, 839, 857, 865 Equipotential bonding conductor, 857 expansion panel, 868 GD configuring, 827 GD identification, 874, 875 Jump key, 824, 826, 827, 831, 832, 858 Key switch, 832, 855, 857 Keyswitch, 889 Lamps, 824, 826, 827, 840, 880 LEDs, 825 MPI bus, 846 MPI connector, 857 PG connection, 824, 831 PLC, 858, 859, 874 Power consumption, 882 Selector switch, 827, 831, 832, 840, 854, 857, 889 997 Index Signaling lamps, 827, 864, 888 Slide-in labels, 833, 878 Terminator, 858, 859 two-channel enabling function, 859, 860 PPROFIBUS-DP Direct control key module, 335 Processor PCU 503, 405 Profibus cable Direct control key module, 338 Profibus connector Direct control key module, 341 PROFIBUS DP MCP 310, 661, 696, 707 MCP 483, 661, 672, 696 MPP 483, 800 PROFIBUS parameters MCP 310, 702 MCP 483, 667 MPP 483, 807 PROFIBUS-DP MCP 483, 649 OP 012T, 129 PCU 50, 367 Programming switch 15 operator panel w/o VLE, 325 Protective separation Connection conditions, 27, 28 PS2 technology Full CNC keyboard OP 032S, 936 PC-standard keyboard MF-II, 939 Qwerty keyboard Operator panel 15 with VLE, 269, 270, 291 QWERTY keyboard Operator panel 15 with VLE, 257 Repeater Handheld unit B-MPI, 608, 610 HT 6, 529 Reset button PCU 20, 372 Reset pushbutton HT 6, 520, 527 Reset pushbutton switch HT 6, 523, 527 RI suppression 998 Connection conditions, 26 Rotary override switch HT 6, 519 HT6, 550 Rotary switch 15 operator panel w/o VLE, 329 MCP 310, 687, 700, 712 MCP 483, 665, 677, 678 MCP 483C, 633, 646 Operator panel 15 with VLE, 281, 286, 299 Screen calibration TP 012, 147 TP 015A, 147, 199 TP 015AT, 243 Screen resolution PCU 20, 351 PCU 50, 368 PCU 503, 406 Selector switch PP 012, 827, 831, 832, 840, 854, 857, 889 Setup menu PCU 50, 382 Shielded signal cables Connection conditions, 31 short-circuit connector HT 6, 533 Signal transmission OP 012T, 129 Signaling lamps MPP 483, 821, 891 PP 012, 827, 864, 888 Slide-in labels Handheld unit B-MPI, 630 HT 6, 553 HT6, 555 MCP 310, 687, 713, 715 MCP 483, 649, 679, 681 MPP 483, 739, 821, 891 OP 010, 77 OP 012, 125 OP 015A, 179 OP 015AT, 225 PP 012, 833, 878 TP 015A, 203 TP 015AT, 247 Slots MCP 310, 688, 689 MCP 483, 651 Software Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 Index Floppy disk drive 3.5" (USB), 963, 964 Standard mounting PCU 50, 374 PCU 50.3, 420 SVGA resolution Distributed configuration with VLE, 486 OP 012, 109 OP 012T, 129 Temperature monitor Distributed configuration with VLE, 488 Terminator PP 012, 858, 859 TFT flat screen OP 010, 65 OP 010C, 97 OP 010S, 81 OP 012, 109 OP 012T, 129 OP 015, 153 OP 015A, 167 OP 015AT, 213 TP 015AT, 233 TFT operator panel front Distributed configuration with VLE, 482 Thin Client HT 8, 557 OP 012T, 129 Thin Client Unit Mounting bracket, 514 Thin Client Unit Configurations, 508 DHCP Server, 508 Ethernet, industrial, 507 Mounting bracket, 511 Thin Client Unit Power consumption, 516 Thin Client Unit Dimensions, 516 Thin Client Unit Mounting bracket, 517 Thin Client Unit Ethernet cable, 517 Thin Client Unit Ethernet switch, 517 Threaded bolt 15 operator panel w/o VLE, 309, 316, 317, 322 Operator panel 15 with VLE, 262, 270, 271, 292 Touch controller TP 012, 151 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2 TP 015A, 204 TP 015AT, 248 Touch Screen HT 8, 565 TP 012, 141, 150 TP 015A, 189 Touch software PCU 50, 383 PCU 50.3, 433 TP 012 Dimension drawing, 145 Dimensions, 148 Front USB interface, 141, 142 Individual parts, 150 Mounting hole, 145 Power consumption, 148 Screen calibration, 147 Tightening torques, 148 Touch Screen, 141 TP 015A Dimension drawing, 195 Dimensions, 200 Front USB interface, 189 Individual parts, 202 Key pads, 112, 132 Key symbols, 112, 132 Mounting hole, 195 Power consumption, 200 Tightening torques, 200 Touch Screen, 189 XGA resolution, 189 TP 015AT Dimension drawing, 243 Dimensions, 244 Individual parts, 246 Power consumption, 244 TFT flat screen, 233 Tightening torques, 244 Trackball rest PC-standard keyboard MF-II, 939 Turning 15 operator panel w/o VLE, 305, 306, 310 MCP 483C, 633 Operator panel 15 with VLE, 271, 281, 292 two-channel enabling function PP 012, 859, 860 Upright mounting Distributed configuration with VLE, 480, 499 Operator panel 15 with VLE, 257 999 Index PCU 50, 374 PCU 50.3, 420 USB FlashDrive PCU 50.3, 436 USB interface HT 8, 567 USB technology KB 310C, 929 KB 483C, 921 PC-standard keyboard MF-II, 939 User Interface Connection conditions, 27, 28 PCU 503, 406 XGA resolution Distributed configuration with VLE, 486 Operator panel 15 with VLE, 270 TP 015A, 189 VDI interface MCP 310, 705 MCP 483, 670 VGA resolution Distributed configuration with VLE, 486 OP 010, 65 OP 010C, 97 OP 010S, 81 Video link receiver Operator panel 15 with VLE, 269, 290 Video link cable Operator panel 15 with VLE, 257, 261, 267, 290 Video link receiver Operator panel 15 with VLE, 258 Videolink receiver 15 operator panel w/o VLE, 305 15 operator panel w/o VLE, 319 Distributed configuration with VLE, 477, 479, 481, 482 Videolink cable 15 operator panel w/o VLE, 306, 314 Distributed configuration with VLE, 477, 479, 482, 485 Videolink receiver 15 operator panel w/o VLE, 306 Operator panel 15 with VLE, 257 Videolink transmitter 15 operator panel w/o VLE, 306 Distributed configuration with VLE, 477, 479, 481, 482, 492 Operator panel 15 with VLE, 258, 269, 290, 292 PCU 70, 468, 470 Working memory 1000 Operator Components Manual, 07/2007, 6FC5297-7AA50-0BP2